budget – Radio Free https://www.radiofree.org Independent Media for People, Not Profits. Fri, 01 Aug 2025 09:00:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://www.radiofree.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/cropped-Radio-Free-Social-Icon-2-32x32.png budget – Radio Free https://www.radiofree.org 32 32 141331581 Alaska Ignored Warning Signs of a Budget Crisis. Now It Doesn’t Have Funding to Fix Crumbling Schools. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/alaska-ignored-warning-signs-of-a-budget-crisis-now-it-doesnt-have-funding-to-fix-crumbling-schools/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/alaska-ignored-warning-signs-of-a-budget-crisis-now-it-doesnt-have-funding-to-fix-crumbling-schools/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/alaska-rural-schools-funding-legislation by Emily Schwing, KYUK

This article was produced for ProPublica’s Local Reporting Network in partnership with KYUK Public Media and NPR’s Station Investigations Team. Sign up for Dispatches to get our stories in your inbox every week.

When Alaska House Speaker Bryce Edgmon toured the public school in Sleetmute last fall, he called the building “the poster child” for what’s wrong with the way the state pays to build and maintain schools. The tiny community 240 miles west of Anchorage had begged Alaska’s education department for nearly two decades for money to repair a leaky roof that over time had left part of the school on the verge of collapse.

Seated at a cafeteria table after the tour, Edgmon, a veteran independent lawmaker, told a Yup’ik elder he planned to “start raising a little bit of Cain” when he returned to the Capitol in Juneau for the 2025 legislative session.

Other lawmakers said similar things after an investigation by KYUK Public Media, ProPublica and NPR earlier this year found that the state has largely ignored hundreds of requests from rural school districts to fix deteriorating buildings, including the Sleetmute school. Because of the funding failures, students and teachers in some of Alaska’s most remote villages face serious health and safety risks, the news organizations found.

Sen. Elvi Gray-Jackson, an Anchorage Democrat, called the investigation’s findings “heartbreaking” and said in an email during the legislative session earlier this year that “the current state of these schools is unacceptable.” Sen. Scott Kawasaki, a Fairbanks Democrat, wrote to say that the “responsibility lies squarely on the legislature” and acknowledged “we do not do enough.” Senate Majority Leader Cathy Giessel, a Republican from Fairbanks, wrote, “We are working to right the ship!”

Yet during a legislative session where money for education was front and center, lawmakers were only able to pass $40 million in school construction and maintenance funding, about 5% of the nearly $800 million that districts say they need to keep their buildings safe and operating.

Alaska House Speaker Bryce Edgmon visits Sleetmute students last fall. (Emily Schwing/KYUK)

In June, Alaska Gov. Mike Dunleavy vetoed more than two-thirds of that, nearly $28 million.

“Basically, we don’t have enough money to pay for all of our obligations,” Dunleavy explained in a video posted on YouTube.

In the video, seated at an empty table in a darkened room and flanked by U.S. and Alaska flags, Dunleavy, a Republican, painted a grim picture of the state’s future. “The price of oil has gone down; therefore our revenue is going down,” he said.

The crisis Dunleavy described isn’t just a short-term problem. State officials have known for decades that relying on oil to fund the budget is risky as prices and production have declined. But year after year, they have failed to agree on a solution to finance school repairs and renovations. Alaska is one of only two states without an income tax or statewide sales tax.

Average annual spending on education facilities declined by nearly 60% after 2014, the year oil prices plummeted, according to a 2021 report by the University of Alaska Anchorage. Overall spending on rural facilities is now less than half of what the National Council on School Facilities recommends.

Sen. Löki Tobin, a Democrat from Anchorage who chairs the Senate Education Committee, said it’s hard to get “momentum” around various ideas to fund education, “let alone just getting folks to realize that we have been by attrition defunding our schools.”

Education Front and Center

Alaska’s Legislature seemed primed this year to address education funding. Several new candidates from both parties campaigned on education and won seats in November’s statewide election.

“We flipped an entire statehouse,” said Tobin, who was elected to the Legislature in 2022, “based on the question of adequate school funding.”

Lawmakers filed a bill to fund education before the session even began. And in the first months of the year, dozens of superintendents, students and school board members traveled to Juneau to testify before lawmakers and urge them to increase funding for curriculum, teacher salaries and other costs.

During one Senate Finance Committee hearing, panel co-chair Lyman Hoffman, who has represented rural Alaskan school districts for 38 years, raised the specter of a civil rights lawsuit similar to those the state has faced in the past over education in primarily Indigenous communities.

The prospect, he said, could be “more costly to the state than if we came forward and tried to do something about the condition of these schools.”

Sleetmute’s roof has been leaking for so long that the wall has started to buckle under the weight of snow and ice, first image, and a bathroom ceiling is covered in mold. (Emily Schwing/KYUK)

In April, Alaska’s House and Senate passed a bipartisan bill that would have offered the largest increase in nearly a decade in what the state spends on each student annually. It did not include capital funds for school construction or maintenance.

Days later, Dunleavy, a former superintendent and school board member, vetoed it. He said it didn’t include enough support for homeschooling and charter schools — policy changes that he’s long pushed for.

Before the legislative session adjourned in May, lawmakers passed a compromise bill that included less spending and eased regulations for charter schools. Dunleavy again vetoed it, but lawmakers overrode the veto. The next month, Dunleavy used his line-item veto power to slash 3% from the education budget, the largest cut to any department in the state.

This year’s total state budget came to $14.7 billion, about $1 billion less than the previous year. Some lawmakers have described it as “bare bones” and “flat funded.”

Among Dunleavy’s cuts was more than $25 million that was supposed to pay for school construction and maintenance. School districts have to apply to the state for those funds each year, and their proposed projects are then ranked. The reduction doesn’t leave enough money this year to pay for even the top three projects among the 84 maintenance proposals school districts submitted. Seventeen major construction projects, including the replacement of five rural schools, received no funding at all.

One of those projects is a new school in Stebbins, a Yup’ik village on the coast of the Norton Sound and the Bering Sea where the building burned down last year. More than 200 K-12 students now attend classes in about a dozen small temporary buildings. Mayor Sharon Snowball said several students left the community after the fire to attend boarding school or live with family in other communities.

First image: The remains of the Tukurngailnguq School in Stebbins, Alaska, last June after a fire. Second image: Workers apply the finishing touches to a temporary yurt in Stebbins in September. (Ben Townsend/KNOM) At a potlatch in Stebbins last fall, Yup'ik residents practiced their traditional dance. (Ben Townsend/KNOM)

Two hundred miles southwest in Mertarvik, a village that recently relocated due to climate change, the school district did not receive the funds it applied for to build a wastewater system for a school that’s set to open in 2026. The district said it couldn’t answer questions about how it will move forward with the project.

Dunleavy has called lawmakers back to Juneau on Aug. 2 for a special session to discuss reforming the state’s education system. It’s unclear whether maintenance and construction funds will be part of those discussions.

Scrapping for Solutions

Alaska’s budget crisis has been detrimental to the state’s rural school districts, which rely almost entirely on the annual budget for funding to fix and maintain buildings because they serve unincorporated communities that don’t have the power to levy taxes.

The budget depends heavily on profits from the production and sale of crude oil, which go into the state’s Permanent Fund, a state-owned investment fund. Returns on those investments pay for more than half of Alaska’s operational needs each year.

Prices of crude oil from Alaska’s North Slope dropped by more than a third from 2014 to this spring, according to the Alaska Department of Revenue. The result is a budget deficit that some economists say will exceed $1 billion by next year.

State lawmakers have failed to address the warning signs of a budget crisis for decades. By the early 2000s, Alaska’s daily oil production had fallen by half from its peak in the 1980s. Last year, it was a quarter of that.

But for a time, high oil prices allowed Alaska to make it work. When Edgmon came into office in 2007, he said every day was a windfall.

“We put a ton of money into schools both operationally and capital budgetwise,” he said.

Legislators have weighed numerous options to fund the budget. They’ve considered whether to trim the annual dividend checks that Alaska pays to its year-round residents from the return on Permanent Fund investments. Last year, Alaskans received just over $1,700. Cutting payments is wildly unpopular, in part because research has shown the money reduces the number of Alaskans in poverty by up to 40%.

Lawmakers have dipped into the state’s dwindling savings accounts to cover the deficit, said Matt Berman, a University of Alaska Anchorage economics professor who co-authored a 2016 report that examined various deficit-reduction methods.

“The fact that the study was done 10 years ago and that absolutely no action has taken place since then speaks for itself,” Berman wrote in an email.

Mertarvik’s school district did not receive the funds it needs to build a wastewater system for a school that’s set to open in 2026. (Emily Schwing/KYUK)

Some lawmakers have long called for Alaska to adopt a statewide income or sales tax, but neither idea has gained much traction. A bipartisan working group studied the possibility of enacting taxes in 2021. After a year on the working group, state Rep. Kevin McCabe, a Republican from north of Anchorage, said he wasn’t convinced taxes were the answer.

“We experimented with sales tax, maybe a seasonal sales tax, we tried an income tax, progressive income tax,” he said. “It’s just not gonna bring in the money that we need for all of our infrastructure deficit.”

Alaska used to have a special tax on every employed resident to help pay for education. But it was repealed in 1980 after the construction of the Trans-Alaska Pipeline, which allowed the state to sell more oil from North Slope.

“I’ll never forget my first payroll check,” said Click Bishop, a former six-term Republican senator from Fairbanks. He said his boss went through the statement with him. “He gets down here on this line, and it says ‘education head tax $5,’ and he said, ‘Kid, that $5 is going to the state to help you get your education,’” he recalled.

Bishop, who is exploring a run for governor, has proposed reinstating an annual education tax. But his proposal would only raise about $14 million each year, hardly enough to scratch the surface on the state’s school maintenance needs.

Instead of taxes, McCabe and other lawmakers say a more long-term solution for both schools and Alaska’s overall budget would be to build a natural gas pipeline that would raise money from gas sales.

Estimates from the U.S. Geological Survey show the state is home to more than a hundred trillion cubic feet of untapped natural gas, but there’s no way to bring it to market.

Described by the industry as “big, expensive and complex,” the pipeline project has been in discussions for at least 50 years. In 2020, the Alaska Gasline Development Corp., an independent state corporation tasked with developing the infrastructure, estimated construction could cost close to $40 billion. Though an energy developer recently announced interest from dozens of international customers, it’s unclear who would foot that bill.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Emily Schwing, KYUK.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/alaska-ignored-warning-signs-of-a-budget-crisis-now-it-doesnt-have-funding-to-fix-crumbling-schools/feed/ 0 547246
Media Sidelined Deadly Consequences of Trump’s Reconciliation Bill https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/media-sidelined-deadly-consequences-of-trumps-reconciliation-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/media-sidelined-deadly-consequences-of-trumps-reconciliation-bill/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 19:56:23 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046763  

President Donald Trump on July 4 signed into law an omnibus reconciliation bill, branded in MAGA propaganda (and much of corporate media) as the “Big Beautiful Bill.” The legislation scraped up just enough votes to narrowly pass in both chambers of the Republican-controlled Congress, with 51 to 50 votes in the Senate and 218 to 214 in the House.

The focal point of the bill is a $4.5 trillion tax cut, partly paid for by unprecedented slashes in funding for healthcare and food assistance. The wealthiest 10% will gain $12,000 a year from the legislation, while it will cost the lowest-earning 10% of families $1,600 annually. Media addressed the fiscal aspects of the bill, though more often through a fixation on the federal debt rather than looking at the effect of the budget on inequality (FAIR.org, 7/17/25).

But it’s not just a question of money. Many of the bill’s key provisions—including Medicaid, SNAP and clean energy cuts, as well as handouts to the fossil fuel, military and detention industries—will be literally deadly for people in the US and abroad, in both the near and long term.

FAIR’s Belén Fernandez (7/9/25) closely examined the dramatic lack of coverage of the vast expansion of the government’s anti-immigrant capacities. But the deadly consequences of the other aspects of the bill were also remarkably underexplained to the public.

To see how major media explained the contents and consequences of the reconciliation bill to the public before its enactment, FAIR surveyed New York Times, Washington Post, CNN and NPR news coverage from the Senate’s passage of the final version of the bill on July 1 through July 4, the day Trump signed the bill into law. This time frame, when the actual contents of the bill were known and the House was deliberating on giving it an up or down vote, was arguably the moment when media attention was most critical to the democratic process.

‘We all are going to die’

USA Today: How Trump's tax bill could cut Medicaid for millions of Americans

This USA Today article (7/1/25) was one of the more informative in detailing the impact of the bill, but it still fell short of detailing the projected cost in human lives.

While corporate media reported that the finalized bill with the Senate’s revisions would significantly cut healthcare funding to subsidize the tax breaks, they rarely explained the social consequences of such cuts. The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) estimates that the bill will reduce $1.04 trillion in funding for Medicaid, the Affordable Care Act and the Children’s Health Insurance Program over the next decade. This will strip health insurance from 11.8 million people.

The New York Times (7/1/25), acknowledging these statistics, quoted Democrats who opposed the bill due to “the harmful impact it will have on Medicaid,” and who noted that people will soon “see the damage that is done as hospitals close, as people are laid off, as costs go up, as the debt increases.”

But the outlets in our sample, at this crucial time of heightened attention, failed to mention the most significant consequence of cutting Medicaid: death.

These outlets (New York Times, 5/30/25; NPR, 5/31/25; CNN, 5/31/25;  Washington Post, 6/1/25) had all earlier acknowledged what the Times called Sen. Joni Ernst’s (R-IA) “morbid” response to her constituents’ concerns about deaths from Medicaid cuts: “Well, we all are going to die.”

But as the House deliberated on whether these cuts would become law, these outlets failed to reference credible research that projected that the large-scale loss of health insurance envisioned by the bill would have an annual death toll in the tens of thousands. One USA Today piece (7/1/25) did headline that “Trump’s Tax Bill Could Cut Medicaid for Millions of Americans,” but didn’t spell out the potential cost in human lives.

Before the Senate’s revisions, researchers from Yale’s School of Public Health and UPenn’s Leonard Davis Institute of Health Economics (Penn LDI, 6/3/25) projected that such massive cuts to healthcare would result in 51,000 deaths annually. That number is expected to be even higher now, as the calculation was based on an earlier CBO estimate of 7.7 million people losing coverage over the next decade (CBO, 5/11/25).

‘Harms to healthcare’—not to people

CNN: Here’s who stands to gain from the ‘big, beautiful bill.’ And who may struggle

CNN (7/4/25) euphemized life-threatening withdrawal of care as “harm to the healthcare system.”

CNN (7/4/25), in a piece on “Who Stands to Gain From the ‘Big, Beautiful Bill.’ And Who May Struggle,” similarly failed to spell out the dire consequences of the Medicaid cuts. It wrote that low-income Americans would be “worse off” thanks to those cuts, yet it extensively described only the fiscal impacts, as opposed to the costs in life and health, on lower- and middle-class families.

Hospitals would also be “worse off” due to the bill, as it would “leave them with more uncompensated care costs for treating uninsured patients.” This rhetorically rendered the patient, made uninsured by legislation, a burden.

The article quoted American Hospital Association CEO Rick Pollack, who said that

the real-life consequences…will result in irreparable harm to our healthcare system, reducing access to care for all Americans and severely undermining the ability of hospitals and health systems to care for our most vulnerable patients.

But CNN refused to spell out to readers what that “harm to the healthcare system” would mean: beyond “reducing access,” it would cause people to die preventable deaths.

Outlets often seemed more concerned with the impact of the bill on lawmakers’ political survival than its impact on their low-income constituents’ actual survival. The Washington Post (7/4/25), though acknowledging that their poll revealed that “two-thirds [of Americans] said they had heard either little or nothing about [the bill],” made little or no effort to contribute to an informed public. Instead, it focused on analyzing the “Six Ways Trump’s Tax Bill Could Shape the Battle for Control of Congress.”

The New York Times (7/1/25) similarly observed that the Senate Republicans’ “hard-fought legislative win came at considerable risk to their party’s political futures and fiscal legacy.” In another article (7/1/25), they noticed that it was the “more moderate and politically vulnerable Republicans” who “repeated their opposition to [the bill’s] cuts to Medicaid.”

‘Winners and losers’

NYT: What Are SNAP Benefits, and How Will They Change?

“Opponents of the bill say the proposed cuts will leave millions of adults and children hungry”; the New York Times (7/1/25) apparently doesn’t know whether that’s true or not.

The Medicaid cuts aren’t the only part of the bill that will result in unnecessary deaths. The bill will cut $186 billion from the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP), a program that helps low-income individuals and families buy food. CBO (5/22/25) estimated that 3.2 million people under the age of 65 will lose food assistance. This contraction is expected to be even more deadly than the healthcare cutbacks: The same researchers from UPenn (7/2/25), along with NYU Langone Health, projected that losing SNAP benefits will result in 93,000 premature deaths between now and 2039.

SNAP cuts were mostly only mentioned alongside Medicaid, if at all (Washington Post, 7/3/25; New York Times, 7/3/25; CNN, 7/4/25). And when they did decide to dedicate a whole article to the singular provision, they rarely ventured beyond the fiscal impacts of such cuts into real, tangible consequences, such as food insecurity, hunger and death. The New York Times (7/1/25) asked “how many people will be affected,” but didn’t bother to ask “how will people be affected?”

What’s more, according to the Center for American Progress (7/7/25), the bill’s repeal of incentives for energy efficiency and improved air quality “will likely lead to 430 avoidable deaths every year by 2030 and 930 by 2035.”

The New York Times (7/3/25), however, analyzed this outcome as a changing landscape with “energy winners and losers.” It described how the bill will eliminate tax credits that have encouraged the electrification of homes and alleviated energy costs for millions of families. Somehow, the “loser” here (and all throughout the article) is the abstract concept of “energy efficiency” and private companies, not actual US families.

Another little-discussed provision in the bill is the funding for the Golden Dome, an anti-missile system named for and modeled on Israel’s Iron Dome. The bill set aside $25 billion for its development, along with another $128 billion for military initiatives like expanding the naval fleet and nuclear arsenal.

Media, though, did little more than report these numbers, when they weren’t ignored entirely (CBS, 7/4/25; CNN, 7/4/25). The New York Times (7/1/25) characterized these measures to strengthen the military/industrial complex as “the least controversial in the legislative package”; they were “meant to entice Republicans to vote for it.” In utterly failing to challenge $153 billion in spending on a military that is currently being deployed to bomb other countries in wars of aggression and to suppress protests against authoritarianism at home, the media manufacture consent for militarism as a necessity and an inevitability.

Ignorance a journalistic fail

The Washington Post’s headline and article (7/3/25) perfectly exemplified the paradox with today’s media—calling out how “The Big Problem With Trump’s Bill [Is That] Many Voters Don’t Know What’s in It.” Yet it tosses in an unsubstantial explanation about how “it deals with tax policy, border security, restocking the military/industrial complex, slashing spending on health and food programs for the poor—as well as many, many other programs.”

By reducing sweeping legislative consequences to vague generalities and by positioning ignorance as a voter issue rather than journalistic failure, media outlets maintain a veneer of critique while sidestepping accountability.


Featured image: PBS  depiction (7/30/25) of President Donald Trump signing the reconciliation bill. (photo: Alex Brandon/Pool via Reuters.)


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Shirlynn Chan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/media-sidelined-deadly-consequences-of-trumps-reconciliation-bill/feed/ 0 547155
Don Jr.’s Drone Ventures May Make $$$ Thanks to Daddy’s Budget Bill #politics https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/don-jr-s-drone-ventures-may-make-thanks-to-daddys-budget-bill-politics/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/don-jr-s-drone-ventures-may-make-thanks-to-daddys-budget-bill-politics/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 18:16:40 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=634ae2c336ce6d10d43d9a1025d12f50
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/don-jr-s-drone-ventures-may-make-thanks-to-daddys-budget-bill-politics/feed/ 0 547122
NYT Obscured Worst Harms of Trump’s Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/nyt-obscured-worst-harms-of-trumps-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/nyt-obscured-worst-harms-of-trumps-budget/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 19:37:28 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046507 President Donald Trump has just signed into law what will go down as perhaps the most significant legislative achievement of his second term in office. Dubbed the One Big Beautiful Bill Act, the legislation is set to extend most of the tax cuts passed in Trump’s first term, while making deep cuts to social programs and gutting Biden-era climate provisions, among other sweeping changes (FAIR.org, 7/9/25).

The bill will have a remarkably regressive distributional impact. While top incomes will balloon by thousands of dollars, lower-income Americans will actually see their incomes decline. One analysis from before the bill’s final passage found that its major provisions would reduce incomes for the bottom 20% by about 2%.

Tax cuts, after all, are only one part of the bill. More relevant to lower-income Americans is that this bill will deliver the largest cuts to Medicaid and food stamps in US history.

Such a historic weakening of the safety net—the programs that support the finances of lower-income Americans—should warrant not only major attention, but significant scrutiny from national media outlets. And yet, at the New York Times, the approach has been to distract and obscure above all else.

‘Defined by staggering debt’

NYT: The National Debt Is Already Causing Bigger Problems Than People Realize

As Trump slashed $1 trillion from healthcare, the New York Times (6/27/25) stressed the importance of reducing the deficit. 

One manifestation of this approach has been the Times’ insistence on elevating the bill’s effect on the debt as a foremost concern. In the week or so leading up to the bill’s passage, in fact, both an editorial (6/27/25) and an episode of the Times’ flagship podcast the Daily (7/2/25) were dedicated entirely to a discussion of the national debt.

The Daily episode went as far as claiming, “The legislation is defined by the staggering amount of debt that it’s creating.” It then warned of the potential for a debt “doom loop,” whereby rising debt raises borrowing costs and forces the government to issue more debt in order to pay for its existing debt load.

Meanwhile, the Times editorial board opted to focus more heavily on the costs already being imposed by high federal debt. In a piece titled “The National Debt Is Already Causing Bigger Problems Than People Realize,” the board highlighted the “staggering amount of money” the government puts towards interest payments each year. The board’s solution:

The government needs to raise taxes, especially on the wealthy, and it needs to make long-term changes in Social Security and Medicare, the major drivers of spending growth.

In other words, at a time when the Republican Party is gutting the safety net in epic fashion, the New York Times is coyly hinting that Social Security and Medicare will need to be cut.

‘Enough to repair every bridge’

NYT: The Cost of High Debt

The New York Times‘ own chart (6/27/25) indicates that Trump’s budget bill will have only a modest impact on US interest payments. What did cause interest costs to soar was the political decision to fight inflation through higher interest rates, a decision the Times applauded  (FAIR.org1/25/236/27/23).

Across both the editorial and the podcast episode, the primary reason put forward by the Times for concern over the national debt was the borrowing costs associated with it. But is the bill’s effect on borrowing costs—the amount of money the federal government will have to spend to pay off the interest on its debts—genuinely that significant of a concern?

The Times editorial board seems to think so. Warning of the ill effects of increasing borrowing costs, the board observed:

The House version of Mr. Trump’s bill, already approved by that chamber, would increase interest payments on the debt by an average of $55 billion a year over the next decade, according to the Congressional Budget Office. The increase alone is enough money to fully repair every bridge in the United States.

This comparison is useful to a degree. It exposes the priorities of the Trump administration, which seems to value tax cuts for the wealthy above delivering basic public goods.

But the comparison ultimately obscures more than it illuminates. The reality is that $55 billion is a relatively small sum for the US government. It represents only about 0.8% of the 2024 federal budget, and 0.2% of US GDP.

High cost of high interest rates

CNBC: Latest on 10-Year US Treasury

The interest rate on 10-year US Treasury bills has risen from 0.6% in 2020 to 4.5% today (chart: CNBC).

The total amount the federal government pays in interest—the amount it pays in excess of what it borrowed when it pays back loans—is of course much larger: The Times relays that interest payments are on pace to surpass $1 trillion this year, representing around 15% of last year’s federal budget. As the editorial board notes, this level of spending on interest payments crowds out other, more useful spending by the government. In other words, it does impose a not-insignificant cost.

What the board de-emphasizes or ignores, however, is that high interest payments are really just a symptom of other more fundamental policy choices.

On the one hand, they reflect the political decision to rely on the blunt instrument of interest rates to combat the pandemic-era spike in inflation. The result has been a rise in interest rates on ten-year government bonds, from under 1% in 2020 to above 4% today.

This was not an inevitable development. Other methods exist for combating inflation. But these methods were sidelined in favor of a regressive, debt-inflating approach. Would you know this by reading the Times editorial? Absolutely not.

The incredibly low tax rate

TPC: Total Tax Revenue as a Share of GDP

The United States has one of the lowest effective tax rates among wealthy countries (chart: Tax Policy Center).

On the other hand, high interest payments also reflect the political decision to run up the US debt load through tax cuts for the wealthy. This history of tax cuts is discussed by the editorial board, but it is framed as more of a secondary issue. Little would readers know that the crowding-out effect imposed by high interest payments, which the Times depicts climbing above the cost of Social Security in coming years, is dwarfed by the crowding-out effect of low tax revenue.

For such a rich country, the US collects incredibly little in taxes. Its tax revenue registers a meager 29% of GDP, compared to 42% in Canada, 52% in France and 62% in Norway.

Meanwhile, interest payments as a percentage of GDP are set to double over the next 30 years, reaching about 6% of GDP in the 2050s. That’s not even half the revenue deficit the US faces versus Canada—and Canada’s a low-tax country compared to France and Norway!

The Times nonetheless has run no editorial in recent months decrying the US for being such a low-tax country. Even in its editorial about interest payments, a breakdown of the pitiful state of US tax collection by international standards is nowhere to be found. Instead, we get a muddled denunciation of the bill’s irresponsible contribution to burdensome borrowing costs.

But, again, the bill’s contribution is tiny. Yes, interest payments are projected to reach 6% of GDP by the 2050s, but they will hit 5% even in the absence of this bill. With this single percentage of GDP boost in borrowing costs, the bill imposes a cost in 30 years that is a fraction of the cost of our tax deficit versus Canada today.

‘People benefit from working’

NYT: Republicans Can’t Hide Medicaid Cuts in a ‘Big, Beautiful’ Bill

In its one editorial (5/23/25) on the reconciliation bill’s cuts to the safety net, the New York Times endorsed the idea “that some government benefits should be tied to employment.”

This is not to say that the Big Beautiful Bill will not impose Major Gratuitous Pain. But it is to say that such pain will not be found in an analysis of its impact on borrowing costs.

Rather, where we should look to see clear evidence of negative effects is the savings side of the bill, where Republicans have enacted brutal cuts to the social safety net, cuts that the economist James Galbraith calls “the direct result of bipartisan scaremongering over deficits and debt.”

The Times editorial board has run one editorial (5/23/25) on the bill’s cuts to the safety net. Published over a month before the bill’s passage, the piece was headlined “Republicans Can’t Hide Medicaid Cuts in a ‘Big, Beautiful’ Bill.” As it pointed out, the Republican bill would reverse the progress that has been made over the past decade or so in expanding health insurance access to more Americans.

Oddly, however, the editorial extended an olive branch to the GOP, conceding:

We are sympathetic to the idea that some government benefits should be tied to employment. People benefit from working, and society benefits when more people are working.

Explaining the decision to insert this concession into the piece, editorial director David Leonhardt (New York Times, 7/1/25) has since elaborated:

I actually understand why, at a top-line way, people would want to put work requirements on a federal program, and actually I do think there are federal programs that should have work requirements. I’m a pretty big skeptic of universal basic income, of the idea that we’re just going to have the federal government give people lots of money outright. I don’t think it’s worked very well. I think it’s hugely expensive.

This is a baffling explanation. As worded in the editorial, it appears that the board is expressing sympathy for work requirements for some existing government benefits, and justifying them with reference to the value of work, despite work requirements’ long history of doing nothing to increase employment. Yet Leonhardt gives no example of a current government program that should be saddled with a work requirement. Instead, he merely expresses his opposition to universal basic income, using conservative arguments against the policy in doing so. This level of clarity, however, may be all we can expect from the Times.

Unnoted cutbacks

At least as notable as the contents of the editorials published by the Times on the Big Beautiful Bill is what the Times has failed to highlight about the legislation. After all, the paper has run just two editorials on what is probably the most regressive major piece of legislation in at least a generation. What have these missed? A lot.

For one, the largest cuts to food stamps in history are entirely absent from the Times editorial board’s critiques of the bill. That millions would lose access to food stamps and tens of millions would see their benefits cut is apparently an afterthought for the board. It evidently does not warrant the denunciation that somewhat higher borrowing costs require.

Decimation of clean energy provisions and heavy new restrictions on student loans likewise appear a grand total of zero times in the Times’ editorials on the bill. This is the sort of resistance that the most prominent establishment newspaper in the country has to offer.

‘Big ugly battle’

The situation at the Daily has been better, though it had only a rather low bar to clear. Through the day the bill was signed into law, the show published three episodes on the legislation. The first (6/5/25), titled “The Big Ugly Battle Over the Big Beautiful Bill,” touched on the bill’s attacks on climate provisions in its first half, and devoted its second half to a conversation about cuts to Medicaid.

Food stamps, by contrast, were mentioned in just two sentences. And student loans didn’t make a single appearance.

The following episode (7/2/25), discussed above, centered on the debt, but the third episode (7/4/25) dedicated additional airtime to cuts to the safety net, again including a discussion of Medicaid cuts in the second half of the episode. Its first half also centered the serious negative impacts of the legislation, mostly focusing on the array of tax cuts in the bill, but framing the overall impact as wildly regressive:

The most important thing to know about this package is that it delivers its greatest benefits to the wealthy, and it extracts its greatest cuts on the poor.

The largest cuts to food stamps in American history, however, garnered no airtime. Same goes for the massive pullback in student loans.

A ripple in a tsunami

NYT: Millions Would Lose Their Obamacare Coverage Under Trump’s Bill

We found only two New York Times headlines like this one (6/5/25)—out of nearly 800 in its US politics section—that straightforwardly conveyed the impact of the budget bill’s cuts.

Unfortunately, this poor coverage is not limited to Times editorials and the Daily. As it turns out, the news section of the Times has been similarly lacking in serious coverage.

The paper’s US Politics section is case in point. From the start of June through July 4, when Trump signed his bill into law, this section of the Times featured a total of seven articles that mentioned “food stamp(s),” “SNAP” or “food aid” in either their headline or subhead. For “Medicaid,” “health cuts” and “Obamacare,” the number was ten.

But few of these articles bore headlines straightforwardly reporting the facts of what’s projected to happen to millions of Americans as a result of cuts to food stamps and healthcare spending. In total, only two headlines, both about healthcare, really fit this description:

  • “GOP Bill Has $1.1 Trillion in Health Cuts and 11.8 Million Losing Care, CBO Says” (6/29/25)
  • “Millions Would Lose Their Obamacare Coverage Under Trump’s Bill” (6/5/25)

Other headlines mentioned cuts, but some didn’t even reference that information. For instance, one headline (6/3/25) read, “Trump Administration Backs Off Effort to Collect Data on Food Stamp Recipients.”

Amazingly, at least in the US Politics section of the paper, zero headlines included the phrase “student loans,” despite substantial retrenchment in student loan policy. The term “safety net” appeared in the headline or subhead of only six articles.

With around 800 articles appearing in the Times’ US Politics section during this timeframe, coverage of historic cuts to crucial safety net programs resembled a ripple in a tsunami.

‘Fair to criticize Democrats’

NYT: Trump May Get His ‘Big Beautiful Bill,’ but the G.O.P. Will Pay a Price

The type sizes conveys the relative importance the New York Times (7/1/25) places on prices paid by politicians vs. those paid by the public.

Nonetheless, when Times editorial director David Leonhardt was asked whether he thinks “Americans who will be impacted by these cuts understand what’s happening,” given the lack of public outcry so far, he gave credit to Republicans for succeeding in minimizing public opposition, and blamed Democrats for failing to make a bigger deal out of the bill:

I also think it’s fair to criticize the Democratic Party and activists who are aligned with the Democratic Party for not figuring out ways to make a bigger deal out of these cuts. To some extent, they’ve allowed the Republican cynical strategy of staying away from town halls to work better than it might have.

The role of corporate media, and more particularly of the New York Times, may never have even crossed Leonhardt’s mind. But, of course, the Times is a critical player in US politics. With around 12 million subscribers and millions of daily listeners to the Daily, the outlet has incredible reach. If it wanted to, the Times could play a significant role in raising public awareness of this bill. The problem is that it seems completely uninterested in adopting this role.

I would argue, therefore, that the paltry public outcry is fundamentally a result of editorial decisions, not least those made at the Times. By refusing to cover cuts to the social safety net with more than minimal urgency, the Times has done a good deal to deprive the Democratic Party and other opponents of the legislation of the sort of informational environment in which public opposition to harmful policies can be effectively mobilized.

Through inaction, through poor coverage, the Times is making a political choice to undermine opposition to some of the Trump administration’s most damaging policies.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/nyt-obscured-worst-harms-of-trumps-budget/feed/ 0 544924
How reducing the U.S. military budget would also reduce emissions https://grist.org/climate/how-reducing-the-us-military-budget-would-also-reduce-emissions/ https://grist.org/climate/how-reducing-the-us-military-budget-would-also-reduce-emissions/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 08:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670291 The next time you’re on a flight worrying about destroying the planet, rest easy knowing that at least you’re not in a fighter jet. The airline industry is responsible for 2.5 percent of global CO2 emissions, but the world’s militaries are responsible for more than double that, at 5.5 percent. 

When nations boost military budgets, they also boost their carbon emissions. With a bump of $157 billion, thanks to the budget the Trump administration passed earlier this month, the United States now spends $1 trillion each year on defense. That’s more than three times as much as China, the next highest spender, as well as the entire European Union. If combined, the world’s armed forces would have the fourth highest carbon footprint, behind India, the U.S., and China. 

Yet it’s been maddeningly difficult for researchers to monitor the emissions of militaries, which aren’t required to report these things. “There’s a guessing game involved,” said Nick Buxton, who has coauthored reports on military emissions from the Transnational Institute, an international research and advocacy group. “One of the overwhelming calls for everyone working in the sector is just for more open and transparent data, so we can come up with some reliable figures.”

To that end, using what data the Department of Energy has made publicly available between 1975 to 2022, researchers have calculated that if the U.S. consistently decreased military spending — by even a little — instead of increasing it, it’d be saving as much energy as Delaware and Slovenia use in a year. A decrease of less than 7 percent each year over about a decade would theoretically reduce energy consumption from about 640 trillion to 394 trillion British thermal units (a measurement of heat energy produced from burning fuels).

The study gives observers not just a better idea of how much carbon the American military is spewing, but also how effective it would be to reduce its funding. “We realize that the feasibility of military spending reductions taking place anytime soon within the U.S. context is probably quite questionable, to put it mildly,” said Andrew Jorgenson, professor of sociology and founding director of the University of British Columbia’s Climate and Society Lab and coauthor of the study, which was published June 2 in the journal PLOS Climate. “But it does highlight that it is a possible pathway to decarbonization and climate mitigation, just with very modest reductions in military spending.”

The researchers note that between 2010 and 2019, the Department of Defense’s emissions were over 636 million metric tons of atmosphere-warming emissions. (The DOD did not respond to a request to comment for this story.) And that’s a conservative and necessarily incomplete estimate, Jorgenson said. Fuel use can give researchers a general idea of how much carbon the armed forces are directly sending into the atmosphere, but there are also all kinds of indirect emissions that come with operating a military. Vegetables, for instance, took energy to grow and ship to bases, to say nothing of all the other supplies flowing around a military’s supply chain: bullets, blankets, boots. 

“If anything, our findings are then perhaps undercounting and underestimating the actual scope of the U.S. military’s contribution to energy consumption and carbon emissions and climate change,” Jorgenson said. “That’s a speculative statement — I just want to be clear about that.”

All these variables not only make it difficult for researchers to accurately determine the climate costs of war — governments themselves can be in the dark too. “Militaries are decades behind in their ability to even understand their emission sources and where they’re coming from,” said Ellie Kinney, military emissions campaigner at the nonprofit Conflict and Environment Observatory. “There is this lag compared to other industries, because no one’s asked them to.”

Calculations get even more complicated when a military actually goes to war. More jet flights require more fuel, and even missiles produce their own emissions. The resulting fires in conflict zones, like the ones that have been devastating Ukraine’s forests, release still more carbon into the atmosphere. While the U.S. spends an outsized amount of money on its armed forces, other nations, particularly those involved in active wars, seem intent to catch up. Russia is now spending a third of its federal budget on defense as its invasion of Ukraine drags on. Last year, Israel’s military spending jumped by 65 percent to $46.5 billion as the country assaulted Gaza. 

Last month, at President Trump’s urging, NATO allies committed to investing 3.5 percent of their gross domestic product each year on defense, and a further 1.5 percent on domestic security like new infrastructure, by 2035. That combined 5 percent is more than double their previous agreement to spend 2 percent of GDP. And on Monday, NATO secretary general Mark Rutte joined Trump in the Oval Office to announce a deal in which “billions of dollars’ worth of military equipment” will be purchased from the U.S. and delivered to Ukraine to support its defense against Russia. 

According to a Transnational Institute report, if every NATO state actually reaches its new military spending goal, by 2030 the alliance’s annual military carbon footprint would be 2.3 billion metric tons CO2 equivalent. (The group published the report prior to the formalization of the June agreement, hence the discrepancy of using 2030 in their modeling instead of 2035.) That’s nearly 700 million metric tons extra than if 2024 levels of military spending were sustained until that time. 

“We’re moving to a world which is readying itself constantly for war, which often makes war much more inevitable,” Buxton said. “And when war happens, emissions just skyrocket.”

All this additional military investment can create a feedback loop, Buxton and Kinney warn. Military leaders in the U.S. and elsewhere recognize climate change as a “threat multiplier,” meaning that it exacerbates existing hazards and conflicts. But with more investment in defense comes more emissions, and more warming, and more threats, which encourages more investment in armed forces. That also means less money for investing in renewable energy and adaptation measures: The richest nations are spending 30 times more on their militaries than on climate finance for the world’s most vulnerable countries.

“An escalation beyond control feels like the situation that we’re heading into,” Kinney said. “This is obviously deeply concerning from a broader security perspective, but really concerning from a climate perspective.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline How reducing the U.S. military budget would also reduce emissions on Jul 16, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Matt Simon.

]]>
https://grist.org/climate/how-reducing-the-us-military-budget-would-also-reduce-emissions/feed/ 0 544624
Trump’s Budget Is a Huge Giveaway For the Private Prison Industry #politics #trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/trumps-budget-is-a-huge-giveaway-for-the-private-prison-industry-politics-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/trumps-budget-is-a-huge-giveaway-for-the-private-prison-industry-politics-trump/#respond Sat, 12 Jul 2025 18:52:54 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=982d9168237e306d463b9fe59ad74184
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/trumps-budget-is-a-huge-giveaway-for-the-private-prison-industry-politics-trump/feed/ 0 544131
Silky Shah on Mass Deportation https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/silky-shah-on-mass-deportation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/silky-shah-on-mass-deportation/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 15:04:30 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046441  

Right-click here to download this episode (“Save link as…”).

 

Intercept: ICE Said They Were Being Flown to Louisiana. Their Flight Landed in Africa.

Intercept (7/8/25)

This week on CounterSpin: Along with many other hate-driven harms, the budget bill puts Stephen Miller’s cruel and bizarre mass deportation plan on steroids. $45 billion for building new immigration detention centers; that’s a 62% larger budget than the entire federal prison system.

The goons hiding their faces and IDs while they snatch people off the street? ICE’s “enforcement and deportation operations” get $30 billion. $46 billion for a “border wall,” because that’s evidently not a cartoon. And in a lesser-noticed piece: While courts are backlogged with immigrants complying with legal processes to access citizenship, the bill caps the number of immigration judges to 800, ensuring more people will be kept in vulnerable legal status.

The Economic Policy Institute tells us that increases in immigration enforcement will cause widespread job losses for both immigrant and US-born workers, particularly in construction and childcare: “While Trump and other conservatives claim that increased deportations will somehow magically create jobs for US-born workers, the existing evidence shows that the opposite is true: They will cause immense harm to workers and families, shrink the economy, and weaken the labor market for everyone.”

That’s without mentioning how ICE is telling people they’re being moved from Texas to Louisiana and then dumping them in South Sudan, as the Intercept’s Nick Turse reports. Or the puerile delight Republicans find in holding people in an alligator swamp, and forbidding journalists and public officials from seeing what goes on there.

It’s important to see that Donald Trump, while especially craven, is using tools he was given, in terms of the apparatus for mass deportations, including in the acceptance of prisons as economic boons for struggling localities. So the fight can’t be just anti-Trump, but must be rooted in policy and practice and law—and most of all, in community and shared humanity.

We’ll talk about standing up for human beings because they’re human beings with Silky Shah, executive director of Detention Watch Network.

 

Plus Janine Jackson takes a quick look at recent press coverage of the Texas floods.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by CounterSpin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/silky-shah-on-mass-deportation/feed/ 0 543940
Massive Expansion of Trump’s Deportation Machine Passes With Little Press Notice https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/massive-expansion-of-trumps-deportation-machine-passes-with-little-press-notice/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/massive-expansion-of-trumps-deportation-machine-passes-with-little-press-notice/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 21:44:57 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046418  

Salon: ICE’s $175 billion windfall: Trump’s mass deportation force set to receive military-level funding

Salon (7/3/25): “The funds going towards deportation would…be enough to fully fund the program to end world hunger for four years.”

And so it has come to pass: US President Donald Trump’s “big, beautiful bill” has set the stage for tax cuts for the rich, slashed services for the poor, and a host of other things that qualify as “beautiful” in the present dystopia. Some cuts, like those to Medicaid, have been heavily covered by the corporate media. But one key piece of the bill has gotten much less media scrutiny: The preposterous sum of $175 billion has been allocated to fund Trump’s signature mass deportation campaign, which, as a Salon article (7/3/25) points out, exceeds the military budget for every single country in the world aside from the US and China.

Approximately $30 billion of that is destined directly for US Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE), the goons who have recently made a name for themselves by going around in masks and kidnapping people. This constitutes a threefold increase over ICE’s previous budget, and propels the outfit to the position of the largest US federal law enforcement agency in history. $45 billion will go toward building new ICE detention centers, including family detention centers.

Prior to the signing into law of the sweeping bill on July 4, US Vice President JD Vance took to X to highlight what really mattered in the legislation:

Everything else—the CBO [Congressional Budget Office] score, the proper baseline, the minutiae of the Medicaid policy—is immaterial compared to the ICE money and immigration enforcement provisions.

Scant attention to ICE expansion

NPR: 9 Questions About the Republican Megabill, Answered

“What happens if we spend more than the military budget of Russia on deportation?” was not a question the New York Times (7/3/25) thought needed answering.

And yet many US corporate media outlets have paid scant attention to this aspect of the bill and refrained from delving too deeply into the matter of what exactly this massive ramping up of ICE portends for American society. According to a search of the Nexis news database, while half (50%) of newspaper articles and news transcripts mentioning the reconciliation bill from its first passage in the House (May 20) to its signing into law (July 4) also mentioned Medicaid, less than 6% named Immigration and Customs Enforcement or ICE.

Even many of those that did mention ICE barely gave it any attention. On July 3, for example, the New York Times presented readers with “Nine Questions About the Republican Megabill, Answered,” which in response to the first question—“Why is it being called a megabill?”—did manage to mention “a 150% boost to the Immigration and Customs Enforcement budget over the next five years.” However, there was no further discussion in the article’s remaining 1,500-plus words of potential ramifications of this boost—although there was a section devoted to the “tax break for Native Alaskan subsistence whaling captains.”

That was more than CNN’s intervention managed, also published on July 3, and headlined “Here’s Who Stands to Gain From the ‘Big, Beautiful Bill.’ And Who May Struggle.” The article aced a couple of no-brainers, including that “corporate America” would be “better off” thanks to the bill, while “low-income Americans” would be “worse off.” But there was not a single reference to the ICE budget—or who might “struggle” because of it.

‘Detention blitz’

WaPo: ICE prepares detention blitz with historic $45 billion in funding

Washington Post (7/4/25): “Immigrant rights advocates are imploring the government not to award more contracts to…companies they say have failed to provide safe accommodations and adequate medical care to detainees.”

This is not to imply, of course, that there are no articles detailing what ICE has been up to in terms of persecuting refuge seekers, visa holders, legal US residents and even US citizens—who supposedly have greater protections under the law—and how all of this stands to get worse, in accordance with the impending deluge of anti-immigration funds.

In its report on ICE’s looming “detention blitz,” the Washington Post (7/4/25) noted that “at least 10 immigrants died while in ICE’s custody during the first half of this year,” and cited the finding that ICE is “now arresting people with no criminal charges at a higher rate than people charged with crimes.”

The Post article also contained sufficiently thought-provoking details to enable the conscientious reader to draw their own conclusions regarding the ultimate purpose of manic detention schemes. (Hint: it’s not to keep America “safe.”) For instance, we learn that the share prices of GEO Group and CoreCivic—the two largest detention companies contracted by ICE, which have notorious reputations for detainee mistreatment—“each rose about 3%… as investors cheered the passage of congressional funding likely to result in a flurry of new contracts.”

Lest there remain any doubt as to the centrality of profit flows to the immigration crackdown, the article specifies that GEO Group and CoreCivic “each gave $500,000 to President Donald Trump’s inauguration, according to Federal Election Commission data.”

This article, however, came after the legislation was passed.

A Post opinion piece (6/30/25), meanwhile, put a human face on some of ICE’s victims, such as Jermaine Thomas, born to a US soldier on a military base in Germany. Following an incident of “suspected trespassing” in Texas, Thomas was deported by ICE to Jamaica, a country he had never set foot in. Other victims spotlighted by the Post include 64-year-old Iranian immigrant Madonna Kashanian, nabbed while gardening at her house in New Orleans, and a six-year-old Honduran boy with leukemia who was arrested at an immigration court in California while pursuing his asylum case with his family.

It was also possible, if one sought it out, to find reporting on what the cash infusion entails from a logistical perspective: more agents, more arrests, more racial profiling, increased detention capacity, and a deportation system that runs “like Amazon, trying to get your product delivered in 24 hours,” as ICE’s acting director Todd Lyons charmingly put it.

‘Police state first’

Jacobin: ICE Is About to Get More Money Than It Can Spend

Aaron Reichlin-Melnick (Jacobin, 7/3/25): “Mass deportation wouldn’t only reshape American society and cause the economy to go into a tailspin. It would also lead to a very different relationship between the US populace and law enforcement.”

Gutting Medicaid is certainly an angle on the reconciliation bill that deserved the media attention it got, and will devastate millions in this country. But the massive infusion of money and power to ICE will likewise devastate millions with a ballooning police state that unleashes terror, rips apart families and creates a network of concentration camps across the country. Given ICE’s contemporary track record and de facto exemption from the constraints of due process, the public desperately needs a media that will connect the dots in order to convey a bigger-picture look of what America is up against.

In an interview with Jacobin magazine (7/3/25) on how “ICE Is About to Get More Money Than It Can Spend,” Aaron Reichlin-Melnick—a senior fellow at the American Immigration Council—made the crucial observation: “You don’t build the mass deportation machine without building the police state first.”

This is precisely the analysis that is missing from corporate media coverage of the bill. Beyond making life hell for the undocumented workers on whose very labor the US economy depends, ICE has become a tool for political repression as well—as evidenced by a slew of recent episodes involving the abduction and disappearance of international scholars whose political opinions did not coincide with those of the commander in chief of our, um, democracy.

Take the case of 30-year-old Rümeysa Öztürk, a Turkish doctoral student and Fulbright scholar studying childhood development at Tufts University in Massachusetts. While walking to an iftar dinner in March, Öztürk was accosted by six plainclothes officers, some of them masked, and forced into an unmarked van, after which she was flown halfway across the country to an ICE detention center in Louisiana. Her crime, apparently, was to have co-written an opinion piece last year for the Tufts Daily (3/26/24), in which she and her co-authors encouraged the university to accede to demands by the Tufts Community Union Senate by recognizing the Israeli genocide in the Gaza Strip and divesting from companies with ties to Israel.

Öztürk’s case is hardly an isolated one. There’s Badar Khan Suri, a postdoctoral researcher at Georgetown University who was seized by masked agents outside his Virginia home and swept off to an ICE facility in Texas. There’s Momodou Taal, a British-Gambian former PhD student at Cornell who sued the Trump administration over the crackdown on Palestine solidarity and then self-deported, explaining that he had “lost faith [he] could walk the streets without being abducted.” And the list goes on (Al Jazeera, 5/15/25).

‘Homegrowns are next’

NPR: 'Homegrowns are next': Trump hopes to deport and jail U.S. citizens abroad

Supreme Court Justice Sonia Sotomayor (NPR, 4/15/25): The Trump administration believes it “could deport and incarcerate any person, including US citizens, without legal consequence, so long as it does so before a court can intervene.”

In the twisted view of the US government, of course, opposing the US-backed genocide of Palestinians equals support for “terrorism”—and in Trump’s view, basically anything that goes against his own thinking and policies potentially constitutes a criminal offense. It follows that Öztürk-style politically motivated kidnappings by the state are presumably merely the top of a very slippery slope that US citizens, too, will soon find themselves careening down—especially as Trump has already exhibited enthusiasm at the prospect of outsourcing the incarceration of US citizens to El Salvador: “The homegrowns are next,” he told Salvadoran autocrat Nayib Bukele.

The line between citizens and residents has been intentionally blurred, with the Trump Justice Department announcing it was “Prioritizing Denaturalization”—that is, stripping citizenship from foreign-born citizens. This draconian punishment has been proposed for Trump’s political enemies, from New York mayoral candidate Zohran Mamdani to former BFF Elon Musk. Trump has also taken aim at the constitutional right of birthright citizenship, potentially turning millions of other Americans into ICE targets.

Somehow, the elite media have not deemed it necessary to dwell even superficially on the implications of super-funding a rogue agency that has essentially been given carte blanche to indiscriminately round people up—be they undocumented workers, political dissidents, or just somebody who “looks like somebody we are looking for.” As for CNN’s write-up on “who stands to gain from the ‘big, beautiful bill,’” it’s definitely not all the folks currently living in a permanent state of fear, deprived of basic freedoms like movement, speech and thought.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Belén Fernández.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/massive-expansion-of-trumps-deportation-machine-passes-with-little-press-notice/feed/ 0 543639
PREPARED REMARKS: Sanders Keeps Sounding the Alarm on Health Care Emergency Worsened by Trump Budget Bill https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 15:35:13 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), Ranking Member of the Senate Committee on Health, Education, Labor, and Pensions (HELP), today delivered remarks on the impact of the Republican reconciliation bill — which passed the Senate by one vote and will throw nearly 17 million Americans off the health care they have.

There is no question that cybersecurity and protecting the privacy of Americans’ health care records are important issues that we need to deal with.

But, Mr. Chairman, let me be very clear. That is not the issue that is right now on the minds of the American people. What people are worried about is the catastrophic impact that the reconciliation bill that was passed last week will have on the health and well-being of the American people. And that is the issue that I'm going to be focused on today.

That legislation, passed by one vote here in the Senate, will be making the largest cut to Medicaid in American history to pay for the largest tax break for billionaires in American history.

At a time when our current health care system is broken, dysfunctional and cruel — 85 million today are uninsured or underinsured. This bill will make a horrible situation even worse.

This legislation will cut Medicaid and the Affordable Care Act by more than $1.1 trillion.

The nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office has estimated that this bill, along with the expiration of the enhanced premium tax credits, will cause 17 million people to lose their health insurance.

Researchers at the Yale School of Public Health and health care economists at the University of Pennsylvania have found that these health care policies would cause over 50,000 people in our country to die unnecessarily every year. That's what happens when you can't get to a doctor.

I am delighted that one of the lead researchers of this report, Dr. Alison Galvani, is here with us today to talk more about that study.

Mr. Chairman: it is not rocket science. You're a doctor, you know this. If people don’t have access to health care, if they can’t get to a doctor when they need to, people will suffer and tens of thousands will die. It happens today and it will only get worse.

Make no mistake about it: This bill is a death sentence for working-class and low-income Americans.

Further, as a result of this bill, more than 300 rural hospitals are now at risk of closing down altogether or substantially reducing their services. That is not my estimate. That’s what the Center for Health Services Research at the University of North Carolina recently estimated.

And we are already beginning to see the devastating impact this bill will have on rural America: The Curtis Medical Center in Southwest Nebraska has already announced that it will be shutting down because it cannot withstand the cuts to Medicaid contained in this bill.

It’s not just rural hospitals that are now in crisis as a result of this legislation.

According to a recent survey from the American Health Care Association, as a result of this bill, 27% of nursing homes have indicated that they will be forced to close their doors and 58% will have to reduce staff. And it’s not just nursing homes.

Health care researchers at the Milken Institute School of Public Health at George Washington University have found that this bill will be a disaster for community health centers.

They have estimated that as a result of the passage of this bill, over 40% of community health center sites will shut down. Today, there are over 15,000 community health center clinics throughout America. This could result in the shutting down of some 9,000 of them.

And it's not just community health centers, it's not just nursing homes and it's not just individuals.

This legislation will substantially increase the uninsured rate in every state in this country.

As a result of this bill, the uninsured rate in my own state of Vermont would go up from 3.3% to 6%.

In Louisiana, the Chairman's state, the uninsured rate will go up from 6.7% to 12.4%.

In Florida, the uninsured rate will go up from 10.4% to 18.8%.

In Texas, the second largest state in this country, the uninsured rate will go up to 20% — in the United States, in the richest country in the history of the world.

Mr. Chairman, this is an issue that needs to be explained to the American people, and I look forward to discussing it with all of our panelists.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill/feed/ 0 543609
Trump’s budget bill "zeroes out" climate policy https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/trumps-budget-bill-zeroes-out-climate-policy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/trumps-budget-bill-zeroes-out-climate-policy/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 17:32:46 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5148e9087f319ee4bdd9554a64bd7e3d
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/trumps-budget-bill-zeroes-out-climate-policy/feed/ 0 543261
"Frontal Assault" on Climate Justice: Rolling Stone’s Antonia Juhasz on Trump’s Budget Law https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/frontal-assault-on-climate-justice-rolling-stones-antonia-juhasz-on-trumps-budget-law-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/frontal-assault-on-climate-justice-rolling-stones-antonia-juhasz-on-trumps-budget-law-2/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 14:58:02 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=54b7313bedf423414d5bac42cafed9eb
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/frontal-assault-on-climate-justice-rolling-stones-antonia-juhasz-on-trumps-budget-law-2/feed/ 0 543232
"Most Massive Transfer of Wealth Upward in American History": John Nichols on Trump’s Budget Law https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/most-massive-transfer-of-wealth-upward-in-american-history-john-nichols-on-trumps-budget-law-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/most-massive-transfer-of-wealth-upward-in-american-history-john-nichols-on-trumps-budget-law-2/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 14:55:55 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b957a2f77553bb9d89fc368c5d47cdc2
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/most-massive-transfer-of-wealth-upward-in-american-history-john-nichols-on-trumps-budget-law-2/feed/ 0 543234
“Frontal Assault” on Climate Justice: Rolling Stone’s Antonia Juhasz on Trump’s Budget Law https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/frontal-assault-on-climate-justice-rolling-stones-antonia-juhasz-on-trumps-budget-law/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/frontal-assault-on-climate-justice-rolling-stones-antonia-juhasz-on-trumps-budget-law/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 12:36:51 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a2636eff2bb6cc93a1cfb40627a68368 Seg3 juhasz fossilfuels 2

We speak with investigative journalist Antonia Juhasz about how President Trump’s major tax and spending bill hurts environmental justice efforts in Louisiana communities affected by the climate crisis and pollution from oil and gas facilities. The Trump administration had already canceled much of the funding for local environmental monitoring and advocacy, and the so-called Big, Beautiful Bill further entrenches the power of the fossil fuel industry. “It’s a frontal assault on environmental and climate justice, and it will set us back significantly unless we take action to confront the climate crisis,” says Juhasz, who wrote about the bill’s impact for Rolling Stone.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/frontal-assault-on-climate-justice-rolling-stones-antonia-juhasz-on-trumps-budget-law/feed/ 0 543204
“Most Massive Transfer of Wealth Upward in American History”: John Nichols on Trump’s Budget Law https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/most-massive-transfer-of-wealth-upward-in-american-history-john-nichols-on-trumps-budget-law/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/most-massive-transfer-of-wealth-upward-in-american-history-john-nichols-on-trumps-budget-law/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 12:26:11 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=08fa12a39d154edb92a66449fd8d7f69 Seg2 trump signs bill 2

President Donald Trump and his allies are celebrating the passage of his sweeping tax and spending bill, which he signed into law on July 4 after a monthslong effort to shepherd it through Congress. Ultimately, just three Republicans in the Senate and two in the House voted against the legislation. The so-called Big, Beautiful Bill includes about $1 trillion in federal cuts to Medicaid and could kick 17 million people off their healthcare. It makes the largest-ever cuts to food assistance benefits, could cause the closure of nursing homes and rural hospitals across the country, raises housing and energy costs, and supercharges the Trump crackdown on immigrants — all while delivering massive tax benefits for the wealthiest people in the country. “This is the most massive transfer of wealth upward in American history,” says John Nichols, national affairs correspondent for The Nation.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/most-massive-transfer-of-wealth-upward-in-american-history-john-nichols-on-trumps-budget-law/feed/ 0 543206
Trump’s Budget Bill is Direct Attack on Health and Safety of Most Americans https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/trumps-budget-bill-is-direct-attack-on-health-and-safety-of-most-americans/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/trumps-budget-bill-is-direct-attack-on-health-and-safety-of-most-americans/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 21:11:46 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/trumps-budget-bill-is-direct-attack-on-health-and-safety-of-most-americans Today Congress is poised to pass the Republicans’ massive budget reconciliation bill. The legislation will then go directly to President Trump for his signature. The House rushed to hold the final vote before an arbitrary July 4 deadline urged by Trump. In addition to eliminating healthcare for an estimated 17 million people, the law will have devastating impacts on food, water, and climate safety and security in the United States – while providing trillions in tax breaks that largely benefit corporations and the wealthiest Americans. Among the harms, this bill will:

  • Completely strip Supplemental Nutrition Assistance (SNAP) access for more than 2 million vulnerable Americans. The bill cuts $186 billion, an approximate 20 percent cut – the largest cut to the program in U.S. history. As many as 5 million people, including about 1 million children, live in households that could lose some or all of their hunger and nutrition assistance.
  • Mandate more oil and gas sales on public lands and offshore, drastically increasing pollution and climate risks for all Americans.
  • Increase subsidies for oil extraction by $14 billion through changes to the 45Q tax credit for carbon capture and utilization, on top of provisions in the bill that create tax loopholes that would allow the carbon capture industry to escape federal income taxes.
  • Repeal major clean energy and environmental justice programs, including funding to address air pollution at schools, the Greenhouse Gas Reduction Fund, Climate Pollution Reduction Grants, and Environmental and Climate Justice Block Grants.
  • Create a pay-to-play scheme to fast track environmental reviews under the National Environmental Policy Act.

In response, Food & Water Watch Executive Director Wenonah Hauter said:

“As we approach Independence Day, Republicans in Congress have passed a budget that is a direct attack on life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness we should be celebrating. This draconian budget will mean more hunger, more premature death from lack of healthcare, and more people’s lives and homes devastated by climate disasters. This is a massive handout to big corporations and billionaires at the expense of ordinary people. Extravagant White House celebrations won’t save the millions of people impacted by this terrible bill.
“Congress acted on Trump’s artificial deadline to get this bill passed by July 4th, but there is nothing patriotic or freeing about this direct attack on American’s safe food, clean water and a livable climate.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/trumps-budget-bill-is-direct-attack-on-health-and-safety-of-most-americans/feed/ 0 542777
GOP Budget Bill Slashes Medicaid for Millions, Cuts Taxes for the Rich, Funds ICE at Historic Levels https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 14:39:40 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=e21ce1ba825a8a0f4f693870695ceeb3
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels/feed/ 0 542696
GOP Budget Bill Slashes Medicaid for Millions, Cuts Taxes for the Rich, Funds ICE at Historic Levels https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels-2/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 12:49:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=86a287938ef34f3ca56f9b51633b616f 1920 1080 maxp

As we broadcast, the House was soon set to vote on the so-called big, beautiful bill before the July 4 deadline imposed by President Trump. Should the House pass the legislation, the bill would be sent to Trump’s desk to be signed into law. The bill massively increases funding for ICE, cuts $1 trillion from Medicaid over a decade and adds $3.3 trillion to the nation’s debt.

“It makes people in the country who are in the bottom 30%, working hard to pay their bills, poorer, because it’s stripping away healthcare from them, stripping away food assistance from them. And it is all in the name of giving tax breaks to the wealthiest. … The top 20% in this country get 60% of the benefits,” says Democratic Congressmember Ro Khanna.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels-2/feed/ 0 542714
GOP Budget Bill Would Make ICE "Largest Federal Law Enforcement Agency in the History of the Nation" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation-2/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 15:22:55 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a03fd1ea69724550358b428e86adc8a0
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation-2/feed/ 0 542490
GOP Budget Bill Would Make ICE “Largest Federal Law Enforcement Agency in the History of the Nation” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 12:31:58 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=228c2ff541fb65feed01f51b41a0ba1d Aaronreichlin melnick ice

The budget bill just passed by the Senate provides more than $170 billion in new funding for immigration enforcement and detention. Aaron Reichlin-Melnick, who worked on an analysis published by the American Immigration Council, says the new budget would make ICE “the single largest federal law enforcement agency in the history of the nation.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation/feed/ 0 542482
To Fund Tax Cuts for the Rich, GOP Budget Bill Would Take "Sledgehammer" to Healthcare for Millions https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 14:35:50 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fb86117df1e357e62e7b7f65d168596c
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/feed/ 0 541966
To Fund Tax Cuts for the Rich, GOP Budget Bill Would “Take a Sledgehammer” to Healthcare for Millions https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-a-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-a-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 12:13:55 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d19455d0b63a2ffdc5f3f0e8b690647f Seg1 bbb

Senate lawmakers are debating President Trump’s 940-page so-called big, beautiful bill as Republicans race to meet a Trump-imposed July 4 deadline and are set to vote on key amendments. Senate Republicans have deepened the cuts to Medicaid while cutting taxes for the wealthy and increasing the national deficit. “Basically, you have Republicans taking food and medicine and other things away from vulnerable people in order to finance tax cuts for the rich,” says David Dayen, executive editor of The American Prospect.

Dr. Adam Gaffney, a critical care physician and professor at Harvard Medical School, co-authored a report that found the bill could lead to 1.3 million Americans going without medications, 1.2 million Americans being saddled with medical debt, 380,000 women going without mammograms, and over 16,500 deaths annually. “I work in the ICU. I see patients with life-threatening complications of untreated illness because they didn’t get care because they couldn’t afford it. What happens when we add to that number massively?” says Gaffney.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-a-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/feed/ 0 541989
Fiji’s Dr Prasad unveils $4.8b budget as deficit widens https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/fijis-dr-prasad-unveils-4-8b-budget-as-deficit-widens/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/fijis-dr-prasad-unveils-4-8b-budget-as-deficit-widens/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 00:42:52 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=116838 By Kaya Selby, RNZ Pacific journalist

The Fiji government is spending big on this year’s budget.

The country’s Deputy Prime Minister and Minister for Finance, Biman Prasad, unveiled a FJ$4.8 billion (about NZ$3.5 billion) spending package, complete with cost of living measures and fiscal stimulus, to the Fijian Parliament on Friday.

This is about F$280 million more than last year, with the deficit widening to around $886 million.

Dr Prasad told Parliament that his government had guided the country to a better economic position than where he found it.

“When we came into office we were in a precarious economic crossroad . . . our first priority was to restore macroeconomic stability, rebuild trust in policymaking institutions, and chart a path towards sustainable and inclusive growth.”

The 2025/2026 budget consisted of a spending increase across almost every area, with education, the largest area of spending, up $69 million to $847 million overall.

The health sector received $611.6 million, the Fijian Roads Authority $388 million, and the Police force $240.3 million, all increases.

A package of cost of living measures costing the government $800 million has also been announced. This includes a value-added tax (VAT) cut from 15 percent to 12.5 percent on goods and services.

Various import duties, which firms pay for goods from overseas, have been cut, such as  chicken pieces and parts (from 42 to 15 percent) and frozen fish (from 15 to 0 percent).

A subsidy to reduce bus fares by 10 percent was announced, alongside a 3 percent increase in salaries for civil servants, both beginning in August.

Drastic international conditions
In a news conference, Dr Prasad said that responding to difficult global economic shocks was the primary rationale behind the budget.

“This is probably one of the most uncertain global economic environments that we have gone through. There has been no resolution on the tariffs by the United States and the number of countries, big or small,” he said.

“We have never had this kind of interest in Fiji from overseas investors or diaspora, and we are doing a lot more work to get our diaspora to come back.”

When asked why the VAT was cut, reducing government revenue and widening the deficit, Dr Prasad said there was a need to encourage consumer spending.

“If the Middle East crisis deepens and oil prices go up, the first thing that will be affected will be the supply chain . . . prices could go up, people could be affected more.”

On building resilience from global shocks, Dr Prasad said the budget would reduce Fiji’s reliance on tourism, remittances, and international supply chains, by building domestic industry.

“It kills two birds in one [stone]. It addresses any big shock we might get . . .  plus it also helps the people who would be affected.”

In their Pacific Economic Update, the World Bank projected economic growth of 2.6 percent in 2025, after a slump from 7.5 percent in 2023 to 3.8 percent in 2024.

Senior World Bank economist Ekaterine Vashakmadze told RNZ that Fiji was an interesting case.

“Fiji is one of the countries that suffered the sharpest shock [post-covid] . . .  because tourism stopped.”

“On the other hand, Fiji was one of the first countries in the Pacific to recover fully in terms of the output to pre-pandemic level.”

Deficit too high — opposition
Opposition members have hit out at the government over the scale of the spend, and whether it would translate into outcomes.

Opposition MP Alvick Maharaj, in a statement to local media outlet Duavata News, referred to the larger deficit as “deeply troubling”.

“The current trajectory is concerning, and the government must change its fiscal strategy to one that is truly sustainable.”

“The way the budget is being presented, it’s like the government is trying to show that in one year Fiji will become a developed country.”

MP Ketal Lal on social media called the budget “a desperate cloak for scandal” designed to appeal to voters ahead of elections in 2026.

“This is what happens when a government governs by pressure instead of principle. The people have been crying out for years. The Opposition has consistently raised concerns about the crushing cost of living but they only act when it becomes politically necessary. And even then, it’s never enough.”

He also pointed out, regarding the 3 percent increase in civil servants salaries, that someone earning $30,000 a year would only see a pay increase of $900 per year.

This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/fijis-dr-prasad-unveils-4-8b-budget-as-deficit-widens/feed/ 0 541879
 ‘This Isn’t Just About Policy, It’s About What Kind of Nation We Want to Be’: CounterSpin interview with LaToya Parker on Trump budget’s racial impact https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/this-isnt-just-about-policy-its-about-what-kind-of-nation-we-want-to-be-counterspin-interview-with-latoya-parker-on-trump-budgets-racial-impact/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/this-isnt-just-about-policy-its-about-what-kind-of-nation-we-want-to-be-counterspin-interview-with-latoya-parker-on-trump-budgets-racial-impact/#respond Fri, 27 Jun 2025 17:43:21 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046254  

Janine Jackson interviewed the Joint Center’s LaToya Parker about the Trump budget’s racial impacts for the June 20, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

DowJones MarketWatch: Most Americans can’t afford life anymore — and they just don’t matter to the economy like they once did

MarketWatch (3/7/25)

Janine Jackson: Most Americans Can’t Afford Life Anymore” is the matter-of-fact headline over a story on Dow Jones MarketWatch. You might think that’s a “stop the presses” story, but apparently, for corporate news, it’s just one item among others these days.

The lived reality is, of course, not just a nightmare, but a crime, perpetrated by the most powerful and wealthy on the rest of us. As we marshal a response, it’s important to see the ways that we are not all suffering in the same ways, that anti-Black racism in this country’s decision-making is not a bug, but a feature, and not reducible to anything else. What’s more, efforts to reduce or dissolve racial inequities, to set them aside just for the moment, really just wind up erasing them.

So how do we shape a resistance to this massive transfer of wealth, while acknowledging that it takes intentionality for all of us to truly benefit?

LaToya Parker is a senior researcher at the Joint Center for Political and Economic Studies, and co-author, with Joint Center president Dedrick Asante-Muhammad, of the recent piece “This Federal Budget Will Be a Disaster for Black Workers.” She joins us now by phone from Virginia. Welcome to CounterSpin, LaToya Parker.

LaToya Parker: Thank you so much for having me.

JJ: I just heard Tavis Smiley, with the relevant reference to Martin Luther King, saying: “Budgets are moral documents.” Budgets can harm or heal materially, and they also send a message about priorities: what matters, who matters. When you and Dedrick Asante-Muhammad looked at the Trump budget bill that the House passed, you wrote that, “racially, the impact is stark”—for Black people and for Black workers in particular. I know that it’s more than one thing, but tell us what you are looking to lift up for people that they might not see.

OtherWords: This Federal Budget Will Be a Disaster for Black Workers

OtherWords (5/28/25)

LP: Sure. Thank you so much for raising that. This bill is more than numbers. It’s a moral document, like you mentioned, that reveals our nation’s priorities. What stands out is a reverse wealth transfer. The ultra-wealthy get billions in tax breaks, while Black families lose the very programs that have historically provided pathways to the middle class.

JJ: You just said “historic pathways.” You can’t do economics without history. So wealth, home ownership—just static reporting doesn’t explain, really, that you can’t start people in a hole and then say, “Well, now the Earth is flat. So what’s wrong with you?” What are some of those programs that you’re talking about that would be impacted?

LP: For instance, nearly one-third of Black Americans rely on Medicaid. These cuts will limit access to vital care, including maternal health, elder care and mental health services.

Nearly 25% of Black households depend on SNAP, compared to under 8% of white households. SNAP cuts will hit Black families hardest, worsening food insecurities.

But in terms of federal workforce attacks, Black Americans are overrepresented in the public sector, 18.7% of the federal workforce, and over a third in the South. So massive agency cuts threaten thousands of stable, middle-class jobs, undermining one of the most successful civil rights victories in American history.

Joint Center's LaToya Parker

LaToya Parker: “The ultra-wealthy get billions in tax breaks, while Black families lose the very programs that have historically provided pathways to the middle class.”

So if I was to focus on the reverse wealth transfer, as we clearly lift up in the article, the House-passed reconciliation bill is a massive transfer of wealth from working families to the ultra-wealthy. It eliminates the estate tax, which currently only applies to estates worth more than $13.99 million per person, or nearly $28 million per couple. That’s just 1% of estates. So 99.9% of families, especially Black families, will never benefit from this.

Black families hold less than 5% of the US wealth, despite being over 13% of households. The median white household has 10 times the wealth of the median Black household. Repealing the estate tax subsidizes dynastic wealth for the majority white top 1%, and does nothing for the vast majority of Black families who are far less likely to inherit significant wealth.

JJ: I feel like that wealth disconnection, and I’ve spoken with Dedrick Asante-Muhammad about this in the past, there’s a misunderstanding or just an erasure of history in the conversation about wealth, and Why don’t Black families have wealth? Why can’t they just give their kids enough money to go to school? And it sounds like it’s about Black families not valuing savings or something. But of course, we have a history of white-supremacist discrimination in lending and loaning and home ownership, and in all kinds of things that lead us to this situation that we’re in today. And you can’t move forward without recognizing that.

LP: Absolutely. Absolutely.

JJ: I remember reading a story years ago that said, “Here’s the best workplaces for women.” And it was kind of like, “Well, if you hate discrimination, these companies are good.” Reporting, I think, can make it seem as though folks are just sitting around thinking, “Well, what job should I get? Where should I get a job?” As though we were just equally situated economic actors.

But that doesn’t look anything like life. We are not consumers of employment. Media could do a different job of helping people understand the way things work.

LP: Absolutely. And I think that’s why it’s so important that you’re raising this issue. In fact, we bring it up in our article, in terms of cuts to the federal workforce and benefits. So, for instance, to pay for these tax breaks to the wealthy, the bill slashes benefits for federal employees, and it guts civil service protections, saving just $5 billion a year in the bill that costs trillions, right?

So just thinking about that, Black employees make up, like I said before, 18.7% of the federal workforce, thanks to decades of civil rights progress and anti-discrimination law. Federal jobs have long provided higher wages, stronger benefits and greater job security for Black workers than much of the private sector.

And the DMV alone, the DC/Maryland/Virginia region, more than 450,000 federal workers are employed, with Black workers making up over a quarter in DC/Maryland/Virginia. In the South, well over a third of the federal workers in states like Mississippi, Alabama, South Carolina and Louisiana are Black. In Georgia, it’s nearly 44%. So federal employment has been a cornerstone for Black middle-class advancement, helping families build generational wealth, send children to college and retire with dignity.

JJ: And so when we hear calls about, “Let’s thin out the federal government, because these are all bureaucrats who are making more money than they should,” it lands different when you understand that so many Black people found advancement, found opportunity through the federal government when they were being denied it at every other point. And it only came from explicit policies, anti-discriminatory policies, that opened up federal employment, that’s been so meaningful.

LP: Exactly. Exactly. Federal retirement benefits like the pensions and annuities are a rare source of guaranteed income. Nearly half of Black families have zero retirement savings, making these benefits critical to avoiding poverty in retirement. So these policies amount to a reverse wealth transfer, enriching wealthy heirs while undermining the public servants and systems that have historically offered a path forward for Black workers. Instead of gutting the benefits and eliminating the estate tax, we should invest in systems that have provided pathways to the middle class for Black workers, and expand these opportunities beyond government employment. Ultimately, this isn’t just about policy, it’s about what kind of nation we want to be, right? So that’s what it’s all about.

JJ: And I’ll just add to that with a final note. Of course, I’m a media critic, but I think lots of folks could understand why I reacted to this line from this MarketWatch piece that said, “Years of elevated prices have strained all but the wealthiest consumers, and low- and middle-income Americans say something needs to change.” Well, for me, I’m hearing that, and I’m like, “So it’s only low- and middle-income people, it’s only the people at the sharp end, who want anything to change.”

And, first of all, we’re supposed to see that as a fair fight, the vast majority of people against the wealthiest. But also, it makes it seem like such a zero-sum game, as though there isn’t any shared idea among a lot of people who want racial and economic equity in this country. It sells it to people as like, “Oh, well, we could make life livable for poor people or for Black people, but you, reader, are going to have to give something up.” It’s such a small, mean version of what I believe a lot of folks have in their hearts, in terms of a vision going forward in this country. And that’s just my gripe.

LP: I agree. These aren’t luxury programs. They’re lifelines across the board for all Americans. The working poor—if you like to call it that, some like to call it that—cutting them is just cruel, right? It’s economically destructive, it’s irresponsible. Fiscally, states would lose $1.1 trillion over 10 years, risking over a million jobs in healthcare and food industries alone. So I agree 100%.

JJ: All right, we’ll end on that note for now. We’ve been speaking with LaToya Parker, senior researcher at the Joint Center. They’re online at JointCenter.org, and you can find her piece, with Joint Center president Dedrick Asante-Muhammad, on the impact of the federal budget on Black workers at OtherWords.org. Thank you so much, LaToya Parker, for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

LP: Thank you again for having me.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/this-isnt-just-about-policy-its-about-what-kind-of-nation-we-want-to-be-counterspin-interview-with-latoya-parker-on-trump-budgets-racial-impact/feed/ 0 541561
60+ Organizations Urge Senate to Vote No on Budget Bill that Would Raise Costs for Americans, Increase Transportation Pollution https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/25/60-organizations-urge-senate-to-vote-no-on-budget-bill-that-would-raise-costs-for-americans-increase-transportation-pollution/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/25/60-organizations-urge-senate-to-vote-no-on-budget-bill-that-would-raise-costs-for-americans-increase-transportation-pollution/#respond Wed, 25 Jun 2025 20:06:42 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/60-organizations-urge-senate-to-vote-no-on-budget-bill-that-would-raise-costs-for-americans-increase-transportation-pollution Today, dozens of environmental, consumer, labor, and community organizations representing millions of members sent a letter to the Senate urging lawmakers to vote no on Donald Trump’s dangerous so-called “One, Big Beautiful” reconciliation bill that will provide tax cuts for billionaires and corporate polluters while cutting clean energy jobs and abruptly getting rid of critical tax credits for transitioning to cleaner cars, trucks, and buses.

The letter focuses on the attacks on clean transportation in the bill, including the rescission of many clean transportation programs funded by the Inflation Reduction Act and Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act; the termination of clean vehicle tax credits that would risk hundreds of thousands of jobs; and more.

In response to the release of the letter, Sierra Club Clean Transportation for All Director Katherine García released the following statement:

“There’s nothing beautiful about toxic air pollution, saddling drivers with higher costs, and rolling back progress on clean transportation. At this moment, as half of the country is affected by an intense heat wave, we need to focus on investing in climate solutions and holding polluters accountable. The previous Congress had funded innovative and strategic programs to reduce costs, protect American jobs, and drive the competitiveness of the U.S. vehicle industry, and they’re working in communities across the nation in Republican and Democratic districts. This disastrous bill threatens to strip away that progress in giveaways to billionaires and corporate polluters. We urge all Senators to vote one, big beautiful no on this bill.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/25/60-organizations-urge-senate-to-vote-no-on-budget-bill-that-would-raise-costs-for-americans-increase-transportation-pollution/feed/ 0 541108
Michael Galant on Sanctions & Immigration, LaToya Parker on Budget’s Racial Impacts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/20/michael-galant-on-sanctions-immigration-latoya-parker-on-budgets-racial-impacts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/20/michael-galant-on-sanctions-immigration-latoya-parker-on-budgets-racial-impacts/#respond Fri, 20 Jun 2025 15:43:23 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046112  

Right-click here to download this episode (“Save link as…”).

 

CEPR: Economic Sanctions: A Root Cause of Migration

CEPR (3/3/25)

This week on CounterSpin: We’ve always heard that racists hate quotas, yet Stephen Miller’s “3000 a day however which way” mandate is terrorizing immigrant communities—brown immigrant communities—around the country. The response from people of conscience can look many ways: linking arms around people in danger, absolutely; vigorously disputing misinformation about immigrants, whether hateful or patronizing, also. But another piece is gaining a deeper, broader understanding of migration. News media could help answer one implied question—“Why is anyone trying to come to the US anyway?”—by grappling with the role of conditions the US has largely created in the places people are driven from. We’ll talk about that largely missing piece from elite media’s immigration coverage with Michael Galant, senior research and outreach associate at the Center for Economic and Policy Research.

 

Inequality: This Federal Budget Will Be a Disaster for Black Workers

Inequality.org (5/29/25)

Also on the show: Anyone who pays attention and cares can see that the Trump budget bill is a brazen transfer of resources from those that are trying to meet basic needs to those that can’t remember how many houses they own. But corporate reporting rarely breaks out economic policy in terms of how it affects different people—especially how it affects communities for whom they show no consistent concern. Economic policy is itself racialized, gendered, regionalized, targeted. Humanistic journalism would help us see that.

LaToya Parker is a senior researcher at the Joint Center for Political and Economic Studies, and co-author, with Joint Center president Dedrick Asante-Muhammad, of the recent piece “This Federal Budget Will Be a Disaster for Black Workers.”

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/20/michael-galant-on-sanctions-immigration-latoya-parker-on-budgets-racial-impacts/feed/ 0 540100
45 Groups Urge Senate Republican Leadership to Follow the Rules on Budget Bill https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/17/45-groups-urge-senate-republican-leadership-to-follow-the-rules-on-budget-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/17/45-groups-urge-senate-republican-leadership-to-follow-the-rules-on-budget-bill/#respond Tue, 17 Jun 2025 20:07:04 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/45-groups-urge-senate-republican-leadership-to-follow-the-rules-on-budget-bill Senate Majority Leader John Thune (R-S.D.) and the Republican majority should follow the guidance of the Senate Parliamentarian on the tax and budget bill, 45 groups said in a letter sent today.

The Parliamentarian is tasked with issuing rulings to determine which provisions of the bill are subject to the “Byrd rule” and thus not eligible to be passed by simple majority using the reconciliation process. However, Thune and the Senate Republican majority recently took steps to override the Parliamentarian’s guidance on the Congressional Review Act, another fast-track legislative mechanism, to pass a measure by simple majority that otherwise would have required 60 votes.

“While the signatories to this letter have a range of views on the ongoing utility of the Senate filibuster, there is a unifying principle upon which we all can agree: the law as it stands must be followed,” the letter reads. “Indeed, you acknowledged as much earlier this Congress, when asked whether you would advise against moving to override the Senate Parliamentarian’s determinations under Byrd, stating, ‘[T]hat’s totally akin to killing the filibuster. We can’t go there. People need to understand that.’ This public stance would be heartening, had you not made similar assurances on maintaining the integrity of CRA process and followed them up by improperly extending that Act’s expedited procedures to the disapproval of any executive branch action, forging a primrose path around the filibuster in the process. Such depredations on law, precedent, and the institution of the Senate must end.”

“The Senate majority has already demonstrated it is willing to follow or ignore the rules based entirely on their preferences. But lives hang in the balance depending on the outcome of this bill, and it would be inexcusable for the majority to again burn the rulebook in the service of the destructive Trump agenda,” added Lisa Gilbert, co-president of Public Citizen.

“The leadership in the Senate is heading down a dangerous path of ignoring the rules to get what it wants. If the Senate majority disregards the existing rules again for its massive tax bill, that would do incalculable damage to law, precedent, and the institution of the Senate,” added Kyle Jones, director of federal affairs at the Natural Resources Defense Council.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/17/45-groups-urge-senate-republican-leadership-to-follow-the-rules-on-budget-bill/feed/ 0 539466
The Budget Bill Gun Law Change Threatens Lives https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/11/the-budget-bill-gun-law-change-threatens-lives/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/11/the-budget-bill-gun-law-change-threatens-lives/#respond Wed, 11 Jun 2025 21:36:35 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/the-budget-bill-gun-law-change-threatens-lives-dix-20250611/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Griffin Dix.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/11/the-budget-bill-gun-law-change-threatens-lives/feed/ 0 538106
‘Trump and Musk Are Attacking the Ability of Government to Protect Ordinary People’: CounterSpin interview with Jeff Hauser on DOGE after Musk https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/09/trump-and-musk-are-attacking-the-ability-of-government-to-protect-ordinary-people-counterspin-interview-with-jeff-hauser-on-doge-after-musk/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/09/trump-and-musk-are-attacking-the-ability-of-government-to-protect-ordinary-people-counterspin-interview-with-jeff-hauser-on-doge-after-musk/#respond Mon, 09 Jun 2025 22:35:35 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9045921  

Janine Jackson interviewed the Revolving Door Project’s Jeff Hauser about DOGE “after” Elon Musk for the June 6, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

USA Today: Elon Musk leaves the Trump administration, capping his run as federal government slasher

USA Today (5/28/25)

Janine Jackson: “A Bruised Musk Leaves Washington,” the New York Times told readers. USA Today said, “Musk Leaves Trump Administration, Capping His Run as Federal Government Slasher.” The Washington Post said “his departure marks the end of a turbulent chapter.”

While most outlets acknowledge that the impacts of Musk’s time as “special government employee” are still in effect, and even that many of the minions he placed are still hard at work, the focus was still very much on the great man—What drives him? What will he do next?—rather than on the structures and systems whose flaws are highlighted by the maneuvers of Musk and the so-called Department Of Government Efficiency.

Our guest says now is not the time to take our eye off the ball. Jeff Hauser is the executive director of the Revolving Door Project. He joins us now by phone. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Jeff Hauser.

Jeff Hauser: Hi, great to be here.

JJ: I feel as though we spoke recently because we spoke recently, but for the press corps, there’s a new story. To imagine, as some headlines suggest, that Elon Musk has packed up his toys and left town, so some kind of chapter has concluded—that’s not just inaccurate, but rather worrisomely so, don’t you think?

JH: Absolutely. Elon Musk brought dozens of people with him to Washington, DC, to government. They were very homogeneous, in the sense that none of them were qualified to work at senior levels of government, and they all were motivated by a hatred for public service and a hatred for government protecting ordinary people from the whims of corporate America.

Politico: Inside Elon Musk and Russ Vought’s quiet alliance

Politico (3/24/25)

And they remain in government right now. They’re implementing Musk’s agenda, which happens to be pretty similar to Russell Vought’s agenda, which happens to be very similar to Project 2025’s agenda, which was an agenda that Donald Trump disavowed, but is obviously governing with.

JJ: Talk about Russell Vought a little bit. I know he’s head of the Office of Management and Budget, but what else do we need to know about him, in this context?

JH: Russell Vought is sort of like Elon Musk, if Elon Musk had been paying attention to politics for a couple of decades, and minus the allegations of ketamine usage. Russell Vought brings a unique combination of hard-right social views and hard libertarian views on economic policy. He is the personal marriage of all the sort of worst tendencies within the Republican coalition, and he knows what he’s doing.

He had a senior role in the Trump administration go-around one. He thinks that they underperformed, that they could have attacked government more, they could have made the country even “freer” and more supportive of the richest, most rapacious corporations; and he’s determined that they succeed at doing so again. And he spent the four-year interregnum planning, in exquisite detail, how to bring about the devastation of American government–of the professionalization of the American government that has been the project for more than 140 years, since the Pendleton Act and the rise of the civil service in the early 1880s.

Pro Publica: The October Story That Outlined Exactly What the Trump Administration Would Do to the Federal Bureaucracy

ProPublica (3/20/25)

JJ: ProPublica revealed some speeches Vought gave a little while back, and touching on Project 2025, which he’s an architect of, goes right to what you’re just saying. Part of myriad things they want to do is revive Schedule F, which would make it easier to fire large groups of government workers who right now have civil service protections. But what struck me was the quote; this is Vought:

We want the bureaucrats to be traumatically affected. When they wake up in the morning, we want them to not want to go to work, because they are increasingly viewed as the villains. We want their funding to be shut down so that the EPA can’t do all of the rules against our energy industry, because they have no bandwidth financially to do so.

I have a feeling if that quote were put in front of people, it might provide some light on the project here.

JH: Absolutely. It was hiding in plain sight. They told us what they were going to do, but Donald Trump disavowed it. Donald Trump said, I’m not going to run on Project 2025. This stuff is so extreme. It’s crazy. Obviously I’m not going to do it. But they’re doing it, note for note.

And I can tell you, as somebody who not only does politics but lives in Washington, DC, when you’re in the community, there are a lot of traumatized public servants who really, deeply believe in the mission of their agencies, people who could have made a lot more money and had easier, more comfortable lives outside of government service, but are in government for the right reasons. And they are genuinely traumatized right now, and they have a lot of capacity to do good in the world that was underappreciated. Now they are being radically disempowered, and it’s going to take a very long time; it’s going to take a lot of great energy, to ever rebuild this government that Russell Vought, Elon Musk and Donald Trump are destroying.

JJ: I think it’s so interesting how you say that, even though this Trump administration is acting out the points of Project 2025, the story is still, “Oh, he disavowed it.” And it really highlights the way media have difficulty focusing on what’s happening when they’re so busy listening to what folks are saying, and what other folks are saying about what those folks are saying. But what we really need them to do is to track actual actions.

JH: Absolutely. It’d be great if the media were more focused on letting people understand what it is that the government can be doing, ordinarily does, is doing and should be doing.

I don’t think people have a good understanding of government. Even political junkies who can tell you a lot about Nebraska’s Second District, and the chances of Democrats taking back that house seat, and how that one electoral vote might influence the Electoral College in the presidential cycle—people who know that level of minutia can’t really tell you what the Office of Management and Budget does.

PBS: Elon Musk lost popularity as he gained power in Washington, AP-NORC poll finds

AP (via PBS, 4/27/25)

They almost certainly can’t tell you what OIRA, which is a subset of the Office of Management and Budget that focuses on regulatory issues, does. They wouldn’t have been able to tell you about what the civil service does, or the role of the EPA as law enforcement against corporate criminality. They don’t know these things. The media do not convey these things.

And so if there is an abstract threat about government bureaucrats, even political junkies don’t understand, definitely, what that will mean for their real lives. And I think it’s going to become, unfortunately, painfully clear in the coming years what that means. But the process is not immediate, and it’s incumbent upon the media to, as things go wrong, show the causality, show how these bad things were made much more likely to occur by Trump’s actions, by Musk’s actions, by Vought’s actions, by their disdain for public service, and their embrace of corporate titans being able to do whatever they want to do.

JJ: I want to just ask you, finally, what Revolving Door is up to, but I just saw this quote from AP, which said Musk “succeeded in providing a dose of shock therapy to the federal government, but he has fallen short of other goals.” And we’re supposed to take away that providing “shock therapy” to the federal government is somehow benign or necessary or a good thing; it’s remarkable.

But let me ask you, finally, what Revolving Door is up to, and how you hope journalists and others can use the tools and the information that you’re providing?

Jeff Hauser

Jeff Hauser: “Taking seriously the notion that Musk was some sort of deficit hawk is part of the inanity of American political coverage.”

JH: Yeah, I think the quote really actually gets at a lot of what the Revolving Door Project is up to, because we do two types of work. One is pushing back on Trump, on creeping authoritarianism, and rapacious oligarchs destroying the government so they can pillage society.

So we do that work, but we also fight back against neoliberals within the Democratic Party. We’re a nonpartisan organization, and we attack neoliberalism in all of its many forms. And the idea that government required shock therapy, that there were too many people working in government, even though the number of people working in government is the same as it was two or three generations ago, when America’s population was half of what it currently is.

But the notion of this is a nonpartisan idea, that government required shock therapy: That is the marriage of Democratic neoliberals and Republican neoliberals, and that is what allowed Musk and DOGE and Trump to happen. It’s that belief that things really were broken, that there was some legitimacy to the concept of DOGE from the jump. No one should have ever validated the idea of DOGE, or talked about, “Here’s my vision for what government efficiency pursuits would happen.”

Because Musk’s goals were not to cut government spending. In fact, Silicon Valley wants way more financial support for their artificial intelligence data centers and the like. They want subsidies for all sorts of tech projects, and they want a bigger military industrial complex that is more heavily dependent on Silicon Valley. So they want lots of spending, they just want it on their priorities. They want to attack government workers, because those government workers enforce the rules that limit and constrain corporate oligarchs.

So that’s what they wanted. They did not want to reduce the deficit, and taking seriously the notion that Musk was some sort of deficit hawk is part of the inanity of American political coverage. And I’d like the media to be less credulous about people who have obvious economic stakes in public policy, and pretending that the rhetoric that they deploy, especially when they’re known liars, is something that we should take seriously.

Rolling Stone: The Big List of Elon Musk’s Hyperbole, Evasions, and Outright Lies

Rolling Stone (8/19/23)

JJ: And so the work you’re doing is tracking the ins and outs of what these predations have meant, and what they could mean, and how to stay on top of them?

JH: Yes. We are cataloging under our DOGE Watch feature the ways in which Trump and Musk are attacking the ability of government to protect ordinary people. And we’re also monitoring, separately—we have a website, Hackwatch.us—how ostensible Democratic-aligned, center-left neoliberal pundits, people like Ezra Klein and Matt Yglesias and Derek Thompson, are making things easier for corporate oligarchs, are carrying water for Silicon Valley and are pursuing neoliberalism, because we’re against neoliberalism in all forms.

JJ: All right, we’ll end on that note—for now. We’ve been speaking with Jeff Hauser from the Revolving Door Project. Jeff Hauser, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

JH: It was a pleasure. Thanks for having me.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/09/trump-and-musk-are-attacking-the-ability-of-government-to-protect-ordinary-people-counterspin-interview-with-jeff-hauser-on-doge-after-musk/feed/ 0 537611
Trump Budget Bill Would Lead to 51,000 More Deaths Per Year, as Health Experts Urge Medicare for All https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/trump-budget-bill-would-lead-to-51000-more-deaths-per-year-as-health-experts-urge-medicare-for-all/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/trump-budget-bill-would-lead-to-51000-more-deaths-per-year-as-health-experts-urge-medicare-for-all/#respond Fri, 06 Jun 2025 15:22:08 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=bb8221bbe1bacdd42c06dae376aed442
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/trump-budget-bill-would-lead-to-51000-more-deaths-per-year-as-health-experts-urge-medicare-for-all/feed/ 0 537031
Jeff Hauser on DOGE After Musk, Katya Schwenk on Boeing Deal https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/jeff-hauser-on-doge-after-musk-katya-schwenk-on-boeing-deal/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/jeff-hauser-on-doge-after-musk-katya-schwenk-on-boeing-deal/#respond Fri, 06 Jun 2025 15:18:23 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9045894  

Right-click here to download this episode (“Save link as…”).

 

White House photo of Elon Musk's farewell press conference with Donald Trump.

White House photo (5/30/25) of Elon Musk’s farewell press conference with President Donald Trump.

This week on CounterSpin: An email we got this week tells us: “The radical left is up in arms about DOGE. Just think about it—DOGE has exposed BILLIONS in wasteful spending, and is rooting out fraud and corruption at every turn. They’re making the government work for the people of this great nation once again, as the founders intended, and that is why the left simply can’t stand DOGE.” The ask is that we fill out a survey that represents “our once-in-a-lifetime chance to slash the bloated, woke and wasteful policies in the federal government. Thank you, and God Bless, Speaker Mike Johnson. (Paid for by the NRCC and not authorized by any candidate or candidate’s committee.)”

Reports are that Elon Musk is leaving government, going back to make Tesla great again or something. But if that’s true, why did we get this weird, sad email? We’ll talk about how to miss Musk when he won’t go away with Jeff Hauser, executive director of the Revolving Door Project.

 

Lever: Could These Fraud Allegations Land Boeing In A Criminal Trial?

Lever (5/17/24)

Also on the show: The New York Times has its stories on the Boeing “non-prosecution agreement” in the “Business” section, suggesting that whether planes drop out of the sky is mostly a concern for investors. A huge corporation paying money to dodge criminal charges is evidently not a general interest story. And the families and friends of the hundreds of people dead because of Boeing’s admittedly knowing malfeasance? They’re just another county heard from. If you want reporting that calls crimes “crimes,” even if they’re committed by corporations, you need to look outside of corporate media. We’ll hear about Boeing from independent journalist Katya Schwenk.

 

Plus Janine Jackson takes a quick look at recent press coverage of trans youth in sports and gender-affirming care.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by CounterSpin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/jeff-hauser-on-doge-after-musk-katya-schwenk-on-boeing-deal/feed/ 0 537009
Trump Budget Bill Would Lead to 51,000 More Deaths Each Year, as Health Experts Urge Medicare for All https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/trump-budget-bill-would-lead-to-51000-more-deaths-each-year-as-health-experts-urge-medicare-for-all/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/trump-budget-bill-would-lead-to-51000-more-deaths-each-year-as-health-experts-urge-medicare-for-all/#respond Fri, 06 Jun 2025 12:27:22 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=8649e18663a631bff39d32846d5fe1e9 Seg2 healthcare

President Donald Trump’s “big, beautiful bill” now before the Senate could result in over 51,000 preventable deaths each year in the United States. That’s according to public health experts at Yale and the University of Pennsylvania, who sent a letter warning about the bill’s impact to the Senate Finance Committee. An estimated 16 million people stand to lose their health coverage as a result of the changes in the bill, which “imposes onerous paperwork and fails to safeguard healthcare tax credits,” says Alison Galvani, director of the Center for Infectious Disease Modeling at Yale and one of the signatories to the letter. She also notes universal healthcare would have the opposite effect and save tens of thousands of lives each year. “There are a lot of ways we can improve how expensive our healthcare is, but taking healthcare away from people is not how to do it,” says Galvani.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/06/trump-budget-bill-would-lead-to-51000-more-deaths-each-year-as-health-experts-urge-medicare-for-all/feed/ 0 536999
Punishment for Te Pāti Māori over Treaty haka stands – but MPs ‘will not be silenced’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/05/punishment-for-te-pati-maori-over-treaty-haka-stands-but-mps-will-not-be-silenced/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/05/punishment-for-te-pati-maori-over-treaty-haka-stands-but-mps-will-not-be-silenced/#respond Thu, 05 Jun 2025 09:42:54 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=115644 RNZ News

Aotearoa New Zealand’s Parliament has confirmed the unprecedented punishments proposed for opposition indigenous Te Pāti Māori MPs who performed a haka in protest against the Treaty Principles Bill.

Te Pāti Māori co-leaders Debbie Ngarewa-Packer and Rawiri Waititi will be suspended for 21 days, and MP Hana-Rawhiti Maipi-Clarke suspended for seven days, taking effect immediately.

Opposition parties tried to reject the recommendation, but did not have the numbers to vote it down.


Te Pati Maori MPs speak after being suspended.  Video: RNZ/Mark Papalii

The heated debate to consider the proposed punishment came to an end just before Parliament was due to rise.

Waititi moved to close the debate and no party disagreed, ending the possibility of it carrying on in the next sitting week.

Leader of the House Chris Bishop — the only National MP who spoke — kicked off the debate earlier in the afternoon saying it was “regrettable” some MPs did not vote on the Budget two weeks ago.

Bishop had called a vote ahead of Budget Day to suspend the privileges report debate to ensure the Te Pāti Māori MPs could take part in the Budget, but not all of them turned up.

Robust, rowdy debate
The debate was robust and rowdy with both the deputy speaker Barbara Kuriger and temporary speaker Tangi Utikare repeatedly having to ask MPs to quieten down.

Flashback: Te Pāti Māori MP Hana-Rawhiti Maipa-Clarke led a haka in Parliament on 14 November 2024
Flashback: Te Pāti Māori MP Hana-Rawhiti Maipa-Clarke led a haka in Parliament and tore up a copy of the Treaty Principles Bill at the first reading on 14 November 2024 . . . . a haka is traditionally used as an indigenous show of challenge, support or sorrow. Image: RNZ/Samuel Rillstone/APR screenshot

Tākuta Ferris spoke first for Te Pāti Māori, saying the haka was a “signal of humanity” and a “raw human connection”.

He said Māori had faced acts of violence for too long and would not be silenced by “ignorance or bigotry”.

“Is this really us in 2025, Aotearoa New Zealand?” he asked the House.

“Everyone can see the racism.”

He said the Privileges Committee’s recommendations were not without precedent, noting the fact Labour MP Peeni Henare, who also participated in the haka, did not face suspension.

Te Pāti Māori MP Tākuta Ferris speaking during the parliamentary debate on Te Pāti Māori MPs' punishment for Treaty Principles haka on 5 June 2025.
MP Tākuta Ferris spoke for Te Pāti Māori. Image: RNZ/Samuel Rillstone

Henare attended the committee and apologised, which contributed to his lesser sanction.

‘Finger gun’ gesture
MP Parmjeet Parmar — a member of the Committee — was first to speak on behalf of ACT, and referenced the hand gesture — or “finger gun” — that Te Pāti Māori co-leader Debbie Ngarewa-Packer made in the direction of ACT MPs during the haka.

Parmar told the House debate could be used to disagree on ideas and issues, and there was not a place for intimidating physical gestures.

Greens co-leader Marama Davidson said New Zealand’s Parliament could lead the world in terms of involving the indigenous people.

She said the Green Party strongly rejected the committee’s recommendations and proposed their amendment of removing suspensions, and asked the Te Pāti Māori MPs be censured instead.

Davidson said the House had evolved in the past — such as the inclusion of sign language and breast-feeding in the House.

She said the Greens were challenging the rules, and did not need an apology from Te Pāti Māori.

Winston Peters says Te Pāti Māori and the Green Party speeches so far showed "no sincerity".
Foreign Minister and NZ First party leader Winston Peters called Te Pāti Māori “a bunch of extremists”. Image: RNZ/Samuel Rillstone

NZ First leader Winston Peters said Te Pāti Māori and the Green Party speeches so far showed “no sincerity, saying countless haka had taken place in Parliament but only after first consulting the Speaker.

“They told the media they were going to do it, but they didn’t tell the Speaker did they?

‘Bunch of extremists’
“The Māori party are a bunch of extremists,” Peters said, “New Zealand has had enough of them”.

Peters was made to apologise after taking aim at Waititi, calling him “the one in the cowboy hat” with “scribbles on his face” [in reference to his traditional indigenous moko — tatoo]. He continued afterward, describing Waititi as possessing “anti-Western values”.

Labour’s Willie Jackson congratulated Te Pāti Māori for the “greatest exhibition of our culture in the House in my lifetime”.

Jackson said the Treaty bill was a great threat, and was met by a great haka performance. He was glad the ACT Party was intimidated, saying that was the whole point of doing the haka.

He also called for a bit of compromise from Te Pāti Māori — encouraging them to say sorry — but reiterated Labour’s view the sanctions were out of proportion with past indiscretions in the House.

Greens co-leader Chlöe Swarbrick says this "would be a joke if it wasn't so serious".
Green Party co-leader Chlöe Swarbrick said the prime minister was personally responsible if the proposed sanctions went ahead. Image: RNZ/Samuel Rillstone

Greens co-leader Chlöe Swarbrick said the debate “would be a joke if it wasn’t so serious”.

“Get an absolute grip,” she said to the House, arguing the prime minister “is personally responsible” if the House proceeds with the committee’s proposed sanctions.

Eye of the beholder
She accused National’s James Meager of “pointing a finger gun” at her — the same gesture coalition MPs had criticised Ngarewa-Packer for during her haka. The Speaker accepted he had not intended to; Swarbrick said it was an example where the interpretation could be in the eye of the beholder.

She said if the government could “pick a punishment out of thin air” that was “not a democracy”, putting New Zealand in very dangerous territory.

An emotional Maipi-Clarke said she had been silent on the issue for a long time, the party’s voices in haka having sent shockwaves around the world. She questioned whether that was why the MPs were being punished.

“Since when did being proud of your culture make you racist?”

“We will never be silenced, and we will never be lost,” she said, calling the Treaty Principles bill a “dishonourable vote”.

She had apologised to the Speaker and accepted the consequence laid down on the day, but refused to apologise. She listed other incidents in Parliament that resulted in no punishment.


NZ Parliament TV: Te Pāti Māori Privileges committee debate.  Video: RNZ

Maipi-Clarke called for the Treaty of Waitangi to be recognised in the Constitution Act, and for MPs to be required to honour it by law.

‘Clear pathway forward’
“The pathway forward has never been so clear,” she said.

ACT’s Nicole McKee said there were excuses being made for “bad behaviour”, that the House was for making laws and having discussions, and “this is not about the haka, this is about process”.

She told the House she had heard no good ideas from the Te Pāti Māori, who she said resorted to intimidation when they did not get their way, but the MPs needed to “grow up” and learn to debate issues. She hoped 21 days would give them plenty of time to think about their behaviour.

Labour MP and former Speaker Adrian Rurawhe started by saying there were “no winners in this debate”, and it was clear to him it was the government, not the Parliament, handing out the punishments.

He said the proposed sanctions set a precedent for future penalties, and governments might use it as a way to punish opposition, imploring National to think twice.

He also said an apology from Te Pāti Māori would “go a long way”, saying they had a “huge opportunity” to have a legacy in the House, but it was their choice — and while many would agree with the party there were rules and “you can’t have it both ways”.

Rawiri Waititi
Te Pāti Māori co-leader Rawiri Waititi speaking to the media after the Privileges Committee debate. Image: RNZ/Mark Papalii

Te Pāti Māori co-leader Rawiri Waititi said there had been many instances of misinterpretations of the haka in the House and said it was unclear why they were being punished, “is it about the haka . . . is about the gun gestures?”

“Not one committee member has explained to us where 21 days came from,” he said.

Hat and ‘scribbles’ response
Waititi took aim at Peters over his comments targeting his hat and “scribbles” on his face.

He said the haka was an elevation of indigenous voice and the proposed punishment was a “warning shot from the colonial state that cannot stomach” defiance.

Waititi said that throughout history when Māori did not play ball, the “coloniser government” reached for extreme sanctions, ending with a plea to voters: “Make this a one-term government, enrol, vote”.

He brought out a noose to represent Māori wrongfully put to death in the past, saying “interpretation is a feeling, it is not a fact . . .  you’ve traded a noose for legislation”.

This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/05/punishment-for-te-pati-maori-over-treaty-haka-stands-but-mps-will-not-be-silenced/feed/ 0 536723
"Detention Facilitates Deportation": Trump’s Budget Bill Would Massively Increase ICE Jail Capacity https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/03/detention-facilitates-deportation-trumps-budget-bill-would-massively-increase-ice-jail-capacity-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/03/detention-facilitates-deportation-trumps-budget-bill-would-massively-increase-ice-jail-capacity-2/#respond Tue, 03 Jun 2025 14:32:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7d8187afb0e69d96121bca829495dc96
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/03/detention-facilitates-deportation-trumps-budget-bill-would-massively-increase-ice-jail-capacity-2/feed/ 0 536328
“Detention Facilitates Deportation”: Trump’s Budget Bill Would Massively Increase ICE Jail Capacity https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/03/detention-facilitates-deportation-trumps-budget-bill-would-massively-increase-ice-jail-capacity/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/03/detention-facilitates-deportation-trumps-budget-bill-would-massively-increase-ice-jail-capacity/#respond Tue, 03 Jun 2025 12:39:25 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=455205b1c46fbe770c609189d8edd95a Trifoldsplit

President Donald Trump is pushing Republican senators to back his “big, beautiful bill,” which includes new funding to carry out his mass deportation agenda by hiring additional ICE officers and adding detention space. ICE has already signed new agreements with jails around the country for additional capacity, and confirmed nine deaths in custody since Trump took office. “It really feels like a paradigm-shifting moment,” says Detention Watch Network executive director Silky Shah. “People are being packed into overcrowded cells. People are not getting medical care. They’re in conditions where they’re languishing. And they’re doing everything they can to expand, expand, expand, both here in the U.S. and also seeing people be now detained in third countries abroad.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/03/detention-facilitates-deportation-trumps-budget-bill-would-massively-increase-ice-jail-capacity/feed/ 0 536318
Vietnam communist party budget is the elephant in the room as To Lam cuts costs https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/06/02/vietnam-communist-party-budget/ https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/06/02/vietnam-communist-party-budget/#respond Mon, 02 Jun 2025 20:30:34 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/06/02/vietnam-communist-party-budget/ Read about this topic in Vietnamese.

Since becoming general secretary of the Communist Party of Vietnam, To Lam has drawn international attention with his aggressive plans for cost-cutting within the government but he’s been quiet about another drain on the state budget – the ruling party itself.

After taking office last August, he has moved this year to eliminate and merge ministries and central government agencies, reduce the number of provinces and cities by half, and dismantle district-level administrative units. Tens of thousands of civil servants have already lost their jobs. The Ministry of Interior has estimated that in five years, this will have saved 130 trillion dong (US$5.2 billion at today’s exchange rate) in the state budget.

To Lam’s campaign has been likened to the drastic cuts that U.S. President Donald Trump and tech billionaire Elon Musk have made to U.S. federal agencies through the Department of Government Efficiency.

But when it comes to making savings in Vietnam’s state apparatus, To Lam appears to have hedged his bets.

Vietnam operates under two intertwined systems: the party and the government. Although each has a separate budget, both draw from the same source — taxpayer money. The party, in power since the end of the Vietnam War and the reunification of the country in 1975, exists as a parallel structure to the government and plays the leading role in policymaking and governance.

While the government’s budget is occasionally made public, the party’s finances remain classified under Vietnamese law.

This policy predates To Lam’s leadership. However, given his sweeping efforts to streamline the state apparatus and reduce spending, his silence on the party’s own budget raises questions about how far he’s willing to go on fiscal reform.

Vu Tuong, a professor and expert on Vietnamese politics from the University of Oregon, said data shows that from 2008 to 2015, the Central Party Office’s budget increased steadily.

“Although actual spending figures are not disclosed, the Central Party Office alone saw its planned budget quadruple in seven years — from nearly US$27 million (622 billion dong) in 2008 to about US$105 million (more than 2,400 billion dong) in 2015,” he said.

The office functions as the party’s command center, where the general secretary oversees both party and government operations. From 2011 to 2015, its budget rose by 180 percent — three times higher than the increase in the government office’s budget, according to Vu Tuong. The publication of data on its spending stopped in 2015.

Budget is a secret

Zachary Abuza, an expert on Southeast Asia at the National War College in Washington, noted the lack of transparency.

“The party’s budget is a secret, so researchers must work with imperfect data,” he told Radio Free Asia. He said To Lam is mindful of ballooning recurrent expenditures and has made some attempts to rein them in. For example, the party’s foreign affairs committee has been merged into other entities. However, despite these changes, the party’s overall budget continues to grow.

“While the budgets of government agencies have shrunk or stagnated, the budget for the CPV’s bureaucracy has steadily increased over the past few years, if we count the Fatherland Front, the organization that supports the party’s activities,” Abuza said. CPV stands for the Communist Party of Vietnam.

He said more transparency could help improve the party’s legitimacy, but given its obsession with maintaining supreme power, “it’s hard to see them cutting the party’s budget,” he said.

In 2016, the Vietnam Institute for Economic and Policy Research estimated that the economic cost of maintaining public mass organizations — directly controlled by the Communist Party — ranged from 45,600 to 68,100 billion dong annually (about US$2 billion to US$3 billion at the time). These organizations are intended to fulfill roles that, in democratic countries, would be played by independent civil society groups. To Lam has not indicated whether he intends to cut their funding.

According to Abuza, To Lam’s ongoing radical restructuring of the national government, including the consolidation of five ministries and several government agencies, and the reduction of nearly 50% of the number of provinces, created a rare opportunity to further cut both state and party organizations.

However, the budgets for the party and its supporting organizations are difficult to cut because they are tied to the inherent interests of the bureaucracy, he said.

There may be a political reason behind To Lam’s reluctance to target the party’s spending.

The next National Congress of the Communist Party of Vietnam is approaching in early 2026, when a new generation of leaders will be elected. To Lam, 67, is believed to be seeking another term as general secretary.

“There’s only half-a-year left until the Party Congress,” said Abuza. “So there won’t be any major changes. Normally, spending and policy implementation would be completely locked down by this stage.”

Edited by Mat Pennington.


This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Truong Son for RFA Vietnamese.

]]>
https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/06/02/vietnam-communist-party-budget/feed/ 0 536184
‘Work Requirements Have Produced the Same Results Over and Over Again’: CounterSpin interview with Bryce Covert on work requirements https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/30/work-requirements-have-produced-the-same-results-over-and-over-again-counterspin-interview-with-bryce-covert-on-work-requirements/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/30/work-requirements-have-produced-the-same-results-over-and-over-again-counterspin-interview-with-bryce-covert-on-work-requirements/#respond Fri, 30 May 2025 19:28:34 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9045727  

Janine Jackson interviewed independent journalist Bryce Covert about Medicaid work requirements for the May 23, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

Nation: Trump Is Banking on Work Requirements to Cut Spending on Medicaid and Food Stamps

The Nation (2/28/20)

Janine Jackson: Welcome to USA 2025, where the only immigrants deserving welcome are white South Africans, germ theory is just some folks’ opinion, and attaching work requirements to Medicaid and SNAP benefits will make recipients stop being lazy and get a job.

Everything old is not new again, but many things that are old, perverse and discredited are getting dusted off and reintroduced with a vengeance. Our guest has reported the repeatedly offered rationales behind tying work requirements to social benefits, and the real-world impacts of those efforts, for many years now.

Bryce Covert is an independent journalist and a contributing writer at The Nation. She joins us now by phone from Brooklyn. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Bryce Covert.

Bryce Covert: Thank you so much for having me back on.

JJ: Most right-wing, top-down campaigns rely on some element of myth, but this is pretty much all myth: that there’s a problem: Medicaid and also SNAP benefits discourage recipients from seeking work, that this response will increase employment, that it will save the state and federal government money, and that it won’t harm those most in need. It’s layer upon layer of falsehood, that you have spent years breaking down. Where do you even start?

BC: That’s a great place to start, pointing out those claims essentially are all false, and I think it’s important to know, the reason we know that those things are false is because we have years of experience in this country with work requirements in various programs, and they have produced the same results over and over again.

Urban Institute: New Evidence Confirms Arkansas’s Medicaid Work Requirement Did Not Boost Employment

Urban Institute (4/23/25)

So this started, essentially, with welfare, which is now known as Temporary Assistance for Needy Families. In the 1990s, with cash assistance to families, there was a work requirement imposed on recipients in that program that still stands today. And just wave after wave of research has found these requirements did not help increase employment on a long-term basis.

Most people were not actually working after they were subjected to the work requirement, and instead it increased poverty. It reduced the recipients of these benefits. So it essentially didn’t help them get to work, but it did take away the money that they were relying on.

That pattern plays out over and over again, and we have some newer evidence in Medicaid because, up until the first Trump administration, states could not impose a work requirement in Medicaid. The Trump administration allowed waivers to do so. Only one state actually did it. But Arkansas, the state that did impose this work requirement, kicked over 18,000 people off the program with no discernible impact on employment.

JJ: And it has to do with a misunderstanding about who Medicaid recipients are, and their relationship to the workplace, period, right?

BC: Right. Most Medicaid recipients are either working, or have some good reasons for why they’re not working. Either they can’t find full-time work, or they have conflicts, like they’re taking care of family members.

People are disabled, many of them have an official disability and they’re on the actual disability program, but many more are disabled and can’t get on that program. It is a very difficult program to enroll in. The burdens to enrollment are super, super high. And others say it’s because they are in school, or they’re trying to find work, or they’re retired.

So among those who aren’t working, there’s not a lot who are in any good position to go out and start working. And that’s true of a lot of recipients of other public benefits as well. So when you talk about imposing a work requirement on people in Medicaid, what you’re doing is adding administrative burden, which is to say extra steps they have to take to keep getting their benefits, that aren’t going to actually change the situation they’re facing when it comes to their employment.

Think Progress: Mississippi is rejecting nearly all of the poor people who apply for welfare

Think Progress (4/13/17)

JJ: When you wrote about Mississippi, I know, with TANF, you were saying you had to prove you had a job, or were searching for one, before you could get help with childcare. And if people would just take a second and think, how do you search for a job or hold a job without childcare? So it’s not even logical. It’s more a kind of moral, strange misunderstanding of why people are outside of the workforce.

BC: I think this applies to other programs, too. It’s hard to get to work if you don’t have health insurance like Medicaid to get yourself healthy and in a good working position. If you’re not able to get food stamps and buy food for yourself, it’s going to be hard to be out there looking for a job.

These are basic necessities, and I think that’s another really important point to make here, is that Republicans have tried to paint lots of different programs as “welfare,” because that word is very stigmatizing. But what we’re talking about with Medicaid is healthcare. We are talking about feeling as if we need to force people to work—although really what we’re doing is forcing them to document on some pieces of paper that they’re working, which is an important distinction—in order to get healthcare, in order to take care of their bodies and be healthy.

Same with food stamps. We’re saying “you must work in order to eat.” These are basic, basic necessities that people need simply to survive.

JJ: And then we hear about the “dignity” of work. You need to work because there’s dignity there, and yet somehow a person whose grandfather owned the steel mill doesn’t need that dignity. Wealthy people who don’t work somehow are outside of this moral conversation.

BC: Yeah, and we’re talking about imposing work requirements on SNAP and Medicaid, which is what Republicans say they want to do, in the service of tax cuts for the wealthy. Essentially, they are literally paying for tax cuts for the wealthy, to return more money to the rich, by cutting programs for the poor. And those rich people, many of them do not work, or these tax breaks help them to avoid work—the inheritance tax, for example. So that moral obligation to work does not apply.

NYT: Trump Leadership: If You Want Welfare and Can Work, You Must

New York Times (5/14/25)

JJ: The New York Times column recently, from four Trump officials—I don’t remember the headline, but it was something like, “If You Can Work, You Must.” They didn’t marshal any evidence. They didn’t have data, just vibes. Those are some racist, racist vibes, aren’t they?

BC: Yes. That is an important point, that all of this cannot be separated out from racism.

I mean, the conversation over welfare and TANF in the 1990s, that was all race. It was about white Americans feeling like Black Americans were getting the dole, and were too lazy to work and had to be forced to work. The numbers at the time did not bear that out. More white Americans were getting cash assistance than Black ones.

But it’s a really deep-seated belief among Americans, and I think when you see, as in that op-ed, for example, or other places where Republicans are trying to call these other programs “welfare,” it’s barely even just a dog whistle. It is pretty blatant that they are trying to paint other programs as things that help Black people who are too lazy to work.

It’s all caught up in that idea, even though, again, the numbers do not bear this out. White people are more likely to be on these programs. We see equal employment rates among both populations. This is not actually a problem to solve for, but it is one I think a lot of Americans, unfortunately, really believe.

Nation: The Racist, Insulting Resurgence of Work Requirements

The Nation (6/8/23)

JJ: I’m going to ask you about media in another second. I just wanted to pull up another point about the racism, which is that it’s not just the mythologizing and the “welfare queen,” that those of us who are old enough will remember. But you wrote about how states with larger Black populations have stricter rules, and how when states were asked for exemptions on pushing these work requirements, they exempted majority white counties. So it’s not just the racism in the rationale, the racism in how it plays out is there too?

BC: Absolutely. I mean, these policies hit Black people more heavily. They are more stringently applied in Southern states that have higher Black populations, that are more hostile to their Black populations. And like you said, in the first Trump administration, when states were seeking exemptions, it was more majority white populations who got them. This is just really a fundamental racist myth we have in this country that’s proven very hard to shake, that Black people are lazy and rely on the government to get by and must be forced to work, when just nothing about the actual numbers and data bears that out.

JJ: I sometimes feel like reporters, even if they’re well-intentioned and trying to make it personal, they can kind of make it a thought experiment for folks who are better off. If you were struggling, wouldn’t you take the time to fill out a form? It’s just paperwork. Couldn’t you go across town to the office and fill out that form? And it just represents a total disconnect, experiential disconnect between anyone who has ever had to deal with this and those who have no idea about it at all and just kind of parachute in and say, Oh wow, filling out a form. What’s the big deal?

Bryce Covert

Bryce Covert: “This is not about, in fact, helping people to work. This is, instead, about kicking people off the program.” 

BC: Yeah, I think most well-off Americans have no idea how hard it is to apply for these programs, to stay on these programs, the paperwork that’s involved, the time that’s involved. And also when we’ve seen work requirements in Medicaid, for example, they are set up in a very complex way. Arkansas’s website was only available during the working day, and then it would shut down, and you couldn’t log your work requirement hours at night. I think that belies the fact that this is not about, in fact, helping people to work. This is, instead, about kicking people off the program.

You can see that in the fact that the reason Republicans are talking about work requirements right now is because they need to find spending savings to pay for the tax cuts. If this were not about kicking people off and spending less on benefits, then this wouldn’t be part of this current conversation about their “One Big, Beautiful Bill.” So these are huge administrative burdens, and it’s also a big burden for something that is a deep necessity. I think the mental impact, the emotional impact of being made to jump through these huge hoops for something as basic as food, it’s really extreme.

For example, I recently had to go to the DMV to get my Real ID. I had to go to the office in person. I had to wait for hours. I had to bring all the right paperwork. It was a huge burden, but this was for something that would just make it a little easier to travel on an airplane.

Think about going through the same process, having to show up somewhere in person, waiting for hours, making sure you have all the right documentation, and if you don’t, then you don’t get the thing that you’re seeking, but what we’re talking about is whether or not you get healthcare. What we’re talking about is whether you get food stamps. I think it’s an experience that’s hard for people who haven’t gone through it to grasp.

NYT: Millions Would Lose Health Coverage Under G.O.P. Bill. But Not as Many as Democrats Say.

New York Times (5/13/25)

JJ: To bring it back to today, May 21, some coverage that I’m reading straight up says some 8.6 million people are going to find themselves uninsured. Other stories matter-of-factly describe work requirements, and some Republicans’ anger that they’re not going to kick in sooner, as about “offsetting” the tax cuts for the wealthy, as though we’re just kind of recalibrating, and this is going to balance things in a natural way.

I guess I would say I’m not getting the energy that there are 14 million children who rely on both Medicaid and SNAP, and there’s children who could lose healthcare and food at the same time, and that includes 20% of all children under the age of five. From news media, I’m getting Republicans versus Democrats; I’m not so much getting children versus hunger.

BC: Yeah, I think, unfortunately, these kinds of political debates tend to be covered like they are just political back and forth. Democrats think this, Republicans think that. It is legitimately harder to explain to people what this will mean in real life. I have reported on the impact of work requirements. For example, I went to Arkansas when they were in effect. It’s hard to report on. The people who are impacted are vulnerable. They have chaotic lives. They may not even know that they are subject to it.

Unfortunately, I think it’s likely that if this passes and these cuts are implemented, we will see more stories about what happens, because it will be a little easier to say concretely, “This kid right here doesn’t get food or healthcare anymore.” But it would be nice to have that conveyed ahead of time, so the public understood what was happening before it went into effect.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with independent reporter Bryce Covert. You can find her work online at BryceCovert.com. Bryce Covert, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

BC: Yeah, thank you for having me.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/30/work-requirements-have-produced-the-same-results-over-and-over-again-counterspin-interview-with-bryce-covert-on-work-requirements/feed/ 0 535821
‘Work Requirements Have Produced the Same Results Over and Over Again’: CounterSpin interview with Bryce Covert on work requirements https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/30/work-requirements-have-produced-the-same-results-over-and-over-again-counterspin-interview-with-bryce-covert-on-work-requirements-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/30/work-requirements-have-produced-the-same-results-over-and-over-again-counterspin-interview-with-bryce-covert-on-work-requirements-2/#respond Fri, 30 May 2025 19:28:34 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9045727  

Janine Jackson interviewed independent journalist Bryce Covert about Medicaid work requirements for the May 23, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

Nation: Trump Is Banking on Work Requirements to Cut Spending on Medicaid and Food Stamps

The Nation (2/28/20)

Janine Jackson: Welcome to USA 2025, where the only immigrants deserving welcome are white South Africans, germ theory is just some folks’ opinion, and attaching work requirements to Medicaid and SNAP benefits will make recipients stop being lazy and get a job.

Everything old is not new again, but many things that are old, perverse and discredited are getting dusted off and reintroduced with a vengeance. Our guest has reported the repeatedly offered rationales behind tying work requirements to social benefits, and the real-world impacts of those efforts, for many years now.

Bryce Covert is an independent journalist and a contributing writer at The Nation. She joins us now by phone from Brooklyn. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Bryce Covert.

Bryce Covert: Thank you so much for having me back on.

JJ: Most right-wing, top-down campaigns rely on some element of myth, but this is pretty much all myth: that there’s a problem: Medicaid and also SNAP benefits discourage recipients from seeking work, that this response will increase employment, that it will save the state and federal government money, and that it won’t harm those most in need. It’s layer upon layer of falsehood, that you have spent years breaking down. Where do you even start?

BC: That’s a great place to start, pointing out those claims essentially are all false, and I think it’s important to know, the reason we know that those things are false is because we have years of experience in this country with work requirements in various programs, and they have produced the same results over and over again.

Urban Institute: New Evidence Confirms Arkansas’s Medicaid Work Requirement Did Not Boost Employment

Urban Institute (4/23/25)

So this started, essentially, with welfare, which is now known as Temporary Assistance for Needy Families. In the 1990s, with cash assistance to families, there was a work requirement imposed on recipients in that program that still stands today. And just wave after wave of research has found these requirements did not help increase employment on a long-term basis.

Most people were not actually working after they were subjected to the work requirement, and instead it increased poverty. It reduced the recipients of these benefits. So it essentially didn’t help them get to work, but it did take away the money that they were relying on.

That pattern plays out over and over again, and we have some newer evidence in Medicaid because, up until the first Trump administration, states could not impose a work requirement in Medicaid. The Trump administration allowed waivers to do so. Only one state actually did it. But Arkansas, the state that did impose this work requirement, kicked over 18,000 people off the program with no discernible impact on employment.

JJ: And it has to do with a misunderstanding about who Medicaid recipients are, and their relationship to the workplace, period, right?

BC: Right. Most Medicaid recipients are either working, or have some good reasons for why they’re not working. Either they can’t find full-time work, or they have conflicts, like they’re taking care of family members.

People are disabled, many of them have an official disability and they’re on the actual disability program, but many more are disabled and can’t get on that program. It is a very difficult program to enroll in. The burdens to enrollment are super, super high. And others say it’s because they are in school, or they’re trying to find work, or they’re retired.

So among those who aren’t working, there’s not a lot who are in any good position to go out and start working. And that’s true of a lot of recipients of other public benefits as well. So when you talk about imposing a work requirement on people in Medicaid, what you’re doing is adding administrative burden, which is to say extra steps they have to take to keep getting their benefits, that aren’t going to actually change the situation they’re facing when it comes to their employment.

Think Progress: Mississippi is rejecting nearly all of the poor people who apply for welfare

Think Progress (4/13/17)

JJ: When you wrote about Mississippi, I know, with TANF, you were saying you had to prove you had a job, or were searching for one, before you could get help with childcare. And if people would just take a second and think, how do you search for a job or hold a job without childcare? So it’s not even logical. It’s more a kind of moral, strange misunderstanding of why people are outside of the workforce.

BC: I think this applies to other programs, too. It’s hard to get to work if you don’t have health insurance like Medicaid to get yourself healthy and in a good working position. If you’re not able to get food stamps and buy food for yourself, it’s going to be hard to be out there looking for a job.

These are basic necessities, and I think that’s another really important point to make here, is that Republicans have tried to paint lots of different programs as “welfare,” because that word is very stigmatizing. But what we’re talking about with Medicaid is healthcare. We are talking about feeling as if we need to force people to work—although really what we’re doing is forcing them to document on some pieces of paper that they’re working, which is an important distinction—in order to get healthcare, in order to take care of their bodies and be healthy.

Same with food stamps. We’re saying “you must work in order to eat.” These are basic, basic necessities that people need simply to survive.

JJ: And then we hear about the “dignity” of work. You need to work because there’s dignity there, and yet somehow a person whose grandfather owned the steel mill doesn’t need that dignity. Wealthy people who don’t work somehow are outside of this moral conversation.

BC: Yeah, and we’re talking about imposing work requirements on SNAP and Medicaid, which is what Republicans say they want to do, in the service of tax cuts for the wealthy. Essentially, they are literally paying for tax cuts for the wealthy, to return more money to the rich, by cutting programs for the poor. And those rich people, many of them do not work, or these tax breaks help them to avoid work—the inheritance tax, for example. So that moral obligation to work does not apply.

NYT: Trump Leadership: If You Want Welfare and Can Work, You Must

New York Times (5/14/25)

JJ: The New York Times column recently, from four Trump officials—I don’t remember the headline, but it was something like, “If You Can Work, You Must.” They didn’t marshal any evidence. They didn’t have data, just vibes. Those are some racist, racist vibes, aren’t they?

BC: Yes. That is an important point, that all of this cannot be separated out from racism.

I mean, the conversation over welfare and TANF in the 1990s, that was all race. It was about white Americans feeling like Black Americans were getting the dole, and were too lazy to work and had to be forced to work. The numbers at the time did not bear that out. More white Americans were getting cash assistance than Black ones.

But it’s a really deep-seated belief among Americans, and I think when you see, as in that op-ed, for example, or other places where Republicans are trying to call these other programs “welfare,” it’s barely even just a dog whistle. It is pretty blatant that they are trying to paint other programs as things that help Black people who are too lazy to work.

It’s all caught up in that idea, even though, again, the numbers do not bear this out. White people are more likely to be on these programs. We see equal employment rates among both populations. This is not actually a problem to solve for, but it is one I think a lot of Americans, unfortunately, really believe.

Nation: The Racist, Insulting Resurgence of Work Requirements

The Nation (6/8/23)

JJ: I’m going to ask you about media in another second. I just wanted to pull up another point about the racism, which is that it’s not just the mythologizing and the “welfare queen,” that those of us who are old enough will remember. But you wrote about how states with larger Black populations have stricter rules, and how when states were asked for exemptions on pushing these work requirements, they exempted majority white counties. So it’s not just the racism in the rationale, the racism in how it plays out is there too?

BC: Absolutely. I mean, these policies hit Black people more heavily. They are more stringently applied in Southern states that have higher Black populations, that are more hostile to their Black populations. And like you said, in the first Trump administration, when states were seeking exemptions, it was more majority white populations who got them. This is just really a fundamental racist myth we have in this country that’s proven very hard to shake, that Black people are lazy and rely on the government to get by and must be forced to work, when just nothing about the actual numbers and data bears that out.

JJ: I sometimes feel like reporters, even if they’re well-intentioned and trying to make it personal, they can kind of make it a thought experiment for folks who are better off. If you were struggling, wouldn’t you take the time to fill out a form? It’s just paperwork. Couldn’t you go across town to the office and fill out that form? And it just represents a total disconnect, experiential disconnect between anyone who has ever had to deal with this and those who have no idea about it at all and just kind of parachute in and say, Oh wow, filling out a form. What’s the big deal?

Bryce Covert

Bryce Covert: “This is not about, in fact, helping people to work. This is, instead, about kicking people off the program.” 

BC: Yeah, I think most well-off Americans have no idea how hard it is to apply for these programs, to stay on these programs, the paperwork that’s involved, the time that’s involved. And also when we’ve seen work requirements in Medicaid, for example, they are set up in a very complex way. Arkansas’s website was only available during the working day, and then it would shut down, and you couldn’t log your work requirement hours at night. I think that belies the fact that this is not about, in fact, helping people to work. This is, instead, about kicking people off the program.

You can see that in the fact that the reason Republicans are talking about work requirements right now is because they need to find spending savings to pay for the tax cuts. If this were not about kicking people off and spending less on benefits, then this wouldn’t be part of this current conversation about their “One Big, Beautiful Bill.” So these are huge administrative burdens, and it’s also a big burden for something that is a deep necessity. I think the mental impact, the emotional impact of being made to jump through these huge hoops for something as basic as food, it’s really extreme.

For example, I recently had to go to the DMV to get my Real ID. I had to go to the office in person. I had to wait for hours. I had to bring all the right paperwork. It was a huge burden, but this was for something that would just make it a little easier to travel on an airplane.

Think about going through the same process, having to show up somewhere in person, waiting for hours, making sure you have all the right documentation, and if you don’t, then you don’t get the thing that you’re seeking, but what we’re talking about is whether or not you get healthcare. What we’re talking about is whether you get food stamps. I think it’s an experience that’s hard for people who haven’t gone through it to grasp.

NYT: Millions Would Lose Health Coverage Under G.O.P. Bill. But Not as Many as Democrats Say.

New York Times (5/13/25)

JJ: To bring it back to today, May 21, some coverage that I’m reading straight up says some 8.6 million people are going to find themselves uninsured. Other stories matter-of-factly describe work requirements, and some Republicans’ anger that they’re not going to kick in sooner, as about “offsetting” the tax cuts for the wealthy, as though we’re just kind of recalibrating, and this is going to balance things in a natural way.

I guess I would say I’m not getting the energy that there are 14 million children who rely on both Medicaid and SNAP, and there’s children who could lose healthcare and food at the same time, and that includes 20% of all children under the age of five. From news media, I’m getting Republicans versus Democrats; I’m not so much getting children versus hunger.

BC: Yeah, I think, unfortunately, these kinds of political debates tend to be covered like they are just political back and forth. Democrats think this, Republicans think that. It is legitimately harder to explain to people what this will mean in real life. I have reported on the impact of work requirements. For example, I went to Arkansas when they were in effect. It’s hard to report on. The people who are impacted are vulnerable. They have chaotic lives. They may not even know that they are subject to it.

Unfortunately, I think it’s likely that if this passes and these cuts are implemented, we will see more stories about what happens, because it will be a little easier to say concretely, “This kid right here doesn’t get food or healthcare anymore.” But it would be nice to have that conveyed ahead of time, so the public understood what was happening before it went into effect.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with independent reporter Bryce Covert. You can find her work online at BryceCovert.com. Bryce Covert, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

BC: Yeah, thank you for having me.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/30/work-requirements-have-produced-the-same-results-over-and-over-again-counterspin-interview-with-bryce-covert-on-work-requirements-2/feed/ 0 535822
Trump’s budget bill is on the verge of transforming how America eats https://grist.org/food-and-agriculture/trump-budget-bill-is-on-the-verge-of-transforming-how-america-eats/ https://grist.org/food-and-agriculture/trump-budget-bill-is-on-the-verge-of-transforming-how-america-eats/#respond Fri, 30 May 2025 08:45:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=667333 Early this month, after some equivocation, President Donald Trump briefly endorsed the idea to hike taxes on the wealthiest Americans in his budget proposal to Congress. Economists were quick to point out the meager impact a new millionaire tax bracket would have on the ultra-rich, particularly in the context of other proposed tax cuts that would offset any pain points for them. Still, the backlash from Republican members of Congress was swift. They spurned the proposal and instead advanced breaks for wealthier Americans. Last week, that version of Trump’s “big, beautiful” tax bill narrowly passed the U.S. House of Representatives and headed to the Senate. 

Tax policy isn’t the only way that this bill proposes to further widen the gap between the wealthy and the poor. Though the more than 1,000-page megabill will look somewhat different once it advances through the Senate, analysts say that there are three food and agricultural provisions expected to remain intact: an unprecedented cut to the nation’s nutrition programs; an increase of billions in subsidies aimed at industrial farms; and a rescission of some Inflation Reduction Act funding intended to help farmers deal with the impacts of climate change.

If they do, the changes will make it harder for Americans to afford food and endure the financial toll of climate-related disasters. They will also make it more difficult for farmers to adapt to climate change — from an ecological standpoint and an economic one. Overall, the policy shifts would continue Trump’s effort to transform the nation’s food and agricultural policy landscape — from one that keeps at least some emphasis on the country’s neediest residents to one that offers government help to those who need it least.


Ever since the inception of the federal food stamps program in 1939, when it was created during the Great Depression to provide food to the hungry while simultaneously stimulating the American economy by encouraging the purchase of surplus commodities, what’s now known as the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program, or SNAP, has been falsely portrayed as a contributor to unemployment rates and politicized as an abuse of taxpayer dollars. 

A vast body of research has found the opposite: roughly 42 percent of SNAP recipients are children, more than half of adult recipients who can work are either employed or actively seeking employment; the program’s improper payments are most often merely mistakes made by eligible workers or households, not cases of outright fraud; and the benefits keep millions of Americans out of poverty

A sign with pictures of food saying we accept EBT
A sign outside of a grocery store in 2023 welcomes those on food assistance in a Brooklyn neighborhood that has a large immigrant and elderly population.
Spencer Platt / Getty Images

Right now, more than 40 million Americans are enrolled in SNAP, an anti-hunger program written into the farm bill and administered through the Department of Agriculture’s Food and Nutrition Service. The federal government has always fully paid for benefits issued by the program. States operate the program on a local level, determining eligibility and issuing those benefits, and pay part of the program’s administrative costs. How much money a household gets from the government each month for groceries is based on income, family size, and a tally of certain expenses. An individual’s eligibility is also constrained by “work requirements,” which limit the amount of time adults can receive benefits without employment or participation in a work-training program. 

The Congressional Budget Office estimated that the cuts to SNAP now being proposed could amount to nearly $300 billion through 2034. An Urban Institute analysis of the bill found that the cuts would be achieved by broadening work requirements to apply to households with children and adults up to the age of 64; limiting states’ ability to request work-requirement waivers for people in high unemployment areas; and reducing the opportunities for discretionary exemptions. But most unprecedented is how the bill shifts the financial onus of SNAP’s costs onto states — increasing the administrative costs states have to cover to up to 75 percent, as well as mandating that states pay for a portion of the benefits themselves. 

If the Senate approves the proposed approach to require states to cover some SNAP costs, the Budget Office report projects that, over the next decade, about 1.3 million people could see their benefits reduced or eliminated in an average month.

The burden of these changes to federal policy would only cascade down, leading to a variety of likely outcomes. Some states might be able to cover the slack. But others won’t, even if they wanted to: Budget-strapped states would then have to choose between reducing benefits or sharing the costs with cities and counties. Ultimately, anti-hunger advocates warn, gutting SNAP will undoubtedly increase food insecurity across the nation — at a time when persistently high food costs are among most Americans’ biggest economic concerns. As communities in all corners of the country endure stronger and more frequent climate-related disasters, the slashing of nutrition programs would also likely decrease the amount of emergency food aid that would be available after a heatwave, hurricane, or flood — funding that has already been reduced by federal disinvestment

Sweeping cuts to SNAP would also constrain how much income small farmers nationwide would be able to earn. That’s because SNAP dollars are used at thousands of farmers markets, farm stands, and pick-your-own operations throughout the country. 

Groups like the environmental nonprofit GrowNYC helped launch the use of SNAP dollars at farmers markets in New York almost two decades ago, and have since built matching dollar incentives into their business model to encourage shoppers at the organization’s greenmarket and farmstand locations to spend their monthly food aid allotments on fresh, locally grown produce. 

The program “puts money in the farmers pockets,” said Marcel Van Ooyen, CEO of GrowNYC, and “helps low-income individuals access healthy, fresh, local food. It’s a double-win.” 

He expects to see the bill’s SNAP cuts result in a “devastating” trend of shuttering local farmers’ markets across the nation, which, he said, ”is going to have a real effect both on food access and support of the farming communities.”


While the ethos of this bill can be gleaned by counting up the proposed cuts to social safety nets like SNAP, looking at the legislation from another perspective — where Trump wants the government to spend more — helps to make it clearer. These dramatic changes to nutrition programs would be accompanied by a massive increase in commodity farm subsidies.

The budget bill increases subsidies to commodity farms — ones that grow crops like corn, cotton, and soybeans — by about $50 billion. Commodity farmers “typically have larger farms,” according to Erin Foster West, a policy campaigns director specializing in land, water, and climate at National Young Farmers Coalition. A trend of consolidation toward fewer but more industrial farm operations was already underway. Less than 6 percent of U.S. farms with annual sales of at least $1 million sold more than three-fourths of all agricultural products between 2017 and 2022. The Trump plan might just help that trend along.

Earlier this year, the USDA issued about a third of the $30 billion authorized by Congress in December through the American Relief Act to commodity producers who were affected by low crop prices in 2024. Because the program significantly limited who could access the funding, it funneled financial help away from smaller farmers and into the pockets of industrial-scale operations. An April report by the conservative think tank American Enterprise Institute concluded the $10 billion bailout for commodity farmers “was probably not justified.” 

Later in their report, the American Enterprise Institute authors note that lobbyists representing commodity farms have already begun pushing for more subsidies because of the fallout of the Trump administration’s tariffs

Then they pose a question: “Does the Trump administration need to give farmers further substantial handouts, especially when it is doing nothing for other sectors and households significantly affected by its policy follies?”

The budget bill, with its $50 billion windfall for commodity farms, may be its own answer. 


This September will mark the deadline for the second consecutive year-long extension that Congress passed for the farm bill, the legislation that governs many aspects of America’s food and agricultural systems and is typically reauthorized every five years without much contention. Of late, legislators have been unable to get past the deeply politicized struggle to agree on the omnibus bill’s nutrition and conservation facets. The latest farm bill was the 2018 package.

The farm bill covers everything from nutrition assistance programs to crop subsidies and conservation measures. A number of provisions, like crop insurance, are permanently funded, meaning the reauthorization timeline does not impact them. But others, such as beginning farmer and rancher development grants and local food promotion programs, are entirely dependent upon the appropriations within each new law. 

A man gathers vegetables from a grow house at night
Farmer Jacob Thomas pulls plants as he prepares for a farmers market the next morning on April 25, 2025 in Leavenworth, Kansas. He had a grant for a new distribution warehouse that was rescinded then regranted. Now he’s scared to proceed for fear it will be rescinded again.
Ricky Carioti / The Washington Post via Getty Images

Trump’s tax plan contains a slick budgeting maneuver that takes unobligated climate-targeted funds from the agricultural conservation programs in President Joe Biden’s 2022 Inflation Reduction Act, or IRA, and re-invests that money into the same farm bill programs. The funding boost provided by the IRA was designed to reign in the immense emissions footprint of the agricultural industry, while also helping farmers deal with the impacts of climate change by providing funding for them to protect plants from severe weather, extend their growing seasons, or adopt cost-cutting irrigation methods that boost water conservation.

On its surface, the inclusion of unspent IRA conservation money in the tax package may seem promising, if notably at odds with the Trump administration’s public campaign to all but vanquish the Biden-era climate policy. Erin Foster West, at the National Young Farmers Coalition, calls it “a mixed bag.” 

By proposing that the IRA funding be absorbed into the farm bill, Foster West says, Trump creates an opportunity to build more and longer-term funding for “hugely impactful and very effective” conservation work. On the other hand, she notes, the Trump megabill removes the requirements that the unspent pot of money must fund climate-specific projects. Foster West is wary that the removal of the climate guardrails could lead to more conservation money funneling into industrial farms and planet-polluting animal feeding operations

The House budget package also omits many of the food and agricultural programs affected by the federal funding freeze that would typically have been included in a farm bill. Those include programs offering support to beginning farmers and ranchers, farmer-led sustainable research, rural development and farm loans, local and regional food supply chains, and those that help farmers access new markets. None of these were incorporated into the Republican megabill. 

“It’s just a disinvestment in the programs that smaller-scale, and beginning farmers, younger farmers, tend to use. So we’re just seeing, like, resources being pulled away,” said Foster West. 

Moreover, up until now, several agricultural leaders in Congress have expressed confidence about passing a new “skinny” farm bill, to address all programs left out by reconciliation, before September. Provisions in the Trump budget bill may erode that confidence. By gutting funding for SNAP and increasing funding for commodity support, two leading Republican farm bill priorities, the need for GOP legislators to negotiate for a bipartisan bill diminishes. 

a building with two banners both saying USDA. One has a photo of Donald trump and the other has a photo of Lincoln.
Banners showing images of President Donald Trump and Abraham Lincoln hang on the side of a U.S. Department of Agriculture building in Washington, D.C., in May 2025.
Mandel Ngan / AFP via Getty Images

Inherent to the farm bill are provisions set to incentivize Congress to break through its own gridlock. If neither a new farm bill nor an extension is passed ahead of its deadline, some commodity programs revert to a 1930s and 1940s law, which helps trigger what is colloquially known as the “dairy cliff” — after which the government must buy staggering volumes of milk products at a parity price set in 1949 and risk spiking milk prices at the supermarket. Trump’s tax package would suspend this trigger until 2031.

Under Trump’s vision, encoded in the tax bill, U.S. food and agriculture policy would “cannibalize” itself, according to Mike Lavender, policy director at the National Sustainable Agriculture Coalition. The policies meant to make better food more available to more people, and support the producers that grow it, in other words, could make way for a world in which fewer people will be able to farm — and to eat.

“It’s an irresponsible approach to federal food and farm policy,” Lavender said. “One that does not support all farmers, does not support the entire food and farm system.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Trump’s budget bill is on the verge of transforming how America eats on May 30, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Ayurella Horn-Muller.

]]>
https://grist.org/food-and-agriculture/trump-budget-bill-is-on-the-verge-of-transforming-how-america-eats/feed/ 0 535629
Can Trump’s budget bill be stopped? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/can-trumps-budget-bill-be-stopped/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/can-trumps-budget-bill-be-stopped/#respond Wed, 28 May 2025 21:00:37 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f942b5442289e56ec5addfd3fb33a201
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/can-trumps-budget-bill-be-stopped/feed/ 0 535326
Can Trump’s budget bill be stopped? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/can-trumps-budget-bill-be-stopped-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/can-trumps-budget-bill-be-stopped-2/#respond Wed, 28 May 2025 21:00:37 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f942b5442289e56ec5addfd3fb33a201
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/can-trumps-budget-bill-be-stopped-2/feed/ 0 535327
Samoan PM Fiamē advises dissolution of parliament, calls for snap elections https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/samoan-pm-fiame-advises-dissolution-of-parliament-calls-for-snap-elections/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/samoan-pm-fiame-advises-dissolution-of-parliament-calls-for-snap-elections/#respond Wed, 28 May 2025 02:24:58 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=115366 RNZ Pacific

Prime Minister Fiamē Naomi Mata’afa has advised Samoa’s head of state that it is necessary to dissolve Parliament so the country can move to an election.

This follows the bill for the budget not getting enough support for a first reading on yesterday, and Fiame announcing she would therefore seek an early election.

Tuimaleali’ifano Va’aleto’a Sualauvi II has accepted Fiame’s advice and a formal notice will be duly gazetted to confirm the dissolution of the Legislative Assembly.

Parliament will go into caretaker mode, and the Cabinet will have the general direction and control of the existing government until the first session of the Legislative Assembly following dissolution.

Fiame, who has led a minority government since being ousted from her former FAST party in January, finally conceded defeat on the floor of Parliament yesterday morning after her government’s 2025 Budget was voted down.

MPs from both the opposition Human Rights Protection Party and Fiame’s former FAST party joined forces to defeat the budget with the final vote coming in 34 against, 16 in support and two abstentions.

Defeated motions
Tuesday was the Samoan Parliament’s first sitting since back-to-back no-confidence motions were moved — unsuccessfully — against prime minister Fiame.

In January, Fiame removed her FAST Party chairman La’auli Leuatea Schmidt and several FAST ministers from her Cabinet.

In turn, La’auli ejected her from the FAST Party, leaving her leading a minority government.

Her former party had been pushing for an early election, including via legal action.

The election is set to be held within three months.

This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/28/samoan-pm-fiame-advises-dissolution-of-parliament-calls-for-snap-elections/feed/ 0 535128
Trump’s budget seeks to defund Planned Parenthood https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/trumps-budget-seeks-to-defund-planned-parenthood/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/trumps-budget-seeks-to-defund-planned-parenthood/#respond Tue, 27 May 2025 20:00:31 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=2d7de1106e0a0d041240ffe8318ad7d6
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/trumps-budget-seeks-to-defund-planned-parenthood/feed/ 0 535096
“Unconscionable & Deliberate”: GOP Budget Defunds Planned Parenthood Amid Maternal Health Crisis https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/unconscionable-deliberate-gop-budget-defunds-planned-parenthood-amid-maternal-health-crisis-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/unconscionable-deliberate-gop-budget-defunds-planned-parenthood-amid-maternal-health-crisis-2/#respond Tue, 27 May 2025 16:14:05 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=2b2d436a600525c095c35c9cc39de725
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/unconscionable-deliberate-gop-budget-defunds-planned-parenthood-amid-maternal-health-crisis-2/feed/ 0 535068
“Unconscionable & Deliberate”: GOP Budget Defunds Planned Parenthood Amid Maternal Health Crisis https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/unconscionable-deliberate-gop-budget-defunds-planned-parenthood-amid-maternal-health-crisis/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/unconscionable-deliberate-gop-budget-defunds-planned-parenthood-amid-maternal-health-crisis/#respond Tue, 27 May 2025 12:52:56 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a77816b8c4f47d0ce192ddc386607c64 Seg4 budget

A last-minute addition to President Trump’s “big, beautiful” budget bill seeks to ban Affordable Care Act healthcare plans from covering abortion, in addition to defunding hundreds of Planned Parenthood clinics that provide reproductive healthcare throughout the United States. “Congress is literally walking us into a crisis of forced birth,” says Mini Timmaraju, president of the advocacy group Reproductive Freedom for All, which is launching a series of campaigns targeting key senators ahead of the Senate vote on the GOP-backed budget bill.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/27/unconscionable-deliberate-gop-budget-defunds-planned-parenthood-amid-maternal-health-crisis/feed/ 0 535019
“Theft from On High”: Trump’s Budget Bill Guts Medicaid, Medicare & More to Pay for Tax Cuts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/theft-from-on-high-trumps-budget-bill-guts-medicaid-medicare-more-to-pay-for-tax-cuts-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/theft-from-on-high-trumps-budget-bill-guts-medicaid-medicare-more-to-pay-for-tax-cuts-2/#respond Fri, 23 May 2025 16:01:14 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=ced99ec808a52b6d96b8bfc713e6614e
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/theft-from-on-high-trumps-budget-bill-guts-medicaid-medicare-more-to-pay-for-tax-cuts-2/feed/ 0 534603
Bryce Covert on Work Requirements, Erin Reed on Trans Care ‘Questions’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/bryce-covert-on-work-requirements-erin-reed-on-trans-care-questions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/bryce-covert-on-work-requirements-erin-reed-on-trans-care-questions/#respond Fri, 23 May 2025 15:38:11 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9045615  

Right-click here to download this episode (“Save link as…”).

 

Common Dreams: Trump Cabinet Members Regurgitate Lies About Work Requirements

Common Dreams (5/14/25)

This week on CounterSpin: On a Sunday night, not when officials do things they’re most proud of, House Republicans passed a plan to give more money to rich people by taking it from the non-rich. Call it what you will, that’s what’s ultimately happening with the plan to cut more than $700 billion from Medicaid in order to “offset,” as elite media have it, the expense of relieving millionaires from contributing to public coffers. Even the feint they’re using—we’re not cutting aid, just forcing recipients to work, like they should—is obvious, age-old and long-disproven, if evidence is what you care about. Thing is, of the millions of people at the sharp end of the plan, most are children, who have no voice corporate media feel obliged to listen to. We’ll nevertheless talk about them with independent journalist Bryce Covert.

 

WaPo: Good questions about transgender care

Washington Post (5/11/25)

Also on the show: You may have seen an editorial in the Washington Post indicating that, despite what you have heard for years, from trans people and from doctors and medical associations that work with trans people, maybe it’s OK for you to still entertain the notion that, weirdly, on this occasion, it’s not science but talkshow hosts who have it right, and trans kids are just actually mentally ill. We’ll talk about that with journalist and trans rights activist Erin Reed, of Erin in the Morning.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/bryce-covert-on-work-requirements-erin-reed-on-trans-care-questions/feed/ 0 534574
“Theft from On High”: Trump’s Budget Bill Guts Medicaid, Medicare & More to Pay for Tax Cuts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/theft-from-on-high-trumps-budget-bill-guts-medicaid-medicare-more-to-pay-for-tax-cuts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/theft-from-on-high-trumps-budget-bill-guts-medicaid-medicare-more-to-pay-for-tax-cuts/#respond Fri, 23 May 2025 12:14:13 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=78ecc332669105bac29cb15b9b51abcf Seg trump johnson budget

Trump’s sweeping budget legislation has been described as the biggest Medicaid cut in U.S. history. House Republicans passed the bill early Thursday morning in a 215-214 vote. The legislation would trigger massive cuts to Medicare and Medicaid over the next 10 years, denying coverage to an estimated 7.6 million Americans, according to the Congressional Budget Office. Food assistance under the federal SNAP program would also see $300 billion in cuts, while adding billions in funding for Trump’s mass deportation agenda and giving the wealthiest Americans a tax break.

“The legislation is basically a mugging conducted by the 1% against the rest of us. It represents the single largest upward redistribution of wealth effectuated by any piece of legislation in our history,” says Chris Lehmann, D.C. bureau chief for The Nation.

Senate Republicans, who have voiced some concerns over the bill, will now have to pass their own version of the budget. With all Democratic senators opposed to the package, Republicans are working to use the reconciliation process to avoid a filibuster.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/23/theft-from-on-high-trumps-budget-bill-guts-medicaid-medicare-more-to-pay-for-tax-cuts/feed/ 0 534546
Budget 2025: Pacific Ministry faces major cuts, yet new initiatives aim for development https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/22/budget-2025-pacific-ministry-faces-major-cuts-yet-new-initiatives-aim-for-development/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/22/budget-2025-pacific-ministry-faces-major-cuts-yet-new-initiatives-aim-for-development/#respond Thu, 22 May 2025 11:34:39 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=115184 By Alakihihifo Vailala of PMN News

Funding for New Zealand’s Ministry for Pacific Peoples (MPP) is set to be reduced by almost $36 million in Budget 2025.

This follows a cut of nearly $26 million in the 2024 budget.

As part of these budgetary savings, the Tauola Business Fund will be closed. But, $6.3 million a year will remain to support Pacific economic and business development through the Pacific Business Trust and Pacific Business Village.

The Budget cuts also affect the Tupu Aotearoa programme, which supports Pacific people in finding employment and training, alongside the Ministry of Social Development’s employment initiatives.

While $5.25 million a year will still fund the programme, a total of $22 million a year has been cut over the last four years.

The ministry will save almost $1 million by returning funding allocated for the Dawn Raids reconciliation programme from 2027/28 onwards.

There are two years of limited funding left to complete the ministry Dawn Raids programmes, which support the Crown’s reconciliation efforts.

Funding for Pasifika Wardens
Despite these reductions, a new initiative providing funding for Pasifika Wardens will introduce $1 million of new spending over the next four years.

The initiative will improve services to Pacific communities through capacity building, volunteer training, transportation, and enhanced administrative support.

Funding for the National Fale Malae has ceased, as only $2.7 million of the allocated $10 million has been spent since funding was granted in Budget 2020.

The remaining $6.6 million will be reprioritised over the next two years to address other priorities within the Arts, Culture and Heritage portfolio, including the National Music Centre.

Foreign Affairs funding for the International Development Cooperation (IDC) projects, particularly focussed on the Pacific, is also affected. The IDC received an $800 million commitment in 2021 from the Labour government.

The funding was time-limited, leading to a $200 million annual fiscal cliff starting in January 2026.

Budget 2025 aims to mitigate this impact by providing ongoing, baselined funding of $100 million a year to cover half of the shortfall. An additional $5 million will address a $10 million annual shortfall in departmental funding.

Support for IDC projects
The new funding will support IDC projects, emphasising the Pacific region without being exclusively aimed at climate finance objectives. Overall, $367.5 million will be allocated to the IDC over four years.

Finance Minister Nicola Willis said the Budget addressed a prominent fiscal cliff, especially concerning climate finance.

“The Budget addresses this, at least in part, through ongoing, baselined funding of $100 million a year, focused on the Pacific,” she said in her Budget speech.

“Members will not be surprised to know that the Minister of Foreign Affairs has made a case for more funding, and this will be looked at in future Budgets.”

More funding has been allocated for new homework and tutoring services for learners in Years nine and 10 at schools with at least 50 percent Pacific students to meet the requirements for the National Certificate of Educational Achievement (NCEA).

About 50 schools across New Zealand are expected to benefit from the initiative, which will receive nearly $7 million over the next four years, having been reprioritised from funding for the Pacific Education Programme.

As a result, funding will be stopped for three programmes aimed at supporting Tu’u Mālohi, Pacific Reading Together and Developing Mathematical Inquiry Communities.

Republished from Pacific Media Network News with permission.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/22/budget-2025-pacific-ministry-faces-major-cuts-yet-new-initiatives-aim-for-development/feed/ 0 534451
Govt should defuse NZ’s social timebomb – but won’t https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/21/govt-should-defuse-nzs-social-timebomb-but-wont/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/21/govt-should-defuse-nzs-social-timebomb-but-wont/#respond Wed, 21 May 2025 20:40:03 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=115173 We have been handed a long and protracted recession with few signs of growth and prosperity. Budget 2025 signals more of the same, writes Susan St John.

ANALYSIS: By Susan St John

With the coalition government’s second Budget being unveiled, we should question where New Zealand is heading.

The 2024 Budget laid out the strategy. Tax cuts and landlord subsidies were prioritised with a focus on cuts to social and infrastructure spending. Most of the tax package went to the well-off, while many low-income households got nothing, or very little.

Even the tiny bit of the tax package directed to low-income people fell flat. Family Boost has significantly helped only a handful of families, while the increase of $25 per week (In Work Tax Credit) was denied all families on benefits, affecting about 200,000 of the very poorest children.

In the recession, families that lost paid work also lost access to full Working for Families, an income cut for their children of about $100 per week.

No one worked out how the many spending cuts would be distributed, but they have hurt the poor the most. These changes are too numerous to itemise but include increased transport costs; the reintroduction of prescription charges; a disastrous school lunch system; rising rents, rates and insurance; fewer budget advisory services; cuts to foodbank funding and hardship grants; stripping away support programmes for the disabled; inadequately adjusted benefits and minimum wage; and reduced support for pay equity and the living wage.

The objective is to save money while ignoring the human cost. For example, a scathing report of the Auditor General confirms that Oranga Tamariki took a bulldozer to obeying the call for a 6.5 percent cut in existing social services with no regard to the extreme hurt caused to children and struggling parents.

Budget 2025 has already indicated that Working for Families will continue to go backwards with not even inflation adjustments. The 2025 child and youth strategy report shows that over the year to June 2024 the number of children in material poverty continued to increase, there were more avoidable hospitalisations, immunisation rates for babies declined, and there was more food insecurity.

Human costs all around us
We can see the human costs all around us in homelessness, food insecurity, and ill health. Already we know we rank at the bottom among developed countries for child wellbeing and suicide rates.

Abject distress existing alongside where homes sell for $20 million-$40 million is no longer uncommon, and neither are $6 million helicopters of the very rich.

Changes in suicide rates
Changes in suicide rates (three-year average), ages 15 to 19 from 2018 to 2022 (or most recent four-year period available). Source: WHO mortality database

At the start of the year, Helen Robinson, CEO of the Auckland City Mission, had a clear warning: “I am pleading with government for more support, otherwise what we and other food relief agencies in Auckland can provide, will dramatically decrease.

“This leaves more of Auckland hungry and those already there become more desperate. It is the total antithesis of a thriving city.”

The theory held by this government is that by reducing the role of government and taxes, the private sector will flourish, and secure well-paid jobs will be created. Instead, as basic economic theory would predict, we have been handed a long and protracted recession with few signs of growth and prosperity.

Budget 2025 signals more of the same.

It would be a mistake to wait for simplistic official inequality statistics before we act. Our current destination is a sharply divided country of extreme wealth and extreme poverty with an insecure middle class.

Underfunded social agencies
Underfunded and swamped social agencies cannot remove the relentless stress on the people who are invisible in the ‘fiscally responsible’ economic narrative. The fabricated bogeyman of outsized net government debt is at the core, as the government pursues balanced budgets and small government-size targets.

A stage one economics student would know the deficit increases automatically in a recession to cushion the decline and stop the economy spiralling into something that looks more like a depression. But our safety nets of social welfare are performing very badly.

Rising unemployment has exposed the inadequacy of social protections. Working for Families, for instance, provides a very poor cushion for children. Many “working” families do not have enough hours of work and face crippling poverty traps.

Future security is undermined as more KiwiSavers cash in for hardship reasons. A record number of the talented young we need to drive the recovery and repair the frayed social fabric have already fled the country.

The government is fond of comparing its Budget to that of a household. But what prudent household would deliberately undermine the earning capacity of family members?

The primary task for the Budget should be to look after people first, to allow them to meet their food, dental and health needs, education, housing and travel costs, to have a buffer of savings to cushion unexpected shocks and to prepare for old age.

A sore thumb standing
In the social security part of the Budget, NZ Super for all at 65, no matter how rich or whether still in full-time well-paid work, dominates (gross $25 billion). It’s a sore thumb standing out alongside much less generous, highly targeted benefits and working for families, paid parental leave, family boost, hardship provisions, accommodation supplement, winter energy and other payments and subsidies.

Given the political will, research shows we can easily redirect at least $3 billion from very wealthy superannuitants to fixing other payments to greatly improve the wellbeing of the young. This will not be enough but it could be a first step to the wide rebalancing needed.

New Zealand has become a country of two halves whose paths rarely cross: a social time bomb with unimaginable consequences. It is a country beguiled by an egalitarian past that is no more.

Susan St John is an associate professor in the Pensions and Intergenerational Equity hub and Economic Policy Centre, Business School, University of Auckland. This article was first published by Newsroom before the 2025 Budget and is republished with permission.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/21/govt-should-defuse-nzs-social-timebomb-but-wont/feed/ 0 534300
‘This Budget Would Give Polluters the Green Light’: CounterSpin interview with Ashley Nunes on public land selloff https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/16/this-budget-would-give-polluters-the-green-light-counterspin-interview-with-ashley-nunes-on-public-land-selloff/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/16/this-budget-would-give-polluters-the-green-light-counterspin-interview-with-ashley-nunes-on-public-land-selloff/#respond Fri, 16 May 2025 20:44:54 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9045582  

Janine Jackson interviewed the Center for Biological Diversity’s Ashley Nunes about the selloff of public lands for the May 9, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

Common Dreams: On This Earth Day, Get Out and Fight Against Trump’s Greed and Destruction

Common Dreams (4/22/25)

Janine Jackson: 

From lease sales to expedited permitting processes, the committee’s proposal creates an unprecedented pathway for developing our vast natural resources on federal lands and waters for generations to come.

That’s a response to a piece of the budget reconciliation bill making its way through Congress, and it comes from the American Petroleum Institute. So you can sense what’s up, and why our guest calls this piece of Republicans’ effort to fund Trump’s tax cuts for billionaires nothing more than opportunities for industry to plunder, profit and pollute.

Ashley Nunes is a specialist in public lands policy at the Center for Biological Diversity. She joins us now by phone. Welcome to CounterSpin, Ashley Nunes.

Ashley Nunes: Thank you, Janine. Good to be with you.

Outdoor Alliance: Public Lands and Waters Deserve Better than Reconciliation Package

Outdoor Alliance (5/6/25)

JJ: Let’s timestamp ourselves. We’re recording on May 8, and this is about the House Natural Resources Committee, and their contribution to the Republican House Reconciliation Bill, that’s going to tell us how to offset the billionaire tax cuts that they want to push through. But it’s not a done deal yet, right?

AN: Right.

JJ: So it’s still in process. There are lots of implications, but what would this plan do, particularly with regard to–I could say public lands, but I really appreciate your phrase, “precious wild places.” What would this do?

AN: So as someone who’s focused on public lands policy, I am most interested in the part of the reconciliation package that’s come out of the House Natural Resources Committee. The proposed Republican budget hands over power to private industries to destroy our public lands and offshore waters. The excessive and indiscriminate development of fossil fuels, minerals and timber will harm wildlife and communities. This reckless development would undermine environmental protections. It would simply make air and water quality worse. And, of course, that’s harmful for wildlife and communities. So this budget wouldn’t just give tax breaks to billionaires, but it would give polluters the green light to raise emissions, destroy wild places and harm endangered species.

JJ: In particular, I know that you look at, for example, Alaska. We’re looking at oil leases in Alaska, we’re looking at Minnesota. There are very specific things, and I wonder if you could just lift up some examples for folks to know what we’re talking about.

AN: Absolutely. This is not an exhaustive list by any means, but I think I could do some highlights industry by industry.

JJ: Please.

NRDC: America’s Newly Discovered Whale Is Already in Trouble

NRDC (4/4/25)

AN: So let’s start with oil and gas on public lands. This bill would mandate dozens of lease sales every quarter, as you say, also sometimes in very sensitive locations, like the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge. There’s also at least 4 million acres on the coastal plains of Alaska for oil and gas, some of the most important bird breeding areas in the country, and really one of the last great wild places, not only in the Arctic, but in the world.

Then if we go to offshore waters for oil and gas, this bill would mandate six lease sales in Alaska’s Cook Inlet, and at least 30 lease sales in Gulf waters over the next 15 years. This offshore oil and gas development, when it pushes into sensitive ecosystems and deeper waters, it really risks another tragedy like the 2010 Deepwater Horizon explosion and oil spill that resulted in loss of human life and non-human life. The Gulf waters are home to the Rice’s whale, the world’s most endangered whale. So oil and gas here is really doing the most.

The other fossil fuel we’re mentioning is coal. This bill would open at least 4 million acres for new coal leasing. Coal is a dying and downright dirty industry, but this bill would have taxpayers subsidizing to keep that industry alive.

So across the board, there’s reduced royalty payments for these fossil fuel companies, for oil, gas and coal. And even though Republicans say that this is a bill intended to raise revenue, polluters get a really good deal here.

NYT: Biden Shields Millions of Acres of Alaskan Wilderness From Drilling and Mining

New York Times (4/19/24)

So that’s just fossil fuels. And if I could say a bit more, as you said, there’s also mining and timber. These are other extractive industries in the bill. So, mining: The bill undoes protections put in place by the Biden administration, it pushes through contentious mining projects, one of which you mentioned. So reversing a ban on 225,000 acres adjacent to Boundary Waters Wilderness in Minnesota, and then also a ban on a 211-mile mining road that would stretch across unspoiled wilderness in Alaska.

And then for timber, there’s a mandated 25% increase in timber production on public lands. And I fear this puts a target on the biggest and oldest trees, because of their economic value for timber. A bigger tree would produce more timber, but these are also the most ecologically valuable trees for carbon sequestration, habitat protection and wildfire resilience. So this is a huge giveaway to extractive industry that would be hugely harmful for the places we love.

JJ: And maybe to just pull it out a bit, this is opposing what communities want to do with their land, right? Land use is a local issue, and we hear hollering about states’ rights, but this is actually in opposition to what a number of places have said they want to do with their land.

AN: That’s right, Janine, and this is wonky, but there are many provisions, across the bill, that would take away environmental review. And that’s the process that allows the public to have their say, to give their input. So if Congress rubberstamps projects, the public doesn’t have that opportunity.

JJ: It’s so important. The fight to resist clean energy in this country is intense, and it’s also transparent. And those thumbprints are all over this as well. The fossil fuel companies, they’re following tobacco. They’re just going to hold onto it, to the very last penny. And that seems evident in this legislation.

AN: You’re so right. There are provisions, as I said, to reduce royalties on fossil fuels, and that’s the status quo. But there’s also provisions to add rents for clean energy, renewable energy on public lands. So this is really a giveaway to polluters, and it’s to the detriment of that clean energy transition that we need.

JJ: I’ll just ask you, finally: I think transparency is the least that reporters could demand from this process, that has such myriad implications. But what would you like to see from journalism on this set of issues? And maybe what would you like to see less of?

Ashley Nunes, Center for Biodiversity

Ashley Nunes: “This budget proposal is one of the worst attacks on the environment that we have seen in our lifetime.”

AN: There’s just so much to say here, really. I think I would just say a couple of things.

First of all, we were warned that this would happen. This budget bill is the Project 2025 and Agenda 47 playbooks in action. It’s not just “drill, baby, drill,” it’s also “mine, baby, mine” and “log, baby, log.” This proposal uses public resources to enrich private interests. It’s extreme. And if these provisions stay in the reconciliation package, and are enacted, this would be an obscene giveaway of our public resources to private industry, and it would put these places at serious risk. It’s heartbreaking. I think journalists, like you and others, can help people understand what’s at stake.

So, secondly, I would just add that we are living through a climate crisis and an extinction crisis, and this budget proposal is one of the worst attacks on the environment that we have seen in our lifetime. It would not only cause harm to our cherished landscapes, coastal waters and wildlife, but also to our public health, and our ability to recreate on our public lands across the country. So people want to know what they can do, and ultimately, people need to call their congressional representatives and tell them to vote no, to stop.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with Ashley Nunes, public lands policy specialist at the Center for Biological Diversity. They’re online at BiologicalDiversity.org. Thank you so much, Ashley Nunes, for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

AN: Thanks, Janine.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/16/this-budget-would-give-polluters-the-green-light-counterspin-interview-with-ashley-nunes-on-public-land-selloff/feed/ 0 533485
House Budget Committee Wrangles with Reconciliation Bill Disconnected from Reality https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/16/house-budget-committee-wrangles-with-reconciliation-bill-disconnected-from-reality/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/16/house-budget-committee-wrangles-with-reconciliation-bill-disconnected-from-reality/#respond Fri, 16 May 2025 20:07:52 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/house-budget-committee-wrangles-with-reconciliation-bill-disconnected-from-reality Five Republican members of the House Budget Committee voted against the House Reconciliation bill today on the grounds that the budget cuts it imposed were not severe enough. The move means House leadership will need to cobble together a new version of a bill that already cut critical federal programs too deeply, according to the Union of Concerned Scientists (UCS). Like many House members, UCS also is concerned about the bill’s wholesale roll back of federal climate incentives that are driving a clean energy boom.

“This bill will raise costs for consumers and folks in need, while destroying American innovation and lowering taxes for the already super rich,” said David Watkins, director of government affairs for the Climate and Energy Program at UCS. “Not only is this bill shockingly cruel in the depth of cuts it would impose, it shows the majority and president are totally cut off from reality. In their fantasy world, people deserve to fall through the massive holes cut in the U.S. social safety net, consumers should pay more for energy and transportation to support the oil and gas industries, and billionaires deserve lower taxes. In addition, Congress went out of its way to create a loophole by which the administration can target nonprofits the president doesn't like without due process—stunning and shameful.”

Below is information about the sections of the bill UCS analysts are following.

Energy sections of the bill, including those that would:

o Undermining the clean electricity tax credits threatens to send electricity prices soaring, severely slowing the deployment of the lowest-cost sources of electricity generation right as demand is expected to surge.

o Shifting eligibility to “placed in service” would further accelerate the credit phaseout and threaten to fully derail future projects.

Clean transportation sections of the bill, including those that would:

o While drivers can save hundreds of dollars a year in reduced fuel and maintenance costs by switching to electric, the upfront cost of electric cars and trucks can be a hurdle, which is why the tax credits were targeted to increase everyone’s accessibility to EVs.

o Lack of access to charging stations is cited as one of the most common barriers for drivers interested in switching to electric. Repealing this credit would only benefits the oil industry, at the expense of suppliers manufacturing the charging infrastructure, union workers installing and maintaining the chargers, and drivers and fleet operators looking to save money and clean the air by switching to electric.

o Eliminating the global warming pollution rules would increase fuel and maintenance costs for new vehicles by $6,000 over the life of the vehicles; rolling back the commonsense CAFE standards would increase fuel costs by $23 billion through 2050.

o The vehicles, vessels, and equipment that move freight create hot spots of some of the worst air quality in the country and contribute significantly to climate change. There is no safe level of soot to breathe, and despite making up a small fraction of vehicles on the road, heavy duty vehicles are disproportionately responsible for global warming emissions, soot and smog-forming pollution.

SNAP and ag sections of the bill, including the plan to:

Defense sections of the bill that would:

  • Effectively repeal the clean electricity tax credits through nearly immediate phaseout, unworkable supply chain restrictions, and limited access to transferability, which would slow the vital buildout of new sources of electricity generation and undermine the market signal to increase domestic manufacturing.
  • Cut targeted investments in critical grid infrastructure, including transmission, intended to alleviate the challenges of rapidly rising electricity demand and increase the reliability and resilience of the electricity system.
  • Cut numerous programs intended to help people, communities and companies transition to cleaner and more efficient ways of using energy.
  • Repeal tax credits that help people make their homes more energy efficient, which would force people to pay more to heat and cool their homes.
  • Restrict access to, and shorten the timeframe of, the advanced manufacturing credits, which would slow the nation’s pivot to forward-looking investments in the clean economy.
  • Repeal the clean hydrogen production tax credit, which would functionally tip the scales in favor of fossil-based hydrogen production given the continuation of the 45Q carbon capture credit.
  • Create numerous attempted shortcuts and bailouts for fossil fuel interests, including pay-to-play provisions.
  • Defund and delay implementation of a program that incentivizes the cleanup of methane pollution from oil and gas systems.
  • Functionally repeal clean vehicle tax credits, which would make it harder for drivers and fleets to switch to electric vehicles (EVs).
  • Repeal clean vehicle infrastructure tax credits, which would make it harder for drivers and businesses to invest in electric vehicle charging infrastructure in the locations that need it the most: rural and underserved areas.
  • Cut fuel efficiency (CAFE) and pollution standards for cars and trucks, attacking one of the largest federal actions ever taken on climate change and directly impacting people’s wallets.
  • Claw back congressionally approved funds for the Clean Heavy Duty Program and Clean Ports Program (CPP), which would delay the replacement of heavy-duty vehicles, such as school buses and vocational vehicles, with zero-emission models and make it harder for U.S. ports to invest in zero-emission equipment.
  • Increase farm bill spending by roughly $60 billion by slashing the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP), which helps millions of low-income Americans, both rural and urban, to put food on their tables. In doing so, the bill abandons the systems approach we need to fix the nation’s food and farm system.
  • Spend $25 billion on the development of a hugely expensive, unrealistic, and counterproductive homeland missile defense system called Golden Dome, which includes a system of space-based weapons that would try to destroy nuclear-armed missiles as they launch. UCS analysis has shown that such systems are very expensive, technically challenging to build, and readily defeated as well as globally destabilizing and likely to lead to less security, not more.
  • Increase spending on the troubled, behind-schedule and very over-budget Sentinel land-based ballistic missile program, which UCS recommends cancelling, given it is expensive, dangerous and unnecessary.

  • This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/16/house-budget-committee-wrangles-with-reconciliation-bill-disconnected-from-reality/feed/ 0 533790
    Newsom budget plan would cap health program for undocumented Californians; Deadly Israeli air strikes continue in Gaza amid ceasefire talks in Doha – May 14, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/14/newsom-budget-plan-would-cap-health-program-for-undocumented-californians-deadly-israeli-air-strikes-continue-in-gaza-amid-ceasefire-talks-in-doha-may-14-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/14/newsom-budget-plan-would-cap-health-program-for-undocumented-californians-deadly-israeli-air-strikes-continue-in-gaza-amid-ceasefire-talks-in-doha-may-14-2025/#respond Wed, 14 May 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=604c09893c8cb137942a7f154e1cd603 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

    The post Newsom budget plan would cap health program for undocumented Californians; Deadly Israeli air strikes continue in Gaza amid ceasefire talks in Doha – May 14, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


    This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/14/newsom-budget-plan-would-cap-health-program-for-undocumented-californians-deadly-israeli-air-strikes-continue-in-gaza-amid-ceasefire-talks-in-doha-may-14-2025/feed/ 0 533076
    House Committee Adds Language to Budget Legislation That Would Give Trump Unchecked Powers to Crush Dissent https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/14/house-committee-adds-language-to-budget-legislation-that-would-give-trump-unchecked-powers-to-crush-dissent/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/14/house-committee-adds-language-to-budget-legislation-that-would-give-trump-unchecked-powers-to-crush-dissent/#respond Wed, 14 May 2025 14:15:01 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/house-committee-adds-language-to-budget-legislation-that-would-give-trump-unchecked-powers-to-crush-dissent On Wednesday morning, the House Ways and Means Committee voted along party lines to approve budget-reconciliation legislation that revives language from a shelved 2024 bill giving the White House dangerous powers to crush dissenting voices in America’s nonprofit sector.

    H.R. 9495, which failed to pass in the previous Congress, would have granted the executive branch broad and easily abused powers to revoke the tax-exempt status of a nonprofit by merely claiming that it is a “terrorist supporting organization.” Though the House passed the legislation in November 2024 with a narrow majority, mounting public opposition turned many legislators against it. As a result, the Senate didn’t bring the bill to the floor before Congress’ term expired.

    H.R. 9495’s draconian language was buried on page 380 of the pre-marked-up bill. If it passes Congress, the reconciliation measure would grant the U.S. Secretary of Treasury the ability to accuse any nonprofit of supporting terrorism — and to terminate its tax-exempt status without due process.

    Free Press Action Advocacy Director Jenna Ruddock said:

    “Like zombies returning from the dead, House Republicans’ reconciliation bills revive some of the most horrifying ideas of past Congresses. Today, the legislation formerly known as H.R. 9495 has returned to wreak havoc against dissenting voices across the country’s nonprofit sector. Like too many other overbroad and easily abused powers, this measure would undoubtedly be weaponized by a White House with a track record of attacks against any speech that displeases our authoritarian president.

    “If it were signed into law, the legislation would allow this or any other administration to accuse any nonprofit it dislikes of supporting terrorism — putting the burden on the organization to prove otherwise, or risk losing its tax-exempt status. The bill would have a widespread chilling effect not only on nonprofit groups but on the millions of people across the United States who rely on these organizations to help them access crucial services and engage in the political process.

    “The bill has dangerously broad statutory language that would allow the Trump administration to interpret its authority in any number of harmful ways. Every member of Congress must oppose handing such sweeping powers to an increasingly dictatorial executive. When H.R. 9495 came before Congress last year, tens of thousands of people picked up their phones or signed petitions to express deep concerns about this profoundly anti-democratic measure. People must again reach out to their elected representatives and senators and call out the massive potential for abuse before it’s too late.

    “This measure’s real intent lurks behind its hyperbolic and unsubstantiated anti-terrorist rhetoric: It would allow the Treasury Department to explicitly target, harass and investigate thousands of U.S. organizations that make up civil society, including nonprofit newsrooms. The bill’s language lacks any meaningful safeguards against abuse. Instead it puts the burden of proof on organizations rather than on the government. It’s not hard to imagine how the Trump administration would use it to exact revenge on groups that have raised questions about or simply angered the president and other officials in his orbit.

    “Chilling free speech doesn’t keep Americans safe. Instead it gives an authoritarian regime another tool to violate the rights that form the foundation of a healthy democracy.”


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/14/house-committee-adds-language-to-budget-legislation-that-would-give-trump-unchecked-powers-to-crush-dissent/feed/ 0 532990
    Energy & Commerce Budget Bill Targets Programs to Reduce Pollution, Innovate Industrial Sector & Includes “Pay to Pollute” Provisions https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/12/energy-commerce-budget-bill-targets-programs-to-reduce-pollution-innovate-industrial-sector-includes-pay-to-pollute-provisions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/12/energy-commerce-budget-bill-targets-programs-to-reduce-pollution-innovate-industrial-sector-includes-pay-to-pollute-provisions/#respond Mon, 12 May 2025 20:48:01 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/energy-commerce-budget-bill-targets-programs-to-reduce-pollution-innovate-industrial-sector-includes-pay-to-pollute-provisions Late last night, the House Energy and Commerce Committee released its portion of the budget reconciliation bill that will harm Americans in a variety of ways, from gutting Medicaid to slashing programs that protect clean air. The legislation is expected to be marked up in a committee meeting tomorrow.

    Slated for delay or repeal in the proposal are programs to monitor and reduce corporate pollution, incentivize cleaner manufacturing to create domestic jobs, and invest in renewable energy, among many others.

    Mahyar Sorour, Sierra Club Director of Beyond Fossil Fuels Policy, said, “House Republicans are bending over backwards to give handouts to big polluters while their constituents pay the price of worse pollution and higher energy bills. Vital services and protections are being cut to pay for tax cuts for billionaires. The idea that corporate polluters can pay a fee to freely pollute our communities is beyond the pale. This is a terrible bill for the American people. The House should get their priorities straight and reject this proposal.”

    Specifically, the legislation includes:

    • A repeal of the Methane Emissions Reduction Program’s funding and the delay of the implementation of its Waste Emissions Charge for 10 years.
    • A provision to allow methane gas export companies to pay a $1 million fee in exchange for LNG projects being automatically deemed in the public interest. LNG exports increase pollution and supercharge climate change while diminishing domestic energy supplies and raising prices for American consumers.
    • Another provision to allow other gas infrastructure developers to receive an "expedited permitting process" from the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission under the Natural Gas Act if the applicant pays $10 million or 1 percent of the project's projected cost.
    • $1.6B in cuts to the Department of Energy’s Industrial Demonstrations Program, Loans Program Office, and Office of Clean Energy Demonstrations — programs that help to decarbonize and innovate the heavily polluting industrial sector.
    • Provisions to cut and repeal features of the federal Buy Clean Initiative, including environmental product declaration assistance and low-embodied carbon labeling to verify the cleanliness of innovative U.S. manufacturers.
    • A provision to repeal and cut greenhouse gas corporate reporting, a critical tool to protect leading U.S. manufacturers from foreign carbon tariffs and encourage polluters to modernize.
    • Repeal of EPA’s Greenhouse Gas Reduction Fund, which supports renewable energy projects in low-income communities.
    • Cuts to programs that lower diesel emissions, reduce pollution at public and private ports, and support domestic electric vehicle manufacturing.
    • And the repeal and rescinding of funding for environmental and climate justice block grants that provided financial and technical assistance to support community efforts to reduce pollution.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/12/energy-commerce-budget-bill-targets-programs-to-reduce-pollution-innovate-industrial-sector-includes-pay-to-pollute-provisions/feed/ 0 532579
    Donald Trump’s Budget Breaks His Promise to Protect Social Security https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/donald-trumps-budget-breaks-his-promise-to-protect-social-security/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/donald-trumps-budget-breaks-his-promise-to-protect-social-security/#respond Fri, 02 May 2025 20:18:04 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/donald-trumps-budget-breaks-his-promise-to-protect-social-security The following is a statement from Nancy Altman, President of Social Security Works, on the Trump administration’s FY 2026 budget blueprint:

    “Donald Trump ran for President on a promise to protect Social Security. This budget breaks that promise.

    It keeps funding for the Social Security Administration (SSA) flat, which is a de-facto cut since SSA’s fixed costs, such as field office rents, go up every year by over $600 million.

    Furthermore, it forces SSA to spend more money on so-called “program integrity” — clawing back money from Americans who have been overpaid through no fault of their own — which creates extreme hardship, including homelessness.

    The truth is that Social Security is extremely understaffed, which is increasing backlogs and wait times. This budget will make those backlogs and delays worse. It will make mistakes — including the Orwellian nightmare of being inadvertently declared dead when you are not — harder to fix.

    This budget’s cuts to Social Security are right in line with Elon Musk’s DOGE, which has pushed out over 7,000 SSA workers, including some of the most experienced and highly trained. Many Social Security field offices have lost half their staff, even as DOGE is forcing millions more people a year to visit those offices. What good are earned benefits that Americans can’t access?

    Despite these massive cuts, as well as cuts to other essential programs like Meals on Wheels, the Trump administration continues to lie that it is protecting seniors and Social Security. No one should believe them.”


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/donald-trumps-budget-breaks-his-promise-to-protect-social-security/feed/ 0 530847
    AFT’s Weingarten Responds to Trump’s 2026 Budget Proposal https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/afts-weingarten-responds-to-trumps-2026-budget-proposal/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/afts-weingarten-responds-to-trumps-2026-budget-proposal/#respond Fri, 02 May 2025 19:23:03 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/afts-weingarten-responds-to-trumps-2026-budget-proposal AFT President Randi Weingarten issued the following statement after the release of President Donald Trump’s fiscal 2026 budget blueprint, which asks Congress to cut programs that help Americans:

    “President Trump’s skinny budget cuts much of what helps poor, working-class and middle-class Americans, seemingly to pay for tax cuts for the rich. You can’t make this up.

    “The draconian cuts to public education and lifesaving medical research and health agencies demonstrate a lack of care for Americans’ future and well-being.

    “Our concern when the president started dismantling the Department of Education was not the bureaucracy but the funding. And now we know, he’s actually shortchanging kids. He would gut K-12 programs by $5.4 billion. Support for student aid would be slashed.

    “Healthcare programs would be cut by more than a quarter and labor by more than one-third. And what he isn’t gutting he’s using to create a slush fund for state bureaucrats to do whatever they want with Title I money.

    “Every president gets to pursue their agenda, but Trump’s budget proposal just strips away the supports children get in public schools across America, disproportionately in places that voted for him.

    “Voters didn’t expect to lose their reading or after-school programs for a tax cut for the ultra wealthy. Meanwhile, Trump’s allies in Congress are trying to take an even bigger hatchet to critical supports for Americans—like healthcare, food assistance and education.

    “We won’t stop fighting for America’s children, and we hope members of Congress will join us in opposing this proposal, which is a blatant attack on all of us.”


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/afts-weingarten-responds-to-trumps-2026-budget-proposal/feed/ 0 530849
    President Trump’s Budget Proposal Slashes Programs Millions Rely On To Make Ends Meet https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/president-trumps-budget-proposal-slashes-programs-millions-rely-on-to-make-ends-meet/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/president-trumps-budget-proposal-slashes-programs-millions-rely-on-to-make-ends-meet/#respond Fri, 02 May 2025 19:07:20 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/president-trumps-budget-proposal-slashes-programs-millions-rely-on-to-make-ends-meet Today, President Donald Trump released his fiscal year 2026 budget. In response, Bobby Kogan, senior director of federal budget policy at the Center for American Progress, released the following statement.

    Trump’s budget request puts a sledgehammer to the programs that millions of Americans rely on. It would cut nondefense discretionary spending by $174 billion, leaving it at the lowest level as a percentage of gross domestic product (GDP) on record. The proposed cuts are extreme by any standard, but they’re extreme even by Trump’s own standards. For comparison, in his skinny budget in 2017, Trump called to cut this category of funding by $54 billion. The cuts in this budget are especially egregious when you consider that Trump is also trying to push the largest Medicaid and food assistance cuts in American history through Congress over the next few months.

    If it goes into effect, Trump’s budget proposal would make it much harder for Americans to cover basic needs such as child care and education—harming American households and leaving vulnerable families even worse off. Specifically, his budget request calls for enormous cuts to K-12 education and rental assistance as well as for the elimination of the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program (LIHEAP), which helps poor households heat their homes in the winter. Americans are not going to be better off by any means. Trump’s budget proposal will come at the expense of the American people.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/president-trumps-budget-proposal-slashes-programs-millions-rely-on-to-make-ends-meet/feed/ 0 530861
    Trump’s Budget Betrays the American People https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/trumps-budget-betrays-the-american-people/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/trumps-budget-betrays-the-american-people/#respond Fri, 02 May 2025 19:00:07 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/trumps-budget-betrays-the-american-people Continuing their campaign to make life more expensive for millions of Americans by slashing access to healthcare, housing, and community services, the Trump administration today unveiled $163 billion in drastic budget cuts for the 2026 fiscal year. Among other things, Trump’s proposal calls for $674 million in cuts from the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services Program Management, $18 billion in cuts to the National Institute of Health, $27 billion in cuts to rental assistance, and $12 billion in education cuts, funding cuts that in total would impact tens of millions of everyday Americans.

    Trump’s budget reinforces the Republican plan to reimagine government for the ultra-wealthy and special interests, as Republican lawmakers clear a path for tax cuts for themselves, their wealthy donors, and giant corporations.

    “President Trump is again betraying the millions of Americans who believed him when he promised to lower costs. This time, he’s taking aim at anyone who attends a public school, relies on rental assistance to keep a roof over their heads, or accesses healthcare through Medicaid or Medicare. Instead of standing up for everyday Americans, Trump is prioritizing his own wallet and the tax benefits of his wealthy donors—leaving local communities and small towns to bear the brunt of his cuts.” —Accountable.US Executive Director Tony Carrk


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/05/02/trumps-budget-betrays-the-american-people/feed/ 0 530863
    Scientists predict a brutal hurricane season while Trump takes aim at NOAA’s budget https://grist.org/climate/hurricane-season-forecast-doge-slashes-noaa-jobs/ https://grist.org/climate/hurricane-season-forecast-doge-slashes-noaa-jobs/#respond Thu, 17 Apr 2025 08:15:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=663334 With towns and cities in the southeastern United States still reeling from hurricanes that hit last year, scientists are now releasing their forecasts for what could unfold in the hurricane season that starts in less than two months. Colorado State University is predicting nine hurricanes in 2025, four of which could spin up into major strength, while AccuWeather is forecasting up to 10. Both are predicting an above-average season similar to last year’s, which produced monster storms like Helene. That hurricane inundated swaths of the U.S., killing 249 people and causing $79 billion in damage across seven states.

    The Trump administration’s slashing of jobs at the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, then, is coming at a dangerous time, experts say, as the agency generates a stream of data essential to creating hurricane forecasting models. Elon Musk’s Department of Government Efficiency, or DOGE, has eliminated hundreds of positions at NOAA as part of Musk’s stated aim of cutting $1 trillion from the federal budget. Last week, news broke that the administration was proposing to cut NOAA’s overall budget by 25 percent, with plans to eliminate funding for the agency’s research arm. 

    NOAA and its various divisions, like the National Weather Service and the National Hurricane Center, are the ones collecting and processing the data that weather apps like AccuWeather use for their daily forecasts. Hurricane forecasters also rely on data coming from a range of government-owned instruments: real-time measurements of ocean temperatures from a network of buoys and satellites and wind speeds from weather balloons. Those readings help scientists predict what the conditions leading up to hurricane season might say about the number of storms that could arrive this summer and their potential intensity.

    All those NOAA instruments require people to maintain them and others to process the data. Though Klotzbach says he hasn’t had any issues accessing the data when running his seasonal forecast model, scientists like him are worried that losing those agency staffers to cost-cutting efforts will disrupt the stream of information just as hurricane season is getting going. The National Weather Service is already reducing its number of weather balloon launches. And on Wednesday, the New York Times reported that due to severe shortages of meteorologists and other employees, the National Weather Service is preparing for fewer forecast updates. (The National Weather Service and the National Hurricane Center did not return requests to comment for this story.)

    The seasonal forecasts coming out now help to raise awareness in hurricane hotspots like the Gulf Coast, said Xubin Zeng, director of the Climate Dynamics and Hydrometeorology Center at the University of Arizona. But as the start of hurricane season approaches on June 1 and NOAA loses staff, researchers are worried that their shorter-term forecasts — the ones that alert the public to immediate dangers — could suffer, a result that would endanger American lives. 

    “Now we are nervous if those data will be provided — and will be provided on time — from NOAA,” Zeng said. “We are thinking about what kind of backup plans we need to have for our early-June prediction.”

    To make their predictions, researchers are looking in particular at three main ingredients that hurricanes need to grow large and strong: a hot ocean that acts as fuel, high humidity, and low vertical wind shear — basically, a lack of winds that would normally break up a storm. 

    Getting that full picture is critical because hurricanes churn the ocean. Their winds push away the top layer of water, and deeper water rushes up to fill the void. If deeper water is colder, it can mix upward to cool the surface waters, removing the fuel that hurricanes feed on. By contrast, warmer waters from the deep might mix toward the surface, providing more storm fuel. Forecasters are predicting an above-average season this year because the Atlantic is already several degrees Fahrenheit warmer than usual.

    Buoys provide a snapshot of this dynamic, measuring ocean temperatures, both for the conditions that give rise to hurricanes and the conditions that sustain them. “The buoys are critical for getting not only what’s going on with the ocean surface, but what’s going on deeper down in the ocean,” said Phil Klotzbach, a senior research scientist who oversees Colorado State University’s seasonal hurricane forecast. 

    They also require maintenance if their instruments break. If forecasters lose access to that data, they can’t accurately predict the strength of a hurricane and where it will make landfall: They might alert local authorities that an incoming storm will be a Category 3, only for it to spin up into a much more dangerous Category 5. 

    This is what’s known as rapid intensification, an increase in sustained wind speeds by at least 35 miles per hour within 24 hours. Last October, Hurricane Milton jumped 90 mph in a day before slamming into Florida. These rapid intensification events are happening much more frequently thanks to global warming heating up the oceans, and researchers are getting better at predicting them — thanks in no small part to NOAA’s data. 

    Once a hurricane arrives, NOAA scrambles aircraft to take still more measurements, which helps improve forecasts of future storms. If Congress approves the Trump administration’s proposed cuts to the agency, the Hurricane Research Division — which contributes crew to these “hurricane hunter” aircraft — would be shut down, according to Rick Spinrad, a former NOAA administrator. “Without the researchers being part of those flights,” Spinrad said, “the data they collect and contribute won’t be there anymore, and so the hurricane hunter efficiency goes down.”

    While the Trump administration is slashing NOAA’s budget and staff ostensibly to save money, the agency actually saves Americans six dollars for every dollar invested in the agency, according to Justin Mankin, director of the Climate Modeling and Impacts Group at Dartmouth College. An accurate forecast can, for instance, help communities better prepare for extreme weather and mitigate any damage. Cutting jobs at NOAA, Mankin suspects, might be a step toward turning it into a for-profit entity, instead of one providing free data to hurricane researchers and the public at large. 

    “The institutions that are being taken apart by DOGE have some of the highest credibility and return on investment of any in the government,” Mankin said. “The perverse thing that seems to be happening here is that this is about a systematic degradation of the quality of the science coming out of these institutions and about instilling a loss of confidence.” 

    This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Scientists predict a brutal hurricane season while Trump takes aim at NOAA’s budget on Apr 17, 2025.


    This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Matt Simon.

    ]]>
    https://grist.org/climate/hurricane-season-forecast-doge-slashes-noaa-jobs/feed/ 0 526419
    Elon Musk Stands to Get Even Richer as Trump Backs $1 Trillion Budget for Pentagon https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/09/elon-musk-stands-to-get-even-richer-as-trump-backs-1-trillion-budget-for-pentagon/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/09/elon-musk-stands-to-get-even-richer-as-trump-backs-1-trillion-budget-for-pentagon/#respond Wed, 09 Apr 2025 14:03:43 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=376964d099d4a5e06753b771ee79c890
    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/09/elon-musk-stands-to-get-even-richer-as-trump-backs-1-trillion-budget-for-pentagon/feed/ 0 524699
    Elon Musk Stands to Get Even Richer as Trump Backs $1 Trillion Budget for Pentagon https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/09/elon-musk-stands-to-get-even-richer-as-trump-backs-1-trillion-budget-for-pentagon-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/09/elon-musk-stands-to-get-even-richer-as-trump-backs-1-trillion-budget-for-pentagon-2/#respond Wed, 09 Apr 2025 12:45:31 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=8e74f64519e8200d71b5eb9035889224 Seg2 pentagon

    As federal agencies face crippling cuts and are forced to cut essential services, President Trump has announced he will seek a $1 trillion budget for the Pentagon, a record-setting number that would mark the highest level of U.S. defense spending since World War II. William Hartung, a senior research fellow at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft, blasts the promised budget as “completely unnecessary” and says that “almost the only beneficiaries are going to be the weapons manufacturers.” Hartung also discusses the growing political influence of Silicon Valley defense technology startups, including Alex Karp’s Palantir and Elon Musk’s SpaceX.


    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/09/elon-musk-stands-to-get-even-richer-as-trump-backs-1-trillion-budget-for-pentagon-2/feed/ 0 524710
    Senate plans Saturday vote on Republican budget plan; Thousands expected at Saturday rallies against Trump agenda – April 4, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/04/senate-plans-saturday-vote-on-republican-budget-plan-thousands-expected-at-saturday-rallies-against-trump-agenda-april-4-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/04/senate-plans-saturday-vote-on-republican-budget-plan-thousands-expected-at-saturday-rallies-against-trump-agenda-april-4-2025/#respond Fri, 04 Apr 2025 18:00:08 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6dc215c7bc16b0fbc42bd87ce022cd59 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

     

    The post Senate plans Saturday vote on Republican budget plan; Thousands expected at Saturday rallies against Trump agenda – April 4, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


    This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/04/04/senate-plans-saturday-vote-on-republican-budget-plan-thousands-expected-at-saturday-rallies-against-trump-agenda-april-4-2025/feed/ 0 523914
    Tonga, Micronesia get largest increases in Australia’s Pacific aid budget https://rfa.org/english/pacific/2025/03/27/australia-foreign-aid/ https://rfa.org/english/pacific/2025/03/27/australia-foreign-aid/#respond Thu, 27 Mar 2025 01:37:08 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/pacific/2025/03/27/australia-foreign-aid/ SYDNEY - Tonga and the Federated States of Micronesia will receive notable increases in Australian foreign aid this year, as analysts say there are indications that Canberra is stepping in to fill a regional void left by a U.S. freeze on development assistance.

    Overall, Australia announced A$5.1 billion (US$3.2 billion) for foreign aid in the 2025-26 budget released Tuesday, a 2.7% increase on the previous year, but about flat in real terms.

    Pacific island nations were allocated A$2.157 billion, up from A$2.05 billion for the 2024-25 financial year, budget documents show.

    The region now accounts for about 42% of Australian aid, almost doubling from a decade ago and making it the Pacific’s biggest donor, partly in response to China’s inroads with Pacific island states.

    In a statement Tuesday, Foreign Minister Penny Wong said in “uncertain times” Australian aid was going to the Pacific and Southeast Asia, “where Australia’s interests are most at stake.”

    Australian defense force, emergency services personnel and relief supplies onboard an Australian Air Force C-17A Globemaster cargo plane en route Port Vila, Vanuatu, March 16, 2015.
    Australian defense force, emergency services personnel and relief supplies onboard an Australian Air Force C-17A Globemaster cargo plane en route Port Vila, Vanuatu, March 16, 2015.
    (Dave Hunt/Reuters)

    In the Pacific, the largest aid increases are directed towards the Federated States of Micronesia and Tonga, the latter of which will receive A$85 million over the next four years to support its economy.

    Tonga’s small and fragile economy is under strain amid looming debt repayment obligations to China of about US$120 million, which is roughly a quarter of its gross domestic product, according to a Lowy Institute analysis.

    Assistance to Tonga is part of a broader A$296 million package for Pacific island nations to respond to shocks and bolster economic resilience. A total of A$355 million will also be provided over four years for climate resilience projects in Pacific and Southeast Asian countries.

    Australia will spend about A$81 million over three years on health in the Pacific and Southeast Asia to continue services for HIV and tuberculosis, maternal and child health, family planning and sexual and reproductive health.

    The announcement comes amid widespread fears that U.S. President Donald Trump’s executive order in January to freeze almost all U.S. foreign aid would wind back progress made in containing deadly diseases such as tuberculosis and HIV.

    “TB and HIV programs in PNG and Fiji might be affected by the U.S. cuts,” said Cameron Hill, a senior research officer at Australian National University’s Development Policy Center.

    “That is an area where I think the government is concentrating some effort and also some civil society programs in the Pacific ... which aren’t big in dollar terms, but the U.S. has traditionally played a big role in those,” he said at a panel Wednesday on the budget’s aid component.

    The Solomon Islands Red Cross receives an Australian Aid shipment delivered for the Pacific Games in Honiara, Nov. 4, 2023.
    The Solomon Islands Red Cross receives an Australian Aid shipment delivered for the Pacific Games in Honiara, Nov. 4, 2023.
    (LSIS Jarrod Mulvihill/Australian Defence Force)

    Hill said about A$120 million, or about 2.3% of aid spending, had been reprioritized in 2025-26 away from multilateral and global programs.

    The “unprecedented divergence between defense and development spending is still growing” and will likely rise to a ratio of about 13:1 by the end of the decade, he said.

    Canberra announced last year it will spend an additional A$50.3 billion on defense over the next decade.

    Australia’s aid budget has held relatively steady amid a global retreat in foreign development assistance, led by the Trump administration’s dismantling of the U.S. Agency for International Development. Trump on Jan. 20 ordered a 90-day program-by-program review of which foreign assistance programs deserved to continue.

    Robin Davies, an honorary professor at the Development Policy Center, said about 10 Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development countries –including the three largest the U.S., Germany and Britain — have announced significant cuts to foreign aid over the past year.

    He estimated that anywhere from a third to a half of existing aid from OECD sources might disappear within the next few years.

    “I think the real impact in our region of the U.S. cuts will be through the weakening of multilateral organisations that we really want to remain in places like Suva, Port Moresby or Jakarta,” he said at the panel discussion.

    An Australian Army CH-47 Chinook helicopter delivers aid to Futuna Island in Vanuatu, March 21, 2023, following destructive cyclones.
    An Australian Army CH-47 Chinook helicopter delivers aid to Futuna Island in Vanuatu, March 21, 2023, following destructive cyclones.
    (LSIS Daniel Goodman/Australian Department of Defence)

    Total American aid spending reached US$3.4 billion in the Pacific between 2008-22, according to the Lowy Institute, with most money directed towards the Marshall Islands, Micronesia and Palau.

    The three Pacific Island countries give the U.S. exclusive military authority in their territories in exchange for economic assistance under compacts of free association.

    “About 80% of American aid to the Pacific goes to those three countries, and it is still unclear what shape that compact assistance will take in the future,” said Hill.

    “The Biden administration signed last year new 20-year compact agreements, but it’s not clear whether the Trump administration will honor those or the new congress will honor those.”

    BenarNews is an online news outlet affiliated with Radio Free Asia.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Harry Pearl for BenarNews.

    ]]>
    https://rfa.org/english/pacific/2025/03/27/australia-foreign-aid/feed/ 0 521761
    Junta chief vows to hike defense budget, seeking to expand global presence https://rfa.org/english/myanmar/2025/03/25/myanmar-junta-chief-defense-budget-increase/ https://rfa.org/english/myanmar/2025/03/25/myanmar-junta-chief-defense-budget-increase/#respond Tue, 25 Mar 2025 10:18:07 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/myanmar/2025/03/25/myanmar-junta-chief-defense-budget-increase/ Read RFA coverage of this topic in Burmese.

    Myanmar’s junta chief said the military would increase the defense budget, while seeking to expand his international presence with a reported plan to join a regional summit in Thailand next month.

    Senior Gen. Min Aung Hlaing announced on Monday that the junta would increase the budget for its defense ministry to “enhance the strength and capacity of defense forces” as well as to “maintain peace and stability.” He did not provide specific figures.

    Since the 2021 coup, the junta has tripled its defense budget from 1.746 trillion kyats to 5.635 trillion kyats (US$2.68 billion) by 2023, according to media reports, accounting for about a quarter of the government’s total spending. The military has also invested over US$1 billion in weapons, primarily from Russia, China, Singapore, India and Thailand.

    Despite bolstering its capabilities, the junta faces intense international criticism for human rights violations, including indiscriminate attacks and mass detentions, leading to accusations of war crimes and increasing global isolation.

    Min Aung Hlaing has been also sanctioned by multiple countries, including the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, and the European Union’s 27 member states.

    These sanctions include asset freezes, travel bans, and prohibitions on transactions, aimed at holding him accountable for human rights violations and the military’s seizure of power.

    However, Min Aung Hlaing appears to be attempting to reshape his international standing, as media reports indicate that he plans to participate in a regional summit in Bangkok next week – marking his first visit to Thailand.

    According to Thai media outlet ThaiPBS on Monday, Min Aung Hlaing is scheduled to visit Bangkok from April 3 to 4 to attend the Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation, or BIMSTEC, summit. The summit is expected to be attended by heads of state from member countries, including Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi.

    BIMSTEC is a regional cooperation organization established in 1997, comprising seven countries bordering the Bay of Bengal: India, Thailand, Myanmar, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Nepal, and Bhutan.

    Min Aung Hlaing also recently visited Russia and Belarus, where he held meetings with Russian President Vladimir Putin and Belarusian President Alexander Lukashenko.

    Separately, he attended the Mekong River Basin Summit held in Kunming, Yunnan Province, China, in November – marking his first visit to China since the coup.

    RELATED STORIES

    Myanmar’s junta launches offensives on rebel strongholds in Mandalay region

    Junta offensives leave 4 dead, thousands displaced in northwest Myanmar

    Junta airstrike hits a clinic in central Myanmar, killing 11, including children

    Assaults in northern Myanmar

    As the junta leader looks abroad for support for his unelected government and approval for elections he plans to hold by January, his military’s attacks on pro-democracy forces and ethnic armies fighting for autonomy continue in an indiscriminate and brutal fashion.

    A resident from Mandalay’s Natogyi township said that junta forces bombed two villages around 1 a.m. on Sunday morning, injuring two women and six men, including a 13-year-old child.

    Insurgent groups, which retain control over much of the township, have seen a resurgence in junta offensives, following a series of failed ceasefires between the junta and rebel militias in the country’s north.

    “They were all just civilians, Although most were people avoiding conflict, there were those who couldn’t avoid it and were stuck in Let Wea and Myinni villages,” said the resident, who declined to be named over security concerns. “When the bomb fell, they ran but they didn’t get away.”

    Airstrikes on Myinni and Let Wea villages in Natogyi township in Mandalay region burned down more than 10 houses on March 23, 2025.
    Airstrikes on Myinni and Let Wea villages in Natogyi township in Mandalay region burned down more than 10 houses on March 23, 2025.
    (Natogyi Journal)

    A 65-year-old man was severely injured, and over 10 houses were destroyed by the blast, he added.

    Most residents from the two villages were sheltering in nearby mountains, but about a third had chosen to remain in their homes, residents said.

    Junta spokesperson Maj. Gen. Zaw Min Htun has declined to comment.

    According to data compiled by RFA, 3,554 people have been killed by junta-led attacks since the coup began in February 2021, and another 7,064 have been injured.

    Translated by Kiana Duncan. Edited by Taejun Kang and Mike Firn.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by RFA Burmese.

    ]]>
    https://rfa.org/english/myanmar/2025/03/25/myanmar-junta-chief-defense-budget-increase/feed/ 0 521334
    Dear DOGE: Here’s how to Cut the Pentagon Budget by $100 Billion in 6 Easy Steps https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/25/dear-doge-heres-how-to-cut-the-pentagon-budget-by-100-billion-in-6-easy-steps/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/25/dear-doge-heres-how-to-cut-the-pentagon-budget-by-100-billion-in-6-easy-steps/#respond Tue, 25 Mar 2025 05:19:54 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=358455 America’s military budget is more than just numbers on a page—it’s a reflection of the priorities that shape our society. Right now, that nearly trillion dollar budget is bloated, inefficient, and far removed from the needs of everyday Americans. We’ve identified six simple yet effective ways to cut at least $100 billion from the Pentagon’s More

    The post Dear DOGE: Here’s how to Cut the Pentagon Budget by $100 Billion in 6 Easy Steps appeared first on CounterPunch.org.

    ]]>

    Image by Getty and Unsplash+.

    America’s military budget is more than just numbers on a page—it’s a reflection of the priorities that shape our society. Right now, that nearly trillion dollar budget is bloated, inefficient, and far removed from the needs of everyday Americans. We’ve identified six simple yet effective ways to cut at least $100 billion from the Pentagon’s budget—without sacrificing even the most hawkish of war hawk’s sense of national security. Ready to take the scissors to that excess spending? Here’s how we can do it.

    1. Halt the F-35 Program (Save $12B+ per year)

    The F-35 is the poster child for military mismanagement. It’s a fighter jet that was supposed to revolutionize our military—except it’s plagued by cost overruns, delays, and underperformance. Despite a projected lifetime cost of over $2 trillion, this aircraft only meets mission requirements about 30% of the time. If we ended or paused the F-35 program now, we’d free up $12 billion annually. The military-industrial complex can afford a few less fancy jets that destroy land and lives, especially when they don’t even do their job right.

    2. Reassess Long-Range Missile Defense (Save $9.3B+ per year)

    For over half a century, we’ve sunk an eye-watering $400 billion into long-range missile defense systems that have never delivered. The cold, hard truth is these systems are ineffective against real-world threats. In fact, no missile defense technology has ever proven capable of neutralizing an intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM) attack. Cutting back on these programs would save us $9.3 billion per year—money that could be better spent on diplomacy initiatives that actually work.

    3. Cut the Sentinel ICBM Program (Save $3.7B+ per year)

    ICBMs were once the crown jewels of our nuclear deterrence strategy, but they’re outdated in today’s geopolitical climate. With more reliable and flexible platforms like submarines, bombers, and emerging hypersonic technologies, maintaining an expensive, high-risk ICBM arsenal makes little sense. Ending the Sentinel ICBM program would save taxpayers $3.7 billion annually, and even more in the long run, with total savings over its lifespan estimated at $310 billion. It’s time to face facts: we don’t need to keep pouring money into a strategy that no longer aligns with modern defense needs. Especially when the best nuclear deterrence system is ending nuclear weapons programs to begin with.

    4. Cease Procurement of Aircraft Carriers (Save $2.3B+ per year)

    Aircraft carriers are relics of a bygone era, costing billions to build and maintain, while becoming increasingly vulnerable to modern missile technology. These floating cities are no longer the symbols of naval power they once were. By halting new aircraft carrier procurements, we can save $2.3 billion a year—money that could be better allocated to ways that actually keep us safe in the 21st century like housing, healthcare or climate justice.

    5. Cut Redundant Contracts by 15% (Save $26B per year)

    The Pentagon’s bureaucracy is a cash cow for contractors—more than 500,000 private sector workers are paid to do redundant and often wasteful work. Many contracts overlap or go toward projects that are, frankly, unnecessary. Cutting back just 15% on these contracts would save $26 billion annually. That’s a massive chunk of change that could be reallocated to more efficient and effective defense projects. Want a starting point? Look no further than SpaceX’s lucrative contracts—it’s time we hold these companies accountable.Maybe DOGE knows a guy there?

    6. Prioritize Diplomacy (Save $50B+ per year)

    The best way to avoid unnecessary military spending is to prevent conflicts from happening in the first place. By focusing on diplomatic solutions instead of military interventions, we can scale back expensive overseas bases, reduce troop deployments, and use reserves and National Guard units more effectively. This shift could save up to $50 billion a year—and possibly as much as $100 billion in the long term. It’s about time we put our resources into creating peaceful solutions rather than preparing for endless wars.

    What Could We Do with the $100 Billion in Savings?

    The possibilities are endless when we take a more practical approach to national security spending. What could we do with the $100 billion we save? Here’s a snapshot of just some of the incredible investments we could make in American society:

    787,255 Registered Nurses: Filling critical healthcare gaps nationwide.

    10.39 million Public Housing Units: Making affordable housing a reality for families across the country.

    2.29 million Jobs at $15/hour: Providing good jobs with benefits, boosting the economy.

    1.03 million Elementary School Teachers: Giving our children the education they deserve.

    579,999 Clean Energy Jobs: Building a sustainable, green future for the next generation.

    7.81 million Head Start Slots: Giving young children a foundation for lifelong success.

    5.88 million Military Veterans receiving VA medical care: Ensuring those who served our country receive the care they earned.

    The Bottom Line?

    Cutting $100 billion from the Pentagon budget isn’t just a pipe dream—it’s a tangible, achievable plan that could deliver real benefits to everyday Americans. While it’s just a starting point, this reduction would allow us to prioritize what truly matters: healthcare, education, infrastructure, and the well-being of our people. If we’re going to spend taxpayer dollars, let’s make sure they go toward initiatives that directly benefit the lives of the citizens who fund them.

    The post Dear DOGE: Here’s how to Cut the Pentagon Budget by $100 Billion in 6 Easy Steps appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Melissa Garriga.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/25/dear-doge-heres-how-to-cut-the-pentagon-budget-by-100-billion-in-6-easy-steps/feed/ 0 521279
    Leading Papers Give Two Cheers for DOGE https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/20/leading-papers-give-two-cheers-for-doge/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/20/leading-papers-give-two-cheers-for-doge/#respond Thu, 20 Mar 2025 22:05:08 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9044720  

    Donald Trump is back in office. Tech mogul Elon Musk, now a senior adviser to the president, is helming a government advisory body with an acronym derived from a memecoin: DOGE (Department of Government Efficiency). That organization is sinking its teeth into the federal government, and drawing blood.

    Tens of thousands, maybe hundreds of thousands, of federal employees are being laid off this year. Over a dozen agencies have been affected. Executive power is being wielded so wildly that a federal judge has lamented “what appears to be the unchecked authority of an unelected individual and an entity that was not created by Congress and over which it has no oversight.”

    The Fourth Estate is tasked with serving as a check on abuses of power. But US media were not designed for this.

    Though critical in much of their reporting, corporate outlets have at the same time substantially legitimized the project of DOGE. For one, longstanding fearmongering about government spending in the news sections of corporate outlets has elevated precisely the right-wing vision of government animating DOGE.

    Even more worryingly, however, criticism of DOGE by major editorial boards has been weak, and in some cases has been overshadowed by these boards’ support for the ideas behind DOGE, or even for DOGE itself.

    Government spending ‘skyrocketed’

    New York Times: Even Progressives Now Worry About the Federal Debt

    The New York Times (1/30/25) claims “even progressives now worry about the federal debt”—though an extensive recent analysis (PERI, 4/20) of the impact of debt by progressive economists found that “the relationship between government debt and economic growth is essentially zero.”

     

    Corporate media’s ever-present fearmongering about spending is well-illustrated by the New York Times, which, within a week and a half of Trump’s inauguration, had already run the headline: “Even Progressives Now Worry About the Federal Debt” (1/30/25). The next day, the paper ran a separate article (1/31/25) by Michael Shear, which stated:

    The amount of money the government spends has skyrocketed under Democratic and Republican presidents. Total federal spending in 2015 was $4.89 trillion, according to federal data. In 2024, it was $6.75 trillion. Even when accounting for the growth of the overall economy, spending as a percentage of gross domestic product was higher in 2024 than it was eight years earlier.

    The paragraph at least avoided the classic tactic of throwing out raw numbers without giving any sort of metric, like GDP, to measure them against. But it nonetheless gave far from the full picture, not even offering numbers for spending as a percentage of GDP, which showed a minor increase of 3 percentage points over this period, to 23%—the same percentage that was spent in 2011.

    Even more useful to include than this data, however, would have been international data showing how much the US spends in comparison to other rich countries. As it turns out, the answer is: quite little. And the US taxes even less.

    Readers might also be interested to learn that tax cuts, not spending increases, have been primarily responsible for increases in the US’s debt-to-GDP ratio in recent decades, according to an analysis by the Center for American Progress (3/27/23). The group emphasized: “Without the Bush and Trump tax cuts, debt as a percentage of the economy would be declining permanently.” Given that reality, CAP concluded:

    If Congress wants to decrease deficits, it should look first toward reversing tax cuts that largely benefited the wealthy, which were responsible for the United States’ current fiscal outlook.

    FRED: Federal Net Outlays as Percent of Gross Domestic Product

    Federal outlays as a percentage of GDP have been nearly constant for the past 75 years (FRED).

    ‘The big areas of the budget’

    NYT: Beneath Trump’s Chaotic Spending Freeze: An Idea That Crosses Party Lines

    The New York Times‘ Michael Shear (1/31/25) wrote that Trump was attempting “to somehow reverse the seemingly inexorable growth of the federal government, an issue that resonates with some Democrats as well as most Republicans.”

    If corporate media like the New York Times were serious about informing readers about the causes of and answers to high government debt, they would, like CAP, debunk right-wing deficit hawk propaganda, rather than reinforce it.

    Instead, the Times‘ Shear (1/31/25) decided to provide his readers with extensive quotation from Maya MacGuineas, an extreme deficit hawk who got an early boost in her career “from the patronage of billionaire investment banker and arch-austerian Pete Peterson,” as the New Republic (3/4/21) recounted in a 2021 piece. Shear merely described her as “the president of the bipartisan Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget.”

    MacGuineas is the only expert Shear cites in the piece, and the article closes with her warning that Musk’s cuts “would not be enough to confront the nation’s burgeoning debt from spending too much over many decades.” “To make a real impact on the debt,” MacGuineas said:

    We are going to have to look at the big areas of the budget for savings—Social Security, healthcare and revenues—the very same areas both political parties are tripping over themselves not to address.

    The decision to include only an austerity advocate, and to allow her proclamation about the need for cuts to Social Security to end the piece, inevitably grants legitimacy to her claims. These claims are at the very least meant to be taken seriously, even more so since they come from a supposedly independent expert rather than a politician or government official. The decision to include no left-wing expert has a similar effect in reverse.

    Meanwhile, in the paper’s piece (1/30/25) from the previous day about “progressive worry,” reporter Lydia DePillis managed to bury the key point in the 21st paragraph:

    But mostly, Democrats say, the government simply needs more revenue to support the increasing number of people who are becoming eligible for retirement benefits.

    Debt-scolding reporting

    WaPo: U.S. deficit hits $1.8 trillion as interest costs rise

    The Washington Post (10/8/24) sounds the alarm over the United States having a debt-to-GDP ratio similar to that of Britain, France and Canada—and much lower than Japan’s.

    The Times is hardly the only outlet to legitimize alarmism about government spending. In a debt-scolding piece of reporting from last fall, the Washington Post (10/8/24) hammered on the point that runaway spending should be a major concern.

    The choice of headline, “US Deficit Hits $1.8 Trillion as Interest Costs Rise,” immediately linked debt concerns to spending, not taxes. The first paragraph described the $1.8 trillion figure as “an enormous sum”—probably equally applicable to any sum over a billion dollars in the average American’s mind—while the fourth paragraph warned:

    The nation’s debt compared with the size of the overall economy, a key metric of fiscal stability, is projected to exceed its all-time high of 106% by 2027.

    Once again, international comparison would have been helpful here. It could be noted that the US, in fact, has a rather typical amount of debt compared to many other rich countries these days, with Britain, Canada, Spain, France and Italy all posting similar debt-to-GDP numbers. Greece, meanwhile, has a debt-to-GDP ratio close to 170%, while Japan boasts a ratio of around 250%. As Mark Copelovitch, a professor of political science and public affairs at the University of Wisconsin-Madison, has noted:

    If these countries can sustain debt levels 50–150% higher than our current levels, then the question of whether we can do so has already been answered. Indeed, it does not even need to be asked.

    The Post, evidently, had no interest in providing such context. No international figures were cited. Instead, the next lines were a quote from a conservative economist:

    A [nearly] $2 trillion deficit is bad news during a recession and war, but completely unprecedented during peace and prosperity…. The danger is the deficit will only get bigger over the next decade due to retiring baby boomers and interest on the debt.

    Notice once more the linking of the increase in debt to spending rather than tax cuts.

    The ‘soaring’ debt that wasn’t

    WSJ: Federal Debt Is Soaring. Here’s Why Trump and Harris Aren’t Talking About It.

    The federal debt the Wall Street Journal (9/16/24) claimed was “soaring” was a smaller percentage of GDP in 2024 than in 2020.

    The piece continued on to cite deficit hawk MacGuineas—described as the president of “a top Washington fiscal watchdog”—denouncing the “patchwork of targeted fiscal bribes” being offered to voters by the presidential candidates. And it ended with a quote from “president of the right-leaning American Action Forum and a former CBO director” Doug Holtz-Eakin, reminding us that debt servicing costs will have to be paid and will crowd out other spending priorities.

    Unmentioned by the Post is that Holtz-Eakin held high posts in the George W. Bush administration and the John McCain presidential campaign. He also oversaw the creation of an infamous bogus cost estimate for the Green New Deal. Yet the Post portrays him as just an expert who leans a bit to the right.

    Though the Post consulted three right-wing sources, they failed to include a single left-leaning independent expert. It’s not hard to understand how that fails readers, or how it legitimizes a certain set of priorities, while suggesting other views lack credibility.

    The Wall Street Journal, for its part, has been more than happy to join the general fretting in corporate media about government spending. Back in the fall, for instance, a piece in its news section (9/16/24) complained that the presidential race was not focusing sufficiently on the issue of rising government debt, and flagged Social Security and Medicare as “the biggest drivers of rising spending.” The headline read: “Federal Debt Is Soaring. Here’s Why Trump and Harris Aren’t Talking About It.”

    The problem with that headline? In the fall of 2024, federal debt was decidedly not soaring. This holds whether you look at federal debt in nominal dollar terms or as a percentage of GDP. Federal debt had “soared” briefly in 2020, when the Covid recession hit and the government rapidly expanded its spending to deal with the downturn. But for most of 2024, the quarterly percentage increase in the federal debt in dollar terms was actually below the historical average going back to 1970. And the debt-to-GDP ratio was at roughly the same spot as it had been three-and-a-half years earlier, at the start of Biden’s presidency.

    ‘Shutting off the lights’

    WSJ: The Federal Spending Boom Rolls On

    For the Wall Street Journal (2/10/25), refusing to cut Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid “is like saying you want to go on a diet except for the beer, chips and ice cream sundaes.”

    Even more concerning than corporate media’s penchant for running articles in the news section fearmongering about government spending, though, is what has been going on in corporate outlets’ opinion sections, specifically with the output of their editorial boards. Here, the legitimization of DOGE has reached its highest heights.

    Unsurprisingly, the unabashedly right-wing Wall Street Journal editorial board has been the prime offender. Most recently, it published an editorial (3/14/25) with the headline “Don’t Cry for the Education Department,” applauding the unconstitutional DOGE-led attack on the Education Department, which the Journal chastened for “harassing schools, states and districts with progressive diktats on everything from transgender bathroom use to Covid-19 mask rules.”

    The final paragraph began: “The closer Mr. Trump can get to shutting off the lights at the Education Department, the better.”

    This was just one of numerous Journal editorials in recent weeks cheering on the DOGE project. A sampling of other editorials:

    • “Hurricane Musk and the USAID Panic” (2/4/25) argued that Musk should be contained, but that he is “also hitting targets that have long deserved scrutiny and reform, which helps explain the wailing over the US Agency for International Development.”
    • “The Federal Spending Boom Rolls On” (2/10/25) declared that “DOGE is a good idea,” and claimed that it had not gone far enough: “But for all of Mr. Musk’s frenetic tweeting, and the Beltway cries of Apocalypse Now, so far DOGE is only nibbling at the edges of Washington’s spending problem.”
    • “Judge Wants DOGE Facts, Not Fears” (2/19/25) ended, “Democrats hunting for a constitutional crisis might want to show evidence before they cry ‘dictator.’”

    In short, then, the Journal editorial board not only approves of a rogue pseudo-agency operating with no transparency or oversight, but has become a crusader in defense of DOGE’s attacks on constitutional checks and balances—which grant Congress, not a right-wing ideologue from the PayPal Mafia, the power of the purse.

    Of course, you can expect little else from the Journal than salivation over cuts to federal spending—it has long been the lapdog of right-wing billionaire Rupert Murdoch. But it is jarring to witness exactly how rabid the Journal editorial board can be.

    Not ‘audacious’ enough

    WaPo: Trump needs to erect guardrails for DOGE

    The Washington Post says it’s “true that the $36 trillion national debt is unsustainable and there’s plenty of bloat in government.”

    For its part, the Washington Post editorial board, while describing DOGE as a “circus” (2/24/25), has substantially legitimized DOGE’s mission.

    An editorial (2/7/25) from early February is case in point. Headlined “Trump Needs to Erect Guardrails for DOGE,” the piece offered five ways for Trump to “be clear about who is boss,” effectively endorsing the mission of slashing government spending while expressing concern over some of Musk’s tactics.

    The first four proposed guardrails in the piece, which include “Vet Musk’s operatives” and “Limit Musk’s access to sensitive files,” are all reasonable, but the fifth proposal reveals the board’s substantive concerns about the spending cuts being executed by DOGE. These concerns are not about whether cuts should be made—it is taken for granted that government spending should be reduced. Rather, they have to do with which spending is cut, aligning with the concerns raised by the Wall Street Journal about DOGE not going far enough.

    This proposal, labeled “Focus on the biggest drivers of the national debt,” read:

    To have any chance of achieving Musk’s audacious goal of $2 trillion in cuts, Trump will need to work with elected representatives in Congress to reform entitlement programs such as Social Security and Medicare before they become insolvent. Other sensitive areas of the balance sheet, including the Pentagon budget and veterans’ benefits, cannot stay off the table forever.

    For the Post, then, the focus on programs such as USAID is simply too limited. We must put Social Security, Medicare and veterans’ benefits on the table!

    ‘Embrace the same thinking’

    WaPo: The DOGE ethos comes to state governments

    The “DOGE ethos,” according to the Washington Post (3/3/25), means making “governments leaner and more efficient.”

    The Washington Post’s preference for substantial cuts to federal government is further illustrated by an editorial (3/3/25) published in early March, following Jeff Bezos’s rebranding of the Post as Wall Street Journal–lite.

    The editorial, titled “The DOGE Ethos Comes to State Governments,” showered praise on state governments that are capitalizing on DOGE branding while pursuing a more “thoughtful” approach to reducing government spending.

    The piece favorably cited Washington state Democratic Gov. Bob Ferguson’s insistence that “I’m not here to defend government…. I’m here to reform it.” The board elaborated:

    Democrats in DC ought to embrace the same thinking. It’s foolish to defend a status quo that most voters think doesn’t work well. By fighting Trump and Musk tooth and nail, at the expense of presenting an alternative vision, the opposition risks appearing overly keen to protect hidebound institutions even as the world changes rapidly.

    The Post’s take on DOGE? Let’s not center its blatant illegality. Let’s instead focus on what we can learn from it. After all, with a few minor tweaks, it’s exactly what we as a country need.

    ‘A great American success story’

    NYT: Musk Doesn’t Understand Why Government Matters

    New York Times says of Elon Musk, “he’s right: The federal government is often wasteful and inefficient.” But he’s going about it the wrong way.

    The appallingly low bar set by the competition leaves the New York Times to assume the role of the major national newspaper that will seriously attack DOGE. It takes to this role…poorly.

    The Times editorial board’s pushback against DOGE has been embarrassingly feeble. Its most direct assessment of DOGE thus far (3/8/25), for instance, began with an uncomfortably obsequious description of Musk:

    Elon Musk’s life is a great American success story. Time and again, he has anticipated where the world was headed, helping to create not just new products but new industries.

    The board quickly conceded a major point to Musk:

    Mr. Musk claims that the government is a business in need of disruption and that his goal is to eliminate waste and improve efficiency. And he’s right: The federal government is often wasteful and inefficient.

    The editorial went on to make a number of criticisms of DOGE, but its critique was undermined by this odd willingness to bend over backwards to appease Musk and his supporters.

    Meanwhile, though sharply critical of DOGE’s disregard for the Constitution, the editorial made no attempt at presenting a counter-vision of government. It lamented cuts to a hodgepodge of specific government programs, but it had nothing to say in defense of current levels of government spending, let alone in favor of even higher levels of spending. One would hardly know that many wealthy countries have significantly higher levels of government spending and happier populations—in fact, at least 16 OECD countries register both higher spending and higher happiness than the US.

    A gaping hole

    This, then, is the state of American corporate media at the start of the Trump presidency. Across arguably the three most important national newspapers—the New York Times, the Washington Post and the Wall Street Journal—there is broad agreement that government spending is out of control and that something, perhaps something drastic, needs to be done about it.

    Even at the leftmost of these organizations, the New York Times, the editorial board appears incapable of mounting a case for social democratic levels of government spending in the face of extreme attacks on spending by the Trump administration. The Times, instead, finds itself caught between bowing before the titans of American capitalism and confronting their disregard for the US Constitution.

    The Washington Post has been able to adopt a somewhat less tortured position, occupying the center/center-right in a way reminiscent of 1990s Democrats, supporting cuts to government, but in a “thoughtful” way.

    The Wall Street Journal, meanwhile, is having the time of its life. Finding itself once again in an era when greed and meanness animate the daily actions of government, it must feel freer than it has in years to bare its teeth at the true enemies of the American republic: teachers’ unions and recipients of government aid.

    News consumers have no major paper espousing a truly progressive perspective. On the topic of government spending, at least, the window of acceptable thought appears to span from the center to the far right. There is no direct marketing reason for this—there’s a sizeable audience in the US that would welcome a progressive outlet, the same way there’s a sizeable audience for right-wing outlets like the Wall Street Journal or Fox News.

    Who doesn’t want such an outlet to appear? Ultra-wealthy right-wing Americans of the sort that own and sponsor much of the media landscape. If wealthy people aren’t willing to finance a progressive media outlet that can compete with major papers, it seems that such an outlet simply won’t exist. Crowdfunding could help progressive media overcome this issue, but the playing field is not level.

    As it stands, a major progressive outlet that can compete with the existing dominant players does not exist, and does not seem to be coming anytime soon. The gaping hole left as a result is becoming only more apparent as we speed into Trump administration 2.0.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/20/leading-papers-give-two-cheers-for-doge/feed/ 0 520455
    Bénin Web TV suspended for reporting on media regulator’s budget https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/19/benin-web-tv-suspended-for-reporting-on-media-regulators-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/19/benin-web-tv-suspended-for-reporting-on-media-regulators-budget/#respond Wed, 19 Mar 2025 20:41:40 +0000 https://cpj.org/?p=464454 Dakar, March 19, 2025—The Committee to Protect Journalists calls on Benin’s regulatory High Authority for Audiovisual and Communication (HAAC) to reverse its suspension of the privately owned news site Bénin Web TV for reporting on alleged inconsistencies in the media regulator’s budget.

    In its March 12 decision, the HAAC also withdrew Benin Web TV director Paul Arnaud Deguenon’s press card over his outlet’s January 21 and 23 reporting that said the HAAC presented “erroneous” figures to parliament’s budget committee and its president demanded a new official car. 

    “The media regulator should allow Bénin Web TV and journalist Paul Arnaud Deguenon to resume reporting,” said Moussa Ngom, CPJ’s Francophone Africa representative. “Benin’s High Authority for Audiovisual and Communication should respect journalists’ right to question the management of public funds, instead of punishing Bénin Web TV for scrutinizing the regulator’s finances.”

    Deguenon attended a public hearing at HAAC’s offices on March 11 where he was ordered to publish an apology as the regulator said the journalist failed to provide evidence to support his outlet’s allegations.

    In response, Bénin Web TV said that its journalism was based on facts and precise terms, with no desire to harm the HAAC. The media outlet published three letters from the HAAC and Deguenon’s responses, explaining that its reporting was based on the HAAC’s own 2025 budget presentation and public statement.

    In its decision, the HAAC said that “Deguenon reoffended on the same day in his baseless accusations” and had “sharply attacked” the regulator.

    The HAAC’s indefinite suspension of Benin Web TV appears to contravene its 2023 authorizationof the outlet’s operations, which specifies that suspensions for noncompliance with a formal regulatory notice may not exceed one month.

    In January, the HAAC suspended six outlets and withdrew a press card for one of the outlet’s journalists, accusing them of publishing false allegations, without specifying, and of running unauthorized websites. The HAAC has not reversed the order.

    CPJ’s calls to the HAAC to request comment were not answered.


    This content originally appeared on Committee to Protect Journalists and was authored by CPJ Staff.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/19/benin-web-tv-suspended-for-reporting-on-media-regulators-budget/feed/ 0 520195
    100-Plus Groups Call on Schumer, Senate Dems to Reject GOP Budget Bill https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/12/100-plus-groups-call-on-schumer-senate-dems-to-reject-gop-budget-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/12/100-plus-groups-call-on-schumer-senate-dems-to-reject-gop-budget-bill/#respond Wed, 12 Mar 2025 20:25:48 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/100-plus-groups-call-on-schumer-senate-dems-to-reject-gop-budget-bill In a letter delivered this morning to Senate Minority Leader Charles Schumer and fellow Senate Democrats, nearly 150 advocacy groups from across the country called on them to reject the Republican budget proposal passed by the House yesterday, in light of the Trump administration’s ongoing operation to illegally dismantle the agencies and functions of the federal government. The letter was facilitated by the environmental organization Food & Water Watch and signed by groups including Progressive Democrats of America, Center for Biological Diversity, Friends of the Earth, Our Revolution, 350.org, New York Communities for Change and Citizen Action NY.

    The letter states, in part:

    Musk and Trump are illegally dismantling critical agencies and programs that protect workers, our environment and the economy, while ignoring Congress in the process. We call on you to take a strong public stance and rally the Senate to reject any spending bill that allows this lawlessness to continue… We call on you to withhold all votes for any spending bill until this stops.

    “Musk and Trump are in the middle of executing an illegal partial government shutdown. Democrats must not vote for any spending bill that doesn’t address this,” said Mary Grant, water program director at Food & Water Watch. “Approving the budget bill passed in the House is an invitation for Musk and Trump to continue their efforts to shut down and eliminate key government functions that protect people’s food, water, health, and pocketbooks. Senator Schumer and Democrats in the Senate should stand strong and oppose this dangerous bill.”

    Notably, the Republican spending measure eliminates Congressionally-directed spending for clean water projects. It zeros out the $1.4 billion in earmarked funding through the EPA’s State Revolving Fund (SRF) programs, and $117 million through USDA’s Rural Water and Waste Disposal assistance program. While the overall funding levels for the SRF programs are unaffected, he rural water program is reduced by the amount of the earmarked projects, amounting to a 20 percent cut in funding for rural water and wastewater projects.

    The proposal would cut USDA’s Watershed and Flood Prevention Operations by 58 percent by zeroing out $20 million in earmarked projects, and it eliminates $39 million in EPA’s State and Tribal Assistance Grants that were previously earmarked for remediation and environmental management activities. It would also cut USDA’s Conservation by $19 million and Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS) by $14 million.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/12/100-plus-groups-call-on-schumer-senate-dems-to-reject-gop-budget-bill/feed/ 0 518499
    How New Zealand is venturing down the road of political upheaval https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval/#respond Tue, 11 Mar 2025 21:29:16 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=112034

    ANALYSIS: By Peter Davis

    With the sudden departure of New Zealand’s Reserve Bank Governor, one has to ask whether there is a pattern here — of a succession of public sector leaders leaving their posts in uncertain circumstances and a series of decisions being made without much regard for due process.

    It brings to mind the current spectacle of federal government politics playing out in the United States. Four years ago, we observed a concerted attempt by a raucous and determined crowd to storm the Capitol.

    Now a smaller, more disciplined and just as determined band is entering federal offices in Washington almost unhindered, to close agencies and programmes and to evict and terminate the employment of thousands of staff.

    This could never happen here. Or could it? Or has it and is it happening here? After all, we had an occupation of parliament, we had a rapid unravelling of a previous government’s legislative programme, and we have experienced the removal of CEOs and downgrading of key public agencies such as Kāinga Ora on slender pretexts, and the rapid and marked downsizing of the core public service establishment.

    Similarly, while the incoming Trump administration is targeting any federal diversity agenda, in New Zealand the incoming government has sought to curb the advancement of Māori interests, even to the extent of questioning elements of our basic constitutional framework.

    In other words, there are parallels, but also differences. This has mostly been conducted in a typical New Zealand low-key fashion, with more regard for legal niceties and less of the histrionics we see in Washington — yet it still bears comparison and probably reflects similar political dynamics.

    Nevertheless, the departure in quick succession of three health sector leaders and the targeting of Pharmac’s CEO suggest the agenda may be getting out of hand. In my experience of close contact with the DHB system the management and leadership teams at the top echelon were nothing short of outstanding.

    The Auckland District Health Board, as it then was, is the largest single organisation in Auckland — and the top management had to be up to the task. And they were.

    Value for money
    As for Pharmac, it is a standout agency for achieving value for money in the public sector. So why target it? The organisation has made cumulative savings of at least a billion dollars, equivalent to 5 percent of the annual health budget. Those monies have been reinvested elsewhere in the health sector. Furthermore, by distancing politicians from sometimes controversial funding decisions on a limited budget it shields them from public blowback.

    Unfortunately, Pharmac is the victim of its own success: the reinvestment of funds in the wider health sector has gone unheralded, and the shielding of politicians is rarely acknowledged.

    The job as CEO at Pharmac has got much harder with a limited budget, more expensive drugs targeting smaller groups, more vociferous patient groups — sometimes funded in part by drug companies — easy media stories (individuals being denied “lifesaving” treatments), and, more recently, less sympathetic political masters.

    Perhaps it was time for a changing of the guard, but the ungracious manner of it follows a similar pattern of other departures.

    The arrival of Sir Brian Roche as the new Public Service Commissioner may herald a more considered approach to public sector reform, rather than the slightly “wild west” New Zealand style with the unexplained abolition of the Productivity Commission, the premature ending of an expensive pumped hydro study, disbandment of sector industry groups, and the alleged cancellation of a large ferry contract by text, among other examples of a rather casual approach to due process.

    The danger we run is that the current cleaning out of public sector leaders is more than an expected turnover with a change of government, and rather a curbing of independent advice and thought. Will our public media agencies — TVNZ and RNZ — be next in line for the current thrust of popular and political attention?

    Major redundancies
    Taken together with the abolition of the Productivity Commission, major redundancies in the public sector, the removal of research funding for the humanities and the social sciences, a campaign by the Free Speech Union against university autonomy, the growing reliance on business lobbyists and lobby groups to determine decision-making, and the recent re-orientation of The New Zealand Herald towards a more populist stance, we could well be witnessing a concerted rebalancing of the ecosystem of advice and thought.

    In half a century of observing policy and politics from the relative safety of the university, I have never witnessed such a concerted campaign as we are experiencing. Not even in the turmoil of the 1990s.

    We need to change the national conversation before it is too late and we lose more of the key elements of the independence of advice and thought that we have established in the state and allied and quasi-autonomous agencies, as well as in the universities and the creative industries, and that lie at the heart of liberal democracy.

    Dr Peter Davis is emeritus professor of population health and social science at Auckland University, and a former elected member of the Auckland District Health Board. This article was first published by The Post and is republished with the author’s permission


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval/feed/ 0 518220
    How New Zealand is venturing down the road of political upheaval https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval-2/#respond Tue, 11 Mar 2025 21:29:16 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=112034

    ANALYSIS: By Peter Davis

    With the sudden departure of New Zealand’s Reserve Bank Governor, one has to ask whether there is a pattern here — of a succession of public sector leaders leaving their posts in uncertain circumstances and a series of decisions being made without much regard for due process.

    It brings to mind the current spectacle of federal government politics playing out in the United States. Four years ago, we observed a concerted attempt by a raucous and determined crowd to storm the Capitol.

    Now a smaller, more disciplined and just as determined band is entering federal offices in Washington almost unhindered, to close agencies and programmes and to evict and terminate the employment of thousands of staff.

    This could never happen here. Or could it? Or has it and is it happening here? After all, we had an occupation of parliament, we had a rapid unravelling of a previous government’s legislative programme, and we have experienced the removal of CEOs and downgrading of key public agencies such as Kāinga Ora on slender pretexts, and the rapid and marked downsizing of the core public service establishment.

    Similarly, while the incoming Trump administration is targeting any federal diversity agenda, in New Zealand the incoming government has sought to curb the advancement of Māori interests, even to the extent of questioning elements of our basic constitutional framework.

    In other words, there are parallels, but also differences. This has mostly been conducted in a typical New Zealand low-key fashion, with more regard for legal niceties and less of the histrionics we see in Washington — yet it still bears comparison and probably reflects similar political dynamics.

    Nevertheless, the departure in quick succession of three health sector leaders and the targeting of Pharmac’s CEO suggest the agenda may be getting out of hand. In my experience of close contact with the DHB system the management and leadership teams at the top echelon were nothing short of outstanding.

    The Auckland District Health Board, as it then was, is the largest single organisation in Auckland — and the top management had to be up to the task. And they were.

    Value for money
    As for Pharmac, it is a standout agency for achieving value for money in the public sector. So why target it? The organisation has made cumulative savings of at least a billion dollars, equivalent to 5 percent of the annual health budget. Those monies have been reinvested elsewhere in the health sector. Furthermore, by distancing politicians from sometimes controversial funding decisions on a limited budget it shields them from public blowback.

    Unfortunately, Pharmac is the victim of its own success: the reinvestment of funds in the wider health sector has gone unheralded, and the shielding of politicians is rarely acknowledged.

    The job as CEO at Pharmac has got much harder with a limited budget, more expensive drugs targeting smaller groups, more vociferous patient groups — sometimes funded in part by drug companies — easy media stories (individuals being denied “lifesaving” treatments), and, more recently, less sympathetic political masters.

    Perhaps it was time for a changing of the guard, but the ungracious manner of it follows a similar pattern of other departures.

    The arrival of Sir Brian Roche as the new Public Service Commissioner may herald a more considered approach to public sector reform, rather than the slightly “wild west” New Zealand style with the unexplained abolition of the Productivity Commission, the premature ending of an expensive pumped hydro study, disbandment of sector industry groups, and the alleged cancellation of a large ferry contract by text, among other examples of a rather casual approach to due process.

    The danger we run is that the current cleaning out of public sector leaders is more than an expected turnover with a change of government, and rather a curbing of independent advice and thought. Will our public media agencies — TVNZ and RNZ — be next in line for the current thrust of popular and political attention?

    Major redundancies
    Taken together with the abolition of the Productivity Commission, major redundancies in the public sector, the removal of research funding for the humanities and the social sciences, a campaign by the Free Speech Union against university autonomy, the growing reliance on business lobbyists and lobby groups to determine decision-making, and the recent re-orientation of The New Zealand Herald towards a more populist stance, we could well be witnessing a concerted rebalancing of the ecosystem of advice and thought.

    In half a century of observing policy and politics from the relative safety of the university, I have never witnessed such a concerted campaign as we are experiencing. Not even in the turmoil of the 1990s.

    We need to change the national conversation before it is too late and we lose more of the key elements of the independence of advice and thought that we have established in the state and allied and quasi-autonomous agencies, as well as in the universities and the creative industries, and that lie at the heart of liberal democracy.

    Dr Peter Davis is emeritus professor of population health and social science at Auckland University, and a former elected member of the Auckland District Health Board. This article was first published by The Post and is republished with the author’s permission


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval-2/feed/ 0 518221
    How New Zealand is venturing down the road of political upheaval https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval-3/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval-3/#respond Tue, 11 Mar 2025 21:29:16 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=112034

    ANALYSIS: By Peter Davis

    With the sudden departure of New Zealand’s Reserve Bank Governor, one has to ask whether there is a pattern here — of a succession of public sector leaders leaving their posts in uncertain circumstances and a series of decisions being made without much regard for due process.

    It brings to mind the current spectacle of federal government politics playing out in the United States. Four years ago, we observed a concerted attempt by a raucous and determined crowd to storm the Capitol.

    Now a smaller, more disciplined and just as determined band is entering federal offices in Washington almost unhindered, to close agencies and programmes and to evict and terminate the employment of thousands of staff.

    This could never happen here. Or could it? Or has it and is it happening here? After all, we had an occupation of parliament, we had a rapid unravelling of a previous government’s legislative programme, and we have experienced the removal of CEOs and downgrading of key public agencies such as Kāinga Ora on slender pretexts, and the rapid and marked downsizing of the core public service establishment.

    Similarly, while the incoming Trump administration is targeting any federal diversity agenda, in New Zealand the incoming government has sought to curb the advancement of Māori interests, even to the extent of questioning elements of our basic constitutional framework.

    In other words, there are parallels, but also differences. This has mostly been conducted in a typical New Zealand low-key fashion, with more regard for legal niceties and less of the histrionics we see in Washington — yet it still bears comparison and probably reflects similar political dynamics.

    Nevertheless, the departure in quick succession of three health sector leaders and the targeting of Pharmac’s CEO suggest the agenda may be getting out of hand. In my experience of close contact with the DHB system the management and leadership teams at the top echelon were nothing short of outstanding.

    The Auckland District Health Board, as it then was, is the largest single organisation in Auckland — and the top management had to be up to the task. And they were.

    Value for money
    As for Pharmac, it is a standout agency for achieving value for money in the public sector. So why target it? The organisation has made cumulative savings of at least a billion dollars, equivalent to 5 percent of the annual health budget. Those monies have been reinvested elsewhere in the health sector. Furthermore, by distancing politicians from sometimes controversial funding decisions on a limited budget it shields them from public blowback.

    Unfortunately, Pharmac is the victim of its own success: the reinvestment of funds in the wider health sector has gone unheralded, and the shielding of politicians is rarely acknowledged.

    The job as CEO at Pharmac has got much harder with a limited budget, more expensive drugs targeting smaller groups, more vociferous patient groups — sometimes funded in part by drug companies — easy media stories (individuals being denied “lifesaving” treatments), and, more recently, less sympathetic political masters.

    Perhaps it was time for a changing of the guard, but the ungracious manner of it follows a similar pattern of other departures.

    The arrival of Sir Brian Roche as the new Public Service Commissioner may herald a more considered approach to public sector reform, rather than the slightly “wild west” New Zealand style with the unexplained abolition of the Productivity Commission, the premature ending of an expensive pumped hydro study, disbandment of sector industry groups, and the alleged cancellation of a large ferry contract by text, among other examples of a rather casual approach to due process.

    The danger we run is that the current cleaning out of public sector leaders is more than an expected turnover with a change of government, and rather a curbing of independent advice and thought. Will our public media agencies — TVNZ and RNZ — be next in line for the current thrust of popular and political attention?

    Major redundancies
    Taken together with the abolition of the Productivity Commission, major redundancies in the public sector, the removal of research funding for the humanities and the social sciences, a campaign by the Free Speech Union against university autonomy, the growing reliance on business lobbyists and lobby groups to determine decision-making, and the recent re-orientation of The New Zealand Herald towards a more populist stance, we could well be witnessing a concerted rebalancing of the ecosystem of advice and thought.

    In half a century of observing policy and politics from the relative safety of the university, I have never witnessed such a concerted campaign as we are experiencing. Not even in the turmoil of the 1990s.

    We need to change the national conversation before it is too late and we lose more of the key elements of the independence of advice and thought that we have established in the state and allied and quasi-autonomous agencies, as well as in the universities and the creative industries, and that lie at the heart of liberal democracy.

    Dr Peter Davis is emeritus professor of population health and social science at Auckland University, and a former elected member of the Auckland District Health Board. This article was first published by The Post and is republished with the author’s permission


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/11/how-new-zealand-is-venturing-down-the-road-of-political-upheaval-3/feed/ 0 518222
    Only the US Defense Department’s Budget Will NOT be Cut https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/05/only-the-us-defense-departments-budget-will-not-be-cut/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/05/only-the-us-defense-departments-budget-will-not-be-cut/#respond Wed, 05 Mar 2025 09:07:04 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=156347 All U.S. federal Departments except the Defense Department will have their budgets reduced this year. 60% of U.S. military expenses get paid out from the Defense Department (the Pentagon), which is the only U.S. federal Department that has never passed an audit — never been audited — and is also the only federal Department that […]

    The post Only the US Defense Department’s Budget Will NOT be Cut first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
    All U.S. federal Departments except the Defense Department will have their budgets reduced this year.

    60% of U.S. military expenses get paid out from the Defense Department (the Pentagon), which is the only U.S. federal Department that has never passed an audit — never been audited — and is also the only federal Department that pays America’s military-weapons manufacturers, such as Lockheed Martin — the companies that depend mainly or even entirely on purchases by the federal Government. The Trump Administration has decided not to cut that Department’s budget, and might even increase it. The details, so far as they are yet known, were first published, on February 28, by In These Times magazine, in an article by Stephen Semler and Sarah Lazare, titled “As Trump and Musk slash social spending, military spending is set to soar.” An excellent article explaining this in a broader context than merely that Department’s budget was then published on March 2nd by the Naked Capitalism site, and headlined “The Empire Rebrands,” by Conor Gallagher.

    Already, U.S. military expenses (including from all federal Departments) amount to 65% of the entire world’s military expenses; and yet, as-of 24 October 2024, the most-respected international ranking of nations’ militaries, the one in U.S. News & World Report, rated the top three in order, as: #1. Russia, #2. U.S., and #3. China. A lower-regarded ranking, by  “Global Firepower,” ranked: #1. U.S., #2. Russia, and #3. China. The site “Military Empires: A Visual Guide to Foreign Bases,” as-of 30 October 2024, showed the nations with the largest number of foreign military bases, as being #1. U.S., with 917 foreign military bases; #2. Turkiye, with 128; #3. UK, with 117; and #4. Russia, with 58. China was #10, with 6. (Numbers 5-9 were: India, Iran, France, and UAE.) However, the U.S. is overwhelmingly the most powerful empire, because right after FDR’s death on 12 April 1945, when Truman took over, the U.S. — which had entered WW2 the last of the major world powers and therefore suffered the lowest casualties and least destruction from it — was the only nation that had the assets by which to establish the post-WW2 international order, and did that for his imperialistic purposes, exactly contrary to FDR’s plan, as a consequence of which, the U.S. Government still controls the IMF, World Bank, and many other international institutions, and dominates even the U.N. (which FDR invented and was developing his plan for, but Truman mainly controled the writing of the U.N.’s Charter). So, most of America’s power doesn’t come from its military — which is America’s most-corrupt federal Department. The main purpose of the U.S. Government today is to boost its stock-markets, which are overwhelmingly controlled by its billionaires, and “93% of U.S. households’ stock market wealth (not 93% of the stock market) is held by the wealthiest 10% of those households.” So, this Government’s top concern is to pay-off the political high-donors and especially the mega-donors (all of whom are billionaires). It is a sophisticated type of bribery-operation. And by far the most lucrative segement of the U.S. stock markets is its “Defense and Aerospace” segment (that being the segment which sells to the Government instead of to the public — so, the U.S. Government is the main benefctor to America’s billionaires, and they know this). (For example: Jeff Bezos’s Washington Post headlined on February 26, “Elon Musk’s business empire is built on $38 billion in government funding: Government infusions at key moments helped Tesla and SpaceX flourish, boosting Musk’s wealth.” And on 25 March 2018, I reported that “since 2014, Amazon Web Services has supplied to the U.S. Government (CIA, Pentagon, NSA, etc.) its cloud-computing services, which has since produced virtually all of Amazon’s profits (also see “Cloud Business Drives Amazon’s Profits”), though Amazon doesn’t even so much as show up on that list of 100 top contractors to the U.S. Government; so, this extremely profitable business is more important to Jeff Bezos (the owner also of the Washington Post) than all the rest of his investments put together are.” This is called “neo-liberalism” or “libertarianism” but by any name means “Let the wealth rule, NOT the people rule.” It is the reigning principle in the U.S. empire.

    On February 25, I reported that:

    On February 14th, the AP headlined “Where US adults think the government is spending too much, according to AP-NORC polling”, and listed in rank-order according to the opposite (“spending too little”) the following 8 Government functions: 1. Social Security; 2. Medicare; 3. Education; 4. Assistance to the poor; 5. Medicaid; 6. Border security; 7. Federal law enforcement; 8. The Military. That’s right: the American public (and by an overwhelming margin) are THE LEAST SUPPORTIVE of spending more money on the military, and the MOST SUPPORTIVE of spending more money on Social Security, Medicare, Education, Assistance to the poor, and Medicaid (the five functions the Republican Party has always been the most vocal to call “waste, fraud, and abuse” and try to cut). Meanwhile, The Military, which actually receives 53% (and in the latest year far more than that) of the money that the Congress allocates each year and gets signed into law by the President, keeps getting, each year, over 50% of the annually appropriated federal funds.

    An important point to be made here is that both #s 4&5, Assistance to the poor, and Medicaid, are “discretionary federal spending” (i.e., controlled by the annual appropriations that get voted into law each year), whereas #s 1&2 (Social Security and Medicare) are “mandatory federal spending” (i.e., NOT controlled by Congress and the President). So, Trump and the Republicans are going after the poor because they CAN; they can’t (at least as-of YET) reduce or eliminate Social Security and Medicare. However, by now, it is crystal clear that Trump’s Presidency will be an enormous boon to America’s billionaires, and an enormous bane to the nation’s poor. The aristocratic ideology has always been: to get rid of poverty, we must get rid of the poor — work them so hard they will go away (let them seek ‘refugee’ status SOMEWHERE ELSE).

    This is an excellent example of a libertarian (or neo-liberal) Government.

    The post Only the US Defense Department’s Budget Will NOT be Cut first appeared on Dissident Voice.


    This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Eric Zuesse.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/03/05/only-the-us-defense-departments-budget-will-not-be-cut/feed/ 0 516513
    China announces 7.2% defense budget hike, reaffirms opposition to Taiwan independence https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/03/05/china-defense-budget-taiwan/ https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/03/05/china-defense-budget-taiwan/#respond Wed, 05 Mar 2025 08:45:50 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/03/05/china-defense-budget-taiwan/ TAIPEI, Taiwan – China is increasing its 2025 defense budget by 7.2% to US$246 billion amid growing rivalry with the United States and tensions over Taiwan, marking the fourth consecutive year of more than 7% growth in defense spending.

    As China announced its defense budget on Wednesday, Premier Li Qiang reiterated “strong opposition” to those who push for Taiwan’s formal independence and their foreign supporters.

    China has ramped up military activities around self-governed, democratic Taiwan, conducting frequent air and naval incursions into the island’s air defense identification zone and staging large-scale drills near its waters. Beijing views Taiwan as an inseparable part of its territory and insists on eventual reunification, by force if necessary.

    The 7.2% increase, announced at the National People’s Congress, the annual meeting of China’s legislature, matches last year’s rate but remains significantly lower than the double-digit rises seen in previous years, reflecting an economic slowdown.

    Analysts say actual military spending could be at least 40% higher due to expenditures hidden in other budgets.

    China’s leadership has set a target for overall economic growth of around 5% for the year.

    Since Xi Jinping became president more than a decade ago, the defense budget has ballooned to 1.78 trillion yuan (US$246 billion) from 720 billion yuan in 2013.

    Xi aims to complete full military modernisation by 2035, with China’s military developing new missiles, ships, submarines and surveillance technologies.

    Its military spending remains the second largest behind the U.S. and it already has the world’s largest navy.

    ‘Strong opposition’ to Taiwan independence

    China announced the new military budget just days after sending dozens of aircraft into territory near Taiwan and briefly setting up a live-fire zone close to the island.

    In his comments at the Congress, Premier Li told the nearly 3,000 party loyalists that China still preferred a peaceful solution to the Taiwan issue, but “resolutely opposes” those pushing for Taiwan’s formal independence and their foreign supporters.

    “We will firmly advance the cause of China’s reunification and work with our fellow Chinese in Taiwan to realize the glorious cause of the rejuvenation of the Chinese nation,” Li said.

    Chinese Premier Li Qiang delivers a speech during the opening session of the National People’s Congress, at the Great Hall of the People, in Beijing, China March 5, 2025.
    Chinese Premier Li Qiang delivers a speech during the opening session of the National People’s Congress, at the Great Hall of the People, in Beijing, China March 5, 2025.
    (Tingshu Wan/Reuters)

    Li’s remarks came a day after U.S. President Donald Trump’s nominee for a top Pentagon post said Taiwan needed to increase its defense spending to about 10% of its gross domestic product to deter a war with China.

    Elbridge Colby, the nominee for undersecretary of defense for policy, told the U.S. Senate Armed Services Committee that Taiwan’s current level of defense spending was “well below 3%” and therefore far too low.

    “They should be more like 10%, or at least something in that ballpark, really focused on their defense,” said Colby.

    Taiwan’s Cabinet had earmarked $647 billion New Taiwan dollars (US$20 billion) for defense spending in 2025, equal to 2.45% of its GDP.

    President Lai Ching-te later pledged to propose a special budget to raise defense spending to more than 3% of GDP, though that, too, would require legislative approval.

    Under the 1979 Taiwan Relations Act, the U.S. is committed to assisting Taiwan to defend itself but it has long maintained a policy of “strategic ambiguity” on whether it would intervene militarily to protect Taiwan in the event of a Chinese attack.

    “Taiwan’s fall [to China] would be a disaster for American interests,” said Colby, explaining that he was trying to draw attention to the fact that the military balance vis-à-vis China has “deteriorated dramatically.”

    “What I have been trying to do is shoot a signal flare that it is vital to enable U.S. forces for an ‘effective and reasonable’ defense of Taiwan, and for the Taiwanese and Japanese to do more,” he added.

    RELATED STORIES

    Taiwan detains China-linked cargo ship over severed undersea cable

    Taiwan severs academic ties with Chinese universities, citing propaganda links

    China condemns US for tweak to Taiwan reference; Washington calls it ‘routine’ update

    In response to Colby’s remarks, Taiwan’s defence ministry referred to Lai’s announcement of “a significant increase in the defense budget.”

    “Taiwan’s military’s force modernization plans are based on careful assessments of evolving threats, ensuring that procurement aligns with strategic needs and available defense budgets,” Minister of Defense Wellington Koo Li-hsiung said in a statement to Radio Free Asia.

    Referring to the president’s announcement of significant increase in defense spending, Khoo said the focus would be on four key areas: building asymmetric capabilities, strengthening defense resilience, enhancing reserve forces, and effectively responding to “gray-zone” threats.

    “Any weapon systems that can rapidly contribute to force modernization will be prioritized for acquisition,” he said.

    Taiwan’s defense minister this week said the island was planning to boost military spending in the face of the “rapidly changing international situation and the escalating threats from adversaries” while increasing the scope and duration of its annual military exercise. He did not elaborate on the budget.

    Edited by Mike Firn.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Taejun Kang and Alan Lu for RFA.

    ]]>
    https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/03/05/china-defense-budget-taiwan/feed/ 0 516505
    Covering Attack on USAID as if Constitutional Restraints Were Up for Debate https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/21/covering-attack-on-usaid-as-if-constitutional-restraints-were-up-for-debate/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/21/covering-attack-on-usaid-as-if-constitutional-restraints-were-up-for-debate/#respond Fri, 21 Feb 2025 22:26:05 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9044379  

    NBC: What cutting USAID could cost the U.S. — and how China, Russia may benefit

    NBC News (2/4/25) put Trump’s unconstitutional attack on USAID in a Cold War frame.

    Are the corporate media outlets reporting on Donald Trump and Elon Musk’s authoritarian takeover smarter than a fifth grader? Recent coverage of the president and his henchman’s blatantly unconstitutional dismembering of the US Agency for International Development (USAID) would suggest some are not.

    Reports on the agency’s shuttering (Politico, 1/31/25, 2/14/25; NBC, 2/4/25) have often failed to sufficiently sound the alarm on how Trump’s efforts are upending the most basic—and vitally important—federal checks and balances one learns about in a Schoolhouse Rock episode. Instead, these reports have framed bedrock constitutional principles as if they were up for debate, and neglected to mention that the Trump administration is purposefully attempting to shirk executive restraints.

    Meanwhile, much of corporate media’s justified attention on the foreign aid agency’s demise has wasted ink on a narrower, unjustifiable reason for audiences to draw objections: the loss of the “soft power” USAID gives America in its battle over global influence with its adversaries (CNN 2/7/25; New York Times 2/11/25). This sets up the precedent that Musk’s federal bludgeoning should be assessed based on the value of his target, rather than the fact that he is subverting the Constitution.

    ‘The least popular thing’

    Brennan Center: The Extreme Legal Theory Behind Trump’s First Month in Office

    Michael Waldman (Brennan Center, 2/19/25): “Trump’s power grab…is the culmination of decades of pressure from conservative organizations and lawyers who have sought a way to dismantle government and curb its power to intervene in markets.”

    A lawsuit by the American Foreign Service Association and the American Federation of Government Employees against the Trump administration lays out the five-alarm constitutional fire the shuttering of USAID has set off. USAID was established as an independent agency outside the State Department’s control by an act of Congress in 1998.

    Longstanding judicial precedent holds that only Congress has the ability to create and dissolve federal agencies. Last year, the legislature prohibited even a reorganization of USAID without its consultation in an appropriations law. The Trump administration’s actions—justified solely by an extreme interpretation of executive authority—violate the Constitution’s separation of powers, and are indeed designed to do so.

    Together Trump and Musk share interest in reconstituting US governance. The checks and balances that help to constrain executive power, along with civil service workers, are also roadblocks to the billions in federal contracts that have underwritten Musk’s empire. USAID has become the first target in their federal bludgeoning, because its relative unpopularity among voters means they might get away with rewriting the Constitution without too much public outrage. Its “the least popular thing government spends money on,” Secretary of State Marco Rubio said to a USAID official earlier this month. (Americans tend to vastly overestimate how much the US government spends on foreign aid, and think it should be reduced to a level that is actually far more than USAID’s current budget—Program for Public Consultation, 2/8/25.)  

    Trump and Musk’s withdrawal of nearly all foreign aid funded through USAID is another grave challenge to the constitutional order. Since those funds were congressionally appropriated, neither Trump nor Musk has the authority to stop them, especially not on the basis of their political preferences.

    The act of a president indefinitely rejecting congressionally approved spending is known as impoundment, which has been effectively outlawed in all forms since 1974. Trump has been explicit about his intent to bring impoundment back, which threatens to render Congress—which is supposed to have the power of the purse—irrelevant.

    ‘Musk has been clear’

    Politico: Mass layoffs, court challenges and buyouts: Making sense of Trump’s plans to shrink the federal workforce

    Politico (2/14/25) would have better helped readers’ understanding if it hadn’t taken “Trump’s plans to shrink the federal workforce” at face value.

    Such a threat to democracy requires calling it for what it is. Simple but consequential abdications of responsibility abound, though. Politico (2/14/25), for example, saw fit to reprint at face value Trump and Musk’s claims that they just wish to drastically reduce federal spending. An explainer article on Trump and Musk’s efforts made no mention that they might have ulterior motives.

    In response to the question, “What is Trump and Musk’s goal?” Politico simply answered: “With Trump’s blessing, Musk has been clear that his goal is to drastically reduce the size of the government.” That Musk, the richest person in the world, whose business empire spans the globe and dominates whole industries, has resolved to dedicate his undivided attention to the cause of reducing federal spending deserves more skepticism. The fact that Musk has prioritized going after federal agencies that have had the temerity to investigate his businesses suggests a more plausible scenario.

    Though the article, which is meant to give readers a brief but comprehensive overview of Trump and Musk’s efforts, briefly mentions some of the court-ordered pauses to Trump’s orders, it doesn’t discuss the overarching implications for US democracy.

    Another Politico story (1/31/25), breaking the news that Trump intended to subsume USAID into the State Department, gave the move a stamp of approval by pointing out it was the fulfillment of long-held bipartisan aspirations—corporate media’s highest praise—while ignoring the unconstitutional means that brought it about. For years, the article says, “both Democratic and Republican administrations have toyed with the idea of making USAID a part of the State Department.” That’s because, Politico claimed,

    there have always been tensions between State and USAID over which agency controls what parts of the multibillion-dollar foreign aid apparatus, regardless of which party is in power.

    The article qualifies that USAID “describes itself” as an independent agency, as if this were up for dispute.

    ‘Keep America safe’

    CNN: Trump challenges Congress’ power with plan to shutter USAID, legal experts say

    CNN (2/3/25): “Trump’s claim that he can single-handedly shut down USAID is at odds with Congress’ distinct role in forming and closing federal agencies.”

    Corporate media’s failure to foreground the authoritarian threat of Trump and Musk’s USAID takedown also includes a narrow focus on its geopolitical ramifications that smooths over the unsavory aspects of the agency’s humanitarian work.

    USAID oversees billions in foreign aid that is responsible for lifesaving food, medical care, infrastructure and economic development. The massive disruption in that aid is already causing death, hunger, disease outbreak and economic hardship. But a defense of that lifesaving work, and the democratic norms threatened by its unraveling, need not require a rosy picture of its imperialist motivations.

    That’s exactly what the New York TimesDaily podcast (2/11/25) accomplished, though, in an episode titled “The Demise of USAID and American Soft Power.” As has become all too frequent, nowhere during the episode’s 35-minute run time did the host, Times reporter Michael Barbaro, or his two guests, Times journalists Michael Crowley and Stephanie Nolen, mention the constitutional principles at stake in USAID’s closure (though the following episode was dedicated to the constitutional crises Trump has provoked—Daily, 2/12/25).

    Instead, the podcast focused on what Barbaro described as Trump’s overturning of a decades-long bipartisan consensus about the best way to “keep America safe.” That safety, Barbaro learned by way of his guests’ contribution, is a supposedly serendipitous return on investment America receives through its strategic generosity abroad (effective altruism, one might say?). Trump has now abandoned that generosity, leaving a more brutish impression of America’s global role, and ceding ground to geopolitical adversaries, Barbaro and company said.

    What threats do they identify that Americans have needed to be kept safe from? At first, Crowley said, it was the Soviet Union’s relative popularity in the developing world. After the Cold War ended, though, USAID’s justification for existence seemed thin, he acknowledged. But that didn’t last long, because it just so happened that after 9/11, “America realized that the Soviet Communist ideology that threatened us had been replaced by a new ideology. It was a terrorist ideology,” Crowley explained.

    For one, it wasn’t just USAID, but the entire military industrial complex, that was inevitably going to identify a new justification for its existence, 9/11 notwithstanding. But the podcast also completely leaves out USAID’s modern role in conditioning aid to developing countries on opening up their economies to the International Monetary Fund and multinational corporations, creating the conditions for neo-colonial dispossession and Western dependency.

    Dedicating a whole episode to portraying USAID’s work as a mutually beneficial marriage between developing nations’ humanitarian needs and US national security interests, all so that audiences might selfishly conclude that preserving foreign aid is in their own interests, perpetuates imperial propaganda. Pointing out how Trump’s actions harm people, including his own supporters, is well and good. But the loss of imperial soft power is not an example of that. And pointing out the actual harms without discussing the autocratic way they were inflicted risks suggesting that unconstitutional actions are acceptable as long as their results are beneficial.

    Some journalists are doing a fine job of exposing the assault on USAID (e.g., New York Times, 1/28/25, 2/5/25; CNN, 2/3/25). But amid this unprecedented blitz on democratic norms, others are showing that they might need to revisit their elementary school textbooks.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Luca GoldMansour.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/21/covering-attack-on-usaid-as-if-constitutional-restraints-were-up-for-debate/feed/ 0 514705
    AP Describes Musk’s Coup as ‘Penchant for Dabbling’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/14/ap-describes-musks-coup-as-penchant-for-dabbling/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/14/ap-describes-musks-coup-as-penchant-for-dabbling/#respond Fri, 14 Feb 2025 22:55:56 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9044275  

    AP: Elon Musk tightens grip on federal government as Democrats raise alarms

    AP (2/4/25) concludes with Elon Musk describing his government takeover as a card game: “If we don’t take advantage of this best hand of cards, it’s never going to happen.”

    Associated Press (2/4/25) evidently needed the work of ten reporters to produce “Elon Musk Tightens Grip on Federal Government as Democrats Raise Alarms.”

    At first blush, the story might seem to convey concern, but look closer: We see Musk matter-of-factly described as a “special government employee, which subjects him to less stringent rules on ethics and financial disclosures than other workers.”

    He’s also described as “in charge of retooling the federal government.” Is that a thing? AP suggests we believe that it is.

    The debate, AP tells us, is just between Republicans who “defend Musk as simply carrying out Trump’s slash-and-burn campaign promises,” and Democrats who, “for their part, accused Musk of leading a coup from within the government by amassing unaccountable and illegal power.”  Tomato, to-mah-to, you understand.

    Musk locking federal workers out of internal systems, denying them access to their own personnel files, with their pay history, length of service and qualifications: Why, that’s just “Musk’s penchant for dabbling.” He’s been “tinkering with things his entire life,” the wire service says. He learned to code as a child in South Africa, you see, and “now Musk is popping open the hood on the federal government like it’s one of his cars or rockets.”

    Popping open the hood of democratic processes to tinker with them? If you rely on reporting from nominally neutral outlets like Associated Press, you might imagine that’s only a concern of partisan Democrats, not regular folks like you and me.


    You can send a message to Associated Press here (or via Bluesky @APnews.com).


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/14/ap-describes-musks-coup-as-penchant-for-dabbling/feed/ 0 513837
    WaPo Provides Cover for Musk’s Government Takeover https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/14/wapo-provides-cover-for-musks-government-takeover/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/14/wapo-provides-cover-for-musks-government-takeover/#respond Fri, 14 Feb 2025 21:14:07 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9044247  

    Column: US Media's Credulous Depiction of 'DOGE' as a Good Faith "Efficiency Panel" Has Aged Poorly

    Adam Johnson (Column, 2/3/25): “The New York Times, Washington Post and CNN ran with the framing that ‘DOGE’ was some good-faith, post-ideological effort to ‘cut costs,’ ‘find savings’ and ‘increase efficiencies.’”

    Having spent nearly $300 million to purchase the US presidency for Donald Trump, Elon Musk now feels entitled to do with it as he pleases. Just how radically Musk plans to remake the country was conveyed to the American people only after the election, when Musk stood behind the presidential seal on Inauguration Day and gave a Nazi salute. Then did it again. Maybe that sort of thing was OK to do in apartheid South Africa, where Musk grew up, but it’s jarring to see here in the United States.

    Reporters initially struggled to meet the moment (FAIR.org, 2/4/25), downplaying Musk’s salute (the Washington Post described a “high-energy speech“), as well as his broader agenda, which Musk now openly declares a “revolution,” and consists of an unelected billionaire wresting control of nearly the entire executive branch of government. Early media reports went along with Musk’s “efficiency” mantra (Column, 2/3/25), but more recently reporters have started to find their footing, and the dangers of Musk’s project are being conveyed. Sort of.

    “Reporters on the battlefield are doing what they can” to expose the radical nature of Trump’s second term, writes media columnist Oliver Darcy (Status, 2/5/25). “The news generals back in the command center, however, are largely abdicating their duties.”

    ‘Musk’s audacious goal’

    Nowhere is this discrepancy more apparent than at the Washington Post, a newspaper famed for opposing a prior Republican president with an expansive view of executive power. These days, however, even as Post reporters like Jeff Stein are busy breaking stories (e.g., 1/28/25, 2/8/25) about the Trump power grab, the paper’s higher-ups are careful not to offend the president or Musk. The Post is even, incredibly, calling on the Constitution-defying billionaire duo to push further.

    WaPo: Trump needs to erect guardrails for DOGE

    As Elon Musk seizes extraconstitutional control of the federal budget, Washington Post editors (2/7/25) urge him to use that power to go after Social Security and Medicare.

    “To have any chance of achieving Musk’s audacious goal of $2 trillion in cuts,” the Post editorial board (2/7/25) wrote, “Trump will need to work with elected representatives in Congress to reform entitlement programs such as Social Security and Medicare before they become insolvent.”

    While claiming it wants Trump to “erect guardrails” for Musk, the Post urges the president to abandon one of the only guardrails he established—the cutting of Social Security and Medicare, which Trump repeatedly said he wouldn’t do, but recently started waffling on.

    To be clear, the Post has long called for cutting so-called entitlements (FAIR.org, 11/1/11, 6/15/23). But to do so at this moment—by encouraging a coup attempt to push further—is quite extraordinary.

    The Post’s move comes as its billionaire owner, Amazon founder Jeff Bezos, is lavishing praise and millions of dollars on Trump and his family, while coaching his paper to take a less critical approach in its coverage (FAIR.org, 1/22/25). Bezos’s ingratiation toward Trump started prior to the election, when Bezos personally spiked the Post’s endorsement of Kamala Harris (FAIR.org, 10/30/24).

    Good news for X from Amazon

    WaPo: Some Jewish leaders renew calls for X boycott as Musk’s power grows

    The Washington Post (2/4/25) reports on “divergent views among Jewish leaders in how to respond to Musk”: Some object to his ” Nazi-esque salute and Holocaust jokes,” others appreciate his censorship of criticism of Israel.

    Bezos has also been busy making nice with Musk, his longtime rival for most powerful man on Earth and in space. On both fronts, Musk now has a decided edge, aided by his control over much of the US government, which both men’s sprawling empires rely on for billions of dollars in contracts.

    With Musk’s hand on the public-money spigot, Bezos apparently did him a favor. After Musk openly heiled Hitler, Jewish leaders renewed calls to boycott Musk’s social media platform, X (Washington Post, 2/4/25). “To advertisers—including Google, Amazon and the ADL: Pull your ads now,” the Jewish leaders wrote. “The pressure is working. X’s financial difficulties prove it.”

    But the boycott’s pressure was countered by Bezos’s company. “[X] got good news last week, with Amazon reportedly planning to hike its advertising on the site,” the Post (2/4/25) reported, without mentioning Bezos.

    While X’s finances “were once so bad that Musk floated the idea of filing for bankruptcy,” things are suddenly looking up, the Financial Times (2/12/25) reported:

    Musk famously admitted to overpaying for Twitter after he bought the social media platform known now as X for $44 billion in 2022. But the billionaire’s foray into government has coincided with a turnaround in X’s fortunes, as advertisers, including Amazon, flock back to the platform.

    ‘Lemmings leaping in unison’

    WaPo: Americans asked for it, and they’re going to get it

    Kathleen Parker (Washington Post, 1/24/25) likened those who condemned Musk’s Nazi gesture to “lemmings leaping in unison from a cliff”—because it’s suicidal to notice fascism in high places?

    It wasn’t just Bezos’s company that threw Musk a lifeline, but also his newspaper. An initial Post headline (1/20/25), which omitted mention of Musk’s Nazi salute, read “Elon Musk Gives Exuberant Speech at Inauguration.” The following day, Post columnist Megan McArdle, echoing the ADL, downgraded Musk’s salute to an “awkward gesture,” the same phrase Post columnist Kathleen Parker used to dismiss those who saw something more sinister as “lemmings leaping in unison from a cliff” (Washington Post, 1/24/25).

    Interestingly, one of the most vociferous “lemmings” was Post columnist Catherine Rampell, who brilliantly called out Musk’s Nazi salute, but on CNN, and noticeably not in the Post, except once in passing (1/30/25).

    Musk responded to Rampell’s CNN appearance by threatening to sue her in a post (1/27/25) to his over 200 million X followers.

    I noted at the top that Musk spent nearly $300 million to elect Trump, but that’s only part of the story. Musk also provided inestimable support by transforming X into a pro-Trump bullhorn. Personally, when I logged onto X during the campaign, I routinely saw Musk’s pro-Trump tweets at the top of my feed, even though I didn’t follow Musk at the time.

    Since the election, Musk ’s gifts to Trump have continued. X recently agreed to pay Trump $10 million to settle Trump’s 2021 lawsuit against the company, even though the case was dismissed in 2022. Trump was still appealing the ruling two-and-a-half years later when a deal was cut. “The settlement talks with X began after the election and were more informal, with both Trump and Musk personally involved in hammering out the $10 million number,” the Wall Street Journal (2/13/25) reported.

    ‘Cheering for change’

    NYT: Elon Musk’s Business Empire Scores Benefits Under Trump Shake-Up

    New York Times (2/11/25): Many of the federal agencies targeted by Musk “were leading investigations, enforcement matters or lawsuits pending against Mr. Musk’s companies.”

    It’s quite something for Elon Musk—the world’s richest human and one of the largest government contractors—to gleefully slash public spending benefiting others. Especially when, by one measure, “virtually all of his net worth can be pinned to government help,” CNN (11/20/24) reported.

    While Musk claims to wield a populist’s pitchfork as he attacks “the bureaucracy,” a closer look reveals the work of an oligarch’s scalpel. Musk’s coup team—called DOGE, and consisting mostly of twentysomething male engineers, several of whom appear to share Musk’s racist ideology (New York Times, 2/7/25)—is targeting the federal agencies investigating Musk’s companies, which in addition to X, include Tesla and SpaceX.

    “President Trump has been in office less than a month, and Elon Musk’s vast business empire is already benefiting—or is now in a decidedly better position to benefit,” read the opening lines of a New York Times story (2/11/25):

    At least 11 federal agencies that have been affected by [Trump’s] moves have more than 32 continuing investigations, pending complaints or enforcement actions into Mr. Musk’s six companies.

    While Trump claims Musk is “not gaining anything” from the arrangement, and Musk says the same, Wall Street sees things differently. Even as Musk says he’s turning his “efficiency” revolution to the Pentagon—the only federal agency never to pass an audit, and where any honest attempt to rein in government spending would begin—stocks for armsmaking companies associated with Musk are surging, while those without ties to him languish. “Palantir, as well as Musk’s SpaceX, OpenAI and robotics and AI specialist Anduril Industries, are cheering for change,” the Wall Street Journal (2/10/25) reported.

    In other words, having seized control of the levers of government, an oligarch will now be directing funding to himself and his cronies. That’s Wall Street’s view, anyhow.

    It seems to be Bezos’s as well. With Amazon and Blue Origin, Bezos’s space company, competing for billions in government contracts, it makes perfect business sense for Bezos to cozy up to Musk and Trump. From a journalistic perspective, however, it’s nothing short of a disaster, one that’s playing out daily in the pages of the Washington Post.


    You can send a message to the Washington Post at letters@washpost.com (or via Bluesky: @washingtonpost.com).

    Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your message in the comments thread on FAIR.org.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Pete Tucker.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/14/wapo-provides-cover-for-musks-government-takeover/feed/ 0 513822
    Groundwork’s Jacquez on House Budget Resolution: GOP is ransacking working families to fund billionaire tax breaks https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/12/groundworks-jacquez-on-house-budget-resolution-gop-is-ransacking-working-families-to-fund-billionaire-tax-breaks/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/12/groundworks-jacquez-on-house-budget-resolution-gop-is-ransacking-working-families-to-fund-billionaire-tax-breaks/#respond Wed, 12 Feb 2025 17:11:58 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/groundworks-jacquez-on-house-budget-resolution-gop-is-ransacking-working-families-to-fund-billionaire-tax-breaks Today, House Republicans unveiled their plan to deliver $4.5 trillion worth of massive tax giveaways to the ultra-wealthy and corporations, which they plan to fund by cutting $2 trillion from health care, SNAP, and other critical programs that families rely on. Groundwork Collaborative Chief of Policy and Advocacy Alex Jacquezcondemned the plan in the following statement:

    “Instead of tackling rising prices and delivering relief for American families, House Republicans are charging ahead with trillions of dollars in deeply unpopular tax breaks for billionaires like Donald Trump and Elon Musk. And, they’re paying for their billionaire handouts by ransacking health care, food assistance, and other vital programs that American workers and families rely on.”


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/12/groundworks-jacquez-on-house-budget-resolution-gop-is-ransacking-working-families-to-fund-billionaire-tax-breaks/feed/ 0 513526
    Trump’s budget cuts could kill your local weather forecast — and put you in danger https://grist.org/extreme-weather/trumps-budget-cuts-could-kill-your-local-weather-forecast-and-put-you-in-danger/ https://grist.org/extreme-weather/trumps-budget-cuts-could-kill-your-local-weather-forecast-and-put-you-in-danger/#respond Wed, 12 Feb 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=658633 You may have heard of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration and its offshoot, the National Weather Service. Meteorologists depend upon it to offer accurate local forecasts, and its alerts and advisories warn millions of people about dangerous conditions. But you may not know it is part of the Department of Commerce, and, more surprising, that its mission has specifically included “protecting life and property.” 

    Without the agency, known as NOAA, weather forecasts wouldn’t be as reliable, and the impacts of extreme weather on a less prepared public could be devastating. “Everyone would be shocked about the negative things that could happen,” said Alan Sealls, president-elect of the American Meteorological Society and former chief meteorologist at WKRG-TV in Mobile, Alabama. “Those compromises will be not just unpleasant, and not just uncomfortable, but truly dangerous.”

    It remains unclear just what President Donald Trump has in mind for NOAA. His nominee for commerce secretary, financier Howard Lutnick, has vowed to keep it intact. But Project 2025, the conservative roadmap to a second Trump term, calls for it to be “broken up and downsized,” and Russell Vought, an architect of that blueprint, now leads the federal Office of Management and Budget. In late January, employees at NOAA’s Asheville, North Carolina, office were told to remove internal web pages and cancel events and meetings. Last week, Elon Musk sent a Department of Government Efficiency team to the agency’s headquarters in Washington, D.C., in what has for other agencies been the start of radical downsizing.

    “I’m in fear of losing my job every day,” said a National Weather Service employee who requested anonymity. So far, most cuts seem to have targeted diversity programs, including the organization’s head of diversity, equity, inclusion and accessibility, who was put on leave after a right-wing social media account targeted them. As to what might happen next, this person said, “pretty much everybody is in the dark.”

    President Richard Nixon established NOAA in 1970, but its roots stretch back to 1807 and the creation of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey to chart the nation’s coastline. The Weather Bureau followed in 1870 and the Commission of Fish and Fisheries one year later. NOAA still fulfills these roles through divisions like the National Weather Service, or NWS, and Marine Fisheries Service, which helps ensure sustainable harvesting of the oceans and a safe food supply. 

    Today, the agency employs about 12,000 people worldwide; over half are scientists and engineers. Its current budget is $6.5 billion. Of that, about $1.4 billion goes to the NWS, or about $4 for every citizen. In addition to providing free weather data, forecasts, and alerts, that allocation saves taxpayers money. The agency’s work predicting hurricanes saves billions in avoided damage alone, and allows crisis managers and first responders to better prepare for disasters. By one estimate, every dollar invested in the NWS reaps more than $9 in return

    “It’s a great deal for the American public,” said Pat Spoden, who was a National Weather Service meteorologist from 1987 to 2022. “A lot of people don’t understand or know where the weather data comes from and how much the Weather Service, and NOAA, provides.”

    The agency manages 18 satellites, nearly 100 weather balloon launch sites, and around 250 oceanic buoys that produce billions of observations each day. That information goes to 122 forecasting offices, where meteorologists generate weather projections that are disseminated across the country, including on a network of 1,000 NWS radio stations. Beyond providing the basis for weather watch and warning alerts, these reports are the foundation upon which private weather services like AccuWeather and The Weather Channel stand.

    “AccuWeather does not have their own fleet of satellites and weather radar and ground stations. They do not operate their own weather predictive models,” said Daniel Swain, a climate scientist at the University of California, Los Angeles. “All these private weather enterprises are built upon the public backbone of data.” They’re either using NOAA data directly, Swain added, or adjusting it in some proprietary way.

    The private sector also relies on NOAA’s vast research archive, housed at the four offices of the National Centers for Environmental Information. This trove includes historical records detailing changes in Earth’s oceans, land masses, ice sheets, atmosphere, and magnetic field. These repositories offer a wealth of local, national, and international climate findings and modeling, and have recorded nearly real-time analysis of temperature and precipitation changes since 2000. All of this info is invaluable to researchers, analysts, and myriad industries that predict future conditions.

    “What most people don’t realize is insurance companies base your rates on that data record and how it is projected to go forward,” said Craig McLean, the agency’s former research division director. “Banking, finance, real estate, the transportation industry, agriculture, they all look in the futures market at data that is stored historically, but also collected daily around the world.”

    Yet NOAA’s critics consider the agency, and its information, a threat. Thomas Gilman, who served in the Commerce Department, wrote in Project 2025 that it is “one of the main drivers of the climate change alarm industry and, as such, is harmful to the future of U.S. prosperity.” That document notes “the preponderance of its climate-change research should be disbanded.”

    Project 2025 seems to favor maintaining only those functions that serve corporate interests, noting that, “because private companies rely on this data, the NWS should fully commercialize its forecasting operations.” 

    A devastated home is seen among the mud and debris left by receding floodwaters in rural Kentucky.
    When floods devastated eastern Kentucky in 2022, local meteorologists relied upon data from the National Weather Service to provide accurate and timely forecasts and flood warnings. Seth Herald / AFP via Getty Images

    Critics of such a move argue that putting such an essential resource behind a paywall would harm the public. Megan Duzmal, a meteorologist at WYMT, a small TV station in eastern Kentucky, relies upon NOAA data to do her job. The station serves a largely rural area that those in larger markets like Louisville do not focus on. 

    “They don’t look individually at these communities, but we are able to, as a smaller market, zoom into the small cities here,” Duzmal said, with enough precision to “point out road names.”

    The station provided essential information to viewers during a spate of recent floods, most recently after Hurricane Helene. When a storm is brewing, Duzmal receives information about flash flooding risks from a hydrologist at the National Weather Service in Jackson, Kentucky. Assessing the danger requires analyzing complex factors like soil moisture, previous drought conditions, and topography. It demands a firm grasp of both science and local conditions. If the tools she and countless other local meteorologists rely upon are privatized, they could become too expensive for small stations in rural areas. That could prove deadly to residents of communities that already lack robust cellular service and reliable internet providers. 

    Privatization could also create varying forecasts from competing companies, leading to confusion. “Without the one voice, you run into issues of what do you believe or who do you believe,” said Spoden, the former NWS meteorologist. “It’s just so important to have an official source.” 

    That raises perhaps the most important question about privatization: What services would companies even be willing to take on? It’s unclear, for instance, that any private enterprise would want to be responsible, and thus liable, for issuing warnings or alerts. Spoden also wonders whether private sector meteorologists would deploy to disaster areas to brief emergency responders, like NWS employees did during the fires in Los Angeles. 

    “They are the most dedicated group of civil servants you’re going to find,” said Spoden. “It would be very difficult for any private company to do what the National Weather Service does.”

    It remains to be seen what the Trump administration will do. It’s an open question, for instance, whether the National Weather Service Employees Organization’s collective bargaining agreement, which runs through 2029, will hold up against any efforts to dismantle the organization. But the employee who fears for their job says the president’s attacks on NOAA feel unprecedented. 

    “He’s going no holds barred,” they said. “It’s very aggressive.”

    This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Trump’s budget cuts could kill your local weather forecast — and put you in danger on Feb 12, 2025.


    This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Tik Root.

    ]]>
    https://grist.org/extreme-weather/trumps-budget-cuts-could-kill-your-local-weather-forecast-and-put-you-in-danger/feed/ 0 513500
    Powerless – another Asia-Pacific angle on the long siege of USAID https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/12/powerless-another-asia-pacific-angle-on-the-long-siege-of-usaid/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/12/powerless-another-asia-pacific-angle-on-the-long-siege-of-usaid/#respond Wed, 12 Feb 2025 05:01:55 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=110760 COMMENTARY: By Robin Davies

    Much has been and much more will be written about the looming abolition of USAID.

    It’s “the removal of a huge and important tool of American global statecraft” (Konyndyk), or the wood-chipping of a “viper’s nest of radical-left marxists who hate America” (Musk) or, more reasonably, the unwarranted cancellation of an organisation that should have been reviewed and reformed.

    Commentators will have a lot to say, some of it exaggerated, about the varieties of harm caused by this decision, and about its legality.

    Some will welcome it from a conservative perspective, believing that USAID was either not aligned with or acting against the interests of the United States, or was proselytising wokeness, or was a criminal organisation.

    Some, often more quietly, will welcome it from an anti-imperialist or “Southern” perspective, believing that the agency was at worst a blunt instrument of US hegemony or at least a bastion of Western saviourism.

    I want to come at this topic from a different angle, by providing a brief personal perspective on USAID as an organisation, based on several decades of occasional interaction with it during my time as an Australian aid official.

    Essentially, I view USAID as a harried, hamstrung and traumatised organisation, not as a rogue agency or finely-tuned vehicle of US statecraft.

    Peer country representative
    My own experience with USAID began when I participated as a peer country representative in an OECD Development Assistance Committee (DAC) peer review of the US’s foreign assistance programme in the early 1990s, which included visits to US assistance programmes in Bangladesh and the Philippines, as well as to USAID headquarters in Washington DC.

    I later dealt with the agency in many other roles, including during postings to the OECD and Indonesia and through my work on global and regional climate change and health programmes, up to and including the pandemic years.

    An image is firmly lodged in my mind from that DAC peer review visit to Washington. We had had days of back-to-back meetings in USAID headquarters with a series of exhausted-looking, distracted and sometimes grumpy executives who didn’t have much reason to care what the OECD thought about the US aid effort.

    It was a muggy summer day. At one point a particularly grumpy meeting chair, who now rather reminds of me of Gary Oldman’s character in Slow Horses, mopped the sweat from his forehead with his necktie without appearing to be aware of what he was doing. Since then, that man has been my mental model of a USAID official.

    But why so exhausted, distracted and grumpy?

    Precisely because USAID is about the least freewheeling workplace one could construct. Certainly it is administratively independent, in the sense that it was created by an act of Congress, but it also receives its budget from the President and Congress — and that budget comes with so many strings attached, in the form of country- or issue-related “earmarks” or other directives that it might be logically impossible to allocate the funds as instructed.

    Some of these earmarks are broad and unsurprising (for example, specific allocations for HIV/AIDS prevention and treatment under the Bush-era PEPFAR program) while others represent niche interests (Senator John McCain once ridiculed earmarks pertaining to “peanuts, orangutans, gorillas, neotropical raptors, tropical fish and exotic plants”) — but none originates within USAID.

    Informal earmarks calculation
    I recall seeing an informal calculation showing that one could only satisfy all the percentage-based earmarks by giving most of the dollars several quite different jobs to do. A 2002 DAC peer review noted with disapproval some 270 earmarks or other directive provisions in aid legislation; by the time of the most recent peer review in 2022, this number was more like 700.

    Related in part to this congressional micro-management of its budget — along with the usual distrust of organisations that “send” money overseas — USAID labours under particularly gruelling accountability and reporting requirements.

    Andew Natsios — a former USAID Administrator and lifelong Republican who has recently come to USAID’s defence (albeit with arguments that not everybody would deem helpful) — wrote about this in 2010. In terms reminiscent of current events, he described the reign of terror of Lieutenant-General Herbert Beckington, a former Marine Corps officer who led USAID‘s Office of the Inspector General (OIG) from 1977 to 1994.

    He was a powerful iconic figure in Washington, and his influence over the structure of the foreign aid programME remains with USAID today. … Known as “The General” at USAID, Beckington was both feared and despised by career officers. Once referred to by USAID employees as “the agency’s J. Edgar Hoover — suspicious, vindictive, eager to think the worst” …

    At one point, he told the Washington Post that USAID’s white-collar crime rate was “higher than that of downtown Detroit.” … In a seminal moment in this clash between OIG and USAID, photographs were published of two senior officers who had been accused of some transgression being taken away in handcuffs by the IG investigators for prosecution, a scene that sent a broad chill through the career staff and, more than any other single event, forced a redirection of aid practice toward compliance.

    Labyrinthine accountability systems
    On top of the burdens of logically impossible programming and labyrinthine accountability systems is the burden of projecting American generosity. As far as humanly possible, and perhaps a little further, ways must be found of ensuring that American aid is sourced from American institutions, farms or factories and, if it is in the form of commodities, that it is transported on American vessels.

    Failing that, there must be American flags. I remember a USAID officer stationed in Banda Aceh after the 2004 Indian Ocean tsunami spending a non-trivial amount of his time seeking to attach sizeable flags to the front of trucks transporting US (but also non-US) emergency supplies around the province of Aceh.

    President Trump’s adviser Stephen Miller has somehow determined to his own satisfaction that the great majority (in fact 98 percent) of USAID personnel are donors to the Democratic Party. Whether or not that is true, let alone relevant, Democrat administrations have arguably been no kinder to USAID than Republican ones over the years.

    Natsios, in the piece cited above, notes that The General was installed under Carter, who ran on anti-Washington ticket, and that there were savage cuts — over 400 positions — to USAID senior career service staffing under Clinton. USAID gets battered no matter which way the wind blows.

    Which brings me back to necktie guy. It has always seemed to me that the platonic form of a USAID officer, while perhaps more likely than not to vote Democrat, is a tired and dispirited person, weary of politicians of all stripes, bowed under his or her burdens, bound to a desk and straitjacketed by accountability requirements, regularly buffeted by new priorities and abrupt restructures, and put upon by the ignorant and suspicious.

    Radical-left Marxists and vipers probably wouldn’t tolerate such an existence for long. Who would? I guess it’s either thieves and money-launderers or battle-scarred professionals intent on doing a decent job against tall odds.

    Robin Davies is an honorary professor at the Australian National University’s (ANU) Crawford School of Public Policy and managing editor of the Devpolicy Blog. He previously held senior positions at Australia’s Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade (DFAT) and AusAID.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/12/powerless-another-asia-pacific-angle-on-the-long-siege-of-usaid/feed/ 0 513339
    Cutting the Ghost Budget: Elon Musk versus the Pentagon https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/11/cutting-the-ghost-budget-elon-musk-versus-the-pentagon/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/11/cutting-the-ghost-budget-elon-musk-versus-the-pentagon/#respond Tue, 11 Feb 2025 15:15:37 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=155843 The rampaging antics of a querulous, sociopathic tech oligarch as he busies himself identifying which government departments to raid, trim, if not abolish altogether, understandably concerns those in the business of government.  And there is much to be concerned about with Elon Musk’s merrily psychotic scything as chief of the US Department of Government Efficiency […]

    The post Cutting the Ghost Budget: Elon Musk versus the Pentagon first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
    The rampaging antics of a querulous, sociopathic tech oligarch as he busies himself identifying which government departments to raid, trim, if not abolish altogether, understandably concerns those in the business of government.  And there is much to be concerned about with Elon Musk’s merrily psychotic scything as chief of the US Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE), notably in terms of security access to payment and data systems.

    Established on the day of President Donald Trump’s inauguration via executive order, the new department is charged with implementing “the President’s DOGE Agenda, by modernizing Federal technology and software to maximize governmental efficiency and productivity”.  Trump made it clear that virtually no agency or department would be exempt.  “Pentagon, [the Department of] Education, just everything.  We’re going to go through everything.”  In an interview with Fox News, Trump was convinced that, “We’re going to find billions, hundreds of millions of dollars of fraud and abuse.”

    When it comes to Musk’s hungry intentions regarding the US Defense Department, things start getting cloudily confusing.  In the first place, letting this “special government employee” loose on a department with which his own companies, notably SpaceX, have contracts with, sounds like a recipe for self-interested slashing.

    The broader premise of cutting back on wasteful Pentagon spending, however, is nigh irrefutable.  And as much as he is loathed by establishment wonks in the Pentagon, that other Trump ally-in-cutting, Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth, is merely stating the wondrously obvious in noting that many programs at the Pentagon “don’t have the impact you want them to.”

    Much to the horror of defence mandarins, Hegseth has also insisted that the Pentagon pass “a clean audit.”  That, at the very least, was what the US taxpayers deserved.  “They deserve to know where their $850 billion go, how it’s spent, and make sure it’s spent wisely.”

    National Security Advisor Mike Waltz has already identified an area of interest for the DOGE razor gang: shipbuilding.  “Everything there seems to cost too much, take too long and deliver too little to the soldiers… We need business leaders to go in there and absolutely reform the Pentagon’s acquisition process.”

    Defence departments the world over specialise in innovative, fantastic, even fraudulent accounting in justifying projects that will either never see fruition or, if they do, will only do so at vast cost to the taxpayer.  From the outset, the question of necessity is almost never asked in any serious way, let alone the need to coherently identify the relevant threat against which, presumably, the weapons system is intended to combat.

    The unaccountable costs and expenditures associated with US defence place it in an almost peerless category.  When one can fork out money to the value of $5 trillion for failed and catastrophic conflicts such as Iraq and Afghanistan, something is rotten in the state of budgetary economics.  Much of this can be put down to post-9/11 spending, which dramatically departed from the previous model which focused on raising the marginal tax rate and reducing non-war expenditure.  Taxes were actually cut in 2001, 2003 and 2017, while expenditure ballooned.  Huge borrowings for war were made and emergency funds, which do not fall within standard processes of oversight, became the norm.

    What emerged was the phenomenon Linda Bilmes describes as the “Ghost Budget”.  It was aided by abundant capital markets the US Treasury could readily draw upon, a dysfunctional budget system typified by hobbling federal government shutdowns, and a Pentagon determined to reverse the post-Cold War budget cuts it had suffered.  Money flowed in the nature of funding for emergency and Overseas Contingency Operations, passing under the radar of the Planning, Programming, Budgeting & Execution Process.  This incentive for underwriting permanent wars was also a license for permanent waste, characterised by the continuous resort by administrations to supplemental emergency funds (assistance to Ukraine being a case in point) with minimal administrative and Congressional scrutiny.

    This situation is further complicated by the entanglements governments have with self-interested weapons companies and arms manufacturers, whose boards are very often packed by former government employees and civil servants who identify their own profits with the security of the nation.

    Defence budgets the world over would seem to be subject to a more elastic treatment than those of other departments.  The $400 billion deal for the transfer and construction of nuclear-powered submarines to the Royal Australian Navy by the United States is a case in point, a project criminally needless as to demand those overseeing it to be charged with sedition and baleful stupidity.  It has all the ingredients that should make it a prime target for trimming, if not culling altogether: the absence of a genuine security threat (China is lazily designated as the primary one); the presence of self-interested former politicians who quaff and gobble from a seemingly endless gravy train; and military fatuity.

    Defence departments also tend to behave like powers unto themselves.  Criticism, however accurate, can be weathered with arrogant reserve.  The UK Ministry of Defence (MoD), to take that other paragon of dedicated waste, has dutifully ignored criticism from Parliament’s watchdog, the National Audit Office (NAO), to commit a string of budgetary howlers.  It would be hard to forget the £6 billion blow out on the aircraft carriers, Queen Elizabeth and Prince of Wales, described by Lord David Richards, former chief of defence staff, as “behemoths … unaffordable vulnerable metal cans”.  Another former senior naval officer told national security reporter Richard Norton-Taylor that the carrier project involved a “combination of naval vanity and pork barrel politics”.

    Since making it to sea, both vessels have been dogged by mechanical maladies (flooding and defective propeller shafts have featured), requiring them to spend lengthy sessions in dry dock for repairs.  Instead of participating in NATO exercises intended to show British prowess at sea, wasteful, inefficient indulgence has been on offer.

    Trump, then, aided by the furniture breaking teams at DOGE, are onto something – but only up to a point.  Any proper slimming of the Pentagon must come with broader reforms to its funding agenda and how projects are accounted for.  Those arrangements were, after all, aided by previous US presidents convinced that the Republic, to survive, must be doing permanent battle across the globe.

    The post Cutting the Ghost Budget: Elon Musk versus the Pentagon first appeared on Dissident Voice.


    This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/11/cutting-the-ghost-budget-elon-musk-versus-the-pentagon/feed/ 0 513308
    Senate confirms Project2025 author Vought as budget chief; Progressive Caucus calls for Musk removal from government meddling – February 7, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/07/senate-confirms-project2025-author-vought-as-budget-chief-progressive-caucus-calls-for-musk-removal-from-government-meddling-february-7-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/07/senate-confirms-project2025-author-vought-as-budget-chief-progressive-caucus-calls-for-musk-removal-from-government-meddling-february-7-2025/#respond Fri, 07 Feb 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fad7c1a194e6b02f931388844a645f5d Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

     

    The post Senate confirms Project2025 author Vought as budget chief; Progressive Caucus calls for Musk removal from government meddling – February 7, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


    This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/07/senate-confirms-project2025-author-vought-as-budget-chief-progressive-caucus-calls-for-musk-removal-from-government-meddling-february-7-2025/feed/ 0 512875
    As Constitutional Crises Mount, US Press Sleepwalks Into Autocracy https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/04/as-constitutional-crises-mount-us-press-sleepwalks-into-autocracy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/04/as-constitutional-crises-mount-us-press-sleepwalks-into-autocracy/#respond Tue, 04 Feb 2025 22:05:57 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9044060  

    CNN: How an arcane Treasury Department office became ground zero in the war over federal spending

    CNN (1/31/25) framed Elon Musk’s extra-constitutional power grab as part of “the war over federal spending.”

    When President Donald Trump announced an unprecedented freeze on federal grants and loans last week, some of the most prominent US news outlets proved themselves largely uninterested in whether it was legal. Meanwhile, a few braver journalists called out the move as the constitutional crisis that it was (FAIR.org, 1/29/25).

    When Democratic attorneys general rushed to challenge the move in court, with positive results, Trump rescinded the order. But the crisis is hardly over.

    On the contrary: Elon Musk, the unelected centibillionaire who threw Nazi salutes at the inauguration, has wrested control of the Treasury Department’s payment system, after forcing out its most senior career civil servant, David Lebryk. As CNN (1/31/25) reported, the Treasury takeover happened after Trump’s team had repeatedly asked about the department’s ability to stop payments, to which Lebryk had insisted, “We don’t do that.”

    These payments include everything from Social Security checks to tax refunds, federal employee salaries to contractor payments. It’s over $5 trillion a year, a fifth of the US economy. The database Musk and his tech bro allies in the non–congressionally approved “Department of Government Efficiency” (DOGE) have access to also contains enormous amounts of sensitive personal information for most Americans, including Social Security numbers. And Musk and a 25-year-old former X employee have access to the code that controls the payment systems, allowing them to make irreversible changes to it, according to Wired (2/4/25).

    At the same time, Musk has infiltrated the General Services Administration and the Office of Personnel Management—two other rather obscure and nonpolitical but hugely consequential agencies that manage federal offices, technology and employees (Wired, 1/28/25, 1/31/25).

    ‘An idea that crosses party lines’

    NYT: Beneath Trump’s Chaotic Spending Freeze: An Idea That Crosses Party Lines

    The New York Times (1/31/25) put its seal of approval on Trump’s illegal attempt to freeze federal spending, calling the idea behind it “bipartisan.”

    Instead of appropriately pushing the increasing lawlessness and opacity to the forefront of their reporting, the New York Times and Washington Post largely buried these stories, downplaying their earth-shattering break from democratic norms.

    As Musk took over the Treasury system, the Times (1/31/25) did point out:

    Control of the system could give Mr. Musk’s allies the ability to unilaterally cut off money intended for federal workers, bondholders and companies, and open a new front in the Trump administration’s efforts to halt federal payments.

    And yet somehow this story struck editors as page 13 material.

    Meanwhile, a piece (1/31/25) by the TimesMichael Shear published online the same day was deemed front-page material, causing even seasoned media critics to spit out their morning beverage at its breathtaking ability to bothsides the situation: “Beneath Trump’s Chaotic Spending Freeze: An Idea That Crosses Party Lines.”

    Shear wrote that Trump is simply “continuing a mostly failed effort by a long series of presidents and Congress” to “somehow reverse the seemingly inexorable growth of the federal government, an issue that resonates with some Democrats as well as most Republicans.” He thus clearly communicated that he is not up for the task of reporting on this administration.

    The Times published Musk’s Treasury takeover on page 18, under the rather nonchalant headline: “Elon Musk’s Team Now Has Access to Treasury’s Payments System.” The subhead read:

    Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent gave Mr. Musk’s representatives at the so-called Department of Government Efficiency a powerful tool to monitor and potentially limit government spending.

    And hey, don’t worry, the article suggests:

    Mr. Musk’s initiative is intended to be part of a broader review of the payments system to allow improper payments to be scrutinized, and is not an effort to arbitrarily block individual payments, the people familiar with the matter said.

    At the Post, readers got language like, “The clash reflects an intensifying battle between Musk and the federal bureaucracy” (1/31/25), and “it is extremely unusual for anyone connected to political appointees to access” the payment systems (2/1/25). (In fact, it appears to be unprecedented—Independent, 2/3/25.)

    ‘Reminiscent of Stalin’

    Wired: Elon Musk’s Friends Have Infiltrated Another Government Agency

    Wired (1/31/25): Musk’s team is “attempting to use White House security credentials to gain unusual access to GSA tech, deploying a suite of new AI software, and recreating the office in X’s image.”

    There is another way to do journalism. It’s called connecting dots, asking questions, not accepting anonymous claims of benevolent intent—and helping people understand the gravity of the situation when unprecedented end-runs around democracy are happening before our very eyes. And it’s heartening to see quite a few news outlets engaging in it.

    For instance, Wired has been doing a tenacious job following Musk’s assault on the government, connecting the dots between his actions and explaining the dangers to the country. It broke the news (1/28/25) that Musk workers from his various companies had taken over management positions at the Office of Personnel Management—well before Trump’s nominee to take over the OPM has even had a confirmation hearing. Its subhead noted: “One expert found the takeover reminiscent of Stalin.”

    Wired explained that the installation of AI experts at OPM suggests a forthcoming effort to use AI on the reams of data it has access to in order to target federal employees for removal.

    Regarding the GSA infiltration, Wired reported (1/31/25):

    The access could give Musk’s proxies the ability to remote into laptops, listen in on meetings, read emails, among many other things, a former Biden official told Wired on Friday.

    “Granting DOGE staff, many of whom aren’t government employees, unfettered access to internal government systems and sensitive data poses a huge security risk to the federal government and to the American public,” the Biden official said. “Not only will DOGE be able to review procurement-sensitive information about major government contracts, it’ll also be able to actively surveil government employees.”

    Wired again put that danger (“the potential [for Musk minions] to remote into laptops, read emails, and more”) into its subhead—unlike the Times‘ muted headlines.

    ‘Incredibly dangerous’

    Rolling Stone: Elon Musk’s Attempt to Control the Treasury Payment System Is Incredibly Dangerous

    Rolling Stone (2/3/25) pointed out that “the danger of operational access to the payments system is precisely that there are very little safeguards for its improper use or manipulation.”

    Others are also raising alarms in their headlines, as at Rolling Stone (2/3/25): “Elon Musk’s Attempt to Control the Treasury Payment System Is Incredibly Dangerous.” The subhead explained: “Trump and Musk could use sensitive Treasury information to punish their enemies. Worse yet, they could break America’s payment system entirely.”

    The piece, by Nathan Tankus, pointed out that there are glaring reasons to disbelieve administration claims about this being about “improper payments,” such as:

    At 3:14 a.m. Sunday, Musk pledged to shut down supposedly “illegal payments” to Global Refuge, a faith-based organization that exists to provide “safety and support to refugees, asylum seekers and immigrants from across the world.”

    Tankus also points out what the Post and Times won’t, which is that the seizure of the payment system means Trump and Musk

    can just impound agency payments themselves. They could also possibly stop paying federal employees they have forced on paid administrative leave, coercing them to resign.

    Even in bigger media, some critical voices could be heard. CNN‘s Zachary Wolf (2/1/25) asked some appropriate journalistic questions: “Has [Musk] taken an oath, like the federal workers he apparently has plans to fire, to uphold the Constitution?…. What are Musk’s conflicts of interests?”

    Accessories to the coup

    WaPo: Trump preps order to dismantle Education Dept. as DOGE probes data

    The Washington Post (2/4/25) assures readers that “the Education Department was created by Congress, and only Congress can eliminate it.”

    The Washington Post put news about Musk’s takeovers on the front page today (2/4/25), as it reported on Trump preparing an executive order to dismantle the Department of Education, which Musk has apparently also infiltrated. But it still managed to sound rather sanguine about the threat: “The expected executive order would not shut down the agency, as there is widespread agreement in both parties that doing so would require congressional action.” Despite reporting daily on actions Trump and Musk have taken that have usurped congressional authority, the paper still seems to believe—and want readers to believe—against all evidence that our Constitution’s constraints on executive power continue to hold.

    And the New York Times finally published an article (2/3/25) taking a deeper look “Inside Musk’s Aggressive Incursion Into the Federal Government,” as the headline stated. Still, it seemed to find it difficult to use language in its early framing paragraphs any stronger than to say that Musk’s actions “have challenged congressional authority and potentially breached civil service protections,” as it explains in the third paragraph. These moves are “creating major upheaval,” the fifth paragraph allowed, and the sixth said it “represented an extraordinary flexing of power by a private individual.”

    The piece was not published in the print newspaper the next day; FAIR has yet to see it rise to the top of the paper’s homepage.

    As Musk and Trump continue to behave like kings, it’s incumbent upon news media to not just report on their actions, but put them in the proper context for the public to understand the threat level they represent; otherwise, we can’t respond appropriately.

    That kind of reporting takes real bravery in the kind of moment we are in: Musk has already (falsely) called it a crime to reveal the names of those working for him at the agencies DOGE is targeting, which Wired and others have done. The Trump-installed DC attorney general has obsequiously promised Musk to go after those who identify his underlings—and to prosecute “anyone who impedes your work or threatens your people” (New Republic, 2/3/25).

    While that might sound laughable, media outlets have already paid Trump handsome settlements to settle lawsuits that should have been seen as similarly laughable (FAIR.org, 12/16/24; PBS, 1/29/25; New York Times, 1/30/25). When prominent news outlets won’t summon the courage to vigorously oppose this descent into autocracy, they are accessories to the coup. We must demand better from them, and support the outlets and journalists doing the critical work we as citizens require to defend our democracy.


    ACTION: Tell the New York Times and Washington Post to treat Musk’s actions like the existential threat to democracy that they are.

    CONTACT:

    New York Times
    Letters: letters@nytimes.com
    Bluesky: @NYTimes.com

    Washington Post
    Letters: letters@washpost.com,
    Bluesky: @washingtonpost.com

    Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your message in the comments thread here.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Julie Hollar.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/02/04/as-constitutional-crises-mount-us-press-sleepwalks-into-autocracy/feed/ 0 512438
    ACTION ALERT: When Trump Tried to Freeze Federal Funds, WaPo Saw Not Illegality But ‘Determination’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/01/29/action-alert-when-trump-tried-to-freeze-federal-funds-wapo-saw-not-illegality-but-determination/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/01/29/action-alert-when-trump-tried-to-freeze-federal-funds-wapo-saw-not-illegality-but-determination/#respond Wed, 29 Jan 2025 20:49:11 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9043971  

    New York: Trump’s Blatantly Illegal Funding Freeze Causes Nationwide Chaos

    New York‘s headline (1/28/25) was accurate—but was it “riveting storytelling”?

    When President Donald Trump ordered an unprecedented freeze on all federal grants and loans, a few news outlets responded with at least some degree of appropriate alarm and scrutiny.

    “Trump’s Massive Power Grab,” read the headline for Politico‘s Playbook newsletter (1/28/25). “Trump’s Blatantly Illegal Funding Freeze Causes Nationwide Chaos,” announced the headline over a column by New York magazine’s Ed Kilgore (1/28/25).

    The order, both sweeping and confusingly worded, called for a halt to disbursement of federal funds that Congress has already authorized. The memo required all such funding to be reviewed to make sure it aligns with Trump’s “policies and requirements,” including his barrage of executive orders. (After a federal judge temporarily blocked the order, the White House rescinded it.)

    The memo specifically highlighted “financial assistance for foreign aid, nongovernmental organizations, DEI, woke gender ideology and the green new deal.” But no funding was excluded from the freeze, aside from Social Security, Medicare and “assistance directly received by individuals.”

    As the New York Times (1/27/25) pointed out, this would appear to include “hundreds of billions of dollars in grants to state, local and tribal governments. Disaster relief aid. Education and transportation funding. Loans to small businesses.” Medicaid, which is distributed through the states, also seemed to be frozen.

    Politico described “the first big question” as being: “Is this legal?” The answer provided by most legal scholars appeared to be, “hell, no.”

    Unfortunately, that wasn’t the information offered by some in corporate media—with the multibillionaire-owned Washington Post among the worst offenders.

    ‘Democrats contend’

    NYT: White House Budget Office Orders Pause in All Federal Loans and Grants

    The New York Times (1/27/25) offered its readers agnosticism: “It is uncertain whether President Trump has the authority to unilaterally halt funds allocated by Congress.

    As competent and useful reporting explained, Trump has long declared his interest in impoundment, or the executive’s ability to cancel funding that Congress has approved. It’s something presidents had done on occasion in the past, but Richard Nixon took it to an extreme, attempting to cancel billions in federal spending. Congress responded by passing the Impoundment Control Act in 1974, which requires congressional permission for presidents to impound funds (Forbes, 1/28/25).

    In other words, there’s been a clear law on the books for over 50 years that expressly prohibits what Trump was attempting here. It should have been an easy call for journalists, then, to answer Politico‘s basic and central question. Some failed this basic task.

    The New York Times report (1/27/25), while raising the question of the move’s legality in paragraph four, didn’t even attempt to answer it, only offering  a quote from Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer, who argued, “Congress approved these investments and they are not optional; they are the law.“ The article gave readers no other information by which to judge “whether President Trump has the authority to unilaterally halt funds allocated by Congress.”

    In its follow-up on the state-led lawsuit to challenge the funding freeze, the Times (1/28/25) briefly described the Impoundment Control Act, but then wrote that “Democrats contend” that Trump can’t unilaterally block funds that have already been approved, as if it were simply a partisan claim whether the law just described exists.

    At Axios, co-founder Mike Allen’s brief report (1/28/25) didn’t even address legality, taking the “Why it matters” of Trump’s memo to be that it

    will provide the administration with time to review agency programs and determine the best uses of funding for those programs consistent with the law and Trump’s priorities.

    ‘Generally allowed under the law’

    WaPo: White House pauses all federal grants, sparking confusion

    The Washington Post‘s first takeaway (1/28/25): “The feared disruption highlighted the extent of the new Trump administration’s determination to target long-standing functions of the federal government.”

    But the Washington Post took craven reporting to another level. In its report on the directive (1/28/25), by reporters Jeff Stein, Jacob Bogage and Emily Davies, the Post‘s headline and lead focused on the “confusion” in Washington. After describing the order and what it appeared to target, the reporters’ first attempt to make meaning of the order came in the eighth paragraph: “The feared disruption highlighted the extent of the new Trump administration’s determination to target long-standing functions of the federal government.”

    The president tried to usurp Congress’s power of the purse by fiat, and the Beltway paper’s biggest takeaway was that it “highlights” the Trump administration’s “determination”—not to shred US democracy, but to “target long-standing functions of the federal government.”

    But it gets worse. It took another eight paragraphs (that’s the 16th paragraph, if you’re counting) to find the Post‘s first mention of Politico‘s No. 1 question—is this legal? That came in the same Schumer quote the Times used, about how these expenditures “are not optional; they are the law.”

    And the Post quickly cast doubt on that idea:

    The order’s legality may be contested, but the president is generally allowed under the law to defer spending for a period of time if certain conditions are met, according to budget experts.

    The article went on to note that the order “may not have given sufficient grounds under the law to pause the funding,” and that a “left-leaning” expert says that “pausing it over policy disagreements is not legal.” Meanwhile an expert from a “bipartisan” group was offered to argue that Trump “should be legally able to pause the money temporarily,” even if there might be some formal hoops to jump through to extend it.

    In other words, the Post‘s framing of the story gave the impression that the memo was “confusing,” but probably mostly legal.

    This comes shortly after the announcement of the Post‘s new mission statement, “Riveting Storytelling for All of America,” which owner Jeff Bezos hopes will expand the Post‘s conservative audience (FAIR.org, 1/22/25). As for holding the powerful to account? Well, you might want to look to a media outlet not owned by a toadying oligarch.


    ACTION: Please tell the Washington Post not to downplay illegal actions when they are committed by a president its owner is trying to curry favor with.

    CONTACT: You can send a message to the Washington Post at letters@washpost.com, or via Bluesky @washingtonpost.com

    Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your message in the comments thread here.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Julie Hollar.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/01/29/action-alert-when-trump-tried-to-freeze-federal-funds-wapo-saw-not-illegality-but-determination/feed/ 0 511524
    Facebookers fined for mocking wealthy founder of budget Vietnamese airline https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/01/24/vietnam-facebook-fines-vietjet-ceo/ https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/01/24/vietnam-facebook-fines-vietjet-ceo/#respond Fri, 24 Jan 2025 21:27:26 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/01/24/vietnam-facebook-fines-vietjet-ceo/ Read RFA coverage of this story in Vietnamese.

    Two Hanoi Facebook users have been fined and ordered to delete satirical content they posted online about Nguyen Thi Phuong Thao, founder and former chief executive officer of VietJet Air, according to the capital city’s government and state media.

    VietJet Air, a low-cost airline headquartered in Hanoi, was the first privately owned carrier to be established in Vietnam, a socialist republic governed by the Communist Party.

    Often dubbed the “bikini airline,” VietJet is known for its ads featuring models in bikinis to promote resort destinations.

    On Jan. 20, Hanoi’s Department of Information and Communications announced on its website that its Inspection Division had imposed administrative fines on two individuals identified by the initials N.Q.D. and N.T.N.

    Bao Dien tu Chinh phu, the online newspaper of the government of Vietnam. republished the news and included screenshots of the offending posts, which appeared on the Facebook accounts of Nga Nguyen and Dzung Art Nguyen. Both posts contained similar content.

    The posts describe a character named “Chi Thao” — an apparent reference to VietJet Air’s founder — ordering a bowl of noodles in Ho Chi Minh City.

    Though the dish costs only 10,000 dong, or 40 U.S. cents, the diner must pay for many extras, including chopsticks, a spoon and a window seat, mimicking the additional fees the airline imposes on passengers.

    The diner also faces long waits for service and has difficulty contacting the restaurant owner, a parody of the delayed flights and customer service issues often associated with VietJet.

    The author of the “Chi Thao” story remains unknown, but the post went viral on Facebook in Vietnam at the beginning of January. However, many versions of the story have since disappeared from the platform.

    Freedom of expression

    The two individuals were fined for “providing fabricated and false information, insulting honor, reputation, dignity, or harming the legitimate rights and interests of other agencies, organizations, and individuals” under Article 16 of Vietnam’s cybersecurity law.

    Human rights groups have criticized the law for restricting freedoms of expression, privacy and information, especially pointing to Article 16’s overly broad definition of what constitutes propaganda against the state.

    Hanoi’s Department of Information and Communications did not disclose the amount of the fines or confirm that the individual offended by the post was Nguyen Thi Phuong Thao, the 54-year-old self-made billionaire who established VietJet.

    Thao took the company public in 2017 and currently serves as chairwoman of the airline’s board of directors.

    The department said its decision was in line with related decrees stipulating that violators can be fined 5 million-10 million dong (US$200-400) and must remove offending content.

    RELATED STORIES

    Vietnamese man fined for social media comments on new hefty traffic fines

    Vietnamese Facebookers face prosecution for posts

    Vietnam’s new internet rules bad for free speech, business: users

    Vietnam tightens controls on social media users

    When Radio Free Asia contacted Facebook user Dzung Art Nguyen, whose name and profile photo matched those reported by state media, he confirmed posting the content but said he deleted it about an hour later.

    He also claimed that someone had created a fake account to repost the content after it was removed. Nguyen denied being summoned or fined by authorities.

    RFA was unable to reach Facebook user Nga Nguyen for verification, and calls to Hanoi’s Department of Information and Communications went unanswered.

    VietJet Air did not respond to a request for comment.

    Black humor suppressed

    Journalist Nam Viet from Ho Chi Minh City suggested that such punishments stem from the fact that business leaders and officials, accustomed to living a life of luxury, cannot tolerate mockery aimed at them.

    “Looking back at the history of communist regimes in Eastern Europe and Asia, you can see that caricatures and jokes targeting specific sitting officials were among the first forms of art to be eliminated,” he said in a text message to RFA. “And even political jokes, also known as black humor, were always [suppressed].”

    Nam Viet cited the 1984 arrest and imprisonment of novelist Doan Quoc Sy as an example. Sy, whose writings had been banned by the communist government, was detained for gathering and documenting humorous anecdotes from the Vietnam War. These stories highlighted moments when North Vietnamese soldiers were astonished by the wealth they saw in the South — encounters that directly contradicted the communist regime’s propaganda.

    Translated by Anna Vu for RFA Vietnamese. Edited by Roseanne Gerin and Malcolm Foster.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by RFA Vietnamese.

    ]]>
    https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/01/24/vietnam-facebook-fines-vietjet-ceo/feed/ 0 511141
    Taiwan’s record budget cuts raise concerns over defense readiness https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/01/22/china-taiwan-budget-cut-defense/ https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/01/22/china-taiwan-budget-cut-defense/#respond Wed, 22 Jan 2025 09:54:08 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/01/22/china-taiwan-budget-cut-defense/ TAIPEI, Taiwan – Taiwan’s opposition parties, which control the legislature, have forced through a 6.6% cut in the 2025 budget, which the ruling Democratic Progressive Party, or DPP, described as a “hostile” attempt that poses an “unprecedented” security risk.

    The island’s Legislative Yuan approved the 2025 central government general budget on Tuesday, which saw a record cut of approximately $207.5 billion New Taiwan dollars (US$6.34 billion) forced by the opposition Kuomintang and Taiwan People’s Party.

    The affected items include Taiwan’s defense and diplomatic budgets, with half of the proposed NT$2 billion (US$66.67 million) funding for an indigenous defense submarine, or IDS, program being frozen on Monday.

    The freeze prevents Taiwan’s navy from accessing the NT$1 billion until the IDS prototype, the Narwhal, completes its sea acceptance tests and the Ministry of National Defense briefs lawmakers.

    The IDS program, which produces the island’s first self-made submarine, the ROCN Hai Kun submarine, also known as SS-711, is intended to develop the capacity to intercept Chinese People’s Liberation Army Navy fleets from entering the Pacific Ocean, preventing the encirclement or blockade of waters around Taiwan or breaking through blockades.

    The submarine is undergoing testing.

    A bottle is broken against the hull of Narwhal, Taiwan's first domestically built submarine in Kaohsiung, Taiwan, Sept. 28, 2023.
    A bottle is broken against the hull of Narwhal, Taiwan's first domestically built submarine in Kaohsiung, Taiwan, Sept. 28, 2023.
    (Carlos Garcia Rawlins/Reuters)

    “This is a budget review that hurts our allies and pleases our adversaries. The nation’s interests are being undermined, our competing nations are catching up, and hostile China will be very satisfied,” said Executive Yuan Premier Cho Jung-tai, who is a member of the DPP.

    A Kuomintang legislator, Hsu Chiao-Hsin, insists that the remaining budget will only be released after the first submarine passes its sea test but Deputy Defense Minister Po Hung-hui said that would negatively affect the program.

    “The decision has greatly discouraged colleagues who have worked tirelessly on the submarine program for years,” Po told a press conference on Tuesday.

    Some analysts, on the other hand, say overseeing the budget is “justified” on some conditions.

    “The submarine is still a prototype with significant room for improvement. The concern now is that it has yet to undergo sea trials,” Shu Hsiao-Huang, an associate research fellow at the Institute for National Defense and Security Research, told Radio Free Asia.

    “If the trials reveal numerous issues that require adjustments or system updates, there are doubts about whether this design can be applied to the second and subsequent mass-production vessels. And there are uncertainties about potential changes in shipbuilding costs.”

    He added that although it was reasonable for legislators to oversee budget outlays, the ruling and opposition parties should not treat it as a tool for political purposes.

    “Hopefully, this will not devolve into political infighting, which could lead to flawed policies and turn into a political battleground,” Shu said.

    RELATED STORIES

    China to resume Taiwan tour groups amid blame game

    China’s special-purpose barges could overrun Taiwan shores: experts

    China’s United Front takes Taiwanese youth on Xinjiang trips

    Cooperation with US

    Taiwan is expected to conclude a major arms purchase agreement with the new U.S. administration of President Donald Trump, with media reporting in November that Taiwan had already approached Trump’s team regarding a possible US$15 billion weapons package.

    Nevertheless, Shu said that issues such as delayed deliveries of U.S. arms also complicated Taiwan’s use of its defense budget.

    The Washington-based Cato Institute said in a September report that as of August 2024, the total value of undelivered U.S. arms to Taiwan had reached US$20.53 billion.

    “Taiwan’s overall military procurement contract with the U.S. is fine,” Shu said. “The only issue that could disrupt the budget use is the delayed weapons,” he said, adding that inflation also complicated the process.

    “The procurement details such as personnel training, follow-up equipment support, additional ammunition and spare parts can also lead to any adjustment of the budget,” he added.

    Edited by Taejun Kang.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Alan Lu for RFA.

    ]]>
    https://rfa.org/english/china/2025/01/22/china-taiwan-budget-cut-defense/feed/ 0 510604
    New Caledonia political crisis costs one third of multi-million French package https://www.radiofree.org/2025/01/01/new-caledonia-political-crisis-costs-one-third-of-multi-million-french-package/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/01/01/new-caledonia-political-crisis-costs-one-third-of-multi-million-french-package/#respond Wed, 01 Jan 2025 23:01:26 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=108848 By Patrick Decloitre, RNZ Pacific correspondent French Pacific desk

    An emergency 231 million euro (NZ$428 million) French aid package for New Caledonia has been reduced by one third because of the French Pacific territory’s current political crisis.

    The initial French package was endorsed in early December 2024, in an 11th-hour vote at the French National Assembly, minutes before French Prime Minister Michel Barnier and his government fell in a motion of no confidence.

    The “end of management 2024” bill amounted to 231 million euros, specifically to allow New Caledonia’s essential public services to keep operating in the next few weeks.

    But the financial package was pre-conditioned to New Caledonia’s Congress endorsing reforms before the end of the year.

    Out of the three tranches of the total aid, the Congress managed, during its December 23, 2024, sitting, to endorse two.

    Then, on Christmas Eve, New Caledonia’s government fell, due to a resignation by one of its members, Calédonie Ensemble.

    Domino effect
    Since the government led by Louis Mapou was toppled on Christmas Eve, pro-independence MPs at the Congress refused to take part in further votes.

    They did not turn up on the Boxing Day sitting on Thursday, December 26.

    This made it impossible for Congress to endorse the third and last tranche of the reforms, which were a precondition to the last third of the French aid package.

    Outgoing New Caledonia President Louis Mapou
    Outgoing New Caledonia President Louis Mapou . . . tensions have come to a head between the territory’s Congress and government since the deadly pro-independence riots began in May. Image: New Caledonia govt/RNZ Pacific

    Letter from Bayrou and Valls
    In a letter received by New Caledonia’s MPs at the weekend, both new French Prime Minister François Bayrou and his new Minister for Overseas Manuel Valls explained the failure for New Caledonia’s Congress to endorse the last third of the demanded reform package.

    It means the whole package of 231 million euros will not be paid in full, and that one third of the total will have to wait until this year.

    French Prime Minister Manuel Valls.
    French Minister for Overseas Manuel Valls . . . letter of explanation. Image: RNZ Pacific

    The confirmed amount, for the time being, is now 154 million euros (NZ$285 million) which will go towards New Caledonia’s Provinces and municipalities (125 million euros — NZ$231 million).

    The remaining 29 million euros (NZ$54 million) will be paid and used for the payment of New Caledonia’s unemployment benefits and to allow the French Pacific territory’s power company, ENERCAL, which is on the brink of collapse without immediate assistance.

    77 million euros withheld
    “The last third of the initial 231 million euros package for New Caledonia (77 million euros [NZ$143 million]) will be released in 2025, once the pre-condition as stipulated in the initial agreement, regarding a reform of the TGC (General Consumption Tax, a local equivalent of a VAT) is adopted by (New Caledonia’s) Congress. Failing that, it will not,” Bayrou and Valls explained in the same letter.

    They further wrote that those reforms were “indispensable” to ensure “visibility and stability” for New Caledonia’s “economic stakeholders and more generally to all of New Caledonians at a time when a dialogue is supposed to take place on its institutional future.”

    The bloc resignation from Calédonie Ensemble entails that the whole government of New Caledonia is deemed to have resigned and acts in a caretaker mode until the inception of a new government.

    New Caledonia’s Congress has been convened for a special sitting next week on 7 January 2025 to elect a new government, under the principle of proportional representation and a spirit of “collegiality”.

    One particular point of contention was Mapou’s efforts to secure a loan of up to 1 billion euros from France, under a ‘PS2R’ (reconstruction, refoundation and salvage) plan to rebuild New Caledonia after the riots’ damage (estimated at some 2.2 billion euros) and the subsequent thousands of job losses.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2025/01/01/new-caledonia-political-crisis-costs-one-third-of-multi-million-french-package/feed/ 0 508138
    Taiwan defense ministry warns of deep cut in 2025 budget https://rfa.org/english/china/2024/12/26/taiwan-defense-budget/ https://rfa.org/english/china/2024/12/26/taiwan-defense-budget/#respond Thu, 26 Dec 2024 04:41:56 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/china/2024/12/26/taiwan-defense-budget/ Taiwan’s ministry of national defense is warning a potential cut in the island’s defense budget for 2025 would have grave consequences.

    Recently passed amendments to a fiscal planning law could reduce the defense budget by 28%, or NT$80 billion (US$2.44 billion), which would “have a serious impact on the national military’s buildup and preparedness,” the ministry said in a statement issued late Wednesday.

    Last week, Taiwan’s opposition parties, which hold a majority in parliament, passed the amended Act Governing the Allocation of Government Revenues and Expenditures that if implemented would see a NT$375.3 billion (US$11.47 billion) reduction in the central government’s overall budget.

    The current defense budget is approximately 2.4% of Taiwan’s gross domestic product, or GDP, but it would shrink to less than 2% after the cut, “at a time when every country in the region is increasing its defense spending,” said the ministry.

    Previously, the Taiwanese government proposed a record high military budget that accounted for approximately 2.5% of the GDP for 2025 but that increase now seems unlikely.

    “It may create a negative image in the international community that we … lack the determination to defend ourselves,” the ministry said.

    The national defense budget should be decided in accordance with “the threats posed by the enemy and the need to build up the military and prepare for war,” it said.

    RELATED STORIES

    Taiwan gets first batch of ‘world’s most advanced’ tanks from US

    China mobilizes ‘staggering’ naval presence in Taiwan Strait: Taipei

    China denounces US arms sales to Taiwan, President Lai’s visit

    China has been ramping up military activities around Taiwan, which it considers a Chinese province that should be “reunified” with the mainland, by force if necessary.

    An analyst said that in the face of constant cross-Strait threats, Taiwan needs to increase its defense budget, as well as social and economic resilience.

    “We need to demonstrate that we’re willing to fight,” said Kuan-chen Lee, associate research fellow at the Institute for National Defense and Security Research, a government think tank.

    “Taiwan must improve military capabilities and make war more costly for China,” Lee told Radio Free Asia.

    The budget cut would “make it impossible to continuously upgrade major weapons and equipment, and it would be difficult to make payments for contracted purchases,” warned the defense ministry.

    C-130 fleet upgrade

    On Wednesday, the Taiwanese Defense Mission to the United States issued a public notice to invite tenders to upgrade its existing C-130 military transport aircraft for an estimated NT$126 million (US$3.85 million).

    The money will be allocated to purchase new propellers, according to the procurement notice.

    A Taiwan C-130 military transport aircraft at Songshan airport, Taipei, Sept. 28, 2023.
    A Taiwan C-130 military transport aircraft at Songshan airport, Taipei, Sept. 28, 2023.
    (RFA)

    The acquisition is part of a six-year overhaul project, called Taiwu Mountain III, to be carried out between 2025-2030 and expected to cost NT$10 billion (US$ 305.86 million).

    Taiwan’s air force has a fleet of 20 U.S.-made C-130s bought in the 1980s that serve as the main transport aircraft for the armed forces.

    The upgrade would ensure that the aircraft have integrated cockpits and improved sea rescue capabilities.

    Edited by Mike Firn.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by RFA Staff.

    ]]>
    https://rfa.org/english/china/2024/12/26/taiwan-defense-budget/feed/ 0 507513
    To Be a Media Expert on Economics, It Helps to Have the Right Politics https://www.radiofree.org/2024/10/18/to-be-a-media-expert-on-economics-it-helps-to-have-the-right-politics/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/10/18/to-be-a-media-expert-on-economics-it-helps-to-have-the-right-politics/#respond Fri, 18 Oct 2024 21:47:49 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9042621  

    “Practical men who believe themselves to be quite exempt from any intellectual influence, are usually the slaves of some defunct economist.” John Maynard Keynes made this observation in 1936, in his masterwork The General Theory. Nearly a century later, readers and viewers of corporate media face the same fate.

    The fundamental problem confronted by these news consumers is not that corporate news outlets consult economists in their reporting; as experts in their field, economists often have important and worthwhile contributions to make. The problem is that these outlets consistently elevate the views of specific economists who serve particular ideological interests over the views of other economists, or even the academic profession as a whole.

    The austerity gospel

    LRB: The Austerity Con

    Simon Wren-Lewis (LRB, 2/19/15): “‘Mediamacro’…prefers simple stories to more complex analysis. As part of this, it is fond of analogies between governments and individuals, even when those analogies are generally seen to be false by macroeconomists.”

    Consider the case of the 2008 financial crisis and the austerity mania that followed. The British economist Simon Wren-Lewis (London Review of Books, 2/9/15) has documented how media depictions of austerity diverged sharply from professional economists’ understandings and textbooks’ explanations of macroeconomics. His term for the media’s unique understanding of macroeconomics is “mediamacro,” which is characterized by an obsession with cutting the deficit over and above all other concerns.

    In the wake of the banking crisis that followed the collapse of the housing bubble in 2007-08, and then the onset of the Eurozone crisis in 2010, standard textbook macroeconomics dictated a runup in the deficit to stimulate the economy out of a downturn. Corporate media, however, bought the arguments of political conservatives and a fringe of academic economists (who nonetheless held positions at prestigious universities), who maintained that austerity, specifically through spending cuts, could return the economy to health.

    In the most notorious instance, corporate media outlets opportunistically promoted the findings of a 2010 paper, written by two Harvard economists, that were later famously invalidated due to an Excel error. As Paul Krugman noted in 2013 (New York Times, 4/19/13), this paper was controversial among economists from the start, but this did not stop corporate media from citing it—and its flimsy assertion that there existed a tipping-point for government debt at 90% of GDP, beyond which this debt supposedly imposed a major drag on economic growth—as gospel:

    For example, a Washington Post editorial earlier this year warned against any relaxation on the deficit front, because we are “dangerously near the 90% mark that economists regard as a threat to sustainable economic growth.” Notice the phrasing: “economists,” not “some economists,” let alone “some economists, vigorously disputed by other economists with equally good credentials,” which was the reality.

    The view from finance

    Media Focus on Debt and Deficit in the US

    As Mark Copelovitch (SSRN, 10/27/17) has noted, “The single most important factor [in elevating falsehoods about austerity] has been the media’s willingness to embrace and promote these narratives, while largely ignoring the overwhelming empirical and historical evidence that austerity is deeply contractionary and counter-productive.”

    In another instance recounted by Wren-Lewis (LRB, 2/9/15), after the return of some growth in 2013 in Britain following the election of a Conservative government committed to austerity in 2010, the Financial Times editorial board (9/10/13) declared the Conservatives victorious in their political argument for austerity. This despite the fact that “less than 20% of academic economists surveyed by the Financial Times thought that the recovery of 2013 vindicated austerity.”

    Such false right-wing narratives about macroeconomic policy came to dominate media discourse, not merely because political elites adopted these false narratives and thus made them newsworthy, but because corporate media outlets were compliant messengers for elite views and prescriptions.

    Why does the media adopt “mediamacro” as its approach to coverage of the economy? One reason proposed by Wren-Lewis (LRB, 2/9/15) is the influence of City of London (or, in the US case, Wall Street) economists, whose

    views tend to reflect the economic arguments of those on the right: Regulation is bad, top rates of tax should be low, the state is too large, and budget deficits are a serious and immediate concern.

    Moreover, the political leanings of corporate media outlets, whether or not they are made explicit, may encourage them to seek the expertise of economists of a particular ideological bent. These economists’ views may, in turn, be out of step with the academic mainstream on topics like austerity.

    The inflation oracle

    The corporate media’s tendency to elevate economists of a specific type hasn’t disappeared in the 2020s. With the onset of Covid and the spike in inflation that followed, media broke out their familiar playbook of consulting prominent economists with extreme, and business-friendly, positions.

    The infamous example was the elevation of Larry Summers, who slammed Biden’s 2021 stimulus as “the least responsible macroeconomic policy we’ve had in the last 40 years” and warned stridently of inflation (Washington Post, 5/24/21). When inflation rose to a high of just over 9% the next year, Summers was hailed by the media as “an oracle: the man who saw it all coming,” as Jacobin editor Seth Ackerman (2/13/23) sarcastically put it.

    In one sense, it was true that Summers had seen inflation as a strong possibility, and he did deserve some credit for that. Other economists, notably Paul Krugman, had downplayed the possibility of a jump in inflation and had to eat their words (New York Times, 7/21/22). But the fact that Summers had gotten this one point right, after an illustrious career of getting things wrong, did not exactly justify his skyrocketing status as the go-to voice on inflation, or the heaps of at times fawning media coverage thrown his way (Wall Street Journal, 6/27/22; Fortune, 9/23/22).

    Cable TV Mentions of Larry Summers Far Outstripped Mentions of Paul Krugman From 2021-23

    Did it justify, for example, Summers garnering six times as many mentions as Krugman on top cable news channels from 2021 through 2023? A Nobel laureate and widely respected commentator, Krugman also happened to be the most prominent proponent of a more dovish, less austere approach to inflation. Though he failed to foresee the initial rise in inflation, Krugman accurately predicted, in contrast to Summers, that the US economy could achieve a “soft landing,” a fall in inflation without a substantial rise in the unemployment rate (New York Times, 5/18/23).

    Meanwhile, Summers capitalized on his new status as economic prophet to insist that extreme pain was required to tame inflation. By mid-2022, he confidently proclaimed (Bloomberg, 6/20/22):

    We need five years of unemployment above 5% to contain inflation—in other words, we need two years of 7.5% unemployment or five years of 6% unemployment or one year of 10% unemployment.

    Cherry-picking expertise

    Like the views of extreme austerity advocates in the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, Summers’ views in 2022 were acutely out of sync with the mainstream among academic economists, as becomes apparent from surveys of professional economists taken over the course of the inflationary outbreak.

    What do you think will be the peak level of unemployment in the next recession?

    Financial Times/Booth survey of macroeconomists (9/13/22)

    One FT/Booth survey taken in the fall of 2022 is particularly informative. It found that most economists thought that the Federal Reserve was on track to contain inflation with its pace of interest rate hikes. Specifically, when asked to react to the statement “Futures markets now suggest the Fed will raise the federal funds rate to about 3.9% by the end of 2022,” only 36% of economists classified the Fed’s actions as “too little too late and insufficient to help keep inflation under control.” The rest either thought that this policy path was sufficient to contain inflation (55%) or thought that it was overkill (9%).

    When asked about the toll Fed policy would take on the labor market, academic economists took a moderate stance. Most agreed that the unemployment rate would peak below 6% and that a recession would last for less than a year. Incidentally, only a small minority of economists seem to have foreseen the possibility of inflation returning to target without a recession and with unemployment rising no higher than 4.3%, which is what in fact has occurred. But notwithstanding their apparent excess of pessimism, economists generally agreed that inflation would come under control with nowhere near the punishment Summers was prescribing.

    To be fair, these economists were not asked directly what would be sufficient to contain inflation, and if asked directly, it is likely that some segment would have been in Summers’ camp—after all, about a third of the economists surveyed thought that the Fed was doing “too little too late.” But those backing Summers’ full diagnosis would be a fraction of those taking this minority view. So the central point that Summers was in the minority, and likely in quite a small minority, among professional economists is undoubtedly true.

    Yet with his quasi-divine status granted by corporate media, Summers could pontificate freely about the need for mass suffering without fear of marginalization for lack of evidence or credibility. So when he prescribed 5% unemployment for five years, all that an outlet like Bloomberg (6/20/22) did was report on his views, no skepticism necessary. And no warning label stating: This is completely out of step with the academic mainstream. In effect, corporate media decided to once again cherry-pick expertise to legitimize austerity policies.

    ‘Not sensible policy’

    Boston Globe: Harris’s fight against price gouging is good economics

    James K. Galbraith and Isabella Weber (Boston Globe, 8/22/24) : “Americans still have some common sense…. It shows that all of the efforts of free-market economists to beat it out of them have not yet worked.

    At the same time, alternatives to the dominant austerity paradigm have been treated with caution, if not outright hostility. The New York Times (8/15/24), for example, in a recent piece on Kamala Harris’s advocacy for anti-price-gouging legislation, did consult Isabella Weber, a progressive economist who has become well known for her work on profit-driven inflation. But her testimony was overshadowed in the piece by that of economists with more conservative takes on the issue.

    Most notably, the Times relied heavily on the insights of Harvard economist Jason Furman, who helped lead the push for extreme austerity alongside Summers (Wall Street Journal, 9/7/22). His first quote in the article had a simple Econ 101 message: “Egg prices went up last year—it’s because there weren’t as many eggs, and it caused more egg production.” In other words, egg prices went up because of supply issues, and it’s good that prices went up because that spurred more egg production.

    Unfortunately, this story doesn’t fit with the facts. Responding to this Furman quote, Weber and James Galbraith observed in a separate article (Boston Globe, 8/22/24):

    In fact, US egg production peaked in 2019 and then fell slightly, through last year. Egg prices spiked from early 2022 to $4.82 a dozen on average in January 2023, before falling back again, with no gain in production. High prices did not stimulate America’s hens to greater effort. On these points, Furman laid an egg.

    It might be assumed that the Times would engage in this sort of basic factchecking of its sources, and not leave it to two progressive economists writing in the Boston Globe to do that for them. But when the source is a Harvard economist who not too long ago was suggesting (wildly incorrectly) that unemployment would have to jump over 6% for two years to tame inflation (Wall Street Journal, 9/7/22), apparently skepticism is not in order.

    Leaving little room to doubt the leanings of the Times reporters, the article ended with another quote from Furman, this time on Harris’s proposal to go after price gouging:

    “This is not sensible policy, and I think the biggest hope is that it ends up being a lot of rhetoric and no reality,” he said. “There’s no upside here, and there is some downside.”

    Hand-picked by elites

    FAIR: Media That Benefit From Inequality Prefer to Talk About Other Things

    Conor Smyth (FAIR.org, 2/14/24): “For media outlets owned by the wealthy, there’s obvious utility in directing the conversation away from inequality and toward other concerns.”

    If one of the main functions of the media is agenda-setting—deeming certain topics, like government debt, newsworthy and others, like inequality, not so much (FAIR.org, 2/14/24)—another primary function is legitimization: letting audiences know who they should trust and who they should treat with skepticism. Over the course of the recent bout of inflation, corporate outlets have made it clear that those economists who erred on the side of far-reaching austerity were worth listening to. The ones who dissented most strongly from the austerity paradigm were, for the most part, sidelined or only tepidly consulted.

    The result has been a constrained debate. Extreme pro-austerity positions have enjoyed high visibility, while progressives have been relegated to the background. This is not because of an imbalance in the evidence. If anything, the side that has been arguing for anti-austerity measures to fight inflation, like temporary price controls, has more evidence for their claims than the side that’s backed harsh monetary austerity. They, at least, haven’t been proven embarrassingly wrong by the experience of the past couple years.

    What could help explain the imbalance in coverage is instead the background of different sets of economists. Before being legitimized by corporate media, extremists for austerity like Summers and Furman were legitimized by political status—Summers served in top roles under Bill Clinton and Barack Obama, and Furman served as a key adviser to Obama. Progressives like Isabella Weber have not enjoyed similar political standing.

    Thus, we can see a sort of chain of legitimization that runs from a political system dominated by economic elites to a media ecosystem owned by economic elites. If you can secure a top post in politics, it doesn’t matter whether you’re an extremist with views contradicting the consensus among academic economists. Your views should be taken seriously. For progressives, who have largely been excluded from elite politics in recent decades, serious skepticism is in order.

    On the face of it, this system makes some sense. But think a little deeper and you can see an insidious chain servicing the dominant players in American society. That chain needs to be broken. Media outlets need to listen to the evidence, not the false wisdom of economists hand-picked by American elites.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/10/18/to-be-a-media-expert-on-economics-it-helps-to-have-the-right-politics/feed/ 0 498242
    To Be a Media Expert on Economics, It Helps to Have the Right Politics https://www.radiofree.org/2024/10/18/to-be-a-media-expert-on-economics-it-helps-to-have-the-right-politics/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/10/18/to-be-a-media-expert-on-economics-it-helps-to-have-the-right-politics/#respond Fri, 18 Oct 2024 21:47:49 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9042621  

    “Practical men who believe themselves to be quite exempt from any intellectual influence, are usually the slaves of some defunct economist.” John Maynard Keynes made this observation in 1936, in his masterwork The General Theory. Nearly a century later, readers and viewers of corporate media face the same fate.

    The fundamental problem confronted by these news consumers is not that corporate news outlets consult economists in their reporting; as experts in their field, economists often have important and worthwhile contributions to make. The problem is that these outlets consistently elevate the views of specific economists who serve particular ideological interests over the views of other economists, or even the academic profession as a whole.

    The austerity gospel

    LRB: The Austerity Con

    Simon Wren-Lewis (LRB, 2/19/15): “‘Mediamacro’…prefers simple stories to more complex analysis. As part of this, it is fond of analogies between governments and individuals, even when those analogies are generally seen to be false by macroeconomists.”

    Consider the case of the 2008 financial crisis and the austerity mania that followed. The British economist Simon Wren-Lewis (London Review of Books, 2/9/15) has documented how media depictions of austerity diverged sharply from professional economists’ understandings and textbooks’ explanations of macroeconomics. His term for the media’s unique understanding of macroeconomics is “mediamacro,” which is characterized by an obsession with cutting the deficit over and above all other concerns.

    In the wake of the banking crisis that followed the collapse of the housing bubble in 2007-08, and then the onset of the Eurozone crisis in 2010, standard textbook macroeconomics dictated a runup in the deficit to stimulate the economy out of a downturn. Corporate media, however, bought the arguments of political conservatives and a fringe of academic economists (who nonetheless held positions at prestigious universities), who maintained that austerity, specifically through spending cuts, could return the economy to health.

    In the most notorious instance, corporate media outlets opportunistically promoted the findings of a 2010 paper, written by two Harvard economists, that were later famously invalidated due to an Excel error. As Paul Krugman noted in 2013 (New York Times, 4/19/13), this paper was controversial among economists from the start, but this did not stop corporate media from citing it—and its flimsy assertion that there existed a tipping-point for government debt at 90% of GDP, beyond which this debt supposedly imposed a major drag on economic growth—as gospel:

    For example, a Washington Post editorial earlier this year warned against any relaxation on the deficit front, because we are “dangerously near the 90% mark that economists regard as a threat to sustainable economic growth.” Notice the phrasing: “economists,” not “some economists,” let alone “some economists, vigorously disputed by other economists with equally good credentials,” which was the reality.

    The view from finance

    Media Focus on Debt and Deficit in the US

    As Mark Copelovitch (SSRN, 10/27/17) has noted, “The single most important factor [in elevating falsehoods about austerity] has been the media’s willingness to embrace and promote these narratives, while largely ignoring the overwhelming empirical and historical evidence that austerity is deeply contractionary and counter-productive.”

    In another instance recounted by Wren-Lewis (LRB, 2/9/15), after the return of some growth in 2013 in Britain following the election of a Conservative government committed to austerity in 2010, the Financial Times editorial board (9/10/13) declared the Conservatives victorious in their political argument for austerity. This despite the fact that “less than 20% of academic economists surveyed by the Financial Times thought that the recovery of 2013 vindicated austerity.”

    Such false right-wing narratives about macroeconomic policy came to dominate media discourse, not merely because political elites adopted these false narratives and thus made them newsworthy, but because corporate media outlets were compliant messengers for elite views and prescriptions.

    Why does the media adopt “mediamacro” as its approach to coverage of the economy? One reason proposed by Wren-Lewis (LRB, 2/9/15) is the influence of City of London (or, in the US case, Wall Street) economists, whose

    views tend to reflect the economic arguments of those on the right: Regulation is bad, top rates of tax should be low, the state is too large, and budget deficits are a serious and immediate concern.

    Moreover, the political leanings of corporate media outlets, whether or not they are made explicit, may encourage them to seek the expertise of economists of a particular ideological bent. These economists’ views may, in turn, be out of step with the academic mainstream on topics like austerity.

    The inflation oracle

    The corporate media’s tendency to elevate economists of a specific type hasn’t disappeared in the 2020s. With the onset of Covid and the spike in inflation that followed, media broke out their familiar playbook of consulting prominent economists with extreme, and business-friendly, positions.

    The infamous example was the elevation of Larry Summers, who slammed Biden’s 2021 stimulus as “the least responsible macroeconomic policy we’ve had in the last 40 years” and warned stridently of inflation (Washington Post, 5/24/21). When inflation rose to a high of just over 9% the next year, Summers was hailed by the media as “an oracle: the man who saw it all coming,” as Jacobin editor Seth Ackerman (2/13/23) sarcastically put it.

    In one sense, it was true that Summers had seen inflation as a strong possibility, and he did deserve some credit for that. Other economists, notably Paul Krugman, had downplayed the possibility of a jump in inflation and had to eat their words (New York Times, 7/21/22). But the fact that Summers had gotten this one point right, after an illustrious career of getting things wrong, did not exactly justify his skyrocketing status as the go-to voice on inflation, or the heaps of at times fawning media coverage thrown his way (Wall Street Journal, 6/27/22; Fortune, 9/23/22).

    Cable TV Mentions of Larry Summers Far Outstripped Mentions of Paul Krugman From 2021-23

    Did it justify, for example, Summers garnering six times as many mentions as Krugman on top cable news channels from 2021 through 2023? A Nobel laureate and widely respected commentator, Krugman also happened to be the most prominent proponent of a more dovish, less austere approach to inflation. Though he failed to foresee the initial rise in inflation, Krugman accurately predicted, in contrast to Summers, that the US economy could achieve a “soft landing,” a fall in inflation without a substantial rise in the unemployment rate (New York Times, 5/18/23).

    Meanwhile, Summers capitalized on his new status as economic prophet to insist that extreme pain was required to tame inflation. By mid-2022, he confidently proclaimed (Bloomberg, 6/20/22):

    We need five years of unemployment above 5% to contain inflation—in other words, we need two years of 7.5% unemployment or five years of 6% unemployment or one year of 10% unemployment.

    Cherry-picking expertise

    Like the views of extreme austerity advocates in the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, Summers’ views in 2022 were acutely out of sync with the mainstream among academic economists, as becomes apparent from surveys of professional economists taken over the course of the inflationary outbreak.

    What do you think will be the peak level of unemployment in the next recession?

    Financial Times/Booth survey of macroeconomists (9/13/22)

    One FT/Booth survey taken in the fall of 2022 is particularly informative. It found that most economists thought that the Federal Reserve was on track to contain inflation with its pace of interest rate hikes. Specifically, when asked to react to the statement “Futures markets now suggest the Fed will raise the federal funds rate to about 3.9% by the end of 2022,” only 36% of economists classified the Fed’s actions as “too little too late and insufficient to help keep inflation under control.” The rest either thought that this policy path was sufficient to contain inflation (55%) or thought that it was overkill (9%).

    When asked about the toll Fed policy would take on the labor market, academic economists took a moderate stance. Most agreed that the unemployment rate would peak below 6% and that a recession would last for less than a year. Incidentally, only a small minority of economists seem to have foreseen the possibility of inflation returning to target without a recession and with unemployment rising no higher than 4.3%, which is what in fact has occurred. But notwithstanding their apparent excess of pessimism, economists generally agreed that inflation would come under control with nowhere near the punishment Summers was prescribing.

    To be fair, these economists were not asked directly what would be sufficient to contain inflation, and if asked directly, it is likely that some segment would have been in Summers’ camp—after all, about a third of the economists surveyed thought that the Fed was doing “too little too late.” But those backing Summers’ full diagnosis would be a fraction of those taking this minority view. So the central point that Summers was in the minority, and likely in quite a small minority, among professional economists is undoubtedly true.

    Yet with his quasi-divine status granted by corporate media, Summers could pontificate freely about the need for mass suffering without fear of marginalization for lack of evidence or credibility. So when he prescribed 5% unemployment for five years, all that an outlet like Bloomberg (6/20/22) did was report on his views, no skepticism necessary. And no warning label stating: This is completely out of step with the academic mainstream. In effect, corporate media decided to once again cherry-pick expertise to legitimize austerity policies.

    ‘Not sensible policy’

    Boston Globe: Harris’s fight against price gouging is good economics

    James K. Galbraith and Isabella Weber (Boston Globe, 8/22/24) : “Americans still have some common sense…. It shows that all of the efforts of free-market economists to beat it out of them have not yet worked.

    At the same time, alternatives to the dominant austerity paradigm have been treated with caution, if not outright hostility. The New York Times (8/15/24), for example, in a recent piece on Kamala Harris’s advocacy for anti-price-gouging legislation, did consult Isabella Weber, a progressive economist who has become well known for her work on profit-driven inflation. But her testimony was overshadowed in the piece by that of economists with more conservative takes on the issue.

    Most notably, the Times relied heavily on the insights of Harvard economist Jason Furman, who helped lead the push for extreme austerity alongside Summers (Wall Street Journal, 9/7/22). His first quote in the article had a simple Econ 101 message: “Egg prices went up last year—it’s because there weren’t as many eggs, and it caused more egg production.” In other words, egg prices went up because of supply issues, and it’s good that prices went up because that spurred more egg production.

    Unfortunately, this story doesn’t fit with the facts. Responding to this Furman quote, Weber and James Galbraith observed in a separate article (Boston Globe, 8/22/24):

    In fact, US egg production peaked in 2019 and then fell slightly, through last year. Egg prices spiked from early 2022 to $4.82 a dozen on average in January 2023, before falling back again, with no gain in production. High prices did not stimulate America’s hens to greater effort. On these points, Furman laid an egg.

    It might be assumed that the Times would engage in this sort of basic factchecking of its sources, and not leave it to two progressive economists writing in the Boston Globe to do that for them. But when the source is a Harvard economist who not too long ago was suggesting (wildly incorrectly) that unemployment would have to jump over 6% for two years to tame inflation (Wall Street Journal, 9/7/22), apparently skepticism is not in order.

    Leaving little room to doubt the leanings of the Times reporters, the article ended with another quote from Furman, this time on Harris’s proposal to go after price gouging:

    “This is not sensible policy, and I think the biggest hope is that it ends up being a lot of rhetoric and no reality,” he said. “There’s no upside here, and there is some downside.”

    Hand-picked by elites

    FAIR: Media That Benefit From Inequality Prefer to Talk About Other Things

    Conor Smyth (FAIR.org, 2/14/24): “For media outlets owned by the wealthy, there’s obvious utility in directing the conversation away from inequality and toward other concerns.”

    If one of the main functions of the media is agenda-setting—deeming certain topics, like government debt, newsworthy and others, like inequality, not so much (FAIR.org, 2/14/24)—another primary function is legitimization: letting audiences know who they should trust and who they should treat with skepticism. Over the course of the recent bout of inflation, corporate outlets have made it clear that those economists who erred on the side of far-reaching austerity were worth listening to. The ones who dissented most strongly from the austerity paradigm were, for the most part, sidelined or only tepidly consulted.

    The result has been a constrained debate. Extreme pro-austerity positions have enjoyed high visibility, while progressives have been relegated to the background. This is not because of an imbalance in the evidence. If anything, the side that has been arguing for anti-austerity measures to fight inflation, like temporary price controls, has more evidence for their claims than the side that’s backed harsh monetary austerity. They, at least, haven’t been proven embarrassingly wrong by the experience of the past couple years.

    What could help explain the imbalance in coverage is instead the background of different sets of economists. Before being legitimized by corporate media, extremists for austerity like Summers and Furman were legitimized by political status—Summers served in top roles under Bill Clinton and Barack Obama, and Furman served as a key adviser to Obama. Progressives like Isabella Weber have not enjoyed similar political standing.

    Thus, we can see a sort of chain of legitimization that runs from a political system dominated by economic elites to a media ecosystem owned by economic elites. If you can secure a top post in politics, it doesn’t matter whether you’re an extremist with views contradicting the consensus among academic economists. Your views should be taken seriously. For progressives, who have largely been excluded from elite politics in recent decades, serious skepticism is in order.

    On the face of it, this system makes some sense. But think a little deeper and you can see an insidious chain servicing the dominant players in American society. That chain needs to be broken. Media outlets need to listen to the evidence, not the false wisdom of economists hand-picked by American elites.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/10/18/to-be-a-media-expert-on-economics-it-helps-to-have-the-right-politics/feed/ 0 498243
    Japan warns of ‘new era of crisis,’ asks for record defense budget https://www.rfa.org/english/news/china/japan-defense-north-korea-china-russia-09042024025738.html https://www.rfa.org/english/news/china/japan-defense-north-korea-china-russia-09042024025738.html#respond Wed, 04 Sep 2024 06:59:00 +0000 https://www.rfa.org/english/news/china/japan-defense-north-korea-china-russia-09042024025738.html Japan’s defense ministry has released its annual white paper for 2024, warning that the Asia-Pacific region is facing “the most severe and complex security environment since the end of World War II.”

    Days before, the ministry requested a record budget of 8.5 trillion yen (US$59 billion) for the next year to boost deterrence.

    The English version of the 572-page white paper, which sets out Tokyo’s defense plan, was made public on Tuesday.

    In the report “Defense of Japan 2024,” Minister of Defense Minoru Kihara wrote that the international community had entered “a new era of crisis” and was facing “the greatest trial” since World War II. 

    Kihara singled out China, which has been building up military strength while intensifying activities in the East China Sea and the Pacific, as one of the greatest strategic challenges to Japan, alongside North Korea and Russia.

    The ministry assessed that China had been “intensifying changes to the status quo by force” in the entire region around Japan, including in the East China and South China Sea. 


    RELATED STORIES

    Japan protests China’s installation of buoy over its continental shelf

    Japan to assist 4 ASEAN countries to counter China: report

    China, North Korea denounce Japan’s involvement with AUKUS

    China-Taiwan tensions jolt sleepy Japanese island


    Japan fears that an armed conflict over Taiwan, which China considers a province that must be reunited with the mainland, would spill over to Japan. Tokyo has been deploying more troops and military equipment to its outlying islands close to Taiwan.

    Yonaguni.JPG
    A radar facility set up for coastal surveillance on high ground on Yonaguni island, Japan's westernmost inhabited island in Okinawa prefecture near Taiwan, on Nov. 13, 2023.  (Reuters/Issei Kato)

    Japan’s defense policy is to continue building up capabilities, especially  so-called stand-off defense, or responding from outside the threat zone, using integrated air and missile systems,  and to strengthen cooperation with allies and partners.

    “The alliance with the United States is a key pillar of Japan’s national security policy,” the ministry said in the white paper, noting that both Japan and the United States are “in agreement that the highest priority is … to prevent unilateral changes to the status quo by force,” a reference to China and Russia without naming them.

    China has reacted angrily to the  white paper, saying it uses China as a pretext to mislead the Japanese public, as well as the international community, and to justify Japan’s  military expansion, according to media reports.

    Record defense budget

    Japan’s defense ministry on Friday requested a record  budget of nearly US$60 billion for 2025, mainly to fortify its southwestern islands against the threats from China, the Associated Press reported. 

    The money would be spent on developing and acquiring new drones, missiles, satellites, cyber defense and cloud-based command and control systems. 

    The budget has grown through the years. It was 6.6 trillion yen in 2023 and is projected to reach 7.7 trillion yen in 2024, according to the  defense ministry.

    Tokyo is expected to double its annual military spending to about 10 trillion yen by 2027, becoming the world’s third largest military spender after the U.S. and China, AP reported.

    While the request must go through the ministry of finance, which will likely reduce it before making a decision in December, China has already criticized it.

    China’s Global Times quoted experts as saying that Japan’s continuous increase of military spending reflected its “militarism resurgence” and the ambition to expand its military presence in the region.

    Japan’s aggression before and during World War II is deeply resented in parts of Asia, in particular China and South Korea.

    Edited by Mike Firn.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by By RFA Staff.

    ]]>
    https://www.rfa.org/english/news/china/japan-defense-north-korea-china-russia-09042024025738.html/feed/ 0 491766
    Starmer’s hints about the budget suggest UK is set for bleak four years https://www.radiofree.org/2024/09/02/starmers-hints-about-the-budget-suggest-uk-is-set-for-bleak-four-years/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/09/02/starmers-hints-about-the-budget-suggest-uk-is-set-for-bleak-four-years/#respond Mon, 02 Sep 2024 11:11:47 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/keir-starmer-budget-austerity-rachel-reeves-wealth-tax-needed/
    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by Paul Rogers.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/09/02/starmers-hints-about-the-budget-suggest-uk-is-set-for-bleak-four-years/feed/ 0 491533
    The Olympic Games: Perennially Costly and Always Over Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2024/07/28/the-olympic-games-perennially-costly-and-always-over-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/07/28/the-olympic-games-perennially-costly-and-always-over-budget/#respond Sun, 28 Jul 2024 02:08:50 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=152315 Another entertainingly corrupt sporting event has just started in Paris, opening with a barge packed ceremony on the Seine.  Thousands of simpering commentators, paid-up media gawkers and bored influencers have been ready with their computers, phones and confected dreams.  As always, the Olympics throws up the question about how far the host city has managed […]

    The post The Olympic Games: Perennially Costly and Always Over Budget first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
    Another entertainingly corrupt sporting event has just started in Paris, opening with a barge packed ceremony on the Seine.  Thousands of simpering commentators, paid-up media gawkers and bored influencers have been ready with their computers, phones and confected dreams.  As always, the Olympics throws up the question about how far the host city has managed to come through on the issue of facilities, infrastructure and organisation.  Few would have doubted that Paris has the facilities, but there was always going to be grumbling about the choice of opening, mode of execution and, most importantly, the cost both financial and social.

    For the budget-minded types, the Olympics, and analogous monumental sporting events, continue to lose their appeal – along with the finances.  The extortionate strain on the public wallet, the bleeding of funds from budgets, has made them most unattractive propositions for the hosts.  To this can be added the disruptions to commerce, the occupation of valuable real estate along with environmental harm, the forceful displacement of residents, instances of gentrification and the redirecting of labour from vital infrastructure projects.

    Even for the sports-crazed Australians, such events as the 2026 Commonwealth Games proved unappetising, with the state Victorian government cancelling the event in July 2023.  The whole matter had been grossly irresponsible on the part of the Andrews government, given its initial praise of the games leading up to their re-election.  The Victorian Auditor General was deeply unimpressed by the episode, subsequently finding that the cancellation had cost A$589 million, comprising A$150 million in terms of employee and operating costs and the A$380 million settlement.

    In March this year, there were media rumblings that Brisbane, the planned host city for the 2032 Olympics, was considering a similar response.  The Queensland state government had sought advice about how much it would cost cancelling the entire effort and received an estimate lying anywhere between A$500 million and A$1 billion.  A further $3 billion in federal funding would have also been compromised.  The fractious venture was set to continue.

    With six months to go, Paris was awash with the logistical disruptions that come with such an event.  Transit fares had increased.  The bouquinistes with their book stalls along the Seine, a feature made permanent by Napoleon III in 1859, were threatened by the city’s police with closure for the duration of the Games, a threat that President Emmanuel Macron eventually scotched.  Public sector employees demanded pay increases and unions got busy planning strikes.

    The night before the opening of the Games saw thousands of activists gather at the Place de la République, coordinated by the activist collective La Revers de la Médaille (the Other Side of the Medal).  The event, featuring some 80 grassroot organisations, had been billed the “Counter-Opening Ceremony of the Olympics” and inspired by the statement “des Jeux, mai pour qui?” (“Games, but for whom?”)

    Representing a broader coalition of groups, La Revers de la Médaille had released a statement in Libération prior to the gathering mocking official claims that Paris 2024 would leave a society more inclusive in its wake.  This could hardly be reconciled with the eviction of some 12,500 vulnerable individuals as part of an effort described as “social cleansing”.

    In their “Oxford Olympics Study 2024”, co-authors Alexander Budzier and Bent Flyvbjerg conclude that the Olympics “remain costly and continue to have large cost overruns, to a degree that threatens their viability.”  All Games, “without exception”, run over budget.  “For no other type of megaproject is this the case, not even the construction of nuclear power plants or the storage of nuclear waste.”  For organisers of the event, the budget is an airy notion, “a fictitious minimum that was never sufficient” typical of the “Blank Check Syndrome”.

    The authors acknowledge the efforts made by the International Olympic Committee (IOC) to reform the games through such efforts as Agenda 2020 and Agenda 2020+5 but find their overall efforts patchy and unsuccessful.  Despite these programs, the cost of the Games were “statistically significantly increasing.”  Admittedly, the instances of cost overruns had significantly decreased until 2008, after which the trend was reversed.  The costs for Paris 2024, based on estimates available at the study’s publication, came to $US8.7 billion, a cost overrun of 115% in real terms.  “Cost overruns are the norm for the Games, past, present and future.  The Iron Law applies: ‘Over budget, over and over again.’”

    Such events are, however, always attractive to the political classes willing to find some placing in posterity’s shiny ranks.  As the money they play with is almost never their own, expense is less significant than the pyrotechnics, the noisy show, the effort, the collective will that figures such as Albert Speer understood so well when planning the 1936 Berlin Olympics.  Give the public, and the sporting fraternity, flags, standards, pageantry.  Let them perform in large stadia, on pitches, and in water.  The world will soon forget the killjoys worried about money or weepy about the displaced.

    It pays remembering those words of lamentation from US foreign correspondent William Shirer in his diary, penned on August 16, 1936: “I’m afraid the Nazis have succeeded with their propaganda.  First, the Nazis have run the Games on a lavish scale never before experienced, and this has appealed to the athletes.  Second, the Nazis have put up a very good front for the general visitors, especially the big businessmen.”

    Such a formula has, for the most part, worked for decades, despite the odd hiccup of dissent and forensic critiques of the Blank Check Syndrome.  Be they despotic, authoritarian or democratically elected, if corrupt representatives, this is a show that is bound to go on with profligate persistence.

    The post The Olympic Games: Perennially Costly and Always Over Budget first appeared on Dissident Voice.


    This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/07/28/the-olympic-games-perennially-costly-and-always-over-budget/feed/ 0 486051
    School Vouchers Were Supposed to Save Taxpayer Money. Instead They Blew a Massive Hole in Arizona’s Budget. https://www.radiofree.org/2024/07/16/school-vouchers-were-supposed-to-save-taxpayer-money-instead-they-blew-a-massive-hole-in-arizonas-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/07/16/school-vouchers-were-supposed-to-save-taxpayer-money-instead-they-blew-a-massive-hole-in-arizonas-budget/#respond Tue, 16 Jul 2024 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/arizona-school-vouchers-budget-meltdown by Eli Hager

    ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up for Dispatches, a newsletter that spotlights wrongdoing around the country, to receive our stories in your inbox every week.

    In 2022, Arizona pioneered the largest school voucher program in the history of education. Under a new law, any parent in the state, no matter how affluent, could get a taxpayer-funded voucher worth up to tens of thousands of dollars to spend on private school tuition, extracurricular programs or homeschooling supplies.

    In just the past two years, nearly a dozen states have enacted sweeping voucher programs similar to Arizona’s Empowerment Scholarship Account system, with many using it as a model.

    Yet in a lesson for these other states, Arizona’s voucher experiment has since precipitated a budget meltdown. The state this year faced a $1.4 billion budget shortfall, much of which was a result of the new voucher spending, according to the Grand Canyon Institute, a local nonpartisan fiscal and economic policy think tank. Last fiscal year alone, the price tag of universal vouchers in Arizona skyrocketed from an original official estimate of just under $65 million to roughly $332 million, the Grand Canyon analysis found; another $429 million in costs is expected this year.

    As a result of all this unexpected spending, alongside some recent revenue losses, Arizona is now having to make deep cuts to a wide swath of critical state programs and projects, the pain of which will be felt by average Arizonans who may or may not have school-aged children.

    Among the funding slashed: $333 million for water infrastructure projects, in a state where water scarcity will shape the future, and tens of millions of dollars for highway expansions and repairs in congested areas of one of the nation’s fastest-growing metropolises — Phoenix and its suburbs. Also nixed were improvements to the air conditioning in state prisons, where temperatures can soar above 100 degrees. Arizona’s community colleges, too, are seeing their budgets cut by $54 million.

    Still, Arizona-style universal school voucher programs — available to all, including the wealthiest parents — continue to sweep the nation, from Florida to Utah.

    In Florida, one lawmaker pointed out last year that Arizona’s program seemed to be having a negative budgetary impact. “This is what Arizona did not anticipate,” said Florida Democratic Rep. Robin Bartleman, during a floor debate. “What is our backup plan to fill that budget hole?”

    Her concern was minimized by her Republican colleagues, and Florida’s transformational voucher legislation soon passed.

    Advocates for Arizona’s universal voucher initiative had originally said that it wouldn’t cost the public — and might even save taxpayers money. The Goldwater Institute, a conservative think tank that helped craft the state’s 2022 voucher bill, claimed in its promotional materials at the time that the vouchers would “save taxpayers thousands per student, millions statewide.” Families that received the new cash, the institute said, would be educating their kids “for less than it would cost taxpayers if they were in the public school system.”

    But as it turns out, the parents most likely to apply for these vouchers are the ones who were already sending their kids to private school or homeschooling. They use the dollars to subsidize what they were already paying for.

    The result is new money coming out of the state budget. After all, the public wasn’t paying for private school kids’ tuition before.

    Chris Kotterman, director of governmental relations for the Arizona School Boards Association, says that Arizona making vouchers available to children who had never gone to public school before wasn’t realistically going to save the state money.

    “Say that my parents had been gladly paying my private school tuition, because that’s what was important to them — that I get a religious education. That’s completely fine,” Kotterman said. “But then the state said, ‘Oh, we’ll help you pay for that.’”

    “There’s just no disputing that that costs the state more money,” he said, critiquing the claims of the Goldwater Institute and others who’d averred that this program and ones like it around the country would not be costly. “That’s not how a budget works.”

    Inspiring a “National Movement”

    Heading into this fall, which will bring both a new school year and an election that stands to remake American education, ProPublica is going to be examining the complexities, lessons and failures of the nation’s first universal school voucher program as a model for where the whole system seems headed. Arizona’s program “set the standard nationally” and “inspired a national movement,” according to leading voucher advocacy groups; it is “the nation’s school-choice leader,” per the longtime conservative columnist George Will.

    For decades, voucher initiatives, including in Arizona, had only served small subsets of students. Often, eligibility was limited to certain poor students from failing public schools, whose families could use a voucher to switch them into a potentially better private school.

    In Arizona, for example, vouchers as of 2011 were available solely to students with disabilities, to make sure that their families could afford a range of personalized education options. The program was then expanded to students who had lived in foster care and to Native American students before, gradually, the money started going disproportionately to wealthier households.

    Because these measures were initially narrow in scope, some studies found that they had no negative impact on state and local budgets — studies that voucher advocates continued to cite even as states started considering providing vouchers to every parent who wanted one, which is a far more costly undertaking.

    Universal voucher efforts, beginning with Arizona’s universal Empowerment Scholarship Account program in 2022, allow parents to spend public money not just on private school tuition but also on recreational programs for their kids like ninja warrior training, trampoline park outings and ski passes, or on toys and home goods that they say they need for homeschooling purposes. (The average ESA award is roughly $7,000.)

    In a statement to ProPublica, a spokesperson for Arizona’s former Republican Gov. Doug Ducey, who signed the universal voucher program into law, said that “not only does Gov. Ducey have no regrets about ESA expansion, he considers it one of his finest achievements and a legacy accomplishment. And what he’s most thrilled about is that Arizona’s ESA expansion was followed by 11 other states doing essentially the same thing. Arizona helped set off an earthquake.”

    Voucher proponents have long pointed out that private school parents have a right to and could be sending their children to public school at taxpayers’ expense. So providing them with what is often a smaller amount of taxpayer money in the form of a voucher to help them pay their private school tuition is, the argument goes, a net savings for the public.

    This is similar to arguing that the public should help pay for car drivers’ gas because if they didn’t drive, they might use public transportation instead, which would be a cost to taxpayers.

    Ducey’s spokesperson, Daniel Scarpinato, did not acknowledge that the net cost of universal vouchers has been far higher than voucher supporters originally promised. Instead, he reiterated that “universal ESA costs are basically revenue neutral.” The reasoning: Overall enrollment in Arizona public schools has been slightly down — ever since many parents withdrew their kids during the pandemic — creating some savings in the education budget that could be seen as offsetting the new voucher spending.

    Ducey, as well as Matt Beienburg, the Goldwater Institute’s director of education policy, blamed Arizona’s budget crisis on current Democratic Gov. Katie Hobbs, pointing out that she signed a 2023 budget that spent down what was then a surplus instead of keeping the money in reserve for a possible moment like this. (The 2023 budget was passed with bipartisan support.) Ducey did not answer a question about whether he’d had a long-term plan to pay for ballooning voucher spending, beyond relying on that one-time surplus.

    In an email, Beienburg maintained that Arizona’s current budget mess wasn’t caused by vouchers; he blamed, among other issues, state revenue recently being lower than anticipated. (The Goldwater Institute in 2021 collaborated with Ducey to write and pass a tax cut that reduced income taxes on the wealthiest Arizonans to 2.5%, the same rate that the poorest people in the state pay, which is the leading cause of the decline in revenue.)

    Dave Wells, research director at the Grand Canyon Institute, said that none of the competing budget trends that Ducey and the Goldwater Institute pointed to mean that Arizona can actually afford universal vouchers, at least not without making severe, harmful budget cuts.

    “They chose to make ESAs universal and that has made the budget situation much worse,” he said. “We still had a budget shortfall and budget cuts. The cost is still the cost.”

    “It Isn’t Funded”

    Now that vouchers in Arizona are available even to private school kids who have never attended a public school, there are no longer any constraints on the size of the program. What’s more, as the initiative enters its third year, there are no legislative fixes on the table to contain costs, despite Hobbs’ efforts to implement some reforms. “I have not heard them agree to anything that is a financial reform of the program at all,” said Sen. Mitzi Epstein, the Democratic minority leader of the state Senate, referring to her Republican colleagues.

    Arizona doesn’t have a comprehensive tally of how many private schoolers and homeschoolers are out there, so it remains an open question how much higher the cost of vouchers could go and therefore how much cash should be kept on hand to fund them. The director of the state’s nonpartisan Joint Legislative Budget Committee told lawmakers that “we’ve never really faced that circumstance before where you’ve got this requirement” — that anyone can get a voucher — “but it isn’t funded.”

    Most importantly, said Beth Lewis, executive director of the public-school-advocacy group Save Our Schools Arizona, only a small amount of the new spending on private schools and homeschooling is going toward poor children, which means that already-extreme educational inequality in Arizona is being exacerbated. The state is 49th in the country in per-pupil public school funding, and as a result, year after year, district schools in lower-income areas are plagued by some of the nation’s worst staffing ratios and largest class sizes.

    Spending hundreds of millions of dollars on vouchers to help kids who are already going to private school keep going to private school won’t just sink the budget, Lewis said. It’s funding that’s not going to the public schools, keeping them from becoming what they could and should be.

    Help ProPublica Report on Education

    Mollie Simon contributed research.


    This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Eli Hager.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/07/16/school-vouchers-were-supposed-to-save-taxpayer-money-instead-they-blew-a-massive-hole-in-arizonas-budget/feed/ 0 484121
    UN commissioner calls for rights protections in Lao budget allocations https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/volker-turk-human-rights-budget-06072024141638.html https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/volker-turk-human-rights-budget-06072024141638.html#respond Fri, 07 Jun 2024 18:52:55 +0000 https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/volker-turk-human-rights-budget-06072024141638.html The United Nations High Commissioner for Human Rights Volker Türk on Friday called on the government of Laos to ensure protections for human rights in the country’s budget allocations, saying that failure to do so will undermine development and increase inequality.

    Türk made the comments following a brief visit to the Lao capital Vientiane – the first by a U.N. rights czar – where he met with Prime Minister Sonexay Siphandone and other senior officials to discuss the state of human rights in the impoverished nation, which is also this year’s chair of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations, or ASEAN.

    Public debt is a “key challenge” facing Laos, he said, but cautioned that debt repayment “should not interfere with States’ human rights obligations to allocate the maximum available resources to the realization of economic and social rights.”

    ENG_LAO_TURK_06072024.2.jpg
    Volker Türk, UN High Commissioner for Human Rights HC, center, speaks June 7, 2024 in Vientiane, Laos. (OHCHR)

    “It is against this background that I regret the declining public spending on social services, including social protection, health and education,” he said. 

    “Human rights need to be reflected in budget allocations. If a country does not invest sufficiently in education, health, equality and other essentials, this will result in a cascade of problems in society – scuppering development and increasing inequalities.”

    Türk applauded the Lao government’s emphasis on developing the country, but urged leaders to integrate human rights to ensure it is sustainable.

    “Human rights are not an à la carte menu to select from,” he said. “Sustainable development is intertwined with economic, social, cultural, civil and political rights, as well as the right to a healthy environment.”

    Civil society key to addressing issues

    Among the issues he called on Laos to address were child marriage, gender inequality and the impact of infrastructure projects on local communities, adding that the government’s ability to tackles such issues “depends profoundly on the meaningful participation of those most affected, and of civil society in all its diversity.”

    ENG_LAO_TURK_06072024.3.jpg
    Volker Türk, UN High Commissioner for Human Rights HC, left, meets with Saleumxay Kommasith, Minister of Foreign Affairs of Laos, June 7, 2024 in Vientiane, Laos. (OHCHR)

    “In the absence of a vibrant civic space, stagnation sets in, and corruption remains hidden,” he said. “Policies to address environmental concerns, development goals, human rights violations resulting from business and land projects – indeed, any issue – are intrinsically weakened.”

    To that end, Türk highlighted the need for those who express their views on issues of public interest “to do so without fear.” He said the government must do more to protect those in civil society from intimidation, violence or judicial harassment.

    He urged authorities to continue investigations into cases of forced disappearance, including that of Lao rural development expert and activist Sombath Somphone.

    ENG_LAO_TURK_06072024.4.jpg
    Volker Türk, UN High Commissioner for Human Rights HC answers questions from university students and teachers following his lecture at the Faculty of Law and Political Science, National University of Lao PDR, June 7, 2024 in Vientiane, Laos. (OHCHR)

    Sombath has not been seen or heard from since he was stopped in his jeep at a police checkpoint outside Vientiane on Dec. 15, 2012, forced into a white truck and driven away. 

    The Lao government has remained silent about the fate of the then 60-year-old Sombath, who had challenged massive land deals negotiated by the state that had left thousands of rural Lao villagers homeless with little compensation. 

    Among the improvements on human rights Türk observed during his visit were legislative reforms, including a ban on corporal punishment of children, and progress in addressing poverty, which he said had led to improvements in the living conditions of some segments of the population.

    Edited by Malcolm Foster.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by By Joshua Lipes.

    ]]>
    https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/volker-turk-human-rights-budget-06072024141638.html/feed/ 0 478478
    Georgia governor calls for even more nuclear power despite budget woes https://grist.org/climate-energy/georgia-governor-calls-for-even-more-nuclear-power-despite-budget-woes/ https://grist.org/climate-energy/georgia-governor-calls-for-even-more-nuclear-power-despite-budget-woes/#respond Fri, 31 May 2024 08:00:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=640178 Georgia Governor Brian Kemp called for more new nuclear energy at an event Wednesday celebrating the first new nuclear reactors built in the U.S. in decades, at Plant Vogtle near Augusta, Georgia. The construction of those reactors, known as Vogtle Units 3 and 4, cost more than twice its original budget and ended years behind schedule.

    “Today, we celebrate the end of that project,” Kemp told the crowd of state officials and utility executives. “And now, let’s start planning for Vogtle Five.”

    That could be a tough sell to Georgians who have seen their bills go up multiple times to pay for the new reactors and for shareholders of the power plant’s largest owner, who had to absorb some of the costs. Originally billed as the dawn of a new nuclear era and priced at $14 billion, the Plant Vogtle project was plagued by repeated delays and ultimately cost an estimated total of more than $31 billion. 

    When lead contractor Westinghouse filed for bankruptcy in 2017, prompting South Carolina to abandon its own nuclear project, Vogtle became the only new nuclear construction in the country. It still is. 

    “If building more nuclear were a good idea, other states would be jumping on the bandwagon now,” said Liz Coyle, executive director of the consumer advocacy group Georgia Watch. “The fact that they’re not, I think, speaks volumes.”

    Coyle said her group is preparing to fight any proposal for another reactor. 

    For their part, the elected officials and utility executives at Wednesday’s event spoke of Plant Vogtle as a success story.

    “Vogtle 3 and 4 don’t just represent an incredible economic development asset for our state and … a milestone for our entire country,” Kemp said. “They also stand as physical examples of something that I remind myself of every day: Tough times don’t last. Tough people do.”

    Triumphal arrangements of the national anthem, “God Bless America,” and “Georgia On My Mind” backed by a gospel choir bookended the celebratory speeches. Attendees could snack on a sheet cake model of the power plant rendered in fondant.

    Slices of yellow sheet cake surround a large sheet cake model purporting to look like the nuclear reactor.
    A sheet cake version of the nuclear Plant Vogtle was among the celebratory aspects of the reactor’s opening ceremony. Emily Jones / Grist

    Speakers touted Plant Vogtle as a win for clean energy, since it can produce enough electricity to power a million homes and businesses without the greenhouse gas emissions produced by coal or gas, according to Georgia Power, which owns the largest stake in the new reactors. That carbon-free energy is key to attracting new businesses to the state, Kemp and others said.

    All five members of the Georgia Public Service Commission, or PSC — which oversees Georgia Power’s planning and rates, including the Vogtle project — addressed the crowd. 

    “I just hope that we keep it up. We really should,” said commissioner Tricia Pridemore. “If we want to continue clean energy for our nation, it’s gonna take more than four.”  

    In December, the PSC approved a deal that hikes Georgia Power customers’ rates now that Vogtle Unit 4 is online.

    After the Wednesday event, commissioner Tim Echols said he supports more nuclear power in Georgia, but said a further Vogtle expansion would need to come with protections against runaway costs and other problems that plagued the last project.

    “I really need some protection against a bankruptcy,” he said. “I just can’t do it on the same basis again.”

    Echols suggested a federal “backstop” and a mechanism to ensure large customers like factories and data centers would pay for the bulk of nuclear construction.

    Under current Georgia law, a further expansion of Plant Vogtle would need to be financed differently than the project that just wrapped up, Coyle said. In 2018, state lawmakers approved a sunset provision for the state law that had allowed Georgia Power to pass Vogtle’s financing costs on to customers during construction. Barring another change, that would mean Southern Company and its shareholders would shoulder those costs. 

    Coyle said she’ll be urging lawmakers to keep it that way.

    “Georgians are struggling, really, really struggling already to pay their power bills,” she said. “I hope we don’t have to go down this path again.”

    On Friday,  U.S. Secretary of Energy Jennifer Granholm and national climate advisor Ali Zaidi are visiting Vogtle for another event at the power plant. According to the Department of Energy, they plan to meet with local officials, as well as industry and labor leaders. 

    This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Georgia governor calls for even more nuclear power despite budget woes on May 31, 2024.


    This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Emily Jones.

    ]]>
    https://grist.org/climate-energy/georgia-governor-calls-for-even-more-nuclear-power-despite-budget-woes/feed/ 0 477421
    Pacific gets ‘record’ share of Australia’s static foreign aid budget https://www.rfa.org/english/news/pacific/aus-pacific-aid-05152024032655.html https://www.rfa.org/english/news/pacific/aus-pacific-aid-05152024032655.html#respond Wed, 15 May 2024 07:30:31 +0000 https://www.rfa.org/english/news/pacific/aus-pacific-aid-05152024032655.html

    Pacific island countries are getting an increased share of Australian foreign aid, budget documents show, as it shifts into funding infrastructure such as undersea cables and ports in response to China’s inroads in the region.

    Overall, Australia’s foreign aid budget is flat and it remains one of the least generous donors in the OECD club of wealthy nations, ranking 26th out of 31 countries. The increased focus on infrastructure also means that proportionately less of the aid budget will be spent on health.

    In the Pacific, the largest aid increases in Australia’s 2024-2025 government budget are directed at Fiji, where Australia will help fund a port upgrade, and Tuvalu. The atoll nation of 12,000 people last year ceded a partial veto of its foreign policy and security relationships to Australia under the Falepili Union agreement.

    “If we look at this reduction in health -- is this because our partners have told us they’re not that interested in health -- I don’t think so,” said Stephen Howes, director of the Australian National University’s Development Policy Center.

    “If we’re going to go into Fiji and tell them we are using our aid to help them expand their port, that’s because we don’t want China to do it, and that’s going to mean less funding for health,” he said at a panel Wednesday on the budget’s aid component.

    China’s government has courted Pacific island nations for several decades as it seeks to isolate Taiwan diplomatically, gain allies in international institutions and erode U.S. military dominance. 

    Its inroads with Pacific island nations, including a security pact with the Solomon Islands in 2022, have galvanized renewed U.S. attention to the region.

    The budget released Tuesday shows the government has allocated A$4.96 billion [US$3.29 billion] to aid, an increase of 4.0% from the previous year.

    “Australia is delivering a record $2 billion in development assistance to the Pacific, maintaining Australia's position as the region's largest and most comprehensive development partner,” the budget papers said.

    In real terms, the spending is flat at 0.19% of Australia’s national income, according to the Australian Council for International Development, and less than half of its level in the 1980s.

    “This budget provided the government with an opportunity to show real humanitarian leadership in responding to human suffering across the world,” the council said in a statement. 

    “Australians see what is happening on their screens in all corners of the globe and expect their government to do more. This budget barely touches the surface,” it said.

    Howes said the budget documents project aid spending to be unchanged for the next decade and beyond.

    Pacific island countries now account for more than 40% of the aid budget, almost doubling from a decade earlier, at least partly reflecting government concerns about China’s role in a region that Australia has regarded as its sphere of influence.

    Australia remains the single largest donor to Pacific island countries despite China’s enlarged presence in the region. At least a fifth of the Australian aid budget is spent on what Australia calls governance programs that aim to bolster democracy, anti-corruption efforts and transparency of public institutions.

    For Tuvalu, Australia will provide additional funds for its land reclamation projects that aim to protect against king tides and projected sea-level rise and also contribute the lion’s share of the country’s first undersea telecommunications cable.

    Tuvalu, one of the dwindling number of nations that have diplomatic relations with Taiwan, last year signed a treaty with Australia that requires it to have Australia’s agreement for “any partnership, arrangement or engagement with any other state or entity on security and defence-related matters.”

    In Fiji, Australia is providing budget support to the government as the tourism-dependent economy continues to recover from the COVID-19 pandemic. It also is supporting an upgrade to Fiji’s largest bulk cargo port and its shipbuilding industry. 

    Papua New Guinea, with its estimated 12 million people, remains the single largest recipient of Australian aid in the Pacific at A$637.4 million. The Solomon Islands, where Australia has a security force stationed after riots in 2021, is the second largest with A$171.2 million.

    The budget documents also revealed that Australia’s government agreed in December to provide an A$600 million loan to Papua New Guinea, a day after the two countries signed a defense cooperation agreement.

    BenarNews is an RFA-affiliated online news organization.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by By Stephen Wright for BenarNews.

    ]]>
    https://www.rfa.org/english/news/pacific/aus-pacific-aid-05152024032655.html/feed/ 0 474629
    Tackling California’s Budget Crisis: Raise Taxes, Cut Programs, or Form a Bank? https://www.radiofree.org/2024/05/09/tackling-californias-budget-crisis-raise-taxes-cut-programs-or-form-a-bank/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/05/09/tackling-californias-budget-crisis-raise-taxes-cut-programs-or-form-a-bank/#respond Thu, 09 May 2024 02:02:03 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=150284 In 2022, the state of California celebrated a record budget surplus of $97.5 billion. Two years later, according to the Legislative Analyst’s Office, this surplus has plummeted to a record budget deficit of $73 billion. Balancing the budget will be challenging. Unlike the federal government, the state cannot just drive up debt and roll it […]

    The post Tackling California’s Budget Crisis: Raise Taxes, Cut Programs, or Form a Bank? first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

    In 2022, the state of California celebrated a record budget surplus of $97.5 billion. Two years later, according to the Legislative Analyst’s Office, this surplus has plummeted to a record budget deficit of $73 billion. Balancing the budget will be challenging. Unlike the federal government, the state cannot just drive up debt and roll it over year after year. The California Balanced Budget Act, passed in 2004, requires the state legislature to pass a balanced budget every year.

    The usual solutions are to cut programs or raise taxes, but both approaches are facing an uphill battle. Raising taxes would require a two-thirds vote of the legislature, which would be very challenging, and worthy public programs are in danger of getting axed, including homelessness prevention and funding for low-income housing.

    A third possibility might be to increase the income tax base and state income by stimulating the economy with a state-owned depository bank. The state-owned Bank of North Dakota, which has raised record profits for its state, is a stellar example. In a review of states with the healthiest budgets based on data from the PEW Charitable Trusts, U.S. News & World Report puts North Dakota at No. 1 in Budget Balancing and #1 in Short-term Fiscal Stability.

    California has an Infrastructure and Development Bank, which is already capitalized and has an established track record of prudent and productive lending, but it is not a depository bank and its reach is small. Transforming it into a depository bank would be fairly uncomplicated and could substantially increase its reach.

    But first a look at what happened to the state’s copious revenues.

     

    Saga of a Budget Crisis

    California’s record surplus was largely due to tax windfalls and to $43.5 billion received in American Rescue Plan money during the COVID crisis. Anticipating that these inflows would continue, the governor and legislature enacted a record budget for 2024-25 of nearly $300 billion, the largest of any state. Much of the surplus was committed to expanding an array of social and educational services, including extending universal health care coverage to undocumented immigrants. When taxes came in, the tally showed a revenue shortfall of $26 billion.

    Tech industry woes were a major contributor. The top 1% of earners pay nearly half of California’s  income taxes, and 20% of its GDP comes from the tech industry. The collapse of Silicon Valley Bank, which financed startups and attracted venture capital, speeded the sector’s decline. Massive Silicon Valley layoffs occurred and tech stock lost value, cutting capital gains taxes. And there has been a notable exodus from the state not just among the ultra-wealthy but by businesses, due to the combination of high taxes, stringent regulations, and elevated costs for labor, utilities, and energy.

    Another contributor to the budget deficit were huge payouts for unemployment benefits, which skyrocketed during the COVID lockdown and business shutdowns. The state’s unemployment fund was exhausted, requiring a loan from the federal government. Twenty-one billion dollars remains to be repaid, and the interest rate on the debt has gone up. To meet the unemployment burden, California legislators are considering quintupling unemployment taxes and nearly doubling benefits, but the result could be more layoffs and more businesses leaving the state.

    Plagued by Homelessness and Unemployment

    Meanwhile, the wealth divide in California is enormous, with the highest unemployment rate and homeless rate in the country. This is despite $24 billion being spent on the unhoused over the last five years. Thirty percent of the nation’s homeless live in California, and nearly nine million Californians are on the brink of being homeless. Housing is too expensive for low-wage earners and there is a lack of available low-cost housing. But well-meaning legislation to help low-wage earners has had unintended consequences.

    As of April 1, the minimum wage for fast food restaurant workers was raised by 25% to $20 an hour triggered by a strike by their union. But the move has negatively impacted many of the workers. Fast food restaurant owners operate on thin profit margins; and to cover these new costs, they have had to reduce workers’ hours, raise customer prices, engage in massive worker layoffs, move out of state, or close their businesses altogether. Almost 10,000 fast food jobs have been lost in California just since the $20 minimum wage law was signed.

    As a result of these and other efforts to help low-wage earners, many vulnerable workers are suddenly finding or will find themselves out of a job.

    Compare North Dakota

    At the other end of the employment spectrum is North Dakota, which has the lowest unemployment rate in the country. As noted above, in a review of states with the healthiest budgets, U.S. News & World Report puts it at No. 1 in Budget Balancing and #1 in Short-term Fiscal Stability.  North Dakota’s budget for 2024-25 includes cuts in individual income taxes, including eliminating the state individual income tax for 60% of the population and a reduction in that tax for the other 40%. The result is projected to be a 1.5% flat rate income tax, the lowest in the nation. Again compare that to California, where the top state income tax is 14.4%, higher even than other states known for their tax burdens.

    North Dakota was the only state to fully escape the 2008-09 credit crisis, never slipping into the red. When the state did go over budget in 2001-02 due to the dot-com bust, the Bank of North Dakota (BND), the nation’s only state-owned bank, acted as a rainy day fund. To make up the budget shortfall, the bank declared an extra dividend for its state owner, and the next year the budget was back on track.

    The BND is more profitable than some of the largest Wall Street banks. Its latest Annual Report (for 2022) states that it had a record net income of $191.2 million that year, up $47 million from 2021. Its asset size also set a record, at $10.2 billion. The return on investment was a healthy 19%. As the BND’s principal depositor, the state must keep its funds in the bank by law, thus protecting the bank from a run on its deposits. The Standard & Poor’s credit rating for the BND is A+/stable. The S&P report states, “BND has one of the highest risk-adjusted capital (RAC) ratios for rated U.S. banks.”

    BND’s profitability has helped strengthen community banks and credit unions in North Dakota by making loans in partnership rather than in competition with them. In the Great Recession, it also bought loans from stressed local banks to prevent bank failures and keep the economy running smoothly. BND operates with very low overhead and stresses productive and local lending rather than lending to buy existing assets, the sort of speculative lending that leads to bubbles and busts.

    The State’s Deposits Are Safer in Its Own Bank

    The Bank of North Dakota was established in 1919 by a populist party of farmers who felt their farms were being foreclosed on unfairly by out-of-state bankers. They succeeded in bringing their state revenues back into their own bank, serving their own communities.

    North Dakota’s revenues are safer in its own bank than in the largest Wall Street banks, which “insure” their capital with interconnected derivatives backed by rehypothecated collateral. The Financial Stability Board has declared that practice to be risky, “as highlighted during the 2007-09 global financial crisis.” The five largest Wall Street depository banks hold $223 trillion in derivatives, or 83 percent of all the derivatives at 4,600 banks; and they have a combined half trillion dollars in commercial real estate loans, also very risky in the current financial environment.

    Today most government funds are deposited in these SIFIs (Systemically Important Financial Institutions), putting the deposits at risk. Under the Dodd Frank Act of 2010, a SIFI that goes bankrupt will not be bailed out by the government but will be recapitalized by “bail ins” – confiscating the funds of the bank’s creditors, including “secured” depositors such as state and local governments. Under the Bankruptcy Act of 2005, derivative and repo claims have seniority and could easily wipe out all of the capital of a SIFI. The details are complicated, but the threat is real and imminent. See my earlier articles here and here, David Rodgers Webb’s The Great Taking, and Chris Martenson’s excellent series drilling down into the obscure legalese of the enabling legislation, concluding here.

    Even if the SIFIs remain solvent, they are not using state deposits and investments for the benefit of the people; and often they are betting against us. The BND, by contrast, is mandated to use its revenues for the benefit of the North Dakota public.

    California Could Replicate the BND Model with Its Infrastructure and Development Bank

    California already has an Infrastructure and Economic Development Bank (I-Bank), but it is not a true depository bank able to take deposits and leverage its capital. According to its website:

    IBank was created in 1994 to finance public infrastructure and private development that promote a healthy climate for jobs, contribute to a strong economy, and improve the quality of life in California communities. IBank is located within the Governor’s Office of Business and Economic Development and is governed by a five-member Board of Directors. IBank has broad authority to issue tax-exempt and taxable revenue bonds, provide financing to public agencies, provide credit enhancements, acquire or lease facilities, leverage state and federal funds and provide loan guarantees and other credit enhancements to small businesses.

    Its Infrastructure State Revolving Fund (ISRF) Program provides loans only to public entities (municipalities, counties, Joint Power Authorities, pension funds), but it also has a Small Business Financing Center (SBFC) that provides loan guarantees through independent agencies for businesses and farms having trouble accessing loans, among other outreach services. The ISRF is a revolving fund, limited to lending its base capital. It engages to some extent in leverage, but it’s the riskier version called “rehypothecation” (relending of existing collateral). As explained by Stan I-Bank’s first Executive Director Stan Hazelroth in a 2013 article:

    When you loan $100 to an electric utility, say, to build new infrastructure, they take money from ratepayers and pay that loan back over time. These payments, based on the history of utility ratepayers over decades, are very reliable—so reliable, in fact, that bond buyers will loan money secured by the promise of those ratepayers to pay the utilities back over time.

    The utility with the right to be paid back $100 can pledge those aggregate payments and secure an additional loan of, say, $80. When that loan begins to be paid back, bond buyers will loan you another, say, $60, which can also be loaned out. With just $100 in cash, in other words, you can loan out $240.

    Thus a contract becomes a security, which can act as collateral for another loan and another for the lender. But reuse of the same asset for multiple loans can go only so far. Chartered at a 10% capital requirement, depository banks can issue up to ten times their capital in loans. (In 2020 the Fed lifted the capital requirement altogether, but 10% is still considered a prudent ratio.)

    Banks do need to back withdrawals with reserves, which they acquire from their incoming deposits or by borrowing from other banks or the Federal Reserve; but the state has plenty of deposits to serve that function. Any bank in which the state deposits its revenues will back its loans with those deposits, and the I-Bank’s loans are actually safer and better for the public interest than those of the big Wall Street banks. If the I-Bank were to become the state’s banker and its reserve account were overdrawn, it would have the same protections afforded by the Federal Reserve system to all chartered banks: it could borrow reserves from other banks, the repo market, or the Fed itself. The BND is not a member of the Federal Reserve but has a master account with it, allowing the bank to transfer funds with other banks in the system and to act as a “mini- Fed” for the state, providing correspondent banking services to North Dakota’s many community banks.

    One thing California and North Dakota have in common is that they are both big agricultural states. The BND helps its farmers with a variety of low-interest loans. Although most of its loans are in collaboration with local banks, two loans it makes directly are the Beginning Farmer Real Estate Loan and Established Farmer Real Estate Loan. California’s struggling farmers could benefit from that sort of direct aid as well.

    The state itself could also realize significant savings from its I-Bank if the bank’s loan capacity were expanded. I was unable to nail down the current comparative figures for loans, but here is an example from an article I wrote in Yes Magazine in 2018:

    Financing infrastructure through the municipal bond market accounts for half the cost of infrastructure due to the debt load involved. One example where this is made clear is with Proposition 68, a statewide ballot measure that voters approved in the June 5 primary election which authorizes $4.1 billion in bonds for parks, environmental, and flood protection programs. The true cost of the measure is $200 million per year over 40 years in additional interest, bringing the total to $8 billion. California’s IBank, which funds infrastructure at 3 percent, could finance the same bill over 30 years for $2.1 billion—a nearly 50 percent reduction.

    The Golden State as Trendsetter: Time to Form a Bank

    In 2019, two bills were brought to convert California’s I-Bank into a depository bank, one in the Senate, SB 528 (Hueso), and one in the Assembly, AB 310 (Santiago). SB 528 sought simply to convert the I-Bank to a depository ban. It passed the first two committees but was “suspended” in Appropriations. The second bill, AB 310, sought to extend the I-Bank’s services directly to underserved individuals and businesses. It was opposed by the state treasurer and the state controller on grounds that it was too risky, and it failed. But California State Treasurer Fiona Ma said in her opposition letter to AB 310 that she was sympathetic to its goals, and that “I respectfully propose AB 310 be amended, replacing the current language with a mandate to develop a feasibility study to be conducted by an independent, apolitical expert source. The technical experts in my office can assist to build the framework of the study as the state’s banker.”

    There is actually no need to change the I-Bank’s existing programs, since it already has a variety of programs that help the underserved indirectly. Simply converting it to a depository bank would extend the reach of its existing services (for which there is currently excess demand), expand its profitability, reduce the cost of infrastructure and development for state and local government agencies, and protect any revenues deposited in it from a sudden crisis in the conventional banking system.

    The remedy for unemployment is employment, and the remedy for the unhoused is affordable housing. An I-Bank expanded into a state-owned depository bank could provide both.

    This article was first posted as an original to ScheerPost.com.

    The post Tackling California’s Budget Crisis: Raise Taxes, Cut Programs, or Form a Bank? first appeared on Dissident Voice.


    This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Ellen Brown.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/05/09/tackling-californias-budget-crisis-raise-taxes-cut-programs-or-form-a-bank/feed/ 0 473740
    U.S. Government Seeks “Unified Vision of Unauthorized Movement” https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/12/u-s-government-seeks-unified-vision-of-unauthorized-movement/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/12/u-s-government-seeks-unified-vision-of-unauthorized-movement/#respond Tue, 12 Mar 2024 18:25:14 +0000 https://theintercept.com/?p=463474

    As the immigration crisis continues and the Biden administration pursues a muscular enforcement strategy with an eye to public opinion and the 2024 presidential election, the Department of Homeland Security prospers. One obscure $6 billion program has grown silently: a network of over 1,000 surveillance towers built along America’s land borders, a system that it describes as “a unified vision of unauthorized movement.”

    A broad outline of the Biden administration’s plan to solve the immigration crisis in America was unveiled this week, including 5,800 new border and immigration security officers, a new $4.7 billion Southwest Border Contingency Fund, and more emergency authority for the president to shut down the border when needed. Moving forward on these programs will “save lives and bring order to the border,” President Joe Biden said in his State of the Union address last week.

    Homeland Security’s Fiscal Year 2025 budget request, released yesterday, includes $25.9 billion to “secure the border,” mostly through more government agents and more (and more capable) technology. Hidden in the fine print is the $6 billion tower surveillance program, one that has been in the works and growing since 2005 for years.

    The system is called Integrated Surveillance Towers, and it is projected to reach “full operational capability” in 2034, a network of over 1,000 manned and unmanned towers covering the thousands of miles that make up America’s northern and southern borders. IST includes four ever-growing programs: Autonomous Surveillance Towers (AST); Integrated Fixed Towers (IFT); Remote Video Surveillance System Upgrade (RVSS-U); and the Northern Border RVSS (NB-RVSS). The deployment of various towers have been going on so long, some are already obsolete, according to the DHS 2025 budget request.

    According to the Department of Homeland Security, IST detects and identifies “threats in near real time,” plugging up one gap that allows for “the exploitation of data collected by sensors, towers, drones, assets, agents, facilities, and other sources informing mission critical decisions in the field and at Headquarters.” Modern technology, including AI and “autonomous capabilities,” the Border Patrol says, is key to “keeping front-line personnel safer, more effective, and one step ahead” of border enemies.

    Towers are currently being built and netted together by Elbit America (part of Israel’s Elbit Systems), Advanced Technology Systems Company, and General Dynamics. Defense Daily reported in September that DHS plans to acquire about 277 new IST towers and upgrade about 191 legacy surveillance towers in the latest set of contracts. A January press release from General Dynamics celebrates the distinction of being named one of the three recipients of a piece of a $1.8 billion indefinite delivery/indefinite quantity contract: “The Consolidated Tower & Surveillance Equipment (CTSE) system consists of all fixed and relocatable sensor towers, and communications and power equipment necessary for CBP [Customs and Border Protection] to perform surveillance along the southern and northern borders of the United States.” The company says it may take up to 14 years to complete.

    The network of towers hosts various day and night capable cameras and radars, and can also be equipped with other sensors, including cellphone communications intercept devices, to paint a picture of hostile terrain below. The main focus of DHS today is to net all of the towers into “a single unified program” and integrate AI into the ability to detect movement and activity to create a “common operating picture.”

    Though billions have been spent on the IST program, government auditors have consistently questioned whether it actually reduces unlawful border crossings. A General Accountability Office assessment from 2018 concluded that the DHS was “not yet positioned to fully quantify the impact these technologies have on its mission,” that is, whether the towers actually help to stem the flow. The GAO then recommended that DHS establish better metrics to “more fully assess … progress in implementing the Southwest Border Technology Plan and determine when mission benefits have been realized.”

    A new GAO report issued last month updates progress on the IST program and says that finishing the network in Texas has been a problem. “According to the IST program manager,” the report reads, “… ease of access and willingness of property owners are key factors when considering sites for tower placement. The program manager stated that sites in the Laredo and Rio Grande Valley sectors … are still challenging because these areas need permissions from multiple landowners and road access may be an impediment.”

    Though the vast majority of undocumented immigrants cross the southern border at just a handful of locations, homeland security equally seeks to cover the entire Canadian border with towers, according to DHS documents. And not only that: Homeland security is eyeing the California coast and the coastal Atlantic for future expansion, portending a ubiquitous nationwide system of ground surveillance.

    ResearchAndMarkets.com’s November report on “Border Security Technologies”says that the market will exceed $70 billion globally in 2027, rising from $48 billion in 2022. “The adoption of AI-integrated surveillance towers will be critical to driving growth, with the total value of camera systems globally expected to reach $22.8 billion by 2027; up from $10.1 billion in 2022. Surveillance towers are capable of creating a virtual border, detecting, identifying, and tracking threats over great distances.”

    “AI-integrated surveillance towers are at the centre of growing concern by campaign groups regarding their potential to analyse the behaviour of the general population, possibly infringing upon people’s human rights. These concerns may slow adoption unless addressed,” the report says.

    Join The Conversation


    This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by Daniel Boguslaw.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/12/u-s-government-seeks-unified-vision-of-unauthorized-movement/feed/ 0 463772
    Republicans Vote to Advance Budget With Trump-Arrington Death Panel for Social Security https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/07/republicans-vote-to-advance-budget-with-trump-arrington-death-panel-for-social-security/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/07/republicans-vote-to-advance-budget-with-trump-arrington-death-panel-for-social-security/#respond Thu, 07 Mar 2024 19:21:54 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/republicans-vote-to-advance-budget-with-trump-arrington-death-panel-for-social-security

    "We saw just how willing Republicans are to sell out American families in order to continue giving trillions in tax cuts to price gouging corporations and the ultrarich," Boyle said. "And we saw just how hellbent they are on gutting critical programs—raising the cost of living and pushing the middle class out of reach for hardworking families."

    "Budget Committee Democrats know who we're fighting for. That's why we proposed amendments that would have protected Social Security and Medicare, prevented Republicans from raising healthcare costs, and defended American families against the devastating cuts in this budget resolution," he continued. "By voting for this dangerous budget and by rejecting our amendments today, committee Republicans have made it clear who they're fighting for—the wealthy and the well-connected."

    "The commission is designed to slash vital earned benefits through a fast-track, closed-door process, intended to allow Republicans to avoid political accountability."

    The committee vote came as President Joe Biden prepared to deliver his third State of the Union speech at 9:00 pm ET. The Democrat is a fierce critic of the GOP's proposed "death panel," as the White House and other opponents call the commission. He is seeking reelection in November and is expected to face former Republican President Donald Trump.

    "After hearing Budget Committee Republicans tell us how they'll take us backward, I look forward to hearing President Biden tell us how he'll keep America moving forward at the State of the Union tonight," said Boyle. The congressman was not alone in referencing the Thursday night address in remarks about the GOP attack on key programs.

    Social Security Works president Nancy Altman said that "at tonight's State of the Union, President Joe Biden has a golden opportunity to slam the Trump-Arrington death panel. In addition, Biden should renew his promise to protect and expand Social Security—and pay for it by taxing the ultrarich. Then the American people will know which party stands with them and which party stands with the billionaire class."

    "The commission is designed to slash vital earned benefits through a fast-track, closed-door process, intended to allow Republicans to avoid political accountability," Altman stressed. "Every Republican who voted for this budget voted to cut Social Security and Medicare."

    "This markup comes two days after Donald Trump enthusiastically endorsed Chairman Arrington," she noted. "Arrington is a fervent supporter of the death panel commission, and wants to attach it to must-pass government spending bills. By endorsing Arrington, Trump has endorsed the Social Security death panel."

    Max Richtman, president and CEO of the National Committee to Preserve Social Security and Medicare, also took aim at not only the committee's Republicans but also Trump, referencing the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act that he signed into law in 2017.

    "MAGA House Republicans are demonstrating their hostility to working Americans and retirees via their fiscal year 2025 budget resolution," he said. "The MAGA budget includes trillions of dollars in cuts to domestic spending while extending the Trump/GOP tax giveaways to the wealthy and profitable corporations that swelled the debt."

    Richtman called the commission "equally troubling," adding that "we fiercely oppose such a commission as a scheme for cutting seniors' earned benefits while shielding members of Congress from accountability."

    "Social Security and Medicare Part A do not contribute to the debt. Seniors' earned benefits should be protected from a commission that would fast-track benefit cuts," he argued. "If MAGA Republicans really want to reduce the debt, they should start by letting the Trump tax cuts expire. Current and future seniors on fixed incomes should not be punished for the GOP's fiscal recklessness."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/07/republicans-vote-to-advance-budget-with-trump-arrington-death-panel-for-social-security/feed/ 0 462859
    The Budget is great for landlords but a disaster for renters https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/06/the-budget-is-great-for-landlords-but-a-disaster-for-renters/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/06/the-budget-is-great-for-landlords-but-a-disaster-for-renters/#respond Wed, 06 Mar 2024 18:04:29 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/jeremy-hunt-spring-budget-renting-crisis-evictions/
    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by Ruby Lott-Lavigna.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/03/06/the-budget-is-great-for-landlords-but-a-disaster-for-renters/feed/ 0 462475
    West Papua advocacy group condemns arrest, ‘humiliation’ of two teenagers https://www.radiofree.org/2024/02/26/west-papua-advocacy-group-condemns-arrest-humiliation-of-two-teenagers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/02/26/west-papua-advocacy-group-condemns-arrest-humiliation-of-two-teenagers/#respond Mon, 26 Feb 2024 04:30:30 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=97367 Asia Pacific Report

    An Australian-based West Papua advocacy group has condemned the arrest and “humiliation” of two teenagers by Indonesian security forces last week.

    The head of Cartenz 2024 Peace Operations, Kombes Faizal Ramadhani, said in a statement on Friday that the 15-year-olds had been arrested after a clash with the West Papua National Liberation Army (TPNPB) in Kali Brasa on Thursday, February 22.

    During the shootout, a TPNPB member named as Otniel Giban (alias Bolong Giban) had been killed.

    The Sydney-based Australia West Papua Association (AWPA) today condemned the arrest of the teenagers, only identified by the Indonesian authorities by their initials MH and BGE and who were initially seized as “suspects” but later described as “witnesses”.

    Faizal said that the teenagers had been arrested because they were suspected of being members of the TPNPB group and that they were currently being detained at the Damai Cartenz military post.

    However, the TPNPB declared that the two teenagers were not members of the TPNPB and were ordinary civilians.

    The teenagers were arrested when they were crossing the Brasa River in the Yahukimo Regency.

    Aircraft shot at
    The clash between security forces and the TNPB occurred while the Cartenz Peacekeeping Operation-2024 searched for those responsible for shooting at an aircraft in Yahukimo in which a military member had been wounded.

    Meanwhile, also in Jakarta last Friday the Australian Deputy Prime Minister and Defence Minister, Richard Marles, met with Indonesian Defence Minister Prabowo Subianto — who is poised to win this month’s Indonesian presidential election.

    Marles stressed at a media conference at the Defence Ministry that Australia did not support the Free Papua Movement, saying the country “fully recognise[d] Indonesia’s territorial sovereignty”.

    “We do not endorse any independence movement,” he told a media conference.

    However, in Sydney AWPA’s Joe Collins said in a statement: “I was at first surprised that West Papua even got a mention at the meeting as usually Australia tries to ignore the issue but even our Defence Minister can hardly ignore a media question on it.”

    ‘No support for any independence movements’
    An extract from the media conference says:

    Subianto: “Thank you very much. I don’t think there is any need for questions. Questions?”

    Journalist:Thank you very much Mr Deputy Prime Minister. Regarding the huge amount of [the] Australian defence budget, how should the Indonesian people see it? Is it going to be a trap or an opportunity for our national interest?

    “And my second question is what is Australia’s standpoint regarding the separatist [pro-independence] movement in Papua because there are some voices from Australia concern[ed] about human rights violations?”

    Marles: “Thank you for the question. Let me do the second issue first. We, Australia utterly recognise the territorial sovereignty of Indonesia, full stop. And there is no support for any independence movements.

    “We support the territorial sovereignty of Indonesia. And that includes those provinces being part of Indonesia. No ifs, no buts. And I want to be very clear about that.”

    Collins said there was no shortage of comments during the delegation’s visit to Indonesian around how important the relationship was.

    “West Papua will remain the elephant in the room in the Australia-Indonesian relationship,” Collins said. “We can expect many hiccups in the relationship over West Papua in the coming years “.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/02/26/west-papua-advocacy-group-condemns-arrest-humiliation-of-two-teenagers/feed/ 0 460580
    Budget restaurant serves up meals for Yangon’s poor | Radio Free Asia (RFA) https://www.radiofree.org/2024/01/05/budget-restaurant-serves-up-meals-for-yangons-poor-radio-free-asia-rfa/ https://www.radiofree.org/2024/01/05/budget-restaurant-serves-up-meals-for-yangons-poor-radio-free-asia-rfa/#respond Fri, 05 Jan 2024 17:13:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7a254bd737b52c3bf058efa4f4753884
    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Radio Free Asia.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2024/01/05/budget-restaurant-serves-up-meals-for-yangons-poor-radio-free-asia-rfa/feed/ 0 449708
    England could have built 22% more social homes last year with Rwanda budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/12/15/england-could-have-built-22-more-social-homes-last-year-with-rwanda-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/12/15/england-could-have-built-22-more-social-homes-last-year-with-rwanda-budget/#respond Fri, 15 Dec 2023 16:31:48 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/rwanda-deal-home-office-social-housing-400m/
    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by Adam Bychawski.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/12/15/england-could-have-built-22-more-social-homes-last-year-with-rwanda-budget/feed/ 0 445991
    ‘Up in arms’ USP staff challenge vice-chancellor’s stay in Samoa https://www.radiofree.org/2023/11/29/up-in-arms-usp-staff-challenge-vice-chancellors-stay-in-samoa/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/11/29/up-in-arms-usp-staff-challenge-vice-chancellors-stay-in-samoa/#respond Wed, 29 Nov 2023 20:47:09 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=95123 By Alexander Rheeney in Apia

    Disgruntled staff at the University of South Pacific (USP) are demanding the USP Council make a decision on the relocation of the vice-chancellor, Professor Pal Ahluwalia, to Fiji from Samoa.

    The demands from the USP staff coincide with the university’s two-day 96th council meeting at the Laucala campus’s Japan ICT Building earlier this week.

    In an email that was sent to regional media last Friday, including the Samoa Observer, the staff said they were “up in arms” over the decision by the university’s pro-chancellor to block a submission from the staff to the agenda of the council’s meeting.

    “The paper is in response to the decision of the May 2023 USP Council (C95) meeting where its attention was drawn to the many unresolved issues faced by the staff over the period 2021 to May 2023 and some earlier, despite meetings of the staff policy committee and SMT/union quarterly meetings which are chaired by VCP [vice-chancellor and president],” read the statement issued by the university staff.

    “University management only found it necessary to respond to issues when the Association of USP Staff (AUSPS) filed a log of claims in October 2023. The VCP then appointed the chief operating officer and the executive director people and workforce strategy to engage with the union.”

    According to the USP staff, two meetings were held to respond to the decision of the May Council for the university management and the unions to work together to address the issues and to report and update the November (C96) council.

    A paper was then submitted for the November 2023 council agenda containing updates on resolved and unresolved issues in response to the council’s decision and new issues that have come to light since C95.

    Paper ‘cannot be tabled’
    However, the staff said that on November 20 the secretary to the council informed the council staff representative that the pro-chancellor and chair of the council had directed him to inform her that after reviewing the paper, “it cannot be tabled at the 96th council meeting” because “the issues raised therein are not for council to deliberate on”.

    University of the South Pacific protesting in black
    University of the South Pacific staff protesting in black with placards calling for “fair pay” and for vice-chancellor Professor Ahluwalia to resign. Image: Association of USP Staff (AUSPS)

    They added that the pro-chancellor had directed that these be worked on with the USP management!

    “She failed to acknowledge that the paper contained responses to May council decision and that there are issues such as the salary adjustment that the management has refused to discuss or negotiate on.

    “PC [pro-chancellor] then proceeded to state that the council does not deal with matters of salary adjustment. Precedent has been set where the council has approved salary adjustments.”

    Fiji’s national broadcaster FBC on Tuesday reported that the president of AUSPS, Elizabeth Read Fong, had questioned why Professor Ahluwalia continued to live in Samoa despite the Fiji government lifting the ban that the former Fijian government had placed on him.

    Fong reportedly said that the logical choice would be for the university’s vice-chancellor and president to return to his office at the main headquarters of the USP in Laucala Bay, Suva, and appealed to the Samoa government to facilitate the release of the vice-chancellor.

    She said the regional university continued to spend a lot on Professor Ahluwalia’s travel and accommodation expenses every time he travelled to Suva from Samoa.

    The Samoa Observer has contacted the USP vice-chancellor for comment on the concerns that the USP staff members have raised.

    Many USP staff dressed in black protested for two days over their grievances with the vice-chancellor.

    Alexander Rheeney is editor of the Samoa Observer. Republished with permission.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/11/29/up-in-arms-usp-staff-challenge-vice-chancellors-stay-in-samoa/feed/ 0 442550
    High Budget Sleaze https://www.radiofree.org/2023/11/26/high-budget-sleaze/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/11/26/high-budget-sleaze/#respond Sun, 26 Nov 2023 06:25:59 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=305984 Now I see in Blonde the seed of the next six or seven years in American pop culture. The austere, bland, and politically correct atmosphere that ruled the 2010s was fading, its reign was extended a bit by the coronavirus pandemic. Blonde is not an objectionable film because its director doesn’t like, or possibly even understand Marilyn Monroe movies. It may be a bad film, but it becomes more and more interesting with time.

    To read this article, log in here or subscribe here.

    If you are logged in but can't read CP+ articles, check the status of your access here

    In order to read CP+ articles, your web browser must be set to accept cookies.

    More

    The post High Budget Sleaze appeared first on CounterPunch.org.

    ]]>
    To read this article, log in here or subscribe here.
    If you are logged in but can't read CP+ articles, check the status of your access here
    In order to read CP+ articles, your web browser must be set to accept cookies.

    The post High Budget Sleaze appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Nicky Otis Smith.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/11/26/high-budget-sleaze/feed/ 0 441767
    NZ election 2023: Bryce Edwards: The most hollow campaign in living memory https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/24/nz-election-2023-bryce-edwards-the-most-hollow-campaign-in-living-memory/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/24/nz-election-2023-bryce-edwards-the-most-hollow-campaign-in-living-memory/#respond Sun, 24 Sep 2023 23:22:24 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=93551 ANALYSIS: By Dr Bryce Edwards

    The 2023 general election campaign must be the most hollow in living memory. There really isn’t much that is positive or attractive about the electoral options on offer. This is an election without inspiration.

    There is a definite gloominess among the public right now — with a perception that not only is the country broken in many ways, but the political system is too.

    We see this most strongly in surveys that ask if the country is on the right track or not.

    Dr Bryce Edwards
    Political scientist Dr Bryce Edwards. Image: Evening Report

    Generally, New Zealand has flipped in a few short years from having about two-thirds of the public saying the country is headed in the right direction, to now having two-thirds saying we’re going the wrong way.

    Journalists and politicians report that out on the campaign trail they are discovering that the public is angrier than ever.

    Mark Blackham reported last week that “MPs are encountering angry people — a general anger about the state of affairs and paucity of political choices.”

    Stuff journalist Julie Jacobson summed up the political mood in the weekend as “Disillusioned, demoralised, disenchanted, disgruntled”. And she argues this has only increased during the campaign: “What was a low hum has become a sustained grumble.”

    ‘Out of love’
    Jacobson reports that across the political spectrum people are “out of love with what’s currently on offer.”

    Certainly, much of what the politicians are offering is extremely grim. For example, both Labour and National are promising to slash billions of dollars from public services.

    This promised austerity drive reflects a reality that the government’s books are empty, with no room for additional new spending. Hence Prime Minister Chris Hipkins has openly said that this election can’t be one for big spending policies.

    Hipkins has gone from promising “bread and butter” reforms to, as leftwing political commentator Chris Trotter points out, being committed “to less butter and thinner bread for at least the next three years.”

    Trotter says, in general, there’s not much for the public to positively vote for, and instead people will vote negatively – choosing whoever they regard as the best of a bad bunch.

    Hence, “This is not going to be a happy election.”

    For traditional leftwing voters, Labour’s austerity programme is a major disappointment, as it goes hand in hand with opposition to any real tax reform that might collect more revenue for public services and infrastructure.

    Strong suspicion
    Likewise, on the right, there is a strong suspicion that National’s tax cuts are simply unaffordable. The policy is being called out by the likes of rightwing political commentator Matthew Hooton as being unprincipled and incompetent, and by the Taxpayers Union as foolhardy.

    There is also growing scepticism that some of the bigger policy promises are electoral bribes that can’t be delivered. Hooton says that a “cynical electorate” sees many of these policies as empty promises — especially because voters have got used to being lied to or misled by politicians who don’t deliver their promises once in power.

    He suggests that voters are right to be cynical because New Zealand has had “15 years of people hearing promises from politicians which are platitudes on the face of it and they haven’t even been delivered to that extent”.

    Similarly, Stuff journalist Andrea Vance argued in the weekend that “Voters know when they are being used”, suggesting that the “bribes” being offered don’t compute for voters. Vance says politicians are promising to slash “public services and spending — in the name of savings and efficiencies — when they are already stretched and degraded.”

    Voters shouldn’t have confidence, she suggests, that the next government will be able to meet the existing needs of public services, let alone start fixing the severe deficits in infrastructure and services. Fundamentally there is a credibility gap between politician promises to cut spending but to properly maintain all “front-line” services.

    Politicians aren’t up to challenge
    Voters are aware that we’re in something of a “polycrisis”, and the status quo is unsustainable.

    Political pollster Peter Stahel wrote last week that there is “an unmistakable mood for change” based on a “strong undercurrent of dissatisfaction, driven by personal financial hardships and an uncertain economic outlook”.

    His company’s polling show “only 29 percent of voters say the current options for prime minister appeal, with nearly half (46 percent) saying they don’t.”

    There’s a cost of living crisis, failing public health and education systems, a housing crisis, a climate crisis — the list goes on. As Newstalk’s Mike Hosking says, “There is no shortage of serious, worryingly serious, issues to discuss this campaign”, but the politicians are largely missing in action.

    Because the politicians haven’t risen to the challenge, the contrast between what is desperately needed and what is on offer has never been so great. The public is right to be disenchanted — parties are mostly just offering sniping and petty criticisms of their opponents.

    As political commentator Josie Pagani has put it, “This is an election of parties wrestling on the ground, when we crave a new Jerusalem.”

    Pagani says “We have gone from ‘Hope and Change’ to ‘Perhaps Just a Biscuit’.” Whereas in previous elections, parties ran on a programme of grand causes, this time around, issues like child poverty and the housing crisis are being ignored by politicians.

    Former Labour leader David Cunliffe appears to agree — he went on Breakfast TV on Thursday to say that “voters are grumpy. They don’t think that either party is really hitting the nail on the head in terms of what’s worrying them.”

    Similarly, business commentator Bruce Cotterill wrote in the Herald last week that the campaign has been highly disappointing so far because it’s more about attack ads and petty sniping than about illuminating the big issues and the policies that the parties have for fixing them.

    He laments the lack of debate about the crises in the health and education systems, and says problems like housing waiting lists and child poverty have been virtually ignored.

    Hooton also says this avoidance of the big issues is a tragedy, especially since we are now in what he argues is the worst economic crisis in decades.

    An uninspiring election campaign
    In lieu of being focused on the things that matter, the politicians are becoming more aggressive, threatening to turn this year’s campaign into the most negative in living memory.

    Press gallery journalist Glenn McConnell reports that as we go into the last month of the campaign its “becoming more feral”. He says the politicians are largely to blame: “Nobody is running a wholesome forward-looking, solutions focused campaign. They are frothing to attack, attack, attack.”

    The lacklustre nature of the parties is reflected in their campaign slogans according to Jacinda Ardern’s former chief of staff Mike Munro. He says none of them are original, because “every variation of wording around concepts like change, hope, aspiration, unity and the future have been previously used on party billboards”.

    And he argues that the parties are incredibly risk-adverse this election, being determined to stage-manage every element of the campaign and the candidates, reducing any chance of life in the election.

    Is this therefore the most uninspiring election ever? Writing on Sunday, journalist Andrea Vance asks: “Has there been a duller election campaign in recent memory?” She labels it “the election of The Great Uninterested” because people seem to be turning away in boredom or disgust.

    Vance says: “It’s not just that voters are bored. They’ve stopped listening.”

    Political commentator and former Cabinet Minister Peter Dunne is also amazed at the lacklustre performances of the politicians so far – especially Hipkins and Luxon who are in the fight for their political careers.

    He says, given the big issues at stake, “Neither Hipkins nor Luxon has so far shown sufficient passion or boldness to convince New Zealanders they have what it takes to be an effective prime minister in the difficult years ahead.”

    Election fatigue and low voter turnout
    Do you wish the election was over already? You are probably in good company. This year there is no apparent enthusiasm for the campaign. You’ll notice that there aren’t many pictures or videos of politicians being swamped on the campaign trail, signing autographs or having mass selfies with fans — as occurred in recent elections.

    Young people, in particular, seem unimpressed this time around. According to political scientist Richard Shaw, the students he teaches are losing faith in the New Zealand political system.

    He says that they are part of a growing cohort who are now “over” politics. Shaw is also picking that voter turnout is going to be low this election.

    So, could the most popular choice at the coming election be “none of the above”? Certainly, the number of eligible voters who choose not to vote in the upcoming election could surpass a million, effectively making it the most popular option in 2023.

    Voter turnout has generally been trending down in recent decades, and it hit a low of only 69.6 percent at the 2011 election. That low turnout was generally because none of the parties were offering much that was inspiring, and no one expected the result to be close. Hence, one third of the electorate turned away in that election in disgust, apathy, or whatever.

    The fact that the politicians and debate have become more aggressive and divisive puts people off. Other commentators are also now picking a decline too.

    David Cunliffe says: “Expect a record low turnout, and expect a record low vote share for Labour and National combined, and the highest ever share for the [minor] parties on both sides of politics.”

    Leftwing columnist Verity Johnson has also written recently about the political despair among the public, predicting an extremely low voter turnout: “I’ve lost count of the people I’ve spoken to this week (smart, articulate and historically politically engaged people) who aren’t planning on voting in October. What’s the point, they shrug, there’s no one to vote for.”

    Johnson says that the rising fury in New Zealand society is very tangible: “if you go into the suburbs and listen closely, you can hear an ominous hiss of fury rising up like a gas leak.”

    She suggests that this disenchantment is rational, and that there’s now little hope that politics can fix the problems of New Zealand: “Whatever happens on October 14, it feels like there’s just gonna be another 3 years of muddling, myopic, middle management politics where we have our head up our ass and our ecosystem on fire.”

    Is politics in New Zealand broken?
    Given the declining trust and participation in politics and the electoral process, this might signal that something is wrong in New Zealand’s democracy.

    Of course, this is a problem all over the world at the moment, with rising dissatisfaction and a sense that elites and vested interests dominate. There is a huge mood of change everywhere.

    Chris Trotter says that most politicians haven’t caught up with the new Zeitgeist. He reports on a new book exploring the decline of politics, written by former British Tory Cabinet Minister Rory Stewart, which reflects on how the political system has hollowed out.

    Here’s the key quote that Trotter cites from the book, suggesting it could well come from a minister in the current New Zealand government: “I had discovered how grotesquely unqualified so many of us, including myself, were for the offices we were given… It was a culture that prized campaigning over careful governing, opinion polls over detailed policy debates, announcements over implementation.”

    Similarly, writing about how dire the current election campaign is, Matthew Hooton says New Zealand’s political system is effectively broken because the parties simply aren’t serious vehicles for political change anymore.

    He argues that they have been captured by careerists, consultants and lobbyists seeking power: “That is, they are not concerned with achieving power to make anything better. They are focussed merely on achieving office, to enjoy the status and perks.

    “This is why they feel no need to do real work between elections, before which they release pseudo-policies, written the night before, often by external lobbyists or consultants, that they can’t and won’t deliver — and which they don’t care whether or not are delivered anyway.”

    Dr Bryce Edwards is a political scientist and an independent analyst with The Democracy Project. He writes a regular column titled Political Roundup in Evening Report.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/24/nz-election-2023-bryce-edwards-the-most-hollow-campaign-in-living-memory/feed/ 0 429514
    NZ election 2023: Bryce Edwards: The most hollow campaign in living memory https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/24/nz-election-2023-bryce-edwards-the-most-hollow-campaign-in-living-memory-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/24/nz-election-2023-bryce-edwards-the-most-hollow-campaign-in-living-memory-2/#respond Sun, 24 Sep 2023 23:22:24 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=93551 ANALYSIS: By Dr Bryce Edwards

    The 2023 general election campaign must be the most hollow in living memory. There really isn’t much that is positive or attractive about the electoral options on offer. This is an election without inspiration.

    There is a definite gloominess among the public right now — with a perception that not only is the country broken in many ways, but the political system is too.

    We see this most strongly in surveys that ask if the country is on the right track or not.

    Dr Bryce Edwards
    Political scientist Dr Bryce Edwards. Image: Evening Report

    Generally, New Zealand has flipped in a few short years from having about two-thirds of the public saying the country is headed in the right direction, to now having two-thirds saying we’re going the wrong way.

    Journalists and politicians report that out on the campaign trail they are discovering that the public is angrier than ever.

    Mark Blackham reported last week that “MPs are encountering angry people — a general anger about the state of affairs and paucity of political choices.”

    Stuff journalist Julie Jacobson summed up the political mood in the weekend as “Disillusioned, demoralised, disenchanted, disgruntled”. And she argues this has only increased during the campaign: “What was a low hum has become a sustained grumble.”

    ‘Out of love’
    Jacobson reports that across the political spectrum people are “out of love with what’s currently on offer.”

    Certainly, much of what the politicians are offering is extremely grim. For example, both Labour and National are promising to slash billions of dollars from public services.

    This promised austerity drive reflects a reality that the government’s books are empty, with no room for additional new spending. Hence Prime Minister Chris Hipkins has openly said that this election can’t be one for big spending policies.

    Hipkins has gone from promising “bread and butter” reforms to, as leftwing political commentator Chris Trotter points out, being committed “to less butter and thinner bread for at least the next three years.”

    Trotter says, in general, there’s not much for the public to positively vote for, and instead people will vote negatively – choosing whoever they regard as the best of a bad bunch.

    Hence, “This is not going to be a happy election.”

    For traditional leftwing voters, Labour’s austerity programme is a major disappointment, as it goes hand in hand with opposition to any real tax reform that might collect more revenue for public services and infrastructure.

    Strong suspicion
    Likewise, on the right, there is a strong suspicion that National’s tax cuts are simply unaffordable. The policy is being called out by the likes of rightwing political commentator Matthew Hooton as being unprincipled and incompetent, and by the Taxpayers Union as foolhardy.

    There is also growing scepticism that some of the bigger policy promises are electoral bribes that can’t be delivered. Hooton says that a “cynical electorate” sees many of these policies as empty promises — especially because voters have got used to being lied to or misled by politicians who don’t deliver their promises once in power.

    He suggests that voters are right to be cynical because New Zealand has had “15 years of people hearing promises from politicians which are platitudes on the face of it and they haven’t even been delivered to that extent”.

    Similarly, Stuff journalist Andrea Vance argued in the weekend that “Voters know when they are being used”, suggesting that the “bribes” being offered don’t compute for voters. Vance says politicians are promising to slash “public services and spending — in the name of savings and efficiencies — when they are already stretched and degraded.”

    Voters shouldn’t have confidence, she suggests, that the next government will be able to meet the existing needs of public services, let alone start fixing the severe deficits in infrastructure and services. Fundamentally there is a credibility gap between politician promises to cut spending but to properly maintain all “front-line” services.

    Politicians aren’t up to challenge
    Voters are aware that we’re in something of a “polycrisis”, and the status quo is unsustainable.

    Political pollster Peter Stahel wrote last week that there is “an unmistakable mood for change” based on a “strong undercurrent of dissatisfaction, driven by personal financial hardships and an uncertain economic outlook”.

    His company’s polling show “only 29 percent of voters say the current options for prime minister appeal, with nearly half (46 percent) saying they don’t.”

    There’s a cost of living crisis, failing public health and education systems, a housing crisis, a climate crisis — the list goes on. As Newstalk’s Mike Hosking says, “There is no shortage of serious, worryingly serious, issues to discuss this campaign”, but the politicians are largely missing in action.

    Because the politicians haven’t risen to the challenge, the contrast between what is desperately needed and what is on offer has never been so great. The public is right to be disenchanted — parties are mostly just offering sniping and petty criticisms of their opponents.

    As political commentator Josie Pagani has put it, “This is an election of parties wrestling on the ground, when we crave a new Jerusalem.”

    Pagani says “We have gone from ‘Hope and Change’ to ‘Perhaps Just a Biscuit’.” Whereas in previous elections, parties ran on a programme of grand causes, this time around, issues like child poverty and the housing crisis are being ignored by politicians.

    Former Labour leader David Cunliffe appears to agree — he went on Breakfast TV on Thursday to say that “voters are grumpy. They don’t think that either party is really hitting the nail on the head in terms of what’s worrying them.”

    Similarly, business commentator Bruce Cotterill wrote in the Herald last week that the campaign has been highly disappointing so far because it’s more about attack ads and petty sniping than about illuminating the big issues and the policies that the parties have for fixing them.

    He laments the lack of debate about the crises in the health and education systems, and says problems like housing waiting lists and child poverty have been virtually ignored.

    Hooton also says this avoidance of the big issues is a tragedy, especially since we are now in what he argues is the worst economic crisis in decades.

    An uninspiring election campaign
    In lieu of being focused on the things that matter, the politicians are becoming more aggressive, threatening to turn this year’s campaign into the most negative in living memory.

    Press gallery journalist Glenn McConnell reports that as we go into the last month of the campaign its “becoming more feral”. He says the politicians are largely to blame: “Nobody is running a wholesome forward-looking, solutions focused campaign. They are frothing to attack, attack, attack.”

    The lacklustre nature of the parties is reflected in their campaign slogans according to Jacinda Ardern’s former chief of staff Mike Munro. He says none of them are original, because “every variation of wording around concepts like change, hope, aspiration, unity and the future have been previously used on party billboards”.

    And he argues that the parties are incredibly risk-adverse this election, being determined to stage-manage every element of the campaign and the candidates, reducing any chance of life in the election.

    Is this therefore the most uninspiring election ever? Writing on Sunday, journalist Andrea Vance asks: “Has there been a duller election campaign in recent memory?” She labels it “the election of The Great Uninterested” because people seem to be turning away in boredom or disgust.

    Vance says: “It’s not just that voters are bored. They’ve stopped listening.”

    Political commentator and former Cabinet Minister Peter Dunne is also amazed at the lacklustre performances of the politicians so far – especially Hipkins and Luxon who are in the fight for their political careers.

    He says, given the big issues at stake, “Neither Hipkins nor Luxon has so far shown sufficient passion or boldness to convince New Zealanders they have what it takes to be an effective prime minister in the difficult years ahead.”

    Election fatigue and low voter turnout
    Do you wish the election was over already? You are probably in good company. This year there is no apparent enthusiasm for the campaign. You’ll notice that there aren’t many pictures or videos of politicians being swamped on the campaign trail, signing autographs or having mass selfies with fans — as occurred in recent elections.

    Young people, in particular, seem unimpressed this time around. According to political scientist Richard Shaw, the students he teaches are losing faith in the New Zealand political system.

    He says that they are part of a growing cohort who are now “over” politics. Shaw is also picking that voter turnout is going to be low this election.

    So, could the most popular choice at the coming election be “none of the above”? Certainly, the number of eligible voters who choose not to vote in the upcoming election could surpass a million, effectively making it the most popular option in 2023.

    Voter turnout has generally been trending down in recent decades, and it hit a low of only 69.6 percent at the 2011 election. That low turnout was generally because none of the parties were offering much that was inspiring, and no one expected the result to be close. Hence, one third of the electorate turned away in that election in disgust, apathy, or whatever.

    The fact that the politicians and debate have become more aggressive and divisive puts people off. Other commentators are also now picking a decline too.

    David Cunliffe says: “Expect a record low turnout, and expect a record low vote share for Labour and National combined, and the highest ever share for the [minor] parties on both sides of politics.”

    Leftwing columnist Verity Johnson has also written recently about the political despair among the public, predicting an extremely low voter turnout: “I’ve lost count of the people I’ve spoken to this week (smart, articulate and historically politically engaged people) who aren’t planning on voting in October. What’s the point, they shrug, there’s no one to vote for.”

    Johnson says that the rising fury in New Zealand society is very tangible: “if you go into the suburbs and listen closely, you can hear an ominous hiss of fury rising up like a gas leak.”

    She suggests that this disenchantment is rational, and that there’s now little hope that politics can fix the problems of New Zealand: “Whatever happens on October 14, it feels like there’s just gonna be another 3 years of muddling, myopic, middle management politics where we have our head up our ass and our ecosystem on fire.”

    Is politics in New Zealand broken?
    Given the declining trust and participation in politics and the electoral process, this might signal that something is wrong in New Zealand’s democracy.

    Of course, this is a problem all over the world at the moment, with rising dissatisfaction and a sense that elites and vested interests dominate. There is a huge mood of change everywhere.

    Chris Trotter says that most politicians haven’t caught up with the new Zeitgeist. He reports on a new book exploring the decline of politics, written by former British Tory Cabinet Minister Rory Stewart, which reflects on how the political system has hollowed out.

    Here’s the key quote that Trotter cites from the book, suggesting it could well come from a minister in the current New Zealand government: “I had discovered how grotesquely unqualified so many of us, including myself, were for the offices we were given… It was a culture that prized campaigning over careful governing, opinion polls over detailed policy debates, announcements over implementation.”

    Similarly, writing about how dire the current election campaign is, Matthew Hooton says New Zealand’s political system is effectively broken because the parties simply aren’t serious vehicles for political change anymore.

    He argues that they have been captured by careerists, consultants and lobbyists seeking power: “That is, they are not concerned with achieving power to make anything better. They are focussed merely on achieving office, to enjoy the status and perks.

    “This is why they feel no need to do real work between elections, before which they release pseudo-policies, written the night before, often by external lobbyists or consultants, that they can’t and won’t deliver — and which they don’t care whether or not are delivered anyway.”

    Dr Bryce Edwards is a political scientist and an independent analyst with The Democracy Project. He writes a regular column titled Political Roundup in Evening Report.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/24/nz-election-2023-bryce-edwards-the-most-hollow-campaign-in-living-memory-2/feed/ 0 429515
    Climate is the Fight of Our Lifetimes. The Federal Budget Should Reflect That https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/22/climate-is-the-fight-of-our-lifetimes-the-federal-budget-should-reflect-that/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/22/climate-is-the-fight-of-our-lifetimes-the-federal-budget-should-reflect-that/#respond Fri, 22 Sep 2023 05:50:20 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=295003 As the hottest summer in human history approached its end, tens of thousands of climate marchers rallied in New York to call for bold climate solutions. Meanwhile, lawmakers in Washington lurched toward another fight over the federal budget. More than ever, the U.S. needs to get serious about climate. And to do that, we need More

    The post Climate is the Fight of Our Lifetimes. The Federal Budget Should Reflect That appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Lindsay Kosgharian - Alliyah Lusuegro.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/22/climate-is-the-fight-of-our-lifetimes-the-federal-budget-should-reflect-that/feed/ 0 429234
    NZ election 2023: Both Labour and National face multimillion dollar ‘climate hole’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/22/nz-election-2023-both-labour-and-national-face-multimillion-dollar-climate-hole/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/22/nz-election-2023-both-labour-and-national-face-multimillion-dollar-climate-hole/#respond Fri, 22 Sep 2023 04:32:03 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=93433 By Eloise Gibson, RNZ climate change correspondent

    While attention is focused on economists finding a $500 million-a-year hole in National’s tax plans, a similar-sized hole in climate costings is hiding in plain sight — and it applies to Labour, too.

    National appears to have the bigger gap, however.

    The gulf was highlighted in the Pre-election Economic and Fiscal Update (PREFU) — Treasury’s official word on the state of the government’s books — which explicitly excluded the cost of meeting New Zealand’s international climate target under the Paris Agreement.

    Asked how they would pay this week, politicians gave unclear answers. But the obligation was still very real.

    Both Labour and National have said they are committed to meeting the country’s international climate target, known as an NDC (Nationally Determined Contributions).

    Under the Paris Agreement, which covers almost every nation on the planet, New Zealand has promised to cut emissions by 41 percent off 2005 levels by 2030. Exporters and carbon market experts say failing to meet that pledge could jeopardise international trade — nevermind the fact that following the Paris Agreement is humanity’s best hope for avoiding more expensive and deadly heating.

    New Zealand plans to meet its target in two ways. First, it will do as much as it can inside the country by meeting a set of “emissions budgets”.

    No way to meet target
    But when the Climate Change Commission ran the numbers, it concluded there was no way to meet the whole target with action at home. Because New Zealand started slow at tackling emissions, cutting transport, industry, farming and electricity emissions that quickly would cause too much economic pain, it concluded.

    PREFU briefing at Parliament
    The Pre-election Economic and Fiscal Update (PREFU) ignored the cost of meeting New Zealand’s Paris Agreement obligations. Image: RNZ/Angus Dreaver

    So there is also a second part to the target: buying carbon credits from overseas. Typically, economists assume this is cheaper than making cuts in emissions at home, though it depends on the project.

    While no purchases will be made until after the election, the kinds of things that could qualify include retiring coal boilers in developing countries, or planting forests.

    This is where the gap in the books comes in. Treasury had previously put the cost of buying these credits from overseas — and an estimated 100 million tonnes of them will be needed, at last count — at between $3.3 billion and more than $23 billion between now and 2030.

    Even at the lower end of projections, it could work out at around $500 million a year.

    Whichever way the government decides to do it, PREFU said the costs would be “significant” and will start biting “within the current fiscal forecast period”.

    As things stand, according to Climate Change Minister James Shaw, one or possibly two rounds of purchases could be made in the next four years, with a third and final “washup” at the end of the decade.

    Election may change timing
    The election could change the timing, but whoever is in government will be expected to start showing progress towards meeting their Paris target well before the end of the decade, said carbon market expert Christina Hood from Compass Climate.

    James Shaw at the ASB Great Debate in Queenstown
    Green Party’s James Shaw . . . one or possibly two rounds of purchases could be made in the next four years. Image: RNZ/Samuel Rillstone

    “There’s this common misconception that whoever the finance minister is in 2032 is going to have to get their chequebook out and square up by however much we missed by. It doesn’t work that way at all.

    “Every emission (saving) we count has to actually occur during those years (before 2030), so we need to get on with funding that.”

    Yet despite starting to fall due within the next four years, the costs did not appear as a liability on the government’s books. Nor do the major parties seem to be clear on how much to budget for them.

    Bold claims, few details
    This week, neither National nor Labour answered clearly how much they had planned to set aside for these costs nor how they intended to pay them. They instead focused their answers on wanting to cut planet-heating emissions more deeply inside New Zealand’s borders.

    At times, politicians seemed to confuse domestic emissions budgets with the $3 billion-plus added cost of buying offsets to meet the Paris target, or they made heroic statements about how much they could do onshore, without supplying the figures behind them.

    A quick reminder: the 100-odd million tonnes in overseas offsets that it was estimated we would need were on top of meeting New Zealand’s domestic emissions budgets, not instead of it. Only a truly incredible effort could meet the entire amount inside the country, requiring deep and fast climate action on a scale neither party has hinted at.

    Currently, New Zealand is not even on track to meet its domestic emissions budgets, as Climate Change Commission chief executive Jo Hendy told a business and climate conference in Auckland this week.

    “Latest projections show we are not on track in every single sector, so we are going to have to do more,” she said. “We are particularly reliant on pushing the dial in transport and in process heat.”

    Yet when RNZ asked about the $3 billion-plus cost on the campaign trail, politicians appeared to be planning to overperform on those budgets, sometimes by impressive amounts. Their answers suggested they may not need to worry too much about that $3 billion-plus.

    Here’s what Labour leader Chris Hipkins said, when asked if he had costed for meeting Paris: “We still have a way to go before we have to make a final decision on how best to meet our commitments there. We’re on track to meet our first emissions budget.

    Working harder
    “We’ve still got the second and third emissions reduction budgets to go. If we don’t meet our targets there is a period of time when we can figure out how best to remedy that, and that includes working harder in the second period to compensate for that.

    “But we’re confident that with the stuff we’ve got in place at the moment, we’re on track to meet our first target.”

    Hipkins did not address paying for offshore credits, which were required even if the country met all three domestic budgets. As prime minister, he rolled back a biofuel policy and, like National, has focused his transport promises mainly on building new roads rather than a strong shift to lower-emissions modes.

    He has also promised help for home insulation and solar, but it was not clear if his new promises compensated for the cuts.

    Climate Change Commission chair Rod Carr and chief executive Jo Hendy as they deliver advice to the Climate Change Minister.
    Climate Change Commission chair Rod Carr and chief executive Jo Hendy . . . currently, New Zealand is not even on track to meet its domestic emissions budgets. Image: Twitter/Climate Change Commission/RNZ News

    Asked the same question, National leader Christopher Luxon took aim at the government for undermining the Emission Trading Scheme (ETS), saying the scheme should do more of the “heavy lifting”.

    He, too, skirted the question of paying for offsets.

    For context, the ETS made polluters pay for around half the country’s domestic climate pollution (the other half was from agriculture) and was already factored into projections of needing 100 million-odd tonnes of extra ‘top up’ help from overseas.

    The scheme could do more, particularly if carbon prices went higher (taking petrol prices with them), or if farming was included, or if there were no limits on planting land in cheap pine trees, but Luxon did not detail how National would navigate these kinds of changes.

    Cutting domestic emissions
    Meanwhile, other party spokespeople talked-up cutting domestic emissions.

    Labour environment spokesperson David Parker told the conference in Auckland he wanted to look at claims that native afforestation could meet the entire Paris target (without overseas help).

    Simon Watts
    National’s Simon Watts . . . National believes it could meet 70-75 percent of the 2030 target inside these shores. Photo: RNZ/Samuel Rillstone

    National’s climate spokesperson Simon Watts told the same gathering — the annual Climate Change and Business Conference — that National believed it could meet 70-75 percent of the 2030 target inside these shores, a figure considerably higher than previous estimates by the Climate Change Commission.

    Watts did not supply details on how that would be achieved, though he discussed lightening regulation on wind and solar energy.

    His party has said it would scrap Labour’s Clean Car Discount and major grants to companies to switch off coal boilers, and it would also delay pricing farming emissions a further five years, until 2030. There were questions about how it would meet even the current domestic emissions budgets.

    The cost of waiting
    Hood had a spot of good news on the cost front. She told RNZ that based on recent purchases by Switzerland, the cost of overseas carbon offsets was likely to be towards the lower end of Treasury’s range.

    Even if the government winded up buying 100 million tonnes of savings offshore, that was still only around half the quantity the John Key-led government expected it might have to stump up for when it made its first Paris Agreement pledge, despite the first pledge being weaker on climate than the current one, she noted.

    But getting offsets at the lower end of the cost range relies on the government getting moving on lining them up and buying them, she says.

    Shaw told RNZ that environmental integrity would be a bottom line after New Zealand was burned for buying valueless “hot air” credits from Russia and Ukraine in the early years of carbon trading.

    As well as Switzerland, Singapore and others had already started striking deals to buy the offsets they needed.

    While the New Zealand Government has been scoping out prospective sellers overseas, it has refused to reveal who it is talking to, citing commercial sensitivity.

    The ministries for Foreign Affairs and the Environment were working on advice to Cabinet on how to make these purchases and ensure the carbon saved was real. But that advice will not land until after the election.

    Most expensive time to buy
    One thing is clear. 2030 will be the most expensive time to buy, Hood said, because many countries will be panic-buying from overseas projects to meet their missed domestic commitments. Shaw agreed.

    “A whole bunch of countries will be going, ‘Oh crap, I’ve missed my target,’ and scrambling around trying to find ways to fill the gap.”

    Shaw wanted Paris costs to go into PREFU, making it clear to the government that any money spent on domestic action on climate change was also a cost saving in terms of buying fewer offshore credits.

    “This is one of the things that worries me about what some of the other parties are saying, is that they aren’t really accounting for [Paris] in their fiscal plans.”

    Shaw called the huge variance in Treasury ‘s $3 billion-23 billion estimate “unhelpful”.

    “It’s such a wide variance it’s hard to trust it. At the moment… people are putting their fingers in their ears and saying ‘lalalala”.”

    But asked how much the Green Party had costed for meeting New Zealand’s offshore climate commitments, Shaw would not be drawn on naming a more accurate number.

    Treasury estimate best
    “The best estimate I’ve got is the Treasury estimate. The Ministry for the Environment and MFAT (Ministry for Foreign Affairs and Trade) are doing a lot of work on this at the moment, but they’re not going to have a report back until just before Christmas. If I was to give you a number I would be pulling it out of thin air.”

    As for how to pay for it, Shaw said ETS proceeds from polluters could do a lot of it.

    “In a good year that’s a billion dollars, so if there’s seven years for us to do that it’s $7 billion.”

    But Shaw also acknowledged there were a lot of other calls on that money — including for adapting to climate change, paying for domestic carbon savings, and helping low-income families weather the costs of higher emissions prices, which boost fuel and electricity costs.

    National has said it would use ETS proceeds to help fund its tax cuts, meaning it will need to pay for the Paris target (both the offshore and onshore parts) some other way.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by David Robie.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/22/nz-election-2023-both-labour-and-national-face-multimillion-dollar-climate-hole/feed/ 0 429004
    Pentagon’s Budget Is So Bloated That It Needs an AI Program to Navigate It https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/20/pentagons-budget-is-so-bloated-that-it-needs-an-ai-program-to-navigate-it/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/20/pentagons-budget-is-so-bloated-that-it-needs-an-ai-program-to-navigate-it/#respond Wed, 20 Sep 2023 16:35:46 +0000 https://theintercept.com/?p=445349

    As tech luminaries like Elon Musk issue solemn warnings about artificial intelligence’s threat of “civilizational destruction,” the U.S. military is using it for a decidedly more mundane purpose: understanding its sprawling $816.7 billion budget and figuring out its own policies.

    Thanks to its bloat and political wrangling, the annual Department of Defense budget legislation includes hundreds of revisions and limitations telling the Pentagon what it can and cannot do. To make sense of all those provisions, the Pentagon created an AI program, codenamed GAMECHANGER. 

    “In my comptroller role, I am, of course, the most excited about applying GAMECHANGER to gain better visibility and understanding across our various budget exhibits,” said Gregory Little, the deputy comptroller of the Pentagon, shortly after the program’s creation last year. 

    “The fact that they have to go to such extraordinary measures to understand what their own policies are is an indictment of how they operate.”

    “The fact that they have to go to such extraordinary measures to understand what their own policies are is an indictment of how they operate,” said William Hartung, a senior research fellow at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft and expert on the defense budget. “It’s kind of similar to the problem with the budget as a whole: They don’t make tough decisions, they just layer on more policies, more weapons systems, more spending. Between the Pentagon and Congress, they’re not really getting rid of old stuff, they’re just adding more.”

    House Republicans reportedly aim to pass their defense budget later this week. They had planned to vote on an $826 billion proposal last week before the far-right Freedom Caucus blocked the proposal, demanding cuts to non-defense spending.

    “The fact that the Pentagon developed an AI program to navigate its own policies should be a stark wake-up call for lawmakers who throw more money at the department than it even asks for nearly every year,” said Julia Gledhill, an analyst at the Project on Government Oversight’s Center for Defense Information. “It’s unsurprising, though: The DOD couldn’t adequately account for 61 percent of its $3.5 trillion in assets in the most recent audit, and those are physical!”

    The Pentagon did not respond to a request for comment.

    Military brass use GAMECHANGER to help them navigate what the Defense Department itself points to as an absurd amount of “tedious” policies. The program contains over 15,000 policy documents governing how the Pentagon operates, according to its GitHub entry.

    “Did you know that if you read all the Department of Defense’s policies, it would be the equivalent of reading through ‘War and Peace’ more than 100 times?” a press release about GAMECHANGER from the Defense Intelligence Agency, the military’s spy wing, says. “For most people, policy is a tedious and [elusive] concept, making the idea of understanding and synthesizing tens of thousands of policy requirements a daunting task. But in the midst of the chaos that is the policy world, one DIA officer and a team at the Office of the Undersecretary of Defense for Intelligence & Security saw an opportunity.” 

    The press release went on to decry the Pentagon’s “mountain of policies and requirements.” 

    As unusual as it is for the military to publicly air its contempt for its own sprawling bureaucracy, members of Congress have been similarly harsh. In its portrayal of U.S. military policy — which it also had a hand in creating — the Senate Armed Services Committee called rules governing the department “byzantine” and “labyrinthine.”

    “The committee notes that the Joint Artificial Intelligence Center developed an artificial intelligence-enabled tool, GAMECHANGER, to make sense of the byzantine and labyrinthine ecosystem of Department guidance,” the committee said in a report for National Defense Authorization Act — the law that appropriates cash for the Pentagon budget — for fiscal year 2023. (Amid the critique of the Pentagon’s bloated bureaucracy, the NDAA would later become law, authorizing $802.4 billion in funding for the defense budget.)

    Though announced in February of last year, GAMECHANGER has received scant media attention. The military’s Joint Artificial Intelligence Center, a subdivision of the U.S. Air Force created in 2018, developed the program. Upon its completion, the Joint Artificial Intelligence Center transferred ownership of it to the office of the Defense Department comptroller, which handles budgetary and fiscal matters for the Pentagon. 

    Shortly after its release, GAMECHANGER was already used by over 6,000 Defense Department users conducting over 100,000 queries, according to the Defense Intelligence Agency. 

    Described as a natural language processing application — a broad term in computer science generally referring the use of machine learning to allow computers to interpret human speech and writing — GAMECHANGER is just one of a vast suite of AI programs bankrolled by the Pentagon in recent months. 

    The Pentagon is currently funding 686 such AI projects, according to the National Academy of Sciences, a nonprofit that frequently conducts research into the government. The figure does not include the Department of Defense’s classified efforts.

    Before it was formally released, GAMECHANGER was granted an award by the Office of Personnel Management, the federal government’s human resources agency for civil servants.

    “GAMECHANGER is an ironic name: They’re patting themselves on the back for, in the best case, figuring out what they’ve said in the past, which is pretty modest,” said Hartung, the Quincy Institute defense budget expert. “It’s more a problem of how they make policy and not a problem of how to surf through it.”

    Join The Conversation


    This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by Ken Klippenstein.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/20/pentagons-budget-is-so-bloated-that-it-needs-an-ai-program-to-navigate-it/feed/ 0 428514
    House Republican Budget Reflects Disturbing Vision for the Country https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/19/house-republican-budget-reflects-disturbing-vision-for-the-country/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/19/house-republican-budget-reflects-disturbing-vision-for-the-country/#respond Tue, 19 Sep 2023 21:37:32 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/house-republican-budget-reflects-disturbing-vision-for-the-country

    "The fight for voting rights has never been more urgent," she argued, explaining that the legislation—named for the late Democratic Georgia congressman and civil rights leader—aims to restore and modernize the full protections of the Voting Rights Act of 1965 (VRA), which was gutted by the U.S. Supreme Court a decade ago in Shelby County v. Holder.

    The bill is backed by every House Democrat but faces tough odds in both chambers. Early last year, Democratic right-wing Sen. Joe Manchin (W.Va.) and Sen. Kyrsten Sinema (Ariz.), who switched from Democrat to Independent in December, worked with Republicans to block a megabill that included the Freedom to Vote Act and the John Lewis legislation.

    Still, U.S. advocacy groups on Tuesday applauded the lawmakers' renewed push for federal voting rights reforms—as they did in July, when Democratic leaders reintroduced the Freedom to Vote Act.

    "The John Lewis Voting Rights Advancement Act is key in preserving democracy, full stop," declared Public Citizen executive vice president Lisa Gilbert. "A decade after the Supreme Court gutted 'preclearance' protection in the Voting Rights Act, more than half of U.S. states have passed over 90 laws that make it harder to vote for communities of color, in particular."

    "Without this legislation, we risk further entrenching anti-democratic, partisan forces that want to choose their own voters," Gilbert warned.

    According to the Declaration for American Democracy coalition:

    In the last decade since the Shelby County v. Holder Supreme Court decision gutted key enforcement mechanisms in the Voting Rights Act, at least 29 states have passed 94 laws making it harder to vote, with at least 11 states enacting 13 restrictive voting laws in 2023 alone.

    Attacks on our freedom to vote disproportionately impact Black, Latino, Asian, Native, and other voters of color. Since Shelby v. Holder, the racial turnout gap has grown significantly in 5 of the 6 states previously covered by the preclearance sections of the Voting Rights Act.

    Sylvia Albert, Common Cause's director of voting and elections, stressed that "this ongoing effort to suppress the vote harkens back to the shameful Jim Crow era. At that time, it took the passage of the Voting Rights Act of 1965 and rigorous enforcement by the U.S. Department of Justice to curb the wholesale abuses and attacks on the freedom to vote."

    "Today it will take passage of the John R. Lewis Voting Rights Advancement Act to curb this new generation of assaults on the freedom to vote and to strengthen the ability of the Department of Justice to protect that sacred freedom with the tools it used for decades," she asserted, specifically calling out Republican-controlled state legislatures that have tried "to silence Black and Brown voters after they showed up to vote in record numbers during the 2020 election."

    Noting that the VRA "has a long history of bipartisan support," Leslie Proll of the Leadership Conference on Civil and Human Rights said: "We applaud our elected officials who have responded to the call of the majority of people in this country who support new legislation to protect the vote. We need federal action now."

    Michael Waldman, president and CEO of the Brennan Center for Justice at New York University School of Law, also highlighted previous bipartisan support for the VRA, pointing out that "the last time the Voting Rights Act was reauthorized, in 2006, it gained 98 votes in the Senate." He called on Congress to swiftly pass the "urgently needed" John Lewis bill and the Freedom to Vote Act.

    Organizations focused on key issues like abortion rights and the climate emergency also demanded action on the proposal.

    "This legislation is long overdue," said a 15-member coalition that included Clean Water Action, Climate Hawks Vote, the Climate Reality Project, Earthjustice, EDF Action, Environmental Law & Policy Center, Greenpeace USA, Interfaith Power & Light, League of Conservation Voters, the National Wildlife Federation, NextGen America, Sierra Club, Union of Concerned Scientists, WE ACT for Environmental Justice, and Zero Hour.

    "We cannot effectively tackle the critical issues our nation faces—like combating the climate crisis, advancing environmental justice, and protecting our air, lands, waters, biodiversity, wildlife, and oceans—without fixing the broken system that caters to corporate polluters and disenfranchises too many voters," the coalition argued.

    Meanwhile, NARAL Pro-Choice America said on social media that "voting rights and reproductive freedom are deeply intertwined."

    "Anti-abortion extremists attack voting rights knowing that it is critical to electing repro champions," the organization added. "Congress MUST pass the John Lewis Voting Rights Act."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/09/19/house-republican-budget-reflects-disturbing-vision-for-the-country/feed/ 0 428302
    West Virginia University guts programs, decimates staff in new budget | Working People https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/23/west-virginia-university-guts-programs-decimates-staff-in-new-budget-working-people/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/23/west-virginia-university-guts-programs-decimates-staff-in-new-budget-working-people/#respond Wed, 23 Aug 2023 13:00:57 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f751783f8afac4c4aa0ae846b632be35
    This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/23/west-virginia-university-guts-programs-decimates-staff-in-new-budget-working-people/feed/ 0 421119
    More than half of New Zealanders struggling financially, says survey https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/15/more-than-half-of-new-zealanders-struggling-financially-says-survey/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/15/more-than-half-of-new-zealanders-struggling-financially-says-survey/#respond Tue, 15 Aug 2023 02:45:03 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=91848 RNZ Pacific

    New research shows that more than half of New Zealanders are struggling financially.

    The annual survey by the Retirement Commission found the number of people in financial difficulty increased by 17 percent since their first survey in 2021.

    A total of 55 percent reported being in a financially difficult position – including many Pacific Islanders.

    Of those surveyed, 51 percent reported they were “starting to sink” or “treading water”, while a further 3.5 percent reported they were “sinking badly”.

    Personal Finance lead Tom Hartmann said women, Māori and Pacific Peoples were being hit the hardest.

    The survey found 61 percent of women were financially struggling in contrast to 48 percent of men.

    Sixty percent of Māori and 58 percent of Pacific Peoples also reported feeling financially stressed. Those aged 18-34 were also more likely to experience financial stress.

    Hartmann said it was concerning that so many New Zealanders were feeling the pressures of cost increases.

    Long-term consequences
    “We have now tipped into more than half the population feeling squeezed financially. This significantly reduces people’s ability to grow their money for tomorrow, which has long-term consequences for their future financial well-being,” he said.

    The survey found that more people were borrowing money, but also that more people were budgeting and saving.

    It also reported that the gap was widening for women compared to men in terms of optimism, financial sentiment, personal savings and savings for retirement.

    The main source of data for the information came from the Retirement Commission’s online population survey of New Zealanders aged over 18 which is run by market research agency TRA. The commission said the sample was nationally representative of New Zealand based on age, gender and region.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/15/more-than-half-of-new-zealanders-struggling-financially-says-survey/feed/ 0 419243
    ‘We Line Up Policy With Campaign Contributions From Oil and Gas’ – CounterSpin interview with Matthew Cunningham-Cook on GOP climate sabotage https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/11/we-line-up-policy-with-campaign-contributions-from-oil-and-gas-counterspin-interview-with-matthew-cunningham-cook-on-gop-climate-sabotage/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/11/we-line-up-policy-with-campaign-contributions-from-oil-and-gas-counterspin-interview-with-matthew-cunningham-cook-on-gop-climate-sabotage/#respond Fri, 11 Aug 2023 18:49:32 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9034761 "That we should let climate change go unaddressed until the human race goes extinct...is a cornerstone of the Republican Party's agenda."

    The post ‘We Line Up Policy With Campaign Contributions From Oil and Gas’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
    Janine Jackson interviewed the Lever‘s Matthew Cunningham-Cook about Republican Party climate sabotage for the August 4, 2023, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin230804Cunningham-Cook.mp3

     

    Mural of rabbit holding a sign: “The Earth is not dying, it is being killed, and those who are killing it have names and addresses.”Janine Jackson: Listeners may have encountered some variant of the statement attributed to labor organizer and folk singer Utah Phillips that says, “The Earth is not dying, it is being killed, and those who are killing it have names and addresses.”

    It’s cited because it’s powerful, and its power derives in part from the fact that it goes against the pervasive discourse, certainly of corporate news media, that things are bad, even scary bad, even unprecedentedly, hard-to-imagine bad. But the point is, you know, progress happens, and getting angry doesn’t help, and disrupting things, well, that’s criminal as well as misguided. And then, what’s that? Things are getting worse? Well, that’s another story for another day.

    There are myriad things that account for climate disruption and for its devastating and disparate effects. But the top-down resistance to naming the obstacles to a safer world is an important one, and one in which news media play a big role.

    Our guest is one of those working to fill that void. Matthew Cunningham-Cook covers a range of issues for the Lever. He’s also written for Labor Notes, Public Employee Press and Al Jazeera America, among other outlets. He joins us now by phone from Costa Rica. Welcome to CounterSpin, Matthew Cunningham-Cook.

    Matthew Cunningham-Cook: Thanks so much for having me on, Janine. I appreciate it.

    JJ: The latest, the last I checked, is that a crucial Atlantic Ocean circulation system, that’s a cornerstone of global climate, may collapse as quickly as two years from now. Though as Julie Hollar wrote for FAIR.org, that wasn’t enough to get it on everybody’s front page.

    But truly, there is no need to cite any indicators here. Anybody who believes in science and their sensory organs knows that bad things are happening and more are on the horizon, and that there are things that we can do besides throwing up our hands and saying, it is what it is.

    Lever: Amid Heat Wave, GOP Adds Climate Denial To Spending Bills

    Lever (7/25/23)

    So tell us about your recent story that tells us that there are things stepping between what people want and what is reflected in policy.

    MCC: We just took a look at the latest funding bills that are winding their way through the House right now, and the different insane aspects that Republicans have added.

    There’s one particular component that’s extremely egregious, that bans research on climate change’s impact on fisheries. And this is while traditionally Republican states like Alaska are dealing with the collapse of their fisheries, currently.

    There’s requiring that the Biden administration issue these offshore oil/gas leases, that slows down wind power leases, and that defunds the US’s very limited responsibilities under the Paris Climate Accords.

    It’s a full-on assault on basic reason, and how we respond to the climate crisis. And what we do at the Lever that is not typically replicated in the corporate media is we just line up the policy with the campaign contributions from the oil and gas industry. So the members of Congress who are championing these draconian assaults on basic climate science receive hundreds of thousands of dollars in campaign contributions from the oil and gas industry.

    And you really don’t see this in the New York Times or the Washington Post. If they do report on these types of developments, it’s usually separated from basic questions like campaign finance, which is clearly what drives these proposed changes more than anything else.

    So that’s what we did, and it’s a depressing story, for sure. What we’re hoping to do is ultimately shame the corporate media into doing more reporting like this that directly lines up policy with campaign contributions. Because if you’re reporting these two issues separately, the public is just not getting the full picture.

    JJ: Absolutely. And folks are misunderstanding the disconnect, because media will do a story about the way the public feels about climate disruption, or about just the horrors of climate disruption. But, as you say, it’s going to be on a separate page than a story about campaign finance, as though it’s not a direct line from A to B.

    And I want to point out: Part of what’s key about the piece that you wrote is these are not things that Republicans are putting forward, this idea of supporting bad things and also preventing responsive things; they aren’t introducing them as legislation that people can look at and think about. They’re sneaking them in, right?

    Lever: Study: Manchin’s Pipeline Bill Would Be A Climate Nightmare

    Lever (9/27/22)

    MCC: Yeah. It’s just these small components of appropriations bills that nobody is paying attention to that, yeah, have very meaningful consequences.

    One of the most important actions that the Biden administration has started to take is this Climate Disclosure Rule, which just seems so basic, which is that publicly traded companies have these massive climate risks. They should disclose those risks to their investors. And it hasn’t happened yet, and it’s been attacked by both Republicans and so-called Democrats like Joe Manchin alike.

    But this is a critical step forward for the public to be able to get information about how the nation’s largest corporations are poisoning our environment, and how it not only hurts the public, but also their own investors, which includes the pension funds and retirement accounts of tens of millions of Americans.

    It’s not like they’re trying to say, “Oh, let’s pass an independent piece of legislation that bars the SEC from issuing this climate rule,” because it would never pass. Instead, they’re inserting it into the appropriations process.

    And it also underscores just how much more ideologically committed Republicans are than Democrats. You very rarely see Democrats, when they control Congress, trying to use the appropriations process to expand the federal government’s ability to respond to climate change, or expand labor rights. No, it’s something that Republicans do, the opposite, foreclosing actions on the environment or on labor rights.

    JJ: And then elite media come in and say, “Can’t we all just be civil,” and introduce the idea that there should be kind of a peacemaking between an overtly ideological and rule-bending (to be generous) party, and another that says, “Oh, well no, that’s not a thing that we would do.” It’s like bringing a knife to a gunfight.

    And I guess the least that we would ask of media is that they at least just call it that way. At least describe it that way, instead of making it seem like it’s a balance.

    Matthew Cunningham-Cook

    Matthew Cunningham-Cook: “”That we should let climate change go unaddressed until the human race goes extinct…is a cornerstone of the Republican Party’s agenda.”

    MCC: And, to be clear, Democrats like Henry Cuellar receive hundreds of thousands of dollars from the oil and gas industry. He’s on the Appropriations Committee, and I’m sure he is enabling Republicans left and right.

    There is bipartisan commitment to letting the planet burn, but it’s not a cornerstone of the Democratic Party’s ideology that we should let climate change go unaddressed until the human race goes extinct. That is a cornerstone of the Republican Party’s agenda, and we’re not seeing that reported.

    JJ: Thank you. And let me just say, that’s where I see the Lever and Popular Information and a bunch of other outlets coming in, just to say to folks, at a baseline level, that, yes, there actually is a disconnect between what the public wants and is calling for, and what we see coming out of Congress, that there actually are obstacles there. I think we would like all journalism to play that role, but it’s good that independent journalism is stepping up.

    MCC: Yeah, I agree. Yes. That’s why we started. That’s why we do the work we do, is we saw this gaping hole, and we’re working at it. Sometimes it’s not easy, but we’re just trying to get the message out there.

    JJ: We’ve been speaking with reporter Matthew Cunningham-Cook. You can find his recent piece, “The GOP Is Quietly Adding Climate Denial to Government Spending Bills,” co-authored with David Sirota, online at LeverNews.com. Thank you so much, Matthew Cunningham-Cook for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    MCC: Thanks so much, Janine. I appreciate it.

     

    The post ‘We Line Up Policy With Campaign Contributions From Oil and Gas’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/11/we-line-up-policy-with-campaign-contributions-from-oil-and-gas-counterspin-interview-with-matthew-cunningham-cook-on-gop-climate-sabotage/feed/ 0 418710
    ‘We Line Up Policy With Campaign Contributions From Oil and Gas’ – CounterSpin interview with Matthew Cunningham-Cook on GOP climate sabotage https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/11/we-line-up-policy-with-campaign-contributions-from-oil-and-gas-counterspin-interview-with-matthew-cunningham-cook-on-gop-climate-sabotage/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/11/we-line-up-policy-with-campaign-contributions-from-oil-and-gas-counterspin-interview-with-matthew-cunningham-cook-on-gop-climate-sabotage/#respond Fri, 11 Aug 2023 18:49:32 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9034761 "That we should let climate change go unaddressed until the human race goes extinct...is a cornerstone of the Republican Party's agenda."

    The post ‘We Line Up Policy With Campaign Contributions From Oil and Gas’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
    Janine Jackson interviewed the Lever‘s Matthew Cunningham-Cook about Republican Party climate sabotage for the August 4, 2023, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin230804Cunningham-Cook.mp3

     

    Mural of rabbit holding a sign: “The Earth is not dying, it is being killed, and those who are killing it have names and addresses.”Janine Jackson: Listeners may have encountered some variant of the statement attributed to labor organizer and folk singer Utah Phillips that says, “The Earth is not dying, it is being killed, and those who are killing it have names and addresses.”

    It’s cited because it’s powerful, and its power derives in part from the fact that it goes against the pervasive discourse, certainly of corporate news media, that things are bad, even scary bad, even unprecedentedly, hard-to-imagine bad. But the point is, you know, progress happens, and getting angry doesn’t help, and disrupting things, well, that’s criminal as well as misguided. And then, what’s that? Things are getting worse? Well, that’s another story for another day.

    There are myriad things that account for climate disruption and for its devastating and disparate effects. But the top-down resistance to naming the obstacles to a safer world is an important one, and one in which news media play a big role.

    Our guest is one of those working to fill that void. Matthew Cunningham-Cook covers a range of issues for the Lever. He’s also written for Labor Notes, Public Employee Press and Al Jazeera America, among other outlets. He joins us now by phone from Costa Rica. Welcome to CounterSpin, Matthew Cunningham-Cook.

    Matthew Cunningham-Cook: Thanks so much for having me on, Janine. I appreciate it.

    JJ: The latest, the last I checked, is that a crucial Atlantic Ocean circulation system, that’s a cornerstone of global climate, may collapse as quickly as two years from now. Though as Julie Hollar wrote for FAIR.org, that wasn’t enough to get it on everybody’s front page.

    But truly, there is no need to cite any indicators here. Anybody who believes in science and their sensory organs knows that bad things are happening and more are on the horizon, and that there are things that we can do besides throwing up our hands and saying, it is what it is.

    Lever: Amid Heat Wave, GOP Adds Climate Denial To Spending Bills

    Lever (7/25/23)

    So tell us about your recent story that tells us that there are things stepping between what people want and what is reflected in policy.

    MCC: We just took a look at the latest funding bills that are winding their way through the House right now, and the different insane aspects that Republicans have added.

    There’s one particular component that’s extremely egregious, that bans research on climate change’s impact on fisheries. And this is while traditionally Republican states like Alaska are dealing with the collapse of their fisheries, currently.

    There’s requiring that the Biden administration issue these offshore oil/gas leases, that slows down wind power leases, and that defunds the US’s very limited responsibilities under the Paris Climate Accords.

    It’s a full-on assault on basic reason, and how we respond to the climate crisis. And what we do at the Lever that is not typically replicated in the corporate media is we just line up the policy with the campaign contributions from the oil and gas industry. So the members of Congress who are championing these draconian assaults on basic climate science receive hundreds of thousands of dollars in campaign contributions from the oil and gas industry.

    And you really don’t see this in the New York Times or the Washington Post. If they do report on these types of developments, it’s usually separated from basic questions like campaign finance, which is clearly what drives these proposed changes more than anything else.

    So that’s what we did, and it’s a depressing story, for sure. What we’re hoping to do is ultimately shame the corporate media into doing more reporting like this that directly lines up policy with campaign contributions. Because if you’re reporting these two issues separately, the public is just not getting the full picture.

    JJ: Absolutely. And folks are misunderstanding the disconnect, because media will do a story about the way the public feels about climate disruption, or about just the horrors of climate disruption. But, as you say, it’s going to be on a separate page than a story about campaign finance, as though it’s not a direct line from A to B.

    And I want to point out: Part of what’s key about the piece that you wrote is these are not things that Republicans are putting forward, this idea of supporting bad things and also preventing responsive things; they aren’t introducing them as legislation that people can look at and think about. They’re sneaking them in, right?

    Lever: Study: Manchin’s Pipeline Bill Would Be A Climate Nightmare

    Lever (9/27/22)

    MCC: Yeah. It’s just these small components of appropriations bills that nobody is paying attention to that, yeah, have very meaningful consequences.

    One of the most important actions that the Biden administration has started to take is this Climate Disclosure Rule, which just seems so basic, which is that publicly traded companies have these massive climate risks. They should disclose those risks to their investors. And it hasn’t happened yet, and it’s been attacked by both Republicans and so-called Democrats like Joe Manchin alike.

    But this is a critical step forward for the public to be able to get information about how the nation’s largest corporations are poisoning our environment, and how it not only hurts the public, but also their own investors, which includes the pension funds and retirement accounts of tens of millions of Americans.

    It’s not like they’re trying to say, “Oh, let’s pass an independent piece of legislation that bars the SEC from issuing this climate rule,” because it would never pass. Instead, they’re inserting it into the appropriations process.

    And it also underscores just how much more ideologically committed Republicans are than Democrats. You very rarely see Democrats, when they control Congress, trying to use the appropriations process to expand the federal government’s ability to respond to climate change, or expand labor rights. No, it’s something that Republicans do, the opposite, foreclosing actions on the environment or on labor rights.

    JJ: And then elite media come in and say, “Can’t we all just be civil,” and introduce the idea that there should be kind of a peacemaking between an overtly ideological and rule-bending (to be generous) party, and another that says, “Oh, well no, that’s not a thing that we would do.” It’s like bringing a knife to a gunfight.

    And I guess the least that we would ask of media is that they at least just call it that way. At least describe it that way, instead of making it seem like it’s a balance.

    Matthew Cunningham-Cook

    Matthew Cunningham-Cook: “”That we should let climate change go unaddressed until the human race goes extinct…is a cornerstone of the Republican Party’s agenda.”

    MCC: And, to be clear, Democrats like Henry Cuellar receive hundreds of thousands of dollars from the oil and gas industry. He’s on the Appropriations Committee, and I’m sure he is enabling Republicans left and right.

    There is bipartisan commitment to letting the planet burn, but it’s not a cornerstone of the Democratic Party’s ideology that we should let climate change go unaddressed until the human race goes extinct. That is a cornerstone of the Republican Party’s agenda, and we’re not seeing that reported.

    JJ: Thank you. And let me just say, that’s where I see the Lever and Popular Information and a bunch of other outlets coming in, just to say to folks, at a baseline level, that, yes, there actually is a disconnect between what the public wants and is calling for, and what we see coming out of Congress, that there actually are obstacles there. I think we would like all journalism to play that role, but it’s good that independent journalism is stepping up.

    MCC: Yeah, I agree. Yes. That’s why we started. That’s why we do the work we do, is we saw this gaping hole, and we’re working at it. Sometimes it’s not easy, but we’re just trying to get the message out there.

    JJ: We’ve been speaking with reporter Matthew Cunningham-Cook. You can find his recent piece, “The GOP Is Quietly Adding Climate Denial to Government Spending Bills,” co-authored with David Sirota, online at LeverNews.com. Thank you so much, Matthew Cunningham-Cook for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    MCC: Thanks so much, Janine. I appreciate it.

     

    The post ‘We Line Up Policy With Campaign Contributions From Oil and Gas’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/08/11/we-line-up-policy-with-campaign-contributions-from-oil-and-gas-counterspin-interview-with-matthew-cunningham-cook-on-gop-climate-sabotage/feed/ 0 418711
    Why I Oppose the Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/25/why-i-oppose-the-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/25/why-i-oppose-the-pentagon-budget/#respond Tue, 25 Jul 2023 05:56:01 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=289884 Much of the $28 billion in additional military spending will go to line the pockets of hugely profitable defense contractors – it is corporate welfare by a different name. Almost half of the Pentagon budget goes to private contractors, some of whom are exploiting their monopoly positions and the trust granted them by the United States to line their pockets. Repeated investigations by the DOD inspector general, the GAO and CBS News have uncovered numerous instances of contractors massively overcharging DOD, helping boost these companies’ profits to nearly 40% – and sometimes as high as 4,451% – while costing US taxpayers hundreds of millions of dollars. More

    The post Why I Oppose the Pentagon Budget appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Bernie Sanders.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/25/why-i-oppose-the-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 414287
    Why I Oppose the Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/25/why-i-oppose-the-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/25/why-i-oppose-the-pentagon-budget/#respond Tue, 25 Jul 2023 05:56:01 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=289884 Much of the $28 billion in additional military spending will go to line the pockets of hugely profitable defense contractors – it is corporate welfare by a different name. Almost half of the Pentagon budget goes to private contractors, some of whom are exploiting their monopoly positions and the trust granted them by the United States to line their pockets. Repeated investigations by the DOD inspector general, the GAO and CBS News have uncovered numerous instances of contractors massively overcharging DOD, helping boost these companies’ profits to nearly 40% – and sometimes as high as 4,451% – while costing US taxpayers hundreds of millions of dollars. More

    The post Why I Oppose the Pentagon Budget appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Bernie Sanders.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/25/why-i-oppose-the-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 414288
    ‘You Are Exacerbating the Racial Wealth Gap Through the Use of Subsidies’ – CounterSpin interview with Arlene Martínez on corporate subsidies https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/24/you-are-exacerbating-the-racial-wealth-gap-through-the-use-of-subsidies-counterspin-interview-with-arlene-martinez-on-corporate-subsidies/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/24/you-are-exacerbating-the-racial-wealth-gap-through-the-use-of-subsidies-counterspin-interview-with-arlene-martinez-on-corporate-subsidies/#respond Mon, 24 Jul 2023 20:46:45 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9034525 "The scrutiny that we give every spending dollar that seems to come out of a city budget is not at all applied in the same way to companies."

    The post ‘You Are Exacerbating the Racial Wealth Gap Through the Use of Subsidies’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Janine Jackson interviewed Good Jobs First’s Arlene Martínez about corporate subsidies for the July 14, 2023, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin230714Martinez.mp3

     

    Good Jobs First: Power Outrage: Will Heavily Subsidized Battery Factories Generate Substandard Jobs?

    Good Jobs First (7/6/23)

    Janine Jackson: Under a provision of the Inflation Reduction Act, some factories making batteries for electric vehicles will each receive more than a billion dollars per year from the US government. That’s along with some $13 billion in state and local economic development incentives that factories making electronic vehicles and batteries are slated to receive.

    But as Good Jobs First calls out in their new report on the subject, called Power Outrage, there are no requirements for the jobs promised—and considered key to this deal—to be permanent jobs, or even that they provide market-based wages or benefits.

    We have a press corps that considers it due diligence to critically examine every dime the government offers to struggling people. But huge economic subsidies to profitable corporations are a no-comment given, no matter how not needy the grantee, and no matter how opaque the process.

    There’s just little sense of any need to follow up on a government, or “taxpayer,” gift to those who we are told are the doers, the makers, the job creators. This crucial but under-examined economic phenomenon is Good Jobs First’s topic all the time. And a new report, the first in a series, takes an angle on the impact of subsidies that you pretty much never hear.

    Good Jobs First: How Economic Development Subsidies Transfer Public Wealth to White Men

    Good Jobs First (6/12/23)

    Arlene Martínez is deputy executive director and communications director at Good Jobs First, and author of the recent report “How Economic Development Subsidies Transfer Public Wealth to White Men.” She joins us now by phone; welcome to CounterSpin, Arlene Martínez.

    Arlene Martínez: Hi, thanks for having me.

    JJ: We see subsidies, or what you call “mega deals,” going to folks like Amazon, companies that don’t need a lift, they don’t need community support, and they don’t give back, necessarily, when they get it.

    The racial unfairness is part and parcel of that. And yet I feel like, every day, we learn how irreducible white supremacy is, how it doesn’t stir into anything else and just disappear. So what did you find, and why do you think it matters?

    AM: Yeah, Good Jobs First has a subsidy tracker, which looks at economic development subsidies that have gone to companies. And we have a special category called “mega deals,” as you mentioned. And those mega deals are the biggest of those deals, anything that’s $50 million or above. So I took a look at the top 50 of those, so we’re talking all billion-dollar deals and up, very extravagant packages that go to some of the biggest well-known companies in the world.

    And what we saw is that most of those companies were run by white men. And in cases when they weren’t white men, they tended to be born outside of the United States, and then there were just two women, who were also white.

    So we talk a lot about this transfer of wealth, and really what you’re doing is taking a community’s very precious, limited resources and directing it towards some of the biggest, most profitable companies in the world, which isn’t what subsidies were ever meant to do in the first place; they were supposed to incentivize development that wouldn’t have otherwise taken place. And that’s just not what we’re seeing here.

    So what you’re really having is, you are exacerbating this racial wealth gap through the use of subsidies. We thought we should be explicit about who the winners were.

    JJ: Right. You hear, well, OK, these are big companies and they provide a lot of jobs, and a lot of those jobs might go to people of color, or to women, so we can’t help that they’re big. What about that?

    Boondoggle: Amazon Warehouses Kill Jobs and Wages

    Boondoggle (6/16/22)

    AM: That’s one of the very popular myths, we would say, we hear quite a bit: Well, these are big companies. They produce a lot of jobs.

    But the truth is, that’s not what actual research shows, which is that these companies aren’t producing any type of special, extra amount of jobs. And, in fact, a lot of times they’re just simply taking jobs from smaller companies.

    I think Amazon is a great example of this. Their online presence and their warehouse workers mean that a lot of the retail jobs that used to exist have been cannibalized. So it’s really just been a transfer of jobs, in a lot of cases.

    And some of those times they’ve gone from good industries to really poorly paid warehouse workers, where Black and brown workers tend to be holding the poorest-paid, most dangerous jobs.

    JJ: I remember talking with Dorothy Brown about tax policy, and just saying that there’s a way that, broadly, race can be related to economic outcomes, but somehow when we’re talking about policy-making, it’s not factored in.

    And she was saying that people would say, race doesn’t affect tax policy, because we don’t have any data that connects that. So what you don’t study is invisible to you, but that doesn’t mean it doesn’t exist.

    And, similarly, with the case of subsidies, if you don’t think the impacts of these big subsidies are race-related, or have impact that is meaningful in terms of race, well, then, I guess you don’t see it. But that doesn’t mean those impacts don’t exist.

    ProPublica: The Secret IRS Files: Trove of Never-Before-Seen Records Reveal How the Wealthiest Avoid Income Tax

    ProPublica (6/8/21)

    AM: That’s right. And Dorothy Brown, we had a conversation, and one of the points that I’ve heard her make is ProPublica, which has done a series of really damning, amazing reporting around some of the tax returns of some of the wealthiest people in the world, and just how much they’re avoiding paying taxes.

    And one of the points she makes is, look at the list. They’re all white people, and yet ProPublica doesn’t take that extra step to say, by the way, the people who are avoiding paying taxes, who aren’t paying what everyone else is paying, are the richest people in the world, who are white. So I think she does a good job of doing that.

    JJ: Calling attention to that impact, which, if you don’t see it, you don’t have to see it, but there it is.

    AM: And I was a reporter before I joined Good Jobs First, and I remember one of the stories I was writing about was, there was, of course, a budget shortfall, as there often are in these local communities that we cover; I was a local reporter.

    And the first thing on the chopping block really was a boxing gym and a library and a community center in a very heavily Latino neighborhood in the city. And it was, of course, disproportionately used by, well, that city’s Latino population.

    And it wasn’t these other things that were being cut; police and fire were being fully funded. Those are both professions that tend to have, again, high populations of white men who occupy those positions, and are being paid some of the highest salaries in a community.

    So, yes, I think there is a need, and communities benefit from, really, that conversation becoming a lot more explicit than it’s been.

    JJ: Absolutely. Part of, I guess, what galls me about news media’s sort of soft, blurry attention to subsidies is, and I said it to Greg LeRoy last year, we don’t look to corporate news media first for critical examinations of corporate capitalism, but they do present themselves as watchdogs of the public interest, and especially of public spending. We hear about the “cost to taxpayers” a lot.

    And so, if that’s true, I feel like minimally, the secrecy around public subsidies to companies like Amazon ought to be compelling stuff, and yet somehow they don’t get broken open often, and the impact and the follow-up on communities just doesn’t seem to be the kind of catnip to reporters that you would think it would be.

    Arlene Martinez

    Arlene Martinez: “The scrutiny that we give every spending dollar that seems to come out of a city budget is not at all applied in the same way to companies.”

    AM: Yeah, and it’s amazing how the scrutiny that we give every spending dollar that seems to come out of a city budget is not at all applied in the same way to companies, and company behaviors and company press releases. Their word is taken at face value, and as if somehow it’s more legitimate, when they’re questioning every nickel and dime that’s coming out of a community.

    I remember covering a county museum that was looking to get some money, and there was city council meeting after city council after city council meeting about whether this museum should get a million dollars over five years, or whatever the case was, whereas other communities, and we write about these a lot, they will approve a $300 million subsidy behind closed doors, with no one knowing about it. And it’s touted as a good thing for the community.

    So I think there increasingly is more scrutiny on things like these subsidies, and people really are starting to question more whether this is really the best way that communities should be spending that money. But there is something interesting about the way that corporations and companies are reported on with such a trust that isn’t given to government, for example.

    JJ: And I just want to say finally, Good Jobs First is very much about involving everyone in the process. And you referenced subsidy trackers that you have. They’re accessible for folks who are reporters or not reporters. You try to make data or databases available to folks who want to follow the money.

    AM: Yes, we have databases that we’ve purposely made fully accessible. We don’t even ask for your email, and you can look up a company. So if a company comes to your community and says, “We need some money to expand our operations,” or to even open, you can look to see where else has this company gotten money, and what did it deliver for the money that it’s gotten in other places.

    Or you can look at a company in our violation tracker and say, “What’s its record on corporate conduct?” Because we have all types of misconduct records in there to say, if the company has a long track record of cheating workers or harming the environment or cheating consumers, you can say, “Is this the kind of company that this city should be investing in?”

    So yes, we do try to make these databases very accessible and easy to use. We’re trying to do the research for you, for journalists.

    JJ: Right? Well, if journalists won’t use it, then the public can use it and work around the press corps. I mean, the point is to get it done, right?

    AM: That’s right. That’s right. And we are thrilled that every day we get some kind of outreach, whether it’s a grassroots community group, an individual who said, “I saw this, I can’t believe what I’m seeing.” So they go to their city council, then they can question what’s going on, or whoever their official might be. And so always thrilled when we see that.

    I would just add, I made this point earlier, but communities have a certain amount of money, and the money that’s being spent is precious. And there are things that actually do lift up communities, and those are excellent public schools, and they’re communities with parks that take care of their natural resources, and safe communities.

    And when communities invest in those types of things, people want to live in those kinds of communities. And the companies want to be where those people are, where those workers are.

    So the real wins that we see that communities do, is when they invest in those things that truly lift up people from the bottom up, rather than showering a corporation with a billion dollars and hoping somebody at the very bottom of that funnel can use it to lift themselves to a better place.

    JJ: All right, then. We’ve been speaking with Arlene Martínez. She’s deputy executive director and communications director at Good Jobs First, online at GoodJobsFirst.org. Arlene Martínez, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    AM: Thanks for having me.

     

    The post ‘You Are Exacerbating the Racial Wealth Gap Through the Use of Subsidies’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/24/you-are-exacerbating-the-racial-wealth-gap-through-the-use-of-subsidies-counterspin-interview-with-arlene-martinez-on-corporate-subsidies/feed/ 0 414201
    ‘Ill-Equipped,’ ‘1950s’ Pentagon Needs an Expensive Upgrade, Media Insist  https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/24/ill-equipped-1950s-pentagon-needs-an-expensive-upgrade-media-insist/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/24/ill-equipped-1950s-pentagon-needs-an-expensive-upgrade-media-insist/#respond Mon, 24 Jul 2023 17:47:18 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9034510 News outlets routinely caution that the Pentagon needs billions of dollars’ worth of improvements to systems, personnel and technology.

    The post ‘Ill-Equipped,’ ‘1950s’ Pentagon Needs an Expensive Upgrade, Media Insist  appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Wired: Office Life at the Pentagon Is Disconcertingly Retrograde

    There are no laptops at meetings in the Pentagon,” Navy official John Kroger warned (Wired, 8/20/20). “There are no whiteboards, either.

    Despite its immense power, the Pentagon is a relic of decades past.

    Such was the argument by Navy official John Kroger, writing for Wired (8/20/20). Commenting on the daily operations of the Defense Department, Kroger depicted a workplace bereft of modernity: no WiFi, scant cell signals, workflows of “a glacial pace,” and a “hermetic closure” to talent from the private sector, amounting to a “retrograde” “1950s environment,” unprepared to sustain 21st-century national security.

    Kroger’s warning wasn’t the first of its kind, nor was it the last. News outlets routinely caution that the US Department of Defense—the largest government agency of the world’s wealthiest country, with an $858 billion budget that can be exceeded with impunity—is sclerotic and inefficient. The only remedy, they tell their audiences, is billions more dollars’ worth of improvements to management systems, personnel, and weapons and intelligence technology.

    ‘Backward’ superpower

    With such an antiquated Defense Department, the argument goes, the US will be “ill-equipped” (Wired, 5/2/22) for future war, trailing its most formidable adversaries.

    Foreign Policy boosted this view in an op-ed (10/25/21) that described the Pentagon as a “living museum” plagued by “backward” working conditions. The piece, penned by fellows at the Truman National Security Project and the Center for Strategic and International Studies (both of which count weapons manufacturers among their top funders), pleaded for a program of modernization to help the DoD adapt to “the evolving character of war and an ongoing reframing of national security,” and counter “an increasingly aggressive China and a stubbornly revanchist Russia.” Without a comprehensive upgrade, the piece asserted, the United States would “at best muddle through the challenges it faces.”

    Foreign Policy: The Pentagon’s Office Culture Is Stuck in 1968

    The Pentagon “remains burdened by the strict adherence to slow, sequential processes,” Zachery Tyson Brown complained in Foreign Policy (10/25/21), “while more contemporary workplaces have learned that parallel, simultaneous, and asynchronous methods dramatically speed their delivery of value.”

    Politico (6/27/23) echoed these concerns when it bemoaned the Pentagon’s “endless struggle with AI,” reporting that “the military needs more AI technology, faster.” According to the piece, the DoD can’t keep up with the tech industry’s pace of military technology development, imperiling “American dominance” as China ascends. Citing “defense pundits,” the article promoted additional funding for autonomous weapons and surveillance, among other forms of contemporary warfare, framing the Department’s request for $1.8 billion in AI research and development funding as modest: “a record, but still just a fraction of the nearly $900 billion defense budget.”

    Considering the enormous sum—which grows considerably every year—at the Pentagon’s disposal, one might question the notion that the US military is underresourced or in imminent danger of being militarily eclipsed. In 2022, for instance, the US outspent the next ten highest-spending countries combined on war preparation, accounting for 39% of the world’s military expenditure that year. (China, whose population outnumbers that of the entire Western Hemisphere, came in second at 13%, with Russia in third at 4%.)

    Additionally, available data—even from US-based institutions—indicate that the US far outspends China and Russia on defense-related AI research and development.

    Georgetown University’s Center for Security & Emerging Technology found that the US planned to devote $5 billion to military AI for fiscal year 2020, compared to estimates ranging from $0.3 billion–$2.7 billion for China in 2018. “The numbers directly oppose the prevailing narrative” that the US was losing the “so-called AI arms race,” reported MIT Technology Review (12/5/19). Though publicly accessible information on Russia’s spending is limited and of questionable accuracy, sources like Defense One (4/4/18) and the RAND Corporation placed Russia’s total AI spending at $12 to $36 million annually in 2017 and 2018.

    But failing to include such pertinent context—let alone moral critiques—about global government spending continues media’s long history of presenting a “lagging empire” narrative that frames the US as a floundering underdog in need of additional defense funding (FAIR.org, 9/1/15). “To keep up with China, the Defense Department is trying to lure private capital,” reported the Wall Street Journal (3/26/23), in yet another example. One of the article’s sources, a co-founder of a “national security innovation” center at Stanford University, likened China to “Silicon Valley,” and the US to a “Detroit auto maker,” concluding: “That’s not a fair fight.”

    ‘Struggling’ weapon-makers

    NYT: Start-Ups Bring Silicon Valley Ethos to a Lumbering Military-Industrial Complex

    High-tech systems are “getting real-world testing in the war in Ukraine,” the New York Times (5/21/23) reported, “earning praise from top government officials there and validating investors who have been pouring money into the field.”

    In order to strengthen their case, some media shine a spotlight on the military startups aspiring to sign lucrative DoD contracts, characterizing firms that seek to facilitate mass violence throughout the world as hapless victims of a hamstrung bureaucracy.

    Financial Times (3/17/22) advocated for tech businesses that “struggle to break into the Pentagon,” suggesting they’re being deprived of the long-term software contracts they deserve. The paper went further, tacitly supporting Silicon Valley founders’ accusations of “innovation theater,” which FT defined as “paying lip service to the importance of disruptive technology while holding back the vast bulk of their budgets for traditional, large-scale programs from incumbent contractors.”

    More recently, the New York Times (5/21/23) lamented the Department’s apparently inadequate catalog of contracts with scrappy, enterprising military-systems companies. Assessing the military-industrial complex as “lumbering” and the DoD as “risk-averse,” the Times portrayed a Pentagon too conservative with expenses, requiring “years of planning and congressional funding decisions” before it would buy enough product to keep afloat startups that specialize in logistics, weapons technology and intelligence.

    Among the casualties, according to the Times: Primer and Capella Space, both of which laid off employees while awaiting decisions from the Pentagon. (Both Primer and Capella, bankrolled in part by billionaire Thomas Tull, have raised approximately $250 million.) “Many other tech start-ups struggl[e] to pay bills” while in the same holding pattern, the Times added.

    Recruiting more ‘nerds’

    Wired: To Win the Next War, the Pentagon Needs Nerds

    Wired (5/2/22): “Technology is fundamentally changing the nature of war, and the US needs to adapt in order to maintain its edge.”

    Keen on Silicon Valley’s technical expertise, media in some cases propose that the Defense Department be awarded additional funding to attract and hire tech workers from the private sector.

    Wired (5/2/22) exemplified this with the disconcertingly twee headline, “To Win the Next War, the Pentagon Needs Nerds.” Echoing Deputy Secretary of Defense Kathleen Hicks, the piece fretted that the Pentagon lacked the talent to develop cutting-edge war technology, in part because the DoD couldn’t “compete” with the salaries offered by the private sector.

    Years earlier, Wired (2/16/19) presented this thesis in an opinion piece urging the Pentagon to lure tech workers away from high-paid, prestigious posts at such Silicon Valley staples as Google, Facebook (now Meta), Amazon and Apple. Its author, consultant and “futurist” Amy Webb, made her prescriptions plain:

    The government can allocate significant funding—several billion to start—for basic and advanced research in AI. It can use some of that money for better compensation packages, to build capacity among existing staff, and to fund projects allowing the tech giants and public sector to start working much more closely together.

    Conveniently enough, as of June 2023, the 2024 National Defense Authorization Act would give the DoD a record $886 billion, highlighting “increased funding for cutting-edge technologies,” including “the development of artificial intelligence and machine learning tools.” It seems that Webb’s—and much of corporate media’s—wish has come true.

    The post ‘Ill-Equipped,’ ‘1950s’ Pentagon Needs an Expensive Upgrade, Media Insist  appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Julianne Tveten.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/24/ill-equipped-1950s-pentagon-needs-an-expensive-upgrade-media-insist/feed/ 0 414163
    The Culture Wars Are Hijacking Debate On the Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/18/the-culture-wars-are-hijacking-debate-on-the-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/18/the-culture-wars-are-hijacking-debate-on-the-military-budget/#respond Tue, 18 Jul 2023 21:45:19 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/the-culture-wars-are-hijacking-debate-on-the-military-budget/
    This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Lindsay Koshgarian.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/18/the-culture-wars-are-hijacking-debate-on-the-military-budget/feed/ 0 412709
    NZ govt says it ‘honoured’ Solomons support, rejects Sogavare’s claims https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/18/nz-govt-says-it-honoured-solomons-support-rejects-sogavares-claims/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/18/nz-govt-says-it-honoured-solomons-support-rejects-sogavares-claims/#respond Tue, 18 Jul 2023 08:35:38 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=90795 By Kelvin Anthony, RNZ Pacific lead digital and social media journalist, and Koroi Hawkins, RNZ Pacific editor

    The New Zealand government has rejected claims by Solomon Islands Prime Minister Manasseh Sogavare that it has withheld financial support promised to the country.

    On Monday, soon after landing back in Honiara from his official visit to Beijing, Sogavare told local media the Australian and New Zealand governments had promised budget support but “changed their position and delayed their assistance”.

    Sogavare, as first reported by ABC, said the decision of its “traditional donors” to pull funding support had pushed Solomon Islands to lean on China, who agreed to “fill the gap”.

    Solomon Islands Prime Minister Manasseh Sogavar
    Solomon Islands Prime Minister Manasseh Sogavare . . . donor partners have “left this country and people in a predicament. Image: Tavuli News

    “Some of our donor partners who have committed to providing budget support to us this year have since changed their position and delayed their assistance for us and we are struggling to finance the 2023 budget,” he said.

    “This has left this country and people in a predicament. But I am delighted to announce, the People’s Republic of China has really stepped up to provide this budget support needed for 2023.”

    Australia had promised $12 million while and New Zealand promised $15 million in budget support, according to Sogavare.

    When asked later in the media conference to expand on this statement, he responded in Solomon Islands Pidgin saying that prior to his departure to Beijing cabinet had heard that budgetary funding expected this year from several donor partners including New Zealand, Australia, Japan and the World Bank had been delayed for various reasons.

    ‘That is how it is’
    “So, we have analysed that in different ways. But that is how it is,” he said.

    “It is their money; we respect them and their taxpayers if they want to help us or not help us that is how it is. But because of that it has put a little bit of pressure on the budget especially our priority to fund the Pacific Games.”

    The prime minister eventually conceded that some of this funding was expected to arrive in government coffers this month.

    But he insisted his country would need all the help it could get to deliver on its main priority for this year which is to deliver the Pacific Games in Honiara in November.

    “We need to have enough resources there in terms of our revenue. I am sure it will pick up already,” he said.

    “Maybe the money that our friends have mentioned probably it has already come because they said it would be by mid-July or towards the end of July it should come. Once it comes that is great. We really need to have some resources there to successfully host the Pacific Games.”

    ‘NZ has honoured its commitments’
    However, a Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade (MFAT) spokesperson told RNZ Pacific: “We have not withheld or delayed any budget support to Solomon Islands.”

    “Aotearoa New Zealand remains committed to our development partnership, and over the past year has provided around NZ$10.1 million budget support to Solomon Islands including for education, economic reform and Pacific Games support,” the spokesperson said.

    “Our development partnership with Solomon Islands is one of our most significant by breadth, depth and value — now at approximately NZ$150m for 2021-2024. This includes budget support as well as funding for specific activities.

    “The New Zealand High Commissioner in Honiara has been tasked to set the record straight with the Solomon Islands government, confirming New Zealand has honoured its budget support commitments.”

    The Australian government had earlier told ABC it had not backtracked on any formal commitments.

    “Australia has delivered on our budget support commitments to Solomon Islands this year,” a Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade (DFAT) spokesperson told ABC.

    “This support has been provided across numerous sectors in Solomon Islands including health, education and elections,” they said.

    “We continue to discuss development and budget support needs with the Solomon Islands government.”

    ‘Unneighbourly claim
    Sogavare has also questioned the “unneighbourly” and “coercive diplomatic approach” of targeting China-Solomon Islands relations and labelled it as “foreign interference” into the internal affairs of Solomon Islands.

    He has also hinted at Solomon Islands intentions of establishing its own military due to the limited capacity of the Solomon Islands Police Force.

    Sogavare said he had had this conversation with the Australian Deputy Prime Minister Richard Marles earlier this year.

    The New Zealand government did not respond to RNZ’s question on whether it had had any conversations about such intentions at any time this year, and if it would support such plans of the Solomon Islands government.

    RNZ Pacific’s attempts to get comments from Sogavare have been unsuccessful so far.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/18/nz-govt-says-it-honoured-solomons-support-rejects-sogavares-claims/feed/ 0 412463
    The Parties Want the Constitution to Balance Our Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/07/the-parties-want-the-constitution-to-balance-our-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/07/the-parties-want-the-constitution-to-balance-our-budget/#respond Fri, 07 Jul 2023 05:36:02 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=288240 While all media focuses on former President Donald Trump’s indictments, they have lost interest in any future economic catastrophe from not raising a debt ceiling. Nevertheless, liberals and conservatives propose looking at our Constitution to avoid a repeat. They offer two competing solutions that depend on interpreting or amending the Constitution. If either solution were More

    The post The Parties Want the Constitution to Balance Our Budget appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Nick Licata.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/07/the-parties-want-the-constitution-to-balance-our-budget/feed/ 0 410106
    Rep. Ro Khanna on Term-Limiting SCOTUS Justices, Voting "No" on Pentagon Budget & Modi’s State Visit https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/06/rep-ro-khanna-on-term-limiting-scotus-justices-voting-no-on-pentagon-budget-modis-state-visit/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/06/rep-ro-khanna-on-term-limiting-scotus-justices-voting-no-on-pentagon-budget-modis-state-visit/#respond Thu, 06 Jul 2023 14:15:27 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f6a4c19fa83bf50f9e7d7310bf49a783
    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/06/rep-ro-khanna-on-term-limiting-scotus-justices-voting-no-on-pentagon-budget-modis-state-visit/feed/ 0 409821
    Rep. Ro Khanna on Term-Limiting SCOTUS Justices, Sole “No” Vote on Pentagon Budget & Modi’s State Visit https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/06/rep-ro-khanna-on-term-limiting-scotus-justices-sole-no-vote-on-pentagon-budget-modis-state-visit/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/06/rep-ro-khanna-on-term-limiting-scotus-justices-sole-no-vote-on-pentagon-budget-modis-state-visit/#respond Thu, 06 Jul 2023 12:51:19 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=37a8572984bb0c970d1a2421a6ea1a6c Seg5 guest supremecourt split

    We speak with Democratic Congressmember Ro Khanna of California about several topics. He has reintroduced a bill in the House to limit Supreme Court justices to 18-year terms, which he says would help rebalance the high court, now dominated by a 6-3 conservative majority, and is especially needed after several controversial Supreme Court rulings striking down President Biden’s student debt relief plan, giving businesses the right to discriminate against LGBTQ people on religious grounds, rolling back environmental protections and more. “Most Americans have seen that the Supreme Court is just wildly out of touch with the facts of modern life,” he says. Khanna also talks about his lone vote against the Pentagon budget, and he responds to critics of the key role he played in welcoming Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi for a state visit at the White House, which was roundly condemned by human rights advocates, given Modi’s track record of violence and bigotry.


    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/06/rep-ro-khanna-on-term-limiting-scotus-justices-sole-no-vote-on-pentagon-budget-modis-state-visit/feed/ 0 409803
    Fiji’s 2023 Budget: Major spending and projects but high debt ‘on watch’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/01/fijis-2023-budget-major-spending-and-projects-but-high-debt-on-watch/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/01/fijis-2023-budget-major-spending-and-projects-but-high-debt-on-watch/#respond Sat, 01 Jul 2023 08:23:51 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=90331 By Rachael Nath, RNZ Pacific journalist

    The Fiji government has announced its “rebuilding our future together” Budget with a spend of FJ$4.3 billion (NZ$3.2 billion) to address the high cost of living and pay for the hefty bill racked up by the former FijiFirst administration and the global pandemic, coupled with multiple tropical cyclones and the effects of Russia’s war on Ukraine.

    Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance Professor Biman Prasad said the focus of the budget was navigate the country from its economic crisis to provide a better standard of living for its people.

    Professor Prasad said the deficit was higher than he wanted and nearly 25 percent of the budget would go to servicing debt.

    “We have too much government debt for the size of our economy and that remains one of our biggest challenges. We must continue to carefully manage our revenue spending.”

    He said the budget “stabilises revenue and debt level and puts the country on a sustainable path”.

    Financial summary
    Total government expenditure for the 2023/2024 Budget is $4.3 billion with a projected revenue of $3.7 billion — a deficit of $639 million. Fiji starts July with a debt-to-GDP ratio of almost 88.8 pecent.

    Here’s a list of the major spending and projects:

    Tax policies
    Increases

    • Value Added Tax increases to 15 percent on most food, with the intension to pump an estimated $446m into the economy.
    • 5 percent increase to the excise tax on alcohol and tobacco.
    • The excise on carbonated/ sugar-sweetened beverages will be increased from 35 cents per litre to 40 cents per litre.
    • A domestic excise of 40c per kilogram or per litre, and import excise of 15 percent, will be introduced on carbonated drinks, ice cream, sweet biscuits, snacks, and sugar confectionery.
    • Motor vehicle import excise duty will increase on all new and used passenger vehicles by an additional 5 percent.
    • The corporate tax rate will increase from the current 20 percent to 25 percent.
    • New companies eligible for reduced corporate tax for listing on the South Pacific Stock Exchange will have their tax rate increased from the current 10 percent to 15 percent. This will be for new companies and only for a period of seven years. These corporate tax rate increases will add about $73.5m in revenue.
    • Departure Tax will increase from the current $100 to $125 effective from August 1 and will further increase by an additional $15 to $140 effective from January 1, 2024. This will add a total of $30m towards overall tax revenues.

    Reductions

    • 21 basic food items continue to attract zero VAT with the inclusion of prescribed medicine to the list.
    • Reduction in fiscal duty from 32 percent to 15 percent on canned mackerel (except canned tuna), corned mutton, corned beef and beef products, canned tomatoes, prawns and duck meat.
    • Fiscal duty on sheep/lamb meats will be reduced to zero. For beef meat the duty is being reduced from 32 percent to 15 percent.
    • Reduction in import excise on chicken portions such as wings, drumsticks, feet, thighs, etc from 15 percent to 0 percent.
    • Concession on smartphones will be removed and replaced with a fiscal duty of 5 percent.

    Education

    • Education gets the highest allocation in this budget – $845m.
    • Biman Prasad announced all Tertiary Scholarship and Loans Service debt — $650m owed by more than 50,000 students — is written off. But it comes with the caveat that these students will have to save a bond. The bond savings will be years of study multiplied by 1.5, and those who choose not to save the bond will have to pay the equivalent cost amount.
    • The rebranded Fijian scholarship scheme will have a total budget of $148.2m.
    • The salaries budget for the Ministry of Education increased to $322.6m, to cover existing teachers and 179 new teaching and non-teaching positions.
    • There is $8.9m for salary upgrades for teachers completing qualifications for higher pay.
    • $5.7m for the rural and maritime teaching allowance budget.
    • Free education and transport assistance to ECE, primary and secondary school students, with a total funding allocation of more than $100m.
    • There is also money for back to school support, and maintenance and upgrading of schools.
    • Investment in the technical colleges, working together with existing service providers, including the newly established Pacific Polytech.
    • A revamp the apprenticeship scheme in the next few months and also review the NTPC Levy and how best to support and fund skill upgrades in the workforce.
    • Tertiary institutions get $103.3m, the grant for the University of the South Pacific is restored, and they have allocated extra money towards clearing the USP outstanding grants.
    • There is also an extra $500,000 for Sangam Institute of Technology to accommodate additional nursing students, “in light of the current shortage”.

    Health and disability

    • Health Ministry is allocated a budget of $453.8m, a significant increase of $58.7m from the previous budget.
    • Salaries and wages budget for the Health Ministry has increased to $126.4m.
    • This will cater for 250 intern nurses to move up to become registered nurses; 237 new intern nurses; 46 nursing assistants; 50 nursing aides; 40 midwives; 94 medical laboratory scientists; and additional support staff in various hospitals and non-medical officers for the Fiji Pharmaceutical & Biomedical Services to strengthen capacity and improve procurement efficiency.
    • Nursing assistant and nurse aide positions have been created to support the nurses’ focus on their core role, where these aides and assistants will take over the non-clinical responsibilities like making the bed, getting the consumables etc. The government is also providing $11.6m for the upgrade of nurses’ salaries and overtime.
    • $63m has been allocated for public health programmes, Emergency Radiology and Laboratory Services, procurement of drugs, consumables, medicines, and purchase of bio-medical equipment and accessories.
    • $2.5m is allocated for the Kidney Dialysis Treatment Subsidy. The allocation has been increased by $1m from this year’s level to cater for the increase in the dialysis subsidy from the current $150 per session to $180.
    • $16.4m is allocated for the upgrade and maintenance of urban hospitals and institutional quarters, permanent walkway for the maternity hospital at CWM, purchase, installation and replacement of ICT equipment, and a major interior upgrade of Labasa hospital.
    • From August 1, only patients with a combined household income of $30,000 or less per annum can qualify for the free services at private practitioners.

    Tourism

    • Tourism Fiji is allocated an operating grant of $7m and to support new marketing strategies an increased Marketing Grant of $30m is provided in the new financial year.

    Infrastructure, roads and water

    • $200m has been allocated for the maintenance of hospitals, health centres, schools, public buildings, government quarters, roads and bridges and water infrastructure.
    • The water sector will have an increased budget of $250.8m. This is a major increase of almost $60m compared to the current budget.
    • $51.2m has been allocated for the completion of the Viria water project. The total cost of the project is approximately $400m.
    • Government is working with the Asian Development Bank for a major institutional revamp of the Water Authority, including governance, investment planning, asset management, infrastructure replacement and upgrade, review of water tariffs, investment in people and improving customer service management. This will cost over $500m to replace the 40-year-old pipe system which is leaking underground.
    • An increased allocation of $100.6m is allocated for road maintenance.
    • Fiji Roads Authority is allocated a budget of $387.6m which comprises $14.7m for operations and $372.9m for capital expenditure.
    • In the last eight years, a total of around $3.1b was spent by the road authority without any strategic plan, without much priority and without proper costing.
    • $82.2m for the Transport Infrastructure Investment Sector Project financed through Asian Development Bank and World Bank loans of US$100m and US$50m, respectively.
    • Public Works, Meteorological Service and Transport Ministry is allocated a sum of $98.3m.
    • Government has also re-established the Public Works Department (PWD) to improve the state of rural roads around the country with an initial setup cost of $5m.

    Social welfare and pension

    • Ministry of Women, Children and Social Protection funding allocation has increased from $147.7m to $200.2m.
    • More than 90,000 thousand people on social welfare will directly benefit from increased monthly allowances of 15 and 25 percent.
    • $100,000 is allocated to cater for the establishment of a new Department of Children.
    • $19.9m has been allocated for the Child Protection Allowance. This is an increase of $6.2m.
    • The Family Assistance Scheme is allocated a budget of $45.6m. This is an increase of $11.5m from the current financial year. A total of 26,000 households are expected to be assisted in this financial year.
    • $43million is allocated to cater for disability allowance, bus fare subsidy for elderly and disabled, electricity subsidy to households below $30,000 income and insurance for social welfare recipients. Over 100,000 people are expected to benefit from this.
    • Those aged 70 years and above, and on the social pension system, will receive a 25 percent increase in allowances. This means the monthly allowance will increase from $100 a month to $125 a month effective August 2023. Those between the age of 65 to 69 years will have their monthly allowances increased from $100 to $115.
    • The social pension scheme is allocated a large budget of $78.2m, an increase of $23.2m to cater for the needs of 54,200 senior citizens.
    • Effective from August 2023, the 1,500 FNPF pensioners who had their pension rates reduced by the military regime will be able to access the Government social pension allowance of $125 if they are above the age of 70 or $115 if they are between 60 to 69 years.

    Civil service and cutbacks

    • Review of the current minimum wage rate to be done in the next financial year.
    • The government is working together with the workers’ representatives to review the overall pay and benefits of the civil servants.
    • In the next six to nine months, government will review the civil service remuneration and pending the review, the salary structure of the civil service will be readjusted to be commensurate with the work the civil servants are doing for the nation.
    • Government ministers have taken a 20 percent pay cut; they are significantly cutting down ministerial travel allowances put in place by the previous government.
    • Travel allowance of the Prime Minister, the current 250 percent per diem loading, will be reduced to 100 percent.
    • Ministers will have their top-up reduced from 200 percent to 50 percent.
    • For assistant ministers the top-up will be reduced from the current 100 percent to 25 percent.
    • Apart from these major reductions, Government will remove “all the exorbitant incidental allowances that are currently provided”.

     

    Culture and arts

    • Ministry of iTaukei Affairs, Culture, Heritage and Arts has been allocated a budget of $38.6m, a major increase of $23.2m from this year’s allocation
    • To strengthen iTaukei administration and provincial councils, a grant of $10.8m is allocated to fund the 14 provincial councils, including $4.3m to fund the salaries and wages of 182 provincial council officers and other operational expenses of around $6.1 million.
    • The Turaga-ni-Koro monthly allowance will be increased from $100 to $150 per month for all 1,181 Turaga-ni-Koro for which a total sum of $2.1 million is allocated.
    • The Mata-ni-Tikina quarterly allowance will be increased by $150 per quarter, which is equivalent to an increase of $50 per month for the 262 Mata-ni-Tikina.
    • $4m is allocated for iTaukei Land Development to help landowners with the development of their land for commercial purposes.
    • To recognise and support the Turaga-ni-Yavusa in decision-making and Vanua administration, a monthly allowance of $100 has been allocated for 648 Turaga-ni-Yavusa under the Vanua Leadership Allowance with a sum of around $800,000.

    Agriculture and Sugar

    • Ministry of Agriculture and Waterways is allocated a budget of $95.2 million in this budget which is an increase of $37.3 million.
    • For the first time, the government will be providing weedicide and fertilizer subsidy for non-sugar crops which includes rice, ginger, dalo, and cassava, with a funding of $1m to boost production of these crops.
    • The Ministry of Multi-Ethnic Affairs and Sugar Industry is allocated a sum of $51.7m in the new financial year, of which $49.7m is for the sugar unit.
    • With the aim to increase cane production from current production of 1.6m tonnes to 1.9m tonnes by 2024 season, a sum of $11m is allocated for the Sugar Development and Farmers Assistance Program, New Farmers and Lease Premium Assistance, Weedicide Subsidy, Farm Incentive Program and Cage Bins.

    Fisheries, land and SME

    • Ministry of Fisheries and Forestry is allocated a budget of $41.6m. This will support the expansion of aquaculture, shrimp farming, seaweed Development Programme, Multi-Species Hatchery, construction of ice plants and the supply of tilapia fingerlings and prawn frys to farmers in the Western Division.
    • Ministry of Lands and Mineral Resources is allocated a budget of $30.1m to enable the Ministry to continue effectively and efficiently administer and regulate the land and mineral resource sector
    • Ministry of Trade, Co-operatives and Small Medium Enterprises and Communications is allocated a budget of $116.5m in the next financial year, an increase of $25.3m from this year’s allocation.
    Fiji Prime Minister Sitiveni Rabuka, left, and Deputy PM and Finance Minister Biman Prasad.
    Fiji Prime Minister Sitiveni Rabuka (left) and Deputy PM and Finance Minister Professor Biman Prasad. Image: Sitiveni Rabuka/Twitter


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/01/fijis-2023-budget-major-spending-and-projects-but-high-debt-on-watch/feed/ 0 408811
    Fiji’s 2023 Budget: Major spending and projects but high debt ‘on watch’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/01/fijis-2023-budget-major-spending-and-projects-but-high-debt-on-watch/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/01/fijis-2023-budget-major-spending-and-projects-but-high-debt-on-watch/#respond Sat, 01 Jul 2023 08:23:51 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=90331 By Rachael Nath, RNZ Pacific journalist

    The Fiji government has announced its “rebuilding our future together” Budget with a spend of FJ$4.3 billion (NZ$3.2 billion) to address the high cost of living and pay for the hefty bill racked up by the former FijiFirst administration and the global pandemic, coupled with multiple tropical cyclones and the effects of Russia’s war on Ukraine.

    Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance Professor Biman Prasad said the focus of the budget was navigate the country from its economic crisis to provide a better standard of living for its people.

    Professor Prasad said the deficit was higher than he wanted and nearly 25 percent of the budget would go to servicing debt.

    “We have too much government debt for the size of our economy and that remains one of our biggest challenges. We must continue to carefully manage our revenue spending.”

    He said the budget “stabilises revenue and debt level and puts the country on a sustainable path”.

    Financial summary
    Total government expenditure for the 2023/2024 Budget is $4.3 billion with a projected revenue of $3.7 billion — a deficit of $639 million. Fiji starts July with a debt-to-GDP ratio of almost 88.8 pecent.

    Here’s a list of the major spending and projects:

    Tax policies
    Increases

    • Value Added Tax increases to 15 percent on most food, with the intension to pump an estimated $446m into the economy.
    • 5 percent increase to the excise tax on alcohol and tobacco.
    • The excise on carbonated/ sugar-sweetened beverages will be increased from 35 cents per litre to 40 cents per litre.
    • A domestic excise of 40c per kilogram or per litre, and import excise of 15 percent, will be introduced on carbonated drinks, ice cream, sweet biscuits, snacks, and sugar confectionery.
    • Motor vehicle import excise duty will increase on all new and used passenger vehicles by an additional 5 percent.
    • The corporate tax rate will increase from the current 20 percent to 25 percent.
    • New companies eligible for reduced corporate tax for listing on the South Pacific Stock Exchange will have their tax rate increased from the current 10 percent to 15 percent. This will be for new companies and only for a period of seven years. These corporate tax rate increases will add about $73.5m in revenue.
    • Departure Tax will increase from the current $100 to $125 effective from August 1 and will further increase by an additional $15 to $140 effective from January 1, 2024. This will add a total of $30m towards overall tax revenues.

    Reductions

    • 21 basic food items continue to attract zero VAT with the inclusion of prescribed medicine to the list.
    • Reduction in fiscal duty from 32 percent to 15 percent on canned mackerel (except canned tuna), corned mutton, corned beef and beef products, canned tomatoes, prawns and duck meat.
    • Fiscal duty on sheep/lamb meats will be reduced to zero. For beef meat the duty is being reduced from 32 percent to 15 percent.
    • Reduction in import excise on chicken portions such as wings, drumsticks, feet, thighs, etc from 15 percent to 0 percent.
    • Concession on smartphones will be removed and replaced with a fiscal duty of 5 percent.

    Education

    • Education gets the highest allocation in this budget – $845m.
    • Biman Prasad announced all Tertiary Scholarship and Loans Service debt — $650m owed by more than 50,000 students — is written off. But it comes with the caveat that these students will have to save a bond. The bond savings will be years of study multiplied by 1.5, and those who choose not to save the bond will have to pay the equivalent cost amount.
    • The rebranded Fijian scholarship scheme will have a total budget of $148.2m.
    • The salaries budget for the Ministry of Education increased to $322.6m, to cover existing teachers and 179 new teaching and non-teaching positions.
    • There is $8.9m for salary upgrades for teachers completing qualifications for higher pay.
    • $5.7m for the rural and maritime teaching allowance budget.
    • Free education and transport assistance to ECE, primary and secondary school students, with a total funding allocation of more than $100m.
    • There is also money for back to school support, and maintenance and upgrading of schools.
    • Investment in the technical colleges, working together with existing service providers, including the newly established Pacific Polytech.
    • A revamp the apprenticeship scheme in the next few months and also review the NTPC Levy and how best to support and fund skill upgrades in the workforce.
    • Tertiary institutions get $103.3m, the grant for the University of the South Pacific is restored, and they have allocated extra money towards clearing the USP outstanding grants.
    • There is also an extra $500,000 for Sangam Institute of Technology to accommodate additional nursing students, “in light of the current shortage”.

    Health and disability

    • Health Ministry is allocated a budget of $453.8m, a significant increase of $58.7m from the previous budget.
    • Salaries and wages budget for the Health Ministry has increased to $126.4m.
    • This will cater for 250 intern nurses to move up to become registered nurses; 237 new intern nurses; 46 nursing assistants; 50 nursing aides; 40 midwives; 94 medical laboratory scientists; and additional support staff in various hospitals and non-medical officers for the Fiji Pharmaceutical & Biomedical Services to strengthen capacity and improve procurement efficiency.
    • Nursing assistant and nurse aide positions have been created to support the nurses’ focus on their core role, where these aides and assistants will take over the non-clinical responsibilities like making the bed, getting the consumables etc. The government is also providing $11.6m for the upgrade of nurses’ salaries and overtime.
    • $63m has been allocated for public health programmes, Emergency Radiology and Laboratory Services, procurement of drugs, consumables, medicines, and purchase of bio-medical equipment and accessories.
    • $2.5m is allocated for the Kidney Dialysis Treatment Subsidy. The allocation has been increased by $1m from this year’s level to cater for the increase in the dialysis subsidy from the current $150 per session to $180.
    • $16.4m is allocated for the upgrade and maintenance of urban hospitals and institutional quarters, permanent walkway for the maternity hospital at CWM, purchase, installation and replacement of ICT equipment, and a major interior upgrade of Labasa hospital.
    • From August 1, only patients with a combined household income of $30,000 or less per annum can qualify for the free services at private practitioners.

    Tourism

    • Tourism Fiji is allocated an operating grant of $7m and to support new marketing strategies an increased Marketing Grant of $30m is provided in the new financial year.

    Infrastructure, roads and water

    • $200m has been allocated for the maintenance of hospitals, health centres, schools, public buildings, government quarters, roads and bridges and water infrastructure.
    • The water sector will have an increased budget of $250.8m. This is a major increase of almost $60m compared to the current budget.
    • $51.2m has been allocated for the completion of the Viria water project. The total cost of the project is approximately $400m.
    • Government is working with the Asian Development Bank for a major institutional revamp of the Water Authority, including governance, investment planning, asset management, infrastructure replacement and upgrade, review of water tariffs, investment in people and improving customer service management. This will cost over $500m to replace the 40-year-old pipe system which is leaking underground.
    • An increased allocation of $100.6m is allocated for road maintenance.
    • Fiji Roads Authority is allocated a budget of $387.6m which comprises $14.7m for operations and $372.9m for capital expenditure.
    • In the last eight years, a total of around $3.1b was spent by the road authority without any strategic plan, without much priority and without proper costing.
    • $82.2m for the Transport Infrastructure Investment Sector Project financed through Asian Development Bank and World Bank loans of US$100m and US$50m, respectively.
    • Public Works, Meteorological Service and Transport Ministry is allocated a sum of $98.3m.
    • Government has also re-established the Public Works Department (PWD) to improve the state of rural roads around the country with an initial setup cost of $5m.

    Social welfare and pension

    • Ministry of Women, Children and Social Protection funding allocation has increased from $147.7m to $200.2m.
    • More than 90,000 thousand people on social welfare will directly benefit from increased monthly allowances of 15 and 25 percent.
    • $100,000 is allocated to cater for the establishment of a new Department of Children.
    • $19.9m has been allocated for the Child Protection Allowance. This is an increase of $6.2m.
    • The Family Assistance Scheme is allocated a budget of $45.6m. This is an increase of $11.5m from the current financial year. A total of 26,000 households are expected to be assisted in this financial year.
    • $43million is allocated to cater for disability allowance, bus fare subsidy for elderly and disabled, electricity subsidy to households below $30,000 income and insurance for social welfare recipients. Over 100,000 people are expected to benefit from this.
    • Those aged 70 years and above, and on the social pension system, will receive a 25 percent increase in allowances. This means the monthly allowance will increase from $100 a month to $125 a month effective August 2023. Those between the age of 65 to 69 years will have their monthly allowances increased from $100 to $115.
    • The social pension scheme is allocated a large budget of $78.2m, an increase of $23.2m to cater for the needs of 54,200 senior citizens.
    • Effective from August 2023, the 1,500 FNPF pensioners who had their pension rates reduced by the military regime will be able to access the Government social pension allowance of $125 if they are above the age of 70 or $115 if they are between 60 to 69 years.

    Civil service and cutbacks

    • Review of the current minimum wage rate to be done in the next financial year.
    • The government is working together with the workers’ representatives to review the overall pay and benefits of the civil servants.
    • In the next six to nine months, government will review the civil service remuneration and pending the review, the salary structure of the civil service will be readjusted to be commensurate with the work the civil servants are doing for the nation.
    • Government ministers have taken a 20 percent pay cut; they are significantly cutting down ministerial travel allowances put in place by the previous government.
    • Travel allowance of the Prime Minister, the current 250 percent per diem loading, will be reduced to 100 percent.
    • Ministers will have their top-up reduced from 200 percent to 50 percent.
    • For assistant ministers the top-up will be reduced from the current 100 percent to 25 percent.
    • Apart from these major reductions, Government will remove “all the exorbitant incidental allowances that are currently provided”.

     

    Culture and arts

    • Ministry of iTaukei Affairs, Culture, Heritage and Arts has been allocated a budget of $38.6m, a major increase of $23.2m from this year’s allocation
    • To strengthen iTaukei administration and provincial councils, a grant of $10.8m is allocated to fund the 14 provincial councils, including $4.3m to fund the salaries and wages of 182 provincial council officers and other operational expenses of around $6.1 million.
    • The Turaga-ni-Koro monthly allowance will be increased from $100 to $150 per month for all 1,181 Turaga-ni-Koro for which a total sum of $2.1 million is allocated.
    • The Mata-ni-Tikina quarterly allowance will be increased by $150 per quarter, which is equivalent to an increase of $50 per month for the 262 Mata-ni-Tikina.
    • $4m is allocated for iTaukei Land Development to help landowners with the development of their land for commercial purposes.
    • To recognise and support the Turaga-ni-Yavusa in decision-making and Vanua administration, a monthly allowance of $100 has been allocated for 648 Turaga-ni-Yavusa under the Vanua Leadership Allowance with a sum of around $800,000.

    Agriculture and Sugar

    • Ministry of Agriculture and Waterways is allocated a budget of $95.2 million in this budget which is an increase of $37.3 million.
    • For the first time, the government will be providing weedicide and fertilizer subsidy for non-sugar crops which includes rice, ginger, dalo, and cassava, with a funding of $1m to boost production of these crops.
    • The Ministry of Multi-Ethnic Affairs and Sugar Industry is allocated a sum of $51.7m in the new financial year, of which $49.7m is for the sugar unit.
    • With the aim to increase cane production from current production of 1.6m tonnes to 1.9m tonnes by 2024 season, a sum of $11m is allocated for the Sugar Development and Farmers Assistance Program, New Farmers and Lease Premium Assistance, Weedicide Subsidy, Farm Incentive Program and Cage Bins.

    Fisheries, land and SME

    • Ministry of Fisheries and Forestry is allocated a budget of $41.6m. This will support the expansion of aquaculture, shrimp farming, seaweed Development Programme, Multi-Species Hatchery, construction of ice plants and the supply of tilapia fingerlings and prawn frys to farmers in the Western Division.
    • Ministry of Lands and Mineral Resources is allocated a budget of $30.1m to enable the Ministry to continue effectively and efficiently administer and regulate the land and mineral resource sector
    • Ministry of Trade, Co-operatives and Small Medium Enterprises and Communications is allocated a budget of $116.5m in the next financial year, an increase of $25.3m from this year’s allocation.
    Fiji Prime Minister Sitiveni Rabuka, left, and Deputy PM and Finance Minister Biman Prasad.
    Fiji Prime Minister Sitiveni Rabuka (left) and Deputy PM and Finance Minister Professor Biman Prasad. Image: Sitiveni Rabuka/Twitter


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/07/01/fijis-2023-budget-major-spending-and-projects-but-high-debt-on-watch/feed/ 0 408812
    ‘The One Part of Our Retirement Income System That Works Is Social Security’ – CounterSpin interview with Nancy Altman on GOP’s Social Security assault https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/29/the-one-part-of-our-retirement-income-system-that-works-is-social-security-counterspin-interview-with-nancy-altman-on-gops-social-security-assault/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/29/the-one-part-of-our-retirement-income-system-that-works-is-social-security-counterspin-interview-with-nancy-altman-on-gops-social-security-assault/#respond Thu, 29 Jun 2023 21:55:46 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9034204 "The opponents of Social Security have latched onto this unsurprising, manageable shortfall, and talked about the building's on fire."

    The post ‘The One Part of Our Retirement Income System That Works Is Social Security’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Janine Jackson interviewed Social Security Works’ Nancy Altman about the latest Republican attack on Social Security, for the June 23, 2023, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin230623Altman.mp3

     

    NYT: The Geopolitics Of the Budget

    New York Times (1/27/88)

    Janine Jackson: A piece for FAIR cited a New York Times article describing the federal budget deficit as

    overwhelmingly a consequence of  American military outlay and entitlement programs such as Social Security, together with the nation’s unwillingness to pay the taxes needed to finance the expenditures.

    Here’s the thing: That scaremongering about the runaway cost and unmanageability of Social Security, the like of which you may have heard very recently, is how I introduced our next guest in 2018.

    And here’s the other thing: The New York Times article cited in that piece, which was written for FAIR by veteran Times reporter John Hess, came out in 1988.

    It isn’t just that corporate news media get things wrong about Social Security, it’s that they stubbornly get the same things wrong–maybe most importantly, presenting it as a contentious issue in this year’s budget battles, when in fact the fight over Social Security is an ideological one, with many on one side and few on the other, that’s been going on since the program began.

    The budget blueprint released by the House Republican Study Committee last week provides a new opportunity to trot out misinformation, and a new chance to combat it.

    The Truth About Social Security

    Strong Arm Press (2018)

    We’re joined now by Nancy Altman, president of Social Security Works and author of, among other titles, The Truth About Social Security: The Founder’s Words Refute Revisionist History, Zombie Lies, and Common Misunderstandings. She joins us now by phone. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Nancy Altman.

    Nancy Altman: Thank you so much, and what you just said, in your intro, is a zombie lie, is that Social Security is adding even a penny to the deficit. So I’m so glad we’re going to have this conversation.

    JJ: Let’s start right there. I keep reading, “set to be insolvent in 2033,” right? As though Social Security is a building on fire.

    So let’s leap right into those myths, because I know that some folks are going to say: “Oh, so you’re saying there’s no problem. You’re saying that Social Security doesn’t require any support.”

    There’s so much misunderstanding about what the questions actually are, and then how we might respond to them. So have at it.

    NA: I think you’re exactly right to talk about it: Is this a building on fire, or is it, down the road, you have to put your children through college, so you got to think about putting aside some money for their college education?

    I think it’s much closer to the latter than the former. It’s not that nothing should be done. In fact, I think the program should be expanded. I think we’re facing a retirement income crisis, and the solution is expanding Social Security.

    But just to put a few of the myths to rest–and you’re exactly right, the problem is that the media keeps misreporting this over and over again.

    I smiled when you talked about the 1980s, because I started working on this program in the mid-1970s. I was involved with the so-called Greenspan Commission in 1982. At that time, I was told, oh, there’s a crisis, we can’t afford this program, and all these greedy old people. And you– I was young at the time–you’re not going to get your benefits.

    Well, all that happened was I aged, and now my children and grandchildren are being told they’re not going to get their benefits because I’m greedy. And all that is is the passage of time.

    So here are the facts. Social Security is a defined-benefit pension plan that provides life insurance, disability insurance and retirement annuities. And it does so extremely efficiently. It spends less than a penny of every dollar it spends on administration. More than 99 cents is returned in benefits. It’s extremely efficient.

    It also is extremely responsibly managed. Every year, there are about 40 actuaries of the Social Security Administration. And just like any private insurance company, they are looking at longevity and birth rates and wage growth and all kinds of factors to make sure that Social Security can always pay its benefits.

    Nancy Altman of Social Security Works

    Nancy Altman: “The opponents of Social Security have latched onto this unsurprising, manageable shortfall, and talked about the building’s on fire.”

    It doesn’t just project out 10 years or 20 years, but for three quarters of a century, 75 years. And whenever you project out so far, sometimes you’re going to show unintended surpluses. Sometimes you’re going to have unintended shortfalls.

    And what the actuaries have been telling us is that there is a shortfall, quite manageable. It’s now about a decade away. So we’ve got plenty of time to bring in additional revenue.

    If Congress were to do nothing, Social Security could still pay 75% of promised benefits, 75 cents on the dollar.

    But of course, we want it to pay 100%, because these are earned benefits. And there are many proposals, including many in Congress, that restore Social Security to long-range balance.

    But the opponents of Social Security have latched onto this unsurprising, manageable shortfall, and talked about the building’s on fire. And they’ve been talking this way since the program began, really.

    JJ: And that’s what I want to get at, because it’s so funny the way that the proffered solution always turns out to be cuts, and yet that’s being presented as saving the program. There’s a perversity there that says, we need to burn the village to save it.

    NA: Exactly. If Congress doesn’t act, there may be some cuts in the future. So let’s make the cuts now. It’s really like, wait, what? I thought we were trying to prevent the cuts.

    I call it a solution in search of a problem. The solution is, we’ve got to cut benefits. But, people will say, everybody’s living longer. We’ve got to cut benefits by raising the retirement age.

    And I’ll point out, well, certain people are in physically demanding jobs, certain minorities, they’re not living longer. In fact, their life expectancies are going down.

    Oh well, then, we’ve got to cut benefits cause it’s unfair to them. It’s like, wait, what?

    And really, what is behind this is that, from the beginning, there’s been people who have opposed Social Security. Republican President Dwight Eisenhower, in a private letter to his brother, which you can find online, said that they are a tiny splinter group, their numbers are negligible, but they are stupid, he says.

    They tend to be the very wealthy, who think they can just self-insure and don’t want to pay any money towards the common good. Now, they used to be quite honest, and they’d call Social Security “socialism.” The problem is that the American people appreciate what Social Security provides. And so they always lost.

    Then, starting somewhere in the ’70s, their tactics changed, unless they all disappeared, and it’s hard to believe that happened; they say, “No, we love Social Security, but we can’t afford it.” And they make it a point about affordability.

    Let me put the affordability question in context. Social Security currently costs about 5% of gross domestic product. At the end of this century, year 2100, it’s going to cost about 6% of gross domestic product. That’s what we’re fighting about, this 1% increase in gross domestic product.

    Now, when the Covid epidemic hit, we spent more than 1% on all the ways to combat that. After the 9/11 attacks, we spent more than 1% on increasing military spending.

    And, in fact, if you even just look at the Baby Boom, and these costs are because the Baby Boom is moving into its retirement years, and there was a baby bust following up and so forth, that when the Baby Boomers hit kindergarten, we spent more than 1% of GDP on increased classrooms and hiring teachers and so forth.

    And those three, the Covid, the 9/11 and even Baby Boomers entering kindergarten, were surprises to policy makers. This was not a surprise.

    JJ: We’re hearing how we can’t afford this and we can’t afford that. And you have to ask, cui bono, because certainly even in this Republican Study Committee plan, not everyone is tightening their belt. Not everyone is rallying around and suffering together. There are some folks who are spared from what we’re being told is meant to be a shared social cost.

    Common Dreams: House GOP Panel Releases Budget That Would 'Destroy Social Security as We Know It'

    Common Dreams (6/15/23)

    NA: And in fact, not even are they spared, they’re benefiting. The same Republican Study Committee budget, which calls for increasing the retirement age, slashing middle-class benefits, privatizing Medicare, transforming it into a premium support, which is just giving people a coupon and telling them to go out on the market–at the same time that they’re really hitting the middle class and working class, they’re giving tax cuts to billionaires. That makes no sense.

    If you look at how people did during the worst part of the Covid pandemic, so many people lost income, lost jobs, lost their lives, but the billionaires increased their wealth substantially.

    So there’s no question that there are ways and there are proposals out there that are not undue burdens to anyone. They require the very wealthiest, those earning millions and billions of dollars, to pay what I would consider their fair share, and at the same time expand benefits.

    But what the Republican Study Committee, which makes up about 70% of the House Republicans, and what Republicans in the Senate also are calling for, is exactly what you’re saying: belt tightening for those who are middle class and working class, and big gifts to those who are the wealthiest.

    And that makes absolutely no sense, and is not what the American people want. So there’s a real debate going on, but one side, 80% of the American people favor, which is no cuts and let’s expand and make the wealthy pay more.

    And the other side, which is, let’s go behind closed doors and cut benefits, but not have our fingerprints on them. That’s what makes the debate so hard, because it’s got to be transparent for everyone to see.

    JJ: I want to point out one thing, that you have also indicated, because media and many people often shorthand Social Security with “benefits for seniors” or “programs for the elderly.” And I just want us to tip the fact that Social Security deeply impacts the lives of many disabled people as well, and they’re often erased in media debates. But certainly if this budget were to go forward, disabled people would really feel the brunt.

    NA: First of all, I’m so glad you raised that, because Social Security is also the nation’s largest children’s program; because of the survivor benefits and the family benefits, more children benefit from Social Security. The benefits are by no means generous, but they are extremely important when a breadwinner dies or becomes so disabled that they can no longer work.

    And you’re exactly right that disability insurance is an extremely important part of the program. And the Republican Study Committee really goes after the disability insurance part, makes it harder to get benefits, makes it harder to keep getting those benefits. It is really hostile to that group. So I’m so glad you raised that.

    And the point is that Social Security, one of the many reasons I think it’s so popular, it really embodies basic American values. And it is this idea of, we’re united, we all contribute. The idea is that it’s insurance against the loss of wages. You don’t get benefits unless there’s a work record. But if you’re 30 years old and you walk out in the street and get hit by a truck, God forbid, and can no longer work again, you get benefits for the remainder of your life.

    If you have young children and instead of just becoming disabled, you are killed, your children will get benefits until age 18. Now they used to get them until 22, and many of us think that should be restored, or even higher. Normally parents will help their children finance their college educations, but if the parent is gone, though, then the rest of us step in.

    So you’re exactly right that this is a program that benefits all of us, and even indirectly–many children receive benefits directly, but they also often live in families where they’re living with their grandparent, their grandparents, getting Social Security. It really is a family program, and I think that’s part of the reason it’s so well-supported.

    Social Security Works for Everyone

    New Press (2021)

    JJ: Just finally, and briefly, “Social Security Works” is the name of the group. It’s the title of the book you co-authored with Eric Kingson. And I really like that verb there: It works. It works to do, as you’re just saying, real things for real people.

    And it’s countering this idea that you get every time you pick up the paper, which is that it’s broken, that Social Security is broken or failing or struggling.

    And I know it’s just words, but it seems so crucial, because in news media, Social Security is a problem, but actually Social Security is a program that works that we just need to keep working.

    NA: Exactly. And in fact, I consider it even more than that. I consider it a solution. Private pensions have largely, in the private sector, disappeared. 401Ks have proven inadequate for most people, other than the very wealthy.

    The one part of our retirement income system that does work is Social Security. It’s the most universal. It’s portable from job to job. It’s very fair in its distribution. It’s extremely efficient. Its one shortcoming is that its benefits are too low, which is why we need to expand it.

    But you’re exactly right. There’s an elite media view that is very hard to shake. As you say, you could go back decades, and you’ll see the same articles. Somehow, it’s a problem, it’s a drain, it’s unaffordable, it’s this, it’s that. When, actually, it’s extremely efficient. It works extremely well. Indeed, it’s a solution. We should build on it, because it works so well.

    JJ: We’ve been speaking with Nancy Altman from Social Security Works. They’re online at SocialSecurityWorks.org. Nancy Altman, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    NA: Thank you so much for having me.

     

    The post ‘The One Part of Our Retirement Income System That Works Is Social Security’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/29/the-one-part-of-our-retirement-income-system-that-works-is-social-security-counterspin-interview-with-nancy-altman-on-gops-social-security-assault/feed/ 0 408261
    Progressives Use Pentagon Budget to Protest Outrageous Anti-LGBTQ+ Law https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/29/progressives-use-pentagon-budget-to-protest-outrageous-anti-lgbtq-law/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/29/progressives-use-pentagon-budget-to-protest-outrageous-anti-lgbtq-law/#respond Thu, 29 Jun 2023 15:57:06 +0000 https://production.public.theintercept.cloud/?p=433479

    Last month, Uganda’s President Yoweri Museveni signed off on one of the most draconian pieces of anti-LGBTQ+ legislation in the world.

    Homosexuality has been illegal in Uganda, a conservative East African nation, since 1950, but Ugandans now face life imprisonment for gay sex. Anyone attempting to have same-sex relations could be sentenced to 10 years in prison. Advocates for the rights of LGBTQ+ people, including human rights campaigners or those funding advocacy organizations, could face up to 20 years’ imprisonment for the “promotion of homosexuality.”

    “The enactment of Uganda’s Anti-Homosexuality Act is a tragic violation of universal human rights — one that is not worthy of the Ugandan people,” President Joe Biden announced last month. “This shameful Act is the latest development in an alarming trend of human rights abuses and corruption in Uganda.”

    Nonetheless, the United States is slated to give Uganda close to $20 million in security assistance this year, according to Donovan Satchell, a spokesperson with the State Department’s Bureau of African Affairs. 

    “The situation for LGBTQI+ people in Uganda is a matter of life or death. As attacks against the LGBTQI+ community continue to spread around the world, it’s clear we have an obligation to stand up against the targeted violence toward the Ugandan LGBTQI+ community,” Rep. Becca Balint, D-Vt., told The Intercept. “The United States cannot continue to support countries that actively persecute and criminalize LGBTQI+ people.” Balint is currently working on an amendment to next year’s defense authorization bill that would restrict or cut off security assistance to Uganda due to the anti-gay law.

    Balint is just one of several members of Congress who have expressed alarm at the continued flow of military aid to the increasingly repressive country the State Department calls a “reliable partner for the United States in promoting stability in the Horn and East/Central Africa and in combatting terror.”

    “Congressman McGovern condemns Uganda’s Anti-Homosexuality Act in the strongest of terms,“ Matthew Bonaccorsi, a spokesperson for Rep. James P. McGovern of Massachusetts, the senior Democrat on the House Rules Committee, told The Intercept. “He believes that the United States government should respond not only by imposing individual sanctions on those responsible for this violation of human rights, but also by suspending military and security assistance until this law is repealed and the rights of innocent LGTBQI+ Ugandans are restored.”

    The Defense Department has spent more than $280 million on equipment and training for Uganda since 2011, according to the Congressional Research Service. That does not include about $18 million in funds for international military education and training and peacekeeping operations scheduled to be doled out this year. Uganda has also been the largest recipient of U.S. funding for the African Union Mission in Somalia, or AMISOM, which has cost the U.S. roughly $2.5 billion overall. That includes “train and equip” funding, of which Uganda has been among the largest recipients on the African continent.

    A Ugandan gay man packs his bags to vacate the city, in Kampala, on May 30, 2023 following Ugandan President Yoweri Museveni signing into law draconian new measures against homosexuality described as among the world's harshest, prompting condemnation from human rights and LGBTQ groups. (Photo by AFP) (Photo by -/AFP via Getty Images)

    A Ugandan gay man packs his bags to vacate the city in Kampala, Uganda, on May 30, 2023.

    Photo: AFP via Getty Images

    “The law has been widely condemned in the U.S. press, but few have noted the critical role the U.S. has played in bolstering this regime’s military capacity.”

    “Uganda’s horrific new law targeting LGBTQ people is just the latest reminder of how unchecked funneling of weapons and training to brutal regimes abroad can inadvertently enable crimes against humanity,” Erik Sperling of Just Foreign Policy, an advocacy group critical of mainstream Washington foreign policy, told The Intercept. “The law has been widely condemned in the U.S. press, but few have noted the critical role the U.S. has played in bolstering this regime’s military capacity. It’s too late to rescind the hundreds of millions in weapons and training already provided to Ugandan forces, but any future aid should be suspended indefinitely.”

    U.S. Africa Command provided boilerplate responses that did not address the substance of The Intercept’s questions. “U.S. Africa Command focuses on building African partner nation capabilities primarily through security force assistance programs, exercises, military-to-military and key leader engagements, and operations,” AFRICOM spokesperson Kelly Cahalan told The Intercept by email.

    Research by The Intercept turned up copious evidence of significant and enduring assistance to the East African nation. 

    The United States has employed Ugandan commandos as U.S. proxies — dispatched on U.S.-directed missions, targeting U.S. enemies to achieve U.S. aims — in Somalia under the shadowy 127e authority as part of a counterterrorism program code-named Ultimate Hunter.

    U.S. Special Operations forces have also repeatedly traveled to Uganda to train alongside members of the Uganda People’s Defense Force, or UPDF, and other security forces as part of the Joint Combined Exchange Training program. As recently as April, U.S. troops conducted a JCET there.

    The United States also has a long-standing base in Entebbe, Uganda. Over many years, it has served as a staging area for “essential” airlift and evacuation missions; a sometime home away from home for Special Purpose Marine Air-Ground Task Force, Crisis Response, or SPMAGTF-CR; and the headquarters for a Special Operations unit that spearheaded the failed mission to capture or kill warlord Joseph Kony.

    In 2017, according to exclusive documents obtained by The Intercept via the Freedom of Information Act, AFRICOM launched an investigation into “allegations of rape, sexual assault, and abuse … allegedly committed by Ugandan military forces” in the Central African Republic during the hunt for Kony. The results of the inquiry have never been made public.

    U.S. training exercises are regularly held in Uganda and Ugandan forces also travel overseas for U.S. schooling and other activities. Since 2007, according to data from the State Department and the Security Assistance Monitor, a program of the nonprofit Center for International Policy, the U.S. has provided more than 62,000 trainings for Uganda’s security forces. That includes more than 5,000 in 2020, the last year for which we have comprehensive figures.

    In 2019, for example, U.S. Marines and sailors with SPMAGTF-CR advised local forces at the Uganda Rapid Deployment Capability Center in Jinja, Uganda, and Peace Operations Training Center in Singo, Uganda. “We started training alongside the UPDF members by covering weapons handling and safety rules, land navigation, and reaction of enemy contact, to lead us to the main focus of this iteration which is patrolling tactics,” explained U.S. Marine Lance Cpl. Matthew Wade, a team leader with SPMAGTF-CR at the time.

    In 2020, U.S. soldiers conducted a training course on leadership skills with Uganda Wildlife Authority rangers. In 2022, Bob Paciesky Ogiki, the chief of staff of the Ugandan military’s land forces, traveled to the U.S.-run African Land Forces Colloquium in Grafenwöhr, Germany, where top leaders discussed security challenges and, according to U.S. military press releases, “ways to ‘Train to Fight.’” Earlier this year, portions of AFRICOM’s Justified Accord 23, a long-running multinational exercise involving more than 20 countries, were held in Uganda.

    Uganda has been an especially important U.S. partner, according to a 2020 inspector general’s report, because it is the only one of five troop-contributing countries to the AMISOM mission to have “engaged in joint combat operations with [Somali] troops.” The largest African Union contingent in Somalia force for many years, Uganda has suffered grave losses there. Last month, fighters from the terror group al-Shabab attacked Ugandan troops at a base for the African Union Transition Mission in Somalia. Uganda put its death toll at 54; al-Shabab said the coordinated assault killed 137.

    According to the 2020 inspector general’s report, “Uganda sent two UH-1 ‘Huey’ helicopters, purchased by the U.S. Government, and two Bell-412 helicopters to … [Somalia’s] Baledogle Military Airfield to provide airlift and reconnaissance capabilities to AMISOM operations.” That year, the State Department also awarded a $14.7 million grant to Bancroft Global Development, a private military contractor, “to mentor and train both [Somalia’s] Danab Brigade and Ugandan forces.” In addition to all the military support, the United States also provides significant humanitarian and economic assistance to Uganda, with the total amount approaching $1 billion per year.

    “This draconian new legislation deprives LGBTQ+ Ugandans of their basic human rights. It is shocking and shameful,” Rep. Barbara Lee, D-Calif., told The Intercept by email. “I hope that the Ugandan courts will act to protect the basic human rights of all Ugandans, regardless of their sexual identity.”

    AFRICOM did not respond to questions about whether cutting military aid to Uganda would affect its mission or if its reluctance to answer questions about Uganda was linked to its anti-LGBTQ+ law.

    Join The Conversation


    This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by Nick Turse.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/29/progressives-use-pentagon-budget-to-protest-outrageous-anti-lgbtq-law/feed/ 0 408191
    Nancy Altman on GOP Social Security Attack, Daniel Ellsberg Revisited https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/23/nancy-altman-on-gop-social-security-attack-daniel-ellsberg-revisited/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/23/nancy-altman-on-gop-social-security-attack-daniel-ellsberg-revisited/#respond Fri, 23 Jun 2023 15:34:22 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9034104 When Daniel Ellsberg died, media burnished their own reputation as truth-tellers while somehow dishonoring the practice of truth-telling.

    The post Nancy Altman on GOP Social Security Attack, Daniel Ellsberg Revisited appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
          CounterSpin230623.mp3

     

    Republicans

    New Republic (6/14/23)

    This week on CounterSpin: 70% of House Republicans belong to the Republican Study Committee, which just released a budget that calls for curtailing programs supporting racial equity and LGBTQ rights, natch—and also for increased cuts and access hurdles for Social Security and Medicare. It’s a tale as old as time, how some people want to take resources explicitly designated for seniors and disabled people and funnel them to rich people, in supposed service of “saving” those popular social programs. We’ve been asking for debunking of that storyline for years now from Nancy Altman, president of the group Social Security Works, and author of books, including The Battle for Social Security: From FDR’s Vision to Bush’s Gamble. We’ll get some more debunking this week, because when it comes to Social Security, it seems everything old will always be new again.

          CounterSpin230623Altman.mp3

     

    Daniel Ellsberg

    Daniel Ellsberg (CC photo: Christopher Michel)

    Also on the show: Whistleblower Daniel Ellsberg died last week at the age of 92, and elite media did that thing they do, where they sort of honor someone they discredited in life, burnishing their own reputation as truth-tellers while still somehow dishonoring the practice of truth-telling—of the sort that afflicts the comfortable. CounterSpin spoke with Ellsberg many times over the years. We hear just some of those conversations this week on the show.

          CounterSpin230623Ellsberg.mp3

     

    The post Nancy Altman on GOP Social Security Attack, Daniel Ellsberg Revisited appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/23/nancy-altman-on-gop-social-security-attack-daniel-ellsberg-revisited/feed/ 0 406493
    How a New Budget Loophole Could Send Pentagon Spending Soaring Even Higher https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/22/how-a-new-budget-loophole-could-send-pentagon-spending-soaring-even-higher/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/22/how-a-new-budget-loophole-could-send-pentagon-spending-soaring-even-higher/#respond Thu, 22 Jun 2023 05:59:21 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=286931

    Photo by Erwan Hesry

    On June 3rd, President Joe Biden signed a bill into law that lifted the government’s debt ceiling and capped some categories of government spending. The big winner was — surprise, surprise! — the Pentagon.

    Congress spared military-related programs any cuts while freezing all other categories of discretionary spending at the fiscal year 2023 level (except support for veterans). Indeed, lawmakers set the budget for the Pentagon and for other national security programs like nuclear-related work developing nuclear warheads at the Department of Energy at the level requested in the administration’s Fiscal Year 2024 budget proposal — a 3.3% increase in military spending to a whopping total of $886 billion. Consider that preferential treatment of the first order and, mind you, for the only government agency that’s failed to pass a single financial audit!

    Even so, that $886 billion hike in Pentagon and related spending is likely to prove just a floor, not a ceiling, on what will be allocated for “national defense” next year. An analysis of the deal by the Wall Street Journal found that spending on the Pentagon and veterans’ care — neither of which is frozen in the agreement — is likely to pass $1 trillion next year.

    Compare that to the $637 billion left for the rest of the government’s discretionary budget. In other words, public health, environmental protection, housing, transportation, and almost everything else the government undertakes will have to make do with not even 45% of the federal government’s discretionary budget, less than what would be needed to keep up with inflation. (Forget addressing unmet needs in this country.)

    And count on one thing: national security spending is likely to increase even more, thanks to a huge (if little-noticed) loophole in that budget deal, one that hawks in Congress are already salivating over how best to exploit. Yes, that loophole is easy to miss, given the bureaucratese used to explain it, but its potential impact on soaring military budgets couldn’t be clearer. In its analysis of the budget deal, the Congressional Budget Office noted that “funding designated as an emergency requirement or for overseas contingency operations would not be constrained” by anything the senators and House congressional representatives had agreed to.

    As we should have learned from the 20 years of all-American wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, the term “overseas contingency” can be stretched to cover almost anything the Pentagon wants to spend your tax dollars on. In fact, there was even an “Overseas Contingency Operations” (OCO) account supposedly reserved for funding this country’s seemingly never-ending post-9/11 wars. And it certainly was used to fund them, but hundreds of billions of dollars of Pentagon projects that had nothing to do with the conflicts in Iraq or Afghanistan were funded that way as well. The critics of Pentagon overspending quickly dubbed it that department’s “slush fund.”

    So, prepare yourself for “Slush Fund II” (coming soon to a theater near you). This time the vehicle for padding the Pentagon budget is likely to be the next military aid package for Ukraine, which will likely be put forward as an emergency bill later this year.  Expect that package to include not only aid to help Ukraine fend off Russia’s ongoing brutal invasion but tens of billions of dollars more to — yes, of course! — pump up the Pentagon’s already bloated budget.

    Senator Lindsey Graham (R-SC) made just such a point in talking with reporters shortly after the debt-ceiling deal was passed by Congress. “There will be a day before too long,” he told them, “where we’ll have to deal with the Ukrainian situation. And that will create an opportunity for me and others to fill in the deficiencies that exist from this budget deal.”

    Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-NY) made a similar point in a statement on the Senate floor during the debate over that deal. “The debt ceiling deal,” he said, “does nothing to limit the Senate’s ability to appropriate emergency/supplemental funds to ensure our military capabilities are sufficient to deter China, Russia, and our other adversaries and respond to ongoing and growing national security threats.”

    One potential (and surprising) snag in the future plans of those Pentagon budget boosters in both parties may be the position of House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-CA). He has, in fact, described efforts to increase Pentagon spending beyond the level set in the recent budget deal as “part of the problem.” For the moment at least, he openly opposes producing an emergency package to increase the Pentagon budget, saying:

    “The last five audits the Department of Defense [have] failed. So there’s a lot of places for reform [where] we can have a lot of savings. We’ve plussed it up. This is the most money we’ve ever spent on defense — this is the most money anyone in the world has ever spent on defense. So I don’t think the first answer is to do a supplemental.”

    The Massive Overfunding of the Pentagon

    The Department of Defense is, of course, already massively overfunded. That $886 billion figure is among the highest ever — hundreds of billions of dollars more than at the peak of the Korean or Vietnam wars or during the most intensely combative years of the Cold War. It’s higher than the combined military budgets of the next 10 countries combined, most of whom are, in any case, U.S. allies. And it’s estimated to be three times what the Chinese military, the Pentagon’s “pacing threat,” receives annually. Consider it an irony that actually “keeping pace” with China would involve a massive cut in military spending, not an increase in the Pentagon’s bloated budget.

    It also should go without saying that preparations to effectively defend the United States and its allies could be achieved for so much less than is currently lavished on the Pentagon.  A new approach could easily save significantly more than $100 billion in fiscal year 2024, as proposed by Representatives Barbara Lee (D-CA) and Mark Pocan (D-WI) in the People Over Pentagon Act, the preeminent budget-cut proposal in Congress. An illustrative report released by the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) in late 2021 sketched out three scenarios, all involving a less interventionist, more restrained approach to defense that would include greater reliance on allies. Each option would reduce America’s 1.3-million-strong active military force (by up to one-fifth in one scenario). Total savings from the CBO’s proposed changes would, over a decade, be $1 trillion.

    And a more comprehensive approach that shifted away from the current “cover the globe” strategy of being able to fight (though, as the history of this century shows, not always win) wars virtually anywhere on Earth on short notice — without allies, if necessary — could save hundreds of billions more over the next decade. Cutting bureaucracy and making other changes in defense policy could also yield yet more savings. To cite just two examples, reducing the Pentagon’s cohort of more than half-a-million private contract employees and scaling back its nuclear weapons “modernization” program would save significantly more than $300 billion extra over a decade.

    But none of this is even remotely likely without concerted public pressure to, as a start, keep members of Congress from adding tens of billions of dollars in spending on parochial military projects that channel funding into their states or districts. And it would also mean pushing back against the propaganda of Pentagon contractors who claim they need ever more money to provide adequate tools to defend the country.

    Contractors Crying Wolf

    While demanding ever more of our tax dollars, the giant military-industrial corporations are spending all too much of their time simply stuffing the pockets of their shareholders rather than investing in the tools needed to actually defend this country. A recent Department of Defense report found that, from 2010-2019, such companies increased by 73% over the previous decade what they paid their shareholders. Meanwhile, their investment in research, development, and capital assets declined significantly. Still, such corporations claim that, without further Pentagon funding, they can’t afford to invest enough in their businesses to meet future national security challenges, which include ramping up weapons production to provide arms for Ukraine.

    In reality, however, the financial data suggests that they simply chose to reward their shareholders over everything and everyone else, even as they experienced steadily improving profit margins and cash generation. In fact, the report pointed out that those companies “generate substantial amounts of cash beyond their needs for operations or capital investment.” So instead of investing further in their businesses, they choose to eat their “seed corn” by prioritizing short-term gains over long-term investments and by “investing” additional profits in their shareholders. And when you eat your seed corn, you have nothing left to plant next year.

    Never fear, though, since Congress seems eternally prepared to bail them out. Their businesses, in fact, continue to thrive because Congress authorizes funding for the Pentagon to repeatedly grant them massive contracts, no matter their performance or lack of internal investment. No other industry could get away with such maximalist thinking.

    Military contractors outperform similarly sized companies in non-defense industries in eight out of nine key financial metrics — including higher total returns to shareholders (a category where they leave much of the rest of the S&P 500 in the dust). They financially outshine their commercial counterparts for two obvious reasons: first, the government subsidizes so many of their costs; second, the weapons industry is so concentrated that its major firms have little or no competition.

    Adding insult to injury, contractors are overcharging the government for the basic weaponry they produce while they rake in cash to enrich their shareholders. In the past 15 years, the Pentagon’s internal watchdog has exposed price gouging by contractors ranging from Boeing and Lockheed Martin to lesser-known companies like TransDigm Group. In 2011, Boeing made about $13 million in excess profits by overcharging the Army for 18 spare parts used in Apache and Chinook helicopters. To put that in perspective, the Army paid $1,678.61 each for a tiny helicopter part that the Pentagon already had in stock at its own warehouse for only $7.71.

    The Pentagon found Lockheed Martin and Boeing price gouging together in 2015. They overcharged the military by “hundreds of millions of dollars” for missiles.TransDigm similarly made $16 million by overcharging for spare parts between 2015 and 2017 and even more in the following two years, generating nearly $21 million in excess profits. If you can believe it, there is no legal requirement for such companies to refund the government if they’re exposed for price gouging.

    Of course, there’s nothing new about such corporate price gouging, nor is it unique to the arms industry. But it’s especially egregious there, given how heavily the major military contractors depend on the government’s business. Lockheed Martin, the biggest of them, got a staggering 73% of its $66 billion in net sales from the government in 2022. Boeing, which does far more commercial business, still generated 40% of its revenue from the government that year. (Down from 51% in 2020.)

    Despite their reliance on government contracts, companies like Boeing seem to be doubling down on practices that often lead to price gouging. According to Bloomberg News, between 2020 and 2021, Boeing refused to provide the Pentagon with certified cost and pricing data for nearly 11,000 spare parts on a single Air Force contract. Senator Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) and Representative John Garamendi (D-CA) have demanded that the Pentagon investigate since, without such information, the department will continue to be hard-pressed to ensure that it’s paying anything like a fair price, whatever its purchases.

    Curbing the Special Interest Politics of “Defense”

    Reining in rip-offs and corruption on the part of weapons contractors large and small could save the American taxpayer untold billions of dollars. And curbing special-interest politics on the part of the denizens of the military-industrial-congressional complex (MICC) could help open the way towards the development of a truly defensive global military strategy rather than the current interventionist approach that has embroiled the United States in the devastating and counterproductive wars of this century.

    One modest step towards reining in the power of the arms lobby would be to revamp the campaign finance system by providing federal matching funds, thereby diluting the influential nature of the tens of millions in campaign contributions the arms industry makes every election cycle. In addition, prohibiting retiring top military officers from going to work for arms-making companies — or, at least, extending the cooling off period to at least four years before they can do so, as proposed by Senator Warren — would also help reduce the undue influence exerted by the MICC.

    Last but not least, steps could be taken to prevent the military services from giving Congress their annual wish lists — officially known as “unfunded priorities lists” — of items they want added to the Pentagon budget. After all, those are but another tool allowing members of Congress to add billions more than what the Pentagon has even asked for to that department’s budget.

    Whether such reforms alone, if adopted, would be enough to truly roll back excess Pentagon spending remains to be seen. Without them, however, count on one thing: the department’s budget will almost certainly continue to soar, undoubtedly reaching $1 trillion or more annually within just the next few years.  Americans can’t afford to let that happen.

    This column is distributed by TomDispatch.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Julia Gledhill – William D. Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/22/how-a-new-budget-loophole-could-send-pentagon-spending-soaring-even-higher/feed/ 0 405905
    How a New Budget Loophole Could Send Pentagon Spending Soaring Even Higher https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/22/how-a-new-budget-loophole-could-send-pentagon-spending-soaring-even-higher/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/22/how-a-new-budget-loophole-could-send-pentagon-spending-soaring-even-higher/#respond Thu, 22 Jun 2023 05:59:21 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=286931

    Photo by Erwan Hesry

    On June 3rd, President Joe Biden signed a bill into law that lifted the government’s debt ceiling and capped some categories of government spending. The big winner was — surprise, surprise! — the Pentagon.

    Congress spared military-related programs any cuts while freezing all other categories of discretionary spending at the fiscal year 2023 level (except support for veterans). Indeed, lawmakers set the budget for the Pentagon and for other national security programs like nuclear-related work developing nuclear warheads at the Department of Energy at the level requested in the administration’s Fiscal Year 2024 budget proposal — a 3.3% increase in military spending to a whopping total of $886 billion. Consider that preferential treatment of the first order and, mind you, for the only government agency that’s failed to pass a single financial audit!

    Even so, that $886 billion hike in Pentagon and related spending is likely to prove just a floor, not a ceiling, on what will be allocated for “national defense” next year. An analysis of the deal by the Wall Street Journal found that spending on the Pentagon and veterans’ care — neither of which is frozen in the agreement — is likely to pass $1 trillion next year.

    Compare that to the $637 billion left for the rest of the government’s discretionary budget. In other words, public health, environmental protection, housing, transportation, and almost everything else the government undertakes will have to make do with not even 45% of the federal government’s discretionary budget, less than what would be needed to keep up with inflation. (Forget addressing unmet needs in this country.)

    And count on one thing: national security spending is likely to increase even more, thanks to a huge (if little-noticed) loophole in that budget deal, one that hawks in Congress are already salivating over how best to exploit. Yes, that loophole is easy to miss, given the bureaucratese used to explain it, but its potential impact on soaring military budgets couldn’t be clearer. In its analysis of the budget deal, the Congressional Budget Office noted that “funding designated as an emergency requirement or for overseas contingency operations would not be constrained” by anything the senators and House congressional representatives had agreed to.

    As we should have learned from the 20 years of all-American wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, the term “overseas contingency” can be stretched to cover almost anything the Pentagon wants to spend your tax dollars on. In fact, there was even an “Overseas Contingency Operations” (OCO) account supposedly reserved for funding this country’s seemingly never-ending post-9/11 wars. And it certainly was used to fund them, but hundreds of billions of dollars of Pentagon projects that had nothing to do with the conflicts in Iraq or Afghanistan were funded that way as well. The critics of Pentagon overspending quickly dubbed it that department’s “slush fund.”

    So, prepare yourself for “Slush Fund II” (coming soon to a theater near you). This time the vehicle for padding the Pentagon budget is likely to be the next military aid package for Ukraine, which will likely be put forward as an emergency bill later this year.  Expect that package to include not only aid to help Ukraine fend off Russia’s ongoing brutal invasion but tens of billions of dollars more to — yes, of course! — pump up the Pentagon’s already bloated budget.

    Senator Lindsey Graham (R-SC) made just such a point in talking with reporters shortly after the debt-ceiling deal was passed by Congress. “There will be a day before too long,” he told them, “where we’ll have to deal with the Ukrainian situation. And that will create an opportunity for me and others to fill in the deficiencies that exist from this budget deal.”

    Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-NY) made a similar point in a statement on the Senate floor during the debate over that deal. “The debt ceiling deal,” he said, “does nothing to limit the Senate’s ability to appropriate emergency/supplemental funds to ensure our military capabilities are sufficient to deter China, Russia, and our other adversaries and respond to ongoing and growing national security threats.”

    One potential (and surprising) snag in the future plans of those Pentagon budget boosters in both parties may be the position of House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-CA). He has, in fact, described efforts to increase Pentagon spending beyond the level set in the recent budget deal as “part of the problem.” For the moment at least, he openly opposes producing an emergency package to increase the Pentagon budget, saying:

    “The last five audits the Department of Defense [have] failed. So there’s a lot of places for reform [where] we can have a lot of savings. We’ve plussed it up. This is the most money we’ve ever spent on defense — this is the most money anyone in the world has ever spent on defense. So I don’t think the first answer is to do a supplemental.”

    The Massive Overfunding of the Pentagon

    The Department of Defense is, of course, already massively overfunded. That $886 billion figure is among the highest ever — hundreds of billions of dollars more than at the peak of the Korean or Vietnam wars or during the most intensely combative years of the Cold War. It’s higher than the combined military budgets of the next 10 countries combined, most of whom are, in any case, U.S. allies. And it’s estimated to be three times what the Chinese military, the Pentagon’s “pacing threat,” receives annually. Consider it an irony that actually “keeping pace” with China would involve a massive cut in military spending, not an increase in the Pentagon’s bloated budget.

    It also should go without saying that preparations to effectively defend the United States and its allies could be achieved for so much less than is currently lavished on the Pentagon.  A new approach could easily save significantly more than $100 billion in fiscal year 2024, as proposed by Representatives Barbara Lee (D-CA) and Mark Pocan (D-WI) in the People Over Pentagon Act, the preeminent budget-cut proposal in Congress. An illustrative report released by the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) in late 2021 sketched out three scenarios, all involving a less interventionist, more restrained approach to defense that would include greater reliance on allies. Each option would reduce America’s 1.3-million-strong active military force (by up to one-fifth in one scenario). Total savings from the CBO’s proposed changes would, over a decade, be $1 trillion.

    And a more comprehensive approach that shifted away from the current “cover the globe” strategy of being able to fight (though, as the history of this century shows, not always win) wars virtually anywhere on Earth on short notice — without allies, if necessary — could save hundreds of billions more over the next decade. Cutting bureaucracy and making other changes in defense policy could also yield yet more savings. To cite just two examples, reducing the Pentagon’s cohort of more than half-a-million private contract employees and scaling back its nuclear weapons “modernization” program would save significantly more than $300 billion extra over a decade.

    But none of this is even remotely likely without concerted public pressure to, as a start, keep members of Congress from adding tens of billions of dollars in spending on parochial military projects that channel funding into their states or districts. And it would also mean pushing back against the propaganda of Pentagon contractors who claim they need ever more money to provide adequate tools to defend the country.

    Contractors Crying Wolf

    While demanding ever more of our tax dollars, the giant military-industrial corporations are spending all too much of their time simply stuffing the pockets of their shareholders rather than investing in the tools needed to actually defend this country. A recent Department of Defense report found that, from 2010-2019, such companies increased by 73% over the previous decade what they paid their shareholders. Meanwhile, their investment in research, development, and capital assets declined significantly. Still, such corporations claim that, without further Pentagon funding, they can’t afford to invest enough in their businesses to meet future national security challenges, which include ramping up weapons production to provide arms for Ukraine.

    In reality, however, the financial data suggests that they simply chose to reward their shareholders over everything and everyone else, even as they experienced steadily improving profit margins and cash generation. In fact, the report pointed out that those companies “generate substantial amounts of cash beyond their needs for operations or capital investment.” So instead of investing further in their businesses, they choose to eat their “seed corn” by prioritizing short-term gains over long-term investments and by “investing” additional profits in their shareholders. And when you eat your seed corn, you have nothing left to plant next year.

    Never fear, though, since Congress seems eternally prepared to bail them out. Their businesses, in fact, continue to thrive because Congress authorizes funding for the Pentagon to repeatedly grant them massive contracts, no matter their performance or lack of internal investment. No other industry could get away with such maximalist thinking.

    Military contractors outperform similarly sized companies in non-defense industries in eight out of nine key financial metrics — including higher total returns to shareholders (a category where they leave much of the rest of the S&P 500 in the dust). They financially outshine their commercial counterparts for two obvious reasons: first, the government subsidizes so many of their costs; second, the weapons industry is so concentrated that its major firms have little or no competition.

    Adding insult to injury, contractors are overcharging the government for the basic weaponry they produce while they rake in cash to enrich their shareholders. In the past 15 years, the Pentagon’s internal watchdog has exposed price gouging by contractors ranging from Boeing and Lockheed Martin to lesser-known companies like TransDigm Group. In 2011, Boeing made about $13 million in excess profits by overcharging the Army for 18 spare parts used in Apache and Chinook helicopters. To put that in perspective, the Army paid $1,678.61 each for a tiny helicopter part that the Pentagon already had in stock at its own warehouse for only $7.71.

    The Pentagon found Lockheed Martin and Boeing price gouging together in 2015. They overcharged the military by “hundreds of millions of dollars” for missiles.TransDigm similarly made $16 million by overcharging for spare parts between 2015 and 2017 and even more in the following two years, generating nearly $21 million in excess profits. If you can believe it, there is no legal requirement for such companies to refund the government if they’re exposed for price gouging.

    Of course, there’s nothing new about such corporate price gouging, nor is it unique to the arms industry. But it’s especially egregious there, given how heavily the major military contractors depend on the government’s business. Lockheed Martin, the biggest of them, got a staggering 73% of its $66 billion in net sales from the government in 2022. Boeing, which does far more commercial business, still generated 40% of its revenue from the government that year. (Down from 51% in 2020.)

    Despite their reliance on government contracts, companies like Boeing seem to be doubling down on practices that often lead to price gouging. According to Bloomberg News, between 2020 and 2021, Boeing refused to provide the Pentagon with certified cost and pricing data for nearly 11,000 spare parts on a single Air Force contract. Senator Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) and Representative John Garamendi (D-CA) have demanded that the Pentagon investigate since, without such information, the department will continue to be hard-pressed to ensure that it’s paying anything like a fair price, whatever its purchases.

    Curbing the Special Interest Politics of “Defense”

    Reining in rip-offs and corruption on the part of weapons contractors large and small could save the American taxpayer untold billions of dollars. And curbing special-interest politics on the part of the denizens of the military-industrial-congressional complex (MICC) could help open the way towards the development of a truly defensive global military strategy rather than the current interventionist approach that has embroiled the United States in the devastating and counterproductive wars of this century.

    One modest step towards reining in the power of the arms lobby would be to revamp the campaign finance system by providing federal matching funds, thereby diluting the influential nature of the tens of millions in campaign contributions the arms industry makes every election cycle. In addition, prohibiting retiring top military officers from going to work for arms-making companies — or, at least, extending the cooling off period to at least four years before they can do so, as proposed by Senator Warren — would also help reduce the undue influence exerted by the MICC.

    Last but not least, steps could be taken to prevent the military services from giving Congress their annual wish lists — officially known as “unfunded priorities lists” — of items they want added to the Pentagon budget. After all, those are but another tool allowing members of Congress to add billions more than what the Pentagon has even asked for to that department’s budget.

    Whether such reforms alone, if adopted, would be enough to truly roll back excess Pentagon spending remains to be seen. Without them, however, count on one thing: the department’s budget will almost certainly continue to soar, undoubtedly reaching $1 trillion or more annually within just the next few years.  Americans can’t afford to let that happen.

    This column is distributed by TomDispatch.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Julia Gledhill – William D. Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/22/how-a-new-budget-loophole-could-send-pentagon-spending-soaring-even-higher/feed/ 0 405906
    Starved of funds and vision, struggling universities put NZ’s entire research strategy at risk https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/21/starved-of-funds-and-vision-struggling-universities-put-nzs-entire-research-strategy-at-risk/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/21/starved-of-funds-and-vision-struggling-universities-put-nzs-entire-research-strategy-at-risk/#respond Wed, 21 Jun 2023 23:14:34 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=90052 ANALYSIS: By Nicola Gaston, University of Auckland

    The crisis in Aotearoa New Zealand’s university and wider research sector did not happen overnight. While funding shortfalls and sweeping redundancies are now making headlines, the underlying problems have been evident for years.

    As I wrote after last year’s budget, financial support for research across our universities and crown research institutes “is steadily eroding and has been doing so for some time”, given the impacts of inflation.

    The year before was no better. “The 2021 budget is not the investment we needed to see,” I wrote then. “Anything other than an increase in line with inflation is rather a slap in the face.”

    And of 2020’s covid-dominated budget, I could only say: “Under normal conditions, I might describe this as a disappointing budget for science [. . . ] missing not merely in action, but in aspiration.”

    It was a similar story in 2019, with a 1.8 percent increase to tertiary tuition subsidies only slightly alleviating inflation pressure; and in 2018, when the government restated its intention to lift research funding to 2 percent of gross domestic product (GDP) over 10 years.

    That 2 pecent of GDP target has been around for a long time now, with little significant movement and a current spend of 1.47 percent. The lack of new funding for science and research in recent successive budgets might once have been explained by sector reform being a work in progress.

    But time is running out.

    With redundancies wreaking havoc across the university sector in particular, getting new funding into the system should have been a priority in this year’s budget. The opportunity cost of not doing this is simply too great.

    Challenge and capacity
    The university sector is now undeniably in crisis, with the scale of the cuts — most seriously at Otago and Victoria University of Wellington, but also at Waikato and Massey — becoming clearer in the past few weeks.

    The Prime Minister and Minister of Education refuse to interfere in what they see as operational matters, saying universities need to adapt to changing realities.

    And there is little doubt universities face real challenges, from the changing nature of work, to increased expectations of digital learning, and the implications of artificial intelligence tools.

    But cutting staff undermines the sector’s capacity to deal with those challenges in the first place — because capacity lies at the heart of this issue. As former prime minister Helen Clark said last week:

    It has taken decades to build the current capacities of our universities. That should not be destroyed by short-term budgetary considerations. The money required to maintain viable and comprehensive universities is small in the overall scheme of things.

    The missing money may indeed be small. But a lack of inflation adjustment over multiple years has created real problems — especially given universities did not qualify for any financial support during covid-19, and have cut or not replaced staff over the past three years already.

    A system at odds with itself
    This year, the key budget hole is traceable to a dip in student numbers, likely related to sub-optimal student experiences during the pandemic, and perhaps the relatively strong job market.

    It is easy to sympathise with this, and to hope those students return to tertiary education in future. The question is, what will our universities look like if and when they do?

    That research funding target of 2 percent of GDP — reiterated again in this year’s budget — has been with us since 2017.

    Patience was encouraged on the basis that, while government funding was below target, business expenditure on research and development (R&D) was even worse. We needed to wait for R&D tax credits to move that dial before government funding would increase.

    But the reverse is now true. As last year’s white paper from science sector reform programme Te Ara Paerangi-Future Pathways made clear, it was no longer business R&D capacity that was holding us back — it was capacity on the public side:

    The current [research, science and innovation] system is poorly placed to utilise increased funding to prepare us for [the] future.

    That the loss of capacity threatened by current university cuts seems not to have raised concerns in government about the viability of its own research strategy suggests something is profoundly wrong.

    Simple funding solutions
    The immediate solution shouldn’t be that hard. As has been pointed out elsewhere, money to cover projected higher student enrolments was originally budgeted for by the government.

    The decision not to allocate that money due to lower than expected enrolments is really a question of funding priorities and structures.

    The research activities of universities are supported first through baseline funding to ensure there is available capacity; and secondly through contestable grants that allow governments to invest in research areas on strategic grounds (such as health or economic development).

    A shift in the balance between baseline and per-student funding is not a dramatic structural change. An alternative might be to set a floor on how much per-student funding can be cut from one year to the next — just like the government sets a cap on raising student fees, for example.

    A coordinated national strategy
    In the longer term, it would also be good to see stronger coordination and collaboration between universities at both governance and academic levels.

    Perhaps a “supercouncil” composed of representatives of each university council could provide the forum for this. It would help ensure individual university strategies were complementary, making the most of their distinctiveness and responsibilities to local communities.

    And to address those concerns about adaptation to modern realities, a ministry of education initiative to develop strategic plans for disciplines and programmes (with academic input) would be welcome.

    The relationship between university research and teaching, mandated in the Education Act, should mean that changing research realities have implications for how and what we teach.

    It is a matter of academic freedom that universities and academics make these decisions themselves. But having national strategic thinking available to support those decisions could only be a good thing.

    At the very least, it would be rather more strategic than making these decisions based on the order in which staff apply for redundancy.The Conversation

    Dr Nicola Gaston, co-director of the MacDiarmid Institute for Advanced Materials and Nanotechnology, University of Auckland. This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons licence. Read the original article.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/21/starved-of-funds-and-vision-struggling-universities-put-nzs-entire-research-strategy-at-risk/feed/ 0 405865
    Senate Budget Hearing Reveals Need to Investigate Fossil Fuel Dark Money, Address Coordinated Disinformation Campaigns https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/21/senate-budget-hearing-reveals-need-to-investigate-fossil-fuel-dark-money-address-coordinated-disinformation-campaigns/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/21/senate-budget-hearing-reveals-need-to-investigate-fossil-fuel-dark-money-address-coordinated-disinformation-campaigns/#respond Wed, 21 Jun 2023 19:36:02 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/senate-budget-hearing-reveals-need-to-investigate-fossil-fuel-dark-money-address-coordinated-disinformation-campaigns

    "The conditions of the Act on Animal Welfare are inescapable in my mind: If the government and license-holders cannot guarantee welfare requirements, this activity does not have a future," she added, raising whaling opponents' hopes for a permanent ban.

    Svavarsdóttir's decision follows the publication this week of a report by the country's Food and Veterinary Authority (MAST) that called last season's whale hunt illegal because it did not meet the standards required by the Icelandic Animal Welfare Act.

    "This is a major milestone in compassionate whale conservation. Humane Society International is thrilled at this news and praises Minister Svavarsdóttir for ending the senseless whale killing which will spare hundreds of minke and imperiled fin whales from agonizing and protracted deaths," the advocacy group's Europe executive director Rudd Tombrock said in a statement.

    "There is no humane way to kill a whale at sea, and so we urge the minister to make this a permanent ban," Tombrock added. "Whales already face so many serious threats in the oceans from pollution, climate change, entanglement in fish nets, and ship strikes, that ending cruel commercial whaling is the only ethical conclusion."

    Speaking after last year's Icelandic whaling season, Sharon Livermore, the director for marine conservation at the Massachusetts-based International Fund for Animal Welfare (IFAW) noted that "studies have shown that it can take up to 25 minutes for a whale to die after being shot with an explosive harpoon."

    "This summer, one fin whale was landed with four harpoons in its body. This tragic example indicates that many whales suffer a slow and agonizing death because of whaling," she added. "It is unbearable to imagine how these animals must suffer."

    Danny Groves of the U.K.-based group Whale and Dolphin Conservation wrote on Tuesday:

    Aside from the issues with the killing methods, the MAST report's expert panel also concluded that it is not possible to determine the sex of a whale from the ship or whether they are about to kill a pregnant female or a lactating mother with a calf. The chances of surviving for motherless whale calves are negligible. Hunting is also not possible without following the whales for some time before shooting, which causes stress and fear, and killing them is not possible in a quick and painless manner.

    Referring to Iceland, Robert Read, who heads the U.K. branch of the direct action group Sea Shepherd, said that "if whaling can't be done humanely here... it can't be done humanely anywhere."

    "Whales are architects for the ocean," Read added. "They help boost biodiversity, they help fight climate change by affecting the carbon cycling process."

    Last summer, Hvalur—the only whaling company still operating in Iceland—slaughtered 148 fin whales in the frigid Atlantic waters around the island nation. This, despite the International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) classifying fin whales as "vulnerable."

    The Icelandic government allows the annual slaughter of up to 209 fin whales and 217 minke whales. While the International Whaling Commission (IWC) agreed to a global moratorium on all commercial whaling in 1986, Iceland—which is an IWC member—formally objects to the policy.

    IUCN credits bans on whaling—only Iceland, Japan, and Norway allow commercial hunts—for improving the fin whale's status from "endangered" to "vulnerable" in 2018.

    Hvalur previously announced that this would be its last whaling season in business, citing a decline in profits, according toEuronews Green.

    "Justification is required if whaling is to be allowed," Svavarsdóttir wrote in February 2022. "It must be demonstrated that it is economically justified to renew hunting permits."

    "Justification is required if whaling is to be allowed."

    The minister asserted that it is "indisputable" that whaling has "not had much economic significance for the national economy in recent years."

    "There is little evidence that there is any economic benefit to doing this fishing, as the companies that have a license to do so have been able to catch whales in recent years but have not done it," she continued. "There may be several reasons for this, but perhaps the simplest explanation is that sustained losses from these fisheries are the most likely."

    When Japan temporarily stopped hunting whales amid international activist pressure, the country imported whale meat from Iceland. However, Svavarsdóttir noted that "the Japanese now hunt their own whale meat."

    "Why, she asked, "should Iceland take the risk of maintaining fisheries that have not produced economic benefits in order to sell a product for which there is little demand?"


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/21/senate-budget-hearing-reveals-need-to-investigate-fossil-fuel-dark-money-address-coordinated-disinformation-campaigns/feed/ 0 405810
    WaPo Mad That Debt Ceiling Deal Didn’t Cut Social Security https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/15/wapo-mad-that-debt-ceiling-deal-didnt-cut-social-security/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/15/wapo-mad-that-debt-ceiling-deal-didnt-cut-social-security/#respond Thu, 15 Jun 2023 20:43:27 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9034024 If there’s one thing the Washington Post doesn’t like about the debt ceiling deal, it’s that it didn’t cut Social Security.

    The post WaPo Mad That Debt Ceiling Deal Didn’t Cut Social Security appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    WaPo: In Washington, a minor debt deal is worthy of major admiration

    The Washington Post (6/1/23) holds that the debt deal was “minor” because its cuts come from “a relatively small range of discretionary budget items, rather than structural change to the real drivers of debt and deficits: health care and retirement programs.”

    If there’s one thing the Washington Post doesn’t like about the debt ceiling deal—which expanded work requirements for food stamp recipients (FAIR.org, 6/9/23) and took a knife to social spending more broadly—it’s that it didn’t cut Social Security.

    As the editorial board (6/1/23) lamented, following the passage of the debt ceiling bill in the House of Representatives:

    Most of the projected roughly $1 trillion in savings over 10 years comes from proposed spending caps on a relatively small range of discretionary budget items, rather than structural change to the real drivers of debt and deficits: healthcare and retirement programs.

    In other words, why are we doing these little tweaks when we should be screwing over seniors?

    This is the message the Post has been promoting for the last few months. With a looming showdown over the debt ceiling, the paper owned by one of the world’s richest men saw an opportunity. While various commentators were pushing the Biden administration to attempt to side-step negotiations and unilaterally bypass the debt ceiling, the Post evidently thought to itself, why not take advantage of this situation to remind Congress that it needs to cut Social Security? ‘Cause, you know, the elderly are a real pain in the budget.

    On March 9, the Post editorial board kicked off a new series with an article (3/9/23) headlined “The United States Has a Debt Problem. Biden’s Budget Won’t Solve It.”

    The premise was suspect from the start: If the US does have a debt problem, it’s really hard to see it. This is how Mark Copelovitch, a professor of political science at the University of Wisconsin-Madison, explained the situation a couple of years ago (emphasis in original):

    Let’s assume for the moment that the CBO [Congressional Budget Office] projections are accurate. In that case, in 30 years, US debt will reach 195% of GDP. In other words, there is some possibility that the US debt level, three decades from now, will be less than that of Greece now and more than 50% of GDP below the level that Japan has sustained, with absolutely no difficulty, for the last decade. If these countries can sustain debt levels 50–150% higher than our current levels, then the question of whether we can do so has already been answered. Indeed, it does not even need to be asked.

    Nevertheless, the premise that the federal government has a debt problem is so taken for granted in corporate media that the Post felt little need to defend its claim. Instead, it turned its attention to criticizing the shortcomings of Biden’s proposed budget. This plan would generate around $3 trillion in net savings over the next decade, primarily through higher taxes on the rich. In response, the Post’s wise council muttered in unison: Not enough! Their preferred savings would be closer to $8 trillion. And, the council announced, they would be gifting the readership with “the solutions…in an upcoming series of editorials.”

    Sparing the super-rich

    WaPo: Social Security needs fixing. Fortunately, it doesn’t have to be painful.

    The Washington Post (3/16/23) proposes “fixing” Social Security in ways that won’t be painful at all to the very wealthy.

    The first two pieces focused on the programs the board later faulted the debt ceiling bill for failing to cut: Social Security and Medicare.

    For Social Security, the Post (3/16/23) outlined a plan to keep the program solvent for the next 75 years. According to data from the Congressional Budget Office, this could be fully accomplished by hiking taxes on high earners. Gradually removing the cap on payroll taxes, which currently prevents taxation of earnings over $160,200, would plug around 72% of the projected shortfall through 2096. And a tax on investment income would cover another 56% of the shortfall, meaning the two together would cover costs with money left over.

    But why would Jeff Bezos’ paper argue for plugging the deficit through higher taxes on himself and his buddies? Instead, the Post editorial opted for some more modest tax increases—most amusingly, subjecting 90% (rather than the current 84%) of wages to payroll taxation, which would hike taxes somewhat on higher earners, but would mostly leave the wealthiest be.

    Meanwhile, the Post was quite pleased to offer up some benefit cuts. The most impactful would be to slow benefit growth for the top half of earners (so hitting the top 50%—as of 2021, anyone with a wage over $37,586—with cuts, rather than more seriously targeting the rich). But two others would reduce spending substantially as well.

    First, raising the retirement age—which is a misnomer, because what is being proposed is not changing the age at which you can retire; instead, you would be able to retire over the same range of ages, only with a lower benefits at each age (Extra!, 12/12). This is more accurately described as “cutting benefits.”

    People's Policy Project: Life Expectancy and Social Security Full Retirement Age by Year

    As the Social Security retirement age has been rising, US life expectancy has been dropping  (People’s Policy Project, 2/27/23).

    And, though the Post references gains in life expectancy in its advocacy for increasing the retirement age, life expectancy in the US has actually been falling even as the official age of retirement has been rising. In 2000, when the “full retirement age” was 65, people in the US lived an average of 76.8 years. Over the next 21 years, as that retirement age approached the target of 67 years, life expectancy dropped to 76.4 years. This hasn’t prompted calls in establishment media for lowering the retirement age, however.

    Second, the Post would tie cost-of-living adjustments, which shield benefits from the effects of inflation, to a different measure of inflation, called chained-CPI (FAIR.org, 12/19/12). Using this measure would mean benefits would be increased more slowly over time, leading to cuts for all Social Security recipients, with the oldest recipients being hurt the most. This would harm not just seniors but the millions of disabled workers who rely on Social Security as well.

    These cuts are, of course, completely unnecessary. But pushing Congress to inflict unnecessary hardship is a celebrated tradition at the Post (FAIR, 2/24/23).

    Hands on Medicare

    WaPo: A fiscally responsible government cannot keep its hands off Medicare

    The Washington Post (3/23/23) calls for “modest sacrifice from beneficiaries”—and quietly rejects Biden’s proposed tax increase on income over $400,000 that would require a modest sacrifice from its owner.

    The Post’s suggested reforms to Medicare are less objectionable, though the headline leaves something to be desired (3/23/23): “A Fiscally Responsible Government Cannot Keep Its Hands Off Medicare.”

    The main cost savings come from reforming Medicare Advantage (the insurance industry carve-out within Medicare), cracking down on excess payments to hospitals, and applying an investment tax to a broader base. Some savings do come from increasing Medicare beneficiaries’ cost-sharing burden, but the added hardship here doesn’t come close to that of the cuts to Social Security benefits.

    What’s notable is that the Post never once mentions Medicare for All in its discussion of containing healthcare costs, though transitioning to this sort of system would be much more effective at containing costs than anything the Post outlines. One study conducted by Yale epidemiologists “found that Medicare for All would save around 68,000 lives a year while reducing US healthcare spending by around 13%, or $450 billion a year.” If we’re talking about cutting costs, why’s that not in the discussion?

    The best support is less support

    Social Security and Medicare may have been at the top of the list of the Post’s targets. But the board didn’t stop there. Its next piece (4/3/23) took the bold step of calling for cuts to veterans’ disability benefits. As the board put it, “If we owe our veterans every support, we also owe them a measure of fiscal responsibility.” In other words, we owe our veterans every support, including less support.

    Veterans weren’t too pleased with this editorial, with one writing in a letter to the editor (4/6/23):

    Go ahead—tell the soldier who is missing both legs that it’s just too expensive to compensate him for his disability. Tell the Marine with burns over 60% of her body that her service-connected disability is hurting the national debt.

    The next piece (5/4/23) called for reducing subsidies to wealthy farmers, not an unreasonable request, but not one with much of an impact on the national debt either. The Post cobbled together a little over $100 billion worth of savings in this piece, or about 1/72th of the $7.2 trillion in total savings it wants to see.

    The board followed that up with an editorial (5/25/23) advocating cuts to the military budget, in welcome contrast to another major newspaper’s recent whining (Wall Street Journal, 6/2/23) about reducing it. Exactly how much the Post wants to cut is unclear, but the piece does seem to suggest savings in the range of several hundred billion dollars.

    ‘Looking in the wrong place’

    WaPo: Politicians keep looking in the wrong place to fix the debt problem

    The Washington Post (5/31/23) says that “budget experts across the political spectrum” agree that we need to cut Social Security—citing a senior fellow at the Manhattan Institute as its lone example.

    In the final installment (5/31/23) of its series before the signing of the debt ceiling legislation, the Post expressed its frustrations with the shortcomings of the negotiations between Republicans and Democrats. Its first paragraph contained the core message:

    The top expenses worsening the national debt in the years to come are the rising costs of Social Security, Medicare and interest. Unfortunately, President Biden and congressional leaders refuse even to discuss these key drivers.

    As the Post opined further down, Social Security and Medicare are precisely the sort of programs “where the bulk of the change should occur.”

    That doesn’t mean the Post sees no room for changes to other spending—it puts forward other ideas for cuts in this piece, including rescinding student debt forgiveness—but the board is clear on the point that this is not where the real meat is. The headline says it all: “Politicians Keep Looking in the Wrong Place to Fix the Debt Problem.”

    This sort of reasoning—that growth in the national debt means we need to cut Social Security—doesn’t have any basis in hard economic truths. It’s the reflection of the pro-rich ideology of a paper owned by a billionaire. More than that, though, it’s a predictable outgrowth of the sort of rhetoric pushed by the media more broadly.

    The New York Times, for instance, has repeatedly emphasized that Social Security and Medicare will be the major factors in federal debt going forward (FAIR.org, 5/17/23).

    After legislators cemented a deal to raise the debt limit, the Times ran an article (6/2/23) with the headline “The Debt-Limit Deal Suggests Debt Will Keep Growing, Fast,” which reported, “Early in the talks, both parties ruled out changes to the two largest drivers of federal spending growth over the next decade: Social Security and Medicare.” Would it be at all surprising if a person read this piece and got the impression that spending on retirement benefits is out of control?

    The Times at least has Paul Krugman (3/10/23) to point out that the rising costs of these programs can be addressed without cutting benefits. But at Bezos’ paper, calls for cuts are on full blast. Because if money can’t buy happiness, it can at least buy a media outlet dedicated to defending your wealth.


    ACTION ALERT: You can send a message to the Washington Post at letters@washpost.com, or via Twitter @washingtonpost.

    Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your message in the comments thread here.

    The post WaPo Mad That Debt Ceiling Deal Didn’t Cut Social Security appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/15/wapo-mad-that-debt-ceiling-deal-didnt-cut-social-security/feed/ 0 404187
    Pacific councillors offer passionate defence of Auckland city’s assets in budget dilemma https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/13/pacific-councillors-offer-passionate-defence-of-auckland-citys-assets-in-budget-dilemma/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/13/pacific-councillors-offer-passionate-defence-of-auckland-citys-assets-in-budget-dilemma/#respond Tue, 13 Jun 2023 05:57:24 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=89685 Local Democracy reporter Kim Meredith reflects on her observations from Auckland Council’s two-day annual budget meeting last week. Following drawn out debate and Mayor Wayne Brown compromising on a number of his original proposals — including agreeing to only sell around 40 percent of the council’s Auckland ​Airport shares — the budget passed 14 votes to six, with one abstention.​

    SPECIAL REPORT: By Kim Meredith, Local Democracy Reporter

    As I sat in Auckland Council’s extraordinary meeting deciding on its proposed annual budget, I was reminded of the time my late father came through the door looking bereft, having just been laid off, clutching his last pay cheque.

    My parents quickly switched from English to Sāmoan, but I knew what they were talking about. How were they going to make ends meet?

    It was the same air in the council’s Auckland Town Hall chambers.

    Local Democracy Reporting
    LOCAL DEMOCRACY REPORTING: Winner 2022 Voyager Awards Best Reporting Local Government (Feliz Desmarais) and Community Journalist of the Year (Justin Latif)

    With the number of television cameras lined up, you could have easily mistaken the event for a film premiere.

    Maungakiekie-Tāmaki Councillor Josephine Bartley said it was a first, having the media in such strong force for the council’s controversial proposed annual budget.

    Yet the anticipated fireworks turned into a mostly civil affair, with the only pointed comment coming from Mayor Wayne Brown, reprimanding members of the public for occasionally breaking into applause, “there will be no more of that”.

    Mayor Brown said from the outset it could take several meetings to work through the budget, before allocating councillors five minutes to speak about their views — the first public signal that he was prepared to move from his fixed position and negotiate.

    Mayor's budget passes, following heated but civil debate
    Maungakiekie-Tāmaki Councillor Josephine Bartley . . . core business should include community wellbeing. Image/Kim Meredith/LDR/PMN News​

    Partial sale floated
    By the end of the day he was calling for a partial sale of eight percent, instead of the full 18 percent of the Auckland International Airport Limited (AIAL) shares.

    Manukau ward Councillor Alf Filipaina showed his 19 years of political experience citing a breach of standing orders to the mayor’s suggestion. This forced the meeting to be adjourned and reopened as an open workshop before later resuming.

    “I’ve just been told that I was grandstanding,” he said in a light hearted tone, in contrast to annoyance generated by his interjection.

    He chose to save his patai (questions) for later, preferring to listen before finalising his views, as he was still undecided about the selling of airport shares.

    Bartley said she had initially opposed the proposed budget being sent out for public consultation.

    “But it was good because people came out in the thousands, for the council to keep delivering.”

    She reiterated that the public wanted more than bricks and mortar — core services needed to include the wellbeing of the city, the focus needed to be on the community.

    Challenged mayor’s call
    Bartley challenged Mayor Brown’s call to find external funding, saying this was already happening with millions of dollars already coming in, giving the example of the arrival of Costco in Aotearoa New Zealand.

    “Those big companies don’t just turn up”, referring to Tātaki Auckland Unlimited laying the necessary groundwork to secure Costco’s investment.

    Bartley’s voice stood out, not only for her support of local boards, but also for the need to retain income-earning assets, like the Auckland Airport shares.

    She said the lead up to finalising the budget meant local boards had not put in for special projects, after they were instructed to make cuts or face dire consequences.

    She pointed out the financial benefits that came from retaining the airport shares.

    “I do have affection for the airport shares because that brings us $40 million a year.”

    And she was at pains to understand the proposed sale.

    “I just cannot comprehend selling an asset that brings us in money.”

    Mayor's budget passes, following heated but civil debate
    ​Manukau ward Councillor ​Lotu Fuli . . . even the most deprived areas support keeping airport shares. Image: Kim Meredith​/LDR/PMN News

    Impassioned plea
    ​Manukau ward Councillor Lotu Fuli gave an impassioned plea about how the airport shares had benefited every Aucklander.

    Last week, she told Local Democracy Reporting about being open to hearing the advice from council staff before making a decision either way, but yesterday she was firm on being opposed to the proposed sale, saying that her constituents were against selling.

    “That $40 million has benefited every Aucklander,” she said, referring to the dividend that the airport will pay out this year.

    And despite the opposing views there appeared to be an unspoken agreement, that in facing the budget deficit, it was up to the elected officials to find a way to make ends meet, in much the same way my parents grimly did when facing their own budget dilemmas.

    Kim Meredith is a Pacific Media News local democracy reporter. Local Democracy Reporting is Public Interest Journalism funded through NZ On Air. It is published by Asia Pacific Report in collaboration.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/13/pacific-councillors-offer-passionate-defence-of-auckland-citys-assets-in-budget-dilemma/feed/ 0 403208
    WSJ Celebrates Making It Harder for Poor People to Access Food https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/wsj-celebrates-making-it-harder-for-poor-people-to-access-food/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/wsj-celebrates-making-it-harder-for-poor-people-to-access-food/#respond Fri, 09 Jun 2023 21:25:32 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9033945 The Wall Street Journal's unspoken premise is rather than having food as a basic human right, people should be threatened with starvation.

    The post WSJ Celebrates Making It Harder for Poor People to Access Food appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    WSJ: The GOP’s Progress on Work and Welfare

    The Wall Street Journal (5/30/23) calls it a “mistake” that “veterans and the homeless” are exempted from work requirement for food vouchers: “These Americans could perhaps most benefit from the dignity and stability of work.”

    After holding the economy hostage for months, some Republicans are going through a bit of a depressive slump. “We got rolled,” is how one Republican congressmember (Roll Call, 6/6/23) described the outcome of the debt ceiling negotiations. “It was a bad deal.”

    But don’t cry too much, guys! The Wall Street Journal is here to cheer you up, and remind you that, though you didn’t get all the austerity you wanted, you did get to hurt the poor a bit. Maybe not as much as you wanted, but life’s not always fair, is it?

    As the Journal’s editorial board (5/30/23) recently wrote: “One reason the deal is worth passing: The provisions on work and welfare are incremental progress the GOP can build on.”

    Most centrally, the bill included an expansion of work requirements for the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP, aka “food stamps”) for adults without a disability or children, raising the maximum age for those subject to work requirements from 49 to 54.

    The editorial’s takeaway:

    A major difference between the two political parties these days is that most Democrats favor a culture of dependency. The GOP’s task, which is popular with voters, is to rebuild a culture of work. The debt-ceiling bill starts to do that, which is one reason to support it.

    Vulnerable people

    CBO: Work Requirements andWork Supports for Recipients of Means-Tested Benefits

    CBO (6/22): “Work requirements in SNAP and Medicaid have reduced benefits more than they have increased people’s earnings.”

    It’s an odd statement to make when employment for prime-age workers (those between 25 and 54) is at its highest level in more than two decades, thanks in large part to the Democrats’ decision to go big in their Covid relief package in the spring of 2021. And it’s particularly odd when you consider the utter lack of evidence for the idea that expanding work requirements for food vouchers will increase employment in any significant way.

    As Shawn Fremstad has summarized for the Center for Economic and Policy Research, the available evidence on the specific work requirement that is being expanded under the debt ceiling legislation

    tells a relatively consistent story about its impacts. There is no question that the work test reduces access to SNAP food vouchers among vulnerable people with few resources. On employment, the best read of the evidence is that it has no impact on employment, or only a very small one.

    In its 2022 analysis of the existing literature, the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office similarly reported:

    SNAP’s work requirement has probably boosted employment for some adult recipients without dependents but has reduced income, on average, across all recipients. Earnings increased among recipients who worked more, but far more adults stopped receiving SNAP benefits because of the work requirement.

    So basically we can expect the new work requirements to definitely take food vouchers (in other words, food) away from a bunch of people—perhaps 225,000—and maybe slightly increase employment. Oh, yeah, they could also worsen physical and mental health, and increase reliance on food banks. Is that what rebuilding a culture of work looks like?

    Twisted logic

    The Journal apparently greets these outcomes with a grin, as the kind of “incremental progress the GOP can build on.” And it salivates for more. Reaching peak evil, the editorial board bemoans:

    One mistake in the debt deal is that the food-stamp work requirement exempts veterans and the homeless. These Americans could perhaps most benefit from the dignity and stability of work.

    Notice the twisted logic here: Allowing people minimal access to food resources (SNAP benefits for a single person max out at $281 a month) is an indulgence that harms them. On the other hand, imposing punitive measures on people, forcing them to prove that they’re working a certain amount each month, that’s actually helping them. It’s teaching them the value of hard work, giving them dignity. Because the real problem is that these people just haven’t had enough of a fire lit under their ass. How do you address homelessness? Just threaten the unhoused with starvation, and I guess everyone left after that just deserves to be homeless.

    The unspoken premise is that people need to prove their worth to have access to food. Rather than having food guaranteed as a basic human right, people should be threatened with starvation. That way they’re insecure, and willing to accept the first job that comes around, no matter how bad the conditions and pay. That a major newspaper takes this editorial line is horrifying—though, given that the Journal is owned by right-wing billionaire Rupert Murdoch, unfortunately not surprising.

    ‘Unemployment too attractive’

    WSJ: Make Welfare Reform Part of the Debt-Ceiling Deal

    In the United States, which has more than 200,000 people living on the street, “public policy has made unemployment too attractive,” according to Wall Street Journal columnist Jason L. Riley (5/23/23). 

    And the Journal isn’t just showing up for the celebration, either; it’s been hard at work pushing to cut people off from government benefits for a while. In one earlier piece (5/24/23), the editorial board lashed out at states for exempting too many people from already-existing SNAP work requirements. In another (5/17/23), it invoked the old lazy welfare recipient trope, whining that government assistance through programs like SNAP shouldn’t be “a permanent sinecure in return for doing nothing.”

    As the debt ceiling drama unfolded, the paper published a slew of anti-poor essays arguing for increased hurdles to accessing government assistance:

    • “Work Requirements for Welfare Aren’t ‘Wacko’” (5/12/23)
    • “Make Welfare Reform Part of the Debt-Ceiling Deal” (5/23/23)
    • “Work Requirements Still Work” (5/29/23)
    • “Work Requirements and the Lost Lessons of 1996” (6/2/23)

    By far the most absurd was “Make Welfare Reform Part of the Debt-Ceiling Deal” (5/23/23), by columnist Jason L. Riley, which included some incredible lines, like:

    Asking something of people on the dole is perfectly rational, but liberals in Washington have long prioritized making the poor comfortable over helping them out of poverty.

    And:

    Too many healthy adults are opting out of work because public policy has made unemployment too attractive.

    And, for the ending:

    Mr. McCarthy is right to assume that most people don’t want their tax dollars being used by the government to subsidize laziness. I once saw a bumper sticker that read “Work harder: Millions of welfare recipients are depending on you.” So are a lot of liberals in Washington.

    It would be hard for the Onion to come up with a more perfect caricature of conservative mean-spiritedness. And it’s hard not to wonder whether that sticker is still proudly plastered on Riley’s bumper.

    Remarkably misleading numbers

    WSJ: Work Requirements for Welfare Aren’t ‘Wacko’

    A Wall Street Journal op-ed (5/12/23) declared Arkansas’ Medicaid work requirements a success because people on Medicaid in the state got jobs—at a time of rapid economic growth. A more serious look at the impact of the requirements “found no evidence that low-income adults had increased their employment” (Health Affairs, 9/20).

    Meanwhile, another op-ed points to where the Journal believes the debt ceiling deal fell short. In “Work Requirements for Welfare Aren’t ‘Wacko’” (5/12/23), Nick Stehle of the Foundation for Government Accountability holds up Arkansas’s experience with Medicaid work requirements to argue for a federal expansion of such work requirements. Stehle throws out some remarkably misleading numbers to suggest that Medicaid work requirements in Arkansas reduced dependence by boosting employment and incomes: “Tens of thousands went back to work, and more than 14,000 boosted their incomes enough to leave Medicaid entirely.”

    But people move on and off Medicaid each year because of changes in job status and earnings. What matters is whether the work requirements led to any increase in employment that wouldn’t have happened in the absence of the requirements. A thorough 2020 analysis (Health Affairs, 9/20) found that they did not: “Work requirements did not increase employment over 18 months of follow-up.” The added hurdles were incredibly effective at reducing enrollment, though—18,000 people lost coverage while they were in effect. And they were great at aggravating all sorts of hardship, with disenrolled individuals struggling much more with medical bills and delays in care than people who were able to stay enrolled.

    The Journal was totally fine with printing Stehle’s shoddy, propagandistic analysis, handing the microphone to the vice president of communications of a group known for peddling junk science. But the paper seemed to realize that the likelihood of getting its way on Medicaid work requirements was slim, and it didn’t push the policy much in editorials. In one piece (5/17/23), the editorial board advised, “Now Republicans can hold firm, and even if Mr. Biden won’t agree on Medicaid, they can bank the incremental wins and build on the progress later.” In another (5/24/23), it wrote, “If Democrats can’t abide work in return for free healthcare, they should at least be willing to fix the work loopholes in food stamps.”

    The obvious question, though, is: Why should there be any condition for “free” healthcare (i.e. healthcare paid for through progressive taxes)? Why shouldn’t it be a basic right guaranteed to all? It’s not like we can’t afford it.

    The same goes for food. Why shouldn’t we guarantee decent nutrition to everyone by ensuring that the worst off have enough money to pay for food? Again, it’s not like we can’t afford it. The progressive economist Dean Baker has estimated that reducing the pay of the five highest-paid CEOs by half would generate savings equal to the entire SNAP budget, and that waste in the financial sector eats up at least six times as much money as the SNAP budget each year.

    Rigged: Gains from restructuring markets, in units of SNAP spending

    A host of progressive reforms to markets, outlined by the economist Dean Baker in his 2016 book Rigged, would generate savings that would dwarf the SNAP budget.

    For a reader of the Journal, this thinking must appear outlandish. Because what’s common sense in the pages of the paper is not basic decency, but general disdain for poor people, and extreme skepticism of their worthiness of any sort of governmental contribution to their well-being. By teaching people to celebrate the imposition of work requirements on a new cohort of SNAP-eligible adults, rather than being outraged by a blatant attempt to increase hunger and insecurity, the Wall Street Journal is doing little more than feeding hatred of the poor.


    ACTION ALERT: You can send a message to the Wall Street Journal at wsjcontact@wsj.com (or via Twitter: @WSJ) Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your communication in the comments thread.

    The post WSJ Celebrates Making It Harder for Poor People to Access Food appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/wsj-celebrates-making-it-harder-for-poor-people-to-access-food/feed/ 0 402605
    Senate Budget Committee Calls on AIG and other U.S. Insurers to Disclose Fossil Fuel Support and Respect Human Rights https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/senate-budget-committee-calls-on-aig-and-other-u-s-insurers-to-disclose-fossil-fuel-support-and-respect-human-rights/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/senate-budget-committee-calls-on-aig-and-other-u-s-insurers-to-disclose-fossil-fuel-support-and-respect-human-rights/#respond Fri, 09 Jun 2023 20:17:33 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/senate-budget-committee-calls-on-aig-and-other-u-s-insurers-to-disclose-fossil-fuel-support-and-respect-human-rights

    "We concluded that all duty bearers are engaged in limiting the rights to freedom of expression and peaceful association," U.N. High Commissioner for Human Rights Navi Pillay said in a statement. "We were particularly alarmed by the situation of Palestinian human rights defenders, who are routinely subject to a range of punitive measures as part of the occupation regime."

    The commission found that "the Israeli authorities' silencing of civil society voices that challenge government policies and narrative is intrinsically linked to the goal of ensuring and enshrining the permanent occupation at the expense of the rights of the Palestinian people."

    "This includes criminalizing Palestinian civil society organizations and their members by labeling them as 'terrorists,' pressuring and threatening institutions that give a platform for civil society discourse, actively lobbying donors, and implementing measures intended to cut sources of funding to civil society," the report states.

    According to the publication:

    The Israeli authorities' use of anti-terror legislation to categorize civil society organizations as terrorist organizations aims to delegitimize and isolate them and undermine their activity, and to harm their international funding and support. The commission concludes on reasonable grounds that the designations by Israeli authorities of six Palestinian NGOs as terrorist organizations and a seventh Palestinian NGO as unlawful were unjustified, undertaken to silence civil society voices, and violate human rights, including freedom of association, freedom of expression and opinion, and the rights to peaceful assembly, to privacy, and to fair trial.

    Israeli officials claim the six humanitarian groups—Addameer, AlHaq, the Bisan Center for Research and Development, Defense for Children International—Palestine, the Union of Agricultural Work Committees, and the Union of Palestinian Women Committees—have ties to the Popular Front for the Liberation of Palestine (PFLP), a secular political movement with an armed wing that has carried out resistance attacks against Israel. The groups deny the accusation, and a probe by the U.S. Central Intelligence Agency found no evidence supporting Israel's claim.

    The report further states that "Israeli authorities are increasingly using surveillance to monitor the activities of human rights defenders, including through spyware planted on mobile phones," including by planting Pegasus spyware manufactured by the Israeli company NSO Group on the phones of Palestinian human rights workers and Israeli activists participating in 2020 protests against the last Netanyahu government.

    A section of the report on the far-right government of Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu notes:

    In late 2022, a new government in Israel was sworn in, with a stated mission of weakening the judiciary and increasing government control of the media and freedom of expression, which would have a significant impact on civil society in Israel and the Occupied Palestinian Territory. In February 2023, the government started enacting new legislation to weaken judicial independence amid large-scale countrywide demonstrations. The proposed changes would dismantle fundamental features of the separation of powers and of the checks and balances essential in democratic political systems. Legal experts have warned that they risk weakening human rights protections, especially for the most vulnerable and disfavored communities, including Palestinian citizens of Israel, asylum-seekers, and lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender, and queer persons.

    The report states that Israeli authorities are subjecting both Israeli and Palestinian journalists to monitoring and harassment, with Palestinians being "particularly targeted" for intimidation, "attacks, arrests, detention, and accusations of incitement to violence, seemingly as part of an effort to deter them from continuing their work."

    According to the New York-based Committee to Protect Journalists, Israeli forces have killed 20 journalists this century, with none of the killers ever facing prosecution. These include at least one U.S. citizen, Al Jazeera correspondent Shireen Abu Akleh, who was shot dead by an Israeli sniper while covering a May 2022 raid on the Jenin refugee camp in the occupied West Bank. Al Jazeera producer Ali Samodi was shot in the back but survived. An independent international probe subsequently concluded that Abu Akleh's "extrajudicial killing" was "deliberate."

    On Wednesday, 22-year-old Palestinian photojournalist Momen Samreen, who was covering Israeli forces' demolition of a suspected Palestinian militant's family home—an illegal act of collective punishment—was shot in the head with a "less-lethal" projectile and was hospitalized in serious condition.

    The Israeli government—which maintains that the commission of inquiry "has no legitimacy"—rejected the report's findings. Israel's U.N. mission in Switzerland said that "Israel has a robust and independent civil society which is composed of thousands of NGOs, human rights defenders, [and] national and international media outlets, that can operate freely."

    The report also states that the Palestinian Authority and Hamas are targeting human rights defenders "with the aim of silencing dissenting opinions," and that activists, journalists, and others have been harassed, intimidated, and in some cases arbitrarily arrested and jailed.

    "The commission has received information on the use of torture and ill-treatment to punish and intimidate critics and opponents by internal security officials in Gaza and intelligence services, preventive security officials, and law enforcement officials in the West Bank," the report says. "The frequency and severity, and the absence of accountability, suggest that such cases are widespread."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/senate-budget-committee-calls-on-aig-and-other-u-s-insurers-to-disclose-fossil-fuel-support-and-respect-human-rights/feed/ 0 402591
    Auckland city budget finally approved: Councillor likens debate to ‘eating rats’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/auckland-city-budget-finally-approved-councillor-likens-debate-to-eating-rats/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/auckland-city-budget-finally-approved-councillor-likens-debate-to-eating-rats/#respond Fri, 09 Jun 2023 11:55:58 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=89508 By Finn Blackwell, RNZ News reporter and Jordan Dunn, RNZ intern

    Auckland councillors crossed swords, singling out one another and raising impassioned concerns on debt borrowing, rates and selling council’s shares in Auckland Airport before deciding on their annual budget.

    Elected members ended yesterday’s meeting undecided but council reconvened this morning to hash out amendments to Mayor Wayne Brown’s budget proposal, before finally voting to approve it.

    The governing body of the city with the Pacific’s largest Polynesian population spent the majority of the day going back and forth on many of the points previously raised at the initial meeting yesterday.

    The morning finished with council voting to reject the first tabled amendment, going back to square one.

    Councillor Chris Darby said if the discussion was like “eating rats”, then council had rat flesh in its teeth.

    It was a tense atmosphere in the council chamber, with much back and forth and very little compromise from councillors.

    As the meeting dragged on, two members of the public gallery began to speak up, urging councillors to think of the impact the budget would have on the community.

    They yelled at council to listen to them, and to spend time in their communities to see the impacts of their budget first hand.

    The mayor adjourned the meeting briefly and ordered the two women be removed from the council chamber.

    The meeting came to a head, as the council voted to pass the mayor’s proposal, which meant selling about 7 percent of the council’s 18.09 percent shareholding

    It also means an average residential rates increase of 7.7 percent.

    During the meeting, Christine Fletcher said the discussions held around the budget would serve as good lessons for the governing body.

    “There are some magnificent opportunities for all of us to provide leadership,” she said.

    As the vote was cast, another member of the public called out, “shame on all of you”.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/auckland-city-budget-finally-approved-councillor-likens-debate-to-eating-rats/feed/ 0 402405
    Auckland city budget finally approved: Councillor likens debate to ‘eating rats’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/auckland-city-budget-finally-approved-councillor-likens-debate-to-eating-rats-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/auckland-city-budget-finally-approved-councillor-likens-debate-to-eating-rats-2/#respond Fri, 09 Jun 2023 11:55:58 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=89508 By Finn Blackwell, RNZ News reporter and Jordan Dunn, RNZ intern

    Auckland councillors crossed swords, singling out one another and raising impassioned concerns on debt borrowing, rates and selling council’s shares in Auckland Airport before deciding on their annual budget.

    Elected members ended yesterday’s meeting undecided but council reconvened this morning to hash out amendments to Mayor Wayne Brown’s budget proposal, before finally voting to approve it.

    The governing body of the city with the Pacific’s largest Polynesian population spent the majority of the day going back and forth on many of the points previously raised at the initial meeting yesterday.

    The morning finished with council voting to reject the first tabled amendment, going back to square one.

    Councillor Chris Darby said if the discussion was like “eating rats”, then council had rat flesh in its teeth.

    It was a tense atmosphere in the council chamber, with much back and forth and very little compromise from councillors.

    As the meeting dragged on, two members of the public gallery began to speak up, urging councillors to think of the impact the budget would have on the community.

    They yelled at council to listen to them, and to spend time in their communities to see the impacts of their budget first hand.

    The mayor adjourned the meeting briefly and ordered the two women be removed from the council chamber.

    The meeting came to a head, as the council voted to pass the mayor’s proposal, which meant selling about 7 percent of the council’s 18.09 percent shareholding

    It also means an average residential rates increase of 7.7 percent.

    During the meeting, Christine Fletcher said the discussions held around the budget would serve as good lessons for the governing body.

    “There are some magnificent opportunities for all of us to provide leadership,” she said.

    As the vote was cast, another member of the public called out, “shame on all of you”.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/09/auckland-city-budget-finally-approved-councillor-likens-debate-to-eating-rats-2/feed/ 0 402406
    Auckland Council fails to decide over controversial budget – reconvening today https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/08/auckland-council-fails-to-decide-over-controversial-budget-reconvening-today/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/08/auckland-council-fails-to-decide-over-controversial-budget-reconvening-today/#respond Thu, 08 Jun 2023 14:08:38 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=89477 By RNZ News reporters Felix Walton and Finn Blackwell

    Auckland Council ended its meeting yesterday without a decision on the annual budget.

    The long-debated budget will attempt to close a $325 million deficit, exacerbated by a further $40 million in storm-related costs.

    Councillors arrived in good cheer, cracking jokes about the lengthy session ahead of them, which included a debate over the council’s sale of its 18 percent stake in Auckland International Airport Ltd.

    The mayor said the meeting would take as long as it needed to.

    “This is a difficult process. It may take more time than expected, that’s fine,” Mayor Wayne Brown said. “We may have to come back next week, we’re not rushing this process.”

    Three councillors declared a stake in the airport ahead of the meeting.

    Airport shares declared
    Just a few hours before, Albany Ward councillor Wayne Walker admitted to owning $3 million in shares through a trust. His neighbour at the table, Maurice Williamson, poked fun at Walker on his way into the chamber.

    Chris Darby and Julie Fairey also declared airport shares in the days leading up to the meeting, prompting questions of whether they could vote on the sale.

    All three said they had received advice from the auditor-general.

    “In their view, my situation does not represent a conflict of interest,” Fairey said.

    “Their advice was that I do not have a financial interest in the share sale,” Darby said.

    “Same advice, and so I can participate in today’s decisions,” Walker said.

    Backdown from the mayor
    The mayor’s original budget proposal called for a full sale of the council’s 18 percent share in Auckland Airport. But during the meeting, he compromised.

    Just three councillors — Andy Baker, Maurice Williamson and Desley Simpson — unambiguously declared their support for a full sale.

    After hearing the positions of his fellow councillors, Brown offered a partial sale of 8 percent, meaning the council would hold onto a 10 percent stake.

    “I’m now proposing that we sell 8.09 percent of our 18.09 percent shareholding,” Brown said as councillors returned from their lunch breaks.

    “This means that we have to find another $32 million in operating savings or rates to balance the budget. I’m proposing we fill this gap with a general rates increase of 7.7 percent.”

    The issue of selling the shares was contentious, leaving councillors divided. Manukau Ward’s Lotu Fuli opposed the sale, declaring the shares had value.

    “This is a high-performing asset, it is an asset that we ought to keep,” she said. “And yes, we should consider our underperforming assets, but that’s a discussion to have at the long-term plan.”

    Council would regret sale
    Fuli said the council would regret letting go of the shares.

    “Let’s not be rash, let’s not sell off these shares, $2.3 billion worth of shares, in order to plug a $325 million hole,” she said. “Let’s not make the mistake that past councils have made.”

    Waitematā and Gulf Ward councillor Mike Lee agreed the shares had value.

    “This is a real asset, folks,” he said. “This is an earning asset, just like the Ports of Auckland. Not only does it earn us money, but it earns us capital gains on our balance sheet. Any decent accountant will tell you that.”

    Councillors Chris Darby and Richard Hills
    Councillors Chris Darby (left) and Richard Hills . . . “It [council] isn’t a nice place at the moment and I think the city knows that. Image: RNZ News

    North Shore Councillor Richard Hills said the months of debate around the budget had soured its culture.

    “This has been the hardest six months of my career, it hasn’t been nice,” he said.

    “It hasn’t just been about things you’ve said, mayor, there’s been a lot of other discussions around this table that I’ve been appalled at around staff, each other. It isn’t a nice place at the moment and I think the city knows that.”

    He said the council needed to be careful about repeating the same mistakes next year.

    “I want to work with the majority here, because we will break our staff and our city if we make them do this again next year,” he said. “I think we need to be really clear about that — we’ll do that again if we don’t make a hard decision today.”

    Few in support
    Albany Ward councillor Wayne Walker said the council needed to adjust its spending habits if it wanted to fix the issue.

    “We’re not addressing the underlying financial issues, and that is that we are spending beyond our means. We’ve been doing it for successive years, and that has to stop,” he said.

    “Fortunately, we have a mayor that’s committed to turning that around.”

    He said there was time enough to make large decisions like selling the shares.

    “We have a very, very good situation to go forward and not have to make decisions immediately in this long term plan that may be counter-productive.”

    Some councillors, like Maurice Williamson, strongly favoured a full sale. He said the assets were not making enough money.

    “I’m very much in favour of selling any asset that’s costing us more to keep than it’s returning to us. There’s a good old Tremeloes song, ‘Even The Bad Times Are Good’ — well, even the good times are bad.”

    Williamson warned other councillors against accepting more debt.

    “There’s so much more coming down the pipe at us,” he said. “The CRL, god knows what’s coming, I’ve been told the final figure is going to be $7.25 [billion], we’re going to have to borrow debt to fund that, and that debt ratio is already near the ceiling.

    “So please, please look at trying to bring that back down.”

    Auckland Mayor’s revised proposals:

    • Mayor Wayne Brown is now pushing for the sale of 8 percent of the council’s shareholding in Auckland Airport, instead of the full 18 percent of shares
    • Brown has also proposed $4 million of reductions to local board funding, and $5 million of unallocated to chief executive, Jim Stabback
    • An average general rates increase of 11 percent has been proposed, with adjustments that will result in an overall rates increase of 7.7 percent for average households
    • Plans to establish a political working group on the council’s investments has been set out, which aims to oversee assets like the remaining council shares in Auckland airport, and make recommendations to the governing body on long-term investment in other funds

    Even Brown’s deputy, Desley Simpson, cautioned members. She said the final form of the budget needed to be balanced.

    Auckland Council finance and performance Committee Chair Desley Simpson.
    Deputy mayor Desley Simpson . . . Image: Dan Cook/RNZ News

    “We’ve talked this through so much, and it’s going to be a hard task to balance a budget that is fair for Aucklanders and meets the needs and desires of all those around the table.”

    Brown’s new proposal included the establishment of a working group to oversee council investments, as well as a $4 million reduction to local board funding.

    Questions about the updated proposal brought the meeting to a close at 5pm, with no time left to debate or cast votes.

    Mayor Brown said the council would reconvene at 10am today.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/08/auckland-council-fails-to-decide-over-controversial-budget-reconvening-today/feed/ 0 401878
    For Media, Giving in to Debt Limit Blackmail Was a Triumph of Bipartisanship https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/02/for-media-giving-in-to-debt-limit-blackmail-was-a-triumph-of-bipartisanship/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/02/for-media-giving-in-to-debt-limit-blackmail-was-a-triumph-of-bipartisanship/#respond Fri, 02 Jun 2023 21:31:03 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9033868 Media legitimizing the GOP's economic hostage-taking allowed the party to stick with it without fear of massive political blowback.

    The post For Media, Giving in to Debt Limit Blackmail Was a Triumph of Bipartisanship appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    When Congress passed the debt ceiling deal hammered out by President Joe Biden and House Majority Leader Kevin McCarthy, centrist media celebrated.

    If we had anything like a responsible White House press corps, we never would have gotten to this point. Treating the Republican gambit—demanding deeply unpopular policy measures in exchange for allowing the government to pay off debts Congress had already authorized—as anything other than economic hostage-taking gave it the legitimacy the party needed to stick with it without fear of massive political blowback (CounterSpin, 5/5/23).

    Instead, the press corps we have gave three cheers for bipartisanship.

    ‘Complaints on either side’

    NPR: Don't believe the hype: Low-key lawmakers helped avert a debt ceiling crisis

    NPR (6/1/23): “For one night, the pragmatists won.”

    NPR‘s Domenico Montanaro (6/1/23) hailed the compromise in a piece headlined, “Don’t Believe the Hype: Low-Key Lawmakers Helped Avert a Debt Ceiling Crisis.” A paean to “pragmatists,” the article argued that

    it will be those who eschewed the wings of their parties—which have some of the most vocal, attention-getting members—who averted a potentially calamitous, first-ever US debt default.

    Call them perhaps the Silent Middle Majority.

    Montanaro offered a both-sides framing of the deal:

    There were plenty of well-founded complaints on either side—on the left, worries about increased work requirements that could hurt people in poverty, nervousness about the environmental impact of sped-up energy permits; on the right, continued head-shaking about what they see as out-of-control spending and debt, now topping $30 trillion.

    But in the end, two-thirds of House Republicans and more than three-quarters of Democrats voted for the bill for a total tally of 314–117.

    It’s an analysis that simply assumes the validity of the premise that some sort of deal needed to be worked out to begin with: If a hostage-taker complains that their demands have only partially been met, how well-founded is that complaint?

    And on top of the false premise, Montanaro has to stretch to make both sides’ “complaints” seem at all comparable, matching the left’s “worries” and “nervousness”—about harming people and the environment—to the right’s “what they see as” problems. But there’s solid research behind the “worry” that work requirements exacerbate hardship (CBPP, 3/15/23), and speeding up energy permits is intended to increase fossil fuel production (American Prospect, 6/2/23), which is precisely what must be halted to stave off the worst of climate change outcomes.

    And however much right-wing politicians shake their heads about the debt, it’s journalists’ duty to point out the disingenuousness of a party that runs up debt via tax cuts, and then pretends to favor fiscal responsibility when it comes time to pay the bills (FAIR.org, 1/25/21).

    ‘Far-right and hard-left…in revolt’

    NYT: Why Spending Cuts Likely Won’t Shake the Economy

    New York Times (5/29/23): “Some economists say the economy could use a mild dose of fiscal austerity right now.”

    The New York Times also luxuriated in the outpouring of bipartisanship, with chief White House correspondent Peter Baker (5/28/23) reporting that Republicans’ success in holding the economy hostage “bolsters President Biden’s argument that he is the one figure who can still do bipartisanship in a profoundly partisan era.” He added, though, that the deal “comes at the cost of rankling many in his own party who have little appetite for meeting Republicans in the middle.”

    Another piece, by congressional reporter Catie Edmondson (5/31/23), presented the deal as “a broad bipartisan coalition” in support of “a critical vote to pull the nation back from the brink of economic catastrophe”:

    With both far-right and hard-left lawmakers in revolt over the deal, it fell to a bipartisan coalition powered by Democrats to push the bill over the finish line, throwing their support behind the compromise in an effort to break the fiscal stalemate that had gripped Washington for weeks.

    When the Times reports that the “far right” and “hard left” both oppose something, that’s a sure sign that the paper thinks it’s a good thing. Another front-page piece in the paper, by Jim Tankersley (5/29/23), went out of its way to argue that not only was it good that the White House made a deal, but that, all in all, it was a good deal:

    Economists say the agreement is unlikely to inflict the sort of lasting damage to the recovery that was caused by the 2011 debt ceiling deal—and, paradoxically, the newfound spending restraint might even help it.

    “The economy could actually use a mild dose of fiscal austerity right now,” Tankersley reported economists were saying; the cuts will throw people out of work, so the Federal Reserve won’t have to. In the 23rd of 25 paragraphs, after presenting the Republican argument that the deal “will help the economy by reducing the accumulation of debt,” the reporter acknowledged that the cuts “will affect nondefense discretionary programs, like Head Start preschool, and…new work requirements could choke off food and other assistance to vulnerable Americans.”

    ‘Centrists’ vs. ‘fringes’

    WaPo: A Washington surprise: Centrists push back against fringes in debt deal

    The Washington Post (5/30/23) reported that “Biden and McCarthy have each struggled at times to balance governing responsibly with appeasing their party’s base voters”—making it clear that it thought giving in to McCarthy’s threats to torpedo the economy was the responsible thing to do.

    The Washington Post (5/30/23) seemed practically giddy at the deal: “A Washington Surprise: Centrists Push Back Against Fringes in Debt Deal.”

    In the piece, White House bureau chief Toluse Olorunnipa found a way to equate Republicans willing to blow up the economy if they weren’t given policy concessions—ones they didn’t think they could achieve through legislation—with Democrats who insisted that government debts simply had to be paid:

    For weeks, conservative Republicans warned House Speaker Kevin McCarthy not to back down from sweeping spending cuts, saying anything else would be an unforgivable betrayal. Liberals implored President Biden to abandon the debt ceiling talks altogether, insisting the Constitution enabled him to simply ignore Republican demands.

    But in the end, the two leaders opted for a middle-of-the-road settlement, aiming to coalesce center-right and center-left lawmakers around the idea that an imperfect deal was preferable to a historic default that could devastate the economy. It was the first significant test for the Biden/McCarthy era of divided government, and if a theme emerged, it was the unmistakable reassertion of the political center.

    “Both sides were initially sounding very ardent about an inflexible position,” said presidential historian Douglas Brinkley. “Yet both sides ultimately blinked—and that is what American politics is all about.”

    Winners and losers

    In all of the coverage, one consistent theme was the compulsion to declare winners and losers. Some outlets picked one side or the other: “House Passes Debt Ceiling Bill in Big Win for McCarthy,” judged the Hill (5/31/23), and USA Today (6/2/23) similarly had “McCarthy Gets Win Passing Debt Deal.” “Apostle of Bipartisanship: Why US Debt Ceiling Deal Was a Victory for Joe Biden,” explained the British Guardian (6/1/23), while the Washington Post (6/1/23) had a more confusing “Biden Won on the Debt Ceiling. Why Doesn’t He Want It to Look That Way?”

    USA Today: Debt ceiling plan passes Senate. Who wins? Everyone, and here's why.

    USA Today (6/1/23) acknowledged in passing that the deal would hurt people with student loans and those who need nutritional assistance, among others—but they won too, apparently.

    Others declared both dealmakers victorious. Politico‘s popular Playbook newsletter (6/1/23) ran with “How McCarthy and Biden Both Won the Debt Deal.” The Washington Post (6/1/23) simply offered the two sides’ own declarations: “Sidestepping Crisis, Biden and McCarthy Claim Victory in Debt Deal.” Another USA Today piece (6/1/23) made the bold claim, “Debt Ceiling Plan Passes Senate. Who Wins? Everyone, and Here’s Why.”

    In a different twist, CNN (5/30/23) offered its perspective on which companies were “winners” in the deal—leading off with Equitrans Midstream, the lead developer of the Mountain Valley Pipeline project that Sen. Joe Manchin forced into the agreement.

    It also included lending company SoFi, which would profit from an end to the student loan repayment freeze included in the deal, and H&R Block and TurboTax, which are expected to benefit from the deal’s cuts to the IRS. This curtailment will likely stymie the agency’s plan to develop a free electronic tax filing system, which would have rendered those tax preparers’ offerings much less profitable.

    CNN‘s “winners” begin to suggest who some of the “losers” are in this deal. It preserves tax cuts for the wealthy and funding for the Pentagon, while cutting the rest of discretionary funding, forcing more work requirements on recipients of public assistance, fast-tracking fossil fuel projects and weakening environmental protections—all great for corporations and wealthy political donors, and terrible for most people. But both major parties agreed to inflict this damage—and that in itself makes it good news for establishment media.

     

    The post For Media, Giving in to Debt Limit Blackmail Was a Triumph of Bipartisanship appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Julie Hollar.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/02/for-media-giving-in-to-debt-limit-blackmail-was-a-triumph-of-bipartisanship/feed/ 0 400569
    Additional budget funds earmarked for USP arrears, says Prasad https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/02/additional-budget-funds-earmarked-for-usp-arrears-says-prasad/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/02/additional-budget-funds-earmarked-for-usp-arrears-says-prasad/#respond Fri, 02 Jun 2023 03:44:33 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=89191 By Repeka Nasiko in Lautoka

    The University of the South Pacific will be receiving additional funding from the Fiji government in the 2023-2024 national budget, says Deputy Prime Minister and Minister for Finance Professor Biman Prasad.

    Speaking at a public consultation in Lautoka this week, he said the additional funding was to pay off arrears owed by the Fijian government to the regional university.

    As of February this year, the Fiji government owed USP F$116 million (NZ$86 million) in unpaid grants.

    “We gave $10 million already,” the Deputy PM said.

    “I attended their council meeting and I made a commitment.

    “We are restoring the annual grant to the university which is about $34 million.

    “From this year the annual contribution that the Fiji government always used to contribute will be included in the budget and that will be paid.

    “We are going to include an additional amount to clear out the arrears from the past years and so the university will have a lot of money.”

    Professor Prasad was responding to queries raised by USP staff member Teresa Ali on the government’s commitment to the university’s annual grant.

    Deputy VC ‘dismissed’
    Meanwhile, Fijivillage News reports that the University of the South Pacific management has confirmed that deputy vice-chancellor and vice-president Professor Janusz Jankowski’s arrangement with the institution has ended.

    USP's Professor Januscz Jankowsk
    USP’s Professor Januscz Jankowski . . . appointed in November 2022, “sacked” on May 26 after his “whistleblower” allegations.

    In response to an email sent by FBC News, USP management said Professor Jankowski was recently engaged as a fixed-term and part-time consultant.

    It also said that, contrary to media reports, the vice-chancellor and president of USP did not have the delegated authority to terminate the employment of a deputy vice-chancellor.

    News media reports say that a week before the termination of Professor Jankowski’s contract, he had written a damning 13-page “whistleblower” report to two of the university’s pro vice-chancellors alleging “nepotism, lack of transparency and accountability” at the university.

    Repeka Nasiko is a Fiji Times reporter. Republished with permission.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/02/additional-budget-funds-earmarked-for-usp-arrears-says-prasad/feed/ 0 400239
    NZ’s Media Freedom Council slams mayor Brown’s ban attempt as ‘insult to voters’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/01/nzs-media-freedom-council-slams-mayor-browns-ban-attempt-as-insult-to-voters/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/01/nzs-media-freedom-council-slams-mayor-browns-ban-attempt-as-insult-to-voters/#respond Thu, 01 Jun 2023 02:58:20 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=89147

    RNZ News

    New Zealand’s Media Freedom Council has called Auckland Mayor Wayne Brown’s exclusion of some media outlets from his budget speech today “unacceptable”.

    In an appearance at Auckland Transport’s Viaduct headquarters, Brown took time out of pitching his plan to sell the city’s holdings in Auckland Airport to complain about road cones, his “not financially literate” councillors and target the “nasty” media.

    Brown’s team invited journalists from only a few organisations to the announcement. RNZ was allowed in, but Stuff, TVNZ and Newshub were not.

    Stuff reported among those allowed in were “business leaders, former politicians and former rugby league coach Sir Graham Lowe”.

    Some reporters threatened to walk out of the event in protest, drawing this response from the mayor: “They weren’t invited, but some of the media have been pretty nasty. We did invite media who are sensible; and the media who are not weren’t invited, and have now decided, some of them, to bugger off — well, that’s all right with me”.

    Stuff queried the mayor’s decision, and was told only a “select few journalists… we feel were best able to convey the mayor’s message” were invited.

    Media Freedom Council chair Richard Sutherland — also head of news at RNZ — wrote to Brown shortly afterwards, to “express our deep concern about the attempted exclusion of journalists from today’s budget presentation in Auckland”.

    Richard Sutherland
    Media Freedom Council chair Richard Sutherland . . . wrote to say “it is unacceptable to cherry-pick journalists based on who you think will give you the easiest ride.”. Image: RNZ

    In addition to RNZ, the MFC represents Newshub, Newsroom, NZME, Stuff, The Spinoff and TVNZ.

    ‘Today’s events troubling’
    “Today’s events are troubling. The media plays a crucial role in informing the public and holding officials accountable. Denying access to journalists compromises the public’s right to be informed,” Sutherland wrote.

    “Furthermore, we are aware that invitations that were issued were selectively targeted to specific journalists. It is imperative to ensure equal opportunities for all bone fide journalists to cover significant public events, irrespective of their perceived affiliations or perspectives.

    “To be blunt, it’s unacceptable to cherry-pick journalists based on who you think will give you the easiest ride.”

    Sutherland called Brown’s decision an “affront to the democratic process and an insult to voters”.

    Brown did not take questions after his speech, saying he did not have time.

    He has had a strained relationship with the media since taking the mayoral chains last year. Mediawatch in April described it as “frosty”, at best.

    In January, as Auckland suffered its worst floods in living memory, he called journalists “drongos” in messages to friends, upset he had to cancel a tennis engagement to deal with the media. He later apologised.

    He refused 106 media requests in his first month of office, granting only two.

    ‘Sell them all’
    The guts of Brown’s speech was to convince his councillors that selling the city’s 18 percent stake in Auckland Airport was the only way to avoid massive cuts to services and rate hikes.

    He has his deputy Desley Simpson on side. She told RNZ’s Midday Report she did not want to sell the shares at first, but had listened to advice and had been convinced.

    She said the mayor’s second budget proposal was as good as it was going to get, and she hoped other councillors agreed to it.

    “In my heart, I didn’t want to sell the airport shareholding. But professional staff advice has said ‘sell them all’. And you know, that’s a hard pill to swallow when in your heart, you want to keep them.

    “It’s an emotional wrestle that I think a lot of people are struggling with.”

    Simpson said selling shareholding was not just a short-term fix, and would save the council $100 million a year in debt interest.

    The council’s debt is currently more than $11 billion.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/06/01/nzs-media-freedom-council-slams-mayor-browns-ban-attempt-as-insult-to-voters/feed/ 0 399896
    New report: $1.1 trillion – or 62% – of the federal discretionary budget was spent on militarism and war last year https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/24/new-report-1-1-trillion-or-62-of-the-federal-discretionary-budget-was-spent-on-militarism-and-war-last-year/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/24/new-report-1-1-trillion-or-62-of-the-federal-discretionary-budget-was-spent-on-militarism-and-war-last-year/#respond Wed, 24 May 2023 14:22:34 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/new-report-1-1-trillion-or-62-of-the-federal-discretionary-budget-was-spent-on-militarism-and-war-last-year On May 24, the National Priorities Project at the Institute for Policy Studies released a critical new analysis of the militarized budget in the United States, “The Warfare State: How Funding for Militarism Compromises our Welfare.”

    The new report found that this past year, out of a $1.8 trillion federal discretionary budget, the U.S. spent a staggering $1.1 trillion – or 62% – of that budget on militarism and war.

    Threats to cut spending for vital domestic programs have featured prominently in the debt ceiling debate in recent weeks, but spending on militarism has been almost entirely exempt from the discussion. Meanwhile, clawing back failed military, homeland security and law enforcement spending could instead fund programs and measures to address the true needs of American communities.

    Read the full analysis.

    Key findings:

    • In FY 2023, out of a $1.8 trillion federal discretionary budget, $1.1 trillion – or 62% – was for militarized programs that use violence or the threat of violence or imprisonment, including war and weapons, law enforcement and mass incarceration, and detention and deportation.
    • Less than $2 out of every $5 in federal discretionary spending was available to fund investment in people and communities, including primary and secondary public education, housing programs, child care programs, federal disaster relief, environmental programs, and scientific research.
    • The U.S. spent $16 on the military and war for every $1 that was spent on diplomacy and humanitarian foreign aid. The vast majority of militarized spending was for weapons, war and the Pentagon, at $920 billion. Only $56 billion was spent for international affairs, diplomacy, and humanitarian foreign aid.
    • The U.S. federal budget allocated twice as much for federal law enforcement ($31 billion) as for child care and early childhood education programs.
    • Federal spending on nuclear weapons ($32 billion) was four times spending on substance abuse and mental health programs ($7.5 billion), even as opioid use remains a major cause of death.
    • The U.S. spent $51.1 billion for homeland security, approximately half of which goes to ICE ($8.8 billion) and CBP ($17.4 billion), two punitive border enforcement agencies that separate families and terrorize immigrant communities.

    “When we invest so heavily in militarism at home and abroad, we deprive our own communities and people of solutions to problems that pose immediate security threats,” said co-author Lindsay Koshgarian, Program Director of the National Priorities Project. “We underfund programs to end poverty, provide affordable housing, bolster public education, and protect clean air and water at our peril. Spending on militarism takes up the majority of the federal discretionary budget, and it has grown faster than all other spending. If we keep up these patterns, we are hurtling toward a future where we can’t afford the basics of a civilized society.

    “We keep hearing that our government can’t afford nice things — or necessary things — for everyone. And yet militarized spending in the US has almost doubled over the past two decades, and the military budget is now approaching its highest point since World War II,” said co-author Ashik Siddique, Research Analyst at the National Priorities Project.

    “All this serves the profits of a wealthy few war profiteers, at everyone else’s expense. Meanwhile, public goods that benefit all of us are under attack. For a fraction of the cost of U.S. militarism since 2001, we could have instead ended homelessness in this country, or invested in a fully renewable national electric grid to help address the climate crisis. A better world is possible, if we build the power we need to make it happen.”

    “Our leaders need to stop putting immigration on the back burner. Tens of billions of dollars is funneled into ICE and CBP every year in an effort to militarize the border, separate families, and detain and deport immigrants and people seeking asylum. People’s lives and well being are at stake here. Immigrant communities are a large makeup of the richness of culture, diversity and the economy of the U.S. and we need to invest in care-based approaches to these communities, such as in rehabilitation and resettlement services and legal pathways to residence and citizenship, instead of turning them away,” said co-author Alliyah Lusuegro, Outreach Coordinator of the National Priorities Project.

    Recommendations:

    • Immediately reduce the budget for the Pentagon and nuclear weapons by $100 billion or more, and reinvest the savings in non-militarized discretionary priorities.
    • Make any future Pentagon spending increases contingent on the Department of Defense passing an audit.
    • Increase congressional oversight to make it harder for the U.S. to go to war.
    • Restructure the country’s immigration system to support robust legal immigration and current undocumented residents, and cut spending for structures that are built to deter immigration and deport immigrants, including Customs and Border Protection and Immigration and Customs Enforcement.
    • End federal support for racist and counterproductive carceral and policing practices, including the war on drugs.

    Read the full report.

    To speak with any of the co-authors of the report for further interview or comment, please contact PS Deputy Communications Director Olivia Alperstein at olivia@ips-dc.org.

    About the National Priorities Project

    The National Priorities Project at the Institute for Policy Studies fights for a federal budget that prioritizes peace, economic opportunity and shared prosperity for all. The National Priorities Project is the only nonprofit, non-partisan federal budget research program in the nation with the mission to make the federal budget accessible to the American public.

    About the Institute for Policy Studies

    For sixty years, the Institute for Policy Studies has served as a leading multi-issue research organization that provides key fact-based support for bold policy solutions to urgent issues from rising inequality to the climate crisis. Follow IPS on Facebook, Twitter, or Instagram to learn more about our programs and research.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/24/new-report-1-1-trillion-or-62-of-the-federal-discretionary-budget-was-spent-on-militarism-and-war-last-year/feed/ 0 397895
    WSJ Worries Debt Limit Fight Could Jeopardize Military Contractors’ Profits https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/22/wsj-worries-debt-limit-fight-could-jeopardize-military-contractors-profits/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/22/wsj-worries-debt-limit-fight-could-jeopardize-military-contractors-profits/#respond Mon, 22 May 2023 22:04:28 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9033661 The Wall Street Journal hand-wrings about the area of the discretionary budget that appears least likely to face cuts.

    The post WSJ Worries Debt Limit Fight Could Jeopardize Military Contractors’ Profits appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    WSJ: Debt-Ceiling Fight Weighs on Defense Industry

    Wall Street Journal (5/12/23): “The drama in Washington this spring reflects a deeper political impasse that risks crimping military-spending growth in future budget negotiations.”

    The Wall Street Journal is very concerned about the effects of the debt limit fight…on military contractors. In an article (5/12/23) headlined “Debt-Ceiling Fight Weighs on Defense Industry,” the paper reported, “If the US defaults on its debt and is unable to pay all its bills this summer, the pain will fall squarely on the defense industry.”

    A default could disrupt payments to military contractors, the Journal pointed out, and even a temporary suspension of the debt ceiling for several months “would raise the likelihood the Defense Department will have to make do with a temporary budget known as a continuing resolution.” This would likely “inflate the costs of military programs, delay the launch of new ones and prevent production increases.” In short, weapons producers might feel a momentary pinch after years of war profits.

    But, given the unlikelihood of outright default, the more concerning scenario for the Journal has to do with budget talks. The piece noted that, as the largest item on the discretionary side of the federal budget—which excludes social programs like Social Security and Medicare, which are funded on an ongoing basis—military spending could soon find itself on the chopping block. And who’s taking the pain? Your friendly old drone supplier:

    Concerns that military spending could be cut—or, at best delayed—in a debt-ceiling fight have weighed heavily on investor sentiment toward the biggest military contractors. Shares in Lockheed Martin are down this year more than 7%, with General Dynamics and Northrop Grumman off 15% and 20%, respectively.

    Dear God, no! We must take action to address the “‘wall of worry’ among investors”!

    All the valiant fighters for justice are concerned. We hear from a congressional representative who castigates Republicans who “play chicken with the full faith and credit of our country” and “jeopardize our national security.” Then an Air Force secretary is brought in to sound the alarm about the strategic harms of failing to fund the military.

    Where are the voices opposed to increased military spending, who represent the majority of the US public rather than the minority of war profiteers? Probably off playing hackysack. The Journal evidently couldn’t reach them.

    The cost of cuts

    Wall Street Journal depiction of a Lockheed Martin display.

    The Journal article featured an image of a weapons display for Lockheed Martin, whose stock is “down this year more than 7%.”

    There’s a hint of hope, though! The piece notes:

    While Republicans are seeking a spending freeze, many members have voiced support for a larger increase in the military budget, though it would come at the cost of cuts in other areas.

    What these other areas would be remains unspecified. But let’s take a look. According to a recent analysis by the New York Times (5/8/23), if the military budget, along with veterans’ health and the border patrol, are spared from cuts, each remaining area of the discretionary budget would have to be cut in half to satisfy the Republican spending caps. That includes Health and Human Services, Housing and Urban Development, the Department of Education, the Department of Justice, the Department of Labor and the Environmental Protection Agency, among others.

    It’s beyond absurd to exclude this context, and instead hand-wring about the area of the discretionary budget that appears least likely to face cuts—and, by any reasonable account, the most able to survive them.

    Again, as the Washington Post (4/26/23) has reported, “Republicans have promised to focus…cuts on federal healthcare, education, science and labor programs, while sparing defense.”

    An article by military analyst William Hartung from last month in Forbes (4/26/23) likewise opened:

    House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) announced the outlines of a possible Republican budget plan last week, and the big winner was the Pentagon [emphasis added]. Even as McCarthy called for a freeze in the federal discretionary budget at Fiscal Year 2022 levels as a condition for raising the debt ceiling—a move that he promised Freedom Caucus members when they grudgingly supported his election as speaker in January—he signaled that the Department of Defense would not be impacted.

    This is a completely different story from the one that the Wall Street Journal has chosen to promote, and one that has far more basis in reality.

    But let’s raise a glass to Raytheon. May they get through these tough times and thrive. If there’s one thing the world is lacking, it’s enough weapons contracts for war profiteers.


    ACTION ALERT: You can send a message to the Wall Street Journal at wsjcontact@wsj.com (or via Twitter: @WSJ) Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your communication in the comments thread.

    The post WSJ Worries Debt Limit Fight Could Jeopardize Military Contractors’ Profits appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/22/wsj-worries-debt-limit-fight-could-jeopardize-military-contractors-profits/feed/ 0 396835
    Budget 2023: NZ’s climate and science sectors react to wins and losses https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/18/budget-2023-nzs-climate-and-science-sectors-react-to-wins-and-losses/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/18/budget-2023-nzs-climate-and-science-sectors-react-to-wins-and-losses/#respond Thu, 18 May 2023 21:00:59 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=88557

    RNZ News

    Prominent environmental groups in Aotearoa New Zealand are less than impressed with what they describe as underwhelming budget investments in climate, but an expert says the government has taken a multifaceted approach.

    Among the announcements yesterday was $402.6 million to expand the duration and scope of the Warmer Kiwi Homes programme, $120 million to expand EV charging infrastructure, $100 million fund to help councils invest in future flood resilience, $24.7 million to improve data on impacts of climate change and adaptation and mitigation, and $167.4 million in building resilience to future climate events.

    It came on the same day the World Meteorological Organisation said global temperatures were now more likely than not to breach 1.5 degrees Celsius of warming within the next five years.

    Forest and Bird said the budget did little to tackle climate change and turn around biodiversity loss.

    “Keeping New Zealanders safe is clearly a ‘bread and butter’ issue, yet the government’s lack of investment in nature-based solutions is putting us all at risk,” chief executive Nicola Toki said.

    Nicola Toki with a green gecko
    Forest and Bird’s Nicola Toki . . . “Keeping New Zealanders safe is clearly a ‘bread and butter’ issue, yet the government’s lack of investment in nature-based solutions is putting us all at risk.” Image: Paul Donovan/RNZ

    “What we looked for but have not found, is meaningful investment in nature-based solutions to climate impacts. And our biggest source of greenhouse gas emissions, agriculture, has not yet been priced more than 30 years after New Zealand promised the world it would cut emissions.”

    The government’s $6 billion infrastructure-focused National Resilience Plan needed to prioritise investment in areas like river catchments, forests, and wetlands — otherwise it might even affect people’s ability to get insurance in the future, Toki said.

    Insulation and heating retrofits
    Electricity Networks Aotearoa chief executive Richard Le Gros said the association, which represents New Zealand’s 27 electricity distribution businesses (EDBs), supported the focus in the budget on decarbonisation initiatives as well as insulation and heating retrofits.

    “We welcome the government’s greater investment in public EV charging infrastructure throughout the country,” Le Gros said, adding it would help reduce household energy bills and encourage a green transition.

    Charging an electric vehicle. EV. Electric car.
    Electricity Networks Aotearoa welcomes greater investment in public EV charging infrastructure. Image: Andrew Roberts/Unsplash/RNZ

    Greenpeace climate campaigner Christine Rose was critical of the government for missing the chance to implement radical change in farming, climate solutions, transport, and energy.

    “While it’s positive to see that half-price fares remain for some, we needed bolder and more visionary strategies, including significant investment in expanding rail and making public transport fares free for all,” Rose said.

    “We welcome the funding boost for home insulation and heat pumps, but are disappointed not to see significant investment in locally-owned renewable energy.

    “This would end our dependence on oil, gas and coal, and also reduce the power bills of everyday New Zealanders, addressing both the cost of living and climate crisis.”

    Long-term behaviour change
    University of Canterbury professor Bronwyn Hayward said the budget appeared “deceptively simple” but, for example, allowing children to use public transport for free was not just about increasing bus use, it would also ease family budgets and instigate long-term behaviour change.

    “Critics of the government will rightly point out there is now less money available to spend on climate resilience due to the crash in carbon pricing, and yet a sizable new spend of $1.9 billion has been allocated in this budget for climate resilience alongside the $1 billion pledged for cyclone recovery,” Hayward said.

    “This, together with spending on retrofitted housing, new homes, prescription charges and school lunches all contributes to the social infrastructure that communities will badly need when facing ongoing climate risk.

    “We need to join the dots when we talk about climate budgets and see how many of the wellbeing initiatives are also very real investments in climate resilient futures too.”

    Wellbeing Budget 2023.
    “Tackling the cost-of-living and climate change together.” Photo: RNZ // Angus Dreaver

    While making transport more equitable was important, University of Auckland School of Architecture and Planning senior lecturer Timothy Welch said the focus should also be on the infrastructure’s resilience as more intense and frequent weather events could be expected.

    “New funding for maintaining public transport service and workforce development is important, but we need more funding to expand our public transport networks and help drive down transportation emissions.”

    Research, science, and tech
    Universities New Zealand welcomed the announcement of $55 million for research fellowships and an applied doctoral training scheme, as well as the allocation of $451 million for multi-institutional research collaboration hubs in the Wellington region focused on health and wellbeing, oceans, climate and hazards, advanced manufacturing, biotech and energy futures.

    However, it said it was unfortunate to see funding for the Centres for Asia-Pacific Excellence had been discontinued.

    Professor Hayward said integrating science agencies based in Wellington was important, but it omitted “arts and imagination”.

    Canterbury University political scientist Bronwyn Hayward
    University of Canterbury professor Bronwyn Hayward . . . “The climate crisis will bring repeated, cascading and compounding weather events that will test our resolve and tear at the fabric of our society.” Image: University of Canterbury/RNZ

    “The climate crisis will bring repeated, cascading and compounding weather events that will test our resolve and tear at the fabric of our society. These are not challenges which can be fixed by science or investment in infrastructure alone,” Professor Hayward said.

    “We need the arts, alongside sciences to help imagine a low-carbon economy in fair and just ways,” she said.

    “While government could justifiably argue its attention to digital screen industries is a creative investment in ‘a high-wage low emissions and creative economy’ we also need a wider vision for the deeper integration of arts and sciences, one which helps us imagine new ways we might yet flourish in a climate challenged world.”

    Addressing inequities
    Environmental consultant Andrea Byrom said it was heartening to see some of the tertiary investment addressing long-recognised inequities, with dedicated fellowships and awards for Māori and Pacific people and a boost to provision of Mātauranga Māori in the tertiary sector, and applied postdoctoral fellowships.

    Byrom also applauded trialling apprenticeship training in the tech sector and boost to research fellowships and PhDs.

    “The historical gap in funding for these types of fellowships, particularly at postdoctoral level, has resulted in much of Aotearoa New Zealand’s best and brightest talent heading offshore — sometimes never to return.

    “Hopefully these fellowships will stem that flow.”

    Malaghan Institute director Graham Le Gros said the investment in science and innovation recognised the sector’s value to the country’s resilience and prosperity.

    “From building resilience in the face of future pandemics to investing in biotech, innovation and talent to help move New Zealand to a high-wage economy, we can rejoice in some much needed infrastructure so that all New Zealand scientists have a place to really focus their energy and attention,” Le Gros said.

    “The multi-institutional research hubs will increase collaboration and productivity, allowing us to work together to tackle some of New Zealand’s most pressing challenges and opportunities.”

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/18/budget-2023-nzs-climate-and-science-sectors-react-to-wins-and-losses/feed/ 0 395872
    NZ’s ‘no frills’ cost-of-living Budget centres on cheaper childcare https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/18/nzs-no-frills-cost-of-living-budget-centres-on-cheaper-childcare/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/18/nzs-no-frills-cost-of-living-budget-centres-on-cheaper-childcare/#respond Thu, 18 May 2023 10:36:25 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=88549 By Craig McCulloch, RNZ’s deputy political editor

    Young families are the clear target of Labour’s election-year Budget, but its flagship promise – cheaper childcare – will not kick in until next year.

    The 2023 Budget — billed as a “no frills” affair — is set against a volatile economic backdrop with the government now forecast to return to surplus a year later than expected.

    In a statement, Prime Minister Chris Hipkins said his first Budget would provide relief from the sharp cost of living without exacerbating inflation “as tax cuts would”.

    “Budget 2023 isn’t fancy, nor should it be . . .  it’s a carefully calibrated package that deals with the here and now pressures, while also laying the foundation for real long-term benefits.”

    ‘Support for today’
    The Budget extends cheaper childcare to parents of two-year-olds, giving them access to 20 hours a week of free early childhood education (ECE). That support currently kicks in for children from the age of three.

    For eligible families, the extension could save them more than $130 a week in childcare costs for an extra year.

    They will have to wait, however, until March next year — critically after the election — for the $1.2 billion package to come into effect.

    Speaking during the lock-up at Parliament, Finance Minister Grant Robertson told RNZ the delay was primarily due to administrative reasons.

    From July this year, public transport will be made free for all children under 13 and will remain half-price for passengers aged 13 to 24. That initiative is costed at about $327 million over four years.

    The existing discount on bus, train and ferry fares will expire for most other people at the end of June, except for Community Service Card holders. As signalled, the accompanying fuel discount will finish at the same time.

    Most prescription medicine will be made completely free from July, with the government scrapping the current $5 charge at a cost of about $619 million over four years.

    ‘Building for tomorrow’
    The government has committed $71 billion of infrastructure spending over the next five years — that is money for building schools, hospitals, public housing, roads, etc. The spend is up about 60 percent from the $45 billion spent over the previous same period.

    On top of that, another $6 billion has been set aside for a National Resilience Plan with an initial focus on future-proofing road, rail and other infrastructure wiped out by extreme weather.

    Three new multi-institution research hubs will be set up in Wellington at a cost of $451 million. Each will focus on a different subject: Climate change, health, and technology.

    A new 20 percent rebate will be made available for game development studios who spend at least $250,000 a year in New Zealand as an incentive to keep them from moving abroad. Individual studios will be eligible for up to $3 million a year in rebates.

    Tax, tax, tax
    As promised, the Budget does not include any major new taxes or tax cuts, but it does increase the trustee tax rate from 33 percent to 39 percent — in line with the top personal tax rate.

    Revenue Minister David Parker said the discrepancy was currently allowing super-wealthy taxpayers to funnel their income through trusts to avoid paying their fair share of tax.

    Both Inland Revenue and Treasury had recommended the change when Labour introduced the new top personal tax rate in 2021.

    The trustee tax hike is estimated to raise about $350 million a year, beginning in April next year.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/18/nzs-no-frills-cost-of-living-budget-centres-on-cheaper-childcare/feed/ 0 395714
    NYT Fearmongers Debt as GOP Holds Economy Hostage https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/nyt-fearmongers-debt-as-gop-holds-economy-hostage/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/nyt-fearmongers-debt-as-gop-holds-economy-hostage/#respond Wed, 17 May 2023 20:49:28 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9033576 The New York Times has been engaged in outright fearmongering over the size of the US federal debt over the past several months.

    The post NYT Fearmongers Debt as GOP Holds Economy Hostage appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    In a recent op-ed for the New York Times (3/10/23), the economist and longtime Times columnist Paul Krugman gave readers “a pro tip”:

    Anyone who makes alarmist claims about debt by talking about trillions of dollars as opposed to, say, percentages of gross domestic product, is engaged in scare tactics, not serious discussion.

    It would be great if his own paper would listen to him.

    Republican hostage-taking

    NYT: Everything You Need to Know About the Debt Ceiling

    Things you don’t need to know about the debt, according to the New York Times (5/2/23): how big it is compared to the US economy, or to other nations’ debt burdens.

    Instead, the Times has been engaged in outright fearmongering over the size of the US federal debt over the past several months. This at the same time that the Republican Party has taken the economy hostage, in order to exact wildly unpopular cuts to government programs.

    In a rerun of Obama-era fights, Republicans are using their majority in the House to refuse to raise the debt ceiling. As the Times (5/2/23) has acknowledged:

    Lifting the debt limit does not actually authorize any new spending—in fact, it simply allows the United States to spend money on programs that have already been authorized by Congress.

    Failing to raise the ceiling risks default, which could potentially bring economic disaster, and also appears to directly violate the 14th Amendment of the Constitution, which states, “The validity of the public debt of the United States…shall not be questioned.”

    In the midst of this political battle, with one party using unconstitutional methods and the threat of economic catastrophe to try to kick people off social programs, a responsible paper of record might want to avoid mindlessly promoting a key premise of the economic terrorists: that government debt is a serious problem that we should be very concerned about.

    That’s a lot of money, huh?

    NYT: Biden Moves to Recapture the Centrist Identity That Has Long Defined Him

    For the New York Times (3/9/23), Joe Biden is trying to “recapture the more centrist identity that long defined him” by being “increasingly focused on deficit reduction.”

    But who said the Times was responsible? In April, over a third of the articles that the paper ran as part of its coverage of the political battle over the debt limit featured the scary raw number for the US federal debt: $31 trillion. Only one included reference to debt as a percentage of GDP. The story was similar in March, when five of 14 articles referenced the raw number or projections for that number, and only two articles mentioned the debt-to-GDP figure, or projections for that figure.

    Some pieces that did not include the $31 trillion number nevertheless repeatedly alluded to the addition of trillions to the debt. In one case, the Times (3/9/23) described Biden as

    cast[ing] himself as a new-generation Franklin D. Roosevelt pressing for a modern-day New Deal, with large-scale spending on climate change, social welfare programs and student debt relief that will add trillions of dollars to the national debt in years to come.

    In another (3/31/23), it referenced

    the tax cuts signed by President Donald J. Trump in 2017, which his administration said would pay for themselves, but which independent evidence showed added trillions to the national debt.

    No context was provided for what “trillions” more in debt actually means. Basically all the reader gets is, That’s a lot of money, huh?–plus the insinuation, Probably not great, don’t you think? This approach may balance both sides—Hey, they’re both blowing a hole in the budget!—but it’s far from Krugman’s benchmark for responsible reporting.

    ‘No good, hard governance anymore’

    NYT: The G.O.P.’s Fiscal Hawks Fly Far Away From Deficit Fights

    The New York Times (4/18/23) is nostalgic for the days when Republicans asserted that “benefit cuts to Social Security and Medicare [are] absolutely vital to the nation’s future.”

    When additional context was added, it was not always helpful for anything other than inducing debt-phobia. One particularly egregious article (4/18/23) accompanied its mention of the $31 trillion figure with a warning of “a herd of elephants coming over the horizon,” with this herd represented in part by rising interest payments on the national debt. It noted that in the first half of the current fiscal year, “interest payments rose from $219 billion to $308 billion, a 41% leap that put debt servicing nearly on par with military spending.” Scary! (Maybe a little less scary when you learn that “nearly on par” means two-thirds as large as next year’s proposed military budget.)

    The piece, by Jonathan Weisman, was littered with debt-scolding, with the subhead reading, “After a decade of rising deficits and soaring debt, the top White House contenders, Donald Trump and Ron DeSantis, show little interest in battling over the nation’s finances.” It quoted fiscal hawks, who variously lamented that “there is no good, hard governance anymore,” and that “it’s clearly good politics to recast yourself as the defender of Social Security and Medicare. It’s just bad for the country.”

    Curiously, no policy expert opposed to gutting the federal budget made an appearance.

    Even in the one April article (4/21/23) that discussed debt as a percentage of GDP, the framing was designed to stoke fear:

    Even if the entire estimated savings from the [Republican spending] plan came to pass, it would still leave the nation a decade from now with total debt that was larger than the annual output of the economy—a level that [House Speaker Kevin] McCarthy and other Republicans have frequently labeled a crisis.

    No debt crisis in sight

    NYT: Doing Whatever It Takes on Debt

    Paul Krugman (New York Times, 5/4/23): “Creating a global depression because we’re afraid of looking silly would be utterly irresponsible.”

    Whether that level of debt is actually a crisis was not up for discussion. Maybe the Times thinks that’s besides the point. But without such a discussion, readers can easily leave with the assumption that government debt is a serious problem, and with the notion that something drastic must be done, and soon.

    As Krugman (5/4/23) has put it, though, “What’s odd about this potential crisis is that it has nothing to do with excessive debt.” In the same op-ed (3/10/23) cited above, he elaborated:

    If we do look at debt as a percentage of GDP, it’s indeed high, but not outside ranges that other countries have managed without crisis…. Britain spent large parts of both the 19th and 20th centuries with debt well above current US levels, but without experiencing a severe debt crisis.

    Likewise, if we look at American public debt over time, we see that it is still below the record levels it reached in the 1940s. It’s projected to bump past the domestic record by 2028, but there’s little reason to think that will lead to a crisis, besides one ginned up by the right for obviously political reasons. Writing in February (Project Syndicate, 2/9/23) of the projected rise in debt levels over the next decade, Barry Eichengreen, a Berkeley economist who recently co-authored the book In Defense of Public Debt, observed:

    This increase is by no means catastrophic…. Cutting essential public programs now to address a debt problem that won’t even begin to materialize for a decade would be shooting ourselves in the foot.

    In any case, the debt-to-GDP ratio could easily be stabilized or reduced by raising taxes and controlling healthcare costs, as Krugman recommends.

    US Federal Debt Held by Public

    The federal debt is set for a gradual rise over the next decade, not exactly the uncontrolled explosion that some are warning of.

     

    ‘Ticking time bomb’?

    NYT: Are Republicans Willing to Raise the Debt Ceiling?

    The New York Times (5/8/23) says a solution to the debt ceiling crisis will “most likely include the partial reversal of legislative victories won during Mr. Biden’s first two years,” because asserting that the debt ceiling is unconstitutional risks “financial volatility.”

    The New York Times editorial board, interestingly, has taken a different approach to describing the federal debt than the paper’s reporters, writing in a recent editorial (5/8/23), “The federal debt totals about $24.6 trillion, equal to roughly 94% of the nation’s gross domestic product, a high level by historical standards.”

    It’s notable that the actual number for debt as a percentage of GDP showed up here, given that it didn’t even show up in the one April article featured in the Timesdatabase of debt limit coverage that referenced the measure. But perhaps more significant is that the Times chopped down the raw figure for the federal debt from the one that has shown up repeatedly in the paper’s news articles. One article (4/21/23) last month, for instance, had opened:

    Speaker Kevin McCarthy of California has repeatedly said that he and his fellow House Republicans are refusing to raise the nation’s borrowing limit, and risking economic catastrophe, to force a reckoning on America’s $31 trillion national debt.

    “Without exaggeration, America’s debt is a ticking time bomb that will detonate unless we take serious, responsible action,” he said this week.

    Now we hear from the Times editorial board that the debt is not $31 trillion, but $24.6 trillion. It turns out that both numbers are correct—the difference is that the first is the one used to determine the legal debt limit, while the second number excludes debt that the government owes to itself, which gives a better sense of the actual debt burden. It would be reasonable to cite either one, or both, in a discussion of the debt limit. Even-handed coverage might cite both numbers equally. The approach of the Times news section, however, is to constantly elevate the larger number, the one that lends itself to more effective fearmongering.

    The point is not that people would get such a better sense of the scale of the debt if they read $24.6 trillion rather than $31 trillion. It’s that there’s clearly a more and a less responsible way of presenting the size of the debt. The way the Times editorial presents it doesn’t give all the context you would need if you wanted to inform your readership of what’s going on with the debt, and whether it’s sustainable. But it’s worlds apart from an article that opens with a massive number and no context, followed by an unchallenged description of the debt as “a ticking time bomb.”

    ‘Ruling out cuts’ to safety net

    NYT: The Debt Ceiling Debate Is About More Than Debt

    The New York Times (4/21/23) chides the Republican Party for its “lowering of ambitions” in not calling for even deeper cuts in spending.

    Unfortunately, the Times’ news section has often preferred to throw out big numbers without context rather than giving a fuller picture to its readers. Times reporter Jim Tankersley has been a prime offender here. In the same April piece (4/21/23) that opened with the $31 trillion figure, Tankersley followed up McCarthy’s description of the debt as a “ticking time bomb” with the line, “But the bill Mr. McCarthy introduced on Wednesday would only modestly change the nation’s debt trajectory.” Further down, he continued that the spending cuts proposed by McCarthy

    are a far cry from Republicans’ promises, after they won control of the House in November, to balance the budget in 10 years. That lowering of ambitions is partly the product of Republican leaders’ ruling out any cuts to the fast-rising costs of Social Security or Medicare, bowing to an onslaught of political attacks from Mr. Biden.

    Notice the framing here: The costs of Social Security and Medicare are “fast-rising.” And a political opponent’s attacks are preventing Republicans from going after those costs.

    Unmentioned? The costs of Social Security and Medicare are not unsustainable. According to Congressional Budget Office data from February, Social Security is fairly paltry in comparison to similar programs in many European countries—5.1% of GDP in 2023, versus 14.8% of GDP in spending on public pensions in France in 2019. The projected level of spending for Social Security by 2050? 6.4% of GDP. Gasp!

    Medicare costs, meanwhile, are projected to rise from 3.1% to 5.4% of GDP over the same period. One way of viewing this: The combined cost of the two programs in 2050 doesn’t even match the cost of the French government’s public pension system in 2019 (relative to each country’s economic output).

    Moreover, Biden’s defense of these programs is certainly tying Republicans’ hands, but so is public opinion. Medicare and Social Security are, and have historically been, incredibly popular (FAIR.org, 4/12/23). There’s a reason why both programs are known as third rails in American politics. Why not acknowledge that this is not a simple matter of red versus blue, but the US public versus those who would take away their retirement benefits?

    ‘Fiscal responsibility’

    NYT: As Lawmakers Spar Over Social Security, Its Costs Are Rising Fast

    The New York Times (2/15/23) reported that “some were dismayed” that Biden did not heed the “sober warnings from the experts” by calling for cuts to Social Security and Medicare.

    Perhaps because Tankersley is quite fond of peddling concern over the costs of these programs. An article of his published in February (2/15/23), towards the start of the current round of debt ceiling drama, for example, bore the headline, “As Lawmakers Spar Over Social Security, Its Costs Are Rising Fast.” Its second paragraph read:

    Mr. Biden has effectively steered a debate about fiscal responsibility away from two cherished safety-net programs for seniors [Social Security and Medicare], just as those plans are poised for a decade of rapid spending growth.

    Noting that Republicans have agreed not to touch these programs during negotiations over the debt limit, Tankersley observed that the “debate will exclude the primary spending-side drivers of future federal debt and deficits.” He went on to present some dizzying statistics meant to impress the size of the spending on readers without actually informing them of much of anything:

    On Wednesday, the budget office predicted Social Security spending would grow by two-thirds over the coming decade. That’s more than double the expected growth rate for spending on the military and on domestic programs like education and environmental protection….

    Medicare is a smaller program but poised to grow even faster, at three times the rate of military and other discretionary spending over the next decade, according to the May forecasts.

    The cost of these programs as a percentage of GDP was nowhere to be found.

    Tankersley then pointed out that Obama agreed with the fiscal hawks in his 2011 State of the Union Address when he called for a bipartisan solution to Social Security (read: cuts to Social Security). The piece continued:

    Some were dismayed that Mr. Biden—and Republican lawmakers—did not follow a similar path at his own State of the Union this month. “The sober warnings from the experts is quite a contrast to the gleeful cheers from bipartisan policymakers at the State of the Union for doing nothing,” said Maya MacGuineas, president of the Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget, which advocates federal debt reduction.

    Was a progressive expert brought in to balance the budget hawk? Of course not. That would give the views of the majority of the public far too much representation.

    A new path forward

    NYT: Budget Cuts in the GOP Plan

    A New York Times graphic (5/8/23) helpfully shows how much of the discretionary budget would have to be cut under the Republican plan.

    Articles in the New York Times’ news section haven’t uniformly conformed to debt-scolding. A recent article (5/8/23) outlined in detail the severe and unpopular cuts that the Republican spending proposal would require, and even included a graph showing recent trends and future projections for public debt as a percentage of GDP. An earlier piece (3/6/23) did something similar, and even provided a longer time frame for the debt-to-GDP graph, though little additional context was included.

    What would be great to see from the Times going forward, as the US approaches the X-date when the government can no longer delay dealing with the debt limit and may in fact default, would be far more serious reporting that provides readers with the context necessary to evaluate debt and spending figures. And to be clear, this would involve more than just giving debt as a percentage of GDP; that’s not some magical number that tells you all you need to know, though mentioning it is more useful than saying $31 trillion over and over.

    The paper’s history doesn’t offer much hope, but it’s encouraging that its editorial board, in sharp contrast to the board of close rival the Washington Post (FAIR.org, 2/24/23), has refrained from an all-out assault on social spending in recent months, as is the fact that one of the paper’s core columnists has remained clear-eyed on this issue. At the end of the day, Times reporters probably don’t want to be remembered for having enabled Republican hostage-taking, so maybe they should start writing like it.


    ACTION ALERT: You can send a message to the New York Times at letters@nytimes.com (Twitter: @NYTimes). Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your communication in the comments thread.

    The post NYT Fearmongers Debt as GOP Holds Economy Hostage appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Conor Smyth.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/nyt-fearmongers-debt-as-gop-holds-economy-hostage/feed/ 0 395520
    “The Budget Farce”: Robert Kuttner on Why Biden Admin Can’t Give In to GOP Demands to Gut Safety Net https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/the-budget-farce-robert-kuttner-on-why-biden-admin-cant-give-in-to-gop-demands-to-gut-safety-net-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/the-budget-farce-robert-kuttner-on-why-biden-admin-cant-give-in-to-gop-demands-to-gut-safety-net-2/#respond Wed, 17 May 2023 14:25:11 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b639b40cb5eb9c06d12485bd2c091d1b
    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/the-budget-farce-robert-kuttner-on-why-biden-admin-cant-give-in-to-gop-demands-to-gut-safety-net-2/feed/ 0 395534
    “The Budget Farce”: Robert Kuttner on Why Biden Admin Can’t Give In to GOP Demands to Gut Safety Net https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/the-budget-farce-robert-kuttner-on-why-biden-admin-cant-give-in-to-gop-demands-to-gut-safety-net/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/the-budget-farce-robert-kuttner-on-why-biden-admin-cant-give-in-to-gop-demands-to-gut-safety-net/#respond Wed, 17 May 2023 12:14:55 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5d08ec8f818cf4fedf490818195bb70c Seg1 debt ceiling biden split

    With the United States just two weeks away from a possible default on its debt for the first time ever, President Joe Biden has cut short a trip to Asia to continue negotiations with congressional leaders in Washington over lifting the federal government’s debt ceiling. Republicans are seeking major budget cuts, as well as new work requirements for recipients of Medicaid and the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program, also known as food stamps, but prominent Democrats are pushing the White House to stand firm. For more, we speak with The American Prospect’s Robert Kuttner, who says the debt ceiling deadline and budget negotiations later this year are part of a larger effort by Republicans to shred the social safety net.


    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/17/the-budget-farce-robert-kuttner-on-why-biden-admin-cant-give-in-to-gop-demands-to-gut-safety-net/feed/ 0 395480
    ABC/WaPo Poll Creates Illusion of Public Opinion on Debt Ceiling https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/12/abc-wapo-poll-creates-illusion-of-public-opinion-on-debt-ceiling/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/12/abc-wapo-poll-creates-illusion-of-public-opinion-on-debt-ceiling/#respond Fri, 12 May 2023 19:15:02 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9033511 The poll cannot accurately represent public views on the debt ceiling, but reflects the manipulation built into the questionnaire design.

    The post ABC/WaPo Poll Creates Illusion of Public Opinion on Debt Ceiling appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    According to a recent ABC News/Washington Post poll (5/5/23), Americans are about evenly divided on who they would blame—Republicans in Congress or President Biden—“if the debt limit is not raised and the government goes into default.”

    The poll is an egregious example of manufacturing rather than measuring public opinion. As it is structured, the poll cannot accurately represent the views of the US public on the debt ceiling. Instead, it reflects the manipulation of opinion that is built into the questionnaire design.

    The questionnaire included just two substantive questions on the issue of the debt ceiling:

    Q.1  Congress typically passes legislation on a regular basis to pay its debts. Without this step, the government could default on its debt. Do you think Congress should…?

      1.     Allow government to pay debts ONLY if Biden agrees to cut spending (26%)
      2.     Issues of debt payment and federal spending should be handled separately (58%)
      3.     No opinion (16%)

    Q. 2 If the debt limit is not raised and the government goes into default, who would you mainly blame for that –

      1.     Biden (36%)
      2.     Republicans in Congress (39%)
      3.     Both equally (16%)
      4.     Neither (3%)
      5.     No opinion (5%)

    Tainting the sample

    WaPo: Americans split on who they’d blame if U.S. defaults, Post-ABC poll finds

    Washington Post (5/5/23)

    Note that the poll did not attempt to measure how many respondents had even heard of the issue before being asked about it in the poll. The journalists clearly understood that the debt ceiling issue is pretty arcane, that relatively few Americans really understand why it exists, and thus haven’t formed a meaningful opinion about it.

    Rather than allow the poll to reflect that public lack of engagement, the journalists instead designed questions that would give the opposite impression—an illusion that the vast majority of Americans understand the issue and have an opinion about it.

    The pollsters gave their respondents a very brief and biased statement about the debt ceiling, and then immediately asked them to give their opinion—based on what they had just heard.

    A national sample of adults in a poll, typically about 1,000 or so respondents, is designed to represent the larger US adult population of about 260 million people. When pollsters provide information to the sample of adults, that group can no long be seen as representative of the larger US population. Why? Because the larger population has not been given exactly the same information as the adults in the sample. The respondents have information, however brief or distorted it might be, that the rest of Americans have not received. It is simply incorrect to generalize findings based on such a tainted sample to the larger population.

    Deflecting responsibility

    ABC: Blame breaks evenly if government defaults on debt, despite preference for Biden's position: POLL

    ABC (5/5/23)

    Apart from this fatal flaw, the first question in the polls asks what “Congress” should do, when the issue is not “Congress,” but Republicans in Congress. Think how differently the tone would be if the question were:

    Do you think the Republicans in Congress should allow government to pay its debts ONLY if Biden accepts cuts in spending, or should they treat the issues of debt and federal spending separately?

    Even with the biased wording, the poll showed two-to-one support for treating the issue separately.

    Still, the first question set up the conflict as though it were a simple issue of spending cuts (never specified), which of course is not the case. The issue is much more complicated because of the nature of the debt ceiling itself, which does not affect future spending, but only paying back money that the government has already spent.

    With the issue simplified to a meaning that distorts what the issue really is about, the second question is a master of manipulation. It asks in a passive voice: “If the debt limit is not raised, who would you blame?”—rather than: “If Republicans in Congress refuse to raise the debt limit, who would you blame?” It’s not “Congress” more widely, it’s the Republicans in the House who are refusing to raise the debt limit. The question implicitly spreads the responsibility, sidestepping the actual point of confrontation.

    Ignoring the crucial conflict

    Probably the most important conflict in this issue is the actual spending cuts the House Republicans are demanding. If the pollsters had wanted to give respondents information, they could have described the size of the cuts specified in the House bill, as well as a general description of where the cuts would be made—and then asked respondents if they approved of those cuts as a condition for raising the debt ceiling.

    Once specific cuts are mentioned, it is highly likely the number of respondents who disapprove of such cuts would be in the majority. Still, even that approach would inevitably be biased, as not all details could be included.

    The only way to get a clean read of public opinion is to be sure that pollsters differentiate among respondents who have a meaningful opinion and those who don’t, and to ask objective questions without giving respondents any information about the issue.

    The result would likely show that a large segment of the public, possibly even a majority, is—at this time—unengaged on the issue, and would admit they had no opinion. But that’s not the reality the news media want to acknowledge. Apparently, it’s more interesting to create the illusion of a widely informed and engaged public than to acknowledge how little most people really know about the debt ceiling.

     

     

    The post ABC/WaPo Poll Creates Illusion of Public Opinion on Debt Ceiling appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by David W. Moore.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/12/abc-wapo-poll-creates-illusion-of-public-opinion-on-debt-ceiling/feed/ 0 394410
    ‘The Debt Ceiling Is a Completely Pointless Contrivance’ – CounterSpin interview with Chris Lehmann on debt ceiling https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/11/the-debt-ceiling-is-a-completely-pointless-contrivance-counterspin-interview-with-chris-lehmann-on-debt-ceiling/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/11/the-debt-ceiling-is-a-completely-pointless-contrivance-counterspin-interview-with-chris-lehmann-on-debt-ceiling/#respond Thu, 11 May 2023 23:32:02 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9033492 "What they really want out of all this is to basically hold the American economy hostage, so that they can extort...key spending cuts."

    The post ‘The Debt Ceiling Is a Completely Pointless Contrivance’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Janine Jackson interviewed The Nation‘s Chris Lehmann about the debt ceiling for the May 5, 2023, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin230505Lehmann.mp3

     

    Janine Jackson: Corporate news media provide better and worse explanations of various issues, of course, but there are some issues where elite media’s explanation leaves you somehow more ignorant than you were before you read it.

    NYT: House Passes Debt Limit Bill, Courting a Showdown

    New York Times (4/26/23)

    The debt ceiling, and what media insist is a partisan showdown around it, is one of those issues. If you are disturbed by reporting that misconstrues an issue, where that misunderstanding can lead to people losing their healthcare, you have company in our next guest.

    Chris Lehmann is DC bureau chief for The Nation, as well as contributing editor at the Baffler and the New Republic. He joins us now by phone from the DC area. Welcome to CounterSpin, Chris Lehmann.

    Chris Lehmann: Hi, Janine. Thanks so much for having me. It’s great to be here.

    JJ: Before we get to corporate media’s funhouse mirror version, can you start us with some information about what the so-called debt ceiling is, and the role that it has played in reality, historically?

    CL: Yeah, the pithiest definition of the debt ceiling, I think, is a completely pointless contrivance that has outlived whatever usefulness it may have once had, if it ever did.

    It was ginned up in 1918, in response to the deficit spending of the US entering into the First World War. That was the time before Keynesianism existed, and there was a frantic perceived need to tamp down on deficit spending, that proved to be largely, as I say, pointless.

    And the pointlessness of it was firmly demonstrated during the Great Depression, and the Second World War’s mobilization of the American economy, and the post-war boom in the American economy. So that we now exist in a world where the United States is the only major industrialized nation that has this dumb boundary on what it can spend. Literally no other country in the world deals with this.

    It’s also clearly unconstitutional. There is in the 14th Amendment of the Constitution what’s known as the Public Debt Clause, which just flat-out states, “The validity of the public debt of the United States…shall not be questioned.”

    Chris Lehmann

    Chris Lehmann: “What they really want out of all this is to basically hold the American economy hostage, so that they can extort…key spending cuts.”

    So what’s frustrating, living in Washington as I do, and seeing versions of this showdown play out time and again, for what are crass and venal partisan reasons, there is no reason for any of this to be happening.

    The right likes to claim that they are originalists when it comes to constitutional language. So here is constitutional language, saying you are weaponizing the spending process for what are nihilistic policy ends.

    What they really want out of all this is to basically hold the American economy hostage, so that they can extort, from the opposition in Congress and the White House, key spending cuts that their donor base really wants, but that are vastly unpopular with the American public.

    There are things like an accelerated work requirement for Medicaid. There are things like deep cuts to the Veterans Administration’s social service funding. There are things like rollbacks of IRS and antitrust enforcement. It is just a wishlist for the far right that is being smuggled in under the color of an alleged “both sides” showdown over how much we should be spending. It is all made up.

    I’m clearly at a point where I’m just exhausted at the approach of this ritualized conflict, and the media’s, in my view, just unbelievably negligent handling of the issues.

    JJ: Because when you look at coverage, it makes it sound as though our hands are tied.

    CL: Right? There’s nothing anyone can do.

    NYT: What is the U.S. Debt Ceiling?

    New York Times (2/1/23)

    JJ: Yeah. And so there’s basic, it’s not an ideological—I mean, it is ideological—but there are basic definitional problems with the way that media are talking about this.

    So when the New York Times says, “But eventually, the United States will need to either borrow more money to pay its bills, or stop making good on its financial obligations,” well, that’s not how that works, right?

    CL: No, that’s exactly right. And, again, this is all being ginned up as a crisis for political gain on the right. And if the media could just report that, which is the truth, we would have a different follow-on conversation, instead of this airy, make-believe fantasy that somehow there’s going to be a grand bargain, where both sides will compromise and the golden mean will prevail.

    It is stunning to me that we went through all of this in the Obama administration, when there was the “fiscal cliff,” and there was the approach of the debt ceiling. There was language that made it sound like we were in some film noir B-movie: We were going to be kidnapped and thrown over the fiscal cliff. And it was all just for an organized ideological assault on social spending from the right. It’s exactly the same thing now.

    Guardian: Republican rebels: the hardline House members voting against McCarthy

    Guardian (1/5/23)

    Kevin McCarthy is doing the bidding of the Freedom Caucus, which, we all remember from January, tried to block his path to the speakership, and extorted all these concessions, and this is one of the key ones that they got. He’s forcing a confrontation with the Biden White House over the debt ceiling so that they can try to get all of these, again, unpopular cuts to spending that they will not run on.

    So it’s both fundamentally opportunistic and venal, and it’s deeply dishonest, and the press goes along with that dishonesty in a way that is just frankly infuriating.

    JJ: I’m going to bring you back to elite media, and their ironclad framing that they won’t be moved off of, in a second.

    But I just wanted to tease one other thing out, which is that coverage often implies, or at least does nothing to dissuade a reader from a “family budget” analogy, or like you using your credit card, thinking that debt is something you bought, but couldn’t pay for. So that even if this list of things that might be cut—social safety net programs, military salaries, etc.—well, “that’s terrible, but you’ve got to be fiscally responsible.” And that’s pathological. I mean, that’s just deceitful.

    The Nation: The Media Can’t Get Enough of the Debt Ceiling

    The Nation (1/23/23)

    CL: At least when the debt ceiling was originally introduced, American leaders had the excuse that Keynesian economics had not existed, and it hadn’t been tried. But the American economy functions in a very different way from any household economy.

    And what happens in a downturn is that demand freezes, because credit is now prohibitively expensive; banks are failing, the rest of it. And so that is where the government comes in and “primes the pump.”

    And the other thing to note is all this spending was fine when it was approved during the first Covid emergency under the Trump administration. Congress suspended the debt ceiling for all that.

    So, again, you just connect all the dots here, and we are not in anything like economic crisis conditions. The economy is functioning at something close to full employment, and the only crises are concerning banks that were overexposed on bad debt in Silicon Valley, and now are facing higher interest rates that the Fed has exacted.

    None of that is going to be remotely addressed or solved by cuts to spending extorted under the debt ceiling.

    It’s also—not to get too nerdy and wonky here—it’s notable that as FDR and the New Deal were combating the Great Depression by priming the pump with government spending, FDR and his Treasury secretary had a brief flirtation with fiscal austerity in 1937, and tried to balance the budget, and another recession promptly ensued.

    So this is not to say that would be the case necessarily here, but it is to say that, again, this model of “we have to tighten our belts and keep the debit and credit column in perfect alignment” wreaks havoc in macroeconomics, in a way that the model of the household spending and credit card limits just does not apply, and it’s often dangerous to apply.

    JJ: And then “we” are not ever tightening “our” belts. It’s really only some people who are feeling the brunt of this.

    CL: That’s the other thing, is this is a party that has lavished tax cut after tax cut to the One Percent, and exacted fiscal discipline on everyone else.

    NYT: Routine Crisis

    New York Times (1/20/23)

    JJ: Let me just ask you, finally—we’ve been talking about it all along—but when the New York Times says in covering this, “The bad news: Democrats and Republicans are divided.”

    I mean, I don’t even know where to start, but elite media’s fealty to this phantasm of bipartisanship, whatever it means: Speak to that, but maybe in terms of, what would better coverage look like?

    CL: Yeah, as I was saying before, better coverage would just report the truth, which is: one political party is using an outmoded mechanism to extort cuts to spending that it cannot legitimately put forward for public scrutiny and win. So there are lots of ways of making that point.

    I think there’s also a big failing on the part of the Democrats here, of just not taking the weapons that are at their disposal. It’s very easy for Janet Yellen, the secretary of the Treasury, when the debt ceiling comes on June 1 or thereabouts, to just say we’re going to ignore it, it doesn’t matter.

    Similarly, the Biden administration could cite the Public Debt Clause of the 14th Amendment and say, look, if we are not honoring the country’s debts, we are in violation of the Constitution. Make the Republicans be the party of both cruel Dickensian fiscal austerity and abuse of the Constitution’s powers.

    So it’s not all the failing of the press, but it is significantly the failing of the press.

    The Republican Party does not have a case here, and our elite media, of course, function as a for-profit industry. It’s owned by the people who want this kind of austerian budget process that benefits the wealthy. So, of course, its material interests are going to be reflected in how it covers matters of economic policy.

    JJ: All right, then. We’ve been speaking with Chris Lehmann. He’s DC bureau chief at The Nation. You can still find his piece, “The Media Can’t Get Enough of the Debt Ceiling,” at TheNation.com. Chris Lehmann, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    CL: Thank you, Janine.

     

    The post ‘The Debt Ceiling Is a Completely Pointless Contrivance’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/11/the-debt-ceiling-is-a-completely-pointless-contrivance-counterspin-interview-with-chris-lehmann-on-debt-ceiling/feed/ 0 394156
    The Very Specific Ways the GOP Budget Will Deeply Harm Hundreds of Millions of Americans https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/10/the-very-specific-ways-the-gop-budget-will-deeply-harm-hundreds-of-millions-of-americans/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/10/the-very-specific-ways-the-gop-budget-will-deeply-harm-hundreds-of-millions-of-americans/#respond Wed, 10 May 2023 14:26:25 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/specific-harms-of-gop-budget-plan-debt-ceiling

    There are a lot of things you could say about the GOP’s proposed plan to reduce the deficit. But if we want to be more expansive than just calling it “batshit crazy” and washing our hands of the whole clown show, as we think Biden can and should,then we could point out that the GOP plan is an expression of profound hostility to the idea of a federal government that serves anyone besides war profiteers.

    Their proposal illustrates the party’s commitment to a government that fails Americans in many important ways, because the party’s only strategy to preserve power is to harness people’s anger and fear. How better to make people fear that things will be taken away from them than by actually taking things away, and then diverting the blame?

    The Republican-proposed cuts to discretionary spending would harm millions of people, invariably causing losses of health, home, life, and opportunity. I’ll dig into the specifics below. A helpful visual representation of the proposed cuts from The New York Times estimates that the GOP plan would cut discretionary spending across the board by an average of 18 percent. But the GOP is also claiming that they would spare defense, veterans’ health and border security from those cuts. If you exclude military spending from cuts, then all the other federal departments and agencies would have their budgets cut by 51 percent. At that point, you might as well throw in the towel, because public services are as good as dead.

    The Republican-proposed cuts to discretionary spending would harm millions of people, invariably causing losses of health, home, life, and opportunity.

    Forget about avoiding the worst effects of climate change. Forget about public infrastructure projects. Forget about federal student aid. Forget about clean air and clean water and cleaning up contaminated lands. Forget about space exploration. Forget about loans for farmers. Forget about food and workplace safety inspections. Forget about growing union power. Forget about cracking down on corporations when they jack up prices or steal wages or spill a bunch of toxic chemicals in your town or oil in the sea. The U.S. government would pretty much solely be an insurance company with a massive army, as no doubt the founding fathers intended. Right?

    Now, there’s no good reason for Biden to concede to these agents of chaos masquerading as serious people. Several legal scholars have spent considerable amounts of time charting the least-harmful path out of this thicket. Most recently, eminent legal scholar Laurence Tribe joined the chorus calling for the U.S. to ignore the debt ceiling and continue to pay its bills. But while the GOP’s plan deserves no serious consideration, it is worth talking about how budget cuts harm federal departments and agencies, and by extension, the public.

    There’s no good reason for Biden to concede to these agents of chaos masquerading as serious people.

    For so many people, the executive branch is basically a black box: its internal mechanisms mysterious, its value unclear. Earlier this spring, 21 federal departments wrote letters laying out explicitly what 22 percent budget cuts would do to their work. (22 percent is the White House Office of Management and Budget’s estimate of the first year of budget cuts under the GOP plans, with the cuts growing deeper each year.) Among other things, these letters make the case for the value of federal agencies to the American people in franker terms than we usually get from the spokespeople of the administrative state.

    So, according to the agencies themselves…

    The Harms of the GOP Budget Cuts Include:

    • The firing of 1,800 food inspectors who conduct mandatory food inspections would cause a shortage of meat, poultry, and eggs available for consumers, and estimated lost production volumes of more than 11.5 billion pounds of meat, 11.1 billion additional pounds of poultry, and over 590 million pounds of eggs, equivalent to a loss of over $89 billion for the industry. It would also cause over $2.2 billion in lost wages for furloughed industry employees.
    • Funding cuts would have “dramatic impacts” on western states impacted by drought, including by undermining ongoing programs that support 489 dams and 338 reservoirs delivering water to more than 31 million people and 1 of every 5 western farmers. In just one example, spending cuts would increase the likelihood that the water levels in Lake Mead decline to the point that water allocations from the reservoir are no longer possible, and people could lose power from inadequate amounts of water passing over dams. About 25 million people rely on the water from Lake Mead.
    • Funding cuts at Health and Human Services would cause, among many other impacts, over a million households to be unable to afford to heat their homes; a million elderly adults to no longer receive meals they depend on; and hundreds of thousands of children to lose critical early childhood care that’s often necessary for their parents to be able to work.
    • Reducing funding for fighting wildfires on public lands by nearly 40 percent across the fire programs, and cutting as many as 1,754 of the 4,468 full-time firefighting positions at Interior, would have devastating ecosystem impact and increase the danger to people in high fire-risk areas. An additional 2,200-2,700 wildland firefighters with the Forest Service would also be furloughed.
    • Funding cuts would cut off over one million women, infants, and children from a supplemental nutrition program; non-breastfeeding postpartum women, unhoused and migrant individuals, and children would be the first to lose benefits.
    • Funding cuts would allow more species to go extinct, as the Fish and Wildlife Service’s implementation of the Endangered Species Act is already significantly underfunded and “does not keep pace with current demand” for species to receive critical protections to avoid extinction.
    • About $156 million in back wages for 135,000 private sector workers would not be recovered because the Labor Department’s Wage and Hour Division would have to reduce its compliance actions, investigations, and targeted inspections.
    • Alaskan Natives whose lands are contaminated by arsenic, asbestos, lead, mercury, pesticides, and various petroleum products would lose a significant new program intended to clean up this contamination.
    • Funding cuts to a rental assistance program that serves approximately 1.3 million families would represent a “historically unprecedented loss of existing affordable housing, a breach of federal contracts, and a repudiation of decades of long-term bipartisan federal investment.” Cuts would likely lead to tens of thousands of evictions.
    • Funding cuts to the Education Department would impact an estimated 25 million children by cutting more than 60,000 teachers and aids from classrooms serving low income students. It would also decrease aid to all 6.6 million Pell Grant recipients and eliminate Pell Grants for 85,000 students, eliminate FWS financial support for approximately 11,000 students, and eliminate Work-Study financial support for approximately 85,000 students, among other impacts.

    And all of this doesn’t even include the damage that the GOP is intending to do to the U.S.’s only piece of climate legislation.

    Among the many things you could say about the GOP’s proposed plan to reduce the deficit, then, you could say that it is senselessly cruel, wildly irresponsible, and embarrassingly uninformed.

    All of this doesn’t even include the damage that the GOP is intending to do to the U.S.’s only piece of climate legislation.

    You could say that it targets the most vulnerable Americans, whether that means vulnerability to wildfires and drought and rising seas, or vulnerability to food and housing insecurity, or to environmental hazards or pollutants, or systemic barriers to education and workplace access, or to wage theft or unsafe working conditions.

    You could even say that any child in our underfunded public school system could do better, fairer, and more discerning math. And unlike our political media, children would probably be more likely to cover this calamity as a serious story with real-world impact, rather than assessing it primarily within the context of Biden’s re-election campaign, Kevin McCarthy’s efforts to maintain Speaker, and the stock market.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Hannah Story Brown.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/10/the-very-specific-ways-the-gop-budget-will-deeply-harm-hundreds-of-millions-of-americans/feed/ 0 393772
    New York State Budget Passes with First Statewide Fossil Fuel Ban on New Construction https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/05/new-york-state-budget-passes-with-first-statewide-fossil-fuel-ban-on-new-construction/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/05/new-york-state-budget-passes-with-first-statewide-fossil-fuel-ban-on-new-construction/#respond Fri, 05 May 2023 18:37:19 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/new-york-state-budget-passes-with-first-statewide-fossil-fuel-ban-on-new-construction On Thursday, New York Governor Kathy Hochul signed the 2023-2024 State Budget into law. Notably, the budget marks the passage of a first-of-its-kind statewide fossil fuel ban in new construction starting in 2026. The budget also includes $400 million in funding for the Environmental Protection Fund, the addition of over 265 jobs across multiple environmental agencies, and other environmental victories.

    In response to the budget, Sierra Club Atlantic Chapter Conservation Director Roger Downs issued the following statement.

    “Sierra Club applauds the legislature and Governor Hochul for understanding that a well-staffed workforce and a robust Environmental Protection Fund are vital to implementing New York’s groundbreaking climate law. We celebrate the passage of the nation’s first ban on fossil fuel equipment and building systems in new construction, set to start in 2026, as well as a plan to decarbonize New York’s most polluting state-owned buildings and campuses. Phasing out polluting, fossil fuel infrastructure from our homes and buildings, while creating family-sustaining jobs, is an integral step toward meeting our climate goals.

    While the budget is inclusive of many climate and energy victories, it omits the NY HEAT Act, a necessary piece of legislation that would eliminate ratepayer subsidies for new gas hookups, end the obligation to serve gas in buildings, and ensure no low or middle-income families spend over six percent of their income on energy. The legislature must continue to act as climate leaders and pass the NY HEAT Act before the end of this legislative session if the all-electric buildings mandate is to be effective. In addition, the Sierra Club looks forward to working with state leaders to pass several other critical pieces of legislation that did not pass during budget season; bills that will support packaging reduction & recycling infrastructure, protect pollinators from harmful and unnecessary insecticides, and ban PFAS and other forever chemical from everyday products”

    Key Achievements Included in the Budget

    • Building Electrification: The nation’s first fossil fuel ban in new buildings of seven stories or less is set to begin in 2026. The ban for larger buildings will start in 2029. In addition, the budget finances the first steps to achieving zero onsite emissions through ‘decarbonization action plans’ for 15 thermal energy networks on public campuses and facilities with labor standards to ensure they will be built with good union jobs.
    • Environmental Spending: The budget includes $400 million for the Environmental Protection Fund (EPF), $500 million for clean water infrastructure, as well as $202 million in funding for New York State Parks, and $90 million for the Department of Environmental Conservation. To support the implementation of the $4.2 billion Clean Water, Clean Air & Green Jobs Environmental Bond Act, the budget also allocates funding for the addition of 265 positions across multiple environmental agencies.
    • Cap and Trade: The budget sets the foundation to create new revenue streams from climate polluters which will help fund an affordable clean energy transition and cap emissions, but will require more guardrails through regulation to protect disadvantaged communities.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/05/new-york-state-budget-passes-with-first-statewide-fossil-fuel-ban-on-new-construction/feed/ 0 392796
    Chris Lehmann on Debt Ceiling Myths, Kyle Wiens on Right to Repair’s Moment https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/05/chris-lehmann-on-debt-ceiling-myths-kyle-wiens-on-right-to-repairs-moment/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/05/chris-lehmann-on-debt-ceiling-myths-kyle-wiens-on-right-to-repairs-moment/#respond Fri, 05 May 2023 15:44:17 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9033416 Republican brinkmanship could devastate millions of people—along with the harm to public understanding of what's actually going on.

    The post Chris Lehmann on Debt Ceiling Myths, Kyle Wiens on Right to Repair’s Moment appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

          CounterSpin230505.mp3

     

    Nation: Kevin McCarthy Doubles Down on the Debt Ceiling

    (The Nation, 4/28/23)

    This week on CounterSpin: Economist James Galbraith wrote a few months ago: “It is in the nature of articles about the debt ceiling that no matter how often one tries to set the record straight, nothing ever gets through.” Elite media’s fundamental misrepresentation of the debt ceiling would be troubling enough if it were just a bad history lesson. But current Republican brinkmanship could have devastating impacts for millions of people—along with the harm to public understanding of what’s actually going on. We hear concerns about the process and the coverage from Chris Lehmann, DC bureau chief at The Nation, and contributing editor at the Baffler and the New Republic.

          CounterSpin230505Lehmann.mp3

     

    Also on the show: The right to fix the things you buy is the sort of thing you wouldn’t think would be controversial here in “the land of the free.”  Corporations’ attempts to prevent people from fixing their cellphone or tractor or wheelchair ought to be seen as the overreach it is. But for years, news media have presented the right to repair as a voice in the wilderness, up against benevolent companies’ efforts to do best by us all. That’s changing, with legislative moves around the country. Right to repair is having a “watershed moment,” one advocate says, adding that there are still “a lot of opportunities for mischief.” We get an update from Kyle Wiens, co-founder and CEO of the online repair community iFixit.

          CounterSpin230505Wiens.mp3

    Plus Janine Jackson takes a quick look at the New York TimesIran error.

          CounterSpin230505Banter.mp3

     

    The post Chris Lehmann on Debt Ceiling Myths, Kyle Wiens on Right to Repair’s Moment appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/05/chris-lehmann-on-debt-ceiling-myths-kyle-wiens-on-right-to-repairs-moment/feed/ 0 392724
    Preparing for War: the Global Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/04/preparing-for-war-the-global-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/04/preparing-for-war-the-global-military-budget/#respond Thu, 04 May 2023 05:58:05 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=280971

    Photo by Scott Rodgerson

    $2.24 trillion in US dollars is a mighty amount. It’s also a sickening figure when considering the object of this exercise.  The flickering tease of war, the promise of bloodshed and an increasingly large butcher’s bill, are inevitable suggestions from such a figure.  The scenes are also clear: well-paid suits dazed by theories of the next war; policy wonks jabbering over mock war games.  A huge amount of money is being pushed into the venture, and the sceptics are being held at bay.

    Much of this news comes from the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute’s latest findings that countries are spending 2.2% of the world’s gross domestic product on armaments.  Of that amount, the United States, China and Russia accounted for 56% of the total.  Global military spending, the SIPRI report also notes, grew by 19% over 2013-2022, rising every year since 2015.

    The amount is slightly more than the previous year, when SIPRI announced that total military expenditure had risen by 0.7% in real terms in 2021 “to reach $2113 billion.”  The largest contributors to the binge on that occasion were the United States, China, India, the United Kingdom and Russia.  In sum, the five countries accounted for 62% of expenditure.

    This reads differently from the more optimistic International Monetary Institute’s assessment from 2021: “Worldwide military spending, when estimated on the basis of unweighted country averages, has declined by nearly half, from 3.6 percent GDP during the Cold War period (1970-90) to 1.9 percent of GDP in the years following the global financial crisis.”  When it comes to variations on the figures in this field, best stick with SIPRA.

    2022 proved to be a boon for militarists the world over, though there were particular regions that saw more growth than others.  In Europe, levels of spending had reached levels unseen since the Cold War, up from 13% from the previous twelve months.  The reason commonly given: Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.  In East Asia, the justification is the increasingly hostile US-Chinese rivalry, though those in Washington’s corner are ever pointing the finger to the Yellow Horde’s ambitions in Beijing.

    The picture in Europe is an ugly one, with concerns being expressed in certain strategic circles that not enough is being done to move away from dependency on the US imperium.  The European Council on Foreign Relations (ECFR) has even posited that Europe is the victim of US “vassalisation”, notably in light of the Ukraine War.  Visions of strategic autonomy are more distant than ever.

    Such sentiments, however, do little to discourage the militarists: whether Europe chooses to throw in its lot with Washington or not, the arms dealers and manufacturers will do a merry jig.  To prove that point, the ECFR advocates the deployment of “western European forces to the east in greater numbers, offering to replace US forces in some cases.”  The only difference here is the burden shared, rather than the amount spent.

    In terms of individual countries, Finland’s military expenditure rose by 36% in 2022 to reach $4.8 billion, the largest in the country’s year-on-year increase since 1962.  Polish military expenditure grew by 11%, reaching $16.6 billion over the course in 2022.  The passage of the Homeland Defence Act, designed to reorganise the military and raise defence spending, promises to eventually push the levels to 4% of GDP.  Warsaw has made no secret of the fact that it wishes to have the continent’s largest army, a daft and distinctly draining exercise.

    The figures are also significant given the increasingly proxy nature of the Ukraine War’s balance sheet.  Ukraine, for its part, rose from its position at 36 on the league of arms spenders to 11 in 2022, with a figure of $44 billion.  But SIPRI has a modest confession to make: it is unable to furnish us “an accurate assessment of the total amount of financial military aid to Ukraine”.  This is largely because the donor countries have, for the most part, not released disaggregated data.  A rough estimate of $30 billion is provided, which “includes financial contributions, training and operational costs, replacement costs of the military equipment stocks donated to Ukraine and payments to procure additional military equipment for the Ukrainian armed forces.”

    Some of this must be factored into the increased budgets of the UK (top European spender at 3.1%), with Germany and France coming in at 2.5% and 2.4% respectively.  Of the three, the UK has given the most military aid to Ukraine, and is second only behind the United States, which allocated $19.9 billion.

    As for the US itself, the Biden administration has already mooted the idea that it will increase the number of troops deployed to Europe by 20,000 personnel to 100,000.  The measure is part of the European Deterrence Initiative (EDI), an effort to, according to the US Department of Defense, “enhance the US deterrence posture, increase the readiness and responsiveness of US forces in Europe, support the collective defense and security of NATO allies, and bolster the security and capacity of US allies and partners.”

    While China, with a bill of $292 billion, is leant upon as an excuse for increased military expenditure by other powers, the United States remains the undisputed premier spender, making up a staggering 39% of the global total at $877 billion.  Hardly the sort of figure to be sported by a peacemaker.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/04/preparing-for-war-the-global-military-budget/feed/ 0 392376
    Preparing for War: The Growing Global Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/01/preparing-for-war-the-growing-global-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/01/preparing-for-war-the-growing-global-military-budget/#respond Mon, 01 May 2023 08:01:10 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=139801 US$2.24 trillion is a mighty amount. It’s also a sickening figure when considering the object of this exercise. The flickering tease of war, the promise of bloodshed and an increasingly large butcher’s bill, are inevitable suggestions from such a figure. The scenes are also clear: well-paid suits dazed by theories of the next war; policy wonks jabbering over mock war games. A huge amount of money is being pushed into the venture, and the sceptics are being held at bay.

    Much of this news comes from the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute’s latest findings that countries are spending 2.2% of the world’s gross domestic product on armaments. Of that amount, the United States, China and Russia accounted for 56% of the total. Global military spending, the SIPRI report also notes, grew by 19% over 2013-2022, rising every year since 2015.

    The amount is slightly more than the previous year, when SIPRI announced that total military expenditure had risen by 0.7% in real terms in 2021 “to reach $2113 billion.” The largest contributors to the binge on that occasion were the United States, China, India, the United Kingdom and Russia. In sum, the five countries accounted for 62% of expenditure.

    This reads differently from the more optimistic International Monetary Institute’s assessment from 2021: “Worldwide military spending, when estimated on the basis of unweighted country averages, has declined by nearly half, from 3.6 percent GDP during the Cold War period (1970-90) to 1.9 percent of GDP in the years following the global financial crisis.” When it comes to variations on the figures in this field, best stick with SIPRA.

    2022 proved to be a boon for militarists the world over, though there were particular regions that saw more growth than others. In Europe, levels of spending had reached levels unseen since the Cold War, up from 13% from the previous twelve months. The reason commonly given: Russia’s invasion of Ukraine. In East Asia, the justification is the increasingly hostile US-Chinese rivalry, though those in Washington’s corner are ever pointing the finger to the Yellow Horde’s ambitions in Beijing.

    The picture in Europe is an ugly one, with concerns being expressed in certain strategic circles that not enough is being done to move away from dependency on the US imperium. The European Council on Foreign Relations (ECFR) has even posited that Europe is the victim of US “vassalisation”, notably in light of the Ukraine War. Visions of strategic autonomy are more distant than ever.

    Such sentiments, however, do little to discourage the militarists: whether Europe chooses to throw in its lot with Washington or not, the arms dealers and manufacturers will do a merry jig. To prove that point, the ECFR advocates the deployment of “western European forces to the east in greater numbers, offering to replace US forces in some cases.” The only difference here is the burden shared, rather than the amount spent.

    In terms of individual countries, Finland’s military expenditure rose by 36% in 2022 to reach $4.8 billion, the largest in the country’s year-on-year increase since 1962. Polish military expenditure grew by 11%, reaching $16.6 billion over the course in 2022. The passage of the Homeland Defence Act, designed to reorganise the military and raise defence spending, promises to eventually push the levels to 4% of GDP. Warsaw has made no secret of the fact that it wishes to have the continent’s largest army, a daft and distinctly draining exercise.

    The figures are also significant given the increasingly proxy nature of the Ukraine War’s balance sheet. Ukraine, for its part, rose from its position at 36 on the league of arms spenders to 11 in 2022, with a figure of $44 billion. But SIPRI has a modest confession to make: it is unable to furnish us “an accurate assessment of the total amount of financial military aid to Ukraine”. This is largely because the donor countries have, for the most part, not released disaggregated data. A rough estimate of $30 billion is provided, which “includes financial contributions, training and operational costs, replacement costs of the military equipment stocks donated to Ukraine and payments to procure additional military equipment for the Ukrainian armed forces.”

    Some of this must be factored into the increased budgets of the UK (top European spender at 3.1%), with Germany and France coming in at 2.5% and 2.4% respectively. Of the three, the UK has given the most military aid to Ukraine, and is second only behind the United States, which allocated $19.9 billion.

    As for the US itself, the Biden administration has already mooted the idea that it will increase the number of troops deployed to Europe by 20,000 personnel to 100,000. The measure is part of the European Deterrence Initiative (EDI), an effort to, according to the US Department of Defense, “enhance the US deterrence posture, increase the readiness and responsiveness of US forces in Europe, support the collective defense and security of NATO allies, and bolster the security and capacity of US allies and partners.”

    While China, with a bill of $292 billion, is leant upon as an excuse for increased military expenditure by other powers, the United States remains the undisputed premier spender, making up a staggering 39% of the global total at $877 billion. Hardly the sort of figure to be sported by a peacemaker.


    This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/05/01/preparing-for-war-the-growing-global-military-budget/feed/ 0 391652
    GOP Debt Limit Bill Could Put Over 10 Million at Risk of Losing Medicaid: Analysis https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/24/gop-debt-limit-bill-could-put-over-10-million-at-risk-of-losing-medicaid-analysis/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/24/gop-debt-limit-bill-could-put-over-10-million-at-risk-of-losing-medicaid-analysis/#respond Mon, 24 Apr 2023 19:00:50 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/gop-debt-limit-bill-could-put-over-10-million-at-risk-of-losing-medicaid-analysis

    The House GOP leadership's newly released debt ceiling legislation would have potentially devastating impacts on Medicaid recipients across the United States, putting more than 10 million low-income people at risk of losing health coverage under the program.

    That's according to a detailed analysis of the bill published Monday by the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP), which noted that the Republican legislation "would take Medicaid health coverage away from adults aged 19-55 who do not have children in their household and who aren't able to document that they are working or to secure an exemption."

    "This builds on a failed policy that Arkansas temporarily applied, which resulted in large numbers of people losing coverage and no impact [on] employment outcomes," CBPP warned. "Like the Arkansas policy, the McCarthy proposal would require monthly verification of employment and require many people to navigate a complicated system and provide proof that may be difficult to get to secure an exemption."

    "More than 10 million people in Medicaid expansion states would be at significant risk of having their health coverage taken away because they would be subject to the new requirements and could not be excluded automatically based on existing data readily available to states," the think tank continued. "When people lose Medicaid, they lose access to preventive and acute care as well as medications and other therapies for managing chronic conditions, such as diabetes or depression. Losing access to healthcare can lead to serious health consequences and financial strain, making it harder for people to engage in the workforce successfully."

    The bill, touted by House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) in a floor speech last week, would also impose even more strict work requirements on Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) recipients—the majority of whom already work.

    "Under the bill, people unable to document employment could lose both SNAP and Medicaid," CBPP observed.

    CBPP has previously estimated that SNAP work requirements floated by Republicans would strip federal food benefits from more than 10 million people, including millions of children.

    A fact sheet that the Republican leadership released alongside the new legislation estimates that the proposed work requirements would save the federal government up to $120 billion over the next decade.

    But the document doesn't mention that the bill's repeal of Internal Revenue Service (IRS) funding would cost the federal government around $114 billion in revenue over 10 years, almost completely offsetting any potential savings from the punitive work requirements.

    The bill would also slash federal spending across the board by reverting it to fiscal year 2022 levels and capping spending growth at 1% per year for the next decade. In exchange, the measure would only lift the debt ceiling through March 31, 2024 at the latest.

    "Cutting a broad swath of public services—from schools, childcare, and public health to environmental protection and college aid—and making it harder for people to afford the basics while permitting more tax cheating and cutting taxes for the wealthy is failed trickle-down economics at its worst," CBPP argued. "This agenda would narrow opportunity, deepen inequality, and increase hardship."

    Growing warnings about the ramifications of the GOP-backed work requirements come as some far-right House Republicans—led by Rep. Matt Gaetz (R-Fla.)—are complaining that the new rules in the Republican bill aren't strict enough, potentially complicating party leaders' efforts to hold a vote this week.

    NBC News reported Monday that Gaetz has "demanded 'more rigor' on work requirements for recipients of Medicaid and other safety net programs before he'll get on board."

    "Specifically, he wants recipients to work 30 hours per week, up from 20 hours in the McCarthy plan," the outlet noted.

    Congressional Democrats and President Joe Biden have voiced opposition to the Republican bill, characterizing it as an attack on the vulnerable and a gift to rich tax dodgers.

    "Most Medicaid recipients already work," Rep. Gwen Moore (D-Wis.) tweeted Sunday. "The GOP's proposed work requirements are unnecessary and cruel, and would take away health insurance from millions of people."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/24/gop-debt-limit-bill-could-put-over-10-million-at-risk-of-losing-medicaid-analysis/feed/ 0 390055
    When Will Great Military Powers Ever Learn? https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/24/when-will-great-military-powers-ever-learn/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/24/when-will-great-military-powers-ever-learn/#respond Mon, 24 Apr 2023 14:12:33 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/great-military-powers-never-learn

    I was born on July 20, 1944, amid a vast global conflict already known as World War II. Though it ended with the atomic bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki in August 1945 before I could say much more than "Mama" or "Dada," in some strange fashion, I grew up at war.

    Living in New York City, I was near no conflict in those years or in any since. My dad, however, had volunteered for the Army Air Corps at age 35 on December 8, 1941, the day after the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor. He fought in Burma, was painfully silent about his wartime experiences, and died on Pearl Harbor Day in 1983. He was the operations officer for the 1st Air Commandos, and his war, in some strange sense, came home with him.

    Like so many vets, then and now, he was never willing to talk to his son about what he had experienced, though in my early years he still liked his friends to call him "Major," his rank on leaving the military. When his war did come up in our house, it was usually in the form of anger—because my mother had shopped at a nearby grocery store whose owners, he claimed, had been "war profiteers" while he was overseas, or because my first car, shared with a friend, was a used Volkswagen (German!), or my mom was curious to go—god save us!—to a Japanese restaurant!

    If war was hell, in my childhood at the movies, killing them wasn't, whether it was the Indians of the American West or the Japanese in World War II.

    The strange thing, though, was that, in those same years, for reasons we never discussed, he allowed me briefly to have a Japanese pen pal and, though my dad and I never talked about the letters that boy and I exchanged, we did soak the stamps off the envelopes he sent and paste them into our latest Scott stamp album.

    As for evidence of my father's wartime experience, I had two sources. In the guest room closet in our apartment, he had an old green duffle bag, which he'd go through now and then. It was filled to the brim with everything from Army Air Corps documents to his portable mess kit and even—though I didn't know it then—his pistol and bullets from the war. (I would turn them over to the police upon his death a quarter-century later.)

    Though he wouldn't talk with me about his wartime experience, I lived it in a very specific way (or at least so it felt to me then). After all, he regularly took me to the movies where I saw seemingly endless versions of war, American-style, from the Indian wars through World War II. And when we watched movies of his own conflict (or, in my early years, replays of Victory at Sea on our TV at home) and he said nothing, that only seemed to confirm that I was seeing his experience in all its glory, as the Marines inevitably advanced at film's end and the "Japs" died in a spectacle of slaughter without a comment from him.

    From those Indian wars on, as I wrote long ago in my book The End of Victory Culture, war was always a tale of their savagery and our goodness, one in which, in the end, there would be an expectable "spectacle of slaughter" as we advanced and "they" went down. From the placement of the camera flowed the pleasure of watching the killing of tens or hundreds of nonwhites in a scene that normally preceded the positive resolution of relationships among the whites. It was a way of ordering a wilderness of human horrors into a celebratory tale of progress through devastation, a victory culture that, sooner or later, became more complicated to portray because World War II ended with the atomic devastation of those two Japanese cities and, in the 1950s and 1960s, the growing possibility of a future global Armageddon.

    If war was hell, in my childhood at the movies, killing them wasn't, whether it was the Indians of the American West or the Japanese in World War II.

    So, yes, I grew up in a culture of victory, one I played out again and again on the floor of my room. In the 1950s, boys (and some girls) spent hours acting out tales of American battle triumph with generic fighting figures: a crew of cowboys to defeat the Indians and win the West, a bag or two of olive-green Marines to storm the beaches of Iwo Jima.

    If ours was a sanguinary tale of warfare against savages in which pleasure came out of the barrel of a gun, on floors nationwide we kids were left alone, without apparent instruction, to reinvent American history. Who was good and who bad, who could be killed and under what conditions were an accepted part of a collective culture of childhood that drew strength from post-World War II Hollywood.

    What Would My Dad Think?

    Today, 60-odd years later, having never been to war but having focused on it and written about it for so long, here's what I find eerily strange: Since 1945, the country with the greatest military on the planet that, in budgetary terms, now leaves the next nine countries combined in the dust, has never—and let me repeat that: never!—won a war that mattered (despite engaging in all too many spectacles of slaughter). Stranger yet, in terms of lessons learned in the world of adult culture, every lost war has, in the end, only led this country to invest more taxpayer dollars in building up that very military. If you needed a long-term formula for disaster in a country threatening to come apart at the seams, it would be hard to imagine a more striking one. So long after his death, I must admit that sometimes I wonder what my dad would think of it all.

    Here's the thing: The American experience of war since 1945 should have offered an all-too-obvious lesson for us, as well as for the planet's other great powers, when it comes to the value of giant military establishments and the conflicts that go with them.

    Since 1945, the country with the greatest military on the planet that, in budgetary terms, now leaves the next nine countries combined in the dust, has never—and let me repeat that: never!—won a war that mattered.

    Just think about it a moment, historically speaking. That global victory of 1945, ending all too ominously with the dropping of those two atomic bombs and the slaughter of possibly 200,000 people, would be followed in 1950 by the start of the Korean War. The statistics of death and destruction in that conflict were, to say the least, staggering. It was a spectacle of slaughter, involving the armies of North Korea and its ally the newly communist China versus South Korea and its ally, the United States. Now, consider the figures: Out of a Korean population of 30 million, as many as three million may have died, along with an estimated 180,000 Chinese and about 36,000 Americans. The North's cities, bombed and battered, were left in utter ruin, while the devastation on that peninsula was almost beyond imagining. It was all too literally a spectacle of slaughter and yet, despite ours being the best-armed, best-funded military on the planet, that war ended in an all-too-literal draw, a 1953 armistice that has never—not to this day!—turned into an actual peace settlement.

    After that, another decade-plus passed before this country's true disaster of the twentieth century, the war in Vietnam—the first American war I opposed—in which, once again, the U.S. Air Force and our military more generally proved destructive almost beyond imagining, while at least a couple of million Vietnamese civilians and more than a million fighters died, along with 58,000 Americans.

    And yet, in 1975, with U.S. troops withdrawn, the southern regime we had supported collapsed and the North Vietnamese military and its rebel allies in the South took over the country. There was no tie as there had been in Korea, just utter defeat for the greatest military power on the planet.

    The Rise of the Pentagon on a Fallen Planet

    Meanwhile, that other superpower of the Cold War era, the Soviet Union, had—and this should sound familiar to any American in 2023— sent its massive military, the Red Army, into… yes, Afghanistan in 1979. There, for almost a decade, it battled Afghan guerrilla forces backed and significantly financed by the CIA and Saudi Arabia (as well as by a specific Saudi named Osama bin Laden and the tiny group he set up late in the war called—yes, again!—al-Qaeda). In 1989, the Red Army limped out of that country, leaving behind perhaps two million dead Afghans and 15,000 of its own dead. Not so long after, the Soviet Union itself imploded and the U.S. became the only "great power" on planet Earth.

    Washington's response would be anything but a promised "peace dividend." Pentagon funding barely dipped in those years. The U.S. military did manage to invade and occupy the tiny island of Grenada in the Caribbean in 1983 and, in 1991, in a highly publicized but relatively low-level and one-sided encounter, drove Iraqi ruler Saddam Hussein's Iraqi troops out of Kuwait in what would later come to be known as the First Gulf War. It would be but a preview of a hell on Earth to come in this century.

    Meanwhile, of course, the U.S. became a singular military power on this planet, having established at least 750 military bases on every continent but Antarctica. Then, in the new century, in the immediate wake of the 9/11 terror attacks, President George W. Bush and his top officials, incapable of imagining a comparison between the long-gone Soviet Union and the United States, sent the American military into—right!—Afghanistan to overthrow the Taliban government there. A disastrous occupation and war followed, a prolonged spectacle of slaughter that would only end after 20 years of blood, gore, and massive expense, when President Biden pulled the last U.S. forces out amid chaotic destruction and disorder, leaving—yes, the Taliban!—to run that devastated country.

    There may never, in fact, have been a more striking story of a great power, seemingly uncontested on Planet Earth, bringing itself down in quite such a fashion.

    In 2003, with the Bush administration's invasion of Iraq (on the false grounds that Saddam Hussein was developing or had weapons of mass destruction and was somehow linked to Osama bin Laden), the Second Gulf War began. It would, of course, be a disaster, leaving several hundred thousand dead Iraqis in its wake and (as in Afghanistan) thousands of dead Americans as well. Another spectacle of slaughter, it would last for endless years and, once again, Americans would draw remarkably few lessons from it.

    Oh, and then there's the war on terror more generally, which essentially helped spread terror around significant parts of the planet. Nick Turse recently caught this reality with a single statistic: In the years since the U.S. first began its counter-terror efforts in West Africa early in this century, terror incidents there have soared by 30,000%.

    And the response to this? You know it all too well. Year after year, the Pentagon's budget has only grown and is now heading for the trillion-dollar mark. In the end, the U.S. military may have achieved just one success of any significance since 1945 by becoming the most valued and best-funded institution in this country. Unfortunately, in those same years, in a genuinely strange fashion, America's wars came home (as they had in the Soviet Union once upon a time), thanks in part to the spread of military-style assault rifles, now owned by one in 20 Americans, and other weaponry (and the barrage of mass killings that went with them). And there remains the distinctly unsettling possibility of some version of a new civil war with all its Trumpian implications developing in this country.

    I doubt, in fact, that Donald Trump would ever have become president without the disastrous American wars of this century. Think of him, in his own terrorizing fashion, as "fallout" from the war on terror.

    There may never, in fact, have been a more striking story of a great power, seemingly uncontested on Planet Earth, bringing itself down in quite such a fashion.

    Last Words

    Today, in Ukraine, we see but the latest grim example of how a vaunted military, strikingly funded in the wake of the collapse of the Soviet Union—and I'm talking, of course, about Russia's army—has once again been sent into battle against lesser forces with remarkably disastrous results. Mind you, Vladimir Putin and crew, like their American counterparts, should have learned a lesson from the Red Army's disastrous experience in Afghanistan in the previous century. But no such luck.

    There should, of course, be a larger lesson here—not just that there's no glory in war in the twenty-first century but that, unlike in some past eras, great powers are no longer likely to experience success, no matter what happens on the battlefield.

    [W]hen it comes to "great" powers and war these days, one lesson seems clear enough: There simply is nothing great about them, except their power to destroy not just the enemy, but themselves as well.

    Let's hope that the rising power on this planet, China, takes note, even as it regularly organizes threatening military exercises around the island of Taiwan, while the Biden administration continues to ominously heighten the U.S. military presence in the region. If China's leaders truly want to be successful in this century, they should avoid either the American or Russian versions of war-making of our recent past. (And it would be nice if the Cold Warriors in Washington did the same before we end up in a conflict from hell between two nuclear powers.)

    It's decades too late for me to ask my father what his war truly meant to him, but at least when it comes to "great" powers and war these days, one lesson seems clear enough: There simply is nothing great about them, except their power to destroy not just the enemy, but themselves as well.

    I can't help wondering what my dad might think if he could look at this increasingly disturbed world of ours. I wonder if he wouldn't finally have something to say to me about war.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Tom Engelhardt.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/24/when-will-great-military-powers-ever-learn/feed/ 0 389939
    By the Numbers: McCarthy’s Plan to Kick 10 Million or More People Off Medicaid https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/23/by-the-numbers-mccarthys-plan-to-kick-10-million-or-more-people-off-medicaid/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/23/by-the-numbers-mccarthys-plan-to-kick-10-million-or-more-people-off-medicaid/#respond Sun, 23 Apr 2023 15:25:42 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/mccarthy-debt-ceiling-plan-10-million-medicaid

    A Republican proposal led by House Speaker Kevin McCarthy would take Medicaid coverage away from people who do not meet new work-reporting requirements. The McCarthy proposal would apply to all states, but in practice it would heavily impact people covered by the Affordable Care Act (ACA) Medicaid expansion. Of this group, more than 10 million people in Medicaid expansion states would be at significant risk of losing coverage under the McCarthy proposal. This group would be subject to the new Medicaid requirement, and they are not part of a group that states could readily identify in existing data sources and exclude from burdensome reporting. The McCarthy proposal could jeopardize coverage for millions more, by prompting some states to drop the ACA Medicaid expansion or dissuading states that have not yet taken the expansion from adopting it.

    Nationwide, we estimate that over 10 million Medicaid expansion enrollees — more than 1 in 5 of all Medicaid enrollees in expansion states — would be at risk of losing Medicaid coverage under the policy in McCarthy’s debt limit bill, using 2019 (pre-pandemic) data. Some 74 percent of all expansion enrollees and 21 percent of all Medicaid beneficiaries in the states that have adopted the expansion would be subject to the new requirements and, thus, at risk of losing coverage.

    People in every expansion state would be affected, with the share of total Medicaid enrollees at risk ranging from 15 to 37 percent. (See Table 1 and Methodology.) Because we use 2019 data, the national estimate does not include the nine states that expanded coverage after that date and therefore very likely understates the number of enrollees at risk. If those states were included, it would likely add upward of 1 million more enrollees at risk of losing coverage.

    While not all of those at risk under McCarthy’s proposal would lose coverage, many would, including people who are working or are eligible for an exemption but would be disenrolled due to administrative burdens and red tape.[2] This was the experience in Arkansas, which is the only state that briefly took people’s Medicaid coverage away for not meeting work-reporting requirements, until a federal court halted the program following massive coverage losses. In just seven months of implementation, some 18,000 people — 1 in 4 subject to the requirements — lost coverage. Moreover, research found that the new requirements had no impact on employment outcomes. The McCarthy Medicaid provision draws heavily from the failed Arkansas experiment but is harsher in some respects, applying to somewhat older adults, for example.

    The more than 10 million estimate (looking just at the states that had expanded Medicaid prior to 2019) does not fully account for the sweeping impact the Medicaid work-reporting requirement could have. For example, while the bill directs states “whenever possible” to use electronic data sources to verify whether people meet the criteria for continued Medicaid coverage, the extent to which this would protect people from losing coverage or from onerous reporting would depend on implementation decisions at both the federal and state level.

    Proponents of the new requirements argue that they give states an option to take Medicaid coverage away from people who don’t comply with the new work-reporting requirement. This is misdirection at best.

    The bill terminates federally funded Medicaid coverage for those who don’t meet the work-reporting requirements. In theory, states could provide fully state-funded coverage to those whose federal Medicaid coverage is taken away, but with the federal government currently covering 90 percent of the cost of coverage for expansion enrollees, states are exceedingly unlikely to continue coverage for large numbers of people who don’t meet the requirement. (It is worth noting that states did not provide state-funded coverage for this group prior to the ACA’s expansion, though they were able to do so.)

    Moreover, administering these new requirements would be complicated for state and local governments, which would have to pick up a significant portion of the costs associated with implementing the complex systems to verify work, determine who meets automatic exemption criteria (such as those with children), and assess applications for exemptions based on criteria, such as an illness, that the state doesn’t know through its eligibility system.

    States also would have to absorb the costs associated with higher caseload churn — that is, people losing coverage and then having to reapply or seek to have their coverage reinstated, all processes that require caseworker staff time. And uncompensated care costs would increase because people have lost coverage, adding further to the costs that states and safety net health care providers would have to pick up.

    Without a doubt, adding work-reporting requirements to Medicaid would cause many low-income adults to lose coverage due to bureaucratic hurdles and would leave people without the health care they need, including life-saving medications, treatment to manage chronic conditions, and care for acute illnesses. People’s access to health care and other basic supports, such as housing, food, or child care, should not hinge on whether they meet a work-reporting requirement or successfully navigate a complicated system to either report work hours or claim an exemption.[3]

    McCarthy Medicaid Provision Builds on Failed Arkansas Experiment

    The Arkansas plan, implemented in 2018, required that Medicaid expansion enrollees aged 19-49 document at least 80 hours of work or other qualifying activities (e.g. job training, volunteering) per month.[4] Exemptions were available for various groups including pregnant people, certain types of caregivers, and people with certain health conditions, but qualifying for these exemptions required that enrollees successfully navigate the reporting system or that the state use available data to determine exemption status. As a result, more than 18,000 people (about one-quarter of those subject to the requirements) lost coverage in just seven months, before a federal court blocked the policy.[5]

    The McCarthy plan is similar to Arkansas’ but applies to a broader set of Medicaid enrollees. First, it applies to enrollees aged 19-55, a wider age range that includes more older adults. Second, it is not explicitly limited to Medicaid expansion enrollees, unlike the Arkansas policy. While all states would have to set up new processes to validate exemptions, we assume that because existing state data sources could readily be used to exempt the bulk of Medicaid enrollees who are not part of the expansion group, the impact would be largely on expansion enrollees.[6] Third, some groups exempt under the Arkansas plan, including postpartum people, people identified as “medically frail,” and people receiving unemployment benefits, are not exempt under the McCarthy plan.

    A KFF study estimated that under a nationwide Medicaid work-reporting requirements policy similar to policies implemented in Arkansas and proposed by other states, most people losing coverage would be complying with or exempt from the requirements but would be disenrolled due to administrative burdens and red tape.[7] Using conservative assumptions about disenrollment based on a survey of the research literature, the study found that 62 to 91 percent of those losing coverage would be people who qualify as eligible under the policy. Coverage losses would be concentrated among those eligible because the overwhelming majority of Medicaid enrollees already meet the requirements or an exemption criterion, yet they would still be at risk due to the bureaucratic complexity of reporting and proving exemption status.

    Overall, between 1.4 and 4 million people would have lost Medicaid coverage if Medicaid work-requirements were imposed in 2016, the KFF study estimated.[8] This estimate is roughly in line with the Congressional Budget Office’s projection that a nationwide policy similar to Arkansas’ would result in a reduction in Medicaid enrollment of 2.2 million adults per year for the 2023-2031 period.[9]

    Our analysis is not a projection of the number of people who will lose coverage, but rather shows that more than 10 million people would be subject to these requirements and, thus, at risk of losing coverage from a policy that would erect burdensome requirements to report work or claim exemptions. A large share of the 10 million people subject to the requirements would have to navigate complex work-reporting and verification systems each month while others would have to navigate the exemption process periodically to retain coverage.

    Research suggests that some populations would be especially harmed by these work-reporting requirements, including people with disabilities, women, people who are experiencing homelessness, and people with mental health conditions or substance use disorders.[10] Even though exemptions would apply to some in these groups, states often lack the capacity to hire sufficient staff to respond to people’s questions or manage work-reporting systems and the exemption process. People who have fewer transportation options or live in rural areas,[11] face language or literacy barriers, are in poor health or have limited mobility, or have limited internet access[12] would face particular barriers to understanding the new requirements and navigating reporting systems, applying for exemptions, and collecting the verification needed to prove that they meet an exemption criterion.

    There is no upside to Medicaid work-reporting requirements. Research has not found any impact of the requirements on employment,[13] and data from Arkansas show that few enrollees engaged in new work-related activities.[14] Instead, work-reporting requirements strip health coverage from people with low incomes — most of whom are already meeting or exempt from the requirements — leading to gaps in care that damage their health and financial security and make it harder for them to find or keep a job.[15]

    In this paper and in Table 1 below, we estimate the number of Medicaid expansion group enrollees at risk of losing coverage using administrative data on Medicaid expansion enrollment for 2019, combined with American Community Survey (ACS) data and state enrollment policies.

    We use 2019 Medicaid expansion group enrollment to avoid including the large increase in Medicaid enrollment that began in 2020 as a result of the requirement that Medicaid provide continuous coverage during the public health emergency. This continuous coverage requirement ended on March 31, 2023, and while estimates of coverage loss during the unwinding of the requirement are highly uncertain, enrollment declines are potentially large.[16] By using 2019 data, we avoid overstating our estimates of expansion enrollees at risk in each state once unwinding is complete.

    TABLE 1

    Estimated Number of Medicaid Expansion Enrollees Whose Coverage Would Be at Risk Under McCarthy Medicaid Work-Reporting Requirements Proposal

    Number of Medicaid expansion enrollees at risk of losing coverageShare of all Medicaid enrollees
    Alaska40,00019%
    Arizona316,00017%
    Arkansas156,00019%
    California2,673,00022%
    Colorado290,00024%
    Connecticut226,00024%
    Delaware46,00022%
    District of Columbia96,00037%
    Hawai’i81,00026%
    Illinois562,00021%
    IdahoData not availableData not available
    Indiana204,00015%
    Iowa132,00022%
    Kentucky269,00021%
    Louisiana287,00018%
    MaineData not availableData not available
    Maryland235,00019%
    Massachusetts288,00017%
    Michigan464,00019%
    Minnesota153,00015%
    MissouriData not availableData not available
    Montana60,00024%
    NebraskaData not availableData not available
    Nevada137,00024%
    New Hampshire36,00020%
    New Jersey411,00026%
    New Mexico174,00021%
    New York1,287,00021%
    North Dakota15,00017%
    Ohio421,00015%
    OklahomaData not availableData not available
    Oregon316,00033%
    Pennsylvania519,00018%
    Rhode Island55,00019%
    UtahData not availableData not available
    Vermont47,00029%
    VirginiaData not availableData not available
    Washington371,00021%
    West Virginia101,00019%
    Total10,470,00021%
    Adopted expansion but not yet implemented:
    North CarolinaData not availableData not available
    South DakotaData not availableData not available

    Methodology

    As stated above, our estimates are based on a combination of administrative data on Medicaid expansion enrollment, ACS data, and state enrollment policies.

    Because our data are based on 2019 (pre-pandemic) Medicaid expansion enrollment, they do not include expansion enrollees at risk in states that expanded in 2019 or later, including Idaho, Maine, Missouri, Nebraska, Oklahoma, Utah, and Virginia. We also cannot produce expansion group estimates for North Carolina and South Dakota, which have enacted but not yet implemented expansion. Our national total estimate is therefore likely to understate the number of enrollees at risk. Finally, by shifting costs to states, the McCarthy proposal could result in some states deciding to drop the ACA Medicaid expansion, jeopardizing coverage for millions more. Similarly, these new requirements could dissuade some states that have not yet adopted the expansion from doing so.

    We consider Medicaid expansion enrollees aged 19-55 and exclude from this group people who live with dependent children aged 0-17. States should be able to exclude this group automatically (without requiring them to apply for an exemption) using existing administrative data, so they are less likely to be at risk.

    We do not estimate other exemptions or work status because these individuals would be more likely than parents to have to report their employment or earnings monthly or to apply for and submit documentation to receive an exemption. Research indicates that most people who would lose coverage under work-reporting requirements would be disenrolled despite working or qualifying for an exemption due to the complexities of proving that they are working or meet an exemption criterion.

    Publicly available administrative data on Medicaid expansion enrollees do not include detailed enrollee characteristics. We therefore use data from the U.S. Census Bureau’s American Community Survey as well as state-level eligibility rules to estimate the share of expansion enrollees who are aged 19-55 and who do not have dependent children in each state.

    Please see original at CBPP for complete endnotes and more detailed breakdown of the data.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Gideon Lukans.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/04/23/by-the-numbers-mccarthys-plan-to-kick-10-million-or-more-people-off-medicaid/feed/ 0 389833
    Military budget boost will lead to more civilian deaths in Myanmar: Observers https://www.rfa.org/english/news/myanmar/budget-04122023161634.html https://www.rfa.org/english/news/myanmar/budget-04122023161634.html#respond Wed, 12 Apr 2023 20:17:29 +0000 https://www.rfa.org/english/news/myanmar/budget-04122023161634.html An increase in Myanmar’s defense budget of nearly U.S.$1 billion will fuel the country’s brutal civil war and lead to more civilian deaths, observers said Wednesday, calling for urgent action by the international community to cut off the junta’s access to income.

    The increase comes after junta chief Senior Gen. Min Aung Hlaing acknowledged that the military only effectively controls around two-thirds of the country, despite a nationwide offensive by junta troops who have visited death, arson, sexual violence, and torture on the people of Myanmar in the 26 months since the military seized power in a coup d’etat.

    It also follows an Armed Forces Day speech by the military commander in which he vowed to “eradicate” the country’s opposition.

    According to the budget, which Min Aung Hlaing approved on April 5, defense spending for the fiscal year 2023-2024 was set at 5.6 trillion kyats (U.S.$2.7 billion). The new figure represents an increase of U.S.$920 million over the previous fiscal year’s budget of U.S.$1.8 billion.

    ENG_BUR_MilitaryBudget_04122023-02.jpg
    In this March 27, 2021 photo, military vehicles are driven during a parade to mark Armed Forces Day in Naypyidaw, Myanmar. Credit: AP Photo

    Thein Tun Oo, the executive director of the Thayninga Institute for Strategic Studies, a group made up of former military officers, defended the increase, saying that it is intended not to suppress internal armed conflict, but to “upgrade” the military to a more “modern standard.”

    “It’s not surprising that the military budget has to be increased in order to keep up with advancing defense technologies,” he said, adding that he estimates upgrading the military “will require two-thirds of the entire budget.”

    But Aung Myo Min, human rights minister for the shadow National Unity Government, told RFA that the size of the military’s budget is directly proportional to the number of civilian deaths in the country.

    “The more weapons the military buys, the more people suffer because, throughout the period of military expansion, there have been more and more killings of innocent civilians, more air attacks using the jet fuel imported from foreign countries and more burning of civilian properties,” he said.

    “Increasing the budget to expand the military under the current circumstances is literally reinforcing the junta with more weapons to kill more innocent people. It will definitely cause more civilian deaths.”

    ENG_BUR_MilitaryBudget_04122023-03.jpg
    In this Jan. 4, 2023 photo, Myanmar's junta chief Senior General Min Aung Hlaing inspects a military parade during Myanmar's Independence Day in Naypyidaw. Credit: AFP Photo

    Aung Myo Min said that the international community needs to take urgent and effective legal action against the junta to hold it accountable for the atrocities it has committed and block the sources of income that enable it to increase its military budget.

    Fight for control of the country

    According to Thailand’s Assistance Association for Political Prisoners (Burma), authorities in Myanmar have killed at least 3,240 civilians since the Feb. 1, 2021 coup – many during the military’s widespread scorched earth offensive against anti-junta armed groups and ethnic armies.

    And yet, after more than two years in power, Min Aung Hlaing recently acknowledged that he is only in control of 198 of the country’s 330 townships. Since making the comments, military forces have accelerated clearing operations in Sagaing, Magwe, Bago and Tanintharyi regions, as well as Chin, Kachin, Kayin, Mon and Shan states.

    ENG_BUR_MilitaryBudget_04122023-04.jpg
    In this Feb. 8, 2021 photo, protesters with a defaced photo of Myanmar junta Chief Senior General Min Aung Hlaing stand off against riot police in Naypyidaw. Credit: AP Photo

    Sai Kyi Zin Soe, a political analyst, believes that the increase in the junta’s military spending is part of a bid to complete these operations.

    “The military needs a larger budget to meet quotas within its armed forces and to attack the resistance forces more severely,” he said.

    “The junta chief announced in his March 27 [Armed Forces Day] speech that the military will crush the resistance forces. He said he will crush not just the increasing number of resistance forces across the country, but also the ethnic armed groups that support those forces. I think that is the reason for the junta’s increase in military budget.”

    The junta has increased its defense spending every year since the 2020-2021 fiscal year, when Aung San Suu Kyi’s deposed National League for Democracy last set the military budget at 3.4 trillion kyats (U.S.$1.6 billion).

    Translated by Myo Min Aung. Edited by Joshua Lipes and Matthew Reed.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by By RFA Burmese.

    ]]>
    https://www.rfa.org/english/news/myanmar/budget-04122023161634.html/feed/ 0 387235
    Capitalism’s Looming Crises: From Budget Debt Hyperbole to Banking Disaster https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/28/capitalisms-looming-crises-from-budget-debt-hyperbole-to-banking-disaster/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/28/capitalisms-looming-crises-from-budget-debt-hyperbole-to-banking-disaster/#respond Tue, 28 Mar 2023 05:30:42 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=277774 President Joseph Biden presented his third annual budget proposal at $6.8 trillion on Thursday, March 9. A day later Silicon Valley Bank (SVP), in Santa Clara, California, the nation’s 16th largest, declared bankruptcy, followed days later by New York City’s Signature Bank. A half dozen others faced similar and immediate disasters, brought on, as with More

    The post Capitalism’s Looming Crises: From Budget Debt Hyperbole to Banking Disaster appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Jeff Mackler.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/28/capitalisms-looming-crises-from-budget-debt-hyperbole-to-banking-disaster/feed/ 0 382620
    The Outrageous Price We Pay for a Pentagon Budget From Hell https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/27/the-outrageous-price-we-pay-for-a-pentagon-budget-from-hell/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/27/the-outrageous-price-we-pay-for-a-pentagon-budget-from-hell/#respond Mon, 27 Mar 2023 14:23:44 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/pentagon-budget-from-hell

    On March 13th, the Pentagon rolled out its proposed budget for Fiscal Year 2024. The results were — or at least should have been — stunning, even by the standards of a department that’s used to getting what it wants when it wants it.

    The new Pentagon budget would come in at $842 billion. That’s the highest level requested since World War II, except for the peak moment of the Afghan and Iraq wars, when the United States had nearly 200,000 troops deployed in those two countries.

    $1 Trillion for the Pentagon?

    It’s important to note that the $842 billion proposed price tag for the Pentagon next year will only be the beginning of what taxpayers will be asked to shell out in the name of “defense.” If you add in nuclear weapons work at the Department of Energy and small amounts of military spending spread across other agencies, you’re already at a total military budget of $886 billion. And if last year is any guide, Congress will add tens of billions of dollars extra to that sum, while yet more billions will go for emergency aid to Ukraine to help it fend off Russia’s brutal invasion. In short, we’re talking about possible total spending of well over $950 billion on war and preparations for more of it — within striking distance, in other words, of the $1 trillion mark that hawkish officials and pundits could only dream about a few short years ago.

    The ultimate driver of that enormous spending spree is a seldom-commented-upon strategy of global military overreach, including 750 U.S. military bases scattered on every continent except Antarctica, 170,000 troops stationed overseas, and counterterror operations in at least 85 — no, that is not a typo — countries (a count offered by Brown University’s Costs of War Project). Worse yet, the Biden administration only seems to be preparing for more of the same. Its National Defense Strategy, released late last year, manages to find the potential for conflict virtually everywhere on the planet and calls for preparations to win a war with Russia and/or China, fight Iran and North Korea, and continue to wage a global war on terror, which, in recent times, has been redubbed “countering violent extremism.” Think of such a strategic view of the world as the exact opposite of the “diplomacy first” approach touted by President Joe Biden and his team during his early months in office. Worse yet, it’s more likely to serve as a recipe for conflict than a blueprint for peace and security.

    In an ideal world, Congress would carefully scrutinize that Pentagon budget request and rein in the department’s overly ambitious, counterproductive plans. But the past two years suggest that, at least in the short term, exactly the opposite approach lies ahead. After all, lawmakers added $25 billion and $45 billion, respectively, to the Pentagon’s budget requests for 2022 and 2023, mostly for special-interest projects based in the states or districts of key members of Congress. And count on it, hawks on Capitol Hill will push for similar increases this year, too.

    How the Arms Industry Captures Congress

    The $45 billion by which Congress increased the Pentagon’s budget request last year was among the highest levels on record. Add-ons included five extra F-35 jet fighters and a $4.7 billion boost to the shipbuilding budget. Other congressional additions included 10 HH-60W helicopters, four EC-37 aircraft, and 16 additional C-130J aircraft (at a cost of $1.7 billion). There were also provisions that prevented the Pentagon from retiring a wide array of older aircraft and ships — including B-1 bombers, F-22 and F-15 combat aircraft, aerial refueling planes, C-130 and C-40 transport aircraft, E-3 electronic warfare planes, HH-60W helicopters, and the relatively new but disastrous Littoral Combat Ships (LCS), referred to by detractors as “little crappy ships.”

    The lobbying effort to prevent the Navy from retiring those problem-plagued ships is a case study of all that’s wrong with the Pentagon budget process as it works its way through Congress. As the New York Times noted in a detailed analysis of the checkered history of the LCS, it was originally imagined as a multi-mission vessel capable of detecting submarines, destroying anti-ship mines, and doing battle with the kinds of small craft used by countries like Iran. Once produced, however, it proved inept at every one of those tasks, while experiencing repeated engine problems that made it hard even to deploy. Add to that the Navy’s view that the LCS would be useless in a potential naval clash with China and it was decided to retire nine of them, even though some had only served four to six years of a potential 25-year lifetime.

    Contractors and public officials with a stake in the LCS, however, quickly mobilized to block the Navy from shelving the ships and ultimately saved five of the nine slated for retirement. Major players included a trade association representing companies that had received contracts worth $3 billion to repair and maintain those vessels at a shipyard in Jacksonville, Florida, as well as other sites in the U.S. and overseas.

    The key congressional players in saving the ship were Representative John Rutherford (R-FL), whose district includes that Jacksonville shipyard, and Representative Rob Wittman (R-VA), whose district includes a major naval facility at Hampton Roads where maintenance and repair work on the LCS is also done. I’m sure you won’t be surprised to learn that, in 2022, Wittman received hundreds of thousands of dollars in arms-industry campaign contributions, including substantial donations from companies like Lockheed Martin, Raytheon, and General Dynamics with a role in the LCS program. When asked if the lobbying campaign for the LCS influenced his actions, he said bluntly enough, “I can’t tell you it was the predominant factor… but I can tell you it was a factor.”

    Former Representative Jackie Speier (D-CA), who tried to make the decision to retire the ships stick, had a harsh view of the campaign to save them:

    “If the LCS was a car sold in America today, they would be deemed lemons, and the automakers would be sued into oblivion… The only winners have been the contractors on which the Navy relies for sustaining these ships.”

    Not all members of Congress are wedded to the idea of endlessly increasing Pentagon spending. On the progressive side, Representatives Barbara Lee (D-CA) and Mark Pocan (D-WI) have introduced a bill that would cut $100 billion a year from the department’s budget. That figure aligns with a 2021 Congressional Budget Office report outlining three paths toward Pentagon budget reductions that would leave the U.S. with a significantly more than adequate defense system.

    Meanwhile, members of the right-wing Freedom Caucus and their allies have promised to push for a freeze on federal discretionary spending at Fiscal Year 2022 levels. If implemented across the board, that would mean a $75 to $100 billion cut in Pentagon spending. But proponents of the freeze have been unclear about the degree to which such cuts (if any) would affect the Department of Defense.

    A number of Republican House members, including Speaker Kevin McCarthy, have indeed said that the Pentagon will be “on the table” in any discussion of future budget cuts, but the only specific items mentioned have involved curbing the Pentagon’s “woke agenda” — that is, defunding things like alternative fuel research — along with initiatives aimed at closing unnecessary military bases or reducing the size of the officer corps. Such moves could indeed save a few billion dollars, while leaving the vast bulk of the Pentagon’s budget intact. No matter where they stand on the political spectrum, proponents of trimming the military budget will have to face a congressional majority of Pentagon boosters and the arms industry’s daunting influence machine.

    Greasing the Wheels: Lobbying, Campaign Contributions, and the Job Card

    As with the LCS, major arms contractors have routinely greased the wheels of access and influence in Congress with campaign contributions to the tune of $83 million over the past two election cycles. Such donations go mainly to the members with the most power to help the major weapons producers. And the arms industry is fast on the draw. Typically, for instance, those corporations have already expanded their collaboration with the Republicans who, since the 2022 election, now head the House Armed Services Committee and the House Appropriations Committee’s defense subcommittee.

    The latest figures from OpenSecrets, an organization that closely tracks campaign and lobbying expenditures, show that new House Armed Services Committee chief Mike Rogers (R-AL) received more than $511,000 from weapons makers in the most recent election cycle, while Ken Calvert (R-CA), the new head of the defense appropriations subcommittee, followed close behind at $445,000. Rogers has been one of the most aggressive members of Congress when it comes to pushing for higher Pentagon spending. He’s a longstanding booster of the Department of Defense and has more than ample incentives to advocate for its agenda, given not just his own beliefs but the presence of major defense contractors like Boeing and Lockheed Martin in his state.

    Contractors and members of Congress with arms plants or military bases in their jurisdictions routinely use the jobs argument as a tool of last resort in pushing the funding of relevant facilities and weapons systems. It matters little that the actual economic impact of Pentagon spending has been greatly exaggerated and more efficient sources of job creation could, with the right funding, be developed.

    At the national level, direct employment in the weapons sector has dropped dramatically in the past four decades, from 3.2 million Americans in the mid-1980s to one million today, according to figures compiled by the National Defense Industrial Association, the arms industry’s largest trade group. And those one million jobs in the defense sector represent just six-tenths of one percent of the U.S. civilian labor force of more than 160 million people. In short, weapons spending is a distinct niche sector in the larger economy rather than an essential driver of overall economic activity.

    Arms-related employment will certainly rise as Pentagon budgets do and as ongoing expenditures aimed at arming Ukraine continue to do so as well. Still, total employment in the defense sector will remain at modest levels relative to those during the Cold War, even though the current military budget is far higher than spending in the peak years of that era.

    Reductions in defense-related employment are masked by the tendency of major contractors like Lockheed Martin to exaggerate the number of jobs associated with their most significant weapons-making programs. For example, Lockheed Martin claims that the F-35 program creates 298,000 jobs in 48 states, though the real figure is closer to half that number (based on average annual expenditures on the program and estimates by the Costs of War Project that military spending creates about 11,200 jobs per billion dollars spent).

    It’s true, however, that the jobs that do exist generate considerable political clout because they tend to be in the states and districts of the members of Congress with the most sway over spending on weapons research, development, and production. Addressing that problem would require a new investment strategy aimed at easing the transition of defense-dependent communities and workers to other jobs (as outlined in Miriam Pemberton’s new bookSix Stops on the National Security Tour: Rethinking Warfare Economies).

    Unfortunately, the major contractors are ever better positioned to shape future debates on Pentagon spending and strategy. For example, a newly formed congressional commission charged with evaluating the Pentagon’s National Defense Strategy mostly consists of experts and ex-government officials with close ties to those weapons makers. They are either executives, consultants, board members, or staffers at think tanks with substantial industry funding.

    And sadly, this should shock no one. The last time Congress created a commission on strategy, its membership was also heavily slanted towards individuals with defense-industry ties and it recommended a 3% to 5% annual increase in Pentagon spending, adjusted for inflation, for years to come. That was well more than what the department was then projected to spend. The figure that the commission recommended immediately became a rallying cry for Pentagon boosters like Mike Rogers and former ranking member of the Senate Armed Services Committee James Inhofe (R-OK) in their efforts to push spending even higher. Inhofe typically treated that document as gospel, at one point waving a copy of it at a congressional hearing on the Pentagon budget.

    “An Alert and Knowledgeable Citizenry”

    The power and influence of the arms industry are daunting obstacles to a change in national priorities. But there is historical precedent for a different approach. After all, given enough public pressure, Pentagon spending did drop in the wake of the Vietnam War, again at the end of the Cold War, and even during the deficit reduction debates of the early 2010s. It could happen again.

    As President Dwight D. Eisenhower noted in his famous farewell address in 1961, the only counterbalance to the power of the military-industrial complex is an “alert and knowledgeable citizenry.” Fortunately, a number of individuals and groups are working hard to sound the alarm and mobilize opposition to massive overspending on war and preparations for more of it. Coalitions like People Over Pentagon and organizations like the Poor People’s Campaign continue to educate the public and work to increase the number of congressional representatives in favor of reining in the Pentagon’s bloated budget and shifting funds to areas of urgent national need.

    As of now, the Pentagon consumes more than half of the federal government’s discretionary budget. That, in turn, means the funds needed to prevent pandemics, address climate change, and reduce poverty and inequality have taken a back seat. Those problems aren’t going away and are likely to pose greater threats to American lives and livelihoods than traditional military challenges. As that reality becomes clearer to ever more Americans, the Pentagon’s days of virtually unlimited funding may indeed come to an end. It’s not the work of a day or a year, but it certainly is essential to the safety and security of this country and the world.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by William Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/27/the-outrageous-price-we-pay-for-a-pentagon-budget-from-hell/feed/ 0 382553
    From Mass Evictions to Education Cuts, Dem Warns GOP Austerity Would Cause ‘Irreparable Damage’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/21/from-mass-evictions-to-education-cuts-dem-warns-gop-austerity-would-cause-irreparable-damage/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/21/from-mass-evictions-to-education-cuts-dem-warns-gop-austerity-would-cause-irreparable-damage/#respond Tue, 21 Mar 2023 14:18:16 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/gop-austerity-irreparable-damage

    The top Democrat on the House Appropriations Committee on Monday released letters from federal agencies that together provide a detailed look at the implications of the House GOP's proposed budget cuts, which would take an axe to programs that help millions of people make rent, feed their families, and afford childcare.

    Rep. Rosa DeLauro (D-Conn.) asked the leaders of major government departments to outline what would happen if House Republicans succeeded in their push to freeze federal spending at fiscal year 2022 levels, a move that would inflict deep across-the-board cuts on agency budgets.

    DeLauro said the agencies' responses make clear that the cuts "would cause irreparable damage to our communities by gutting the programs every single American relies on."

    "Those proposals are unrealistic, unsustainable, and unconscionable," said DeLauro. "The draconian cuts would take away the opportunity for 80,000 people to attend college and impact all 6.6 million students who rely on Pell Grants. If implemented, 200,000 children will lose access to Head Start, and 100,000 children will lose access to childcare, undermining early education and parents' ability to go to work."

    "As if that was not enough to deter these harmful cuts," she added, "1.2 million women, infants, and children would lose vital nutrition assistance they receive through WIC."

    Those figures come directly from letters that agency heads sent to DeLauro last week as congressional Democrats and the Biden administration ramp up their criticism of the House GOP's pursuit of steep spending cuts, which Republicans are demanding in exchange for lifting the debt ceiling and averting a catastrophic default.

    Rep. Mario Diaz-Balart (R-Fla.) toldRoll Call on Monday that House Appropriations Chair Kay Granger (R-Texas) has instructed Republicans to "scrub every penny, every department, every agency, dollar, every penny spent, to try to find savings, to try to figure out where we can cut spending in a responsible way"—though top GOP lawmakers have indicated they will likely shield the fraud-ridden Pentagon Pentagon from cuts.

    "Continued Republican calls for cuts of this magnitude—both secret proposals from Republican leadership and public demands from extremists in the party—would be absolutely detrimental to all Americans."

    In a March 17 letter, the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) warned that reverting its budget to fiscal year 2022 levels would strip federal rental assistance from 640,000 families, making it "impossible to stave off mass evictions."

    The Department of Education, meanwhile, estimated that GOP cuts would have the effect of "removing more than 13,000 teachers and service providers from classrooms serving low-income children."

    "A reduction of 22% from currently enacted levels would cut $468 million in federal support to determine, disburse, and service student aid," the agency continued. "This level of funding would have devastating effects on student and parent interactions with the department, as well as on their ability to successfully apply for and receive student aid."

    In a press release, DeLauro spotlighted projections from other agencies that demonstrate the far-reaching consequences of the GOP's austerity push:

    • After recent near-misses, our air travel would come to a halt with 125 Air Traffic Control Towers shutting down, impacting one-third of all airports;
    • Following the catastrophic derailments in eastern Ohio and West Virginia, rail safety jobs would be dramatically reduced, with 11,000 fewer safety inspection days, and 30,000 fewer miles of track inspected annually;
    • Amid a mental health and overdose crisis, nearly 1 million people facing a suicidal or mental health crisis would be unable to access support services through the 988 Suicide and Crisis Lifeline, and tens of thousands of individuals could be denied admission to opioid use disorder treatment, denying them a potentially life-saving path to recovery;
    • An estimated 2 million vulnerable individuals and families, including rural and underserved populations, would lose access to healthcare services through Community Health Centers;
    • With the looming rise of food insecurity, nutrition services, such as Meals on Wheels, would be cut for more than 1 million seniors; and
    • The Social Security Administration would be forced to close field offices and reduced access to in-person services, and people applying for disability benefits would wait an additional two months for the processing of claims.

    And that's not even the full picture: DeLauro is still awaiting responses from the Environmental Protection Agency and the Agency for International Development, among other departments.

    "The programs that we fund every year keep our communities safe and healthy, lower prices, and create jobs, and we have increased investments in them year after year with the support of Democrats and Republicans in both the House and the Senate," DeLauro said Monday.

    "Continued Republican calls for cuts of this magnitude—both secret proposals from Republican leadership and public demands from extremists in the party—would be absolutely detrimental to all Americans, many of whom have not seen a pay raise in years and are struggling to pay their bills," said the Connecticut Democrat. "The math is not there."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/21/from-mass-evictions-to-education-cuts-dem-warns-gop-austerity-would-cause-irreparable-damage/feed/ 0 380991
    The Values of Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/17/the-values-of-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/17/the-values-of-budget/#respond Fri, 17 Mar 2023 05:51:17 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=277079

    How can we measure what our leaders value? One way is to look at their budgets.

    On March 9, President Biden rolled out a budget proposal that he’ll ask Congress to consider. Presidential budget proposals seldom pass in the form they’re presented, but they offer clues about what the White House is willing to fight for.

    By investing in jobs and families, protecting Social Security, and strengthening Medicare, this one reflects the things most of us value. And it would do all this while reducing the federal deficit by $3 trillion over the next decade.

    Here’s a look at the domestic spending in Biden’s budget plan.

    The budget proposes $600 billion over 10 years in child care, early childhood learning, and support for families. That includes the wildly popular Child Tax Credit expansion that cut child poverty nearly in half, as well as long-overdue funding for paid family medical leave.

    These investments would lead to greater success for kids throughout their lives. They would make it easier for parents to work and care for their families. And the 10-year cost for all of it falls substantially below what we spend on the Pentagon in a single year.

    In an age of skyrocketing college costs, Biden’s budget would also increase higher education affordability with a modest increase in Pell Grants. In the midst of a serious affordable housing crisis, it proposes critical rental assistance and additional housing voucher funding.

    It would also help foster kids transition to a safe and productive life once they age out of the system. It would support low-income veterans’ families. And it raises investments in clean energy by 26 percent.

    On the health care front, the budget shores up Medicare for at least 25 years. It reduces prescription drug costs. It permanently extends pandemic-era health subsidies so struggling people can afford care. And it expands health coverage options for the 2 million people who lack insurance because they live in one of the 12 states that refused to expand Medicaid coverage under the Affordable Care Act.

    How does it do all this while reducing the deficit? Simply by closing unfair tax loopholes for corporations and the very wealthy, which would raise $4 trillion in revenues over the next 10 years.

    On the military side, however, the news is less welcome.

    Biden’s budget calls for yet another increase in our already obscenely bloated defense budget. During a time when the U.S. isn’t embroiled in any war, that number should be going down, not up. And the savings should be put towards families and workers.

    As the National Priorities Project explains, more than half of all discretionary spending in this proposed budget goes to the military, and fully two-thirds goes to a combination of programs that could broadly be considered militarized. That leaves just one third for all those worthwhile domestic programs.

    More needs to be done for the nearly 140 million people who struggle to make ends meet in the wealthiest nation in the world. Biden’s proposed social investments would be a solid step in the right direction — they just need to be a bigger part of the whole budget.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Karen Dolan.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/17/the-values-of-budget/feed/ 0 380143
    Aside From the Military Bloat, Biden Budget Is Worth Celebrating https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating/#respond Thu, 16 Mar 2023 16:47:50 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/biden-budget-social-investments

    How can we measure what our leaders value? One way is to look at their budgets.

    On March 9, President Biden rolled out a budget proposal that he’ll ask Congress to consider. Presidential budget proposals seldom pass in the form they’re presented, but they offer clues about what the White House is willing to fight for.

    By investing in jobs and families, protecting Social Security, and strengthening Medicare, this one reflects the things most of us value. And it would do all this while reducing the federal deficit by $3 trillion over the next decade.

    Here’s a look at the domestic spending in Biden’s budget plan.

    The budget proposes $600 billion over 10 years in child care, early childhood learning, and support for families. That includes the wildly popular Child Tax Credit expansion that cut child poverty nearly in half, as well as long-overdue funding for paid family medical leave.

    These investments would lead to greater success for kids throughout their lives. They would make it easier for parents to work and care for their families. And the 10-year cost for all of it falls substantially below what we spend on the Pentagon in a single year.

    In an age of skyrocketing college costs, Biden’s budget would also increase higher education affordability with a modest increase in Pell Grants. In the midst of a serious affordable housing crisis, it proposes critical rental assistance and additional housing voucher funding.

    It would also help foster kids transition to a safe and productive life once they age out of the system. It would support low-income veterans’ families. And it raises investments in clean energy by 26 percent.

    On the health care front, the budget shores up Medicare for at least 25 years. It reduces prescription drug costs. It permanently extends pandemic-era health subsidies so struggling people can afford care. And it expands health coverage options for the 2 million people who lack insurance because they live in one of the 12 states that refused to expand Medicaid coverage under the Affordable Care Act.

    How does it do all this while reducing the deficit? Simply by closing unfair tax loopholes for corporations and the very wealthy, which would raise $4 trillion in revenues over the next 10 years.

    The Biden plan would require the Elon Musks of this country to pay at least as much in taxes as you, a teacher in your district, or your local firefighter. Currently, billionaires pay an average of 8 percent in taxes, while the rest of us pay 14 percent. Some billionaires and big corporations pay nothing at all in taxes.

    This plan makes sure billionaires pay at least 25 percent of their income in taxes. And it would nearly double the tax that wealthy investors pay on their investment income.

    On the military side, however, the news is less welcome.

    Biden’s budget calls for yet another increase in our already obscenely bloated defense budget. During a time when the U.S. isn’t embroiled in any war, that number should be going down, not up. And the savings should be put towards families and workers.

    As the National Priorities Project explains, more than half of all discretionary spending in this proposed budget goes to the military, and fully two-thirds goes to a combination of programs that could broadly be considered militarized. That leaves just one third for all those worthwhile domestic programs.

    More needs to be done for the nearly 140 million people who struggle to make ends meet in the wealthiest nation in the world. Biden’s proposed social investments would be a solid step in the right direction — they just need to be a bigger part of the whole budget.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Karen Dolan.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating/feed/ 0 380017
    Aside From the Military Bloat, Biden Budget Is Worth Celebrating https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating/#respond Thu, 16 Mar 2023 16:47:50 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/biden-budget-social-investments

    How can we measure what our leaders value? One way is to look at their budgets.

    On March 9, President Biden rolled out a budget proposal that he’ll ask Congress to consider. Presidential budget proposals seldom pass in the form they’re presented, but they offer clues about what the White House is willing to fight for.

    By investing in jobs and families, protecting Social Security, and strengthening Medicare, this one reflects the things most of us value. And it would do all this while reducing the federal deficit by $3 trillion over the next decade.

    Here’s a look at the domestic spending in Biden’s budget plan.

    The budget proposes $600 billion over 10 years in child care, early childhood learning, and support for families. That includes the wildly popular Child Tax Credit expansion that cut child poverty nearly in half, as well as long-overdue funding for paid family medical leave.

    These investments would lead to greater success for kids throughout their lives. They would make it easier for parents to work and care for their families. And the 10-year cost for all of it falls substantially below what we spend on the Pentagon in a single year.

    In an age of skyrocketing college costs, Biden’s budget would also increase higher education affordability with a modest increase in Pell Grants. In the midst of a serious affordable housing crisis, it proposes critical rental assistance and additional housing voucher funding.

    It would also help foster kids transition to a safe and productive life once they age out of the system. It would support low-income veterans’ families. And it raises investments in clean energy by 26 percent.

    On the health care front, the budget shores up Medicare for at least 25 years. It reduces prescription drug costs. It permanently extends pandemic-era health subsidies so struggling people can afford care. And it expands health coverage options for the 2 million people who lack insurance because they live in one of the 12 states that refused to expand Medicaid coverage under the Affordable Care Act.

    How does it do all this while reducing the deficit? Simply by closing unfair tax loopholes for corporations and the very wealthy, which would raise $4 trillion in revenues over the next 10 years.

    The Biden plan would require the Elon Musks of this country to pay at least as much in taxes as you, a teacher in your district, or your local firefighter. Currently, billionaires pay an average of 8 percent in taxes, while the rest of us pay 14 percent. Some billionaires and big corporations pay nothing at all in taxes.

    This plan makes sure billionaires pay at least 25 percent of their income in taxes. And it would nearly double the tax that wealthy investors pay on their investment income.

    On the military side, however, the news is less welcome.

    Biden’s budget calls for yet another increase in our already obscenely bloated defense budget. During a time when the U.S. isn’t embroiled in any war, that number should be going down, not up. And the savings should be put towards families and workers.

    As the National Priorities Project explains, more than half of all discretionary spending in this proposed budget goes to the military, and fully two-thirds goes to a combination of programs that could broadly be considered militarized. That leaves just one third for all those worthwhile domestic programs.

    More needs to be done for the nearly 140 million people who struggle to make ends meet in the wealthiest nation in the world. Biden’s proposed social investments would be a solid step in the right direction — they just need to be a bigger part of the whole budget.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Karen Dolan.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating/feed/ 0 380018
    Aside From the Military Bloat, Biden Budget Is Worth Celebrating https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating-2/#respond Thu, 16 Mar 2023 16:47:50 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/biden-budget-social-investments

    How can we measure what our leaders value? One way is to look at their budgets.

    On March 9, President Biden rolled out a budget proposal that he’ll ask Congress to consider. Presidential budget proposals seldom pass in the form they’re presented, but they offer clues about what the White House is willing to fight for.

    By investing in jobs and families, protecting Social Security, and strengthening Medicare, this one reflects the things most of us value. And it would do all this while reducing the federal deficit by $3 trillion over the next decade.

    Here’s a look at the domestic spending in Biden’s budget plan.

    The budget proposes $600 billion over 10 years in child care, early childhood learning, and support for families. That includes the wildly popular Child Tax Credit expansion that cut child poverty nearly in half, as well as long-overdue funding for paid family medical leave.

    These investments would lead to greater success for kids throughout their lives. They would make it easier for parents to work and care for their families. And the 10-year cost for all of it falls substantially below what we spend on the Pentagon in a single year.

    In an age of skyrocketing college costs, Biden’s budget would also increase higher education affordability with a modest increase in Pell Grants. In the midst of a serious affordable housing crisis, it proposes critical rental assistance and additional housing voucher funding.

    It would also help foster kids transition to a safe and productive life once they age out of the system. It would support low-income veterans’ families. And it raises investments in clean energy by 26 percent.

    On the health care front, the budget shores up Medicare for at least 25 years. It reduces prescription drug costs. It permanently extends pandemic-era health subsidies so struggling people can afford care. And it expands health coverage options for the 2 million people who lack insurance because they live in one of the 12 states that refused to expand Medicaid coverage under the Affordable Care Act.

    How does it do all this while reducing the deficit? Simply by closing unfair tax loopholes for corporations and the very wealthy, which would raise $4 trillion in revenues over the next 10 years.

    The Biden plan would require the Elon Musks of this country to pay at least as much in taxes as you, a teacher in your district, or your local firefighter. Currently, billionaires pay an average of 8 percent in taxes, while the rest of us pay 14 percent. Some billionaires and big corporations pay nothing at all in taxes.

    This plan makes sure billionaires pay at least 25 percent of their income in taxes. And it would nearly double the tax that wealthy investors pay on their investment income.

    On the military side, however, the news is less welcome.

    Biden’s budget calls for yet another increase in our already obscenely bloated defense budget. During a time when the U.S. isn’t embroiled in any war, that number should be going down, not up. And the savings should be put towards families and workers.

    As the National Priorities Project explains, more than half of all discretionary spending in this proposed budget goes to the military, and fully two-thirds goes to a combination of programs that could broadly be considered militarized. That leaves just one third for all those worthwhile domestic programs.

    More needs to be done for the nearly 140 million people who struggle to make ends meet in the wealthiest nation in the world. Biden’s proposed social investments would be a solid step in the right direction — they just need to be a bigger part of the whole budget.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Karen Dolan.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/aside-from-the-military-bloat-biden-budget-is-worth-celebrating-2/feed/ 0 380019
    Objecting to One of the Highest US Military Budgets in History https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/objecting-to-one-of-the-highest-us-military-budgets-in-history/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/objecting-to-one-of-the-highest-us-military-budgets-in-history/#respond Thu, 16 Mar 2023 15:56:30 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/us-military-budget-among-highest-in-history

    Last week, the White House released President Biden’s budget request for Fiscal Year 2024, which begins October 1 of 2023.

    As usual, the biggest portion of the discretionary budget request—52 percent—was for military spending.

    While that’s usual, what’s not usual is the sheer level of that military spending. The Biden request calls for $886 billion in spending for the military and war preparations.

    That’s near historical high levels, on par with spending at the height of the Iraq and Afghanistan wars—even though those wars officially ended with the U.S. withdrawal from Afghanistan in August of 2021.

    It’s far higher than the height of military spending during the Reagan years at the height of the Cold War. Looking further back, the Biden request is higher than the height of the Vietnam or Korean wars, too.

    The Biden request is $28 billion higher than what Congress approved for regular military and nuclear weapons operations in 2023 (excluding most military aid for Ukraine).

    But the Biden request is just the beginning of the story.

    Biden’s request of $886 billion has no legal force. At best it’s an opening bid, and if past patterns hold, Congress will approve significantly more. In 2023, for example, the Biden request was for $813 billion, and Congress ultimately approved $858 billion. And if you add military aid from the Department of Defense to Ukraine, military spending in 2023 was more than $890 billion.

    We can fully expect Congress to follow this path again, if left to their own devices. Hawks will refuse to retire weapons systems, add new ones, or insist that we need more money for inflation - all tricks they successfully used in 2023 to bump up military spending.

    And the administration has promised to continue aid to Ukraine. While that now faces some opposition in Congress, the war in Ukraine shows no end in sight, so it’s likely that the U.S. is not done spending.

    All of that means that without serious pressure from outside, military spending in FY 2024 is shaping up to be one of the highest in history.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Lindsay Koshgarian.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/16/objecting-to-one-of-the-highest-us-military-budgets-in-history/feed/ 0 380044
    Don’t be fooled by childcare pledges, Hunt’s budget offers the bare minimum https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/15/dont-be-fooled-by-childcare-pledges-hunts-budget-offers-the-bare-minimum/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/15/dont-be-fooled-by-childcare-pledges-hunts-budget-offers-the-bare-minimum/#respond Wed, 15 Mar 2023 18:38:56 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/oureconomy/jeremy-hunt-budget-fail-tackle-cost-of-living-crisis-childcare-public-sector-pay/ OPINION: The chancellor failed to tackle the cost of living crisis, but threw money at big business and top earners


    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by James Meadway.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/15/dont-be-fooled-by-childcare-pledges-hunts-budget-offers-the-bare-minimum/feed/ 0 379644
    60+ Faith Groups Urge Congress to ‘Dramatically’ Slash Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/60-faith-groups-urge-congress-to-dramatically-slash-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/60-faith-groups-urge-congress-to-dramatically-slash-pentagon-budget/#respond Tue, 14 Mar 2023 18:37:41 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/faith-groups-congress-slash-pentagon

    More than 60 faith-based organizations on Tuesday urged the U.S. Congress to impose major cuts on the bloated military budget as President Joe Biden pushes for a nearly $30 billion increase and Republicans demand even bigger spending hike.

    "The country is sprinting towards a trillion-dollar budget for weapons and war—propping up an expensive and harmful militarized foreign policy while people struggle to meet their basic needs," reads a new letter to members of Congress signed by U.S., international, and state and local groups including the American Friends Service Committee (AFSC), Unitarian Universalists for Social Justice, Hindus for Human Rights, and dozens of others.

    "We cannot continue down this morally bankrupt path," the letter continues. "We urge members of Congress to dramatically cut militarized spending in the fiscal year 2024 budget—both to facilitate reinvestment in the well-being of our communities, and to curtail the harms of our militarized foreign policy."

    The groups' principled stand against devoting further resources to the U.S. military—and specifically to the Pentagon, an agency that recently failed its fifth consecutive audit—comes days after Biden requested an $886 billion military budget for the upcoming fiscal year, with $842 billion of that total earmarked for the Department of Defense.

    Tori Bateman, the policy advocacy coordinator at AFSC, said Tuesday that "we know that there is enormous waste, fraud, and abuse at the Pentagon—and that spending exorbitant amounts of money on weapons and war takes away from the funding our communities receive for things like healthcare and housing."

    "This year, we need Congress to commit to cutting Pentagon spending, and maintaining a robust level of spending on human needs programs," Bateman added.

    "We need Congress to commit to cutting Pentagon spending, and maintaining a robust level of spending on human needs programs."

    But that demand is likely to be ignored in a Congress that agrees each year—on a bipartisan basis and with relatively little pushback—to increase the U.S. military budget, often by tens of billions more than the president's original request. In 2022, just 78 members of the House voted for Rep. Barbara Lee's (D-Calif.) amendment to cut the military budget by $100 billion while 350 opposed it.

    In response to Biden's budget framework, leading Republicans made clear that they would push for even more military spending, calling the president's proposal "woefully inadequate"—even though it's among the largest in U.S. history.

    "If past experience is any guide, more than half of the new Pentagon budget will go to contractors, with the biggest share going to the top five—Lockheed Martin, Boeing, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and Northrop Grumman—to build everything from howitzers and tanks to intercontinental ballistic missiles," William Hartung of the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft noted last week. "Much of the funding for contractors will come from spending on buying, researching, and developing weapons, which accounts for $315 billion of the new budget request."

    Of the $1.7 trillion in discretionary spending that Biden has proposed for fiscal year 2024, just $584 billion is reserved for social programs, analyst Stephen Semler observed.

    The anti-war group CodePink said in a statement Tuesday that while "President Biden's overall 2024 budget does have some positive proposals like restoring the child tax credit, investing in clean energy projects, and cleaning up nuclear waste sites," the "likelihood of passing the tax reform needed as well as the policies themselves seems very unlikely as congressional Democrats couldn't even pass the Build Back Better legislation when they had more control in 2021."

    "What will pass—what always passes no matter who is in the White House and what majority fills the halls of Congress—is the defense budget," the group added. "Any domestic policy being dangled to the public by the Democrats is meaningless while they still support the ever-growing and immoral defense budget."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/60-faith-groups-urge-congress-to-dramatically-slash-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 379421
    62 faith orgs call for Pentagon budget cuts in 2024 budget cycle https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/62-faith-orgs-call-for-pentagon-budget-cuts-in-2024-budget-cycle/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/62-faith-orgs-call-for-pentagon-budget-cuts-in-2024-budget-cycle/#respond Tue, 14 Mar 2023 15:53:38 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/62-faith-orgs-call-for-pentagon-budget-cuts-in-2024-budget-cycle

    The Fed said the results of its internal investigation will be made public by May 1.

    In a statement, Fed Chair Jerome Powell said that "the events surrounding Silicon Valley Bank demand a thorough, transparent, and swift review by the Federal Reserve," which was the primary regulator of SVB.

    But Warren (D-Mass.) argued in a tweet that Powell shouldn't play a role in the probe given his record of weakening the Fed's oversight of banks like SVB and Signature Bank.

    "Fed Chair Powell's actions directly contributed to these bank failures," wrote Warren, one of the most outspoken critics of Powell's policy decisions, which include scaling back post-financial crisis safeguards.

    "For the Fed's inquiry to have credibility, Powell must recuse himself from this internal review," Warren added. "It's appropriate for Vice Chair for Supervision Barr to have the independence necessary to do his job."

    Warren's demand came a day after the watchdog group Better Markets called for an independent inspector general probe of "the failures of Federal Reserve supervision," declaring that the central bank can't be trusted to "do a thorough and independent investigation of itself."

    "The Fed must immediately ask the Department of Justice IG Michael Horowitz who is the chair of the Council of the Inspector Generals on Integrity and Efficiency to appoint either himself or another independent IG to conduct a thorough investigation," Better Markets president Dennis Kelleher said in a statement Monday, arguing that Fed IG Mark Bialek can't do a credible job because he serves at the pleasure of Powell.

    Kelleher likened the Fed's oversight performance to "a bank guard asleep on the job with headphones on during a robbery," pointing to public warning signs of a looming disaster at SVB months before it collapsed.

    "Whether the bailouts to prevent contagion and more damage from the collapse of Silicon Valley Bank (SVB) are successful or not, the Biden administration must hold those who caused SVB's failure or otherwise contributed to or enabled it or whose job was to prevent it accountable," said Kelleher. "First, SVB's executives must be sanctioned for their gross mismanagement if not reckless and illegal conduct."

    "Second," he added, "the Federal Reserve must be investigated and held accountable for its failure to properly regulate and supervise the bank. While the impact of the Fed's interest rate policies was a key driver of the failure (discussed in detail here and here), the bank undertook enormous unreasonable risks and the Fed failed to identify and require those risks be mitigated."

    "Personal, meaningful accountability for everyone who failed in connection with the collapse of SVB must happen quickly and visibly," Kelleher said. "The American people expect and deserve no less."

    Since the fall of SVB and Signature Bank, top progressive lawmakers including Warren, Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), and Rep. Katie Porter (D-Calif.) have spotlighted and demanded the repeal of 2018 legislation that weakened regulatory scrutiny for banks with between $50 billion and $250 billion in assets—a category that includes the two failed institutions.

    Lawmakers and experts contend that the measure, signed into law by former President Donald Trump, made the market-rattling collapses more likely.

    During congressional testimony in 2018, Powell voiced support for the Republican-authored bill, which was also backed by a number of Democrats including Sens. Mark Warner (D-Va.) and Joe Manchin (D-W.Va.).

    Siding with the bill's proponents, Powell brushed aside expert warnings that the regulatory rollback would heighten risks in the financial industry.

    "I think it gives us the tools that we need to continue to protect financial stability," Powell said, specifically endorsing the part of the 2018 bill that loosed regulations for banks with less than $250 billion in assets.

    "Personal, meaningful accountability for everyone who failed in connection with the collapse of SVB must happen quickly and visibly."

    But Powell, who was first appointed by Trump and later reappointed by President Joe Biden in 2021, has done much more than endorse deregulatory legislation.

    As Americans for Financial Reform (AFR) noted in a detailed summary of Powell's tenure, the Fed chief has directly helped turn off "some of the early warning systems regulators used to detect emerging risks to the financial system."

    "Dodd-Frank introduced stress tests to assess how a bank would perform in the face of economic shocks and to work in tandem with rules improving resiliency to those shocks," AFR observed, citing a key post-financial crisis law. "The Powell Fed dumbed down the tests, and even revealed the criteria to banks beforehand, akin to giving students the exam questions in advance. This allows banks to camouflage risk-taking."

    "The Volcker Rule was a pillar of Dodd-Frank that restricted the ability of banks to speculate with federally-insured money," AFR continued. "With Chair Powell's vote, the Fed diluted bothparts of the Volcker Rule: the restrictions on proprietary trading and the restrictions on bank investments in particularly risky vehicles, like private equity and hedge funds. The Fed also relaxed rules that would curtail risky derivative activities by banks. After these rule changes, bank exposures to derivatives can increase via complex and opaque transactions with their affiliates."

    Renita Marcellin, AFR's advocacy and legislative director, said Monday that "rolling back commonsense safeguards to ensure banks were liquid enough to pay their depositors was clearly the wrong decision."

    "The collapse of these banks gives the Fed all the more reason to resist the self-interested arguments from banks and their allies in Congress," said Marcellin. "No one should give these arguments a sympathetic ear. Banks should not receive government backstopping when things go wrong and simultaneously lobby for weaker rules. Ordinary Americans are not afforded the same benefits when their finances are in the red."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/62-faith-orgs-call-for-pentagon-budget-cuts-in-2024-budget-cycle/feed/ 0 379322
    Money for the Poor, Not For War: CODEPINK Statement on Biden’s Defense Budget Proposal https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/money-for-the-poor-not-for-war-codepink-statement-on-bidens-defense-budget-proposal/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/money-for-the-poor-not-for-war-codepink-statement-on-bidens-defense-budget-proposal/#respond Tue, 14 Mar 2023 15:52:01 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/money-for-the-poor-not-for-war-codepink-statement-on-bidens-defense-budget-proposal

    In the wake of the high court decision, patients have had to contend with trigger laws, new efforts to enact abortion bans, and other attempts by right-wing political leaders to cut off access to healthcare, including 20 GOP state attorneys general who last month threatened legal action against Walgreens and CVS if they dispense abortion medication by mail.

    While shortly after the FDA announcement both pharmacy giants confirmed they planned to seek certification to distribute mifepristone, Walgreens later clarified it won't offer the drug in states where Republican AGs have threatened legal action—prompting California Gov. Gavin Newsom last week to not renew his state's $54 million contract with Walgreens.

    Newsom is spearheading the Reproductive Freedom Alliance and on Tuesday joined the Democratic governors of Illinois, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, North Carolina, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, Oregon, Washington, and Wisconsin in sending letters to the leaders of Costco, CVS, Health Mart, Kroger, Rite Aid, Safeway, and Walmart.

    As the governors wrote:

    We are deeply committed to protecting and expanding reproductive freedom and the health and well-being of all of our residents. As governors of 14 states, we not only represent over 141 million residents with a combined economy of over $11 trillion, but we are also direct customers who have partnered with many of your companies for years on a variety of issues and initiatives. We understand you are carefully reviewing the new mifepristone certification process. We look forward to receiving your plans for dispensing mifepristone in states where such care is legal, as well as any other actions you plan to take to safeguard access to reproductive healthcare.

    "As companies that dispense critical, lifesaving medications, we urge that your decisions continue to be guided by well-established science and medical evidence and a commitment to the health and well-being of patients—not politics or litigation threats," the governors added.

    Meanwhile, Sens. Patty Murray (D-Wash. ) and Debbie Stabenow (D-Mich.) revealed a series of letters—backed by several Senate Democrats—sent to various pharmacy leaders in recent days. They wrote to Walgreens' chief executive officer "with grave concerns about the misunderstanding and confusion your company has created with regard to patients' access to mifepristone from retail pharmacies."

    Walgreens' response to Republican attorney generals' pressure "was unacceptable and appeared to yield to these threats—ignoring the critical need to ensure patients can get this essential healthcare wherever possible," the senators continued. "As you work through the FDA certification process, we urge you to fully assess the laws in each state and ensure your policies provide the strongest possible legal access to this critical patient care."

    Stabenow told NBC News, which first reported on the senators' letters Tuesday, that "in no way, shape, or form should businesses deny legal healthcare to women who have the right to access this vital medication. All businesses should follow the FDA certification process and fully comply with applicable state and federal law."

    The Senate Democrats wrote to the CEOs of Albertsons, Costco, Kroger, and Walmart "with great frustration" that none of them has publicly indicated whether they plan to allow customers to access mifepristone through their pharmacies across the country.

    After expressing concern that GOP intimidation tactics could "lead companies like yours to continue to sit on the sidelines and undermine critical care for your customers," the senators urged those four chains "to pursue policies that provide the strongest possible access to the full range of essential healthcare they need, including mifepristone, and to communicate clearly to your customers about how they can access this care."

    "We look forward to hearing back from you by March 21, 2023 about your intentions to ensure access to this critical FDA-approved product," the lawmakers added.

    In letters to CVS and Rite Aid leadership, the Senate Democrats expressed appreciation for both chains' ongoing efforts to become distributors of mifepristone while also stressing that "at a time of great confusion about abortion access, it is imperative that no company adds to it."

    The senators asked both companies' leaders to respond to three questions by March 21:

    • If certified, how do you plan to notify current customers about access to mifepristone in any given state, where restrictions do and do not exist?
    • If a new state law to restrict access to medication abortion is proposed, at what stage will you clarify to your customers whether they still have access to mifepristone?
    • Will your company conduct any community outreach to ensure customers are aware of the full range of legal health services available to them?

    "Medication abortion is how most women across our country get abortion care," Murray told NBC, "and it's absolutely critical patients can access this safe, FDA-approved drug without being forced to jump through medically unnecessary hoops or drain their bank accounts to travel hundreds of miles."

    The questions and concerns about accessing mifepristone at retail pharmacies come as patients and providers nationwide prepare for a secretive Wednesday hearing before right-wing U.S. District Court Judge Matthew Kacsmaryk regarding an anti-choice group's effort to limit abortion access by arguing that the FDA never should have approved the drug over two decades ago.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/money-for-the-poor-not-for-war-codepink-statement-on-bidens-defense-budget-proposal/feed/ 0 379436
    Biden’s 2024 Funding Proposal is a War Budget and He Is Leading Us to War https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/bidens-2024-funding-proposal-is-a-war-budget-and-he-is-leading-us-to-war/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/bidens-2024-funding-proposal-is-a-war-budget-and-he-is-leading-us-to-war/#respond Tue, 14 Mar 2023 05:53:12 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=276612

    Photograph Source: Gage Skidmore – CC BY-SA 2.0

    From Aug. 7, 1789, when it was created, to September 18, 1947, the American people knew that their government had a Department of War and that it had an Army and a Navy for that purpose, both to defend the country against attack, as it did in 1812, and to make war, as it did in the Barbary War of 1801-1805. Since then the US military has engaged in wars over 80 times including in the Civil War. Most of those wars, whether against Native peoples as the expanding US sought their lands, or against Middle Eastern or Asian countries to gain access to their resources.

    But all that time, the American people knew that their government was at war and that their tax money, whether they liked it or now, was being spent on efforts to kill or be killed, for defense and for offense.

    That changed in 1947, when a nation, exhausted by a brutal world war that cost the US the lives of over 400,000 military personnel and left over 600.000 seriously injured, wanted peace. The problem was the Truman administration, which had a monopoly on the atomic bomb, wanted to use it to enhance the US’s pre-eminent power coming out of that global conflict that had battered and weakened all the other world powers. So even as the US began in 1946 cranking out more atomic bombs as rapidly as it could, creating close to 400 Nagasaki-sized bombs by 1950, and with the intent to use them, in 1947 President Truman had the Department of War name changed to the Department of Defense.

    Housed in the world’s largest building, the Pentagon, constructed during World War II to house the giant bureaucracy of war that was contemplated even as the war was being fought, the Department of Defense was never about “defense,” for since the surrender of Japan on Aug. 15, 1945, no nation has had the capacity to attack the US with any chance of surviving such an action.

    The US in fact, with the end of World War II, became an Empire supported by the most powerful military the world had ever known, and it remains so. To hide that reality from the American people, who of course have to pay for that Empire, the name of the military entity running the war machine had to be disguised as the Department of Defense.

    It’s not easy to comprehend how enormous the US military is, whether simply as the war-making force that it is, or as the largest government organization in this country, or compared to the military forces of the rest of the world’s nations.

    But the latest budget proposal by President Biden, for the 2024 fiscal year budget that, once passed by Congress next fall, will in some form take effect this coming October 1, offers a good opportunity to try and do that.

    President Biden’s proposed federal budget, which covers all federal spending for the coming fiscal year will be debated in House and Senate and eventually passed, with cuts here and increases there, but if history offers any perspective, after all the posturing and the sturm-und-drang rhetoric and media tut-tutting about its size, the final approved budget will be pretty similar to what the White House proposes. This is because so much of the total US budget is deemed mandated or untouchable. The three big “untouchable” portions, accounting for over seven-eighths or 87.5% of the total budget, consists of mandated outlays for Social Security benefits and Medicare, interest payments on the national debt, and military spending. That last category of spending, while not mandated, in fact rarely has gotten cut but instead typically gets raised by Congress — especially by Republicans backed by Democrats afraid to be accused of being “soft on defense” or of “not supporting our troops.” That makes significantly reducing the overall federal budget almost impossible since most of the non-military part of it goes for things that most of the public in both parties actually wants fully funded, like educational funding, police funding, infrastructure funding, national parks, and environmental protection, health and human services like food stamp and rental assistance for low-income families, etc.

    Now for some numbers.

    The FY 2024 budget proposed by the White House is for a record $6.9 trillion in federal spending. $1.8 trillion of that spending to be funded by new borrowing by the federal government because government revenues over the period are estimated to only be $5.1 trillion.

    Of that total proposed spending, $4.2 trillion would be for mandated spending much of which is funded by payroll taxes levied on workers and their employers to pay for Social Security and Medicare. Interest on the debt, which is costing the federal government $261 billion this year but will be significantly higher in 2024 next year because of significantly higher interest rates. (For those who wonder why only the interest payments are counted, not the repayment of principal, that’s because the government doesn’t repay its mounting debt but just rolls it over using new borrowing — in this case at a higher borrowing rate.)

    ` That brings us to the so-called “discretionary” portion of the federal budget — the part that has to be approved each year by Congress, and each budget line of which at least in theory can be raised or cut by a majority vote, either approved by the president, air vetoed in its entirety (no line-item vetoes allowed) or if vetoed, passed by a two-thirds majority over-ride vote of both houses.

    The total so-called “discretionary “ total in Biden’a proposed 2024 budget is $1.7 trillion. Of that, a staggering $888 billion is for the military. That, for the record, is the first time since World War II (when the US was fully mobilized for a few years funding its role in a global hot war), that the Pentagon’s share of “discretionary” spending — 52% — has exceeded the budget for all other discretionary budget lines combined.

    And actually, broadly speaking, the US is spending a lot more on its military and its militarist foreign policy. Included in the real total but currently falsely classified as “other discretionary spending,” are the CIA, NSA, Veterans Affairs, and parts of the State Department as well as other agencies like the Department of Homeland Security and the FBI. And to make matters worse, of all the items in the federal budget, the military portion is the only one that in recent years has been raised beyond what the Pentagon and White House have requested. Last year, for example, Republicans with some Democratic support, pushed successfully for an extra $45 billion to the. Pentagon, much of it for weapons systems the Pentagon no longer wanted. This year, Republicans who control the House are talking about pushing for an across-the-board 8% increase in the Pentagon budget instead of the 3.2% increase proposed Biden. That would push the US military spending well over the $1 trillion mark meaning it would dwarf spending on the needs of Americans for better roads and bridges, education funding for schools in low-income states and communities, Action on climate change and the damage caused by it, a Postal System that actually works like it used to, more funding for medical research, food and housing assistance for the nation’s unconscionably huge population living on the edge.

    The reason the House and Senate Armed Services Committees opt for an across-the-board increase instead of focused identifying specific lines in the Pentagon budget that they think need to be raised is that nobody knows what the Pentagon spends because its budget is so deliberately obscure and indecipherable it has not been audited successfully in decades. Aa I wrote in a Nation cover story in 2019, it is the only federal government agency operating without an annual audit, making every budget submitted to Congress each year with its accompanying financial statement on the prior year’s spending gigantic frauds.

    How big is the US military and the military budget? Well, with 1.3 million active-duty troops in the US (171,000 or 12% of them based overseas), and over two million reservists and National Guard troops, this country has one of the largest and best-equipped military forces in the world. That massive force doesn’t have a great record at defeating vastly smaller and dramatically less well-equipped fighting forces, whether in Korea in the early ‘50s, Vietnam in the ‘60s and early ‘70s, Iraq in the ‘90s and Afghanistan’s Taliban in this new century. Meanwhile, the country doesn’t seem to be any more secure for all that spending, given that we’re now being told military spending has to be boosted because of supposed threats from China, Russia, and Iran among others. For decades, the Pentagon and its cheerleaders in Congress and the media have always called for more funding anyhow, in times of war and times of peace, warning always about new and greater “threats.”

    The truth is that US military spending is greater today and has been for some time, than the spending of all other nations in the world combined, and the US is not facing any existential threat requiring such a huge military.

    Consider all the issues facing the American people today: We have rising seas and ever more powerful climate disasters from record hurricanes striking in much longer hurricane seasons; epic storms on the west coast; tornados where they have never appeared in historical memory (like one two years ago that our town in southeastern Philadelphia which we’re still recovering from two years later), record inland flooding, schools that are falling apart and overcrowded, public colleges so starved for funds that they are charging what private colleges used to charge, a population where one-in-ten live in poverty according to the last census; roads, highways and bridges that are worse than in any so-called “developed” country I have lived in or traveled to, and a health care system where over 8 percent of the population has no health insurance or access to a doctor, and an average life expectancy that has dropped by 2.7 years over the last two years to 76.1 (the first time since 1920-21 that the country has seen such a back-to-back annual decline).

    And people think the country needs more spending on war and preparing for war?

    Personal income taxes collected by the IRS in 2021, the last year for which data is currently available, came to $1.7 trillion. In other words, all of our tax payments were just enough to fund the entire “discretionary” budget of the federal government. That means that 52 cents of every tax dollar each of us paid to the IRS went straight to the US military and national “defense” establishment. Think about that next time you fill out that 1040 form and get to the line telling what you owe or already had deducted from your paychecks.

    But here’s the worst part. Congress, which has committees that look with a fine-tooth comb at how taxpayer money is spent by the EPA, OSHA, the FDA, and FTC, the Education Department, the Labor Department, Health and Welfare, Medicare, Medicaid, NOAA, etc., (all of which agencies and departments have to submit full audits of their expenditures before getting their next year’s appropriations), has no idea, and for decades has had no idea how the Pentagon has spent already allocated funds, and thus no idea why it needs what it is asking for!

    Here’s a quote from an article published by the quasi-governmental Center for Strategic & International Studies (CSIS), hardly a critic of US militarism and empire. In a paper titled: “America’s Military Spending and the Uncertain Costs of its Wars: The Need for Transparent Reporting,” Anthony Cordesman, a veteran of the Defense Department, National Security Council, and former advisor to the late Sen. John McCain (R-AZ_ wrote in 2019:

    “The United States has now been continuously at war for more than seventeen years. It is still fighting an active war in Afghanistan, has yet to fully defeat ISIS in Syria and Iraq – much less establish a state of lasting security in either country – and is playing a role in low-level conflicts against extremists and terrorists in many other parts of the world.

    “The U.S. government, however, has never developed a convincing method of reporting on the cost of the wars, and its estimates are a confusing morass of different and conflicting Departmental, Agency, and other government reporting that leave major gaps in key areas during FY2001-FY2019.

    “It has never provided useful forecasts of future cost, instead providing empty “placeholder” numbers or none. It has failed to find any useful way to tie the cost estimates it does release to its level of military and civil activity in each conflict or found any way to measure the effectiveness of its expenditures or tie them to a credible strategy to achieve some form of victory.

    “The result is a national embarrassment and a fundamental failure by the Executive Branch and Congress to produce the transparency and public debate and review that are key elements of a responsible government and democracy.”

    He concludes his article by writing:

    “In short, these costs needs to be fully audited and assessed, and the inclusion of such costs in estimating war costs should be a critical and important subject of public and Congressional debate.”

    Funding for war is the hugest single part of the Federal budget financed from general tax revenues that has been allowed to escape any government oversight and any serious media, much less public scrutiny. That the American public has allowed this to happen without any significant public protest speaks to the lack of any true democracy in the United States and to the failure of the public to act as citizens in a democracy.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Dave Lindorff.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/14/bidens-2024-funding-proposal-is-a-war-budget-and-he-is-leading-us-to-war/feed/ 0 379239
    Biden Tax Boost Targeting the Rich Called ‘Fair, Popular, and Long Overdue’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/11/biden-tax-boost-targeting-the-rich-called-fair-popular-and-long-overdue/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/11/biden-tax-boost-targeting-the-rich-called-fair-popular-and-long-overdue/#respond Sat, 11 Mar 2023 00:56:13 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/biden-budget-tax-rich-corporations

    While far-right Republicans continue threatening to blow up the global economy unless Congress makes cuts to popular social programs, progressive taxation experts are celebrating U.S. President Joe Biden's latest push to invest in "widespread prosperity" by raising taxes on wealthy individuals and corporations.

    As part of his fiscal year 2024 budget blueprint unveiled Thursday, Biden calls for a 25% minimum tax on the wealthiest 0.01%; reforms to ensure high-income individuals pay their fair share into the Medicare Hospital Insurance trust fund; and repealing 2017 tax cuts and restoring the top tax rate of 39.6% for people making over $400,000 a year.

    Along with pushing for raising the corporate tax rate from 21% to 28%—which is still far below the 35% rate that was in place prior to Republicans' 2017 tax overhaul—the president advocates expanding the child tax credit while eliminating tax subsidies for cryptocurrency transactions, fossil fuel companies, and real estate.

    Biden also "proposes to reform the international tax system to reduce the incentives to book profits in low-tax jurisdictions, stop corporate inversions to tax havens, and raise the tax rate on U.S. multinationals' foreign earnings from 10.5% to 21%," according to a White House fact sheet.

    Although many of these proposals are unlikely to go anywhere due to the GOP-controlled U.S. House and divided Senate, Groundwork Collaborative executive director Lindsay Owens said Friday that "it's great to see President Biden leading the charge to increase taxes on billionaires, crack down on stock buybacks by massive corporations, and prevent the wealthiest Americans from cheating on their taxes and avoiding paying what they owe."

    "The tax policies laid out in this budget are fair, popular, and long overdue," she declared. "The next time someone claims that we can't afford to protect Social Security and Medicare for future generations—or that we need to cut popular investments in education, healthcare, housing, or clean energy—show them President Bident's latest budget proposal and ask them why they care so much about protecting the ultrawealthy from paying their fair share."

    According to Institute on Taxation and Economic Policy executive director Amy Hanauer, "President Biden's budget proposal presents a bold vision for what tax justice should look like in America."

    "The provisions would raise substantial revenue, fund important priorities, and increase tax fairness," she stressed. "The revenue raisers are laser-focused on taxing very wealthy individuals and corporations, and the budget would reduce the deficit while easing costs for American families, particularly for middle and low-income parents."

    Americans for Tax Fairness executive director Frank Clemente asserted Thursday that "President Biden's budget plainly shows whose side he's on: working families struggling with the high cost of healthcare, childcare, housing and more—not the wealthy elite and their big corporations rolling in dough and dodging their fair share of taxes."

    "Republicans have already made clear they're on the side of the 1 Percenters and big corporations by trying to shield rich tax cheats and endangering Social Security and Medicare with deficit-busting tax cuts for the wealthy and corporations," Clemente added. "The contrast couldn't be sharper."

    As Common Dreams reported earlier Friday, the House Freedom Caucus said its 45 members would "consider voting" to raise the U.S. debt limit if their colleagues in Congress abandon some of Biden's key economic priorities, slash hundreds of billions of dollars in social spending, and restrict federal agencies' future budgets.

    Responding on Twitter, Biden said that "extreme MAGA House Republicans are showing us what they value: tax breaks for the rich."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jessica Corbett.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/11/biden-tax-boost-targeting-the-rich-called-fair-popular-and-long-overdue/feed/ 0 378734
    Insanity Continues as Pentagon Spending Moves Ever Closer to $1 Trillion https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/insanity-continues-as-pentagon-spending-moves-ever-closer-to-1-trillion/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/insanity-continues-as-pentagon-spending-moves-ever-closer-to-1-trillion/#respond Fri, 10 Mar 2023 15:10:21 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/1-trillion-pentagon-budget

    The Pentagon released its budget request for Fiscal Year 2024 Thursday. The figure for the Pentagon alone is a hefty $842 billion. That’s $69 billion more than the $773 billion the department requested for Fiscal Year 2023.

    Total spending on national defense — including work on nuclear weapons at the Department of Energy — comes in at $886 billion. Adding in likely emergency military aid packages for Ukraine later this year plus the potential tens of billions of dollars in Congressional add-ons could push total spending for national defense to as much as $950 billion or more for FY 2024. The result could be the highest military budget since World War II, far higher than at the peaks of the Korean or Vietnam Wars or the height of the Cold War.

    The proposed budget is far more than is needed to provide an effective defense of the United States and its allies.

    If past experience is any guide, more than half of the new Pentagon budget will go to contractors, with the biggest share going to the top five — Lockheed Martin, Boeing, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and Northrop Grumman — to build everything from howitzers and tanks to intercontinental ballistic missiles. Much of the funding for contractors will come from spending on buying, researching, and developing weapons, which accounts for $315 billion of the new budget request.

    As suggested above, Congress will probably add a substantial amount to the Pentagon’s request, largely for systems and facilities located in the states and districts of key members. That’s no way to craft a budget — or defend a country. When it comes to defense, Congress should engage in careful oversight, not special interest politics.

    Unfortunately, in recent years the House and Senate have accelerated the practice of jacking up the Pentagon’s budget request, adding $25 billion in FY 2022 and $45 billion in FY 2023. Given threat inflation with respect to China and the ongoing war in Ukraine, there is a danger that the $45 billion added for FY2023 could be the floor for what might be added by Congress in the course of this year’s budget debate.

    Exceptions to the rush to throw more money at the Pentagon may come from opposite ends of the political spectrum. Representatives Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.) have introduced the “People Over Pentagon Act,” which calls for a $100 billion annual cut in the DoD budget. A group of conservative lawmakers centered around the Freedom Caucus have called for a freeze on the discretionary budget at FY2022 levels. But different members have given different views on how Pentagon spending would fit into a budget freeze, from assertions that it will be “on the table” to a denial by one at least one member, Rep. Chip Roy (R-Texas), that Pentagon cuts should come into play at all.

    It has been reported that President Dwight D. Eisenhower believed that we should spend all we need for national defense and not one penny more. But the new motto of the Pentagon and the Congress appears to be “spend now and ask questions later.” Rather than matching funding to a viable national security strategy, the Pentagon and the Congress are pushing for whatever the political market will bear. The notion that tradeoffs need to be made against other urgent national priorities is a foreign concept to most members of the House and Senate, as they have routinely raised the Pentagon budget at the expense of other urgent national needs.

    There is more than money at stake. An open-ended strategy that seeks to develop capabilities to win a war with Russia or China, fight regional wars against Iran or North Korea, and sustain a global war on terror that includes operations in at least 85 countries is a recipe for endless conflict.

    We can make America and its allies safer for far less money if we adopt a more realistic, restrained strategy and drive a harder bargain with weapons contractors that too often engage in price gouging and cost overruns while delivering dysfunctional systems that aren’t appropriate for addressing the biggest threats to our security.

    The Congressional Budget Office has crafted three illustrative options that could ensure our security while spending $1 trillion less over the next decade. A strategy that incorporates aspects of these plans and streamlines the Pentagon budget in other areas could be sustained at roughly $150 billion per year less than current levels.

    A new approach would take a more objective, evidence-based view of the military challenges posed by Russia and China, rely more on allies to provide security in their own regions, reduce the U.S. global military footprint, and scale back the Pentagon’s $2 trillion plan to build a new generation of nuclear weapons. Cutting wasteful spending practices and slowing or replacing spending on unworkable or outmoded systems like the F-35 and a new $13 billion aircraft carrier could save billions more. And reducing spending on the half a million-plus private contractors employed by the Pentagon could save hundreds of billions over the next decade.

    The Pentagon doesn’t need more spending. It needs more spending discipline, tied to a realistic strategy that sets clear priorities and acknowledges that some of the greatest risks we face are not military in nature. Thursday’s announcement is just the opening gambit in this year’s debate over the Pentagon budget. Hopefully critics of runaway spending will have more traction this year than has been the case for the past several years. If not, $1 trillion in annual military spending may be just around the corner, at great cost to taxpayers and to the safety and security of the country as a whole.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by William Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/insanity-continues-as-pentagon-spending-moves-ever-closer-to-1-trillion/feed/ 0 378871
    Rep. Barbara Lee on Cutting the Military Budget, Abortion Rights & Why She’s Running for Senate https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/rep-barbara-lee-on-cutting-the-military-budget-abortion-rights-why-shes-running-for-senate-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/rep-barbara-lee-on-cutting-the-military-budget-abortion-rights-why-shes-running-for-senate-2/#respond Fri, 10 Mar 2023 15:05:38 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=53562f6683775594f5f696b9bbf794fb
    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/rep-barbara-lee-on-cutting-the-military-budget-abortion-rights-why-shes-running-for-senate-2/feed/ 0 378576
    Rep. Barbara Lee on Cutting the Military Budget, Abortion Rights & Why She’s Running for Senate https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/rep-barbara-lee-on-cutting-the-military-budget-abortion-rights-why-shes-running-for-senate/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/rep-barbara-lee-on-cutting-the-military-budget-abortion-rights-why-shes-running-for-senate/#respond Fri, 10 Mar 2023 13:31:31 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=10c9ac05bc78ec8636197bed356ed337 Seg2 lee

    As President Biden proposes his new budget, which expands military spending, as well as social services, we speak with Democratic Congressmember Barbara Lee, co-chair of the Defense Spending Reduction Caucus. She recently reintroduced the People Over Pentagon Act to cut $100 billion from the Pentagon budget and reallocate funds to overlooked priorities like healthcare and education. Lee is one of three House Democrats who have announced their candidacy for outgoing California Senator Dianne Feinstein’s seat. Lee is the highest-ranking Black woman appointed to House leadership and would be just the third Black woman to serve in the Senate’s 233-year history. She shares her platform on foreign policy, reproductive rights and racial justice on Democracy Now! “We’re going to fight to make sure that the resources of our country go directly to the American people, because it’s a budget for the American people,” says Lee.


    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/rep-barbara-lee-on-cutting-the-military-budget-abortion-rights-why-shes-running-for-senate/feed/ 0 378527
    Progressives Say Military Budget Should Be Cut as Biden Floats $30 Billion Increase https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/progressives-say-military-budget-should-be-cut-as-biden-floats-30-billion-increase/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/progressives-say-military-budget-should-be-cut-as-biden-floats-30-billion-increase/#respond Fri, 10 Mar 2023 12:06:42 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/progressives-military-budget-cut

    Progressive lawmakers on Thursday voiced dismay that President Joe Biden is requesting a nearly $30 billion increase in U.S. military spending just months after the Pentagon failed its fifth consecutive audit, admitting it could not properly account for more than half of its trillions of dollars in assets.

    Biden's budget framework for fiscal year 2024 calls for $886 billion in overall military spending—up from the current level of $858 billion—with $842 billion going to the Pentagon. More than half of the $1.7 trillion of discretionary spending in Biden's proposal is reserved for the military, which would get $170 billion for weapons procurement and $38 billion for nuke modernization.

    Defense Newsreported that the president's budget would boost spending on "new drones, combat jets, hypersonic missiles, and submarines."

    Rep. Pramila Jayapal (D-Wash.), chair of the Congressional Progressive Caucus, said in a statement late Thursday that the president's Pentagon blueprint requests "$26 billion more than Congress allocated in the previous budget—which itself was $63 billion more than the $773 billion the President requested for FY2023."

    "This is a never-ending cycle of increased funds without accountability," said Jayapal. "There is simply no reason for taxpayers to continue to pay for outrageously high budgets rife with waste, fraud, and abuse. A recent CBO study confirmed that the Pentagon could cut $100 billion per year without compromising on national defense. This is long overdue. Progressives in Congress have been at the frontline of this fight for decades, and we will continue to push for sensible, targeted defense policy that prioritizes our national security over profit-hungry military contractors."

    Given that roughly half of the Pentagon's annual budget has historically gone to military contractors such as Lockheed Martin and Raytheon, the National Priorities Project (NPP) noted Thursday that around 25% of Biden's total discretionary budget would likely wind up in the coffers of private companies.

    "This military budget represents a shameful status quo that the country can no longer afford," said Lindsay Koshgarian, NPP's program director. "Families are struggling to afford basics like housing, food, and medicine, and our last pandemic-era protections are ending, all while Pentagon contractors pay their CEOs millions straight from the public treasury."

    Led by Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.), progressive lawmakers have been working for years to enact modest cuts to the Pentagon budget and redirect the savings toward healthcare, education, and other social investments.

    But those efforts have repeatedly fallen short in the face of bipartisan opposition.

    In 2022, Lee's proposal to cut $100 billion off the military budget's top line was defeated by an overwhelming vote of 78-350, with 141 House Democrats joining nearly every Republican in voting no. (NPP points out that $100 billion would be enough to send every U.S. household a $700 check or hire a million elementary school teachers.)

    In a statement Thursday, Lee said she is "disappointed" that the president's new budget "continues the regressive trend of increasing our bloated, wasteful defense budget year after year with little oversight." Last month, Lee and Pocan reintroduced legislation that would reduce the U.S. military budget by $100 billion.

    Top Republicans, meanwhile, signaled Thursday that they will try to pile more money on top of Biden's historically large military budget request as they simultaneously pursue cuts to Medicaid and food benefits.

    Rep. Mike Rogers (R-Ala.), chair of the House Armed Services Committee, lamented that Biden's budget "proposes to increase non-defense spending at more than twice the rate of defense."

    "The president’s incredibly misplaced priorities send all the wrong messages to our adversaries," said Rogers. "On the House Armed Services Committee, we are focused on building an NDAA that provides our warfighters with the capability and lethality to deter and, if necessary, defeat the grave threats facing our nation."

    Sen. Roger Wicker (R-Miss.) sent a similar message, calling Biden's military budget request "woefully inadequate" and a "serious indication of President Biden's failure to prioritize national security."

    But analysts argue that ballooning military spending does little to bolster U.S. national security. As William Hartung of the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft wrote Thursday, "We can make America and its allies safer for far less money if we adopt a more realistic, restrained strategy and drive a harder bargain with weapons contractors that too often engage in price gouging and cost overruns while delivering dysfunctional systems that aren’t appropriate for addressing the biggest threats to our security."

    "The Congressional Budget Office has crafted three illustrative options that could ensure our security while spending $1 trillion less over the next decade," Hartung noted. "A strategy that incorporates aspects of these plans and streamlines the Pentagon budget in other areas could be sustained at roughly $150 billion per year less than current levels."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/progressives-say-military-budget-should-be-cut-as-biden-floats-30-billion-increase/feed/ 0 378457
    Progressives Praise Biden Budget for Investments in ‘Widespread Prosperity and Economic Growth’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/progressives-praise-biden-budget-for-investments-in-widespread-prosperity-and-economic-growth/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/progressives-praise-biden-budget-for-investments-in-widespread-prosperity-and-economic-growth/#respond Fri, 10 Mar 2023 00:49:26 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/joe-biden-fiscal-year-2024-budget

    While blasting the White House's proposed $886 billion in military spending as "madness," progressives on Thursday also praised portions of U.S. President Joe Biden's fiscal year 2024 budget for sizable social investments that could lead to "broader opportunity, greater economic and health security, lower levels of hardship, and a nation where everyone can thrive."

    "No one in the White House seriously believes that Congress will adopt it in its current form," Politiconoted of Biden's blueprint. "It's a messaging exercise. And as such, the White House sees no downside whatsoever to throwing out things that will never pass the Republican-controlled House. The fight is the point."

    Still, the scope of the budget—which includes significant funding for the climate, childcare, democracy, education, healthcare, housing, violence prevention, and more, made possible in part through tax hikes for wealthy individuals and corporations—was celebrated by the likes of Sharon Parrott, president of the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP).

    "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running."

    "President Biden's 2024 budget invests in people and communities and creates a 21st century tax system that supports these investments to build toward an economy that works for everyone," Parrott said. "It lays out an agenda that would move us closer to a nation where everyone—regardless of their background, identities, or where they live—has the resources they need to thrive and share in the nation's prosperity."

    Erica Payne, the founder and pesident of the Patriotic Millionaires, declared that "President Biden's proposed budget is the most ambitious tax plan we've seen from a president in decades—and a clear emphasis of the values that he and the Democrats stand for: investing in our country, fighting off corporate profiteering, protecting the social safety net, and doing so all while reducing our nation's budget deficit."

    "The wealthiest Americans and corporations can easily afford to pay more—and hundreds of patriotic millionaires and billionaires are ready and eager to do their part to make sure all Americans can thrive," Payne added. "Let's be clear: As President Biden's budget lays out—we can invest in America, expand the social safety net, fight income inequality, and do it all while lowering taxes for working people—if we simply require the wealthiest Americans to pay their fair share."

    The president's proposals to help American families include expanding the child tax credit from $2,000 per kid to $3,000 for those ages six and above, and to $3,600 for children under six; enabling states to increase childcare options for millions of kids; and funding a federal-state partnership that provides high-quality, universal, free preschool.

    The budget also calls for boosting prevention services to reduce the number of children entering foster care as well as changes to the adoption tax credit to better serve families with lower incomes and those who choose legal guardianship.

    Biden advocates for $59 billion in funding and tax incentives to increase the affordable housing supply; $10 billion to remove barriers to affordable housing developments; and $10 billion to address racial and ethnic homeownership and wealth gaps. The president proposes providing $4.1 billion for the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program—and allowing states to use some of that money to provide water bill assistance to poor households, since a related program expires at the end of 2023.

    Along with fighting for billions of dollars to ease hunger, the administration aims to pour money into high-poverty school districts as well as improve the affordability of higher education by increasing the discretionary maximum Pell Grant by $500, expanding free community college, and subsidizing tuition for students from families earning less than $125,000 enrolled historically Black, tribally controlled, or minority-serving institutions.

    "Time and again, President Joe Biden delivers on his promise to fight for American families, his commitment to fairness for all Americans, and his belief that everyone should have the freedom and opportunity to build a better life. This budget reflects those priorities and values by helping people continue to rebuild," said American Federation of Teachers President Randi Weingarten, who highlighted various proposed investments in education and major federal programs.

    In terms of healthcare, Biden pushes for putting billions of dollars into tackling cancer, increasing funds for veterans exposed to environmental hazards, and providing $471 million for reducing maternal mortality and morbidity rates, especially among Black, American Indian, and Alaska Native women. He also wants to expand coverage of mental health benefits and make historic investments in the behavioral health workforce.

    The president advocates for making healthcare premium cuts permanent and providing Medicaid-like coverage to individuals in states that have not expanded their programs under the Affordable Care Act. There are also provisions to cut prescription drug costs, improve Medicaid home and community-based services, and expand the National Health Service Corps as well as programs that train and support nurses.

    Biden would also extend the solvency of the Medicare trust fund by at least 25 years. In addition to investing in Social Security Administration staff, a White House fact sheet says that the Biden administration "looks forward to working with the Congress to responsibly strengthen Social Security by ensuring that high-income individuals pay their fair share."

    Max Richtman, president and CEO of the National Committee to Preserve Social Security and Medicare, said that "while the conservatives' approach is to 'cut, cut, cut!' earned benefits for future generations of retirees, President Biden's budget would fortify Medicare for the future by asking the wealthy to pay their fair share."

    "Instead of 'kicking the can down the road' as some previous administrations and Congresses have done, the president's budget confronts the trust fund shortfall head-on—without burdening beneficiaries," Richtman continued. "In a society with massive wealth inequality, the wealthy can afford to pay a little more. Future seniors cannot afford benefit cuts."

    While welcoming Biden's efforts to protect Medicare, Lisa Gilbert, executive vice president of Public Citizen, also suggested that "looking ahead, the administration should crack down on Medicare Advantage plans that profit by cherry-picking healthy seniors and restricting care for enrollees; expand dental, vision, and hearing benefits for Medicare enrollees; work with Congress to cap out-of-pocket expenses for seniors; and take a bolder stand against Big Pharma greed by expanding drug price negotiation to bring down the prices of more drugs sooner and cover all Americans, not just people on Medicare."

    On the climate front, the budget proposes spending $4.5 billion on clean energy, $16.5 billion on climate science and clean energy innovation, and over $24 billion on conservation and to help build communities' resilience to devastating storms, drought, extreme heat, floods, and wildfires. The administration also pushes for investing nearly $2 billion in environmental justice efforts.

    A coalition of over a dozen green groups stressed in a joint statement Thursday that "as our country deals with inflation, high energy prices, public health crises, biodiversity loss, and climate change, it is now more important than ever that Congress fully funds the agencies responsible for addressing these critical issues."

    Varshini Prakash, executive director of the youth-led Sunrise Movement, said that "President Biden's proposed budget—especially its investments in clean energy, jobs, and an end to oil and gas subsidies—is the kind of thing young people in this country want to see ahead of 2024."

    "But President Biden has the power to act on climate and issues important to our generation without having to go through a Republican House," she noted. "He can reject the Willow Project, which goes against his own agenda to stop the climate crisis, and can do everything in his executive authority, like declaring a climate emergency and invoking the Defense Production Act, to jump-start our transition to clean energy."

    Given the current conditions in Congress—with Republicans controlling the House and a Senate where the president's agenda is often thwarted by not only the GOP but also right-wing Democrats and a new Independent—Biden is certainly in for a battle.

    That's especially the case considering that, as CBPP's Parrott noted, "the president's budget priorities stand in stark contrast with the emerging House Republican agenda—an agenda that pushes more tax cuts for the wealthy and profitable corporations, and holds the economy hostage by demanding deep spending cuts in areas like K-12 schools, healthcare, medical research, college tuition help, and help buying groceries as the price for raising the debt limit."

    "Taken together, this emerging agenda would increase hardship and narrow access to opportunity; widen already large differences in outcomes by race, ethnicity, and geography; and hurt the country as a whole," Parrott warned of GOP lawmakers' priorities.

    ProsperUs coalition spokesperson Claire Guzdar argued that "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running. Lowering costs for families, strengthening Medicare and Social Security, and delivering investments in healthcare, housing, and climate are key to widespread prosperity and economic growth."

    "President Biden must now fight to enact this budget and continue to reject dangerous calls for austerity and cuts to programs that strengthen our communities and our economy," Guzdar added.

    A U.S. Senate Budget Committee hearing for the president's proposal is scheduled for the morning of March 15.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jessica Corbett.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/10/progressives-praise-biden-budget-for-investments-in-widespread-prosperity-and-economic-growth/feed/ 0 378346
    Biden Budget Would Help Lift Up Those With the Least by Asking a Little More From Those With the Most https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/biden-budget-would-help-lift-up-those-with-the-least-by-asking-a-little-more-from-those-with-the-most/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/biden-budget-would-help-lift-up-those-with-the-least-by-asking-a-little-more-from-those-with-the-most/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 21:55:32 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/joe-biden-budget

    President Biden’s 2024 budget invests in people and communities and creates a 21st century tax system that supports these investments to build toward an economy that works for everyone. It lays out an agenda that would move us closer to a nation where everyone — regardless of their background, identities, or where they live — has the resources they need to thrive and share in the nation’s prosperity.

    The budget makes important investments in a range of areas, including in children, supports for workers, housing affordability, education, and core government functions, among others, and finances these investments by raising taxes on high-income people and profitable corporations that have benefitted the most from the nation’s economy. The President’s budget would broaden opportunity, including among people and communities who have long been underinvested in, such as people with low incomes, people of color, Indigenous communities, and people in rural communities, among others.

    The President’s budget priorities stand in stark contrast with the emerging House Republican agenda — an agenda that pushes more tax cuts for the wealthy and profitable corporations, and holds the economy hostage by demanding deep spending cuts in areas like K-12 schools, health care, medical research, college tuition help, and help buying groceries as the price for raising the debt limit. Taken together, this emerging agenda would increase hardship and narrow access to opportunity; widen already large differences in outcomes by race, ethnicity, and geography; and hurt the country as a whole.

    As Congress and the Administration engage in the budget process this year, a central part of the debate will be deciding funding levels for defense, veterans’ medical care, and “non-defense discretionary” programs (outside of veterans’ health care) through annual appropriations. Non-defense discretionary programs fund a wide range of priorities including many that are central to strengthening the economy and promoting opportunity, as well as delivering basic government functions. The President’s budget makes sound investments here, showing an increase in overall funding for non-defense discretionary programs (outside of veterans’ health care) of about 7.3 percent as compared to 2023 funding levels, offsetting the effects of inflation and providing modest but meaningful resources for new investments in key areas. (The percent increase figures for program areas cited below do not take inflation into account.)

    For example, the budget invests in helping people afford rent and supporting people experiencing homelessness. It provides $2.4 billion in additional funding for Housing Choice Vouchers, which bridge the gap between what a household can afford and the cost of rent in their communities, and an $122 million increase for homelessness services and supports, with $6 million targeted to people living with HIV/AIDS who need housing assistance.

    The budget also increases discretionary child care funding by almost $1 billion (12 percent), building on a robust investment made in 2023, and boosts support for Head Start by $1.1 billion. Even with these increases, funding will remain well below what is needed to ensure that all families with low or moderate incomes have access to affordable and quality child care.

    The budget invests in education, boosting Pell Grant funding and raising the maximum award by $500, building on progress in raising the grant level over the last two years to help students with low and moderate incomes afford college. The budget also increases K-12 funding that supports schools, students with low incomes, and students with disabilities.

    The budget recognizes the importance of ensuring effective operation of basic government functions, increasing funding for the Social Security Administration by $1.4 billion or 10 percent, to begin addressing long wait times, short-staffed field offices, and long delays in disability benefit decisions, due to deep funding cuts since 2010.

    The budget proposes to increase base funding for the IRS by $1.8 billion or 15 percent over the 2023 level. The increase reflects a commitment to deliver an IRS that honest taxpayers and business owners deserve: one that provides taxpayer assistance, efficiently processes tax returns, and collects legally owed taxes from people who would try to cheat. The budget recognizes that this will require both sufficient annual appropriations for the agency’s ongoing base operations as well as the funding provided by the Inflation Reduction Act.

    These important proposals would move the nation forward, but most are modest in scope. The President’s budget recognizes that more significant investments in a number of areas are needed outside of appropriations to advance economic, health, and racial justice, and it lays out a more robust agenda that would support families and workers, address the affordable housing crisis, expand health coverage, and support older adults and people with disabilities. While political disagreements mean that most larger-scale advances can’t be achieved this year, putting them forward offers a clear vision of the policies necessary to create broadly shared prosperity.

    For example, the budget supports families by expanding the Child Tax Credit. It permanently extends the credit to the 19 million children — including nearly half of Black children, more than 1 in 3 Latino and American Indian and Alaska Native children, and 1 in 6 white and Asian children — who currently receive a partial credit or none at all because their families’ incomes are too low. And it permanently allows families to receive the credit on a monthly basis. The budget also temporarily increases the amount of the credit through 2025 (when policymakers must revisit tax policy because of the expiration of the individual tax cuts in the 2017 tax law). We know an expanded Child Tax Credit works. The American Rescue Plan’s temporary expanded Child Tax Credit provided the full credit for the first time to children in families with low incomes and to 17-year-olds and increased the credit amount overall, which helped drive down overall child poverty dramatically and narrowed the large differences in child poverty across racial and ethnic categories when these provisions were in effect in 2021.

    Other provisions in the President’s budget also help workers and families. The budget’s game-changing $600 billion in new investments in child care and pre-K would support children’s development, help families make ends meet, and boost the economy by helping more parents afford the care they need to work, while the proposal for a national paid family and medical leave program would help workers take time off to care for their families while staying connected to their jobs. And the budget would permanently expand the Earned Income Tax Credit for workers without minor children at home to supplement the wages of low-paid workers and help them make ends meet.

    The President’s budget makes some important advances in addressing the affordable housing crisis. In addition to the rental assistance funding for 2024 through regular appropriations, it includes $22 billion in additional funding over the next ten years for vouchers through the “mandatory” part of the budget: $9 billion to support the estimated 20,000 youth who age out of foster care each year and $13 billion to expand assistance to 450,000 veteran families with extremely low incomes, though more resources will be needed to reach all such families. While an important step forward, substantially more investment will ultimately be needed to help all of the 16 million households paying more than half of their income on rent or experiencing homelessness, housing instability, and overcrowding. But this is an important down payment and a recognition that resources outside of appropriations are necessary.

    The budget takes significant steps toward universal health coverage and would improve health equity. It would expand coverage to more than 2 million people — most of whom are Black or Latinx — who lack any path to coverage because they live in states that have refused to adopt the Affordable Care Act’s (ACA) Medicaid expansion. It also makes permanent expanded premium tax credits that make ACA marketplace coverage more affordable for millions of people and have resulted in higher coverage rates. The budget continues to lower prescription drug costs, saving money for consumers and for the federal government. And it increases funding for home- and community-based services through Medicaid, which are critical for helping older people and people with disabilities remain in the community and get the care they need.

    In addition, the budget protects Social Security and Medicare, which provide income and health coverage to tens of millions of older and disabled people. It also shores up Medicare financing by securing further prescription drug savings, closing a tax loophole that deprives the program of revenues, and modestly raising the Medicare tax rate on high-income households. But protecting these programs from harmful cuts is not enough to meet the needs of low-income older adults and people with disabilities, and additional targeted support is needed, such as improvements in income support through the Supplemental Security Income program.

    The budget calls for strengthening federal nutrition assistance programs as part of this year’s debate around the farm bill, which will reauthorize both SNAP, which helps millions of households buy groceries, along with farm and conservation programs. While some congressional Republicans have called for deep cuts in SNAP, the President’s budget calls for a farm bill that eliminates barriers to food assistance for vulnerable groups and moves the nation toward the goal of ensuring everyone has access to healthy, affordable food.

    The budget raises revenues to pay for its investments and reduce the deficit. The revenue proposals move the country away from the flawed trickle-down path of the 2017 tax law and toward a tax code that raises more needed revenues, reins in multinational corporations’ ability to shift their profits offshore to avoid taxes, is more progressive and equitable, and supports investments that make the economy work for everyone.

    The proposals address the long-standing problem that many of the wealthiest households who have gained the most from the nation’s economy pay very little in individual income taxes, and sometimes none at all. They push against high levels of inequality, help address longer-term fiscal challenges, and begin to restore the public’s faith that the government works on behalf of all people, not just the well-heeled. Altogether, the budget shows that its proposed policies would reduce deficits over the next decade by nearly $3 trillion.

    The revenue increases take revenues as a share of the economy back to late-1990s levels, when growth was strong. Evidence is sorely lacking that the benefits from recent rounds of corporate tax cuts have trickled down, while multinationals continue to shift substantial profits offshore. The recent, deep cut in the corporate tax rate needs to be revisited and the U.S. needs to align our international tax rules with the global minimum tax agreement, as the President’s budget proposes. Moreover, the budget addresses a fundamental flaw in our tax code that allows some of the wealthiest households in the country to pay little or nothing each year in individual income taxes — the main federal tax — by requiring very wealthy people to pay taxes on a primary source of their income, unrealized capital gains.

    The U.S. has high levels of hardship, with millions of households even before the pandemic unable to afford the basics. This level of hardship is a policy choice, not an economic inevitability.

    We saw during the pandemic that public policy can sharply reduce poverty and hardship, with poverty overall and among children reaching historically low levels in 2021; those efforts, however, have ended. Other wealthy nations make different policy choices and have different outcomes: lower poverty rates, universal health coverage, affordable child care, and better protections for workers. Taken together, these higher-investment policies often result in higher labor force participation rates than in the U.S.

    The President’s budget lays out a vision of 21st century investments paid for by a sound tax system that requires those who have benefitted the most from our economy to pay a more reasonable amount in taxes. That path is one that leads to broader opportunity, greater economic and health security, lower levels of hardship, and a nation where everyone can thrive.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Sharon Parrott.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/biden-budget-would-help-lift-up-those-with-the-least-by-asking-a-little-more-from-those-with-the-most/feed/ 0 378368
    Sunrise Responds to Biden’s Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/sunrise-responds-to-bidens-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/sunrise-responds-to-bidens-budget/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 21:35:39 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/sunrise-responds-to-biden-s-budget

    Still, the scope of the budget—which includes significant funding for the climate, childcare, democracy, education, healthcare, housing, violence prevention, and more, made possible in part through tax hikes for wealthy individuals and corporations—was celebrated by the likes of Sharon Parrott, president of the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP).

    "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running."

    "President Biden's 2024 budget invests in people and communities and creates a 21st century tax system that supports these investments to build toward an economy that works for everyone," Parrott said. "It lays out an agenda that would move us closer to a nation where everyone—regardless of their background, identities, or where they live—has the resources they need to thrive and share in the nation's prosperity."

    Erica Payne, the founder and pesident of the Patriotic Millionaires, declared that "President Biden's proposed budget is the most ambitious tax plan we've seen from a president in decades—and a clear emphasis of the values that he and the Democrats stand for: investing in our country, fighting off corporate profiteering, protecting the social safety net, and doing so all while reducing our nation's budget deficit."

    "The wealthiest Americans and corporations can easily afford to pay more—and hundreds of patriotic millionaires and billionaires are ready and eager to do their part to make sure all Americans can thrive," Payne added. "Let's be clear: As President Biden's budget lays out—we can invest in America, expand the social safety net, fight income inequality, and do it all while lowering taxes for working people—if we simply require the wealthiest Americans to pay their fair share."

    The president's proposals to help American families include expanding the child tax credit from $2,000 per kid to $3,000 for those ages six and above, and to $3,600 for children under six; enabling states to increase childcare options for millions of kids; and funding a federal-state partnership that provides high-quality, universal, free preschool.

    The budget also calls for boosting prevention services to reduce the number of children entering foster care as well as changes to the adoption tax credit to better serve families with lower incomes and those who choose legal guardianship.

    Biden advocates for $59 billion in funding and tax incentives to increase the affordable housing supply; $10 billion to remove barriers to affordable housing developments; and $10 billion to address racial and ethnic homeownership and wealth gaps. The president proposes providing $4.1 billion for the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program—and allowing states to use some of that money to provide water bill assistance to poor households, since a related program expires at the end of 2023.

    Along with fighting for billions of dollars to ease hunger, the administration aims to pour money into high-poverty school districts as well as improve the affordability of higher education by increasing the discretionary maximum Pell Grant by $500, expanding free community college, and subsidizing tuition for students from families earning less than $125,000 enrolled historically Black, tribally controlled, or minority-serving institutions.

    "Time and again, President Joe Biden delivers on his promise to fight for American families, his commitment to fairness for all Americans, and his belief that everyone should have the freedom and opportunity to build a better life. This budget reflects those priorities and values by helping people continue to rebuild," said American Federation of Teachers President Randi Weingarten, who highlighted various proposed investments in education and major federal programs.

    In terms of healthcare, Biden pushes for putting billions of dollars into tackling cancer, increasing funds for veterans exposed to environmental hazards, and providing $471 million for reducing maternal mortality and morbidity rates, especially among Black, American Indian, and Alaska Native women. He also wants to expand coverage of mental health benefits and make historic investments in the behavioral health workforce.

    The president advocates for making healthcare premium cuts permanent and providing Medicaid-like coverage to individuals in states that have not expanded their programs under the Affordable Care Act. There are also provisions to cut prescription drug costs, improve Medicaid home and community-based services, and expand the National Health Service Corps as well as programs that train and support nurses.

    Biden would also extend the solvency of the Medicare trust fund by at least 25 years. In addition to investing in Social Security Administration staff, a White House fact sheet says that the Biden administration "looks forward to working with the Congress to responsibly strengthen Social Security by ensuring that high-income individuals pay their fair share."

    Max Richtman, president and CEO of the National Committee to Preserve Social Security and Medicare, said that "while the conservatives' approach is to 'cut, cut, cut!' earned benefits for future generations of retirees, President Biden's budget would fortify Medicare for the future by asking the wealthy to pay their fair share."

    "Instead of 'kicking the can down the road' as some previous administrations and Congresses have done, the president's budget confronts the trust fund shortfall head-on—without burdening beneficiaries," Richtman continued. "In a society with massive wealth inequality, the wealthy can afford to pay a little more. Future seniors cannot afford benefit cuts."

    While welcoming Biden's efforts to protect Medicare, Lisa Gilbert, executive vice president of Public Citizen, also suggested that "looking ahead, the administration should crack down on Medicare Advantage plans that profit by cherry-picking healthy seniors and restricting care for enrollees; expand dental, vision, and hearing benefits for Medicare enrollees; work with Congress to cap out-of-pocket expenses for seniors; and take a bolder stand against Big Pharma greed by expanding drug price negotiation to bring down the prices of more drugs sooner and cover all Americans, not just people on Medicare."

    On the climate front, the budget proposes spending $4.5 billion on clean energy, $16.5 billion on climate science and clean energy innovation, and over $24 billion on conservation and to help build communities' resilience to devastating storms, drought, extreme heat, floods, and wildfires. The administration also pushes for investing nearly $2 billion in environmental justice efforts.

    A coalition of over a dozen green groups stressed in a joint statement Thursday that "as our country deals with inflation, high energy prices, public health crises, biodiversity loss, and climate change, it is now more important than ever that Congress fully funds the agencies responsible for addressing these critical issues."

    Varshini Prakash, executive director of the youth-led Sunrise Movement, said that "President Biden's proposed budget—especially its investments in clean energy, jobs, and an end to oil and gas subsidies—is the kind of thing young people in this country want to see ahead of 2024."

    "But President Biden has the power to act on climate and issues important to our generation without having to go through a Republican House," she noted. "He can reject the Willow Project, which goes against his own agenda to stop the climate crisis, and can do everything in his executive authority, like declaring a climate emergency and invoking the Defense Production Act, to jump-start our transition to clean energy."

    Given the current conditions in Congress—with Republicans controlling the House and a Senate where the president's agenda is often thwarted by not only the GOP but also right-wing Democrats and a new Independent—Biden is certainly in for a battle.

    That's especially the case considering that, as CBPP's Parrott noted, "the president's budget priorities stand in stark contrast with the emerging House Republican agenda—an agenda that pushes more tax cuts for the wealthy and profitable corporations, and holds the economy hostage by demanding deep spending cuts in areas like K-12 schools, healthcare, medical research, college tuition help, and help buying groceries as the price for raising the debt limit."

    "Taken together, this emerging agenda would increase hardship and narrow access to opportunity; widen already large differences in outcomes by race, ethnicity, and geography; and hurt the country as a whole," Parrott warned of GOP lawmakers' priorities.

    ProsperUs coalition spokesperson Claire Guzdar argued that "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running. Lowering costs for families, strengthening Medicare and Social Security, and delivering investments in healthcare, housing, and climate are key to widespread prosperity and economic growth."

    "President Biden must now fight to enact this budget and continue to reject dangerous calls for austerity and cuts to programs that strengthen our communities and our economy," Guzdar added.

    A U.S. Senate Budget Committee hearing for the president's proposal is scheduled for the morning of March 15.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/sunrise-responds-to-bidens-budget/feed/ 0 378370
    ‘Madness’: Biden Requests Record $886 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/madness-biden-requests-record-886-billion-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/madness-biden-requests-record-886-billion-military-budget/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 20:07:42 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/biden-record-military-budget

    President Joe Biden unveiled a budget blueprint Thursday that requests $886.4 billion in military spending for fiscal year 2024, pushing for a nearly $30 billion increase over current outlays as progressives demand cuts to the bloated and notoriously fraud-ridden Pentagon.

    The president's budget proposes $842 billion for the Pentagon alone, including nearly $38 billion for widely criticized efforts to "modernize" the United States' massive nuclear arsenal.

    Robert Weissman, the president of Public Citizen and a vocal critic of excessive military spending, said Thursday that Biden's request for an $886 billion budget is "madness."

    "That's a jump of $28 billion from the current year," Weissman noted. "The increase of $28 billion is more than twice the entire EPA budget."

    Weissman argued that funneling more money into the Pentagon's coffers "makes the U.S. weaker, not stronger."

    "It means we are weaker on healthcare, weaker on poverty, weaker on fairness and equity, weaker on climate, weaker on pandemics, weaker on diplomacy," he added.

    The president's military budget request is part of a sprawling $6.8 trillion framework that was largely praised by progressives for its proposed tax hikes on the rich and large corporations—revenue from which would be used to fund Biden's plan to bolster Medicare and increase spending on Medicaid, public housing, and childcare.

    But with austerity-obsessed Republicans in control of the House, much of the president's budget is dead on arrival.

    However, recent history shows Congress is almost certain to build on Biden's military spending request.

    Last year, lawmakers agreed on a bipartisan basis to add $45 billion to the president's topline proposal, bringing total military spending to $858 billion for fiscal year 2023.

    "The proposed Pentagon topline level makes no sense," Lisa Gilbert, Public Citizen's executive vice president, said of Biden's new budget request. "There is no excuse for our country's reckless overspending on the Pentagon, and the FY24 proposal continues this dangerous trajectory."

    "The Defense Department has never once passed an audit and is infamous for wasting funds with impunity," Gilbert continued. "The president's proposal would bring U.S. military spending to its highest level in history at an astronomical $886 billion. Continuing to throw this much money at weapons, war, and defense contractor profits is unacceptable."

    "It's telling that as families struggle and see support they had during the pandemic evaporate, the Pentagon, which has never passed an audit, continues to get a budget windfall."

    A fact sheet put out by the White House on Thursday states that the president's budget "prioritizes China as America's pacing challenge" and "supports investments to accelerate critical weapons and munitions production lines; develop capabilities like long-range strike, undersea, hypersonic, and autonomous systems; and increase resiliency of our space architectures."

    While the White House claimed Biden's military budget would help the world confront "pressing global challenges," Sara Haghdoosti of Win Without War countered that "more F-35s aren't going to solve climate change or make sure families can afford basic supplies like eggs."

    "It's telling that as families struggle and see support they had during the pandemic evaporate, the Pentagon, which has never passed an audit, continues to get a budget windfall," said Haghdoosti.

    In an analysis of the president's request, William Hartung of the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft noted that when accounting for "likely emergency military aid packages for Ukraine later this year plus the potential tens of billions of dollars in congressional add-ons," total U.S. military spending could balloon to around $950 billion for the fiscal year that begins on October 1.

    "The Pentagon doesn't need more spending. It needs more spending discipline, tied to a realistic strategy that sets clear priorities and acknowledges that some of the greatest risks we face are not military in nature," Hartung wrote. "Today's announcement is just the opening gambit in this year's debate over the Pentagon budget. Hopefully critics of runaway spending will have more traction this year than has been the case for the past several years."

    "If not," he added, "$1 trillion in annual military spending may be just around the corner, at great cost to taxpayers and to the safety and security of the country as a whole."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/madness-biden-requests-record-886-billion-military-budget/feed/ 0 378376
    President Biden’s 2024 Budget Moves Us Toward Nation Where Everyone Can Thrive https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/president-bidens-2024-budget-moves-us-toward-nation-where-everyone-can-thrive/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/president-bidens-2024-budget-moves-us-toward-nation-where-everyone-can-thrive/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 19:42:33 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/president-biden-s-2024-budget-moves-us-toward-nation-where-everyone-can-thrive

    President Biden’s 2024 budget invests in people and communities and creates a 21st century tax system that supports these investments to build toward an economy that works for everyone. It lays out an agenda that would move us closer to a nation where everyone — regardless of their background, identities, or where they live — has the resources they need to thrive and share in the nation’s prosperity.

    The President’s budget would broaden opportunity, including among people and communities who have long been underinvested in.

    The budget makes important investments in a range of areas, including in children, supports for workers, housing affordability, education, and core government functions, among others, and finances these investments by raising taxes on high-income people and profitable corporations that have benefitted the most from the nation’s economy. The President’s budget would broaden opportunity, including among people and communities who have long been underinvested in, such as people with low incomes, people of color, Indigenous communities, and people in rural communities, among others.

    The President’s budget priorities stand in stark contrast with the emerging House Republican agenda — an agenda that pushes more tax cuts for the wealthy and profitable corporations, and holds the economy hostage by demanding deep spending cuts in areas like K-12 schools, health care, medical research, college tuition help, and help buying groceries as the price for raising the debt limit. Taken together, this emerging agenda would increase hardship and narrow access to opportunity; widen already large differences in outcomes by race, ethnicity, and geography; and hurt the country as a whole.

    As Congress and the Administration engage in the budget process this year, a central part of the debate will be deciding funding levels for defense, veterans’ medical care, and “non-defense discretionary” programs (outside of veterans’ health care) through annual appropriations. Non-defense discretionary programs fund a wide range of priorities including many that are central to strengthening the economy and promoting opportunity, as well as delivering basic government functions. The President’s budget makes sound investments here, showing an increase in overall funding for non-defense discretionary programs (outside of veterans’ health care) of about 7.3 percent as compared to 2023 funding levels, offsetting the effects of inflation and providing modest but meaningful resources for new investments in key areas. (The percent increase figures for program areas cited below do not take inflation into account.)

    For example, the budget invests in helping people afford rent and supporting people experiencing homelessness. It provides $2.4 billion in additional funding for Housing Choice Vouchers, which bridge the gap between what a household can afford and the cost of rent in their communities, and an $122 million increase for homelessness services and supports, with $6 million targeted to people living with HIV/AIDS who need housing assistance.

    The budget also increases discretionary child care funding by almost $1 billion (12 percent), building on a robust investment made in 2023, and boosts support for Head Start by $1.1 billion. Even with these increases, funding will remain well below what is needed to ensure that all families with low or moderate incomes have access to affordable and quality child care.

    The budget invests in education, boosting Pell Grant funding and raising the maximum award by $500, building on progress in raising the grant level over the last two years to help students with low and moderate incomes afford college. The budget also increases K-12 funding that supports schools, students with low incomes, and students with disabilities.

    The budget recognizes the importance of ensuring effective operation of basic government functions, increasing funding for the Social Security Administration by $1.4 billion or 10 percent, to begin addressing long wait times, short-staffed field offices, and long delays in disability benefit decisions, due to deep funding cuts since 2010.

    The budget proposes to increase base funding for the IRS by $1.8 billion or 15 percent over the 2023 level. The increase reflects a commitment to deliver an IRS that honest taxpayers and business owners deserve: one that provides taxpayer assistance, efficiently processes tax returns, and collects legally owed taxes from people who would try to cheat. The budget recognizes that this will require both sufficient annual appropriations for the agency’s ongoing base operations as well as the funding provided by the Inflation Reduction Act.

    These important proposals would move the nation forward, but most are modest in scope. The President’s budget recognizes that more significant investments in a number of areas are needed outside of appropriations to advance economic, health, and racial justice, and it lays out a more robust agenda that would support families and workers, address the affordable housing crisis, expand health coverage, and support older adults and people with disabilities. While political disagreements mean that most larger-scale advances can’t be achieved this year, putting them forward offers a clear vision of the policies necessary to create broadly shared prosperity.

    For example, the budget supports families by expanding the Child Tax Credit. It permanently extends the credit to the 19 million children — including nearly half of Black children, more than 1 in 3 Latino and American Indian and Alaska Native children, and 1 in 6 white and Asian children — who currently receive a partial credit or none at all because their families’ incomes are too low. And it permanently allows families to receive the credit on a monthly basis. The budget also temporarily increases the amount of the credit through 2025 (when policymakers must revisit tax policy because of the expiration of the individual tax cuts in the 2017 tax law). We know an expanded Child Tax Credit works. The American Rescue Plan’s temporary expanded Child Tax Credit provided the full credit for the first time to children in families with low incomes and to 17-year-olds and increased the credit amount overall, which helped drive down overall child poverty dramatically and narrowed the large differences in child poverty across racial and ethnic categories when these provisions were in effect in 2021.

    Other provisions in the President’s budget also help workers and families. The budget’s game-changing $600 billion in new investments in child care and pre-K would support children’s development, help families make ends meet, and boost the economy by helping more parents afford the care they need to work, while the proposal for a national paid family and medical leave program would help workers take time off to care for their families while staying connected to their jobs. And the budget would permanently expand the Earned Income Tax Credit for workers without minor children at home to supplement the wages of low-paid workers and help them make ends meet.

    The President’s budget makes some important advances in addressing the affordable housing crisis. In addition to the rental assistance funding for 2024 through regular appropriations, it includes $22 billion in additional funding over the next ten years for vouchers through the “mandatory” part of the budget: $9 billion to support the estimated 20,000 youth who age out of foster care each year and $13 billion to expand assistance to 450,000 veteran families with extremely low incomes, though more resources will be needed to reach all such families. While an important step forward, substantially more investment will ultimately be needed to help all of the 16 million households paying more than half of their income on rent or experiencing homelessness, housing instability, and overcrowding. But this is an important down payment and a recognition that resources outside of appropriations are necessary.

    The budget takes significant steps toward universal health coverage and would improve health equity. It would expand coverage to more than 2 million people — most of whom are Black or Latinx — who lack any path to coverage because they live in states that have refused to adopt the Affordable Care Act’s (ACA) Medicaid expansion. It also makes permanent expanded premium tax credits that make ACA marketplace coverage more affordable for millions of people and have resulted in higher coverage rates. The budget continues to lower prescription drug costs, saving money for consumers and for the federal government. And it increases funding for home- and community-based services through Medicaid, which are critical for helping older people and people with disabilities remain in the community and get the care they need.

    In addition, the budget protects Social Security and Medicare, which provide income and health coverage to tens of millions of older and disabled people. It also shores up Medicare financing by securing further prescription drug savings, closing a tax loophole that deprives the program of revenues, and modestly raising the Medicare tax rate on high-income households. But protecting these programs from harmful cuts is not enough to meet the needs of low-income older adults and people with disabilities, and additional targeted support is needed, such as improvements in income support through the Supplemental Security Income program.

    The budget calls for strengthening federal nutrition assistance programs as part of this year’s debate around the farm bill, which will reauthorize both SNAP, which helps millions of households buy groceries, along with farm and conservation programs. While some congressional Republicans have called for deep cuts in SNAP, the President’s budget calls for a farm bill that eliminates barriers to food assistance for vulnerable groups and moves the nation toward the goal of ensuring everyone has access to healthy, affordable food.

    The budget raises revenues to pay for its investments and reduce the deficit. The revenue proposals move the country away from the flawed trickle-down path of the 2017 tax law and toward a tax code that raises more needed revenues, reins in multinational corporations’ ability to shift their profits offshore to avoid taxes, is more progressive and equitable, and supports investments that make the economy work for everyone.

    The proposals address the long-standing problem that many of the wealthiest households who have gained the most from the nation’s economy pay very little in individual income taxes, and sometimes none at all. They push against high levels of inequality, help address longer-term fiscal challenges, and begin to restore the public’s faith that the government works on behalf of all people, not just the well-heeled. Altogether, the budget shows that its proposed policies would reduce deficits over the next decade by nearly $3 trillion.

    The revenue increases take revenues as a share of the economy back to late-1990s levels, when growth was strong. Evidence is sorely lacking that the benefits from recent rounds of corporate tax cuts have trickled down, while multinationals continue to shift substantial profits offshore. The recent, deep cut in the corporate tax rate needs to be revisited and the U.S. needs to align our international tax rules with the global minimum tax agreement, as the President’s budget proposes. Moreover, the budget addresses a fundamental flaw in our tax code that allows some of the wealthiest households in the country to pay little or nothing each year in individual income taxes — the main federal tax — by requiring very wealthy people to pay taxes on a primary source of their income, unrealized capital gains.

    The U.S. has high levels of hardship, with millions of households even before the pandemic unable to afford the basics. This level of hardship is a policy choice, not an economic inevitability.

    We saw during the pandemic that public policy can sharply reduce poverty and hardship, with poverty overall and among children reaching historically low levels in 2021; those efforts, however, have ended. Other wealthy nations make different policy choices and have different outcomes: lower poverty rates, universal health coverage, affordable child care, and better protections for workers. Taken together, these higher-investment policies often result in higher labor force participation rates than in the U.S.

    The President’s budget lays out a vision of 21st century investments paid for by a sound tax system that requires those who have benefitted the most from our economy to pay a more reasonable amount in taxes. That path is one that leads to broader opportunity, greater economic and health security, lower levels of hardship, and a nation where everyone can thrive.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/president-bidens-2024-budget-moves-us-toward-nation-where-everyone-can-thrive/feed/ 0 378276
    Broad Coalition of Climate & Environmental Groups Respond to President Biden’s FY24 Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/broad-coalition-of-climate-environmental-groups-respond-to-president-bidens-fy24-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/broad-coalition-of-climate-environmental-groups-respond-to-president-bidens-fy24-budget/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 19:32:21 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/broad-coalition-of-climate-environmental-groups-respond-to-president-bidens-fy24-budget

    For the peer-reviewed study, published Wednesday in the journal PLOS ONE, researchers based in the United States, Sweden, Chile, and Australia examined previously published and new data on floating plastic pollution between 1979-2019 from 11,777 stations across the North Atlantic, South Atlantic, North Pacific, South Pacific, Indian, and Mediterranean regions.

    "Without substantial widespread policy changes, the rate at which plastics enter aquatic environments will increase approximately 2.6-fold from 2016 to 2040."

    "The situation is much worse than expected," explained co-author Patricia Villarrubia-Gómez, a researcher at the Stockholm Resilience Center in Sweden. "In 2014, it was estimated that there were 5 trillion plastic particles in the ocean. Now, less than 10 years later, we're up at 170 trillion."

    Specifically, they estimate the world's oceans contain a "growing plastic smog" of approximately 82-358 trillion particles, or an average of 171 trillion particles that are primarily microplastics. As The Washington Postnoted, that "is more than 21,000 pieces of plastic for each of the Earth's 8 billion residents."

    The study states that "we observed no clear detectable trend until 1990, a fluctuating but stagnant trend from then until 2005, and a rapid increase until the present. This observed acceleration of plastic densities in the world's oceans, also reported for beaches around the globe, demands urgent international policy interventions."

    "Without substantial widespread policy changes," the study warns, "the rate at which plastics enter aquatic environments will increase approximately 2.6-fold from 2016 to 2040."

    Eriksen argued that given the current conditions, humanity must "stop focusing on cleanup and recycling, and usher in an age of corporate responsibility for the entire life of the things they make."

    "Cleanup is futile if we continue to produce plastic at the current rate, and we have heard about recycling for too long while the plastic industry simultaneously rejects any commitments to buy recycled material or design for recyclability," the scientist said.

    The research comes amid efforts to create a United Nations treaty on plastic pollution by next year. After 175 nations agreed to craft such a pact during a March 2022 meeting in Kenya, Uruguay hosted the first round of negotiations late last year. A second session of talks in France is scheduled for May.

    According to Eriksen, "We need a strong, legally binding U.N. global treaty on plastic pollution that stops the problem at the source."

    In comments to The Guardian, study co-author Edward J. Carpenter, of the Estuary & Ocean Science Center at San Francisco State University, also called for governments across the globe to ambitiously tackle the crisis.

    "We know the ocean is a vital ecosystem and we have solutions to prevent plastic pollution. But plastic pollution continues to grow and has a toxic effect on marine life," he said. "There must be legislation to limit the production and sale of single-use plastics or marine life will be further degraded. Humans need healthy oceans for a livable planet."

    Judith Enck, a former U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regional administrator who is now president of the organzation Beyond Plastics, echoed the study authors' demand for dramatically cutting down on production.

    "The plastics and petrochemical industries are making it impossible to curb the amount of plastic contaminating our oceans," she said in an email to CNN. "New research is always helpful, but we don't need to wait for new research to take action—the problem is already painfully clear, in the plastic accumulating in our oceans, air, soil, food, and bodies."

    As Richard Thompson, a professor at the U.K.'s Plymouth University who was not involved in the study, toldBBC News: "We are all agreed there is too much plastic in the ocean. We urgently need to move to solutions-focused research."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/broad-coalition-of-climate-environmental-groups-respond-to-president-bidens-fy24-budget/feed/ 0 378278
    Public Citizen Statement on Biden’s FY24 Budget Proposal https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/public-citizen-statement-on-bidens-fy24-budget-proposal/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/public-citizen-statement-on-bidens-fy24-budget-proposal/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 19:26:32 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/public-citizen-statement-on-bidens-fy24-budget-proposal

    Still, the scope of the budget—which includes significant funding for the climate, childcare, democracy, education, healthcare, housing, violence prevention, and more, made possible in part through tax hikes for wealthy individuals and corporations—was celebrated by the likes of Sharon Parrott, president of the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP).

    "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running."

    "President Biden's 2024 budget invests in people and communities and creates a 21st century tax system that supports these investments to build toward an economy that works for everyone," Parrott said. "It lays out an agenda that would move us closer to a nation where everyone—regardless of their background, identities, or where they live—has the resources they need to thrive and share in the nation's prosperity."

    Erica Payne, the founder and pesident of the Patriotic Millionaires, declared that "President Biden's proposed budget is the most ambitious tax plan we've seen from a president in decades—and a clear emphasis of the values that he and the Democrats stand for: investing in our country, fighting off corporate profiteering, protecting the social safety net, and doing so all while reducing our nation's budget deficit."

    "The wealthiest Americans and corporations can easily afford to pay more—and hundreds of patriotic millionaires and billionaires are ready and eager to do their part to make sure all Americans can thrive," Payne added. "Let's be clear: As President Biden's budget lays out—we can invest in America, expand the social safety net, fight income inequality, and do it all while lowering taxes for working people—if we simply require the wealthiest Americans to pay their fair share."

    The president's proposals to help American families include expanding the child tax credit from $2,000 per kid to $3,000 for those ages six and above, and to $3,600 for children under six; enabling states to increase childcare options for millions of kids; and funding a federal-state partnership that provides high-quality, universal, free preschool.

    The budget also calls for boosting prevention services to reduce the number of children entering foster care as well as changes to the adoption tax credit to better serve families with lower incomes and those who choose legal guardianship.

    Biden advocates for $59 billion in funding and tax incentives to increase the affordable housing supply; $10 billion to remove barriers to affordable housing developments; and $10 billion to address racial and ethnic homeownership and wealth gaps. The president proposes providing $4.1 billion for the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program—and allowing states to use some of that money to provide water bill assistance to poor households, since a related program expires at the end of 2023.

    Along with fighting for billions of dollars to ease hunger, the administration aims to pour money into high-poverty school districts as well as improve the affordability of higher education by increasing the discretionary maximum Pell Grant by $500, expanding free community college, and subsidizing tuition for students from families earning less than $125,000 enrolled historically Black, tribally controlled, or minority-serving institutions.

    "Time and again, President Joe Biden delivers on his promise to fight for American families, his commitment to fairness for all Americans, and his belief that everyone should have the freedom and opportunity to build a better life. This budget reflects those priorities and values by helping people continue to rebuild," said American Federation of Teachers President Randi Weingarten, who highlighted various proposed investments in education and major federal programs.

    In terms of healthcare, Biden pushes for putting billions of dollars into tackling cancer, increasing funds for veterans exposed to environmental hazards, and providing $471 million for reducing maternal mortality and morbidity rates, especially among Black, American Indian, and Alaska Native women. He also wants to expand coverage of mental health benefits and make historic investments in the behavioral health workforce.

    The president advocates for making healthcare premium cuts permanent and providing Medicaid-like coverage to individuals in states that have not expanded their programs under the Affordable Care Act. There are also provisions to cut prescription drug costs, improve Medicaid home and community-based services, and expand the National Health Service Corps as well as programs that train and support nurses.

    Biden would also extend the solvency of the Medicare trust fund by at least 25 years. In addition to investing in Social Security Administration staff, a White House fact sheet says that the Biden administration "looks forward to working with the Congress to responsibly strengthen Social Security by ensuring that high-income individuals pay their fair share."

    Max Richtman, president and CEO of the National Committee to Preserve Social Security and Medicare, said that "while the conservatives' approach is to 'cut, cut, cut!' earned benefits for future generations of retirees, President Biden's budget would fortify Medicare for the future by asking the wealthy to pay their fair share."

    "Instead of 'kicking the can down the road' as some previous administrations and Congresses have done, the president's budget confronts the trust fund shortfall head-on—without burdening beneficiaries," Richtman continued. "In a society with massive wealth inequality, the wealthy can afford to pay a little more. Future seniors cannot afford benefit cuts."

    While welcoming Biden's efforts to protect Medicare, Lisa Gilbert, executive vice president of Public Citizen, also suggested that "looking ahead, the administration should crack down on Medicare Advantage plans that profit by cherry-picking healthy seniors and restricting care for enrollees; expand dental, vision, and hearing benefits for Medicare enrollees; work with Congress to cap out-of-pocket expenses for seniors; and take a bolder stand against Big Pharma greed by expanding drug price negotiation to bring down the prices of more drugs sooner and cover all Americans, not just people on Medicare."

    On the climate front, the budget proposes spending $4.5 billion on clean energy, $16.5 billion on climate science and clean energy innovation, and over $24 billion on conservation and to help build communities' resilience to devastating storms, drought, extreme heat, floods, and wildfires. The administration also pushes for investing nearly $2 billion in environmental justice efforts.

    A coalition of over a dozen green groups stressed in a joint statement Thursday that "as our country deals with inflation, high energy prices, public health crises, biodiversity loss, and climate change, it is now more important than ever that Congress fully funds the agencies responsible for addressing these critical issues."

    Varshini Prakash, executive director of the youth-led Sunrise Movement, said that "President Biden's proposed budget—especially its investments in clean energy, jobs, and an end to oil and gas subsidies—is the kind of thing young people in this country want to see ahead of 2024."

    "But President Biden has the power to act on climate and issues important to our generation without having to go through a Republican House," she noted. "He can reject the Willow Project, which goes against his own agenda to stop the climate crisis, and can do everything in his executive authority, like declaring a climate emergency and invoking the Defense Production Act, to jump-start our transition to clean energy."

    Given the current conditions in Congress—with Republicans controlling the House and a Senate where the president's agenda is often thwarted by not only the GOP but also right-wing Democrats and a new Independent—Biden is certainly in for a battle.

    That's especially the case considering that, as CBPP's Parrott noted, "the president's budget priorities stand in stark contrast with the emerging House Republican agenda—an agenda that pushes more tax cuts for the wealthy and profitable corporations, and holds the economy hostage by demanding deep spending cuts in areas like K-12 schools, healthcare, medical research, college tuition help, and help buying groceries as the price for raising the debt limit."

    "Taken together, this emerging agenda would increase hardship and narrow access to opportunity; widen already large differences in outcomes by race, ethnicity, and geography; and hurt the country as a whole," Parrott warned of GOP lawmakers' priorities.

    ProsperUs coalition spokesperson Claire Guzdar argued that "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running. Lowering costs for families, strengthening Medicare and Social Security, and delivering investments in healthcare, housing, and climate are key to widespread prosperity and economic growth."

    "President Biden must now fight to enact this budget and continue to reject dangerous calls for austerity and cuts to programs that strengthen our communities and our economy," Guzdar added.

    A U.S. Senate Budget Committee hearing for the president's proposal is scheduled for the morning of March 15.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/public-citizen-statement-on-bidens-fy24-budget-proposal/feed/ 0 378378
    President Biden announces budget plan that Republicans immediately reject; Norfolk Southern CEO apologizes for train derailment; Abortion providers nervously await Texas judge decision on abortion pill: The Pacifica Evening News March 9 2023 https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/president-biden-announces-budget-plan-that-republicans-immediately-reject-norfolk-southern-ceo-apologizes-for-train-derailment-abortion-providers-nervously-await-texas-judge-decision-on-abortion-pil/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/president-biden-announces-budget-plan-that-republicans-immediately-reject-norfolk-southern-ceo-apologizes-for-train-derailment-abortion-providers-nervously-await-texas-judge-decision-on-abortion-pil/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 18:00:41 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=737592f872d6e557ea7b2231c64baec5

     

     

    Image: James St. John, CC BY 2.0 , via Wikimedia Commons

    The post President Biden announces budget plan that Republicans immediately reject; Norfolk Southern CEO apologizes for train derailment; Abortion providers nervously await Texas judge decision on abortion pill: The Pacifica Evening News March 9 2023 appeared first on KPFA.


    This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/president-biden-announces-budget-plan-that-republicans-immediately-reject-norfolk-southern-ceo-apologizes-for-train-derailment-abortion-providers-nervously-await-texas-judge-decision-on-abortion-pil/feed/ 0 378363
    ProsperUS Commends President’s Budget, Pushes for More Public Investment https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/prosperus-commends-presidents-budget-pushes-for-more-public-investment/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/prosperus-commends-presidents-budget-pushes-for-more-public-investment/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 17:22:17 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/prosperus-commends-presidents-budget-pushes-for-more-public-investment

    Still, the scope of the budget—which includes significant funding for the climate, childcare, democracy, education, healthcare, housing, violence prevention, and more, made possible in part through tax hikes for wealthy individuals and corporations—was celebrated by the likes of Sharon Parrott, president of the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP).

    "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running."

    "President Biden's 2024 budget invests in people and communities and creates a 21st century tax system that supports these investments to build toward an economy that works for everyone," Parrott said. "It lays out an agenda that would move us closer to a nation where everyone—regardless of their background, identities, or where they live—has the resources they need to thrive and share in the nation's prosperity."

    Erica Payne, the founder and pesident of the Patriotic Millionaires, declared that "President Biden's proposed budget is the most ambitious tax plan we've seen from a president in decades—and a clear emphasis of the values that he and the Democrats stand for: investing in our country, fighting off corporate profiteering, protecting the social safety net, and doing so all while reducing our nation's budget deficit."

    "The wealthiest Americans and corporations can easily afford to pay more—and hundreds of patriotic millionaires and billionaires are ready and eager to do their part to make sure all Americans can thrive," Payne added. "Let's be clear: As President Biden's budget lays out—we can invest in America, expand the social safety net, fight income inequality, and do it all while lowering taxes for working people—if we simply require the wealthiest Americans to pay their fair share."

    The president's proposals to help American families include expanding the child tax credit from $2,000 per kid to $3,000 for those ages six and above, and to $3,600 for children under six; enabling states to increase childcare options for millions of kids; and funding a federal-state partnership that provides high-quality, universal, free preschool.

    The budget also calls for boosting prevention services to reduce the number of children entering foster care as well as changes to the adoption tax credit to better serve families with lower incomes and those who choose legal guardianship.

    Biden advocates for $59 billion in funding and tax incentives to increase the affordable housing supply; $10 billion to remove barriers to affordable housing developments; and $10 billion to address racial and ethnic homeownership and wealth gaps. The president proposes providing $4.1 billion for the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program—and allowing states to use some of that money to provide water bill assistance to poor households, since a related program expires at the end of 2023.

    Along with fighting for billions of dollars to ease hunger, the administration aims to pour money into high-poverty school districts as well as improve the affordability of higher education by increasing the discretionary maximum Pell Grant by $500, expanding free community college, and subsidizing tuition for students from families earning less than $125,000 enrolled historically Black, tribally controlled, or minority-serving institutions.

    "Time and again, President Joe Biden delivers on his promise to fight for American families, his commitment to fairness for all Americans, and his belief that everyone should have the freedom and opportunity to build a better life. This budget reflects those priorities and values by helping people continue to rebuild," said American Federation of Teachers President Randi Weingarten, who highlighted various proposed investments in education and major federal programs.

    In terms of healthcare, Biden pushes for putting billions of dollars into tackling cancer, increasing funds for veterans exposed to environmental hazards, and providing $471 million for reducing maternal mortality and morbidity rates, especially among Black, American Indian, and Alaska Native women. He also wants to expand coverage of mental health benefits and make historic investments in the behavioral health workforce.

    The president advocates for making healthcare premium cuts permanent and providing Medicaid-like coverage to individuals in states that have not expanded their programs under the Affordable Care Act. There are also provisions to cut prescription drug costs, improve Medicaid home and community-based services, and expand the National Health Service Corps as well as programs that train and support nurses.

    Biden would also extend the solvency of the Medicare trust fund by at least 25 years. In addition to investing in Social Security Administration staff, a White House fact sheet says that the Biden administration "looks forward to working with the Congress to responsibly strengthen Social Security by ensuring that high-income individuals pay their fair share."

    Max Richtman, president and CEO of the National Committee to Preserve Social Security and Medicare, said that "while the conservatives' approach is to 'cut, cut, cut!' earned benefits for future generations of retirees, President Biden's budget would fortify Medicare for the future by asking the wealthy to pay their fair share."

    "Instead of 'kicking the can down the road' as some previous administrations and Congresses have done, the president's budget confronts the trust fund shortfall head-on—without burdening beneficiaries," Richtman continued. "In a society with massive wealth inequality, the wealthy can afford to pay a little more. Future seniors cannot afford benefit cuts."

    While welcoming Biden's efforts to protect Medicare, Lisa Gilbert, executive vice president of Public Citizen, also suggested that "looking ahead, the administration should crack down on Medicare Advantage plans that profit by cherry-picking healthy seniors and restricting care for enrollees; expand dental, vision, and hearing benefits for Medicare enrollees; work with Congress to cap out-of-pocket expenses for seniors; and take a bolder stand against Big Pharma greed by expanding drug price negotiation to bring down the prices of more drugs sooner and cover all Americans, not just people on Medicare."

    On the climate front, the budget proposes spending $4.5 billion on clean energy, $16.5 billion on climate science and clean energy innovation, and over $24 billion on conservation and to help build communities' resilience to devastating storms, drought, extreme heat, floods, and wildfires. The administration also pushes for investing nearly $2 billion in environmental justice efforts.

    A coalition of over a dozen green groups stressed in a joint statement Thursday that "as our country deals with inflation, high energy prices, public health crises, biodiversity loss, and climate change, it is now more important than ever that Congress fully funds the agencies responsible for addressing these critical issues."

    Varshini Prakash, executive director of the youth-led Sunrise Movement, said that "President Biden's proposed budget—especially its investments in clean energy, jobs, and an end to oil and gas subsidies—is the kind of thing young people in this country want to see ahead of 2024."

    "But President Biden has the power to act on climate and issues important to our generation without having to go through a Republican House," she noted. "He can reject the Willow Project, which goes against his own agenda to stop the climate crisis, and can do everything in his executive authority, like declaring a climate emergency and invoking the Defense Production Act, to jump-start our transition to clean energy."

    Given the current conditions in Congress—with Republicans controlling the House and a Senate where the president's agenda is often thwarted by not only the GOP but also right-wing Democrats and a new Independent—Biden is certainly in for a battle.

    That's especially the case considering that, as CBPP's Parrott noted, "the president's budget priorities stand in stark contrast with the emerging House Republican agenda—an agenda that pushes more tax cuts for the wealthy and profitable corporations, and holds the economy hostage by demanding deep spending cuts in areas like K-12 schools, healthcare, medical research, college tuition help, and help buying groceries as the price for raising the debt limit."

    "Taken together, this emerging agenda would increase hardship and narrow access to opportunity; widen already large differences in outcomes by race, ethnicity, and geography; and hurt the country as a whole," Parrott warned of GOP lawmakers' priorities.

    ProsperUs coalition spokesperson Claire Guzdar argued that "President Biden's budget is driven by what we know works: investments in the people who keep our economy running. Lowering costs for families, strengthening Medicare and Social Security, and delivering investments in healthcare, housing, and climate are key to widespread prosperity and economic growth."

    "President Biden must now fight to enact this budget and continue to reject dangerous calls for austerity and cuts to programs that strengthen our communities and our economy," Guzdar added.

    A U.S. Senate Budget Committee hearing for the president's proposal is scheduled for the morning of March 15.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/09/prosperus-commends-presidents-budget-pushes-for-more-public-investment/feed/ 0 378417
    As Hunger Surges and Medicaid Cliff Looms, Biden Readies Record Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/08/as-hunger-surges-and-medicaid-cliff-looms-biden-readies-record-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/08/as-hunger-surges-and-medicaid-cliff-looms-biden-readies-record-pentagon-budget/#respond Wed, 08 Mar 2023 19:33:01 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/hunger-medicaid-biden-pentagon

    As tens of millions of people across the United States face food benefit cuts and the potential loss of health insurance in the coming weeks, President Joe Biden is reportedly finalizing a fiscal year 2024 budget that would hand the Pentagon more than $835 billion—including $170 billion for weapons procurement.

    Set for official release on Thursday, the president's historic Pentagon budget request will stand in stark contrast to the painful austerity recently inflicted on vulnerable Americans, many of whom have been forced to wait in increasingly long food bank lines after their Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) benefits were slashed earlier this month—the consequence of a trade-off that Congress negotiated and Biden approved late last year.

    Bloomberg reported Tuesday that "the spending plan President Joe Biden will propose Thursday includes what officials say is one of the nation's largest peacetime defense budgets, with $170 billion for weapons procurement and $145 billion for research and development, both recent records."

    "Among the major systems that would benefit from the proposed new budget is Lockheed Martin Corp.'s F-35, the costliest U.S. weapons system. The budget will request $13.5 billion for the fighter jets in procurement, continued development, and upgrades," the outlet noted. "The Pentagon will request 83 F-35s for the Air Force, Navy, and Marine Corps, meeting the services' objectives. That includes a planned 48 planes for the Air Force and 35 for the Navy and Marines."

    Progressive lawmakers and peace advocates have long argued that excessive military spending—much of which inevitably winds up in the coffers of private contractors—comes at the expense of critical social investments and outcomes, from ending child poverty to guaranteeing healthcare and affordable housing for all.

    "The choice to spend so much on the military is equally a choice not to provide healthcare, invest in early education, address climate chaos, and more," Public Citizen president Robert Weissman said in a recent statement.

    Last month, Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.) reintroduced their bill calling for a $100 billion cut to topline U.S. military spending, money they argued would be far better spent elsewhere.

    "Our national priorities are reflected in our spending," Lee said. "Cutting just $100 billion could do so much good: It could power every household in the U.S. with solar energy; hire 1 million elementary school teachers amid a worsening teacher shortage; provide free tuition for two out of three public college students; or cover medical care for 7 million veterans."

    But instead of proposing a cut to fraud-ridden Pentagon spending, Biden is reportedly aiming for an increase of around $20 billion—and, if recent history is any indication, Congress will likely add tens of billions more to the president's request, pushing the overall 2024 military budget close to $900 billion.

    With the Pentagon set to watch its budget grow yet again with bipartisan support, millions of people in the U.S. are staring down the possibility of losing Medicaid coverage starting next month thanks to the return of eligibility reviews that have largely been paused throughout the coronavirus pandemic.

    Estimates suggest that nearly 18 million low-income people could be removed from the healthcare program as right-wing governors—including Sarah Huckabee Sanders of Arkansas—race to gut state rolls, with a green light from Congress and the Biden administration.

    The combination of SNAP benefit cuts and the looming loss of insurance coverage could be disastrous for many, and aid organizations are preparing for the worst.

    "We are bracing, and our agencies, member food banks, food pantries, and soup kitchens are not prepared for what is about to hit them," Lisa Hamler-Fugitt, executive director of the Ohio Association of Foodbanks, told The Washington Post over the weekend. "This reduction, and end of the public health emergency, could not be coming at a worse time."

    Slate's Alexander Sammon argued Tuesday that "for President Biden, the quiet expiration of enhanced SNAP marks yet another disappearing act in his once vaunted welfare state."

    "The Child Tax Credit, a signature Biden policy in the American Rescue Plan Act, halved child poverty," Sammon wrote. "But it expired with relatively little pushback at the end of 2021. Enhanced unemployment benefits expired three months before that. Now, Medicaid is next."

    "As it stands, enhanced SNAP looks like yet another program that works well and is well-liked—but that Democrats can't make last," Sammon added. "Some Democrats have indeed talked about expanding SNAP permanently in the new Farm Bill, much in the same way they've talked about expanding Social Security and Medicare. But the lack of willingness to fight for SNAP when it was already expanded is not a heartening sign."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/08/as-hunger-surges-and-medicaid-cliff-looms-biden-readies-record-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 378091
    Greenpeace accuses Labour govt of ‘robbing’ climate mitigation funds to fix storm damage https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/07/greenpeace-accuses-labour-govt-of-robbing-climate-mitigation-funds-to-fix-storm-damage/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/07/greenpeace-accuses-labour-govt-of-robbing-climate-mitigation-funds-to-fix-storm-damage/#respond Tue, 07 Mar 2023 00:11:44 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=85828 Asia Pacific Report

    New Zealand Prime Minister Chris Hipkins’ decision to “reprioritise” future transport budgets — away from walking, cycling and public transport — in order to pay for Cyclone Gabrielle road reconstruction is short-sighted amid the climate crisis, says Greenpeace.

    However, Hipkins told RNZ Morning Report today the decision to refocus transport spending would not compromise action on climate change.

    “Robbing money from climate mitigation initiatives like walking and cycling, which reduce emissions, in order to fix up climate-related storm damage makes no sense,” said Greenpeace campaigner Christine Rose in a statement.

    “This shouldn’t be an either-or situation. Yes, we need to get access back for cyclone-hit areas.

    “But why would you finance that by cancelling plans for a transport system that cuts climate emissions that otherwise intensify the storms?”

    Transport Minister Michael Wood had announced plans to prioritise climate change in the Government Policy Statement review, which sets the high level direction for spending over the next five years.

    However, less than a day later, after Monday’s Cabinet meeting, Prime Minister Hipkins stepped away from this commitment.

    Transport pollution
    Hipkins argued that the response to Cyclone Gabrielle required reprioritisation to repair bridges and roads rather than to support public transport, walking and cycling.

    Transport is New Zealand’s second biggest climate polluter after the agriculture industry.

    “Cyclone Gabrielle was a tragic reminder that the climate crisis is here,” Rose said.

    “The government must pull all the stops to prevent storms like this from getting worse in future. And that means putting a brake on climate pollution.

    “This is the time the government should instead be accelerating climate solutions like clean transport options. By distancing himself from [former Prime Minister] Jacinda Ardern’s commitment to climate change, Hipkins is aligning himself with reactionary pro-road lobbies.”

    The Greenpeace statement said damage to roads, bridges and infrastructure showed how vulnerable the transport network was to climate change. Building more roads was not a long-term solution.

    “It’s time to reinvent our transport system so it prioritises people and freight, not cars, and mitigates climate change as well as adapting to the new climate reality,” Rose said.

    She said that if Hipkins claimed there was no money to pay for reconstruction — perhaps he should consider the fact that the biggest climate polluter, Fonterra — was paying nothing for its methane emissions.

    “If the government doesn’t take the lead during the climate crisis, to allocate spending for climate solutions, then it’s the wrong government for our times.”

    Emissions still in the mix, says Hipkins
    RNZ News reports that Prime Minister Hipkins said the decision to refocus transport spending would not compromise action on climate change.

    Hipkins said that while Cabinet had not considered a final transport policy statement yet, with weather having so much adverse impact on the country over the last month it was essential there needed to be “a weighting” on what the transport priorities needed to be.

    He disagreed there was an irony to changing the policy at this time in response to weather disasters that were being blamed on climate change.

    The government has hit the brakes on making emissions reductions its top transport priority, saying Cyclone Gabrielle has changed everything.

    Under a policy to make emissions reduction the “overarching focus” of its next three-yearly transport plan, the government wanted to reallocate some of the money normally spent on road maintenance — that tallies nearly $2 billion a year — towards bus and bike lanes.

    But now the focus has switched to an emergency style plan to repair roads devastated in Cyclone Gabrielle and other recent storms.

    Both National and the Greens have criticised the government’s reversal.

    National has called it a “chaotic backpedal” while the Green Party has urged the government not to defer climate change spending.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/07/greenpeace-accuses-labour-govt-of-robbing-climate-mitigation-funds-to-fix-storm-damage/feed/ 0 377471
    Why Far-Right Republicans Cannot Be Trusted on the Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/01/why-far-right-republicans-cannot-be-trusted-on-the-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/01/why-far-right-republicans-cannot-be-trusted-on-the-pentagon-budget/#respond Wed, 01 Mar 2023 18:48:02 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/republicans-cut-pentagon-budget

    Since Republicans took control of the House of Representatives earlier this year, the so-called “Freedom Caucus” — the badly misnamed right-fringe of the congressional GOP — has been flexing its influence.

    Caucus members are deeply invested in an agenda that would increase inequality and enrich corporations and billionaires, strip hard-won rights from people of color, immigrants, women, and the LGBTQ community, destroy the environment to enrich fossil fuel companies and slash social investment for the poor.

    And yet surprisingly, some of these extremists are also—sort of—calling for cutting the military budget. Does that provide an opening for anti-war progressives looking to cross the aisle? Unfortunately, no.

    Of course cutting the military budget is an urgent necessity — both to halt the destruction that military spending enables and to free up the funding needed for social investment at home. But this group of right-wing lawmakers can’t be trusted to do either.

    Cutting military spending is an urgent moral need

    Some Democrats have criticized the GOP for even considering military cuts. But no progressive — inside or outside of Congress — should defend our bloated military budget.

    This year, Congress is giving the Pentagon and the nuclear weapons arsenal $858 billion—which accounts for more than half of all U.S. discretionary spending. The United States continues to spend more on the military than the next nine countries combined, including big military spenders like China, Russia, India and Saudi Arabia.

    Some of these extremists are also—sort of—calling for cutting the military budget. Does that provide an opening for anti-war progressives looking to cross the aisle? Unfortunately, no.

    In fact, you could cut that budget in half and Washington would still be spending about $70 billion more than Russia and China together.

    That $858 billion is about $100 billion higher than former President Trump’s last military budget. The increase from 2022 alone could pay for almost all the abandoned social program commitments left unfunded from President Biden’s Build Back Better plan. Or it could help fund lapsed priorities like the expanded Child Tax Credit, which lifted millions of kids out of poverty for one year — only to let them slide back into abject hardship when conservative lawmakers refused to extend it.

    Instead, that money is going to the military, fueling war and rights abuses around the world.

    Despite bipartisan votes in both houses of Congress to stop supporting Saudi Arabia’s war in Yemen, for example, U.S. backing for the bombing campaign and blockade of Yemeni ports continues. Because of the U.S.-backed Saudi war, 1.3 million pregnant or breastfeeding women and 2.2 million children under 5 need treatment for acute malnutrition, 17 million more are food insecure, and around 400,000 Yemenis have already died in the war.

    Meanwhile, the almost forgotten, smaller-scale wars of the Global War on Terror continue. U.S. airstrikes, drone attacks, Special Forces deployments, and other military engagements persist from Somalia to Syria, Iraq to Pakistan, Mali to Niger and beyond. The Pentagon always has plenty of money for those missions.

    More broadly, about half of the Pentagon budget every year goes directly to arms manufacturers who produce bombs, warplanes, armed drones, nuclear submarines, and more — including new ships and weapons designed to challenge China, significantly escalating the threat of military conflict. The budget includes about $19 billion per year to “modernize” the U.S. nuclear arsenal, increasing the danger that any accidental escalation between nuclear weapons powers — like in Ukraine — could result in a nuclear exchange.

    This renewed military build-up in preparation for great power confrontation with China and Russia is extremely dangerous. And there’s no shortage of funds in the Pentagon budget for increasing it.

    We can’t trust the far Right

    Military spending doesn’t keep us safe from the real enemies we face — like climate change, pandemics, inequality, gun violence, the rise of white supremacy and authoritarianism. Instead, it does enormous harm.

    There is a consensus among U.S. residents that we need to cut military spending. The hard part is convincing Congress to actually do it. So should progressives see these claims by the extremist Republicans as an opportunity to work with them when they say they might be on board with cutting some fraction of military spending?

    No — at least not on their terms. These members have said very little about ending actual wars or reducing suffering at home or abroad. Instead, they’ve called for ending so-called “woke” policies in the military, like challenging white supremacy in the ranks, protecting trans troops from discrimination, and considering climate change in U.S. military policy.

    And they would do it while adding to the suffering of people in this country. The $75 billion military cut they’ve suggested would come as part of a broader package — cutting $130 billion from social investments — which would mean big cuts to nutrition assistance, healthcare subsidies, climate protection, and other programs that create jobs and keep people and the planet safe.

    We have plenty of good reasons to cut the military budget. Such cuts are popular with voters and other people across this country too — so we need to convince Congress of that and push hard for a real plan to cut military spending. But we can’t trust the extremist caucus with either ending wars abroad or funding urgent human needs at home. We can only trust these white supremacist, transphobic, and classist legislators to do exactly the opposite. They’re not our allies.

    This article was jointly produced by Foreign Policy In Focus and InTheseTimes.com.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Phyllis Bennis.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/03/01/why-far-right-republicans-cannot-be-trusted-on-the-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 376284
    ‘A Decent Society Would Not Let This Happen’: 30 Million Across US Face Food Aid Cuts https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/28/a-decent-society-would-not-let-this-happen-30-million-across-us-face-food-aid-cuts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/28/a-decent-society-would-not-let-this-happen-30-million-across-us-face-food-aid-cuts/#respond Tue, 28 Feb 2023 22:51:38 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/snap-food-aid-cuts

    As of Wednesday, around 30 million people across the United States will have their family's food assistance slashed, despite high prices and expert warnings about a "hunger cliff."

    Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) benefits were initially increased at the beginning of the Covid-19 pandemic. Although Republicans in 18 states had already ended the emergency allotments (EAs), households in the other 32 states along with Washington, D.C., Guam, and the U.S. Virgin Islands have continued to receive them.

    However, the increased SNAP benefits are set to end Wednesday because of the omnibus spending package from December—federal lawmakers traded the temporary pandemic-era boost for a permanent program to feed children in the summer.

    "Poverty is a policy choice in this country."

    "We're really going to struggle," Deanna Hardy, a mother of two in Marshfield, Wisconsin, told ABC News. "We're going to have to end up going back to cheaper items like noodles and processed stuff because the meat, the dairy, fruits, and veggies. It's expensive."

    "I don't think the cuts could have happened at a worse time," added Hardy—whose family relies on a fixed income and will see their benefits drop from $960 to $200 per month. "When the extra payments began, food prices were nowhere near where they are now."

    As Tracy Roof, an associate professor of political science at the University of Richmond, recently wrote for The Conversation:

    Many advocates for a stronger safety net say that SNAP benefits are too low to meet the needs of low-income people. They are warning of a looming hunger cliff—meaning a sharp increase in the number of people who don't get enough nutritious food to eat—in March 2023, when the extra help ends.

    At that point, the lowest-income families will lose $95 in benefits a month. But some SNAP participants, such as many elderly and disabled people who live alone and on fixed incomes and who only qualify for the minimum amount of help, will see their benefits plummet from $281 to $23 a month.

    A trio of Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP) experts pointed out earlier this month that "a study estimated that EAs kept 4.2 million people above the poverty line in the last quarter of 2021, reducing poverty by 10%―and child poverty by 14%―in states with EAs at the time. The estimated reduction in poverty rates due to EAs was highest for Black and Latino people."

    CBPP president Sharon Parrott warned Axios Tuesday that the cuts will "allow very high levels of poverty to remain in the country."

    Noting the outlet's report, Public Citizen President Robert Weissman declared that "a decent society would not let this happen."

    The looming cuts are a reminder that "poverty is a policy choice in this country," Elizabeth Lower-Basch, deputy executive director for the Center for Law and Social Policy, told Axios. "For a while, we decided we were going to make a different policy choice."

    Congressional Progressive Caucus Chair Pramila Jayapal (D-Wash.) agreed and demanded action by federal lawmakers.

    "Tomorrow, SNAP benefits will drop back to pre-pandemic levels," she tweeted. "That means $171 less each month for 520,000 Washington families struggling to make ends meet. Ending these increased benefits will cause more food insecurity and poverty."

    "It's unacceptable," Jayapal added. "Poverty and hunger are policy choices. It's time we step up and do more."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jessica Corbett.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/28/a-decent-society-would-not-let-this-happen-30-million-across-us-face-food-aid-cuts/feed/ 0 376070
    Lee, Pocan Revive Bill to Cut Military Budget by $100 Billion https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/22/lee-pocan-revive-bill-to-cut-military-budget-by-100-billion/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/22/lee-pocan-revive-bill-to-cut-military-budget-by-100-billion/#respond Wed, 22 Feb 2023 18:17:43 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/lee-pocan-people-over-pentagon

    U.S. Reps. Barbara Lee and Mark Pocan on Wednesday reintroduced their People Over Pentagon Act, which would slash $100 billion from the nation's military budget and reallocate that money to urgent needs, from investments in education and healthcare to combating the climate emergency.

    Lee (D-Calif.) and Pocan (D-Wis.), who co-chair the Defense Spending Reduction Caucus, promoted the bill last year and unsuccessfully tried to attach it as an amendment to the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) for Fiscal Year 2023.

    Lee—who on Tuesday confirmed her 2024 run for the seat that Sen. Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.) plans to vacate—encouraged her congressional colleagues "on both sides of the aisle to ask themselves what would truly provide more benefit to the people of this country: another outdated weapons system, or greater access to basic needs in our communities."

    "Year after year, this country pours billions into our already-astronomical defense budget without stopping to question whether the additional funding is actually making us safer," the congresswoman said. "We know that a large portion of these taxpayer dollars are used to pad the pockets of the military-industrial complex, fund outdated technology, or are simply mismanaged."

    "A large portion of these taxpayer dollars are used to pad the pockets of the military-industrial complex, fund outdated technology, or are simply mismanaged."

    "Our national priorities are reflected in our spending," she stressed. "Cutting just $100 billion could do so much good: It could power every household in the U.S. with solar energy; hire 1 million elementary school teachers amid a worsening teacher shortage; provide free tuition for 2 out of 3 public college students; or cover medical care for 7 million veterans."

    As the National Priorities Project (NPP) at the Institute for Policy Studies pointed out Wednesday, that money could also be used to send every U.S. household a $700 check to help offset the effects of inflation; hire 890,000 registered nurses to address shortages; or triple current enrollment in the early childhood program Head Start from 1 million to 3 million children and families.

    "We shouldn't be adding billions upon billions of tax dollars to enrich Pentagon contractors at a time when real people are struggling," argued NPP program director Lindsay Koshgarian. "We're so used to hearing that we can't afford programs that meet real human needs for basics like housing, food, education, and childcare. The truth is that we can definitely afford it, if we stop throwing money at Pentagon contractors."

    Pocan similarly took aim at those who stand to benefit most from the status quo that produced a $858 billion military budget for FY2023, declaring Wednesday that "more defense spending does not guarantee safety, but it does guarantee that the military-industrial complex will continue to get richer."

    "We can no longer afford to put these corporate interests over the needs of the American people. It's time to invest in our communities and make meaningful change that reflects our nation's priorities," Pocan said.

    The bill is also backed by advocacy groups such as Public Citizen—whose president, Robert Weissman, celebrated its revival.

    "Pentagon spending is wildly out of control," and avoidable "spending waste—identified by the Pentagon itself!—vastly exceeds the entire budgets of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Food and Drug Administration combined," he noted.

    Weissman also highlighted that in the latest NDAA, Congress approved a military budget that was tens of billions of dollars higher than what was requested, and that boost was "more than the annual cost to expand Medicare benefits to cover hearing, dental, and vision—a proposal abandoned on the grounds it cost too much."

    "The People Over Pentagon Act rejects the immoral and illogical inertia of more, more, more for the Pentagon," he said, thanking Lee and Pocan "for introducing a dose of sanity and humanity to the Pentagon spending debate."

    The anti-war group CodePink also backs the bill and displayed its support with a Wednesday banner drop on Capitol Hill.

    CodePink organizer Olivia DiNucci said that "cutting $100 billion of the Pentagon budget is a start in reallocating funds that go to military contractors to further destroy people and the planet instead of prioritizing the needs of the people to address true national security that includes healthcare, housing, clean water, quality food, living wages, and climate justice."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jessica Corbett.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/22/lee-pocan-revive-bill-to-cut-military-budget-by-100-billion/feed/ 0 374711
    GOP Taking Budget Advice From Trump Official Who Wants to Cut $2 Trillion From Medicaid https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/gop-taking-budget-advice-from-trump-official-who-wants-to-cut-2-trillion-from-medicaid/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/gop-taking-budget-advice-from-trump-official-who-wants-to-cut-2-trillion-from-medicaid/#respond Mon, 20 Feb 2023 12:01:28 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/gop-trump-aide-cut-medicaid

    The right-wing official who served as budget director for the Trump administration is reportedly playing a significant advisory role for House Republicans as they seek to leverage a fast-approaching debt ceiling crisis to enact spending cuts that would disproportionately impact low-income households.

    According to The Washington Post, former Office of Management and Budget chief Russ Vought "has emerged as one of the central voices shaping the looming showdown over federal spending and the national debt."

    "As Republicans struggle to craft a strategy for confronting the Biden administration over the debt ceiling, which limits how much the government can borrow to pay for spending Congress has already approved, Vought has supplied them with a seemingly inexhaustible stream of advice: suggestions for negotiating with the White House, briefings about dealing with the media, a 104-page memo that proposes specific spending levels for every federal agency," the Post reported Sunday.

    More specifically, Vought has suggested that the GOP sideline efforts to cut Social Security and Medicare and instead focus on a "push to obliterate almost all other major forms of federal spending, especially programs that benefit lower-income Americans, and dare Biden to stand in the way."

    Vought's agenda, the Post noted, proposes $9 trillion in federal spending cuts over the next 10 years, targeting thousands of domestic programs including Medicaid and the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP).

    If adopted, Vought's proposal would inflict $2 trillion in cuts to Medicaid, potentially compromising coverage for millions across the United States—and compounding the impact of lapsing pandemic protections.

    Vought's proposed cuts to SNAP—a food aid program long attacked by Republicans—would amount to $400 billion. A recent survey found that 64% of respondents said affording food is one of the biggest challenges they're facing amid elevated inflation.

    Tens of millions across the U.S. are currently facing what advocates have dubbed a "hunger cliff" as pandemic-related emergency boosts to SNAP funding expire.

    SNAP accounts for a tiny fraction of the federal government's overall spending.

    "At a moment when food distribution centers are seeing increases in demand as American families struggle to feed their children, Republican lawmakers are putting families in their political crossfire by threatening to dramatically decrease spending on essential programs like SNAP. The timing of this could not be worse," said Ailen Arreaza, executive director of ParentsTogether. “Further cuts to essential policies helping families to keep food on the table would be unconscionable—and those politicians responsible will pay a political price."

    "The only thing more odious than pushing for $3 trillion of unpaid-for tax cuts is pushing for $3 trillion of tax cuts and $3 trillion in cuts to healthcare and nutrition for low- and middle-income families."

    Vought, who is also urging Republicans to cut Labor Department funding in half and slash the Affordable Care Act, presents such austerity as needed to rein in an out-of-control federal bureaucracy. But as the Post notes, Vought "oversaw enormous increases in the national debt as Trump's director of the Office of Management and Budget," making clear to critics that his priority is gutting programs that low-income people rely on to meet basic needs.

    "The Republican playbook is always to drive more people deeper into poverty, while giving kickbacks and tax breaks to their super-rich friends," said progressive organizer and former congressional candidate Melanie D'Arrigo.

    Last week, more than 70 House Republicans introduced legislation that would make 2017 Trump tax cuts for individuals permanent, a major giveaway to the rich that would cost the federal government around $2.2 trillion in revenue through 2032.

    The Biden White House and congressional Democrats have indicated that they would oppose federal spending cuts as part of any deal to raise the debt ceiling and prevent a catastrophic default, which could come as soon as this summer if lawmakers don't act.

    "The only thing more odious than pushing for $3 trillion of unpaid-for tax cuts is pushing for $3 trillion of tax cuts and $3 trillion in cuts to healthcare and nutrition for low- and middle-income families," tweeted Brendan Duke, a senior adviser to Sen. Michael Bennet (D-Colo.).


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/gop-taking-budget-advice-from-trump-official-who-wants-to-cut-2-trillion-from-medicaid/feed/ 0 373967
    Why Would Anyone Think Republicans are Interested in Lower Budget Deficits https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/why-would-anyone-think-republicans-are-interested-in-lower-budget-deficits/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/why-would-anyone-think-republicans-are-interested-in-lower-budget-deficits/#respond Mon, 20 Feb 2023 06:53:02 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=274436

    Photograph Source: Speaker of the House Kevin McCarthy – Public Domain

    A New York Times article on the economics and politics around Social Security and Medicare begins by telling readers:

    President Biden scored an early political point this month in his fight with congressional Republicans over taxes, spending and raising the federal debt limit: He forced Republican leaders to profess, repeatedly, that they will not seek cuts to Social Security and Medicare.

    In the process, Mr. Biden has effectively steered a debate about fiscal responsibility away from two cherished safety-net programs for seniors, just as those plans are poised for a decade of rapid spending growth.

    It is not clear that “fiscal responsibility” has anything to do with this debate. First, it is not clear what that expression means. Would it have been fiscally responsible to have more deficit reduction in the years following the Great Recession, with the economy recovering slowly and unemployment remaining high?

    In those circumstances, more deficit reduction would have meant slower growth and higher unemployment. Perhaps the New York Times would define deficit reduction that hurts the economy as being “fiscally responsible,” but it is not clear that most people would accept that definition.

    The other part of the story is that Republicans have repeatedly demonstrated by their actions that they don’t care about budget deficits. Every time the Republicans have regained the White House in the last four decades, they have pushed through large tax cuts that resulted in large increases in the budget deficit.

    Seeing this behavior, it is absurd to imagine that the leaders of the Republican Party are concerned about budget deficits (if this is how we are defining fiscal responsibility). They may claim to be concerned about budget deficits, but it would be irresponsible to imply that they actually are concerned about budget deficits.

    In short, this is alleged to be a debate over “fiscal responsibility” or budget deficits. There is little reason to believe, at least on the Republican side, that this is actually a debate over budget deficits.

    Spending on Social Security and Medicare Has Been Far Less Than Projected

    It is also worth noting that the dynamics of the shortfalls facing Social Security and Medicare are somewhat different than implied by this piece. Social Security spending has already been rising rapidly, since most of the baby boom cohorts have already reached retirement age. Social Security spending rose from 4.19 percent of GDP in 2000 to 5.09 percent of GDP in 2023, an increase of 0.9 percentage points. It is projected to increase to 5.95 percent of GDP by 2040, a further rise of 0.84 percentage points.

    This means that, in terms of its economic impact, we will not be seeing anything qualitatively different from what we had been seeing from Social Security. There is a different story going forward in that the dedicated trust fund built from the Social Security tax is projected to face a shortfall, but that is an issue of allocating governmental resources, not a question of requiring a more rapid diversion of resources to Social Security than we have been seeing for decades.

    It is also worth noting that the cost increases for both Social Security and Medicare have been far less than had earlier been projected. The 2000 Social Security Trustees Report projected that Social Security spending would increase by 2.07 percentage points by 2025, to 6.26 percent of GDP. The 2022 Trustees report shows costs increasing by just 1.17 percentage points to 5.26 percent of GDP in 2025.

    While there have not been explicit cuts to Social Security, changes in both practices and society have led to slower-than-projected cost growth. In the former category, a far higher rate of denial for disability claims has substantially reduced the cost of the disability program. In the latter category, the slower growth in life expectancy, especially for non-college-educated workers, has reduced the cost of the Social Security program. These are not necessarily positive developments, but they mean that Social Security is now costing far less than had been projected in the not-so-distant past.

    There is a similar story with Medicare cost growth. Its spending was projected to rise by 0.61 percentage points to 2.0 percent of GDP in 2025. Its costs are now projected to rise to 1.68 percent of GDP in 2025, an increase of just 0.29 percentage points. This smaller increase is the result of a sharp slowing in healthcare cost growth after the passage of the Affordable Care Act in 2010. Here also, we have seen substantial savings against projected spending, even if there were no explicit cuts in the program.

    Upward Redistribution Has Been a Major Factor in the Projected Social Security Shortfall

    It is also worth noting that much of the projected shortfall in the Social Security program is due to the upward redistribution of income over the last four decades. In 1982, when the last major changes to Social Security were put into place, 90 percent of wage income fell below the cap on taxable wages (currently $160,200).

    In the last two decades, just over 82 percent of wage income was subject to the Social Security tax (see page 148). There was also a redistribution from wage income to profit income, which further reduced Social Security tax revenue. Together, this upward redistribution accounts for more than 40 percent of the program’s projected shortfall over its 75-year planning horizon. If we had not shifted so much income to high-end earners and to profits, closing the projected shortfall in Social Security would be a far more manageable task.

    This first appeared on Dean Baker’s Beat the Press blog.  


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Dean Baker.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/why-would-anyone-think-republicans-are-interested-in-lower-budget-deficits/feed/ 0 373936
    Cyclone Gabrielle: Hipkins announces recovery taskforce, $50m support https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/cyclone-gabrielle-hipkins-announces-recovery-taskforce-50m-support/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/cyclone-gabrielle-hipkins-announces-recovery-taskforce-50m-support/#respond Mon, 20 Feb 2023 02:30:00 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=84960 RNZ News

    New Zealand Prime Minister Chris Hipkins and Finance Minister Grant Robertson have announced a $50 million support package to provide immediate relief for businesses hit by Cyclone Gabrielle, as well as the extension of the national state of emergency, a new cyclone recovery taskforce and related ministerial role.

    The full extent of the cyclone damage is becoming clearer as transport, power and telecommunications connections are re-established.

    “Ministers will finalise the distribution of this funding in the coming week, but this will include support to businesses to meet immediate costs and further assist with clean-up,” Robertson said today.

    “We will coordinate the allocation of this funding with local business groups, iwi and local government in the affected regions.

    “The government recognises the weather events are having an impact on people and businesses meeting their tax obligations, so we are taking a range of tax relief measures as well.”

    Tens of millions of dollars have already been put into cyclone recovery and support, including into Mayoral Relief Funds, Civil Defence payments, and a package for NGOs and community support groups, he said.

    “I want to be very clear, this is an interim package and more support will follow as we get a better picture of the scale, cost and needs in the wake of this disaster,” Hipkins said.

    Rolling maul approach
    “I would note that in responding to previous major disasters a rolling maul approach has had to be taken and this situation is no different.”


    Post-cabinet media briefing today.     Video: RNZ News

    Robertson said businesses would have different needs, the initial funding was aimed at providing cashflow they could access quickly. He said the possible need for a a long-term wage subsidy scheme would need to be assessed after this initial response.

    An additional $250 million has been ringfenced to top up the National Land Transport Fund’s emergency budget to repair crucial road networks.

    The $250 million is a pre-commitment against Budget 2023, the $50 million is as part of a between-budget contingency in funding the government already has.

    Robertson said he expected it would ultimately cost in the billions of dollars.

    ‘Significant damage’
    “In terms of transport, the damage to highways and local roads in these two recent weather events has been massive. About 400km of our state highways are being worked on urgently through Tai Rāwhiti, Hawke’s Bay and the central North Island to reopen safely,” Hipkins said.

    An exemption from the CCCFA requirements has also been extended to Gisborne, Hawke’s Bay and Tararua — allowing banks and other lenders to quickly provide credit up to $10,000.

    “While the full impacts of the cyclone continue to be assessed, it’s clear that the damage is significant and on a scale not seen in New Zealand for at least a generation,” Hipkins said.

    “The required investment to reconnect our communities and future-proof our nation’s infrastructure is going to be significant and it will require hard decisions and an all-of-government approach,” he said.

    “We won’t shy away from those hard decisions and are working on a suite of measures to support New Zealanders by building back better, building back safer, and building back smarter.”

    The minister of immigration will progress his work to ensure skilled workers are able to come from overseas and work in affected regions, and ensure the wellbeing of and ongoing work for Recognised Seasonal Employees.

    State of emergency extended
    Ministers also agreed to extend the national state of emergency for another seven days.

    “The declaration continues to apply to seven regions: Northland, Auckland Tai Rāwhiti, Bay of Plenty, Waikato, Hawke’s Bay and Tararua … meaning that they’ll get all of the support on offer from a nationally supported recovery,” Hipkins said.

    A lead minister will be appointed for each of the affected regions.

    “I’ll finalise a list of lead ministers tonight and I’ll be tasking them with reporting back, working with their communities within a week on the local recovery approach that’s best going to meet the needs of their regions,” Hipkins said.

    A new cyclone recovery taskforce headed by Sir Brian Roche and with regional groups, modelled partly on a Queensland taskforce established after their floods, will be set up. Terms of reference for the taskforce will be made public in coming days.

    A new Cabinet committee will be established to take decisions relevant to the recovery, chaired by Grant Robertson, who will also take on the new role of Cyclone Recovery Minister, with Barbara Edmonds appointed as an associate minister.

    15,000 customers without power
    Hipkins said there were 11 people dead and 6517 people unaccounted for, although 4260 were okay and police continued to work to urgently reconcile the others.

    About 15,000 customers are still without power — the bulk in Napier and Hastings. Hipkins said about 70 percent of Napier had been reconnected.

    “Work continues to prioritise reconnecting the rest.”

    Council supplied drinking water in Hastings and Napier, and Northland is safe. Water supplies are safe in Wairoa, although there is a boil water notice. In Gisborne, the main treatment plant is operating, although there are still restrictions in place.

    Where power supply to pumps remains a problem, bottled water or large water tanks are being supplied.

    Fibre connections have been restored to all affected areas and is running at pre-cyclone capacity where the power is on.

    Cell tower coverage is about 95 percent across the affected areas. Some are on a generator and able to support phone and text only.

    “As power comes back on those towers will be able to be supported by fibre to provide data connections.”

    NEMA has provided 60 Starlink units in Hawke’s Bay and Tai Rāwhiti, with 30 more in transit to Gisborne today.

    The NZ Defence Force has more than 950 people involved in the response, with multiple activities.

    The HMNZS Canterbury departs Lyttelton this evening and is expected to arrive in Napier on Tuesday, with supplies including bailey bridges, generators, gas bottles and emergency packs.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/20/cyclone-gabrielle-hipkins-announces-recovery-taskforce-50m-support/feed/ 0 373915
    Senate Dems Detail How GOP Budget Cuts Would ‘Hurt Families in Every Corner of the Country’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/16/senate-dems-detail-how-gop-budget-cuts-would-hurt-families-in-every-corner-of-the-country/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/16/senate-dems-detail-how-gop-budget-cuts-would-hurt-families-in-every-corner-of-the-country/#respond Thu, 16 Feb 2023 11:46:33 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/senate-democrats-gop-budget-cuts

    Top Senate Democrats released a report Wednesday highlighting the far-reaching implications of the House GOP majority's push to freeze federal spending at fiscal year 2022 levels, a cap that would inflict severe cuts on programs that help low-income families afford food, healthcare, housing, and other necessities.

    "We've heard a lot of talk from House Republicans about cutting spending, but very few specifics," said Sen. Patty Murray (D-Wash.), the chair of the Senate Appropriations Committee. "Well, that's probably because the specifics are actually pretty bad."

    The new report, released under the banner of the Democratic Policy and Communications Committee (DPCC), estimates that reverting to fiscal year 2022 federal spending levels would "amount to a 12% cut to each and every" discretionary spending program, including military programs.

    If Republicans shield military spending from their proposed cuts—as they've suggested they would—and maintain funding for veterans' medical care, cuts to other programs would have to be even steeper, the Democratic report notes.

    "It would amount to a 30% cut to all other federal programs," the report estimates. "That's a 30% cut to the [National Institutes of Health], opioid addiction and mental health treatment, housing assistance, child care and child nutrition, law enforcement and public safety, science and innovation, and veteran assistance programs."

    More specifically, the Democrats' analysis warns that the GOP plan would "deny 1 million babies access to formula"; "sharply reduce programs American parents depend on to raise their families, from Head Start, to affordable child care, to heating assistance, to child nutrition, to help with housing costs"; and "slash healthcare for seniors, people with disabilities, and low-income families."

    "This report makes clear that when House Republicans throw out ideas like 'going back to 2022 funding levels,' which Speaker McCarthy and MAGA Republicans in the House want to do, they aren't actually proposing a 'freeze,'" Murray said Wednesday. "They are calling for drastic, draconian cuts that will hurt families in every corner of the country, undermine our economy, jeopardize our national security, and limit our future."

    Sen. Sheldon Whitehouse (D-R.I.), chair of the Senate Budget Committee, said that "when you add up the cuts they want to make, they are so extreme they don't want to show them to you." The minimal details House Republicans have released indicate that they're planning to target the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program, Affordable Care Act subsidies, student debt relief, and more.

    "If Republicans do as many promise and 'protect defense spending,' the cuts could surge as high as 30%," Whitehouse continued. "The arithmetic is devastating for them. And all of this is supposedly to deal with a national debt that they deliberately made worse with massive revenue losses because they lowered tax rates for their corporate and billionaire friends and donors."

    "The MAGA majority's economic plan conveniently demands painful sacrifice only from seniors and working people while they insist on preserving or even expanding wasteful tax breaks for billionaires and greedy corporations."

    Senate Democrats released their report just hours after the Congressional Budget Office warned that the U.S. could default on its debt as soon as this summer if Congress doesn't act to raise the borrowing limit, which Republicans are using as leverage to demand spending cuts that Democratic leaders have pledged to oppose.

    A default would spark a devastating economic crisis, potentially wiping out millions of jobs and trillions of dollars in household wealth.

    "Take the extreme MAGA House majority at their word that they intend to manufacture a costly default crisis unless they get concessions that weaken the retirement and health security of millions of Americans," Liz Zelnick, director of the Economic Security and Corporate Power program at Accountable.US, said in a statement Wednesday. "The MAGA goal of holding the debt limit hostage is twofold: damage the president politically and accomplish a decades-old right-wing mission of gutting Social Security and Medicare benefits."

    "The MAGA majority's economic plan conveniently demands painful sacrifice only from seniors and working people while they insist on preserving or even expanding wasteful tax breaks for billionaires and greedy corporations," Zelnick added. "Many MAGA lawmakers conveniently ignore their own role in exacerbating the debt with trillions of dollars in wasteful tax breaks for giant corporations that never trickled down to anyone else."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/16/senate-dems-detail-how-gop-budget-cuts-would-hurt-families-in-every-corner-of-the-country/feed/ 0 373121
    New Yorkers Care About Care (and the State Budget Should, Too) https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/16/new-yorkers-care-about-care-and-the-state-budget-should-too/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/16/new-yorkers-care-about-care-and-the-state-budget-should-too/#respond Thu, 16 Feb 2023 06:00:46 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=274171 A familiar crowd gathered in New York’s Capitol last week. The purple and gold beanies of 1199SEIU, the turquoise tees of the Consumer Directed Personal Assistance Association, and the custom red face masks of the Caring Majority campaign made for a cacophony of color and conviction.  People showed up in full gear for good reason: to More

    The post New Yorkers Care About Care (and the State Budget Should, Too) appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Bella DeVaan.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/16/new-yorkers-care-about-care-and-the-state-budget-should-too/feed/ 0 373050
    As Pentagon Budget Nears $1 Trillion, Groups Tell Biden: Enough https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/14/as-pentagon-budget-nears-1-trillion-groups-tell-biden-enough/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/14/as-pentagon-budget-nears-1-trillion-groups-tell-biden-enough/#respond Tue, 14 Feb 2023 22:22:05 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/pentagon-budget

    In response to reports that the Biden administration may propose the highest level of military spending in U.S. history for fiscal year 2024, a broad range of nearly 60 advocacy groups on Tuesday urged the White House to divert "some of our supersized Pentagon budget to better meet the needs of the American people."

    Last week, Pentagon Comptroller Michael McCord told Politico that officials were "very close" to agreeing on a topline figure for what would likely be the largest-ever U.S. military budget, which the Biden administration will include in its overall 2024 budget request.

    "I do expect it will be a bigger number than Congress provided last year," McCord said.

    In a letter to President Joe Biden, 59 peace, national security, climate justice, racial justice, faith, and anti-poverty groups wrote that "we cannot and must not defend the status quo when it comes to the Pentagon budget."

    "We cannot and must not defend the status quo when it comes to the Pentagon budget."

    "This year's military budget—$858 billion—is the second-highest since World War II. It is 10 times Russia's military budget and more than 2.5 times that of China. It is greater than the next nine countries combined," the groups noted.

    The letter continues:

    About $452 billion of it will go straight into the pockets of big corporate weapons contractors. Congress added $45 billion on top of what your administration requested—an amount greater than the entire climate investment portion of the Inflation Reduction Act. It will not take many more years for our military budget to hit the $1 trillion mark, an astonishing sum given the Pentagon has never been able to pass an audit or properly account for the billions it already receives.

    "This is why we urge you to request a lower military budget this year," the groups explained. "We reject recent calls to roll back the entire federal budget because we can and should be spending more on meeting human needs and addressing the climate emergency through a just transition from fossil fuels and support to communities on the frontlines of the climate crisis."

    "One of the many ways we can accomplish this is by spending less on the wasteful Pentagon budget," the letter argues. "We reject pouring our dollars into outdated ships, malfunctioning planes, or record-breaking contractor CEO salaries while everyday people remain hungry, unhoused, in need of adequate healthcare, or seeking a living wage."

    In a recent opinion piece, retired Air Force Lt. Col. William J. Astore—a self-described "card-carrying member of the military-industrial complex"—wrote in favor of slashing the Pentagon budget in half.

    "Isn't it time to force the Pentagon to pass an audit each year—it's failed the last five!—or else cut its budget even more deeply?" asked Astore, whose piece invoked earlier military-industrial complex critics including former World War II Supreme Allied Commander and President Dwight D. Eisenhower and Maj. Gen. Smedley Butler.

    "Isn't it time to hold Congress truly responsible for enabling ever more war by voting out military sycophants?" Astore added. "Isn't it time to recognize, as America's founders did, that sustaining a vast military establishment constitutes the slow and certain death of democracy?"

    In an interview with CBS News' "The Takeout" that aired last week, former U.S. Acting Defense Secretary Christopher C. Miller also said the military budget should be halved.

    "We have created an entire enterprise that focuses economically on creating crisis to justify outrageously high defense spending," said the former U.S. Army Special Forces colonel—who served for 73 days during the final months of the Trump administration, including during the January 6, 2021 attack on the U.S. Capitol.

    "I think by constantly harping on the fact that China is the new threat and we're going to go to war with them someday actually plays right into Chairman [Xi Jinping's] hands and the Chinese Communist Party," Miller added.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Brett Wilkins.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/14/as-pentagon-budget-nears-1-trillion-groups-tell-biden-enough/feed/ 0 372699
    Stop Super-Sizing the Pentagon Budget, 59 Groups Tell President Biden https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/14/stop-super-sizing-the-pentagon-budget-59-groups-tell-president-biden/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/14/stop-super-sizing-the-pentagon-budget-59-groups-tell-president-biden/#respond Tue, 14 Feb 2023 18:40:03 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/stop-super-sizing-the-pentagon-budget-59-groups-tell-president-biden The Biden administration must stop proposing to super-size the Pentagon budget and instead divert funds to better meet the needs of the American people, 59 groups led by Public Citizen said in a letter sent today. The letter follows in the wake of press reports that Biden may propose the largest military budget in history for FY 24, fast approaching $1 trillion.

    “We reject pouring our dollars into outdated ships, malfunctioning planes, or record-breaking contractor CEO salaries while everyday people remain hungry, unhoused, in need of adequate healthcare, or seeking a living wage,” the letter reads. “Please kick off this year’s budget process by putting forward a proposal that addresses our most urgent funding priorities by giving the Pentagon a direly-needed trim.”

    This year’s military budget – at $858 billion – is the second highest since World War II. It is ten times Russia’s military budget, more than 2.5 times that of China, and greater than the next nine countries combined. More than half of that money will go straight into the pockets of big corporate weapons contractors. Astonishingly, Congress added $45 billion on top of what the administration initially proposed for the Pentagon in FY 23 – an amount greater than the entire climate portion of the Inflation Reduction Act.

    The Pentagon has never been able to pass an audit or properly account for the hundreds of billions it already receives.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/14/stop-super-sizing-the-pentagon-budget-59-groups-tell-president-biden/feed/ 0 372594
    Mediawatch: NZ’s public media policy put out of its misery https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/08/mediawatch-nzs-public-media-policy-put-out-of-its-misery/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/08/mediawatch-nzs-public-media-policy-put-out-of-its-misery/#respond Wed, 08 Feb 2023 04:41:08 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=84221 ANALYSIS: By Colin Peacock, RNZ Mediawatch presenter

    Prime Minister Chris Hipkins has confirmed today what pundits have predicted for weeks: the plan for a public media entity has been scrapped — before they even settled on a name for it.

    It is the second time in five years Labour has backed away from its public media policy, leaving RNZ and TVNZ in limbo again — along with less-heralded overhauls of the media.

    The assumption the government would drop its plan for a new public media entity to be launched on March 1 was sparked by the then-Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern last December.

    She signalled reforms diverting ministers from the cost of living and post-Covid recovery would be shelved. She told Newsroom the so-called RNZ/TVNZ was “not number one on the government agenda”.

    Broadcasting Minister Willie Jackson had already made a mess of explaining the policy in a now-notorious TVNZ interview, which also amplified sideline concerns about possible political influence.

    Earlier in the year on Mediawatch, Jackson dismissed criticism of the proposed legislation, some of it coming from strong supporters of public broadcasting.

    That came back to bite him last month when the parliamentary committee scrutinising the Bill rewrote important parts of it. Recent opinion polls revealed both low levels of support for the merger and little understanding of it, while rival media lobbyists called the new entity “a monolithic monster bad for the country”.

    ‘Reprioritised spending’
    The formerly non-committal opposition leader declared it, not just bad but mad, repeatedly labeling the policy “insane”.

    This year Ardern’s successor, Prime Minister Chris Hipkins, also spoke of the urgent need to “reprioritise spending” while recent reporting has almost universally described the merger as “on Chippy’s chopping block”.

    Today the axe fell, finally and formally, putting a policy five years in the making out of its misery after millions of dollars and years of effort.

    He said RNZ’s funding would increase in the short term “around the $10 million mark” and this could be done before the next Budget process.

    RNZ put out a statement welcoming the “clarity” and the prospect of more funding. TVNZ was also “pleased to now have clarity . . . and a clear path forward for TVNZ”.

    MediaWorks CEO Cam Wallace said he was pleased but too much had been spent on this proposal “at a time when the industry was dealing with decreasing advertising revenues.”

    What was the plan anyway – and what went wrong?
    When Kris Faafoi took over as Broadcasting Minister in late 2018, Labour junked its previous policy (launched in 2017 by then opposition leader Jacinda Ardern) of boosting RNZ with $38 million a year to become a truly multimedia public media platform — and ignoring TVNZ.

    The government — through the Ministry for Culture and Heritage — launched a Strong Public Media policy instead.

    Consultants who kicked off the project in 2019 concluded “the status quo is not an option”.

    They said TVNZ and RNZ in their current form were not sustainable, given rapid digitally-driven changes in the media.

    Covid-19 stalled the policy’s progress, but Cabinet finally agreed in 2021, greenlighting the creation of a new public media entity to replace TVNZ and RNZ.

    They insisted it was not merely a merger of the two, but the enabling legislation unveiled last year was effectively just that.

    Budget 2022 allocated $109 million a year until 2026 to fund the new entity’s operations, but Kris Faafoi, Willie Jackson and the PM never gave any clarity about what new services the new entity might offer.

    They said yet-to-be appointed executives and governors would decide that, not ministers.

    Similarly, no-one in charge convincingly addressed the fear that a hyper-commercial culture at TVNZ would clash with the charter-driven, public service MO of RNZ.

    The entire process was carried almost entirely behind closed doors — and without a proper business case — until the public and other media agencies got a fortnight to make submissions on the legislation late last year.

    So what next?
    Effectively it will be business as usual for RNZ and TVNZ — both of which can pause plans to launch things like admin and IT services as a single system less than a month from now.

    RNZ will carry on as a fully-funded bonsai-scale (by international standards) public broadcaster operating on radio and online under its existing charter (which is currently under review) with a yet-to-be announced increase in funding.

    TVNZ will carry on as a possibly the world’s only commercial state-owned TV company doing news and entertainment online, which dominates the free-to-air TV market, but makes no significant money for the nation.

    At all stages of the merger proposal, TVNZ has reassured advertisers it would still be open for their business. (Last year Willie Jackson chided TVNZ for dragging the chain, a claim denied by chief executive Simon Power on Mediawatch).

    RNZ’s board, its chair Jim Mather and chief executive Paul Thompson, strongly backed the plan for a new entity from the early stages.

    New Zealand on Air was notified last year around $80 million of its budget would be re-allocated to the new entity, forcing it to urgently pull apart its own funding plans and priorities. Today the PM also announced NZoA could expect an increase in funding.

    The long-term plan
    There is no long-term plan yet — beyond the status quo, which consultants and Cabinet eventually agreed was “not an option”.

    But the Broadcasting Minister — who retained his portfolio in the recent reshuffle — has much to confront.

    The collapse of the so-called merger goes beyond RNZ and TVNZ into other overhauls that were supposed to run in parallel with the new media entity’s creation.

    Willie Jackson is also Minister of Māori Development, overseeing Māori broadcasting. He secured $80m over the past two years in extra funding for programming. But this was tied to a twice-undertaken Māori media sector shift, which was held back for — and meshed-in with — the new public media entity plan.

    Jackson is also in charge of the legislative backstop to ensure tech titans Google and Meta cough up for news media content they share, a significant stream of income for under-pressure news outlets for the future.

    And then there is the ongoing overhaul of the oversight of the media designed to better “protect Kiwis from harm”.

    The media and online content regulation review has been run by the Department of Internal Affairs under Jan Tinetti, recently promoted to other portfolios.

    This is supposed to overhaul four separate overlapping pre-digital agencies regulating the media, but is also unlikely to be “bread and butter” business for Labour in 2023.

    The public media entity policy has finally been put out of its misery, but there will be consequences for kicking the can down the road again in a public media system that is still operating on 30-year-old foundations and swallowing a sizable budget for limited public returns.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/08/mediawatch-nzs-public-media-policy-put-out-of-its-misery/feed/ 0 370700
    Mediawatch: NZ’s public media policy put out of its misery https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/08/mediawatch-nzs-public-media-policy-put-out-of-its-misery-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/08/mediawatch-nzs-public-media-policy-put-out-of-its-misery-2/#respond Wed, 08 Feb 2023 04:41:08 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=84221 ANALYSIS: By Colin Peacock, RNZ Mediawatch presenter

    Prime Minister Chris Hipkins has confirmed today what pundits have predicted for weeks: the plan for a public media entity has been scrapped — before they even settled on a name for it.

    It is the second time in five years Labour has backed away from its public media policy, leaving RNZ and TVNZ in limbo again — along with less-heralded overhauls of the media.

    The assumption the government would drop its plan for a new public media entity to be launched on March 1 was sparked by the then-Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern last December.

    She signalled reforms diverting ministers from the cost of living and post-Covid recovery would be shelved. She told Newsroom the so-called RNZ/TVNZ was “not number one on the government agenda”.

    Broadcasting Minister Willie Jackson had already made a mess of explaining the policy in a now-notorious TVNZ interview, which also amplified sideline concerns about possible political influence.

    Earlier in the year on Mediawatch, Jackson dismissed criticism of the proposed legislation, some of it coming from strong supporters of public broadcasting.

    That came back to bite him last month when the parliamentary committee scrutinising the Bill rewrote important parts of it. Recent opinion polls revealed both low levels of support for the merger and little understanding of it, while rival media lobbyists called the new entity “a monolithic monster bad for the country”.

    ‘Reprioritised spending’
    The formerly non-committal opposition leader declared it, not just bad but mad, repeatedly labeling the policy “insane”.

    This year Ardern’s successor, Prime Minister Chris Hipkins, also spoke of the urgent need to “reprioritise spending” while recent reporting has almost universally described the merger as “on Chippy’s chopping block”.

    Today the axe fell, finally and formally, putting a policy five years in the making out of its misery after millions of dollars and years of effort.

    He said RNZ’s funding would increase in the short term “around the $10 million mark” and this could be done before the next Budget process.

    RNZ put out a statement welcoming the “clarity” and the prospect of more funding. TVNZ was also “pleased to now have clarity . . . and a clear path forward for TVNZ”.

    MediaWorks CEO Cam Wallace said he was pleased but too much had been spent on this proposal “at a time when the industry was dealing with decreasing advertising revenues.”

    What was the plan anyway – and what went wrong?
    When Kris Faafoi took over as Broadcasting Minister in late 2018, Labour junked its previous policy (launched in 2017 by then opposition leader Jacinda Ardern) of boosting RNZ with $38 million a year to become a truly multimedia public media platform — and ignoring TVNZ.

    The government — through the Ministry for Culture and Heritage — launched a Strong Public Media policy instead.

    Consultants who kicked off the project in 2019 concluded “the status quo is not an option”.

    They said TVNZ and RNZ in their current form were not sustainable, given rapid digitally-driven changes in the media.

    Covid-19 stalled the policy’s progress, but Cabinet finally agreed in 2021, greenlighting the creation of a new public media entity to replace TVNZ and RNZ.

    They insisted it was not merely a merger of the two, but the enabling legislation unveiled last year was effectively just that.

    Budget 2022 allocated $109 million a year until 2026 to fund the new entity’s operations, but Kris Faafoi, Willie Jackson and the PM never gave any clarity about what new services the new entity might offer.

    They said yet-to-be appointed executives and governors would decide that, not ministers.

    Similarly, no-one in charge convincingly addressed the fear that a hyper-commercial culture at TVNZ would clash with the charter-driven, public service MO of RNZ.

    The entire process was carried almost entirely behind closed doors — and without a proper business case — until the public and other media agencies got a fortnight to make submissions on the legislation late last year.

    So what next?
    Effectively it will be business as usual for RNZ and TVNZ — both of which can pause plans to launch things like admin and IT services as a single system less than a month from now.

    RNZ will carry on as a fully-funded bonsai-scale (by international standards) public broadcaster operating on radio and online under its existing charter (which is currently under review) with a yet-to-be announced increase in funding.

    TVNZ will carry on as a possibly the world’s only commercial state-owned TV company doing news and entertainment online, which dominates the free-to-air TV market, but makes no significant money for the nation.

    At all stages of the merger proposal, TVNZ has reassured advertisers it would still be open for their business. (Last year Willie Jackson chided TVNZ for dragging the chain, a claim denied by chief executive Simon Power on Mediawatch).

    RNZ’s board, its chair Jim Mather and chief executive Paul Thompson, strongly backed the plan for a new entity from the early stages.

    New Zealand on Air was notified last year around $80 million of its budget would be re-allocated to the new entity, forcing it to urgently pull apart its own funding plans and priorities. Today the PM also announced NZoA could expect an increase in funding.

    The long-term plan
    There is no long-term plan yet — beyond the status quo, which consultants and Cabinet eventually agreed was “not an option”.

    But the Broadcasting Minister — who retained his portfolio in the recent reshuffle — has much to confront.

    The collapse of the so-called merger goes beyond RNZ and TVNZ into other overhauls that were supposed to run in parallel with the new media entity’s creation.

    Willie Jackson is also Minister of Māori Development, overseeing Māori broadcasting. He secured $80m over the past two years in extra funding for programming. But this was tied to a twice-undertaken Māori media sector shift, which was held back for — and meshed-in with — the new public media entity plan.

    Jackson is also in charge of the legislative backstop to ensure tech titans Google and Meta cough up for news media content they share, a significant stream of income for under-pressure news outlets for the future.

    And then there is the ongoing overhaul of the oversight of the media designed to better “protect Kiwis from harm”.

    The media and online content regulation review has been run by the Department of Internal Affairs under Jan Tinetti, recently promoted to other portfolios.

    This is supposed to overhaul four separate overlapping pre-digital agencies regulating the media, but is also unlikely to be “bread and butter” business for Labour in 2023.

    The public media entity policy has finally been put out of its misery, but there will be consequences for kicking the can down the road again in a public media system that is still operating on 30-year-old foundations and swallowing a sizable budget for limited public returns.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/08/mediawatch-nzs-public-media-policy-put-out-of-its-misery-2/feed/ 0 370701
    Battle Over Budget a Great Moment to Envision a Better, More Equally Prosperous Nation https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/02/battle-over-budget-a-great-moment-to-envision-a-better-more-equally-prosperous-nation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/02/battle-over-budget-a-great-moment-to-envision-a-better-more-equally-prosperous-nation/#respond Thu, 02 Feb 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/budget-for-a-more-prosperous-us

    The State of the Union address and the forthcoming President’s budget are opportunities for the President to lay out a vision of the country we want to be and the policy changes that will help us get there. We are in a period of divided government and deep differences along party lines. Large-scale legislative change this year is unlikely in most areas. But to plot a course for the future, we must continue to grapple with the bigger questions about the nation we want to become.

    In times of divided government, policymakers should seek common ground to take modest steps forward on policy where they can and lay out for the country the larger changes they think would strengthen our nation, so that ultimately the public can decide that future course through the ballot box and their own engagement in the policy process.

    A key question for all federal policymakers — the President as well as members of Congress — should be: how would you change federal policy to move us closer to a nation where everyone — regardless of background or identities — can thrive and share in the nation’s prosperity? While we have made significant progress toward this goal over the last 50 years, much work remains.

    House Republicans are currently manufacturing a crisis by demanding cuts that would almost certainly target health care, assistance for families with low incomes, education, and more in exchange for raising the debt ceiling. Not only does this jeopardize our economy, it’s a distraction from focusing on the needs of the nation and a policy agenda to address them.

    A key question for all federal policymakers should be: how would you change federal policy to move us closer to a nation where everyone — regardless of background or identities — can thrive and share in the nation’s prosperity?

    An agenda designed to broaden opportunity and reduce the too-high levels of hardship people across the country face would invest in children, support workers and their families, address basic needs that remain out of reach for too many, meet the needs of low-income seniors and people with disabilities, and reform our immigration system so everyone can be fully included in our society.

    Too Many People Face Significant Hardship in the United States

    Over the last 50 years, the U.S. has made significant progress in reducing poverty and expanding access to affordable health coverage. As just one example, in 1970, the poverty rate among children stood at 27.5 percent (measured using the Supplemental Poverty Measure adjusted for inflation[1]); in 2018 (the last year of reliable data before the pandemic), it stood at 14.5 percent. Glaring differences in poverty across race and ethnicity narrowed over this period, but remained very large as a consequence of systemic racism that has limited opportunities in education, employment, and housing.

    While we have made substantial progress since the 1970s, tens of millions of people in the United States face significant economic and health insecurity, our analysis of Census data shows, including difficulty affording the basics and serious hardships like eviction, food insecurity, and lack of access to needed health care; an inability to afford child care or provide school clothes for their children; and even homelessness.[2] This includes households who face temporary periods of hardship due to reasons such as a job loss or an illness in the family, and those who face challenges making ends meet over multiple years, due to low pay, high housing and other costs, unsteady employment, illness, or disability, among other factors.

    Prior to the COVID-19 pandemic, more than 1 in 4 households, including more than 1 in 3 households with children, experienced a major form of hardship — specifically, an inability to afford adequate food, shelter, or utilities — in one or more years of the three-year period from 2014 to 2016. High levels of hardship affect all communities, but rates are even higher among people of color. Among Black and Latinx households with children, roughly 1 in 2 reported one of these specified hardships over the three-year period examined. In 2019, nearly 11 million low-income households paid more than half of their income in rent. And in 2021, some 28 million people still lacked health coverage, even with temporary COVID-related coverage expansions and protections in place.

    These kinds of hardships reduce well-being in the near-term and have long-term harmful consequences as well. Strong evidence shows that economic insecurity and hardship among children, for example, shortchanges their futures, leading to worse educational and health outcomes, while providing supports to families improves children’s long-term outcomes.[3] These facts illustrate striking needs and call for policymakers, regardless of political party, to articulate effective solutions.

    Lack of support for workers adds to hardship and insecurity. The U.S. is alone among wealthy countries in lacking a national paid leave policy. Our child care system is dramatically underfunded, so that only a small share of children whose families need help paying for child care and qualify for it get any assistance at all.[4]And when workers lose their jobs, many — particularly lower-paid workers and workers of color — don’t qualify for any jobless benefits because of restrictive eligibility rules in many state unemployment programs or, if they do qualify, receive very low benefits.[5] For many, temporary unemployment causes immediate financial hardship.

    The lack of support for workers harms low-paid workers most acutely. Black and Latinx workers, women, and immigrants are over-represented in this group, due racism, systemic marginalization, and other factors that limit education and employment opportunities and result in occupational segregation.

    The nation also leaves many seniors and people with disabilities vulnerable to hardship. Some 14 percent of people aged 65 and older — 7 million people — had incomes below the poverty line in 2018, using the same poverty measure as above. People with disabilities have even higher poverty rates. For example, roughly 1 in 4 non-elderly adults with disabilities -— nearly 4 million people — had incomes below the poverty line in 2018.[6] People with disabilities can face higher costs for housing, transportation, and even food depending on their health needs, and often have constrained resources. The high cost of long-term services and supports, including supports that allow people to live with independence in community-based settings, and our nation’s lack of investment in these services, exacerbates the financial stress that seniors and people with disabilities face.

    A Path Forward

    The level of hardship in the U.S. is a policy choice, not an economic inevitability. We saw during the pandemic that public policy can be used successfully to sharply reduce poverty and hardship, with poverty overall and among children reaching historically low levels in 2021. Other wealthy nations make different policy choices and have different outcomes: lower poverty rates, universal health coverage, affordable child care, and better protections for workers when they get sick or lose their jobs.

    Here are some of the policies that would reflect a choice to reduce hardship and expand opportunity and provide solid answers to the question of how federal policy can help us build toward a stronger, more equitable nation.

    Invest in children. Supporting families improves children’s trajectories, benefitting them and their families as well as the nation as a whole. One important way to better support families is to expand the Child Tax Credit, with a particular focus on extending it to children who receive a partial credit or none at all because their families’ incomes are too low.[7]

    We know this works. The American Rescue Plan’s 2021 expanded Child Tax Credit provided the full credit for the first time to children in families with low incomes and increased the credit amount overall, helping to drive down child poverty dramatically. And, contrary to opponents’ predictions, the employment rate among parents rose by the same amount as among non-parents (who didn’t get a Child Tax Credit) in 2021. Further, the experience of Canada, which has a larger child allowance than the U.S. and a higher employment rate, shows that strong income support can coexist with high labor force participation. Most economists predict minimal employment changes if a refundable, expanded credit were made permanent in the U.S.

    Other supports are critical as well — for example, we underfund early learning, and families with the very lowest incomes need more help to stave off hardship and move forward than most cash aid programs in states now provide. The key point is that too many kids can’t realize their own dreams, shortchanging the entire country, because we fail to invest in them.

    Help workers. The United States should do more to support workers, both by making it easier for people to work and better supporting those who lose their jobs and are temporarily unemployed. For example:

    • Create a national paid family and medical leave program so that workers in every state who welcome a new child into their family, are ill, or need to care for an ill family member can take time off to meet their family’s needs without losing their job or suffering a potentially disastrous financial setback.[8]
    • Invest in child care and early learning so that all children have access to affordable, high-quality early care and education.[9] Investing in child care and early learning supports healthy child development while also helping parents by easing the strain on their family budgets. It can also be a strategy for expanding the labor force and improving the wages of child care workers who struggle to support their own families.[10]
    • Create a robust21st century unemployment insurancesystem that gives unemployed workers in all states the adequate financial assistance they and their families deserve when they lose a job and need to find another.[11]
    • Expand the Earned Income Tax Credit for workers without minor children at home to supplement the wages of low-paid workers and help them make ends meet.[12]

    Address the affordable housing crisis. Addressing the affordable housing crisis requires a comprehensive approach, including incentivizing affordable housing development, easing policy constraints on rental housing development, and increasing access to rental assistance. Only about 1 in 4 households eligible for federal rental assistance currently receives it because of underfunding, but expanding this assistance is often missing from strategies to increase the supply of affordable housing.

    Rental assistance is highly effective at reducing homelessness, housing instability, and overcrowding, which all harm children and their families. Expanding rental assistance is especially critical for the households that need help the most: people with extremely low incomes cannot afford housing without a subsidy because even the lowest rents are more than 30 percent of their income, the accepted threshold for affordability.

    Vouchers and other forms of rental assistance are a necessary component of solving the affordable housing crisis and offer the most effective and immediate way to bridge the large gap between people’s rent costs and their incomes.

    Expand and improve health coverage. Recent increases in premium tax credits that subsidize the Affordable Care Act’s (ACA) marketplace plans helped boost enrollment in the marketplaces, but policymakers should take additional steps to reach universal coverage and improve health equity.

    • Extend health coverage to more people by closing the Medicaid coverage gap and eliminating immigration-related eligibility restrictions. Closing the Medicaid coverage gap would expand coverage to more than 2 million people — most of whom are Black or Latinx — who lack any path to coverage because they live in states that have refused to adopt the ACA’s Medicaid expansion.[13] States should expand Medicaid, and the federal government should provide coverage if they don’t. Additionally, many immigrants, including many with a documented status, are barred from receiving health coverage through Medicaid and the Children’s Health Insurance Program because of their immigration status.[14] This leaves many without affordable coverage, worsening health outcomes.
    • Help more eligible people get, keep, and use Medicaid and marketplace coverage by streamlining program rules, engaging with states to modernize eligibility and enrollment practices to lessen the burden on enrollees, broadening targeted and effective outreach, and assuring robust access to services for those with coverage.
    • Improve affordability in marketplace plans by reducing barriers such as high deductibles and other costs that prevent people from getting needed care.

    Support low-income seniors and people with disabilities. While some policymakers have called for cuts to Social Security and Medicare, many others have expressed the importance of protecting these supports that millions of older people and people with disabilities rely on. But protecting these programs from harmful cuts is not enough to meet the needs of low-income seniors and people with disabilities.

    Too often policymakers design policies that benefit high-income seniors with substantial savings rather than seniors who struggle to make ends meet. Instead, our policies should target support for low-income seniors and people with disabilities. For example, policymakers should allow very low-income seniors and people with disabilities with modest savings to qualify for Supplemental Security Income, which provides cash aid to very low-income older and disabled people, by raising both the program’s very low savings limit and the program’s benefit levels, which leave many below the poverty line.[15]

    Policymakers also should increase investments in home- and community-based services so more seniors and people with disabilities can afford and access the care that they require.

    Reform our immigration system to expand opportunity, improve well-being, and promote equity. Immigration reform shouldprovide legal status and a pathway to citizenship for millions of people who are vital members of our communities and work in important jobs but either do not have a documented status or pathway to citizenship. Forcing so many members of our communities to live without a lawful status and the ability to become citizens leaves them vulnerable to criminal mistreatment by employers and keeps them from being fully included in our economy and civic life. It also means they often have no pathway to affordable health coverage or to assistance when they fall on tough times. Millions of children, most of whom are U.S. citizens, live in families that include adults without a documented status, contributing to economic insecurity and hardship for children, shortchanging their futures — and the nation’s as well.[16]

    Build a 21st Century Revenue System to Support Investments

    Addressing these needs is often dismissed as too expensive, but the U.S. is a wealthy nation, and most similarly wealthy countries spend a larger share of their nation’s resources on public services and investments than we do (accounting for government spending across federal, state, and local levels). Paid leave, universal health coverage, more robust income assistance (like child allowances), and child care systems are in place in these countries but noticeably absent from ours. These investments would not only reduce poverty, inequity, and inequality but would broaden opportunity in ways that would benefit the nation as a whole. The nation can afford these investments if it is willing to reform its tax code to collect more revenues from households and corporations that have benefitted most from the nation’s prosperity.

    Children who experience economic hardships face tougher odds, often finishing fewer years of education and having poorer health as adults.

    Due in part to previous expensive, unpaid for tax cuts in 2001, 2003, and 2017, our revenue system collects too little to support the investments the nation needs. And those tax cuts have failed to deliver on promises of more robust investment and growth.[17]

    The current tax code allows the wealthiest households in the country to pay little or no individual income tax each year, because their primary source of income — unrealized capital gains — is not counted as income on tax returns. And in some cases, these gains will never be subject to income tax because they will be passed down to heirs. Because of rate cuts and special tax preferences, the current tax code also allows some profitable multinational corporations and owners of large pass-through businesses to pay very low tax rates.

    Reforming our tax code so that it collects more revenues and requires very wealthy people and profitable corporations and businesses to pay a fairer amount in taxes would achieve several goals. It would increase the funds available for investments in people, communities, and the economy; push against high levels of inequality; help address longer-term fiscal challenges; and begin to restore the public’s faith that government works on behalf of all people, not just the well-heeled.

    Why It Matters

    Economic and health insecurity have real-world consequences. Hardships like food insecurity and eviction can damage the health of children and adults alike, and the lack of stability can make it harder for adults to seek or keep jobs. Children who experience economic hardships face tougher odds, often finishing fewer years of education and having poorer health as adults. People who lack access to affordable, quality health care have worse health outcomes and suffer more preventable deaths. When households face these kinds of hardships, the stress on them too often mounts in ways that harm both children and adults.

    Hardship and insecurity affect people in every state, in urban and rural communities, and across racial and ethnic groups. At the same time, hardship and insecurity are far more prevalent among people and groups who have faced systemic barriers to opportunity and who have been marginalized through explicit policies and practices, particularly Black, Indigenous, and other people of color.

    We should not accept the status quo or put our long-term vision on hold. Policymakers need to have a clear agenda and engage in the hard work to build support for the policies that will lead to brighter futures for millions of children, make millions of households more secure, and make our nation fairer and more equitable. The State of the Union, the President’s budget, congressional budget plans, and individual policymakers’ ideas and proposals all provide an opportunity to lay out priorities and make the case to the public about core fiscal policy questions: what and whom should we invest in (and who gets left behind when investment falls short) and how should we finance the investments the nation needs.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Sharon Parrott.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/02/battle-over-budget-a-great-moment-to-envision-a-better-more-equally-prosperous-nation/feed/ 0 369281
    Analysis Warns ‘Deep’ Spending Cuts Pushed by GOP Would Severely Harm Key Programs https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/02/analysis-warns-deep-spending-cuts-pushed-by-gop-would-severely-harm-key-programs/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/02/analysis-warns-deep-spending-cuts-pushed-by-gop-would-severely-harm-key-programs/#respond Thu, 02 Feb 2023 12:07:43 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/analysis-gop-spending-cuts After a private meeting with President Joe Biden on Wednesday, House Speaker Kevin McCarthy reiterated his support for steep federal spending cuts as part of any deal to raise the debt ceiling, upholding his commitment to the far-right Republicans who threatened to deny him the top leadership post.

    "I was very clear that we're not passing a clean debt ceiling," McCarthy (R-Calif.) told reporters following his conversation with the president. "We're not spending more next year than we spent this year. We've got to find a way to change this and I want to sit down and work."

    While some members of his caucus have vocally singled out Social Security and Medicare, McCarthy has declined to explain precisely what and how much he wants to cut. But as part of a deal with the far-right flank of his caucus, McCarthy agreed to push for a cap on federal spending at fiscal year 2022 levels.

    According to an analysis released Wednesday by the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP), such a cap would entail significant cuts to "a wide array of public services that the federal government provides and that people and communities depend on, including public health; food safety inspections; air traffic control operations; the administration of Medicare and Social Security; housing and other assistance for families with low incomes; education and job training; and scientific and medical research, to name just a few."

    "Moreover, many of these programs are still feeling the effects of austerity imposed largely by the 2011 Budget Control Act," CBPP's Joel Friedman and Richard Kogan wrote, pointing to a law that the GOP forced through following a damaging round of debt ceiling brinkmanship. "Even with a recent boost in 2023, funding for non-defense programs outside of veterans' medical care is about 2% below its 2010 level, adjusted for inflation, and 9% below when adjusted for both inflation and population growth. Funding for these programs needs to rise to meet national needs, address shortfalls that hamper the delivery of government services, and help create an economy in which everyone has the resources they need to thrive."

    CBPP's estimates suggest that a federal spending cut of $146 billion across military and non-military programs would be required to meet House Republicans' demand to cap fiscal year 2024 spending at 2022 levels.

    But Friedman and Kogan stressed that cuts to non-military discretionary spending—a broad category that includes healthcare and education programs—would have to be even larger if the Pentagon budget is shielded, as some House Republicans have proposed. Military spending represents more than half of all federal discretionary spending.

    "Reducing defense funding to its 2022 level in 2024 would require a cut of $76.2 billion from its current level," Friedman and Kogan noted. "If instead one assumes that defense funding is frozen in 2024—that is, held at its 2023 level rather than being reduced to the 2022 level—but that House Republicans still press to return total discretionary funding to its 2022 level, then those additional cuts would need to be absorbed by non-defense programs. If that comes on top of protecting veterans’ medical care, then the remaining non-defense programs would need to be cut by 24.3% on average."

    "The cuts the House Republicans are calling for, whether achieved by reducing non-defense programs categorized as discretionary or mandatory, are deep," Friedman and Kogan concluded. "Claims that they are designed merely to root out 'wasteful spending' are highly misleading and distract from the policy implications of these proposals and the harm they would cause."

    The White House has insisted on legislation that raises the debt ceiling without any attached spending cuts or other conditions, a message it reiterated after Biden's meeting with McCarthy on Wednesday.

    "President Biden made clear that, as every other leader in both parties in Congress has affirmed, it is their shared duty not to allow an unprecedented and economically catastrophic default," the White House said in a readout of the meeting. "The president welcomes a separate discussion with congressional leaders about how to reduce the deficit and control the national debt while continuing to grow the economy."

    As McCarthy prepared for his discussion with Biden, the Republican Study Committee (RSC)—the largest House GOP caucus—convened on Capitol Hill to discuss their priorities for time-sensitive debt ceiling negotiations.

    According to a presentation slide obtained by Politico's Olivia Beavers, RSC chair Rep. Kevin Hern (R-Okla.) offered a broad outline of the GOP's group's priorities, including a reversal of recent discretionary spending increases. Last year, the RSC called for gradually increasing the retirement age and partially privatizing Social Security.

    Aaron Fritschner, communications director for Rep. Don Beyer (D-Va.), criticized House Republicans' continued refusal to put forth a budget detailing their specific demands.

    "Wow what a disaster," Fritschner tweeted in response to the RSC presentation. "They truly have no idea what to do."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/02/02/analysis-warns-deep-spending-cuts-pushed-by-gop-would-severely-harm-key-programs/feed/ 0 369187
    GOP’s Farcical Debt Ceiling Ploy Deserves Farcical Response: Mint a Really, Really Big Coin https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/27/gops-farcical-debt-ceiling-ploy-deserves-farcical-response-mint-a-really-really-big-coin/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/27/gops-farcical-debt-ceiling-ploy-deserves-farcical-response-mint-a-really-really-big-coin/#respond Fri, 27 Jan 2023 19:12:25 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/mint-trillion-dollar-coin-debt

    Key House Republicans want to slash Medicare and Social Security so badly that they’re willing to risk a global financial crisis over it.

    Their weapon? The debt ceiling, an arbitrary, purely political limit on federal borrowing that bears no meaningful relationship to the health of the economy. It’s a farcical problem — and demands an equally farcical solution.

    The debt ceiling doesn’t limit what the government can spend. It limits how much the Treasury can borrow to pay for spending Congress has already required. Refusing to raise the debt ceiling amounts to prohibiting the government from paying debt that Congress already incurred.

    Also read: Yellen says debt-limit standoff risks ‘self-imposed calamity’

    If that happens, it would shred the full faith and credit of the United States, send our national credit rating down the tubes, and plunge both the U.S. and global economies into crisis. It could destroy 6 million jobs and wipe out $15 trillion in household wealth in this country alone.

    It’s not about deficits

    Republicans say this is about reducing the deficit, but their actions say otherwise.

    The ballooning of the deficit since 2001 has been caused in large part by unfunded wars, exorbitant tax cuts for the very wealthy and corporations, and out-of-control Pentagon spending. More of the same helped President Donald Trump add nearly $8 trillion to the national debt in just four years, an increase that started well before the pandemic.

    Yet the Republicans, under Trump, simply suspended the debt ceiling.

    And now, in the same breath that they complain about deficits, they call for more tax cuts for the wealthy — and many want more Pentagon spending, too. Fiscally responsible they are not. They’re practicing pure political chicanery, using the debt ceiling to hold the well-being of average Americans ransom to their ideological demands.

    That’s exactly what they did after taking control of Congress in 2011. Back then Democrats acquiesced, resulting in the passage of the so-called Budget Control Act — a devastating economic austerity program that set our recovery from the Great Recession back by five to six years, according to the Economic Policy Institute.

    If the right gets its way today, all mandatory spending — including Social Security and Medicare, veterans’ programs, housing and nutrition assistance for struggling families, support for farmers and small businesses and students, and Affordable Care Act subsidies that help insure tens of millions of Americans — could be fodder for the chopping block.

    What can be done?

    That can’t happen. But neither can a debt default. So what can be done?

    The only responsible policy is to abolish the debt ceiling. But with hardline Republicans dead-set on political theater and threatening an economic calamity, an abolition is unlikely to get through Congress.

    So this farcical problem demands a farcical solution: The Biden administration should simply mint a really, really big coin. That way, it could spend the money Congress has legally required it to spend — without borrowing the money Congress won’t let it borrow.

    The White House has resisted the “really big coin” idea, but It’s perfectly legal. In fact, it would help the administration meet its constitutional obligation under the 14th Amendment, which states that the faith and credit of the United States can never be in question.

    Some observers have called on President Joe Biden to make it a trillion-dollar coin. I say mint a bazillion-dollar coin — and put this far-right absurdity to rest with a touch of productive absurdity.

    Then we can push for a budget that raises revenue via fair taxes and makes necessary the social investments that help all of us. You know, governing.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Karen Dolan.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/27/gops-farcical-debt-ceiling-ploy-deserves-farcical-response-mint-a-really-really-big-coin/feed/ 0 367866
    Nevada’s New Governor Vilified Lobbyist’s Influence in COVID Lab Scandal, Then Asked Him to Help With Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/25/nevadas-new-governor-vilified-lobbyists-influence-in-covid-lab-scandal-then-asked-him-to-help-with-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/25/nevadas-new-governor-vilified-lobbyists-influence-in-covid-lab-scandal-then-asked-him-to-help-with-budget/#respond Wed, 25 Jan 2023 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/nevada-lombardo-northshore-covid-sisolak-willden by Anjeanette Damon

    ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up for Dispatches, a newsletter that spotlights wrongdoing around the country, to receive our stories in your inbox every week.

    During his contentious campaign to become Nevada governor, Joe Lombardo accused the Democratic incumbent of catering to the family of a donor and their lobbyist who helped an error-prone COVID-19 testing lab get licensed in the state.

    Shortly after he won the race, Lombardo, a Republican, quietly turned to that same lobbyist for help building the state budget, giving him access to confidential documents and putting him in a position that allowed him to advocate for state funding sought by his clients.

    Lobbyist Mike Willden’s name doesn’t appear on the list of people Lombardo appointed to his transition team as he takes the reins from former Gov. Steve Sisolak. But emails and budget documents obtained by ProPublica show Willden was invited to budget meetings with each of Lombardo’s department directors, provided advice on health care spending and was involved in discussions on changes to the spending plan worth nearly $30 million a year to his clients — though not all of those changes were ultimately approved.

    He also was involved in discussions on an effort to extend a nearly $600 million contract for one of his clients to continue administering Nevada’s Medicaid program.

    Willden has expertise in state government, including the complex Medicaid budget. He served as chief of staff to the last Republican governor, after decades working for the Department of Health and Human Services, including 13 years as director.

    The owner of the lobbying firm that employs Willden said in a statement that he volunteered hundreds of hours to help Lombardo’s transition team with the budget and that none of his clients “materially benefited from Mike’s involvement.”

    “He has been involved in five gubernatorial transitions and has played a vital role in the preparation of more than 20 budgets,” said Richard Perkins, owner of The Perkins Company and a former state assemblyman. “He has unique expertise, experience and integrity. His involvement is especially critical, in the incredibly compressed time frame” a new governor has to prepare a budget.

    “I know that cynicism and skepticism dominate our political and governing environment these days, however, it’s a shame that a long time, trusted public servant, like Mike Wilden, is criticized, and not truly appreciated,” Perkins added.

    Willden played a central role in a controversy that rocked the final year of Sisolak’s administration. In late 2021, Willden leaned on his relationships with state regulators and Sisolak’s office to speed the licensing of COVID-19 testing laboratory Northshore Clinical.

    Last year, ProPublica detailed serious problems with the lab’s operations in Nevada, including questionable billing practices and a high rate of false negative results. At the time, Willden said he was trying to help the state address a critical shortage in testing by assisting Northshore’s two Nevada representatives, who were family friends of Sisolak’s. Willden said he wasn’t paid by the company or its representatives and was unaware of problems with the lab’s services.

    During the gubernatorial race, Lombardo and Republicans spent heavily on advertising that used the Northshore debacle to portray Sisolak as corrupt and accuse him of jeopardizing the safety of Nevadans to enrich his friends. Lombardo described it as the “biggest scandal in our history” on Twitter, and his campaign dubbed Sisolak “Northshore Steve.”

    Sisolak denied showing favoritism toward the company and said his administration had acted quickly once problems with Northshore’s tests became known.

    Lombardo’s chief of staff, Ben Kieckhefer, said the campaign attacks weren’t on his mind when Willden was asked to help prepare the $11.4 billion, two-year budget, which the governor recommended to the Legislature this week. Under state law, Lombardo had three weeks from the time he took office to complete a proposed spending plan.

    “My thought was we needed to get a budget built. That was my focus,” Kieckhefer said. He dismissed the idea that Willden’s involvement could open Lombardo to the same criticisms the Republican leveled against Sisolak.

    “You’d be hard-pressed to find someone who knows more about the Medicaid budget than Mike,” Kieckhefer said. “Coping with potential conflicts? That’s on me, not on Mike.”

    Documents show Willden worked with Kieckhefer, as well as the incoming deputy chief of staff and two members of the transition team: state Senate Minority Leader Heidi Gansert and Jeremy Aguero, an economic analyst with clients who do business with state and local governments in Nevada. The group held budget meetings with each of the state’s department directors to review funding requests, raise issues and decide what changes should be made to the draft budget from the previous administration.

    Kieckhefer said Willden was already part of the transition team’s budget subcommittee when Kieckhefer was named chief of staff and took over management of the budget process.

    The documents obtained by ProPublica include an “open issues list” drawn up by the working group in late December. It shows that issues affecting three of Willden’s clients featured heavily in the budget discussion.

    For example, Willden lobbies for the Nevada Health Care Association and Center for Assisted Living, an industry group for nursing homes and assisted living facilities. That industry stands to lose $24 million a year in extra Medicaid funding related to the pandemic that’s expected to expire when the public health emergency ends. The document states it’s the industry’s “desire not to experience payment reductions.”

    The document also highlights a requested rate increase worth $4.5 million a year to providers of early childhood intervention services. Willden is a paid lobbyist for the Early Intervention Community Providers Association.

    The largest issue, and perhaps the thorniest, is a lucrative contract to administer the state’s Medicaid program, which provides health insurance for more than 900,000 lower-income Nevadans. Gainwell Technologies, which holds the $558 million contract, is one of Willden’s clients. The contract expires in June, and efforts to renew it have stalled.

    “Immediate action needs to be taken to negotiate a contract extension with Gainwell or there will be no contracted vendor in place as of July 1, 2023,” the document says.

    Kieckhefer said he did not include the request for additional money for nursing homes in the recommended budget but did include the rate increase for early intervention providers. That increase was listed as a top priority of the department director before Willden’s involvement, Kieckhefer said. The Gainwell contract has no bearing on the state budget but was flagged as a serious issue that needs attention, he added.

    Kieckhefer said Willden was “always forthcoming about who he represented” during his work with the transition team. He said he wasn’t too concerned that Willden’s participation may give his clients an advantage.

    “My job is to weigh all the considerations and then act in the way I think is in the best interest of Gov. Lombardo and his priorities,” Kieckhefer said. “I rely on my previous experience and taking counsel from people who also may have experience one way or another. Ultimately, it’s me and the governor making decisions about what’s included in the budget.”


    This content originally appeared on Articles and Investigations - ProPublica and was authored by by Anjeanette Damon.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/25/nevadas-new-governor-vilified-lobbyists-influence-in-covid-lab-scandal-then-asked-him-to-help-with-budget/feed/ 0 367004
    Laos needs more teachers, but budget cuts mean new hires can’t fill gap https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/more-teachers-01122023174429.html https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/more-teachers-01122023174429.html#respond Thu, 12 Jan 2023 23:05:38 +0000 https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/more-teachers-01122023174429.html Laos has been faced with a chronic shortage of teachers and healthcare workers in recent years. 

    But the government’s plan to hire only 800 state employees this year – only some of whom will be teachers and medical staff – due to budgetary constraints amid a host of economic woes means that gap won’t be filled anytime soon, educators and officials say.

    In Laos’ centrally-planned economy, workers in schools and hospitals are generally government employees, and those who want jobs in their chosen fields are dependent on government quotas, as well as passing an examination. Many young people therefore work as volunteers in classrooms and clinics until there is an opening for salaried staff.

    The hiring quota for civil servants has steadily declined in recent years, from 2,000 in 2020 and 1,600 in 2021 to 1,300 last year. Out of that number, the quota for teachers was set at 340 and about 320 as health workers.

    But this year’s lower number means the chances of volunteer workers getting permanent jobs are slim, sources say. 

    The government of new Prime Minister Sonexay Siphandone faces a host of economic ills. It is short on funds because of rampant inflation, high foreign debt and the devaluation of the currency, the kip.

    “There are many districts in the country that will get fewer than the three persons per district,” a volunteer teacher said. “Most of my peer volunteers have quit teaching, and only one or two left, but they don’t know what to do,” said the educator, who declined to be identified as did others in the report, so as not to provoke authorities.

    To make an income, volunteer teachers and healthcare workers usually hold other jobs or rely on family support and accept food and shelter from villagers in provinces where they work to eke out a living.

    Connections seem to help

    Another volunteer teacher said she was disappointed to hear about the new quota for 2022 because there is little chance of educators like her getting hired for permanent teaching jobs, and that only those with connections to local government officials will likely be offered positions.

    “Even though the number of recruits was over 1,000 people [last year], some provinces did not receive the same quotas,” she said. “The government will do the same thing because it’s become part of the culture already that only those who have connections get hired.”

    Primary school education in Laos is compulsory and free at public schools, but instruction in both state-run primary and secondary schools is rudimentary, and few students meet standards in reading, writing and math skills for promotion to higher grade.  

    A third volunteer educator who stopped teaching after waiting many years for a formal salaried position told RFA on Tuesday that this year’s low recruitment figure will make it more difficult for volunteer teachers to pass the exam they must take to get hired permanently.

    This is a way for authorities from the Ministry of Education and Sports to push volunteer educators to stop teaching in hopes of getting a salaried job, she said.

    In the southern province of Savannakhet province alone, about 1,000 teachers quit their volunteer jobs, creating a shortage of educators in the country’s most populous province with roughly 1 million people, a provincial education official told RFA. 

    With a devaluating kip and slim prospects of being hired for a full-time state teaching job, more and more volunteer educators are walking away from their jobs.

    Some schools had to cancel classes and place students in other schools with one teacher providing instruction on many subjects.  

    “There are not enough teachers, though there are more students as villages have expanded,” the official said. “Volunteer teachers have quit. We have too many students in one class, and the study is not up to standard due to a teacher shortage.”

    Translated by Sidney Khotpanya. Edited by Roseanne Gerin and Malcolm Foster.


    This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by By RFA Lao.

    ]]>
    https://www.rfa.org/english/news/laos/more-teachers-01122023174429.html/feed/ 0 364150
    Food Insecurity Among Soldiers Shows Bloated Pentagon Budget Not ‘Going To the Troops’ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/12/food-insecurity-among-soldiers-shows-bloated-pentagon-budget-not-going-to-the-troops/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/12/food-insecurity-among-soldiers-shows-bloated-pentagon-budget-not-going-to-the-troops/#respond Thu, 12 Jan 2023 18:31:48 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/food-insecurity-veterans

    By any standard, the money the United States government pours into its military is simply overwhelming. Take the $858-billion defense spending authorization that President Biden signed into law last month. Not only did that bill pass in an otherwise riven Senate by a bipartisan majority of 83-11, but this year’s budget increase of 4.3% is the second highest in inflation-adjusted terms since World War II. Indeed, the Pentagon has been granted more money than the next 10 largest cabinet agencies combined. And that doesn’t even take into account funding for homeland security or the growing costs of caring for the veterans of this country’s post-9/11 wars. That legislation also includes the largest pay raise in 20 years for active-duty and reserve forces and an expansion of a supplemental “basic needs allowance” to support military families with incomes near the poverty line.

    And yet, despite those changes and a Pentagon budget that’s gone through the roof, many U.S. troops and military families will continue to struggle to make ends meet. Take one basic indicator of welfare: whether or not you have enough to eat. Tens of thousands of service members remain “food insecure” or hungry. Put another way, during the past year, members of those families either worried that their food would run out or actually did run out of food.

    "How could it be that corporate weapons makers are in funding heaven and all too many members of our military in a homegrown version of funding hell?"

    As a military spouse myself and co-founder of the Costs of War Project, I recently interviewed Tech Sergeant Daniel Faust, a full-time Air Force reserve member responsible for training other airmen. He’s a married father of four who has found himself on the brink of homelessness four times between 2012 and 2019 because he had to choose between necessities like groceries and paying the rent. He managed to make ends meet by seeking assistance from local charities. And sadly enough, that airman has been in all-too-good company for a while now. In 2019, an estimated one in eight military families were considered food insecure. In 2020, at the height of the Covid-19 pandemic, that figure rose to nearly a quarter of them. More recently, one in six military families experienced food insecurity, according to the advocacy group Military Family Advisory Network.

    The majority of members of the military largely come from middle-class neighborhoods and, not surprisingly perhaps, their struggles mirror those faced by so many other Americans. Spurred by a multitude of factors, including pandemic-related supply-chain problems and — you guessed it — war, inflation in the U.S. rose by more than 9% in 2022. On average, American wages grew by about 4.5% last year and so failed to keep up with the cost of living. This was no less true in the military.

    An Indifferent Public

    An abiding support for arming Ukraine suggests that many Americans are at least paying attention to that aspect of U.S. military policy. Yet here’s the strange thing (to me, at least): so many of us in this century seemed to care all too little about the deleterious domestic impacts of our prolonged, disastrous Global War on Terror. The U.S. military’s growing budget and a reach that, in terms of military bases and deployed troops abroad, encompasses dozens of countries, was at least partly responsible for an increasingly divided, ever more radicalized populace here at home, degraded protections for civil liberties and human rights, and ever less access to decent healthcare and food for so many Americans.

    That hunger is an issue at all in a military so wildly well-funded by Congress should be a grim reminder of how little attention we pay to so many crucial issues, including how our troops are treated. Americans simply take too much for granted. This is especially sad, since government red tape is significantly responsible for creating the barriers to food security for military families.

    When it comes to needless red tape, just consider how the government determines the eligibility of such families for food assistance. Advocacy groups like the National Military Family Association and MAZON: A Jewish Response to Hunger have highlighted the way in which the Basic Allowance for Housing (BAH), a non-taxable stipend given to military families to help cover housing, is counted as part of military pay in determining the eligibility of families for food assistance. Because of that, all too many families who need such assistance are disqualified.

    Debt-Funded Living, Debt-Funded Wars

    The BAH issue is but one part of a larger picture of twenty-first-century military life with its torrent of expenses, many of which (like local housing markets) you can’t predict. I know because I’ve been a military spouse for 12 years. As an officer’s wife and a white, cisgender woman from an upper-middle-class background, I’m one of the most privileged military spouses out there. I have two graduate degrees, a job I can do from home, and children without major health issues. Our family has loved ones who, when our finances get tight, support us logistically and financially with everything from childcare to housing expenses to Christmas gifts for our children.

    And yet even for us, affording the basics has sometimes proved challenging. During the first few months after any move to a new duty station, a typical uprooting experience for military families, we’ve had to wield our credit cards to get food and other necessities like gas. Add to that take-out and restaurant meals, hotel rooms, and Ubers as we wait weeks for private contractors to arrive with our kitchen supplies, furniture, and the like.

    Tag on the cost of hiring babysitters while we wait for affordable childcare centers in the new area to accept our two young children, and then the high cost of childcare when we finally get spots. In 2018, during one of those moves, I discovered that the military had even begun putting relocated families like ours at the back of wait lists for childcare fee assistance — “to give others a chance,” one Pentagon representative told me when I called to complain. In each of the five years before both of our children entered public school, we spent nearly twice as much on childcare as the average junior enlisted military service member gets in total income for his or her family.

    Our finances are still struggling to catch up with demands like these, which are the essence of military life.

    But don’t worry, even if your spouse isn’t nearby, there are still plenty of social opportunities (often mandated by commanders) for family members to get together with one another, including annual balls for which you’re expected to purchase pricey tickets. In the post-9/11 era, such events have become more common and are frequently seen as obligatory. In this age of the gig economy and the rolling back of workplace benefits and protections, the military is, in its own fashion, leading the way when it comes to “bringing your whole self (money included) to work.”

    Now, add the Covid-19 pandemic into this fun mix. The schedules of many military personnel only grew more complicated given pre- and post-deployment quarantine requirements and labor and supply-chain issues that made moving ever less efficient. Military spouse unemployment rates, which had hovered around 24% in the pre-pandemic years, shot up to more than 30% by early 2021. Spouses already used to single parenting during deployments could no longer rely on public schools and daycare centers to free them to go to work. Infection rates in military communities soared because of travel, as well as weak (or even nonexistent) Covid policies. All of this, of course, ensured that absenteeism from work and school would only grow among family members. And to make things worse, as the last Congress ended, the Republicans insisted that an authorization rescinding the requirement for military personnel to get Covid vaccines become part of the Pentagon budget bill. All I can say is that’s a bit more individual freedom than this military spouse can wrap her brain around right now.

    Worse yet, this country’s seemingly eternal and disastrous twenty-first-century war on terror, financed almost entirely by national debt, also ensured that members of the military, shuttled all over the planet, would incur ever more of it themselves. It should be no surprise then that many more military families than civilian ones struggle with credit-card debt.

    And now, as our country seems to be gearing up for possible confrontations not just with terror groups or local rebel outfits in places like Afghanistan or Iraq, but with other great powers, the problems of living in the U.S. military are hardly likely to get easier.

    The Fire of War Is Spreading

    Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin has at least publicly acknowledged hunger as a problem in the military and taken modest steps to alleviate the financial stresses on military families. Still, that problem is far larger than the Pentagon is willing to face. According to Abby Leibman, MAZON’s chief executive officer, Pentagon officials and military base commanders commonly deny that hunger exists among their subordinates. Sometimes they even discourage families in need of food assistance from seeking help. Daniel Faust, the sergeant I mentioned earlier, told me that his colleagues and trainees, concerned about seeming needy or not convinced that military services offering help will actually be useful, often won’t ask for assistance — even if their incomes barely support their families. Indeed, a recently released RAND Corporation investigation into military hunger found that some troops worried that seeking food assistance would jeopardize their careers.

    I’m lucky that I haven’t had to seek food assistance from the government. However, I’ve heard dozens of officers, enlisted personnel, and family members shrug off such problems by attributing debt among the troops to lack of education, immaturity, or an inability to cope with stress in healthy ways. What you rarely hear is someone in this community complaining that military pay just doesn’t support the basic needs of families.

    Ignoring food needs in the military is, in the end, about more than just food. Individual cooking and communal meals can help individuals and families cope in the absence of adequate mental healthcare or… well, so much else. The combat veteran who takes up baking as a tactile way of reminding himself that he’s here in the present and not back in Afghanistan or Iraq or Somalia or Syria is learning to conquer mental illness. The family that gathers for meals between deployments is seizing an opportunity to connect. In an age when military kids are suffering from widespread mental-health problems, eating together is one way parents can sometimes combat anxiety and depression.

    Whatever is life-enhancing and doesn’t require a professional degree is vital in today’s stressed-out military. Heaven only knows, we’ve had enough excitement in the years of the war on terror. Perhaps in its wake you won’t be surprised to learn that military suicide rates have reached an all-time high, while mental healthcare is remarkably inaccessible (especially to families whose kids have disabilities or mental illnesses). And don’t let me get started on sexual assault or child abuse, or the poor school performance of so many military kids, or even the growth of divorce, not to speak of violent crime, in the services in these years.

    Yes, problems like these certainly existed in the military before the post-9/11 war on terror began, but they grew as both the scale and scope of our disastrous military engagements and the Pentagon budget exploded. Now, with the war in Ukraine and growing tensions with China over Taiwan, we live in what could prove to be the aftermath from hell. In other words, to quote 1980s star Billy Joel’s famous record title, we did start this fire.

    Believe me, what’s truly striking about this year’s Pentagon funding isn’t that modest military pay raise. It’s the way Congress is allowing the Department of Defense to make ever more stunning multi-year spending commitments to corporate arms contractors. For example, the Army has awarded Raytheon Technologies $2 billion in contracts to replace (or even expand) supplies of missile systems that have been sent to aid Ukraine in its war against Russia. So count on one thing: the CEOs of Raytheon and other similar companies will not go hungry (though some of their own workers just might).

    Nor are those fat cats even consistently made to account for how they use our taxpayer dollars. To take but one example, between 2013 and 2017, the Pentagon entered into staggering numbers of contracts with corporations that had been indicted, fined, and/or convicted of fraud. The total value of those questionable contracts surpassed $334 billion. Think of how many military childcare centers could have been built with such sums.

    Human Welfare, Not Corporate Welfare

    Policymakers have grown accustomed to evaluating measures meant to benefit military families in terms of how “mission ready” such families will become. You would think that access to food was such a fundamental need that anyone would simply view it as a human right. The Pentagon, however, continues to frame food security as an instrument of national security, as if it were another weapon with which to arm expendable service members.

    To my mind, here’s the bottom line when it comes to that staggering Pentagon budget: For the military and the rest of us, how could it be that corporate weapons makers are in funding heaven and all too many members of our military in a homegrown version of funding hell? Shouldn’t we be fighting, first and foremost, for a decent life for all of us here at home? Veteran unemployment, the pandemic, the Capitol insurrection — these crises have undermined the very reasons many joined the military in the first place.

    If we can’t even feed the fighters (and their families) decently, then who or what exactly are we defending? And if we don’t change course now by investing in alternatives to what we so inaccurately call national defense, I’m afraid that there will indeed be a reckoning.

    Those worried about looking soft on national defense by even considering curbing military spending ought to consider at least the security implications of military hunger. We all have daily needs which, if unmet, can lead to desperation. Hunger can and does fuel armed violence, and has helped lead the way to some of the most brutal regimes in history. In an era when uniformed personnel were distinctly overrepresented among the domestic extremists who attacked our Capitol on January 6, 2021, one of the fastest ways to undermine our quality of life may just be to let our troops and their families, hungry and in anguish, turn against their own people.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Andrea Mazzarino.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/12/food-insecurity-among-soldiers-shows-bloated-pentagon-budget-not-going-to-the-troops/feed/ 0 364097
    Corporate Democrats Go to Bat for Bloated Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/corporate-democrats-go-to-bat-for-bloated-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/corporate-democrats-go-to-bat-for-bloated-pentagon-budget/#respond Wed, 11 Jan 2023 20:02:00 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/corporate-democrats-pentagon-budget

    A group of corporate Democrats led by Rep. Jared Golden of Maine sent a letter Wednesday defending the out-of-control U.S. military budget and expressing concerns about looming attempts by House Republicans to cut it, even as several GOP lawmakers insisted the Pentagon would be safe from their coming austerity spree.

    In their letter to House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.), Golden, Rep. Henry Cuellar (D-Texas), and other members of the right-wing Blue Dog Coalition celebrated the bipartisan vote last month to add $45 billion to the latest military budget proposed by President Joe Biden, claiming the extra money is necessary for "the procurement of additional naval ships at a time in which China has developed the world's largest navy" and for "strengthening the defense industrial base."

    But the lawmakers voiced alarm over the House GOP majority's expressed support for capping federal outlays across the board at Fiscal Year 2022 levels—a move that would, in theory, cut tens of billions off the military budget in addition to slashing spending on education, healthcare, and other key areas.

    The 12 Democratic signatories of the new letter focused their attention solely on the supposed national security implications of a spending cap, declaring "such a drastic cut in defense spending would not only undo this bipartisan consensus in support of our national defense, but would also endanger our long-term national security by injecting substantial uncertainty into the long-term defense budgetary planning necessary to ensure timely investments in personnel, procurement, readiness, and research and development."

    The White House, too, weighed in on the side of maintaining the current military budget this week, calling any push for cuts "senseless and out of line with our national security needs."

    But analysts have argued in recent days that such reflexive defenses of U.S. military spending don't stand up to scrutiny.

    Far from a "drastic cut," $75 billion is less than 10% of the current military budget, which stands at $858 billion—much of which is likely to wind up in the coffers of defense contractors.

    Progressive lawmakers, led by Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.), argued last year that $100 billion could and should be cut from the Pentagon budget—which has long been rife with waste, abuse, and profitable giveaways to private industry—and redirected toward pressing needs, from healthcare to poverty reduction to climate programs.

    Their proposed amendment to the National Defense Authorization Act was voted down in July by an overwhelming bipartisan margin.

    William Hartung, a senior research fellow at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft, wrote in a blog post Tuesday that "the idea that dictators worldwide are basing their decisions on whether the Pentagon budget is an enormous $750 billion or an obscenely enormous $850-plus billion is ludicrous."

    Hartung acknowledged that the kinds of across-the-board cuts floated by House Republicans "are never the best way to reduce government spending" because "they mean cutting effective and wasteful programs in the same proportions instead of making smart choices about what works and what doesn't."

    "By all means we should debate how the federal budget should be crafted at this chaotic political moment," Hartung added. "But we should not assume that there is no room to trim the Pentagon budget. Doing it correctly would not only make us safer, it would free up funds to address other urgent national priorities."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/corporate-democrats-go-to-bat-for-bloated-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 363847
    The Pentagon Budget Should Be Cut, But Don’t Trust Hawkish Blowhards on This for a Minute https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/the-pentagon-budget-should-be-cut-but-dont-trust-hawkish-blowhards-on-this-for-a-minute/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/the-pentagon-budget-should-be-cut-but-dont-trust-hawkish-blowhards-on-this-for-a-minute/#respond Wed, 11 Jan 2023 19:24:58 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/cut-the-pentagon-budget

    Writing for the Washington Post on Monday, Jennifer Rubin charged that the potential Freedom Caucus proposal to freeze federal spending at 2022 levels, which, if implemented across the board, could wipe out $75 to $100 billion in increased Pentagon spending included in the recent budget bill, could have “serious national security ramifications.”

    She then quoted American Enterprise Institute budget hawk Mackenzie Eaglen, who said such a proposal “makes only authoritarians, despots and dictators smile,” adding, “it completely ignores the troops and is entirely divorced from strategic thought or the many and varied threats the country faces.”

    Across-the-board cuts are never the best way to reduce government spending. They mean cutting effective and wasteful programs in the same proportions instead of making smart choices about what works and what doesn’t. But the idea of cutting up to $100 billion or more from the Pentagon, one way or another, should be up for discussion.

    And the idea that dictators worldwide are basing their decisions on whether the Pentagon budget is an enormous $750 billion or an obscenely enormous $850-plus billion is ludicrous. What counts is having a clear strategy and a wilingness to carry it out, not how many dollars one can spend (or, too often, waste).

    The idea that dictators worldwide are basing their decisions on whether the Pentagon budget is an enormous $750 billion or an obscenely enormous $850-plus billion is ludicrous.

    The $858 billion for the Pentagon and related work on nuclear warheads at the Department of Energy that President Biden signed off on last month is one of the highest levels ever — far higher than at the height of the Korean or Vietnam Wars or the peak years of the Cold War. And contrary to popular belief, most of those funds do not go to the troops. More than half of Pentagon outlays go to private weapons firms that have a mixed record of delivering effective defense systems at reasonable prices, to put it mildly.

    The top five contractors alone will split between $150 and $200 billion if the current budget holds, even as they pay their CEOs $20 million or more per year and engage in billions in stock buybacks to boost their share prices. These expenditures are perfectly designed to enrich arms companies and their shareholders, but they have nothing to do with defending the country.

    But back to the $100 billion question. The Congressional Budget Office released a study in late 2021 that outlined three options for saving over $1 trillion in Pentagon spending over the next ten years without damaging our defense capabilities. All three options involved cutting the size of the armed forces, avoiding large boots-on-the-ground wars like Iraq and Afghanistan, and relying on allies to do more in their own defense.

    The CBO recommendations are just the tip of the iceberg of what could be cut under a more restrained, realistic approach to defense. The current National Defense Strategy (NDS), released late last year, is an object lesson on how not to make choices among competing priorities. Major commitments included in the NDS include being able to win a war against Russia or China; defeating Iran or North Korea in a regional conflict; and continuing to sustain a global war on terrorism that includes military operations in at least 85 countries, according to an analysis by the Costs of War Project at Brown University.

    A strategy that forswears sending large numbers of troops into regional wars, takes a more realistic view of the military threats posed by Russia and China, relies more on allies, and rolls back the Pentagon’s dangerous and unnecessary nuclear weapons buildup could save sums well beyond the $100 billion per year set out in the CBO’s illustrative options.

    And these strategic shifts don’t even account for what could be saved by streamlining the Pentagon by taking measures to reduce price gouging and cost overruns by weapons firms, or reducing the Pentagon’s cadre of over half a million private contractors, many of whom perform redundant tasks at prices higher than it would cost to do the same work with civilian government employees.

    By all means we should debate how the federal budget should be crafted at this chaotic political moment. But we should not assume that there is no room to trim the Pentagon budget. Doing it correctly would not only make us safer, it would free up funds to address other urgent national priorities.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by William Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/the-pentagon-budget-should-be-cut-but-dont-trust-hawkish-blowhards-on-this-for-a-minute/feed/ 0 363909
    The Pentagon Budget Should Be Cut, But Don’t Trust Hawkish Blowhards on This for a Minute https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/the-pentagon-budget-should-be-cut-but-dont-trust-hawkish-blowhards-on-this-for-a-minute-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/the-pentagon-budget-should-be-cut-but-dont-trust-hawkish-blowhards-on-this-for-a-minute-2/#respond Wed, 11 Jan 2023 19:24:58 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/cut-the-pentagon-budget

    Writing for the Washington Post on Monday, Jennifer Rubin charged that the potential Freedom Caucus proposal to freeze federal spending at 2022 levels, which, if implemented across the board, could wipe out $75 to $100 billion in increased Pentagon spending included in the recent budget bill, could have “serious national security ramifications.”

    She then quoted American Enterprise Institute budget hawk Mackenzie Eaglen, who said such a proposal “makes only authoritarians, despots and dictators smile,” adding, “it completely ignores the troops and is entirely divorced from strategic thought or the many and varied threats the country faces.”

    Across-the-board cuts are never the best way to reduce government spending. They mean cutting effective and wasteful programs in the same proportions instead of making smart choices about what works and what doesn’t. But the idea of cutting up to $100 billion or more from the Pentagon, one way or another, should be up for discussion.

    And the idea that dictators worldwide are basing their decisions on whether the Pentagon budget is an enormous $750 billion or an obscenely enormous $850-plus billion is ludicrous. What counts is having a clear strategy and a wilingness to carry it out, not how many dollars one can spend (or, too often, waste).

    The idea that dictators worldwide are basing their decisions on whether the Pentagon budget is an enormous $750 billion or an obscenely enormous $850-plus billion is ludicrous.

    The $858 billion for the Pentagon and related work on nuclear warheads at the Department of Energy that President Biden signed off on last month is one of the highest levels ever — far higher than at the height of the Korean or Vietnam Wars or the peak years of the Cold War. And contrary to popular belief, most of those funds do not go to the troops. More than half of Pentagon outlays go to private weapons firms that have a mixed record of delivering effective defense systems at reasonable prices, to put it mildly.

    The top five contractors alone will split between $150 and $200 billion if the current budget holds, even as they pay their CEOs $20 million or more per year and engage in billions in stock buybacks to boost their share prices. These expenditures are perfectly designed to enrich arms companies and their shareholders, but they have nothing to do with defending the country.

    But back to the $100 billion question. The Congressional Budget Office released a study in late 2021 that outlined three options for saving over $1 trillion in Pentagon spending over the next ten years without damaging our defense capabilities. All three options involved cutting the size of the armed forces, avoiding large boots-on-the-ground wars like Iraq and Afghanistan, and relying on allies to do more in their own defense.

    The CBO recommendations are just the tip of the iceberg of what could be cut under a more restrained, realistic approach to defense. The current National Defense Strategy (NDS), released late last year, is an object lesson on how not to make choices among competing priorities. Major commitments included in the NDS include being able to win a war against Russia or China; defeating Iran or North Korea in a regional conflict; and continuing to sustain a global war on terrorism that includes military operations in at least 85 countries, according to an analysis by the Costs of War Project at Brown University.

    A strategy that forswears sending large numbers of troops into regional wars, takes a more realistic view of the military threats posed by Russia and China, relies more on allies, and rolls back the Pentagon’s dangerous and unnecessary nuclear weapons buildup could save sums well beyond the $100 billion per year set out in the CBO’s illustrative options.

    And these strategic shifts don’t even account for what could be saved by streamlining the Pentagon by taking measures to reduce price gouging and cost overruns by weapons firms, or reducing the Pentagon’s cadre of over half a million private contractors, many of whom perform redundant tasks at prices higher than it would cost to do the same work with civilian government employees.

    By all means we should debate how the federal budget should be crafted at this chaotic political moment. But we should not assume that there is no room to trim the Pentagon budget. Doing it correctly would not only make us safer, it would free up funds to address other urgent national priorities.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by William Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/11/the-pentagon-budget-should-be-cut-but-dont-trust-hawkish-blowhards-on-this-for-a-minute-2/feed/ 0 363910
    House GOP Says Pentagon Budget Is Safe—But Social Security and Medicare Aren’t https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/10/house-gop-says-pentagon-budget-is-safe-but-social-security-and-medicare-arent/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/10/house-gop-says-pentagon-budget-is-safe-but-social-security-and-medicare-arent/#respond Tue, 10 Jan 2023 20:42:33 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/news/gop-pentagon-social-security-medicare

    Republicans who have pledged to use their narrow majority in the House to pursue steep federal spending cuts have sent a clear message in recent days: The bloated Pentagon budget is safe, but Social Security, Medicare, and other key government programs are not.

    Rep. Michael Waltz (R-Fla.) expressed that sentiment during a Monday interview on Fox Business, saying, "I'm all for a balanced budget, but we're not going to do it on the backs of our troops and our military."

    "If we really want to talk about the debt and spending, it's the entitlement programs," said Waltz, referring to Medicare and Social Security, among other programs. (By law, Social Security cannot add to the federal deficit.)

    The office of Rep. Chip Roy (R-Texas)—one of the far-right Republicans that initially opposed Rep. Kevin McCarthy's (R-Calif.) bid for House speaker—was particularly adamant in a Twitter post on Sunday, declaring that "cuts to defense were NEVER DISCUSSED" in talks with McCarthy.

    "In fact, there was broad agreement spending cuts should focus on NON-DEFENSE discretionary spending," Roy's office wrote, singling out a broad category that includes federal budgets for healthcare, education, environmental programs, and more.

    The Texas Republican's staff was attempting to dispel reports last week that McCarthy opponents were seeking to cap federal spending across the board at Fiscal Year 2022 levels, a demand that—if fulfilled—would lop tens of billions of dollars off the historically high Pentagon budget in addition to slashing non-military domestic programs.

    The reports of potential Pentagon cuts on the horizon contributed to a recent decline in the stock prices of major military contractors such as Lockheed Martin and Northrop Grumman.

    Politicoreported Monday that McCarthy did ultimately agree to hold a "vote on a budget framework that caps discretionary spending at fiscal 2022 levels and aims to balance the federal budget in a decade," but Republicans have insisted this week that any proposal to cut the U.S. military budget—something progressives in the House support—would likely go nowhere, even though the Pentagon is rife with waste and abuse.

    "Most of us won't vote for cuts to defense," Rep. Don Bacon (R-Neb.), a member of the House Armed Services Committee, told Politico.

    Rep. Rosa DeLauro (D-Conn.), the top Democrat on the House Appropriations Committee, said in a statement last week that the non-military spending cuts floated by House Republicans "would harm communities and families across the United States who are already struggling with inflation and the rising cost of living."

    "From cuts to public health investments to decreases in funding for education," DeLauro added, "this secret deal endangers so much of the progress we made to help children and families, create better-paying jobs, strengthen our national security, and protect our environment."

    "The same Republicans who plunged the House of Representatives into chaos last week are prepared to plunge America into an economic crisis... unless Democrats agree to their demands to cut Social Security and Medicare."

    The omnibus spending package that Congress approved last month over the objections of Roy and other far-right Republicans includes $858 billion in military funding, making up more than half of the $1.7 trillion measure. Adjusted for inflation, the $772.5 billion allocated to non-military discretionary programs in the package represents a cut compared to the previous fiscal year.

    In recent months, House Republicans–including Texas Rep. Jodey Arrington, who was just chosen to head the chamber's budget committee—have said they want to target both discretionary government outlays and mandatory spending that includes Social Security and Medicare, potentially using the debt ceiling as leverage to secure changes to the popular programs.

    Bloomberg Governmentreported in October that Arrington said an "increase in the eligibility age for both programs would be a commonsense change," a sentiment echoed by several other House Republicans.

    "There it is in black and white"

    A slide shown during a House Republican conference meeting on Tuesday indicates that the party is committed to exploiting a debt ceiling showdown to push for spending cuts—even though such cuts would likely be a non-starter for the Senate and White House.

    The seventh point on the slide, titled "Budget and Spending," states that the House GOP "will not agree to Debt Limit increase without budget agreement or commensurate fiscal reforms."

    The slide also signals that the House GOP will push for "reforms" to mandatory spending programs and "reject any negotiations with the Senate" on spending unless their proposals "reduce non-defense discretionary."

    "There it is in black and white," Rep. Brendan Boyle (D-Pa.) tweeted in response to the presentation.

    In October, Boyle led a group of House Democrats in imploring party leaders to raise the debt ceiling during the lame-duck session to avoid a potentially damaging 2023 showdown with Republicans. The Democratic leadership did not heed Boyle's call.

    "House Republicans are openly plotting to hold the full faith and credit of the United States hostage—threatening to blow up our entire economy—because they want to force cuts to Social Security and Medicare," Boyle wrote Tuesday.

    The progressive advocacy group Social Security Works similarly warned that "the same Republicans who plunged the House of Representatives into chaos last week are prepared to plunge America into an economic crisis... unless Democrats agree to their demands to cut Social Security and Medicare."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/10/house-gop-says-pentagon-budget-is-safe-but-social-security-and-medicare-arent/feed/ 0 363555
    Storms batter California — 17 are dead; Republicans denounce President Biden after classified documents found in former private office; Governor Newsom releases budget as state faced 25 billion dollar deficit: The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – January 10, 2023 https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/10/storms-batter-california-17-are-dead-republicans-denounce-president-biden-after-classified-documents-found-in-former-private-office-governor-newsom-releases-budget-as-state-faced-25-billio/ https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/10/storms-batter-california-17-are-dead-republicans-denounce-president-biden-after-classified-documents-found-in-former-private-office-governor-newsom-releases-budget-as-state-faced-25-billio/#respond Tue, 10 Jan 2023 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f792f7946f14f744696ffda685bf614e

    Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

     

    Image: Hailstorm outside KPFA studios

    The post Storms batter California — 17 are dead; Republicans denounce President Biden after classified documents found in former private office; Governor Newsom releases budget as state faced 25 billion dollar deficit: The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – January 10, 2023 appeared first on KPFA.


    This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2023/01/10/storms-batter-california-17-are-dead-republicans-denounce-president-biden-after-classified-documents-found-in-former-private-office-governor-newsom-releases-budget-as-state-faced-25-billio/feed/ 0 363639
    No time to waste – Fiji’s Rabuka starts work on 100-day plan https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/28/no-time-to-waste-fijis-rabuka-starts-work-on-100-day-plan/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/28/no-time-to-waste-fijis-rabuka-starts-work-on-100-day-plan/#respond Wed, 28 Dec 2022 00:09:49 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=82301 By Shayal Devi in Suva

    Fiji Prime Minister Sitiveni Rabuka has already started work to achieve the People’s Alliance-led coalition 100-day plan outlined in its manifesto.

    He recognises that things such as cost of living, water and electricity outages are existing issues that can be solved after a thorough review and consultative process.

    In its manifesto, the party had stated it would consult on price control on basic and zero-rated VAT food items.

    During an interview with The Fiji Times, he also voiced plans to grow the economy to a level whereby the revenue and expenditure could “harmonise continuously”.

    “We cannot immediately effect reductions because the revenue forecast has been done in the last budget,” he said.

    “At the moment, we do not see any signs of any sudden increase in our revenue so we do not want to suddenly increase some of the expenditures and we’ll probably run out this budget according to the forecast, and then bring in those measures that we would like to achieve [with] the budget target for the full budget year.

    “But that’ll be after the 100 days. Those that can be done within the 100 days, we’ll have to do.”

    Rabuka said he had already met with the permanent secretary of the Prime Minister’s Office and expected an informal Cabinet sitting on Thursday where they would be briefed on the country’s economic situation.

    Shayal Devi is a Fiji Times journalist. Republished with permission.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/28/no-time-to-waste-fijis-rabuka-starts-work-on-100-day-plan/feed/ 0 360524
    US Military’s 2023 Budget Boost Is 3,200 Times Larger Than NLRB’s Increase https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/26/us-militarys-2023-budget-boost-is-3200-times-larger-than-nlrbs-increase/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/26/us-militarys-2023-budget-boost-is-3200-times-larger-than-nlrbs-increase/#respond Mon, 26 Dec 2022 13:24:55 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/military-budget-nlrb

    Draft text of the congressional omnibus spending bill released last week reveals a proposed $25 million increase in funding to the National Labor Relations Board, which would bring the agency’s 2023 federal fiscal year budget to $299 million. Its funding has otherwise been frozen at $274 million for the past nine years; when inflation is taken into account, this effectively amounts to a budget decrease of 25% since 2014, according to calculations cited in an NLRB news release.

    The proposed hike is well below what leaders from unions like Communications Workers of America and Unite Here have been calling for, and falls short of the (already meager) $319 million President Joe Biden requested.

    Any failure to robustly fund the NLRB hurts workers’ attempts to win formal union recognition and protect their basic rights, a key reason why anti-union lawmakers have kept the NLRB’s budget slim. Union representation petitions were up 53% in the 2022 fiscal year, and unfair labor practice charges spiked 19%, according to the NLRB. Meanwhile, the proposed budget increase — at just 9% — is not a meaningful raise above the current rate of inflation.

    Let’s dig into what the NLRB actually does. The NLRB is the agency that interprets and enforces labor law for most U.S. workers, unions, and employers in the private sector (companies, corporations, nonprofits and other, non-government businesses). The NLRB performs essential functions under U.S. labor law in support of the union-organizing process. Workers petition the NLRB when they want to hold an election in their workplace for union representation by submitting signed membership cards. The NLRB then verifies the accuracy of those cards, and it determines the “appropriate bargaining unit” (the specific pool of workers who can participate in the representation election and, if a union is certified, would be represented by the union and covered by the union’s contract with the employer) prior to each election. The agency then holds representation elections for workers to decide whether they want a union to represent them. If a majority of workers vote in favor of union representation, the NLRB certifies the union as the exclusive representative of that group of workers, and it legally compels the employer to begin negotiating with the union.

    Studies have shown that delay at any stage of this process — but especially between filing the petition and the election, when unions and employers are openly campaigning for or against the union — benefits employers. Every day that passes during this period gives employers more time to exert pressure on workers to vote against the union, which we know not uncommonly includes illegal threats and intimidation (see: Starbucks and Amazon worker-organizers who have been fired). With a massive wave in new union organizing, an understaffed NLRB may not be able to hold representation elections in a timely manner.

    The NLRB also adjudicates disputes between unions and employers and enforces labor law. When workers or unions believe their rights have been violated by an employer under labor law, they can file an unfair labor practice charge with the NLRB. NLRB field staff investigate these charges to determine if they have merit, and if they do, NLRB attorneys represent unions and workers in pursuing legal action against employers. Unfair labor practices are often very time-sensitive — for example, when an employer is illegally interfering in a union organizing campaign, or when they illegally fire an employee for organizing at work.

    To understand just how starved the NLRB’s budget actually is, it can be helpful to compare the agency with another federally funded entity: the U.S. military apparatus. Mainstream attitudes in Washington would likely posit that it is ridiculous to compare NLRB spending with “defense” spending, as the latter performs a vital, nonnegotiable service whose massive funding is a given and workers’ rights, on the other hand, are considered dispensable. Regardless, the comparison provides useful insights into the moral priorities of our political system.

    Earlier in December, bipartisan members of Congress overwhelmingly passed an $858 billion military and weapons spending bill — the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) — now awaiting signature on Biden’s desk. That bill is a whopping $45 billion above what Biden requested (already a staggering number). That’s billion with a B, which means just the difference between what Biden proposed and what Congress granted for “defense” spending amounts to 150 times the entire proposed NLRB budget.

    During the past nine years — since 2014 — that the NLRB’s funding has been frozen (effectively an annual budget cut, accounting for inflation), the war budget has been sky-high. In fact, adjusting for inflation, “defense” spending for fiscal year 2022 was 13% higher than it was during fiscal year 2014, according to calculations provided to Workday Magazine and In These Times by Lindsay Koshgarian, program director for the National Priorities Project, which researches the military budget. What these numbers mean is that, during the same nine years the NLRB’s funding was effectively cut 25%, “defense” spending was increasing 13%.

    But percentage increases don’t capture the full picture, given how drastically different the size of the two budgets are. Since 2014, “defense” spending has increased a total of $252 billion, or $150 billion in inflation-adjusted dollars. The NLRB’s funding is minuscule in comparison. The “defense” increase alone (not adjusted for inflation), of $80 billion from 2022 to 2023, is 3,200 times the NLRB increase for 2023, assuming both of these budgets go through. Adjusted for inflation, the “defense” spending increase from 2022 to 2023 ($65 billion) is 217 times the entire 2023 NLRB budget.

    The spending approved for 2023 includes $816.7 billion for the Department of Defense and $30.3 billion for “national security programs” under the purview of the Department of Energy. An important caveat: These numbers do not capture the overall “militarized budget,” as the National Priorities Project puts it. When Homeland Security, incarceration, and law enforcement are considered, the dollar amount jumps much higher.

    It’s completely legitimate to oppose this military and weapons spending in its own right; one does not have to compare Pentagon to NLRB funding to be incensed. According to the estimates of Stephen Semler, co-founder of the left-leaning research organization Security Policy Reform Institute, $452 billion of the 2023 “defense” bill funds will end up in the pockets of military contractors. The budget stipulates huge expenditures on weapons, including $32.6 billion for Navy ships and nuclear “modernization,” a euphemism for investment in nuclear weapons. It also continues the Pacific Deterrence Initiative, which further militarizes the Asia-Pacific region. Overall, these funds go toward entrenching and expanding a military apparatus that unleashes tremendous harm and violence across the world, from oppressive military bases to support for the Saudi-led war on Yemen to belligerent footing toward China.

    But comparing the NLRB budget with war spending is useful, especially, because the juxtaposition offers insights into what lawmakers in Washington view as important. “For years, these budgets have acted as if there wasn’t room for this $25 million increase the NLRB is getting, which is minuscule, while the Pentagon is getting tens of billions more every year,” Koshgarian says. “Whether it’s protecting workers’ rights or nutrition programs or healthcare or Covid-19 spending, we hear we can’t afford these tiny incremental increases to make people’s lives better. But there is no end to the billions more the Pentagon gets.”

    Biden, meanwhile, is squandering the opportunities provided by the leadership of Jennifer Abruzzo — his own appointed NLRB general counsel and the most aggressively pro-worker general counsel in recent memory — and undercutting his own stated commitment to workers’ rights — which he betrayed when he denied rail workers the right to strike — as long as he underfunds the agency.

    The NLRB and the broader regime of U.S. labor and employment law are not, of course, perfect tools in the service of workers; both are deeply flawed. For example, when an employer commits an unfair labor practice against a worker, the NLRB cannot award punitive damages to the worker. The U.S. lags far behind other industrialized democracies in labor standards. However, there is no question that the NLRB should be fully funded so that it can fulfill its modestly protective mandate. The negative consequences of underfunding are not theoretical. “We are stretched thin,” Noor Alam, an NLRB field attorney in Denver, recently told the Washington Post. “I have cases that I know are really important on union campaigns where lead organizers have been fired and [union] elections are pending, but I’ve been forced to put things that can’t wait on the back burner. Justice is being delayed.”

    It is difficult to overstate these stakes. Around 160 million people have jobs in the United States. Each employer profoundly impacts the lives of the working people — jobs determine one’s ability to financially survive and obtain healthcare, and shape one’s basic sense of wellbeing and agency. In the United States, there’s no such thing as guaranteed democracy in the workplace. As the political philosopher Elizabeth Anderson has argued, “under U.S. law, employers are dictators of their workplaces.” Unions are a key counterweight to top-down control, precarity, and low wages. Yet, even amid a wave of union momentum, union density is not great in relative historical terms, currently just a smidge above 10%. In a country where wage theft is rampant and inequality is stuck at high levels, the material protection of those workers fighting to build unions and organize for their rights has both direct and indirect consequences for millions.

    We are talking about the U.S. workplace. Why on Earth is it a given that military spending should remain bloated while worker institutions shrivel?

    Like the NDAA, the omnibus bill is commonly referred to as must-pass, and if the latter doesn’t go through by December 23, some government services might be disrupted. Meanwhile, countless workers are taking tremendous risks to mobilize in warehouses and meatpacking houses and kitchens, and offices to unionize their workplaces, or to stand up against egregious abuses. And when they reach out for protection of their basic rights, they are met with a federal government that cares more about war-making than protecting the vulnerable, exploited, and abused. The wide gap in proposed funding levels between the military apparatus and the NLRB gives us an opportunity to reflect on the moral content — and moral compass — of how public funds are used.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Sarah Lazare.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/26/us-militarys-2023-budget-boost-is-3200-times-larger-than-nlrbs-increase/feed/ 0 360348
    2023 Military Budget Far Exceeds NLRB Funding for Workers https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/24/2023-military-budget-far-exceeds-nlrb-funding-for-workers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/24/2023-military-budget-far-exceeds-nlrb-funding-for-workers/#respond Sat, 24 Dec 2022 12:03:02 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/opinion/us-military-budget

    Draft text of the congressional omnibus spending bill released this weekreveals a proposed $25 million increase in funding to the National Labor Relations Board, which would bring the agency's 2023 federal fiscal year budget to $299 million. Its funding has otherwise been frozen at $274 million for the past nine years; when inflation is taken into account, this effectively amounts to a budget decrease of 25% since 2014, according tocalculations cited in an NLRB news release.

    Comparing the NLRB budget with war spending is useful, especially, because the juxtaposition offers insights into what lawmakers in Washington view as important.

    The proposed hike is well below what leaders from unions like Communications Workers of America and Unite Here have been calling for, andfalls short of the (already meager) $319 million President Joe Biden requested.

    Any failure to robustly fund the NLRB hurts workers' attempts to win formal union recognition and protect their basic rights, a key reason why anti-union lawmakers have kept the NLRB's budget slim. Union representation petitions were up 53% in the 2022 fiscal year, and unfair labor practice charges spiked 19%, according to the NLRB. Meanwhile, the proposed budget increase—at just 9%—is not a meaningful raise above the current rate of inflation.

    Let's dig into what the NLRB actually does. The NLRB is the agency that interprets and enforces labor law for most U.S. workers, unions and employers in the private sector (companies, corporations, nonprofits and other, non-government businesses). The NLRB performs essential functions under U.S. labor law in support of the union-organizing process. Workers petition the NLRB when they want to hold an election in their workplace for union representation by submitting signed membership cards. The NLRB then verifies the accuracy of those cards, and it determines the "appropriate bargaining unit" (the specific pool of workers who can participate in the representation election and, if a union is certified, would be represented by the union and covered by the union's contract with the employer) prior to each election. The agency then holds representation elections for workers to decide whether they want a union to represent them. If a majority of workers vote in favor of union representation, the NLRB certifies the union as the exclusive representative of that group of workers, and it legally compels the employer to begin negotiating with the union.

    Studieshave shown that delay at any stage of this process—but especially between filing the petition and the election, when unions and employers are openly campaigning for or against the union—benefits employers. Every day that passes during this period gives employers more time to exert pressure on workers to vote against the union, which we know not uncommonly includes illegal threats and intimidation (see:Starbucks andAmazon worker-organizers who have been fired). With a massive wave in new union organizing, an understaffed NLRB may not be able to hold representation elections in a timely manner.

    The proposed budget increase—at just 9%—is not a meaningful raise above the current rate of inflation.

    The NLRB also adjudicates disputes between unions and employers and enforces labor law. When workers or unions believe their rights have been violated by an employer under labor law, they can file an unfair labor practice charge with the NLRB. NLRB field staff investigate these charges to determine if they have merit, and if they do, NLRB attorneys represent unions and workers in pursuing legal action against employers. Unfair labor practices are often very time-sensitive—for example, when an employer is illegally interfering in a union organizing campaign, or when they illegally fire an employee for organizing at work.

    To understand just how starved the NLRB's budget actually is, it can be helpful to compare the agency with another federally funded entity: the U.S. military apparatus. Mainstream attitudes in Washington would likely posit that it is ridiculous to compare NLRB spending with "defense" spending, as the latter performs a vital, nonnegotiable service whose massive funding is a given and workers' rights, on the other hand, are considered dispensable. Regardless, the comparison provides useful insights into the moral priorities of our political system.

    Earlier in December, bipartisan members of Congress overwhelmingly passed an $858 billion military and weapons spending bill—the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA)—now awaiting signature on Biden's desk. That bill is a whopping $45 billion above what Biden requested (already a staggering number). That's billion with a B, which means just the difference between what Biden proposed and what Congress granted for "defense" spending amounts to 150 times the entire proposed NLRB budget.

    During the past nine years—since 2014—that the NLRB's funding has been frozen (effectively an annual budget cut, accounting for inflation), the war budgethas been sky-high. In fact, adjusting for inflation, "defense" spending for fiscal year 2022 was 13% higher than it was during fiscal year 2014, according tocalculations provided to Workday Magazine and In These Times by Lindsay Koshgarian, program director for the National Priorities Project, which researches the military budget. What these numbers mean is that, during the same nine years the NLRB's funding was effectively cut 25%, "defense" spending was increasing 13%.

    But percentage increases don't capture the full picture, given how drastically different the size of the two budgets are. Since 2014, "defense" spending has increased a total of $252 billion, or $150 billion in inflation-adjusted dollars. The NLRB's funding is minuscule in comparison. The "defense" increase alone (not adjusted for inflation), of $80 billion from 2022 to 2023, is 3,200 times the NLRB increase for 2023, assuming both of these budgets go through. Adjusted for inflation, the "defense" spending increase from 2022 to 2023 ($65 billion) is 217 times the entire 2023 NLRB budget.

    The spending approved for 2023 includes $816.7 billion for the Department of Defense and $30.3 billion for "national security programs" under the purview of the Department of Energy. An important caveat: These numbers do not capture the overall "militarized budget," as the National Priorities Projectputs it. When Homeland Security, incarceration and law enforcement are considered, the dollar amount jumps much higher.

    It's completely legitimate to oppose this military and weapons spending in its own right; one does not have to compare Pentagon to NLRB funding to be incensed. According to theestimates of Stephen Semler, co-founder of the left-leaning research organization Security Policy Reform Institute, $452 billion of the 2023 "defense" bill funds will end up in the pockets of military contractors. The budget stipulates huge expenditures on weapons, including $32.6 billion for Navy ships and nuclear "modernization," a euphemism for investment in nuclear weapons. It also continues the Pacific Deterrence Initiative, which further militarizes the Asia-Pacific region. Overall, these funds go toward entrenching and expanding a military apparatus that unleashes tremendous harm and violence across the world, fromoppressive military bases tosupport for the Saudi-led war on Yemen tobelligerent footing toward China.

    But comparing the NLRB budget with war spending is useful, especially, because the juxtaposition offers insights into what lawmakers in Washington view as important. "For years, these budgets have acted as if there wasn't room for this $25 million increase the NLRB is getting, which is minuscule, while the Pentagon is getting tens of billions more every year," Koshgarian says. "Whether it's protecting workers' rights or nutrition programs or healthcare or Covid-19 spending, we hear we can't afford these tiny incremental increases to make people's lives better. But there is no end to the billions more the Pentagon gets."

    Biden, meanwhile, is squandering the opportunities provided by the leadership of Jennifer Abruzzo—his own appointed NLRB general counsel and the mostaggressively pro-worker general counsel in recent memory—and undercutting his own stated commitment to workers' rights—which hebetrayed when he denied rail workers the right to strike—as long as he underfunds the agency.

    For years, these budgets have acted as if there wasn't room for this $25 million increase the NLRB is getting, which is minuscule, while the Pentagon is getting tens of billions more every year," Koshgarian says.

    The NLRB and the broader regime of U.S.labor andemployment law are not, of course, perfect tools in the service of workers; both are deeply flawed. For example, when an employer commits an unfair labor practice against a worker, the NLRB cannot award punitive damages to the worker. The U.S. lagsfar behind other industrialized democracies in labor standards. However, there is no question that the NLRB should be fully funded so that it can fulfill its modestly protective mandate.

    The negative consequences of underfunding are not theoretical. "We are stretched thin," Noor Alam, an NLRB field attorney in Denver, recentlytold the Washington Post. "I have cases that I know are really important on union campaigns where lead organizers have been fired and [union] elections are pending, but I've been forced to put things that can't wait on the back burner. Justice is being delayed."

    "I have cases that I know are really important on union campaigns where lead organizers have been fired and [union] elections are pending, but I've been forced to put things that can't wait on the back burner. Justice is being delayed."

    It is difficult to overstate these stakes. Around 160 million people have jobs in the United States. Each employer profoundly impacts the lives of the working people—jobs determine one's ability to financially survive and obtain healthcare, and shape one's basic sense of wellbeing and agency. In the United States, there's no such thing as guaranteed democracy in the workplace. As the political philosopher Elizabeth Anderson hasargued, "under U.S. law, employers are dictators of their workplaces." Unions are a key counterweight to top-down control, precarity and low wages. Yet, even amid a wave of union momentum, union density is not great in relative historical terms, currently just a smidge above 10%. In a country where wage theft is rampant and inequality is stuck at high levels, the material protection of those workers fighting to build unions and organize for their rights has both direct and indirect consequences for millions.

    We are talking about the U.S. workplace. Why on Earth is it a given that military spending should remain bloated while worker institutions shrivel?

    Like the NDAA, the omnibus bill is commonly referred to as must-pass, and if the latter doesn't go through by December 23, some government services might be disrupted. Meanwhile, countless workers are taking tremendous risks to mobilize in warehouses and meatpacking houses and kitchens and offices to unionize their workplaces, or to stand up against egregious abuses. And when they reach out for protection of their basic rights, they are met with a federal government that cares more about war-making than protecting the vulnerable, exploited and abused. The wide gap in proposed funding levels between the military apparatus and the NLRB gives us an opportunity to reflect on the moral content—and moral compass—of how public funds are used.

    This article is a joint publication of In These Times andWorkday Magazine, a non-profit newsroom devoted to holding the powerful accountable through the perspective of workers.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Sarah Lazare.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/24/2023-military-budget-far-exceeds-nlrb-funding-for-workers/feed/ 0 360140
    Military Budget Hike for 2023 is 3,200 Times the NLRB Increase https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/22/military-budget-hike-for-2023-is-3200-times-the-nlrb-increase/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/22/military-budget-hike-for-2023-is-3200-times-the-nlrb-increase/#respond Thu, 22 Dec 2022 19:30:00 +0000 https://inthesetimes.com/article/military-budget-hike-for-2023-is-3-200-times-the-nlrb-increase
    This content originally appeared on In These Times and was authored by Amy Livingston and Sarah Lazare.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/22/military-budget-hike-for-2023-is-3200-times-the-nlrb-increase/feed/ 0 359698
    6.4m earthquake hits Humboldt County causing 2 deaths, 12 injured and massive damage; Congress set to pass $1.7 trillion budget; Biden Administration asks Supreme Court to end asylum restrictions at the border https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/20/6-4m-earthquake-hits-humboldt-county-causing-2-deaths-12-injured-and-massive-damage-congress-set-to-pass-1-7-trillion-budget-biden-administration-asks-supreme-court-to-end-asylum-restrictions-at-t/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/20/6-4m-earthquake-hits-humboldt-county-causing-2-deaths-12-injured-and-massive-damage-congress-set-to-pass-1-7-trillion-budget-biden-administration-asks-supreme-court-to-end-asylum-restrictions-at-t/#respond Tue, 20 Dec 2022 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=13ed45feb2790b6b41a883f450cc207d

    Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

    Image: Atatiana Jefferson mural by Sachi via Flickr

    The post 6.4m earthquake hits Humboldt County causing 2 deaths, 12 injured and massive damage; Congress set to pass $1.7 trillion budget; Biden Administration asks Supreme Court to end asylum restrictions at the border appeared first on KPFA.


    This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/20/6-4m-earthquake-hits-humboldt-county-causing-2-deaths-12-injured-and-massive-damage-congress-set-to-pass-1-7-trillion-budget-biden-administration-asks-supreme-court-to-end-asylum-restrictions-at-t/feed/ 0 359164
    Where Is the Debate Over This Bloated, Immoral Pentagon Budget? https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/19/where-is-the-debate-over-this-bloated-immoral-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/19/where-is-the-debate-over-this-bloated-immoral-pentagon-budget/#respond Mon, 19 Dec 2022 20:06:08 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341766

    Congress is on track in the coming week to give final approval to a national military budget for the fiscal year that is expected to reach about $858 billion—or $45 billion more than President Biden had requested and 8 percent more than last year.

    All told, more than half of this giant spending budget is going to for-profit companies (such as Lockheed, Raytheon, Boeing, General Dynamics, BAE, and Northrop Grumman) whose stock prices are surging.

    This is its highest level of military spending (adjusted for inflation) since the peaks in the costs of the Iraq and Afghanistan wars between 2008 and 2011. It's the second-highest military spending since World War II. It's more than the budgets for the next 10 largest cabinet agencies combined. It's larger than the military spending of the next 10 largest military powers in the world combined.

    Expect it to be even more. Congress is considering an extra $21.7 billion for the Pentagon to resupply materials used in Ukraine.

    Don't fall for the myth that this humongous sum is going to our troops. What's spiking is spending on weapons (including a 55 percent jump in Army funding for new missiles and a 47 percent jump for the Navy's weapons purchases).

    All told, more than half of this giant spending budget is going to for-profit companies (such as Lockheed, Raytheon, Boeing, General Dynamics, BAE, and Northrop Grumman) whose stock prices are surging. The profits are going into executive pay, shareholder dividends, and stock buybacks.

    This is the military-industrial complex that Dwight Eisenhower warned of*—on steroids.

    And yet, there's almost no debate. Why?

    Most Americans aren't aware of what's happening. And many of those who do know aren't tracking the humongous size of this relative to previous military spending. And no one is hearing any arguments on the other side.

    Yes, of course, America has to worry about Putin, China, Iran, and North Korea. But before deciding to spend so much, we might at least expect some, er, discussion.

    How on Earth are we supposed to believe we "can't afford" paid family leave, an expanded child tax credit, Medicare for all, or universal pre-K when our politicians are willing to spend $858 billion on the military without batting an eye?

    Worse yet: No one knows where all this the money is going.

    The Pentagon just failed its annual audit for the fifth year in a row. "I would not say that we flunked," said DoD Comptroller Mike McCord, although his office did admit that the Pentagon only managed to account for 39 percent of its $3.5 trillion in assets.

    The U.S. military is the only U.S. government agency to have never passed a comprehensive audit.

    Cost-overruns are legion. The Pentagon's failed F-35 program has exceeded its original budget by $165 billion to date. It's projected to cost more than $1.7 trillion.

    "Guns versus butter" is the old story. Now it's extraordinary bloat versus unnecessary misery for American families struggling with a cost-of-living crisis exacerbated by inflation.

    A recent study by the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas found that most American workers have become poorer over the past year because their real wages haven't kept up with inflation.

    Nearly two-thirds of Americans are living paycheck to paycheck.

    So back to my question: Why no real debate?

    Because support for military spending is bipartisan. No lawmaker wants to be portrayed as weak on national defense. Democrats have been jumping onto the military spending bandwagon as fast as Republicans.

    Bipartisanship is not always good. In fact, it's a problem when, as now, the lack of political conflict means no news. Absent political conflict, there's no story. Without a story, there's no debate or discussion in the media. Absent any debate in the media, most Americans have no idea what's happening.

    We're sleepwalking through history.

    *Eisenhower’s words from April 16,1953: "Every gun that is made, every warship launched, every rocket fired signifies, in the final sense, a theft from those who hunger and are not fed, those who are cold and are not clothed. This world in arms is not spending money alone. It is spending the sweat of its laborers, the genius of its scientists, the hopes of its children. The cost of one modern heavy bomber is this: a modern brick school in more than 30 cities. It is two electric power plants, each serving a town of 60,000 population. It is two fine, fully equipped hospitals. It is some 50 miles of concrete highway. We pay for a single fighter plane with a half million bushels of wheat. We pay for a single destroyer with new homes that could have housed more than 8,000 people. This, I repeat, is the best way of life to be found on the road the world has been taking. This is not a way of life at all, in any true sense. Under the cloud of threatening war, it is humanity hanging from a cross of iron."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Robert Reich.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/19/where-is-the-debate-over-this-bloated-immoral-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 358787
    Congress Just Passed $858 Billion Military Budget, But GOP Is Blocking $12 Billion to Fight Child Poverty https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/17/congress-just-passed-858-billion-military-budget-but-gop-is-blocking-12-billion-to-fight-child-poverty/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/17/congress-just-passed-858-billion-military-budget-but-gop-is-blocking-12-billion-to-fight-child-poverty/#respond Sat, 17 Dec 2022 12:41:05 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341737
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/17/congress-just-passed-858-billion-military-budget-but-gop-is-blocking-12-billion-to-fight-child-poverty/feed/ 0 358487
    ‘A Moral and Political Disgrace’: Just 11 Senators Vote No on $858 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/#respond Fri, 16 Dec 2022 11:22:46 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341717

    In an overwhelming bipartisan vote late Thursday, the U.S. Senate passed legislation authorizing $858 billion in military spending for Fiscal Year 2023, a sum that drew dissent from just a handful of lawmakers and outrage from watchdogs who said the money should be spent on fighting the climate emergency, poverty, and other pressing crises.

    The $858 billion budget amounts to a roughly 10% increase from the previous year and $45 billion more than the historic sum President Joe Biden requested, and it was approved even after the Pentagon failed yet another audit, unable to account for more than 60% of its assets.

    "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process."

    Much of the newly authorized money, as analyst Stephen Semler has shown, is likely to wind up in the pockets of military contractors. The NDAA passed by a vote of 83 to 11.

    "This absurdly inflated Pentagon budget is a huge payout to military contractor corporations at the direct expense of the American people," Robert Weissman, the president of Public Citizen, said in a statement, calling the military policy legislation "a moral and political disgrace."

    "The money wasted on the Pentagon... siphons funding away from reducing child poverty, expanding healthcare, addressing the climate crisis, and countless other priorities," Weissman continued. "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process. It leaves the nation less secure and more unjust. It is an utter, total disgrace."

    Sen. Ed Markey (D-Mass.), one of just 11 senators to vote against the NDAA, lamented that the bill provides the military with "many billions more than Congress has invested in addressing many of the biggest security concerns facing the American people—such as climate change, the opioid epidemic, poverty, hunger, and disease."

    "Instead, it doubles down on the failed approach of pouring money into a bloated, inefficient, and sometimes counterproductive national security machine underwritten by an army of lobbyists and gold-plated contractors that fails to deliver on the needs of the American people," Markey added. "I simply cannot support it."

    Markey noted that he proposed an NDAA amendment that would have sliced just 1% off the $858 billion topline and allocated the savings to global climate funding, but his proposal was not granted a floor vote—unlike Sen. Joe Manchin's (D-W.Va.) proposed giveaway to the fossil fuel industry, which was voted down Thursday evening.

    Joining Markey in voting against the NDAA were Sens. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), Cory Booker (D-N.J.), Jeff Merkley (D-Ore.), Ron Wyden (D-Ore.), Rand Paul (R-Ky.), Mike Lee (R-Utah), Josh Hawley (R-Mo.), Mike Braun (R-Ind.), and Cynthia Lummis (R-Wyo.).

    "At a time when we spend more than the next 11 nations combined on defense, we should invest in healthcare, jobs, housing, and education—not more weapons of destruction," Sanders tweeted late Thursday.

    Having passed the House last week by a vote of 350 to 80, the NDAA now heads to President Joe Biden's desk.

    As Defense News reported, the legislation "allocates more than $8 billion to procure high-priority munitions while granting the Pentagon emergency procurement powers to bolster production and refill U.S. stockpiles sent to Ukraine."

    "The final bill includes a requirement for the U.S. Navy to maintain 31 operational amphibious ships, despite opposition from the White House," the outlet added. "The White House also opposes funding a third Arleigh Burke-class destroyer. But the final bill allocates $2.2 billion for the third Arleigh Burke ship. Additionally, the bill sets aside $25 million to continue the sea-launched cruise missile nuclear development program, also known as SLCM-N, despite the Biden administration's attempts to cancel it."

    The peace group CodePink said in a statement Thursday that "if common sense were to prevail, President Biden would veto this budget and instruct Congress to use these resources to address the climate crisis, the world's common enemy."

    "They would invest in infrastructure and education, free healthcare so our illnesses can’t be turned around for profit. They would provide student and medical debt relief, and everyone has a roof over their head," the group said. "Elected officials, who trade war stocks, are telling us that an arms sale or buying another F-35 fighter jet is in our best interest. The people know what we want, and it's not endless war."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/feed/ 0 358187
    ‘A Moral and Political Disgrace’: Just 11 Senators Vote No on $858 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/#respond Fri, 16 Dec 2022 11:22:46 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341717

    In an overwhelming bipartisan vote late Thursday, the U.S. Senate passed legislation authorizing $858 billion in military spending for Fiscal Year 2023, a sum that drew dissent from just a handful of lawmakers and outrage from watchdogs who said the money should be spent on fighting the climate emergency, poverty, and other pressing crises.

    The $858 billion budget amounts to a roughly 10% increase from the previous year and $45 billion more than the historic sum President Joe Biden requested, and it was approved even after the Pentagon failed yet another audit, unable to account for more than 60% of its assets.

    "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process."

    Much of the newly authorized money, as analyst Stephen Semler has shown, is likely to wind up in the pockets of military contractors. The NDAA passed by a vote of 83 to 11.

    "This absurdly inflated Pentagon budget is a huge payout to military contractor corporations at the direct expense of the American people," Robert Weissman, the president of Public Citizen, said in a statement, calling the military policy legislation "a moral and political disgrace."

    "The money wasted on the Pentagon... siphons funding away from reducing child poverty, expanding healthcare, addressing the climate crisis, and countless other priorities," Weissman continued. "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process. It leaves the nation less secure and more unjust. It is an utter, total disgrace."

    Sen. Ed Markey (D-Mass.), one of just 11 senators to vote against the NDAA, lamented that the bill provides the military with "many billions more than Congress has invested in addressing many of the biggest security concerns facing the American people—such as climate change, the opioid epidemic, poverty, hunger, and disease."

    "Instead, it doubles down on the failed approach of pouring money into a bloated, inefficient, and sometimes counterproductive national security machine underwritten by an army of lobbyists and gold-plated contractors that fails to deliver on the needs of the American people," Markey added. "I simply cannot support it."

    Markey noted that he proposed an NDAA amendment that would have sliced just 1% off the $858 billion topline and allocated the savings to global climate funding, but his proposal was not granted a floor vote—unlike Sen. Joe Manchin's (D-W.Va.) proposed giveaway to the fossil fuel industry, which was voted down Thursday evening.

    Joining Markey in voting against the NDAA were Sens. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), Cory Booker (D-N.J.), Jeff Merkley (D-Ore.), Ron Wyden (D-Ore.), Rand Paul (R-Ky.), Mike Lee (R-Utah), Josh Hawley (R-Mo.), Mike Braun (R-Ind.), and Cynthia Lummis (R-Wyo.).

    "At a time when we spend more than the next 11 nations combined on defense, we should invest in healthcare, jobs, housing, and education—not more weapons of destruction," Sanders tweeted late Thursday.

    Having passed the House last week by a vote of 350 to 80, the NDAA now heads to President Joe Biden's desk.

    As Defense News reported, the legislation "allocates more than $8 billion to procure high-priority munitions while granting the Pentagon emergency procurement powers to bolster production and refill U.S. stockpiles sent to Ukraine."

    "The final bill includes a requirement for the U.S. Navy to maintain 31 operational amphibious ships, despite opposition from the White House," the outlet added. "The White House also opposes funding a third Arleigh Burke-class destroyer. But the final bill allocates $2.2 billion for the third Arleigh Burke ship. Additionally, the bill sets aside $25 million to continue the sea-launched cruise missile nuclear development program, also known as SLCM-N, despite the Biden administration's attempts to cancel it."

    The peace group CodePink said in a statement Thursday that "if common sense were to prevail, President Biden would veto this budget and instruct Congress to use these resources to address the climate crisis, the world's common enemy."

    "They would invest in infrastructure and education, free healthcare so our illnesses can’t be turned around for profit. They would provide student and medical debt relief, and everyone has a roof over their head," the group said. "Elected officials, who trade war stocks, are telling us that an arms sale or buying another F-35 fighter jet is in our best interest. The people know what we want, and it's not endless war."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/feed/ 0 358188
    ‘A Moral and Political Disgrace’: Just 11 Senators Vote No on $858 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/#respond Fri, 16 Dec 2022 11:22:46 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341717

    In an overwhelming bipartisan vote late Thursday, the U.S. Senate passed legislation authorizing $858 billion in military spending for Fiscal Year 2023, a sum that drew dissent from just a handful of lawmakers and outrage from watchdogs who said the money should be spent on fighting the climate emergency, poverty, and other pressing crises.

    The $858 billion budget amounts to a roughly 10% increase from the previous year and $45 billion more than the historic sum President Joe Biden requested, and it was approved even after the Pentagon failed yet another audit, unable to account for more than 60% of its assets.

    "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process."

    Much of the newly authorized money, as analyst Stephen Semler has shown, is likely to wind up in the pockets of military contractors. The NDAA passed by a vote of 83 to 11.

    "This absurdly inflated Pentagon budget is a huge payout to military contractor corporations at the direct expense of the American people," Robert Weissman, the president of Public Citizen, said in a statement, calling the military policy legislation "a moral and political disgrace."

    "The money wasted on the Pentagon... siphons funding away from reducing child poverty, expanding healthcare, addressing the climate crisis, and countless other priorities," Weissman continued. "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process. It leaves the nation less secure and more unjust. It is an utter, total disgrace."

    Sen. Ed Markey (D-Mass.), one of just 11 senators to vote against the NDAA, lamented that the bill provides the military with "many billions more than Congress has invested in addressing many of the biggest security concerns facing the American people—such as climate change, the opioid epidemic, poverty, hunger, and disease."

    "Instead, it doubles down on the failed approach of pouring money into a bloated, inefficient, and sometimes counterproductive national security machine underwritten by an army of lobbyists and gold-plated contractors that fails to deliver on the needs of the American people," Markey added. "I simply cannot support it."

    Markey noted that he proposed an NDAA amendment that would have sliced just 1% off the $858 billion topline and allocated the savings to global climate funding, but his proposal was not granted a floor vote—unlike Sen. Joe Manchin's (D-W.Va.) proposed giveaway to the fossil fuel industry, which was voted down Thursday evening.

    Joining Markey in voting against the NDAA were Sens. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), Cory Booker (D-N.J.), Jeff Merkley (D-Ore.), Ron Wyden (D-Ore.), Rand Paul (R-Ky.), Mike Lee (R-Utah), Josh Hawley (R-Mo.), Mike Braun (R-Ind.), and Cynthia Lummis (R-Wyo.).

    "At a time when we spend more than the next 11 nations combined on defense, we should invest in healthcare, jobs, housing, and education—not more weapons of destruction," Sanders tweeted late Thursday.

    Having passed the House last week by a vote of 350 to 80, the NDAA now heads to President Joe Biden's desk.

    As Defense News reported, the legislation "allocates more than $8 billion to procure high-priority munitions while granting the Pentagon emergency procurement powers to bolster production and refill U.S. stockpiles sent to Ukraine."

    "The final bill includes a requirement for the U.S. Navy to maintain 31 operational amphibious ships, despite opposition from the White House," the outlet added. "The White House also opposes funding a third Arleigh Burke-class destroyer. But the final bill allocates $2.2 billion for the third Arleigh Burke ship. Additionally, the bill sets aside $25 million to continue the sea-launched cruise missile nuclear development program, also known as SLCM-N, despite the Biden administration's attempts to cancel it."

    The peace group CodePink said in a statement Thursday that "if common sense were to prevail, President Biden would veto this budget and instruct Congress to use these resources to address the climate crisis, the world's common enemy."

    "They would invest in infrastructure and education, free healthcare so our illnesses can’t be turned around for profit. They would provide student and medical debt relief, and everyone has a roof over their head," the group said. "Elected officials, who trade war stocks, are telling us that an arms sale or buying another F-35 fighter jet is in our best interest. The people know what we want, and it's not endless war."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget/feed/ 0 358189
    ‘A Moral and Political Disgrace’: Just 11 Senators Vote No on $858 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget-2/#respond Fri, 16 Dec 2022 11:22:46 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341717

    In an overwhelming bipartisan vote late Thursday, the U.S. Senate passed legislation authorizing $858 billion in military spending for Fiscal Year 2023, a sum that drew dissent from just a handful of lawmakers and outrage from watchdogs who said the money should be spent on fighting the climate emergency, poverty, and other pressing crises.

    The $858 billion budget amounts to a roughly 10% increase from the previous year and $45 billion more than the historic sum President Joe Biden requested, and it was approved even after the Pentagon failed yet another audit, unable to account for more than 60% of its assets.

    "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process."

    Much of the newly authorized money, as analyst Stephen Semler has shown, is likely to wind up in the pockets of military contractors. The NDAA passed by a vote of 83 to 11.

    "This absurdly inflated Pentagon budget is a huge payout to military contractor corporations at the direct expense of the American people," Robert Weissman, the president of Public Citizen, said in a statement, calling the military policy legislation "a moral and political disgrace."

    "The money wasted on the Pentagon... siphons funding away from reducing child poverty, expanding healthcare, addressing the climate crisis, and countless other priorities," Weissman continued. "This spending level is a testament to the corporate capture and corruption of the Pentagon budgeting process. It leaves the nation less secure and more unjust. It is an utter, total disgrace."

    Sen. Ed Markey (D-Mass.), one of just 11 senators to vote against the NDAA, lamented that the bill provides the military with "many billions more than Congress has invested in addressing many of the biggest security concerns facing the American people—such as climate change, the opioid epidemic, poverty, hunger, and disease."

    "Instead, it doubles down on the failed approach of pouring money into a bloated, inefficient, and sometimes counterproductive national security machine underwritten by an army of lobbyists and gold-plated contractors that fails to deliver on the needs of the American people," Markey added. "I simply cannot support it."

    Markey noted that he proposed an NDAA amendment that would have sliced just 1% off the $858 billion topline and allocated the savings to global climate funding, but his proposal was not granted a floor vote—unlike Sen. Joe Manchin's (D-W.Va.) proposed giveaway to the fossil fuel industry, which was voted down Thursday evening.

    Joining Markey in voting against the NDAA were Sens. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), Cory Booker (D-N.J.), Jeff Merkley (D-Ore.), Ron Wyden (D-Ore.), Rand Paul (R-Ky.), Mike Lee (R-Utah), Josh Hawley (R-Mo.), Mike Braun (R-Ind.), and Cynthia Lummis (R-Wyo.).

    "At a time when we spend more than the next 11 nations combined on defense, we should invest in healthcare, jobs, housing, and education—not more weapons of destruction," Sanders tweeted late Thursday.

    Having passed the House last week by a vote of 350 to 80, the NDAA now heads to President Joe Biden's desk.

    As Defense News reported, the legislation "allocates more than $8 billion to procure high-priority munitions while granting the Pentagon emergency procurement powers to bolster production and refill U.S. stockpiles sent to Ukraine."

    "The final bill includes a requirement for the U.S. Navy to maintain 31 operational amphibious ships, despite opposition from the White House," the outlet added. "The White House also opposes funding a third Arleigh Burke-class destroyer. But the final bill allocates $2.2 billion for the third Arleigh Burke ship. Additionally, the bill sets aside $25 million to continue the sea-launched cruise missile nuclear development program, also known as SLCM-N, despite the Biden administration's attempts to cancel it."

    The peace group CodePink said in a statement Thursday that "if common sense were to prevail, President Biden would veto this budget and instruct Congress to use these resources to address the climate crisis, the world's common enemy."

    "They would invest in infrastructure and education, free healthcare so our illnesses can’t be turned around for profit. They would provide student and medical debt relief, and everyone has a roof over their head," the group said. "Elected officials, who trade war stocks, are telling us that an arms sale or buying another F-35 fighter jet is in our best interest. The people know what we want, and it's not endless war."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/16/a-moral-and-political-disgrace-just-11-senators-vote-no-on-858-billion-military-budget-2/feed/ 0 358190
    Slash the Pentagon Budget in Half & Abolish ICBMs: Dan Ellsberg on How to Avoid Nuclear Armageddon https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/14/slash-the-pentagon-budget-in-half-abolish-icbms-dan-ellsberg-on-how-to-avoid-nuclear-armageddon-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/14/slash-the-pentagon-budget-in-half-abolish-icbms-dan-ellsberg-on-how-to-avoid-nuclear-armageddon-2/#respond Wed, 14 Dec 2022 15:30:43 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a7506391694ee4b853f84d94ba1c72e7
    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/14/slash-the-pentagon-budget-in-half-abolish-icbms-dan-ellsberg-on-how-to-avoid-nuclear-armageddon-2/feed/ 0 357702
    Slash the Pentagon Budget in Half & Abolish ICBMs: Dan Ellsberg on How to Avoid Nuclear Armageddon https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/14/slash-the-pentagon-budget-in-half-abolish-icbms-dan-ellsberg-on-how-to-avoid-nuclear-armageddon/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/14/slash-the-pentagon-budget-in-half-abolish-icbms-dan-ellsberg-on-how-to-avoid-nuclear-armageddon/#respond Wed, 14 Dec 2022 13:35:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=e11438657bf46eac949471dec296b245 Seg2 ellsberg nuke split

    As tension rises between the United States and Russia over Ukraine, we speak with Daniel Ellsberg, the famed Pentagon Papers whistleblower, who worked for years during the Cold War on nuclear war strategy within the U.S. national security establishment. He says the threat of a catastrophic nuclear war is intolerable, with intercontinental ballistic missiles posing the highest risk. “The defense budget should be cut more than in half rather than being increased right now, but starting with the most dangerous weapons, the ICBMs,” says Ellsberg, who also calls for the U.S. to commit to a no-first-use policy on nuclear arms.


    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/14/slash-the-pentagon-budget-in-half-abolish-icbms-dan-ellsberg-on-how-to-avoid-nuclear-armageddon/feed/ 0 357639
    PNG Treasurer explains K2.6b ‘miscellaneous’ budget costs https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/12/png-treasurer-explains-k2-6b-miscellaneous-budget-costs/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/12/png-treasurer-explains-k2-6b-miscellaneous-budget-costs/#respond Mon, 12 Dec 2022 18:51:31 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=81524 PNG Post-Courier

    Papua New Guinean Treasurer Ian Ling-Stuckey has clarified that the miscellaneous item of K2.6 billion in the budget will be spent on settling superannuation payments for government employees, unpaid rental bills and final entitlements to retired public servants, among other expenses.

    “The budget is broken up into many lines of expenditure,” he said.

    One of these is Division 207, which refers to “miscellaneous” expenditure by the Treasury and Finance departments.

    “Frankly, these are often pretty boring payments, dominated by required payments by government where the funding is centralised rather than given to individual agencies,” Ling-Stuckey said.

    He was responding to the PNG Post-Courier’s editorial comment on the budget on Tuesday December 6, asking him to provide an explanation on the “whopping” K2.6 billion miscellaneous expenditure, which represented 10 percent of the total 2023 budget.

    “We are no financial genius nor do we claim to be an expert in budget matters but one thing that sticks out and deserve comment from everyone, however has not drawn one single line from the Treasurer, Ian Ling-Stuckey, or the Shadow Treasurer, Douglas Tomuriesa and other experts around the country.

    The editorial read in part:

    “An amount of K2,561,000 million of the total 2023 budget has been parked under this expenditure head.

    “This is more than the money allocated to education (K1,383 or 7 percent), Health (K2,335 or 10 percent), law and order (1,385 or 7 percent) and transport (K2,226 or 9 percent) – all key socioeconomic sectors in the country that took just under 10 percent of the budget respectively.

    “There are no notes in the budget documents that detail the areas for the expenditure of the K2.5 billion, and the Treasurer, Ling-Stuckey, does not make mention of that money at all in his budget speech.

    “We, however, understand that miscellaneous expenses are also costs to government that do not fall into a specific category but to put away a whopping 10 percent of the total budget is just too much and unacceptable.

    “It is not too late to demand that the government, through the Treasurer, provide a detailed report on the miscellaneous cost in 2022 and the expenditure plan for the miscellaneous budget for 2023.”

    Ling-Stuckey said: “Contrary to the Post-Courier’s allegations, the details for the K2561 million in “miscellaneous” expenditure is clearly set out in the budget.

    “Over 10 pages of detail are provided in the budget documents — for the 2023 Budget, see pages starting at page 227 of Volume 2A, and page 236 in the same volume for 2022.

    “The largest item for expenditure under ‘miscellaneous’ is superannu­ation payments for public servants, teachers and police.

    “This consists of K325 million in superannuation payments autom­a­tically paid each fortnight to Nambawan Super, K300 million to fund the program to finally retire teachers and other public servants that had been left on the public payroll for years without the funding to formally retire them even though they were aged more than 65, a further K200.

    “K1 million in exit payments to public servants when they retire through exit payments to Nambawan Super to deal with all current retirees as well as four smaller superannuation payments for other schemes.”


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/12/png-treasurer-explains-k2-6b-miscellaneous-budget-costs/feed/ 0 357160
    When Will We Give Peace the Budget it Deserves? https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/09/when-will-we-give-peace-the-budget-it-deserves/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/09/when-will-we-give-peace-the-budget-it-deserves/#respond Fri, 09 Dec 2022 11:26:49 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341568

    Two dogs walking. One of them says to the other: "I bark and I bark, but I never feel like I effect real change."

    Advocating that humanity's collective consciousness must transcend militarism and an us-vs.-them attitude toward the planet means lying on a bed of nails.

    This is the caption of a New Yorker cartoon by Christopher Weyant from several years ago. It keeps popping up in my head—I mean, every day. Like everyone else, I want what I do to matter, to "effect real change." What I do is write. Specifically, I swim in the infinity of possibility. Humanity can kill itself or it can learn to survive. Most people (I believe) prefer the latter, which is all about discovering how we are connected to one another and to the rest of the universe. This is what I try to write about.

    Then Congress passes another military budget. And once again, there's the New Yorker cartoon.

    "An emerging compromise on annual defense policy legislation will endorse a $45 billion increase to President Joe Biden's defense spending plans," Politico reports. ". . . The deal would set the budget topline of the fiscal 2023 National Defense Authorization Act at $847 billion for national defense."

    You know, more than the world's next nine defense budgets combined. We have more than 750 military bases around the world. We're sending billions of dollars' worth of weapons to Ukraine to keep the war going, in the wake of our two decades of war in the Middle East to rid the world of terrorism . . . excuse me, evil. As a result, the planet is bleeding to death. Not to worry, though. We still have nukes.

    How safe and secure can we get?

    And here's Northrop Grumman, presenting to the world the B-21 Raider, an updated nuclear bomber, a.k.a., the future of Armageddon. No need to worry. When Armageddon is ready to happen, it will happen smoothly, at the bargain cost of $750 million per aircraft.

    Northrop Grumman itself puts it this way: "When it comes to delivering America's resolve, the B-21 Raider will be standing by, silent and ready. We are providing America's warfighters with an advanced aircraft offering a combination of range, payload, and survivability. The B-21 Raider will be capable of penetrating the toughest defenses to deliver precision strikes anywhere in the world. The B-21 is the future of deterrence."

    We're dancing on the edge of hell.

    Is it possible for humanity to evolve beyond this? Prior to Armageddon? Advocating that humanity's collective consciousness must transcend militarism and an us-vs.-them attitude toward the planet means lying on a bed of nails. Consider the weird and mysterious act of violence that took place recently in Moore County, North Carolina, which may—or may not—have been triggered by a drag show.

    Somebody opened gunfire at two electric substations in the central North Carolina county over the weekend, causing multi-million-dollar damage to the power grid and leaving some 40,000 households without power for half a week. While the perpetrator and motive remain a mystery to law enforcement officials, one person wrote on Facebook: "The power is out in Moore County and I know why." She then posted a photo of the Sunrise Theater, in downtown Southern Pines, along with the words "God will not be mocked."

    The theater had a drag show scheduled that night, which, prior to the power grid attack, had been vehemently opposed by many right-wingers.

    The Facebook claim that the power outage was meant to stop the drag show may have been totally bogus (and also a failure, by the way, with spectators lighting the show with their cell phones so it could go on). Maybe we'll never know for sure. But even if the poster, furious about the scheduled show, had simply co-opted a motive for the criminal act, essentially ascribing it to God, it's still indicative that there's a lot of poison in the air. If you hate something, don't try to understand it. Go to war. There was, after all, a mass shooting at an LGBTQ nightclub in Colorado Springs several weeks ago—indeed, mass shootings directed at multiple targets are, good God, commonplace.

    I fear that war remains the logical terminus of collective human consciousness. Indeed, war is sacred, or so surmises Kelly Denton-Borhaug, citing as an example a speech delivered by George W. Bush on Easter weekend in 2008. She noted that W "milked" the Easter story to glorify the hell the country was in the process of wreaking in Iraq and Afghanistan, throwing a bit of Gospel into his war on evil: "Greater love has no man than this, that a man lay down his life for his friends."

    She writes: "The abusive exploitation of religion to bless violence covered the reality of war's hideous destructiveness with a sacred sheen."

    But perhaps even worse than war's pseudo-sacredness is its normalcy, a la that never-questioned trillion-dollar budget that Congress tosses at the Pentagon every year without fail. And the total pushes up, up, up every year, bequeathing us, for instance, that Northrop Grumman B-21 Raider, ready to deliver Armageddon on command.

    Short of Armageddon, we simply have armed hate-spewers, ready and ever so willing to kill an enemy at the grocery store or a school classroom or a nightclub.

    Understand, love, heal . . . these are not simple words. Will we ever learn what they mean? Will we ever give them a budget?


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Robert C. Koehler.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/09/when-will-we-give-peace-the-budget-it-deserves/feed/ 0 356561
    Bloated Pentagon Budget Is Indefensible https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/07/bloated-pentagon-budget-is-indefensible/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/07/bloated-pentagon-budget-is-indefensible/#respond Wed, 07 Dec 2022 19:31:09 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341530
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Lindsay Koshgarian.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/07/bloated-pentagon-budget-is-indefensible/feed/ 0 356052
    Pentagon Fails Another Audit, Yet Congress Poised to Approve $847 Billion Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/01/pentagon-fails-another-audit-yet-congress-poised-to-approve-847-billion-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/01/pentagon-fails-another-audit-yet-congress-poised-to-approve-847-billion-budget/#respond Thu, 01 Dec 2022 17:36:41 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341405

    Anti-war advocates blasted U.S. lawmakers on Thursday, one day after it was reported that Congress is expected to pass an $847 billion military budget for the coming fiscal year even though the Pentagon recently failed its fifth consecutive annual audit and nearly 40 million people nationwide are living in poverty.

    Last month, "the Pentagon once again failed to pass a basic audit showing that it knows where its money goes," the National Priorities Project at the Institute for Policy Studies said in a statement. "And instead of holding out for any kind of accountability, Congress stands ready to give a big raise to an agency that failed to account for more than 60% of its assets."

    Citing four people familiar with negotiations, Politico reported Wednesday that "an emerging compromise on annual defense policy legislation" is set to add $45 billion to President Joe Biden's already massive military spending request. The White House's March request for an $813 billion military budget for fiscal year 2023 represented a $31 billion increase over the current, record-breaking sum of $782 billion.

    According to Politico, "The deal would set the budget topline of the fiscal 2023 National Defense Authorization Act at $847 billion for national defense, and would go as high as $858 billion when including programs that fall outside of the jurisdiction of the Senate and House Armed Services committees." The Senate panel approved an equivalent military spending boost in June.

    The National Priorities Project (NPP) called the bipartisan proposal to further increase military spending despite the Pentagon's persistent accounting and human rights failures "a sign of an agency that is too big, plain and simple."

    "Other major government agencies have long since passed audits," said NPP. "But the Pentagon, with its global sprawl of more than 750 military installations, and a budget increase that alone could more than double the diplomacy budget at the State Department, is so big and disjointed that no one knows where its money goes."

    According to NPP, one solution would be to make the Pentagon "a lot smaller."

    Earlier this year, Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.)—co-chairs of the Defense Spending Reduction Caucus—unveiled the People Over Pentagon Act of 2022, which proposes slashing Pentagon spending for the next fiscal year by $100 billion and reallocating those funds toward threats that "are not military in nature," such as the Covid-19 pandemic, the climate emergency, and worsening inequality.

    Related Content

    Although a majority of U.S. voters are opposed to military spending in excess of $800 billion, earlier efforts to cut the Pentagon's budget have failed to gain enough support to pass the House or Senate thanks in part to lawmakers who receive substantial amounts of campaign cash from the weapons industry, which benefits from relentlessly expanding expenditures.

    NPP said Thursday that "after 20 years of war, and in a time when government spending is desperately needed elsewhere, the Pentagon's fifth failed audit in as many years (and having never, ever passed) should be the last straw."

    "This isn't using our taxpayer dollars wisely," the nonprofit research institute continued. "It's robbing programs that we need, like the discontinued child tax credit that cut child poverty by half. And it's continuing the Pentagon's legacy of war, all for the benefit of the contractors who commandeer roughly half of the Pentagon's budget in any given year."

    Approximately 55% of all Pentagon spending went to private sector military contractors from FY 2002 to FY 2021, according to Stephen Semler of the Security Policy Reform Institute. "If this privatization of funds rate over the last 20 years holds," Semler wrote last December, arms dealers will rake in an estimated $407 billion in public money in FY 2022.

    NPP director Lindsay Koshgarian told Truthout on Wednesday that "the same legislators who refused to continue child tax credits that cut child poverty in half are now choosing to add tens of billions of dollars to an already-enormous Pentagon budget."

    "The bonus for the Pentagon is more than the entire annual climate investment under the Inflation Reduction Act," Koshgarian added. "The only ones who will benefit are the corporations that sell weapons to the U.S. and around the world."

    Last year, NPP published a report showing that the U.S. has spent more than $21 trillion on militarization since September 11, 2001.

    Citing that analysis, Jacobin's Luke Savage argued at the time that the nation's military spending—now even higher than it was at the height of the Cold War—is not only wasteful but also inherently anti-democratic:

    Military spending allocated for 2022 considerably exceeds the cost of five separate Green New Deal bills. For a miniscule fraction of what America spent on the two-decade-long "war on terror," it could have fully decarbonized its electricity grid, eradicated student debt, offered free preschool, and funded the wildly popular and effective Covid-era's anti-poverty child tax credit for at least a decade. Spending public funds so lavishly on war inevitably means not spending them elsewhere, and it's incredible to imagine what even a fraction of the money sucked up every year by America's bloated military-industrial complex could accomplish if invested differently.

    Fundamentally, however, the case against the Pentagon's ever-expanding budget is a democratic one. Every year, the government of the world's most powerful country now allocates more than half of its discretionary funds to what is laughably called "defense spending"—regardless, it turns out, of whether the nation is at risk of attack or officially at war.

    "Corporate capture of Congress is a problem in most major policy areas," wrote Savage, "but defense contractors and other military concerns have a stranglehold that is arguably unmatched."

    As NPP noted Thursday, enacting Lee and Pocan's legislation "would open the door for other critical investments—and stop rewarding an agency that doesn't even know where the money is going."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Kenny Stancil.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/12/01/pentagon-fails-another-audit-yet-congress-poised-to-approve-847-billion-budget/feed/ 0 354703
    With $800 Billion Budget, Pentagon (Again) Can’t Pass an Audit https://www.radiofree.org/2022/11/22/with-800-billion-budget-pentagon-again-cant-pass-an-audit/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/11/22/with-800-billion-budget-pentagon-again-cant-pass-an-audit/#respond Tue, 22 Nov 2022 20:37:17 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/341240

    Last week, the Department of Defense revealed that it had failed its fifth consecutive audit. 

    The U.S. military has the distinction of being the only U.S. government agency to have never passed a comprehensive audit.

    “I would not say that we flunked,” said DoD Comptroller Mike McCord, although his office did note that the Pentagon only managed to account for 39 percent of its $3.5 trillion in assets. “The process is important for us to do, and it is making us get better. It is not making us get better as fast as we want.”

    The news came as no surprise to Pentagon watchers. After all, the U.S. military has the distinction of being the only U.S. government agency to have never passed a comprehensive audit.

    But what did raise some eyebrows was the fact that DoD made almost no progress in this year’s bookkeeping: Of the 27 areas investigated, only seven earned a clean bill of financial health, which McCord described as “basically the same picture as last year.”

    Given this accounting disaster, it should come as no surprise that the Pentagon has a habit of bad financial math. This is especially true when it comes to estimating the cost of weapons programs.

    The Pentagon’s most famous recent boondoggle is the F-35 program, which has gone over its original budget by $165 billion to date. But examples of overruns abound: As Sens. Jim Inhofe (R-Okla.) and Jack Reed (D-RI) wrote in 2020, the lead vessel for every one of the Navy’s last eight combatant ships came in at least 10 percent over budget, leading to more than $8 billion in additional costs.

    And another major overrun is poised to happen soon, according to a recent report from the Congressional Budget Office. 

    The Navy plans to expand its ship production in an effort to maintain an edge over China, with a particular focus on a new attack submarine and destroyer ship. The Pentagon has proposed three versions of this plan at an average cost of $27 billion per year between 2023 and 2052, a 10 percent jump from current annual shipbuilding costs. 

    But the CBO says this is a big underestimate. The independent agency’s math says the average annual cost of this shipbuilding initiative will be over $31 billion, meaning that the Navy is underestimating costs by $120 billion over the program’s life.

    As Mark Thompson of the Project on Government Oversight recently noted, these overruns “shouldn’t come as a shock” to anyone who has paid attention to DoD acquisitions in recent years. “But it does suggest a continuing, and stunning, inability by the Navy to get its ducks, and dollars, in a row,” Thompson wrote.

    So will the Pentagon manage to get its financial house in order any time soon? It’s possible, if a bit unlikely. 

    Despite the long odds, a bipartisan group of lawmakers led by Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.) proposed a bill last year that could help make that happen. The legislation would cut one percent off the top of the budget of any part of the Pentagon that fails an audit. That means that, if the proposal had already passed, 20 of the agency’s 27 auditing units would face a budget cut this year.

    Unfortunately, momentum around that bill appears to have fizzled out, leaving the Pentagon’s accountants as the last line of defense. Per Comptroller McCord, the DoD hopes to finally pass an audit by 2027, a mere 14 years after every other agency in the U.S. government blew past that milestone. That may coincide with another historical moment, according to Andrew Lautz of the National Taxpayers Union.

    “[W]e could reach a $1 trillion defense budget five years sooner [than the CBO estimates], in 2027,” Lautz wrote.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Connor Echols.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/11/22/with-800-billion-budget-pentagon-again-cant-pass-an-audit/feed/ 0 352819
    Regional USP staff, students call for vote against FijiFirst over $85m unpaid fees https://www.radiofree.org/2022/11/18/regional-usp-staff-students-call-for-vote-against-fijifirst-over-85m-unpaid-fees/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/11/18/regional-usp-staff-students-call-for-vote-against-fijifirst-over-85m-unpaid-fees/#respond Fri, 18 Nov 2022 22:44:44 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=80893 GRUBSHEET: By Graham Davis

    With barely four weeks to go to the election, students and staff at the regional University of the South Pacific have stepped up their political activity against the FijiFirst government over its refusal to pay $85 million (and counting) in outstanding contributions to the running of USP.

    The USP community — which some estimates put at more than 30,000 — is being encouraged to vote accordingly, with an indirect but unmistakable appeal to “Friends of USP” to vote for the People’s Alliance-National Federation Party prospective coalition come polling day.

    It beggars belief that the Attorney-General, Aiyaz Sayed-Khaiyum, has left Prime Minister Voreqe Bainimarama and his cabinet colleagues so exposed at USP.

    Because if the university community — students, staff, their families and sympathisers — lodge a collective protest vote against his conduct, it could easily cost the government the election.

    What other political party in its right mind would put at risk its survival to support a position that simply isn’t sustainable because Fiji doesn’t have the numbers on the USP Council to enforce its will?

    FijiFirst, of course. Which is prepared, lemming like, to go over a cliff with Aiyaz Sayed-Khaiyum just to pander to his ego.

    You might have expected student protests at USP as it is being slowly strangled by the ruling party and certainly that would have happened anywhere else in the world. Yet it’s no surprise to learn that there has been a strong, though subtle, plainclothes police and military presence at USP for some time, including specific incidents of intimidation of students and staff.

    Climate of fear
    So the relative silence from the student body doesn’t owe itself to apathy but fear — the climate of fear that pervades the rest of the nation as well and has been the subject of public comment by church leaders and private comment by almost everyone else.

    It is a rich vein for the opposition to mine in the election lead-up. So get set for the government’s scandalous conduct at USP to become a major election issue.

    And for the prospect of FijiFirst suffering a humiliating setback at the polls to match its humiliating inability to get its way with its absurd demand for “reform” of the university, including the removal of its exiled vice-chancellor, Professor Pal Ahluwalia, who continues to run USP from Samoa.

    Australian-Fijian journalist Graham Davis publishes the blog Grubsheet Feejee on Fiji affairs. Republished with permission.

    Statement to Friends of USP voting in Fiji’s election 2022:

    TURN UP AND MAKE YOUR VOTE COUNT.

    We will be casting our votes on 14 December.

    Nine political parties are contesting. Apart from Fiji First Party (FFP), the other serious contenders are Rabuka’s People’s Alliance Party, Prasad/Tikoduadua’s National Federation Party (NFP), and Gavoka’s Social and Democratic Party (SODELPA). SODELPA has been imploding for some time!

    Since 2018, FFP government has withheld Fiji’s contribution to USP. All other parties have campaigned to pay what Fiji owes. Most of us would like to see a change of government because of the government’s refusal to pay its contribution which stands at FD$85 million.

    As preposterous as it may sound, it means that eight small member countries such as Tokelau (pop. 1400), Niue (1600) and Tuvalu (11,300) are subsidising Fiji, having the largest population with nearly a million people!

    Despite five independent investigations confirming corrupt practices by the former vice- chancellor and president (VCP), and confirming the current VCP’s report on the corruption, the government continues to shield the former VCP and his supporters.

    Through its domineering presence in Council, the government lobbied hard to terminate the current VCP Dr Ahluwalia’s contract. When Council rejected it, the government unprecedentedly deported Dr Ahluwalia and his wife Gestapo-like. It declared them persona-non-grata in the same shameful manner as the late pre-eminent Pacific historian Dr Brij Lal and his family.

    With Council’s support, USP is being run from Samoa campus, home of current Chancellor (Head of State Tuimaleali’ifano) former mother and daughter Pro Chancellors (Fetaui and Fiame Naomi Mata’afa), and VCP Professor Ahluwalia.

    There are three serious implications of the Fiji debt.

    First, institutional utilities and student services are likely affected as maintenance and upkeep of buildings and facilities are compromised.

    Second, the growing vacancies across a number of academic, professional and support staff will not be filled quickly, thereby increasing the work-load of an already overstretched staff.

    This is exacerbated by the protracted delays in the issuance of work permits to expatriates and regional staff from member countries such as Tonga and Solomon Islands.

    Staff shortage threatens availability and variety of programmes (e.g. Pasifika orientated programs in Governance, Law, Social Sciences, Climate Change, Engineering, MBA etc), erosion of quality of teaching and research output.

    The third and most critical is the obvious collateral damage to the education of students (35,000 to 40,000 in 2022) and 50 years of capacity building with an alumni of 60,000 plus across the globe.

    For USP to continue as the premier university to nurture and realise the spirit of Pasifikan regionalism, a change is necessary.

    In 2018, the FFP narrowly won by 150 votes. A groundswell of support is evident for Rabuka’s Peoples Alliance Party (PAP), and Prasad/Tikoduadua’s National Federation Party (NFP). To make the change and ensure USP’s survival, make your vote count.

    Voting is at the polling stations shown on the voter registration card. For iTaukei voters intending to travel to the islands and villages before 14 December, before traveling, check the polling station shown in your voter registration card and avoid disappointment.

    WE must turn up and not waste OUR votes on FFP, smaller parties and independent candidates.

    God Bless Fiji and USP

    November 2022.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/11/18/regional-usp-staff-students-call-for-vote-against-fijifirst-over-85m-unpaid-fees/feed/ 0 352109
    Think tank behind Truss’s budget shouldn’t be a charity, says ex-watchdog official https://www.radiofree.org/2022/10/07/think-tank-behind-trusss-budget-shouldnt-be-a-charity-says-ex-watchdog-official/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/10/07/think-tank-behind-trusss-budget-shouldnt-be-a-charity-says-ex-watchdog-official/#respond Fri, 07 Oct 2022 11:30:27 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/institute-of-economic-affairs-truss-charity-commission-tax-cuts/ Charity Commission accused of failing to control Institute of Economic Affairs, which inspired doomed tax cuts


    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by Adam Bychawski.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/10/07/think-tank-behind-trusss-budget-shouldnt-be-a-charity-says-ex-watchdog-official/feed/ 0 339814
    ‘Fantastic’: What Truss’s allies said about budget that crashed UK economy https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/29/fantastic-what-trusss-allies-said-about-budget-that-crashed-uk-economy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/29/fantastic-what-trusss-allies-said-about-budget-that-crashed-uk-economy/#respond Thu, 29 Sep 2022 13:42:01 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/liz-truss-kwasi-kwarteng-mini-budget-think-tanks/ Think tanks celebrated Kwasi Kwarteng’s mini-budget as ‘welcome’ and ‘a boost’ in a series of now-awkward briefings


    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by Adam Bychawski.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/29/fantastic-what-trusss-allies-said-about-budget-that-crashed-uk-economy/feed/ 0 337227
    Burning All Fossil Fuel Reserves Would Exceed Global ‘Carbon Budget’ 7 Times Over: New Data https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/19/burning-all-fossil-fuel-reserves-would-exceed-global-carbon-budget-7-times-over-new-data/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/19/burning-all-fossil-fuel-reserves-would-exceed-global-carbon-budget-7-times-over-new-data/#respond Mon, 19 Sep 2022 14:06:11 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/339789

    A first-of-its-kind public database launched Monday estimates that burning all of the world's known fossil fuel reserves would spew 3.5 trillion tons of greenhouse gas into the atmosphere—more than all of the emissions released since the Industrial Revolution.

    The new database, known as the Global Registry of Fossil Fuels, also warns that emissions produced by combusting all of the planet's oil, gas, and coal reserves would exceed the world's dwindling "carbon budget" seven times over, underscoring the urgency of keeping fossil fuels in the ground to avert climate catastrophe.

    "The U.S. and Russia each hold enough fossil fuel reserves to blow the entire global carbon budget."

    "The science is crystal clear," Inger Andersen, under-secretary-general of the United Nations and executive director of the United Nations Environment Program, said in a statement Monday. "The transition away from fossil fuel-powered economies is critical to the survival of people and the planet."

    "For this to happen we need to deploy every solution in our toolbox to decarbonize our economies," Anderson added. "The Global Registry of Fossil Fuels is an important step in providing insights to policymakers and investors as we embark on a just transition away from fossil fuels."

    Led by Carbon Tracker and the Global Energy Monitor, the expansive new registry includes data for more than 500,000 oil, gas, and coal fields in 89 countries around the world, with the goal of providing transparency around fossil fuel reserves and production at a time when the climate crisis is fueling increasingly devastating extreme weather events across the globe, pushing up sea levels, and threatening to render large swaths of the planet uninhabitable.

    "To date, climate change policy efforts have focused on reducing demand and consumption of oil, gas, and coal, but ignored the supply of those fuels," notes Carbon Tracker, an independent think tank. "The Paris Agreement, for example, does not even mention fossil fuel production, despite the fact that such fuels account for over 75% of global greenhouse gas emissions."

    The organization goes on to observe that the newly released data shows "the U.S. and Russia each hold enough fossil fuel reserves to blow the entire global carbon budget, even if all other countries ceased production immediately."

    "Of the 50,000 fields covered by the registry," Carbon Tracker points out, "the most potent source of emissions is the Ghawar oil field in Saudi Arabia, which produces approximately 525 million tons of carbon emissions each year."

    Suneeta Kaimal, president and CEO of the Natural Resource Governance Institute, said in a statement that the new registry marks "a welcome step toward open access to vital information about fossil fuels."

    "A fair global energy transition requires greater transparency, better coordination between states, and stronger accountability for fossil fuel production," said Kaimal. "Now citizens and investors everywhere have an essential tool to hold governments and companies responsible for their decisions."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/19/burning-all-fossil-fuel-reserves-would-exceed-global-carbon-budget-7-times-over-new-data/feed/ 0 334363
    Contractors Cash in as Congress Adds Billions to the Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/14/contractors-cash-in-as-congress-adds-billions-to-the-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/14/contractors-cash-in-as-congress-adds-billions-to-the-pentagon-budget/#respond Wed, 14 Sep 2022 05:51:14 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=255044 Congress has spoken when it comes to next year’s Pentagon budget and the results, if they weren’t so in line with past practices, should astonish us all. The House of Representatives voted to add $37 billion and the Senate $45 billion to the administration’s already humongous request for “national defense,” a staggering figure that includes both the Pentagon budget More

    The post Contractors Cash in as Congress Adds Billions to the Pentagon Budget appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by William D. Hartung Julia Gledhill.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/09/14/contractors-cash-in-as-congress-adds-billions-to-the-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 332776
    Super city Auckland’s council financial results signal tough times ahead https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/30/super-city-aucklands-council-financial-results-signal-tough-times-ahead/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/30/super-city-aucklands-council-financial-results-signal-tough-times-ahead/#respond Tue, 30 Aug 2022 23:43:43 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=78610 By Stephen Forbes of Local Democracy Reporting

    Despite total borrowings reaching $11.1 billion, the Auckland Council Group’s latest results show it has managed to weather the worst of the storm created by the covid pandemic.

    But the super city’s statement to the NZX shows it will face some tough times ahead as it seeks to balance its next budget.

    In June the council with New Zealand’s largest Pacific population — almost 250,000, more than 15 percent of the city’s total of 1.7 million — agreed to defer $230 million in capital works over the next three years to address a $150 million per annum shortfall in its operating costs.

    Local Democracy Reporting
    LOCAL DEMOCRACY REPORTING

    South Auckland projects affected included a new Flat Bush multi-use centre, the upgrade of the Papakura park and ride and the Ōpaheke Park sports fields.

    Auckland Council finance and performance committee chairperson Desley Simpson said a number of projects were impacted on by the cutbacks, but increases in revenue and operational savings meant it was now in a stronger position.

    “The key point we considered when preparing our Recovery Budget last year was to provide significant support to the economic recovery of Auckland,” Simpson said.

    “This proved to be crucial, with our ongoing capital investment programmes helping to counterbalance some of the anticipated economic pressures in Auckland, as well as supporting future infrastructure growth needs for the region.”

    Council’s results ‘positive’
    The council’s debt increased $757 million to $11.1 billion in the 12 months to June 30, while its revenue grew by $361 million to $5.7 billion.

    Manurewa-Papakura ward councillor Angela Dalton said the council’s latest results were positive.

    “I think considering the last few years we’ve had, they are pretty good,” she said.

    “But I think the future budgets are going to be really tough for us and we are looking at some challenging times ahead.”

    Dalton said the results need to be looked at in the context of the Auckland Council Group’s total asset base, which grew by $9.7 billion to $70.4 billion in the past year.

    “Considering the huge drop in revenue we’ve faced we’ve still been able to build our city and work on capital projects like the Central Interceptor and City Rail Link. They are the big game changers for Auckland.”

    Some council projects were delayed, but it still spent $2.3b on capital works, including over $1b on transport-related assets, $815m on water, wastewater and stormwater and $384 million on other assets.

    Climate change funding juggle
    Simpson said whoever won Auckland’s mayoral race would have to juggle funding for climate change initiatives, infrastructure and transport spending, community facilities and parks and reserves.

    She said while some projects that were deferred might be brought back from the brink, some may be consigned to political history.

    “We’ve come through the worst period any Auckland Council has had to deal with. But it’s not going to get any easier.”

    Auckland mayor Phil Goff’s final budget was announced in June and included $600 million for new bus services, funding for electric ferries and buses and completion of key links in the city’s cycling network.

    The budget’s climate change package will be funded by a targeted rate, generating $574m over 10 years, with plans to seek a further $482m in funding from the government and other sources.

    • The political campaign for mayor is being keenly contested with a Pacific candidate, Fa’anānā Efeso Collins, narrowly leading opinion polls for the October local body elections.

    Local Democracy Reporting is Public Interest Journalism funded through NZ on Air. Asia Pacific Report is an LDR partner.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/30/super-city-aucklands-council-financial-results-signal-tough-times-ahead/feed/ 0 327823
    WSJ Hates Tax Breaks: California Edition https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/11/wsj-hates-tax-breaks-california-edition/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/11/wsj-hates-tax-breaks-california-edition/#respond Thu, 11 Aug 2022 22:08:50 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9029825 The Wall Street Journal editorial board has a long history of liking tax relief only when it benefits the wealthy.

    The post WSJ Hates Tax Breaks: California Edition appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Election Focus 2022The Wall Street Journal editorial board has a long history of liking tax relief only when it benefits the wealthy. Last year, the Journal board slammed rebates for middle- and working-class New Jerseyans, while praising tax cuts for rich Ohioans (FAIR.org, 7/16/21). This year, it’s singing the same tune over different states’ approaches to tax relief.

    The paper’s editorial page (6/27/22) lambasted progressive tax rebates in California as a “bribe…to vote Democratic” in the upcoming midterm elections. Under the rebates, Californians making up to $75,000 annually will receive $350, plus that same amount per dependent. Those making between $75,000 and $125,000 will get $250 and those making between $125,000 and $250,000 will get $200 (at which point the rebates stop).

    WSJ: Gavin Newsom’s Street Money

    For the Wall Street Journal (6/27/22), when Democrats give them, tax rebates are a “bribe.”

    The Journal called this relief “street money,” “a tradition in big-city politics” wherein “politicians dole out” cash “for political support.” Almost exactly one year earlier, the board (6/30/21) made a similar claim about New Jersey rebates for parents making under $150,000, labeling them an attempt to “buy votes.”

    The idea that the Democrats who championed the rebates needed to “buy votes” in deeply blue New Jersey was dubious. But California is even more friendly territory for Democrats. President Joe Biden soundly defeated Donald Trump in California by more than 29 points in 2020. Gov. Gavin Newsom won his recall election last year by a similar margin. At the time of writing, Democrats constitute 78% of the California State Senate and 75% of the Assembly. For better or worse, the blue team is sitting pretty in the Golden State. So why use “street money” to buy votes when they already have so many?

    The Journal claimed it’s because California Democrats fear falling short of a supermajority that would allow them to “raise taxes without Republican support.” (The Democrats need two-thirds of each California house to increase taxes—a margin they currently exceed by a comfortable margin.) Naturally, the editorial board also thought Democratic lawmakers should forgo this course of action, and instead try to “cut taxes” and the budget.

    From the poor to the rich

    But “cutting taxes” means something very particular to the Journal. In April, Kentucky Republicans passed a tax cut that the Journal (4/15/22) praised as a “success” and marker of “progress.” To the board’s delight, the GOP reduced the state’s flat income tax from 5% to 4.5%, ostensibly “reducing the income tax for all Kentuckians.”

    Kentucky Center for Economic Policy: Income Tax Cut to 4 % Is a Giveaway to Those at the Top

    How the Wall Street Journal prefers its tax breaks (Chart: Kentucky Center for Economic Policy, 4/1/22).

    This is technically incorrect, however. The poorest 800,000 or so people in Kentucky pay no state income tax, and thus receive nothing. And many working-class citizens won’t have it much better: The Institute on Taxation and Economic Policy found that while the poorest 20% of Kentucky residents are projected to get an average cut of just $20, the quintile directly above them will get not much more, only $115. That means the bottom 40% of Kentuckians will, on average, not even get enough to purchase the new Madden video game dropping next week.

    Now compare that to the expected windfall for wealthier Kentuckians. Cumulatively, the top 20% receive a whopping 65% of the overall benefits—and 37% go to just the richest 5%. The top 1% will enjoy an average cut of $11,056 (Kentucky Center for Economic Policy, 4/1/22).

    But note (as the Journal did not) that all Kentuckians pay taxes–a regressive 6% sales tax, which Republicans did not cut. In fact, to help cover the budget hole left by the giveaway to the state’s wealthy, the bill contains provisions expanding the sales tax to 35 new services (PwC, 4/13/22). That means the poorer you are in Kentucky, the more likely you are to see a net decrease in the amount of money in your pockets due to the new legislation.

    And your quality of life will decline further still, as the tax cut “undermines investments in public education, human services and other public needs” (Kentucky Center for Economic Policy, 4/1/22). This taking from the poor to give to the rich is what, in the eyes of the Journal board, constitutes a “responsible use of a two-year budget windfall.”

    It’s another case of deja vu: Last year the Journal (7/5/21) commended a tax cut in Ohio as “leaving more money in taxpayers hands”—a plan that, like Kentucky’s, gave virtually nothing to middle- and working-class people while rewarding the state’s top 1% with thousands of dollars.

    It is clear where the Wall Street Journal editorial board stands. They like giveaways to the rich, even if they come at the expense of the most vulnerable. As for broad assistance that ensures those in need aren’t left behind? Sounds like corruption! In a dynamic world, the Wall Street Journal’s classism is a constant.


    ACTION ALERT: You can send a message to the Wall Street Journal at wsjcontact@wsj.com (or via Twitter: @WSJopinion) Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your communication in the comments thread.

    The post WSJ Hates Tax Breaks: California Edition appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Elias Khoury.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/11/wsj-hates-tax-breaks-california-edition/feed/ 0 322878
    Professor Pal Ahluwalia on the future of USP: ‘I’m here to serve’ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/07/professor-pal-ahluwalia-on-the-future-of-usp-im-here-to-serve/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/07/professor-pal-ahluwalia-on-the-future-of-usp-im-here-to-serve/#respond Sun, 07 Aug 2022 22:48:41 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=77505 From mitigating the impacts of a global pandemic to battling financial constraints, the University of the South Pacific’s vice-chancellor Professor Pal Ahluwalia speaks to Wansolwara on the way forward for the region’s premier education institution. He has weathered unrelenting pressure from the Fiji government — which has so far refused to pay up the almost F$80 million (NZ$50 million) owed in contributions — but continued to champion the regional mission of the university.

    Compiled by Sera Tikotikoivatu-Sefeti, leila Pafrina, Sibete Ietaake and Aralai Vosyaco in Suva


    From the last Strategic Plan 2019-2021, USP faced two major challenges — a fall in core funding and the impact of the global covid-19 pandemic. This hindered the university’s ability to invest in key ambitions. How has USP fared since then in terms of addressing those challenges and its impact on academia, general operations and staffing as well as USP’s financial status?

    Professor Ahluwalia: It’s obvious that the impact of not receiving funding from the government is affecting us. But when we are faced with adversity, what we do is prioritise. That’s the job of a CEO, or in this case, the vice-chancellor, the president. You prioritise. You determine what is important to you. In our strategic plan, which we refreshed last year with a lot of consultation with our students and staff, our priority is to provide quality education for our students.

    That’s the first priority. With funding challenges we can’t walk away from those. But we’ve prioritised everything so that we give our students priority. It hasn’t really changed my commitment to you since the day I walked into the university. It just means that we’ve sharpened the student experience.

    We’ve sharpened the realities of working in a post-covid-19 environment. We’ve tried to see how we can get our students better qualifications.

    The byproduct of that is that we’ve also been able to focus on rankings because we want people to know how good this university is. It’s not like we’re chasing rankings for the sake of chasing rankings. Rankings are there as an icing on the cake, but the cake has to be the right thing. Rankings are external people telling us that we’re doing things right.

    I think the impact on learning and teaching has been as minimal as you can imagine, as well as on research. We’ve deferred capital works and really important projects, which should have been done. When I came to the university, I inherited a deferred maintenance bill of $36 million. Now that’s a huge thing I tried to really solve that problem to begin with, where the idea was we would put $5 million into it every year.

    We haven’t been able to do that because of the funding. So we are trying to reprioritise all the time so that students’ education is always paramount. But of course, that’s where those issues have come. In terms of staffing, since I’ve been here, we’ve never ever sacked anybody at USP. We will continue to prioritise our staff. Where there is natural attrition, in some cases, we might not fill those positions. Secondly, we’ll prioritise academic staffing over all other staffing because it’s the academic staffing that is so vital to our school.

    The Strategic Plan 2022-2024 aims to strengthen five priority areas from the previous plan. How is USP progressing so far with these priorities?

    USP Vice-Chancellor's Forum
    Wansolwara’s report on the Vice-Chancellor’s Forum in the latest edition. Image: Wansolwara screenshot

    The five priority areas really kind of represent our core values. In many ways, we’re doing exceptionally well. There are some areas that have been adversely affected because of covid-19. Some of those areas would be around our staff not being able to travel to regional countries. The core business of our university is reflected in Strategy Five, teaching and learning, research and innovation, our regional campuses, our work as a CROP (Council of Regional Organisations in the Pacific) agency, and all the other sections that support our core values. That is how our strategic plan is set up.

    We give regular reports to our council on how we’re performing. As an example, a couple of things that have been affected because of covid-19 is that we couldn’t get enough students into laboratories. These are postgraduate students to make sure that our postgraduate number of completions remain at the same level. But it’s no different than anywhere else in the world. The whole world is experiencing that kind of disruption. For eight months our campuses in Fiji were closed, so I wasn’t surprised when we didn’t meet that KPI (key performance indicator).

    We paid very close attention, and I’m really proud of our academic staff and our students because I think it’s shown our team spirit. It’s shown our human resilience. Students had to make adjustments. Probably nobody you know in the last four generations of USP students would have had to do that, so it’s a real testimony to how our students have responded to those kinds of efforts in a once in a 100-year pandemic.

    Recently, USP was ranked 401-600 out of 1406 institutions, with an overall score of 70 out of 100 in the Times Higher Education (THE) Impact Ranking for 2022. Would this recognition bring about further changes at USP to increase its ranking?

    Rankings are not the sole focus of our efforts. Our focus is on our strategic plan and on our mission, vision, and values. Our children must have the opportunity to study at the best university in the Pacific. We are a value-led organisation, so I’m really pleased to say that three rankings in the last 18 months have really given us confidence that we are on the right path.

    We have to continue and how do we invest in this? We have funding for research, but we are also continuously making sure that the best academics are recruited and that we don’t compromise on academic quality because, at the end of the day, academic quality is what gives our students that cutting edge. It is the academic quality that helps us produce the research outputs that would then improve the ranking.

    In terms of capital projects and ongoing maintenance works, what progress has been made to the upkeep of the university and its campuses?

    With the crisis that we’re in right now, we continue to prioritise issues that have to be addressed. If we don’t, the problem just gets worse. So there is the normal routine maintenance and other projects. Some of the other things have been put on the backbench, but we’re still putting a lot of effort into these things. In terms of the Solomon Islands campus, there are no new plans. It’s externally funded. The campus is progressing, and we hope it will be finished next year.

    This will be something that is really important because it will provide more opportunities for our Solomon Island students. The Solomon Island students are the second largest number of students of any of our campuses, so the fact that the campus will be finished soon will give a real boost to our Solomons regional campus.

    Student journalists in Fiji talk to Professor Pal Ahluwalia in Samoa
    Student journalists at USP’s Laucala campus in Suva, Fiji, talk to vice-chancellor Professor Pal Ahluwalia at the Samoa campus via a digital link. Image: Eliki Drugunalevu/Wansolwara

    In terms of financial status, is USP implementing new measures to mitigate the fall in core funding? If so, what are these measures? Are we expecting an increase in fees, will there be staff cutbacks or cutbacks to major expenditures, and is USP seeking major external funding as a backup?

    By the end of June, the Fijian government would have owed us roughly $74.8 million, which is a very substantial cut in our funding from the agreed formula. What that means is that people try to understand what that funding is for. Funding from different governments is really a subsidy for students studying on campus.

    The Fiji government gives that because, one, they have the largest number of students and so the amount is calculated on the number of students and it’s based on a formula which has been in place for many years. That’s the first point I want to make.

    The second point I want to make is that we made it work despite the fact that we haven’t been getting that funding.

    So that means that Fiji students are still being subsidised, but they need to be subsidised by the overall ways in which the university operates.

    So effectively, by not paying their funding, the Fiji government is not really supporting its students, and of course, that affects our core funding, but we have reprioritised students. Our priority is teaching and learning.

    Are we going to increase fees? There is no plan to, given the state of our economy at the moment. At the outset, what I’m really proud of is the resilience of our staff as well. We don’t have any staff cuts. We have not taken any. We’re not reducing our staff. We’re actually maintaining ourselves because we believe that the staff we have provide the quality education. Despite everything, we’ve maintained our staff.

    We’re always looking for external funding. We’re pursuing that all the time. For us, a lot of external funding is not coming directly into consolidated revenue, which we can use the way we want. We are getting it for projects and projects are being funded. Of course, our biggest challenge remains a non-funded community.

    The Kiribati campus lacks essential facilities and equipment to assist students with their programmes. This is a reason many students from Kiribati travel to Fiji to study at the main campus in Laucala. What plans, if any, are in the pipeline to upgrade USP’s teaching and learning facilities on Kiribati and other regional campuses?

    One of the things that covid-19 taught us is that we can do a lot of things in more imaginative ways and still deliver quality education. People can study from home. They can do a lot of their own studies. As the vice-chancellor I spent some time in Nauru.
    I had an absolutely amazing experience, which made me understand what a small Micronesian country goes through, what challenges people face on a day-to-day basis, and that has really informed a lot of my thinking about where we are.

    Now that I’m at one of our larger campuses in Samoa, I’m discovering many things that need to be solved here too. But I think in terms of our programmes, we are offering more and more programmes for our regional students.

    The first year experience buddy programme has been successfully running at the Laucala campus, given the importance of non-academic support in a student’s first year of university life. Will the university roll out the First Year Experience buddy programme across other regional campuses?

    That’s certainly my expectation that we’ll be doing that. There are two things that we did this year that were very different, something that I am really proud of — the Semester Zero initiative. I had this idea that students should be able to come to university. Many students out there have no experience with technology, which would be normal in other countries.

    So that was the first thing that we really wanted to solve, and I think we ran that programme for the first year to get that better. Now there’s a final programme to something that is actually run in different ways on different campuses.

    While it is business as usual for some campuses, is USP still concerned about the possible resurgence of other deadly strains of covid-19 and its impact on education? Are appropriate measures being implemented or improved to mitigate these impacts on the USP community?

    Absolutely! There’s no room for complacency. I’m really proud of the team and DISMAC — our Disaster Management Committee. We were very quick to develop plans. We’ve had to deal with a lot of different things, and we’ve learnt how to do that effectively. We’re not being complacent. We’ll monitor this.

    Every week I get a report on where we are with campuses and what’s going on. I have regular meetings with all my SMTs (senior management teams).

    I want to know how our staff are doing, their well-being is important to us. We’re very prepared. I think that’s why we’ve managed this crisis as well as we did. That’s what the ranking was for when we were ranked 11th for “crisis management” by the World Universities with Real Impact (WURI) 2021 global ranking.

    You have many notable and remarkable achievements, and these may have been accompanied with its fair share of challenges. How has your time in Samoa been and what are some life lessons or perhaps one factor that has kept you going during those challenging times?

    I’ve been very blessed. I’ve had the experience of working at a lot of institutions and I think I’ve been able to bring all that experience together to serve the Pacific. But the one biggest thing in all this, is the support of my staff and my students. Without that, nobody’s worth anything.

    I’m eternally grateful and proud of the achievements of our staff and students. This is never a one-person job; it’s always teamwork. It’s always bringing the best of everybody together. I’m so proud of that.

    The one thing about rankings is, not only for our students now but also for our alumni, is it shows that we are not just any ordinary university, but that we are the premier institution in the country.

    As a custodian of that university, I’m very conscious of that. It’s always been on my mind. I’m not here to rule, I’m here to serve. That’s the attitude which I feel very blessed about and that’s deep in my heart. I know that the minute I stop serving, I’ll be gone.

    Moving forward, what can we expect from USP in terms of programme offering, and improvements to learn, teaching and research?

    We’re always looking at what the future is going to hold for our region, what is it that our staff and students need to be doing to take us to the new year ahead of everybody else because we’re training the future of the labour force, the workforce that’s going to be required for our region. We’re going to enter into health programmes and we will start looking at other programmes where we can really bring innovation to the region.

    Some existing programmes will need to accommodate that change. I think the future looks fantastic, and the new streams of areas that would be available to our students and prospective students also look fantastic.

    Wansolwara is the student journalist newspaper of the University of the South Pacific. It collaborates with Asia Pacific Report, which prioritises student journalism.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/07/professor-pal-ahluwalia-on-the-future-of-usp-im-here-to-serve/feed/ 0 321517
    The Manchin-Approved Budget Bill Is No Progressive Panacea But It’s a Hell of a Lot Better Than Nothing https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/03/the-manchin-approved-budget-bill-is-no-progressive-panacea-but-its-a-hell-of-a-lot-better-than-nothing/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/03/the-manchin-approved-budget-bill-is-no-progressive-panacea-but-its-a-hell-of-a-lot-better-than-nothing/#respond Wed, 03 Aug 2022 10:17:01 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/338761
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Max B. Saw­icky.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/03/the-manchin-approved-budget-bill-is-no-progressive-panacea-but-its-a-hell-of-a-lot-better-than-nothing/feed/ 0 320429
    The Manchin-Approved Budget Bill: A Hell of a Lot Better Than Nothing https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/02/the-manchin-approved-budget-bill-a-hell-of-a-lot-better-than-nothing/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/02/the-manchin-approved-budget-bill-a-hell-of-a-lot-better-than-nothing/#respond Tue, 02 Aug 2022 14:45:00 +0000 https://inthesetimes.com/article/manchin-democrats-inflation-reduction-act-budget-biden-sinema-climate
    This content originally appeared on In These Times and was authored by Max B. Sawicky.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/08/02/the-manchin-approved-budget-bill-a-hell-of-a-lot-better-than-nothing/feed/ 0 320174
    USP unions slam Fiji’s Sayed-Khaiyum for ‘damaging’ Pacific university https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/24/usp-unions-slam-fijis-sayed-khaiyum-for-damaging-pacific-university/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/24/usp-unions-slam-fijis-sayed-khaiyum-for-damaging-pacific-university/#respond Sun, 24 Jul 2022 02:19:55 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=76769 By Wata Shaw in Suva

    Fiji’s Economy Minister Aiyaz Sayed-Khaiyum is “doing damage” to the premier regional university by withholding the Fiji government’s obligatory contribution, say the two staff unions representing the University of the South Pacific.

    Association of the USP academic staff president Dr Elizabeth Fong and USP staff union president Tarisi Vacala said in a statement that the USP Council had held several special meetings to address current USP issues as well as matters of concern of the Fiji government members.

    “The council deliberations led to clear majority decisions that exonerated Professor Pal Ahluwalia yet again of any mismanagement, administrative or for financial, and his reappointment as vice-chancellor and president of the USP and his relocation to Samoa,” the statement said.

    The unions said despite the deportation from Fiji of Professor Ahluwalia and his wife, just two years into his first contract, the government continued to “hurt Fiji and regional students” by withholding its obligatory grant.

    “Mr Sayed-Khaiyum’s statements in the Fiji Parliament and media about the withholding of Fiji government grant have not been accompanied by any formal paper to the University Council justifying his calls for an independent inquiry, the objectives of the inquiry, the composition of the commission of inquiry, or its terms of reference nor the financial costs that may be incurred.

    “It is apparent, that unable to remove Professor Pal Ahluwalia for his exposure of financial mismanagement and other breaches, Attorney-General Aiyaz Sayed-Khaiyum is doing damage to the premier regional university and hurting USP students by withholding the Fiji government’s obligatory contribution.”

    Questions sent to Prime Minister Voreqe Bainimarama and Sayed-Khaiyum by The Fiji Times remained unanswered at publication time.

    ‘Honour’ Parliament decisions call
    RNZ Pacific reports that the unions called on the Fiji government to “honour” the decisions of Parliament and pay the outstanding subsidy due to the university.

    The Fiji goverment has withheld what is officially called a grant but is in fact a subsidy on the student fees at the university, RNZ Pacific said.

    The two unions — Association of USP Staff (AUSPS) and the USP Staff Union (USPSU) — said the Fiji government owed the institution FJ$78.4 million (NZ$58 million).

    The money has been withheld by the government because of its ongoing battle with vice-chancellor Pal Ahluwalia.

    USP chief librarian Dr Elizabeth Fong … speaking for the Association of USP Staff (AUSPS). Image: Fijivillage/File

    There were a series of inquiries after Ahluwalia had identified significant corruption within the previous administration at the USP.

    Five inquiries so far have cost the USP more than FJ$1 million — and they have all exonerated Ahluwalia.

    The unions said: “It is apparent, that unable to remove Professor Pal Ahluwalia for his exposure of the financial mismanagement and other breaches of the previous USP Administration, the Attorney-General and Minister for Economy, Civil Service, Communications, Housing and Community Development is doing damage to the premier regional university and hurting USP students by withholding the Fiji government’s obligatory contribution.”

    However, the Fiji government last week called for yet another investigation.

    The unions had a paid advertisement running yesterday in Fiji.

    In it they said: “Based on the outcomes of the inquiries there is no reasonable justification for another inquiry.

    “The unions on behalf of the students, staff and alumni therefore call on the Prime Minister, [Voreqe] Bainimarama to abide by and honour the decision of the Fiji Parliament that approved the USP grants for 2020, 2021 and to pay what is owed under its obligation and to bring this matter to closure so as to leave no-one behind.”

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ and with permission from The Fiji Times.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/24/usp-unions-slam-fijis-sayed-khaiyum-for-damaging-pacific-university/feed/ 0 317804
    House Votes Down Amendments to Cut ‘Outrageous’ Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/14/house-votes-down-amendments-to-cut-outrageous-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/14/house-votes-down-amendments-to-cut-outrageous-military-budget/#respond Thu, 14 Jul 2022 19:16:01 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/338318

    Progressive campaigners rebuked members of Congress who on Wednesday night voted down a pair of amendments to the latest National Defense Authorization Act that would have significantly limited the U.S. military budget.

    "Despite the outcome of today's vote, it's never too late for members of Congress to come to their senses and budget for our actual needs over weapons-makers' wants."

    With the U.S. House of Representatives set to vote this week on the NDAA for fiscal year 2023, progressive Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.) sought to include two amendments in $839 billion bill.

    One of the measures would have reduced the overall Pentagon budget by $100 billion, while the other would have rescinded the $37 billion in additional Pentagon funding added in committee to President Joe Biden's topline request. The former measure was defeated by a vote of 78-350, while the latter was voted down 151-277.

    "We are racing toward a trillion-dollar military budget that tolerates and encourages mind-blowing waste, rewards military-industrial complex political spending with unfathomably large contracts—and fails to address priority national security needs," Robert Weissman, president of the consumer advocacy group Public Citizen, said in a statement.

    "With the United States spending more on its military than the next nine highest spending countries combined, there's no serious argument that additional dollars for the Pentagon makes us safer," Weissman continued. "The good news is: the American people are on to the racket and mobilizing to demand a reallocation of funding away from the Pentagon and to prioritize human needs."

    "Today's votes on the amendments led by peace and common-sense champions, Reps. Barbara Lee and Mark Pocan, are the earlier indicators of that mobilization," he added. "An overwhelming majority of the Democratic caucus—along with more than a dozen Republicans—voted to roll back the Pentagon spending increase added in the Armed Services Committee, showing that the congressional willingness to meet the military-industrial complex's demand for more, more, more is fast eroding."

    Eric Eikenberry, government relations director at the peace group Win Without War, lamented that lawmakers "again underscored our nation's broken budget priorities by upholding this eye-popping topline number—twice."

    "Two critically needed amendments offered by Reps. Lee and Pocan would have cut this outrageous amount," he noted. "Either would have been a welcome shift to a status quo that continues to think more weapons and more war will make us safe. Unfortunately, neither received enough votes to pass."

    "Right now, there is no shortage of urgent crises that our government must address," Eikenberry argued. "People across the country face crumbling infrastructure, critically underfunded schools, and a failing healthcare system—all while facing rising costs to pay for essential items like gasoline, food, and housing."

    "The harsh reality is that these billions weren't simply given away to the Pentagon—they were taken from communities for whom even a fraction of these funds could have made a fundamental difference," he added. "Despite the outcome of today's vote, it's never too late for members of Congress to come to their senses and budget for our actual needs over weapons-makers' wants."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Brett Wilkins.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/14/house-votes-down-amendments-to-cut-outrageous-military-budget/feed/ 0 315382
    President Biden set to visit Saudi Arabia, despite earlier calling it a “pariah” state; The House rejects Barbara Lee’s bid to cut the massive military budget; A new campaign aims to tax the super-rich https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/14/president-biden-set-to-visit-saudi-arabia-despite-earlier-calling-it-a-pariah-state-the-house-rejects-barbara-lees-bid-to-cut-the-massive-military-budget-a-new-campaign-a/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/14/president-biden-set-to-visit-saudi-arabia-despite-earlier-calling-it-a-pariah-state-the-house-rejects-barbara-lees-bid-to-cut-the-massive-military-budget-a-new-campaign-a/#respond Thu, 14 Jul 2022 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=2b03adac8cf2d4781cd6607aaf306444
    This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/14/president-biden-set-to-visit-saudi-arabia-despite-earlier-calling-it-a-pariah-state-the-house-rejects-barbara-lees-bid-to-cut-the-massive-military-budget-a-new-campaign-a/feed/ 0 315418
    Groups Urge Voters to Call Lawmakers and Demand Cuts to Bloated Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/13/groups-urge-voters-to-call-lawmakers-and-demand-cuts-to-bloated-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/13/groups-urge-voters-to-call-lawmakers-and-demand-cuts-to-bloated-pentagon-budget/#respond Wed, 13 Jul 2022 17:38:39 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/338279

    Progressive campaigners on Wednesday urged members of the U.S. public to contact their representatives and demand their support for a pair of amendments that would reduce the country's military spending, a call that comes as the House is set to vote on legislation that would hand the Pentagon more than $800 billion in the coming fiscal year.

    "Call your Representative directly TODAY, or call the U.S. Capitol Switchboard at 202-224-3121."

    "That's almost a trillion dollars—approaching the highest historical levels for U.S. military funding since World War II," the National Priorities Project (NPP) noted in an email. "That dwarfs spending on many other agencies responsible for social spending, combined."

    NPP is calling on the House, narrowly controlled by Democrats, to attach two separate amendments to the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA), sprawling legislation that could receive a vote in the lower chamber as soon as this week.

    The first amendment, led by Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.), would claw back the $37 billion that the House Armed Services Committee recently voted to add to President Joe Biden's historically high military budget request for fiscal year 2023.

    In its current form, the NDAA topline is $839 billion—a figure that includes $808.4 billion for the Pentagon and $30.5 billion for the Department of Energy, which oversees the country's nuclear arsenal.

    Lee and Pocan are also spearheading a second NDAA amendment that, if approved, would cut $100 billion from the current topline military spending level of $782 billion.

    "Call your representative directly TODAY, or call the U.S. Capitol Switchboard at 202-224-3121," NPP wrote in its email. "Urge them to vote 'yes' on both amendments."

    On Tuesday, the House Rules Committee agreed to allow the two Lee-Pocan amendments—along with hundreds of others—to receive votes on the House floor in the coming days.

    Last year, as Common Dreams reported, similar efforts to rein in U.S. military spending during the NDAA process fell short as Republican and Democratic lawmakers—some funded by the weapons makers that benefit from ever-larger Pentagon budgets—teamed up to ensure their defeat.

    But while progressives in Congress have yet to garner enough support from their colleagues to cut military spending, recent surveys indicate that their efforts are popular with the public.

    A February poll showed that a majority of U.S. adults support cuts to military spending. Last month, the consumer advocacy group Public Citizen released a survey showing that 60% of likely voters want to keep military funding at the level Biden requested earlier this year.

    "We have an opportunity right now to cut the military's sky-high budget and invest in our communities," NPP declared Wednesday, "but it can't happen without your help."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/13/groups-urge-voters-to-call-lawmakers-and-demand-cuts-to-bloated-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 315019
    Groups Urge Voters to Call Lawmakers and Demand Cuts to Bloated Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/13/groups-urge-voters-to-call-lawmakers-and-demand-cuts-to-bloated-pentagon-budget-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/13/groups-urge-voters-to-call-lawmakers-and-demand-cuts-to-bloated-pentagon-budget-2/#respond Wed, 13 Jul 2022 17:38:39 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/338279

    Progressive campaigners on Wednesday urged members of the U.S. public to contact their representatives and demand their support for a pair of amendments that would reduce the country's military spending, a call that comes as the House is set to vote on legislation that would hand the Pentagon more than $800 billion in the coming fiscal year.

    "Call your Representative directly TODAY, or call the U.S. Capitol Switchboard at 202-224-3121."

    "That's almost a trillion dollars—approaching the highest historical levels for U.S. military funding since World War II," the National Priorities Project (NPP) noted in an email. "That dwarfs spending on many other agencies responsible for social spending, combined."

    NPP is calling on the House, narrowly controlled by Democrats, to attach two separate amendments to the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA), sprawling legislation that could receive a vote in the lower chamber as soon as this week.

    The first amendment, led by Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.), would claw back the $37 billion that the House Armed Services Committee recently voted to add to President Joe Biden's historically high military budget request for fiscal year 2023.

    In its current form, the NDAA topline is $839 billion—a figure that includes $808.4 billion for the Pentagon and $30.5 billion for the Department of Energy, which oversees the country's nuclear arsenal.

    Lee and Pocan are also spearheading a second NDAA amendment that, if approved, would cut $100 billion from the current topline military spending level of $782 billion.

    "Call your representative directly TODAY, or call the U.S. Capitol Switchboard at 202-224-3121," NPP wrote in its email. "Urge them to vote 'yes' on both amendments."

    On Tuesday, the House Rules Committee agreed to allow the two Lee-Pocan amendments—along with hundreds of others—to receive votes on the House floor in the coming days.

    Last year, as Common Dreams reported, similar efforts to rein in U.S. military spending during the NDAA process fell short as Republican and Democratic lawmakers—some funded by the weapons makers that benefit from ever-larger Pentagon budgets—teamed up to ensure their defeat.

    But while progressives in Congress have yet to garner enough support from their colleagues to cut military spending, recent surveys indicate that their efforts are popular with the public.

    A February poll showed that a majority of U.S. adults support cuts to military spending. Last month, the consumer advocacy group Public Citizen released a survey showing that 60% of likely voters want to keep military funding at the level Biden requested earlier this year.

    "We have an opportunity right now to cut the military's sky-high budget and invest in our communities," NPP declared Wednesday, "but it can't happen without your help."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/13/groups-urge-voters-to-call-lawmakers-and-demand-cuts-to-bloated-pentagon-budget-2/feed/ 0 315020
    ‘$839 Billion Military Budget Is a Policy Failure,’ Say Critics as House Tees Up NDAA https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/12/839-billion-military-budget-is-a-policy-failure-say-critics-as-house-tees-up-ndaa/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/12/839-billion-military-budget-is-a-policy-failure-say-critics-as-house-tees-up-ndaa/#respond Tue, 12 Jul 2022 15:35:05 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/338236
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/12/839-billion-military-budget-is-a-policy-failure-say-critics-as-house-tees-up-ndaa/feed/ 0 314708
    America’s $1.4 Trillion So-Called “National Security” Budget Makes Us Less Safe—Not More https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/07/americas-1-4-trillion-so-called-national-security-budget-makes-us-less-safe-not-more/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/07/americas-1-4-trillion-so-called-national-security-budget-makes-us-less-safe-not-more/#respond Thu, 07 Jul 2022 13:59:45 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/338143

    This March, when the Biden administration presented a staggering $813 billion proposal for “national defense,” it was hard to imagine a budget that could go significantly higher or be more generous to the denizens of the military-industrial complex. After all, that request represented far more than peak spending in the Korean or Vietnam War years, and well over $100 billion more than at the height of the Cold War. 

    It was, in fact, an astonishing figure by any measure — more than two-and-a-half times what China spends; more, in fact, than (and hold your hats for this one!) the national security budgets of the next nine countries, including China and Russia, combined. And yet the weapons industry and hawks in Congress are now demanding that even more be spent. 

    In recent National Defense Authorization Act proposals, which always set a marker for what Congress is willing to fork over to the Pentagon, the Senate and House Armed Services Committees both voted to increase the 2023 budget yet again — by $45 billion in the case of the Senate and $37 billion for the House. The final figure won’t be determined until later this year, but Congress is likely to add tens of billions of dollars more than even the Biden administration wanted to what will most likely be a record for the Pentagon’s already bloated budget.

    This lust for yet more weapons spending is especially misguided at a time when a never-ending pandemic, growing heat waves and other depredations of climate change, and racial and economic injustice are devastating the lives of millions of Americans.  Make no mistake about it: the greatest risks to our safety and our future are non-military in nature, with the exception, of course, of the threat of nuclear war, which could increase if the current budget goes through as planned.

    But as TomDispatch readers know, the Pentagon is just one element in an ever more costly American national security state.  Adding other military, intelligence, and internal-security expenditures to the Pentagon’s budget brings the total upcoming “national security” budget to a mind-boggling $1.4 trillion. And note that, in June 2021, the last time my colleague Mandy Smithberger and I added up such costs to the taxpayer, that figure was almost $1.3 trillion, so the trend is obvious.

    To understand how these vast sums are spent year after year, let’s take a quick tour of America’s national security budget, top to bottom.

    The Pentagon’s “Base” Budget

    The Pentagon’s proposed “base” budget, which includes all of its routine expenses from personnel to weapons to the costs of operating and maintaining a 1.3 million member military force, came in at $773 billion for 2023, more than $30 billion above that of 2022. Such an increase alone is three times the discretionary budget of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and more than three times the total allocation for the Environmental Protection Agency. 

    In all, the Pentagon consumes nearly half of the discretionary budget of the whole federal government, a figure that’s come down slightly in recent years thanks to the Biden administration’s increased investment in civilian activities. That still means, however, that almost anything the government wants to do other than preparing for or waging war involves a scramble for funding, while the Department of Defense gets virtually unlimited financial support.

    And keep in mind that the proposed Biden increase in Pentagon spending comes despite the ending of 20 years of U.S. military involvement in Afghanistan, a move that should have meant significant reductions in the department’s budget.  Perhaps you won’t be surprised to learn, however, that, in the wake of the Afghan disaster, the military establishment and hawks in Congress quickly shifted gears to touting — and exaggerating — challenges posed by China, Russia, and inflation as reasons for absorbing the potential savings from the Afghan War and pressing the Pentagon budget ever higher.

    It’s worth looking at what America stands to receive for its $773 billion — or about $2,000 per taxpayer, according to an analysis by the National Priorities Project at the Institute for Policy Studies. More than half of that amount goes to giant weapons contractors like Raytheon and Lockheed Martin, along with thousands of smaller arms-making firms.

    The most concerning part of the new budget proposal, however, may be the administration’s support for a three-decades long, $1.7-trillion plan to build a new generation of nuclear-armed missiles (as well, of course, as new warheads to go with them), bombers, and submarines. As the organization Global Zero has pointed out, the United States could dissuade any country from launching an atomic attack against it with far fewer weapons than are contained in its current nuclear arsenal.  There’s simply no need for a costly — and risky — nuclear weapons “modernization” plan. Sadly, it’s guaranteed to help fuel a continuing global nuclear arms race, while entrenching nuclear weapons as a mainstay of national security policy for decades to come. (Wouldn’t those decades be so much better spent working to eliminate nuclear weapons altogether?) 

    The riskiest weapon in that nuclear plan is a new land-based, intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM).  As former Secretary of Defense William Perry once explained, ICBMs are among “the most dangerous weapons in the world” because a president warned of a nuclear attack would have only a matter of minutes to decide whether to launch them, increasing the risk of an accidental nuclear war based on a false alarm. Not only is a new ICBM unnecessary, but the existing ones should be retired as well, as a way of reducing the potential for a world-ending nuclear conflagration.

    To its credit, the Biden administration is trying to get rid of an ill-conceived nuclear weapons program initiated during the Trump years – a sea-launched, nuclear-armed cruise missile that, rather than adding a “deterrent” capability, would raise the risk of a nuclear confrontation.  As expected, nuclear hawks in the military and Congress are trying to restore funding for that nuclear SLCM (pronounced “Slick ‘em”).

    The Pentagon budget is replete with other unnecessary, overpriced, and often potentially dysfunctional systems that should either be canceled or replaced with more affordable and effective alternatives.  The most obvious case in point is the F-35 combat aircraft, meant to carry out multiple missions for the Air Force, Navy, and Marines. So far, it does none of them well

    In a series of careful analyses of the aircraft, the Project on Government Oversight determined that it may never be fully ready for combat. As for cost, at an estimated $1.7 trillion over its projected period of service, it’s already the most expensive single weapons program ever undertaken by the Pentagon. And keep in mind that those costs will only increase as the military services are forced to pay to fix problems that were never addressed in the rush to deploy the plane before it was fully tested.  Meanwhile, that aircraft is so complex that, at any given moment, a large percentage of the fleet is down for maintenance, meaning that, if ever called on for combat duty, many of those planes will simply not be available.

    In a grudging acknowledgement of the multiple problems plaguing the F-35, the Biden administration proposed decreasing its buy of the plane by about a third in 2023, a figure that should have been much lower given its poor performance. But congressional advocates of the plane — including a large F-35 caucus made up of members in states or districts where parts of it are being produced — will undoubtedly continue to press for more planes than even the Pentagon’s asking for, as the Senate Armed Services Committee did in its markup of the Department of Defense spending bill.

    In addition to all of this, the Pentagon’s base budget includes mandatory spending for items like military retirement, totaling an estimated $12.8 billion for 2023.

    Running national (in)security tally: $785.8 billion

    The Nuclear Budget

    The average taxpayer no doubt assumes that a government agency called the Department of Energy (DOE) would be primarily concerned with developing new sources of energy, including ones that would reduce America’s dependence on fossil fuels to help rein in the ravages of climate change.  Unfortunately, that assumption couldn’t be less true.

    Instead of spending the bulk of its time and money on energy research and development, more than 40% of the Department of Energy’s budget for 2023 is slated to support the National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA), which manages the country’s nuclear weapons program, principally by maintaining and developing nuclear warheads.  Work on other military activities like reactors for nuclear submarines pushes the defense share of the DOE budget even higher. The NNSA spreads its work across the country, with major locations in California, Missouri, Nevada, New Mexico, South Carolina, Tennessee, and Texas. Its proposed 2023 budget for nuclear-weapons activities is $16.5 billion, part of a budget for defense-related projects of $29.8 billion.

    Amazingly the NNSA’s record of managing its programs may be even worse than the Pentagon’s, with cost overruns of more than $28 billion during the last two decades.  Many of its current projects, like a plan to build a new facility to produce plutonium “pits” — the devices that trigger the explosion of a hydrogen bomb — are unnecessary even under the current, misguided nuclear weapons modernization plan.

    Nuclear budget: $29.8 billion

    Running (in)security tally: $815.6 billion

    Defense-Related Activities

    This catch-all category, pegged at $10.6 billion in 2023, includes the international activities of the FBI and payments to Central Intelligence Agency retirement funds, among other things.

    Defense-Related Activities: $10.6 billion

    Running (in)security tally: $826.2 billion

    The Intelligence Budget

    Information about this country’s 18 separate intelligence agencies is largely shielded from public view.  Most members of Congress don’t even have staff that can access significant details on how intelligence funds are spent, making meaningful Congressional oversight almost impossible. The only real data supplied with regard to the intelligence agencies is a top-line number – $67.1 billion proposed for 2023, a $5 billion increase over 2022. Most of the intelligence community’s budget is believed to be hidden inside the Pentagon budget. So, in the interests of making a conservative estimate, intelligence spending is not included in our tally.

    Intelligence Budget: $67.1 billion

    Running (in)security tally still: $826.2 billion

    Veterans Affairs Budget

    America’s post-9/11 wars have generated millions of veterans, many of whom have returned from battle with severe physical or psychological injuries. As a result, spending on veterans’ affairs has soared, reaching a proposed $301 billion in the 2023 budget plan.  Research conducted for the Costs of War Project at Brown University has determined that these costs will only grow, with more than $2 trillion needed just to take care of the veterans of the post-9/11 conflicts.

    Veterans Affairs Budget: $301 billion

    Running (in)security tally: $1.127 trillion

    International Affairs Budget

    The International Affairs budget includes non-military items like diplomacy at the State Department and economic aid through the Agency for International Development, critical (but significantly underfunded) parts of the U.S. national security strategy writ large.  But even in this category there are significant military-related activities in the form of programs that provide arms and training to foreign militaries and police forces.  It’s proposed that the largest of these, the Foreign Military Financing program, should receive $6 billion in 2023. Meanwhile, the total requested International Affairs budget is $67.8 billion in 2023.

    International Affairs Budget: $67.8 billion

    Running (in)security tally: $1.195 trillion

    The Homeland Security Budget

    After the 9/11 attacks, the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) was established by combining a wide range of agencies, including the Federal Emergency Management Agency, the Transportation Security Agency, the U.S. Secret Service, Customs and Border Protection, and the Coast Guard.  The proposed DHS budget for 2023 is $56.7 billion, more than one-quarter of which goes to Customs and Border Protection as part of a militarized approach to addressing immigration into the United States.

    Homeland Security Budget: $56.7 billion

    Running (in)security tally: $1.252 trillion

    Interest on the Debt

    The national security state, as outlined so far, is responsible for about 26% of the interest due on the U.S. debt, a total of $152 billion.

    Interest on the Debt: $152 billion

    Running (in)security tally: $1.404 trillion

    Our Misguided Security Budget

    Spending $1.4 trillion to address a narrowly defined concept of national security should be considered budgetary malpractice on a scale so grand as to be almost unimaginable — especially at a time when the greatest risks to the safety of Americans and the rest of the world are not military in nature. After all, the Covid pandemic has already taken the lives of more than one million Americans, while the fires, floods, and heat waves caused by climate change have impacted tens of millions more. 

    Yet the administration’s proposed allocation of $45 billion to address climate change in the 2023 budget would be less than 6% of the Pentagon’s proposed budget of $773 billion.  And as noted, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention are slated to get just one-third of the proposed increase in Pentagon spending between 2022 and 2023. Worse yet, attempts to raise spending significantly to address these urgent challenges, from President Biden’s Build Back Better plan to the Green New Deal, are stalled in Congress.

    In a world where such dangers are only increasing, perhaps the best hope for launching a process that could, sooner or later, reverse such perverse priorities lies with grassroots organizing. Consider, for instance the “moral budget” crafted by the Poor People’s Campaign, which would cut Pentagon spending almost in half while refocusing on programs aimed at eliminating poverty, protecting the environment, and improving access to health care.  If even part of such an agenda were achieved and the “defense” budget reined in, if not cut drastically, America and the world would be far safer places.

    Given the scale of the actual security problems we face, it’s time to think big when it comes to potential solutions, while recognizing what Martin Luther King, Jr., once described as the “fierce urgency of now.” Time is running short, and concerted action is imperative.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by William Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/07/americas-1-4-trillion-so-called-national-security-budget-makes-us-less-safe-not-more/feed/ 0 313408
    Lee, Pocan File Amendment to Slash $100 Billion From US Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/07/lee-pocan-file-amendment-to-slash-100-billion-from-us-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/07/lee-pocan-file-amendment-to-slash-100-billion-from-us-military-budget/#respond Thu, 07 Jul 2022 10:31:52 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/338140

    Reps. Barbara Lee and Mark Pocan led a group of House Democrats this week in filing amendments that would slash current U.S. military spending by $100 billion and reverse recent efforts to add more money to President Joe Biden's historically high Pentagon budget request for the coming fiscal year.

    The proposed amendments to the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) for Fiscal Year 2023 were introduced days after lawmakers on the House and Senate Armed Services Committees—both controlled by Democrats—voted to pile $37 billion and $45 billion, respectively, onto Biden's March request for $813 billion in military spending.

    One of more than 1,000 amendments filed for the House version of the NDAA, the Lee-Pocan proposal to cut $100 billion from the current U.S. military spending topline of $782 billion points to a recent Congressional Budget Office study outlining several ways in which Congress could reasonably slice $1 trillion—or 14%—from the Pentagon budget over the next decade.

    Lee and Pocan, the co-chairs of the Defense Spending Reduction Caucus, have repeatedly attempted to rein in U.S. military spending in recent years, but their efforts have been blocked by Republicans and members of their own party—some of whom are financed by weapons makers.

    Last month, the pair introduced legislation that would take $100 billion from the U.S. military budget and redirect the funds to pressing domestic needs such as housing and healthcare.

    "For far too long, this country has put profits ahead of its people," Lee said. "Nowhere is that more apparent than in our Pentagon topline budget. Just last year, key priorities like Build Back Better were left on the negotiating table, while Congress approved a $782 billion defense budget—higher than the military even requested."

    "It is time that we realign our priorities to reflect the urgent needs of communities across this country that are healing from a pandemic, ongoing economic insecurity, and an international energy crisis—none of which will be resolved through greater military spending," Lee added. "Taking this step to downsize our military budget by $100 billion will ensure that our national security truly centers on the American people, not weapons industry profits."

    Reps. Peter DeFazio (D-Ore.), Bonnie Watson Coleman (D-N.J.), Jared Huffman (D-Calif.), and Adriano Espaillat (D-N.Y.) are backing the Lee-Pocan NDAA amendment to reduce the current military spending topline by $100 billion.

    Lee also introduced an amendment that would repeal the 2002 Authorization for Use of Military Force (AUMF) Against Iraq, which—following its original passage ahead of the catastrophic Iraq invasion—was used as legal cover by the Obama and Trump administrations to take deadly action overseas.

    In 2020, for instance, the Trump administration invoked the 2002 AUMF to claim it was authorized to assassinate Iranian Gen. Qasem Soleimani, a decision that nearly sparked a full-blown war between the U.S. and Iran.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/07/07/lee-pocan-file-amendment-to-slash-100-billion-from-us-military-budget/feed/ 0 313328
    ‘This Country Would Want to See Money Taken From the Pentagon and Reallocated’ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/30/this-country-would-want-to-see-money-taken-from-the-pentagon-and-reallocated/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/30/this-country-would-want-to-see-money-taken-from-the-pentagon-and-reallocated/#respond Thu, 30 Jun 2022 15:13:54 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9029235 "The Pentagon shouldn't be a jobs program. If we need a jobs program in this country, and we do, we should create a jobs program."

    The post ‘This Country Would Want to See Money Taken From the Pentagon and Reallocated’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Janine Jackson interviewed the National Priorities Project’s Lindsay Koshgarian about the People Over Pentagon Act for the June 24, 2022, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin220624Koshgarian.mp3

     

    Janine Jackson: Corporate news media make little mistakes, misrepresentations that have impact. But day after day, they do something bigger and deeper that affects us all at an almost cellular level. And that is to accept and propagate the story that the United States doesn’t have enough to provide for the basic needs of its people. Some simply must suffer. But the country does have enough to sink billions of dollars into weapons of war to defend the system that, you know, demands suffering for large numbers of us.

    It doesn’t make sense. And to the extent that it does, wouldn’t a humane country be challenging every penny that goes toward killing people to see if it might be used to support people?

    If you ask them, the US public wants such a reprioritization. But what happens when lawmakers, people in actual positions of power, call for such a thing and attempt to outline how it might happen?

    Lindsay Koshgarian is the program director of the National Priorities Project. She joins us now by phone from Massachusetts. Welcome to CounterSpin, Lindsay Koshgarian.

    Lindsay Koshgarian: “The Pentagon shouldn’t be a jobs program. If we need a jobs program in this country, and we do, we should create a jobs program.”

    Lindsay Koshgarian: Thanks so much for having me.

    JJ: I am unfortunately confident that many or most listeners don’t know anything about it. So would you please just tell us about the bill introduced by Democratic House representatives Barbara Lee of California and Mark Pocan of Wisconsin? What is that bill, and what would it do?

    LK: Absolutely. It makes sense to start with our Pentagon budget and just how big it is, because, of course, the bill is about relocating some of that money. So our Pentagon budget right now, it is approaching $800 billion, and President Biden has suggested a budget that would go over $800 billion. Meanwhile, many folks in Congress are pushing for a budget that goes even above what President Biden has asked for, and what the Pentagon has said is enough.

    So that’s the background. The budget as it is now is higher than it was at the height of the Vietnam War. It is higher than the next nine countries combined, some of which are our allies, and it is 12 times as much as Russia. So it’s a huge, huge amount of money.

    It’s also more than half of the discretionary budget that Congress allocates every year. That means that less than half is left for things like housing assistance, homelessness programs, public education, public health, the CDC, medical research. All of these things have to fit into less than half.

    So what the Lee/Pocan bill is, it’s introduced by Rep. Barbara Lee and Rep. Mark Pocan, and it suggests that we should cut $100 billion from the Pentagon budget in order to reallocate that money to other priorities.

    And this number is significant for a couple of reasons. One is that it would take us back a couple years. The budget has been growing every single year. It would take us back a few years and get rid of some of that growth.

    Another is that last year there was a study from the Congressional Budget Office that showed that you could cut $100 billion from the Pentagon budget without even changing what our national security mission is. So even if we kept all of our wars going, even if we kept our hundreds of overseas bases, even if we kept our hundreds of thousands of troops that are around the world at any given time, you could still basically do all of those same things if you cut $100 billion.

    So this is not even a significant cut. It’s not even a remaking of our national security, even though we need a remaking of our national security. And you could do all of those things without touching troops’ pay or benefits or their childcare or any of the things that folks in the military rely on.

    JJ: That’s an important inoculation against what you are likely to see about pulling blankets off soldiers in foxholes.

    LK: That’s right.

    JJ: OK. Well, it’s important to say that this didn’t drop from the sky. This is not the first iteration that we’ve had. There was a Sanders/Lee/Pocan bill a couple years back. But also, it’s not just, “Hey, let’s start thinking about this.” This legislation builds on work that groups have been doing.

    National Priorities Project (6/16/19)

    LK: That’s right. And we are one of those groups. So a couple of years back—and at that time, the Pentagon budget was smaller than it is today—we did a study where we found ways to cut up to $300 billion off of the Pentagon budget. And that was by doing things like closing some of our more than 700 overseas military installations; no other country has more than 20. It would be doing things like cutting back on some of the most expensive weapons systems, cutting back on the number of planes and ships that we have.

    For example, the US military has 11 aircraft carriers. No other country has more than two with a third in the works; that’s China. So we’ve got many, many more than they have. So we can cut back some on that and still be ahead of any other country. And cutting back on things like nuclear weapons.

    And then there’s also cutting back on some of the bureaucracy. One of the things that we suggested doing was shifting the military health system into a larger universal health system for all Americans.

    So by doing things like that, we found that you could cut up to $350 billion a year from the Pentagon budget. And there are many other groups that have come up with similar lists of ways to cut tens or hundreds of billions of dollars from the Pentagon budget.

    JJ: Let me just draw you back to a point you made earlier. Some legislators want more than the Pentagon is asking? How does that make sense?

    LK: Yes. This is something that actually happens year in and year out. And it comes from a couple of places. One, of course, is the military/industrial complex. Any time the military asks for fewer planes, or they ask to retire some ships, like they’re doing now, there are, of course, contractors who either build those systems or get the contracts for maintaining those systems, and the contractors don’t like that, so they always object.

    Then there are the parochial political concerns. So a lot of times, if the Pentagon wants fewer of a certain ship, and that ship is made in a particular congressional district, you get opposition on the basis of that local economy, even though we know that if you took those same dollars and put them into job creation in healthcare or education or infrastructure, you could create more jobs in that local economy than by the shipbuilding or other investments in war.

    So those are a couple of the big things. The contractors are immensely powerful. They take, in any given year, around half and frequently more than half of the entire Pentagon budget. It’s a huge, huge industry, and a huge problem of how much power they wield over the congressional process.

    It’s a local community problem. The answer to that, of course, is that the Pentagon shouldn’t be a jobs program. If we need a jobs program in this country, and we do, we should create a jobs program.

    And so those are the two big reasons why you see folks in Congress pushing for more money.

    JJ: Again, that reprioritization is what people, when you explain it and ask them, that’s what they want. So if it doesn’t happen, you would hope that the media story would be “Why don’t people’s desires and their basic needs translate into policy?” rather than trying to convince people that they’re too dumb to understand what needs to happen. I wonder what you would like to see more of, or less of, in terms of news media attention to these issues.

    AFSC: New national poll shows majority support for cuts in Pentagon spending

    American Friends Service Committee (2/15/22)

    LK: Yes, it’s a great question. Cause you’re right, we have polling, recent polling, that shows that a majority of folks in this country would want to see money taken from the Pentagon and reallocated to all of the things that we know we desperately need, like healthcare, like education, like infrastructure. So we know that people are behind that, but we also know that our political system frequently doesn’t follow the will of the people.

    And one of the reasons is Congress is very captured by industry. But that doesn’t mean that there aren’t things we can do about it. Being captured by industry really comes down to wanting to be reelected. And so if folks vote, and if folks communicate with their member of Congress, we can put forward very effective counter pressure toward that. So we need more of that, first and foremost.

     

    But we also do need a media that is more accountable. They’re too credulous about threats, whether it be from China or from Russia. And both of those are threats that are overblown. China is not primarily a military threat to the United States, and so we shouldn’t respond to it in a military manner.

    And Russia has proven to be both less strong militarily and, also, it is something that the entire world community can deal with, through means like diplomacy and through means like building institutions that enforce international law, and ways other than the US spending more money on our military.

    So those are the kinds of things that we need to see the media asking questions about, pushing back on members of Congress and asking them if what we really need is more money for the Pentagon.

    NPP: 11% of the Military Budget Could Fund Enough Renewable Energy for Every Home in the US

    National Priorities Project (9/20/19)

    JJ: And I would just say, finally, what I would hope to see is also a building out, a talking about the other part of it, which is what it might look like to devote those resources to human needs. There’s plenty of stories there to talk about, what would various social issues and problems look like with an infusion of resources? There’s a way to tell the story that’s about what we could have.

    LK: That’s absolutely right, yes. We need to see a redefining of security. The Pentagon, in theory, is supposed to be keeping us safe. But meanwhile, we still have hundreds of deaths from Covid. We are still in an opioid epidemic. We are heading into a wildfire and hurricane season that–we don’t even know how bad it will be yet, because of climate change.

    Those are all things that we need for security. And we did a study as an example of the kind of things that we could be doing, if we weren’t putting so much money into the Pentagon. We found that in the 20 years since 9/11, we spent $21 trillion on supposed security. And that for just a quarter of that cost, for less than $5 trillion, we could have had an entirely renewable energy grid in this country.

    And that could be done. We could have done it already. And so what we need to desperately do is make sure that in the next 20 years, we don’t make those same choices again. We need to put money where we need it to be, and solve the problems that are actually the most dire problems we have.

    JJ: We’ve been speaking with Lindsay Koshgarian. She’s program director of the National Priorities Project. They’re online at NationalPriorities.org. Lindsay Koshgarian, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    LK: Thanks so much for having me.

     

    The post ‘This Country Would Want to See Money Taken From the Pentagon and Reallocated’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/30/this-country-would-want-to-see-money-taken-from-the-pentagon-and-reallocated/feed/ 0 311434
    ‘This Country Would Want to See Money Taken From the Pentagon and Reallocated’ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/30/this-country-would-want-to-see-money-taken-from-the-pentagon-and-reallocated-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/30/this-country-would-want-to-see-money-taken-from-the-pentagon-and-reallocated-2/#respond Thu, 30 Jun 2022 15:13:54 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9029235 "The Pentagon shouldn't be a jobs program. If we need a jobs program in this country, and we do, we should create a jobs program."

    The post ‘This Country Would Want to See Money Taken From the Pentagon and Reallocated’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Janine Jackson interviewed the National Priorities Project’s Lindsay Koshgarian about the People Over Pentagon Act for the June 24, 2022, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin220624Koshgarian.mp3

     

    Janine Jackson: Corporate news media make little mistakes, misrepresentations that have impact. But day after day, they do something bigger and deeper that affects us all at an almost cellular level. And that is to accept and propagate the story that the United States doesn’t have enough to provide for the basic needs of its people. Some simply must suffer. But the country does have enough to sink billions of dollars into weapons of war to defend the system that, you know, demands suffering for large numbers of us.

    It doesn’t make sense. And to the extent that it does, wouldn’t a humane country be challenging every penny that goes toward killing people to see if it might be used to support people?

    If you ask them, the US public wants such a reprioritization. But what happens when lawmakers, people in actual positions of power, call for such a thing and attempt to outline how it might happen?

    Lindsay Koshgarian is the program director of the National Priorities Project. She joins us now by phone from Massachusetts. Welcome to CounterSpin, Lindsay Koshgarian.

    Lindsay Koshgarian: “The Pentagon shouldn’t be a jobs program. If we need a jobs program in this country, and we do, we should create a jobs program.”

    Lindsay Koshgarian: Thanks so much for having me.

    JJ: I am unfortunately confident that many or most listeners don’t know anything about it. So would you please just tell us about the bill introduced by Democratic House representatives Barbara Lee of California and Mark Pocan of Wisconsin? What is that bill, and what would it do?

    LK: Absolutely. It makes sense to start with our Pentagon budget and just how big it is, because, of course, the bill is about relocating some of that money. So our Pentagon budget right now, it is approaching $800 billion, and President Biden has suggested a budget that would go over $800 billion. Meanwhile, many folks in Congress are pushing for a budget that goes even above what President Biden has asked for, and what the Pentagon has said is enough.

    So that’s the background. The budget as it is now is higher than it was at the height of the Vietnam War. It is higher than the next nine countries combined, some of which are our allies, and it is 12 times as much as Russia. So it’s a huge, huge amount of money.

    It’s also more than half of the discretionary budget that Congress allocates every year. That means that less than half is left for things like housing assistance, homelessness programs, public education, public health, the CDC, medical research. All of these things have to fit into less than half.

    So what the Lee/Pocan bill is, it’s introduced by Rep. Barbara Lee and Rep. Mark Pocan, and it suggests that we should cut $100 billion from the Pentagon budget in order to reallocate that money to other priorities.

    And this number is significant for a couple of reasons. One is that it would take us back a couple years. The budget has been growing every single year. It would take us back a few years and get rid of some of that growth.

    Another is that last year there was a study from the Congressional Budget Office that showed that you could cut $100 billion from the Pentagon budget without even changing what our national security mission is. So even if we kept all of our wars going, even if we kept our hundreds of overseas bases, even if we kept our hundreds of thousands of troops that are around the world at any given time, you could still basically do all of those same things if you cut $100 billion.

    So this is not even a significant cut. It’s not even a remaking of our national security, even though we need a remaking of our national security. And you could do all of those things without touching troops’ pay or benefits or their childcare or any of the things that folks in the military rely on.

    JJ: That’s an important inoculation against what you are likely to see about pulling blankets off soldiers in foxholes.

    LK: That’s right.

    JJ: OK. Well, it’s important to say that this didn’t drop from the sky. This is not the first iteration that we’ve had. There was a Sanders/Lee/Pocan bill a couple years back. But also, it’s not just, “Hey, let’s start thinking about this.” This legislation builds on work that groups have been doing.

    National Priorities Project (6/16/19)

    LK: That’s right. And we are one of those groups. So a couple of years back—and at that time, the Pentagon budget was smaller than it is today—we did a study where we found ways to cut up to $300 billion off of the Pentagon budget. And that was by doing things like closing some of our more than 700 overseas military installations; no other country has more than 20. It would be doing things like cutting back on some of the most expensive weapons systems, cutting back on the number of planes and ships that we have.

    For example, the US military has 11 aircraft carriers. No other country has more than two with a third in the works; that’s China. So we’ve got many, many more than they have. So we can cut back some on that and still be ahead of any other country. And cutting back on things like nuclear weapons.

    And then there’s also cutting back on some of the bureaucracy. One of the things that we suggested doing was shifting the military health system into a larger universal health system for all Americans.

    So by doing things like that, we found that you could cut up to $350 billion a year from the Pentagon budget. And there are many other groups that have come up with similar lists of ways to cut tens or hundreds of billions of dollars from the Pentagon budget.

    JJ: Let me just draw you back to a point you made earlier. Some legislators want more than the Pentagon is asking? How does that make sense?

    LK: Yes. This is something that actually happens year in and year out. And it comes from a couple of places. One, of course, is the military/industrial complex. Any time the military asks for fewer planes, or they ask to retire some ships, like they’re doing now, there are, of course, contractors who either build those systems or get the contracts for maintaining those systems, and the contractors don’t like that, so they always object.

    Then there are the parochial political concerns. So a lot of times, if the Pentagon wants fewer of a certain ship, and that ship is made in a particular congressional district, you get opposition on the basis of that local economy, even though we know that if you took those same dollars and put them into job creation in healthcare or education or infrastructure, you could create more jobs in that local economy than by the shipbuilding or other investments in war.

    So those are a couple of the big things. The contractors are immensely powerful. They take, in any given year, around half and frequently more than half of the entire Pentagon budget. It’s a huge, huge industry, and a huge problem of how much power they wield over the congressional process.

    It’s a local community problem. The answer to that, of course, is that the Pentagon shouldn’t be a jobs program. If we need a jobs program in this country, and we do, we should create a jobs program.

    And so those are the two big reasons why you see folks in Congress pushing for more money.

    JJ: Again, that reprioritization is what people, when you explain it and ask them, that’s what they want. So if it doesn’t happen, you would hope that the media story would be “Why don’t people’s desires and their basic needs translate into policy?” rather than trying to convince people that they’re too dumb to understand what needs to happen. I wonder what you would like to see more of, or less of, in terms of news media attention to these issues.

    AFSC: New national poll shows majority support for cuts in Pentagon spending

    American Friends Service Committee (2/15/22)

    LK: Yes, it’s a great question. Cause you’re right, we have polling, recent polling, that shows that a majority of folks in this country would want to see money taken from the Pentagon and reallocated to all of the things that we know we desperately need, like healthcare, like education, like infrastructure. So we know that people are behind that, but we also know that our political system frequently doesn’t follow the will of the people.

    And one of the reasons is Congress is very captured by industry. But that doesn’t mean that there aren’t things we can do about it. Being captured by industry really comes down to wanting to be reelected. And so if folks vote, and if folks communicate with their member of Congress, we can put forward very effective counter pressure toward that. So we need more of that, first and foremost.

     

    But we also do need a media that is more accountable. They’re too credulous about threats, whether it be from China or from Russia. And both of those are threats that are overblown. China is not primarily a military threat to the United States, and so we shouldn’t respond to it in a military manner.

    And Russia has proven to be both less strong militarily and, also, it is something that the entire world community can deal with, through means like diplomacy and through means like building institutions that enforce international law, and ways other than the US spending more money on our military.

    So those are the kinds of things that we need to see the media asking questions about, pushing back on members of Congress and asking them if what we really need is more money for the Pentagon.

    NPP: 11% of the Military Budget Could Fund Enough Renewable Energy for Every Home in the US

    National Priorities Project (9/20/19)

    JJ: And I would just say, finally, what I would hope to see is also a building out, a talking about the other part of it, which is what it might look like to devote those resources to human needs. There’s plenty of stories there to talk about, what would various social issues and problems look like with an infusion of resources? There’s a way to tell the story that’s about what we could have.

    LK: That’s absolutely right, yes. We need to see a redefining of security. The Pentagon, in theory, is supposed to be keeping us safe. But meanwhile, we still have hundreds of deaths from Covid. We are still in an opioid epidemic. We are heading into a wildfire and hurricane season that–we don’t even know how bad it will be yet, because of climate change.

    Those are all things that we need for security. And we did a study as an example of the kind of things that we could be doing, if we weren’t putting so much money into the Pentagon. We found that in the 20 years since 9/11, we spent $21 trillion on supposed security. And that for just a quarter of that cost, for less than $5 trillion, we could have had an entirely renewable energy grid in this country.

    And that could be done. We could have done it already. And so what we need to desperately do is make sure that in the next 20 years, we don’t make those same choices again. We need to put money where we need it to be, and solve the problems that are actually the most dire problems we have.

    JJ: We’ve been speaking with Lindsay Koshgarian. She’s program director of the National Priorities Project. They’re online at NationalPriorities.org. Lindsay Koshgarian, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    LK: Thanks so much for having me.

     

    The post ‘This Country Would Want to See Money Taken From the Pentagon and Reallocated’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/30/this-country-would-want-to-see-money-taken-from-the-pentagon-and-reallocated-2/feed/ 0 311435
    NYT Hypes NYC Police Spending, Buries School Cuts https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/25/nyt-hypes-nyc-police-spending-buries-school-cuts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/25/nyt-hypes-nyc-police-spending-buries-school-cuts/#respond Sat, 25 Jun 2022 19:24:42 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9029135 The New York Times article framed the NYC budget as mainly an issue of law enforcement priorities rather than a question of austerity.

    The post NYT Hypes NYC Police Spending, Buries School Cuts appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    No New Money for Jail Officers and Police in $101 Billion N.Y.C. Budget

    New York Times (6/10/22)

    The New York Times (6/10/22) reported on NYC Mayor Eric Adams’ first budget agreement, saying it “excludes…proposals to significantly increase staffing levels at the city’s jails…[and] increase the Police Department’s budget.” This is the culmination of a fierce debate, the Times told readers, between a mayor with “politically moderate roots” and a progressive city council “over how best to confront rising concerns about crime.”

    The Times article, by Jeffery C. Mays and Dana Rubinstein, framed the budget as mainly an issue of law enforcement priorities rather than a question of austerity. Even though there is no looming fiscal emergency, the mayor has cut school budgets, homeless services and mental health services (Gothamist, 6/14/22). Critics blasted the fact that while police funding remained flat, spending for other services were cut (Politico, 6/17/22). The mayor had received backlash from lawmakers (Gotham Gazette, 3/2/22) over his desire to cut other city agencies while sparing the cops.

    But the Times piece ignored the cuts to education altogether, even though the conservative New York Post (6/10/22) mentioned how the mayor was forced to talk about a $31 billion cut to schools when pressed by reporters. The Post (6/13/22) went so far as to give the issue of education cuts a whole article.

    The Times coverage, by contrast, was completely one-sided in its coverage of the budget deal. While it included one dissenter saying the deal didn’t set aside enough for the city’s rainy day fund, it featured no criticism of cuts to other vital city agencies. The Times only covered the schools cuts days later (6/15/22), burying the news in a piece that framed opposition to the budget around Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez, a deceptive frame that portrayed anger against the budget cuts as intra-party squabbling rather than citizen outrage.

    ‘Rein it in’

    NYT: Eric Adams Proposes a $98 Billion Budget With No Cuts for N.Y.P.D.

    New York Times (2/16/22)

    Interestingly, before Adams took office, the Times (12/31/21) complained about the previous mayor’s “costly legacy” of expanding the city workforce, suggesting that Adams “might have to rein it in.” In a way, the vanguard paper of urban liberalism foresaw and celebrated a neo-Reaganite rollback of the previous administration’s social democratic agenda.

    And it’s not like the city is lacking in dissident voices regarding the budget. NYC Democratic Socialists of America co-chair Sumathy Kumar said in a statement (Twitter, 6/10/22), “By cutting funding for schools and housing when the city is flush with resources, Mayor Adams’ first budget fails working-class New Yorkers.”

    Brooklyn elementary special education teacher Annie Tan, noting that her own school could lose more than 12 staffers,  told FAIR: “It is devastating to the school’s culture to lose that many educators…. The budget cuts mean a loss of staff, experts at what they do.” She added, “It’s the media’s responsibility to make that real.”

    The Times (2/16/22) had previously reported on the mayor’s initial budget proposal as a tough-on-crime agenda.  Reporter Emma G. Fitzsimmons admitted that it called for cuts to the rest of city services, while also admitting that the city was far from broke: The budget “projected that it would receive $1.6 billion more tax revenue in the current fiscal year than originally forecast, because of higher than expected personal and business income taxes, sales taxes and transaction taxes.” Meanwhile, “higher property tax values contributed to a $726 million increase in revenue for the next fiscal year.”

    ‘Hailed as a national leader’

    Adams, Hailed on the National Stage, Finds Frustration Closer to Home

    New York Times (6/3/22)

    This framing of the budget agreement came after the Times (6/3/22) previously lamented that the moderate Adams was having difficulty pursuing his agenda because of progressive lawmakers in Albany, framing those lawmakers as out of touch. Adams, Fitzsimmons pointed out, “was hailed as a national leader in the Democratic Party.”

    Hailed by whom? The Times never told us, although a number of national outlets have perpetuated this idea, reporting that Adams has been meeting with national party leaders (Politico, 5/20/22) and that he is considering a presidential run (Fox News, 5/21/22).

    Both of these developments are overhyped. It’s normal for big city Democratic mayors to have relationships with top party leaders. And each of the last three mayors–Bill de Blasio, Michael Bloomberg and Rudy Giuliani–ran for president, with none of them coming within spitting distance of a party nomination. Adams’ job performance polling is all over the place, with CBS (6/7/22) recently reporting poor polling numbers, and the New York Post (6/8/22) admitting that even while approving of his charismatic style, respondents still disliked his results.

    What’s clear is that the Times leadership certainly thinks Adams is a national leader, even if there is little evidence for this. A decision to frame Adams’ first budget agreement as a sensible approach to the issue of crime, rather than a conservative scaling-back of city services and employment, fits in that kind of editorial judgment.

    Downplaying critical issues

    Why is crime the central framing of the budget story? Yes, crime is a major concern for many New Yorkers (Spectrum News, 4/25/22), but as FAIR (6/21/21) has noted, crime is a major factor largely because local media have overhyped crime in their coverage. And in her criticism of the budget, City Council Member Tiffany Cabán noted that the budget kept the city’s “current bloated levels of funding for policing and incarceration intact,” adding that the budget “fails to increase funding to data-driven, community-based violence prevention programs.”

    Rent-stabilized apartments in NYC to see rent hikes thanks to board vote

    New York Post (6/21/22)

    The Times’ lack of focus on critical issues has not gone unnoticed. “It’s infuriating that the media are going towards that, and I think it’s because the mayor has shown himself to be retaliatory,” Tan said, referring to Adams’ penchant for going after critics in the media (New York Post, 2/16/22, 6/5/22). She added that the media are making the calculation that if “they piss off Mayor Adams, he will not speak to them, and that they will lose the ability to speak to him for a news story.”

    Consider the context. The Rent Guidelines Board appointed by Adams approved “hikes of as much as 3.25% for new one-year leases for the Big Apple’s roughly 1 million rent-stabilized apartments,” while “new two-year leases for rent-stabilized units can jump by 5%” (New York Post, 6/21/22). Unless Adams is contemplating above-inflation wage increases for city workers in the near future, these kinds of hikes herald a regime of fiscal austerity, one that will hit non-wealthy residents the hardest.

    The Times should not be acting as a public relations arm for City Hall as it pushes an austerity agenda. Nor should it attempt to prop up a “moderate” mayor as a national leader.


    ACTION ALERT: You can send a message to the New York Times at letters@nytimes.com (Twitter: @NYTimes). Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your communication in the comments thread.

    The post NYT Hypes NYC Police Spending, Buries School Cuts appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Ari Paul.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/25/nyt-hypes-nyc-police-spending-buries-school-cuts/feed/ 0 310035
    Raed Jarrar on Biden’s Saudi Trip, Lindsay Koshgarian on People Over Pentagon https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/24/raed-jarrar-on-bidens-saudi-trip-lindsay-koshgarian-on-people-over-pentagon/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/24/raed-jarrar-on-bidens-saudi-trip-lindsay-koshgarian-on-people-over-pentagon/#respond Fri, 24 Jun 2022 16:12:45 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9029154 It's hard to parse corporate media coverage of Biden's Saudi visit, because that coverage obscures rather than illuminates what's going on.

    The post Raed Jarrar on Biden’s Saudi Trip, Lindsay Koshgarian on People Over Pentagon appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Khashoggi Way, street sign in front of the Saudi Arabian embassy

    (cc photo: Joe Flood)

    This week on CounterSpin: Elite news media are saying that Biden has to go to Saudi Arabia in July despite his pledges to make the country a “pariah” for abuses including the grisly murder of a Washington Post contributor, because…stability? Shaking hands with Mohammed bin Salman makes sense, even in the context of denying Cuba and Venezuela participation in the Americas Summit out of purported concerns about their human rights records, because…gas prices? It’s hard to parse corporate media coverage of Biden’s Saudi visit, because that coverage obscures rather than illuminates what’s going on behind the euphemism “US interests.” We talk about the upcoming trip with Raed Jarrar, advocacy director at DAWN—Democracy for the Arab World Now.

          CounterSpin220624Jarrar.mp3

     

    Also on the show: “Congressional Republicans Criticize Small Defense Increase in Biden’s Budget Blueprint,” read one headline; “Biden Faces Fire From Left on Increased Defense Spending,” read another. Sure sounds like media hosting a debate on an issue that divides the country. Except a real debate would be informed —we’d hear just how much the US spends on military weaponry compared to other countries; and a real debate would be humane—we’d hear discussion of alternatives, other ways of organizing a society besides around the business of killing. That sort of conversation isn’t pie in the sky; there’s actual legislation right now that could anchor it. We talk about the People Over Pentagon Act of 2022 with Lindsay Koshgarian, program director of the National Priorities Project.

          CounterSpin220624Koshgarian.mp3

     

    Plus Janine Jackson takes a quick look at media coverage of gender therapy.

          CounterSpin220624Banter.mp3

     

    The post Raed Jarrar on Biden’s Saudi Trip, Lindsay Koshgarian on People Over Pentagon appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by CounterSpin.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/24/raed-jarrar-on-bidens-saudi-trip-lindsay-koshgarian-on-people-over-pentagon/feed/ 0 309783
    ‘Unconscionable’: House Committee Adds $37 Billion to Biden’s $813 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/22/unconscionable-house-committee-adds-37-billion-to-bidens-813-billion-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/22/unconscionable-house-committee-adds-37-billion-to-bidens-813-billion-military-budget/#respond Wed, 22 Jun 2022 19:36:49 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/337807

    Progressives expressed outrage after a House panel voted Wednesday to tack an additional $37 billion on top of President Joe Biden's already gargantuan military spending request.

    "Members of the House Armed Services Committee put the demands of the military-industrial complex over the needs of the American people yet again."

    The Biden administration's March request for $813 billion in military spending for Fiscal Year 2023 already marked a $31 billion increase over the current, historically large sum of $782 billion.

    During its markup of the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA), the House Armed Services Committee approved by a 42-17 margin Rep. Jared Golden's (D-Maine) amendment to boost the topline budget by $37 billion.

    "Today members of the House Armed Services Committee put the demands of the military-industrial complex over the needs of the American people yet again," Public Citizen president Robert Weissman said in a statement.

    "Granting $37 billion to a war machine that can't even pass an audit while saying that we 'can't afford' what American families and communities need is quintessential hypocrisy," said Weissman. "Congress can still correct this misstep—rerouting that funding into investments like economic stability, climate justice, and affordable healthcare for all Americans instead."

    The House panel's increase comes less than a week after the Senate Armed Services Committee voted to add $45 billion to Biden's $813 billion request, pushing the upper chamber's total proposed budget for national military spending in the coming fiscal year to a whopping $857.6 billion—including $817 billion for the Pentagon, $30 billion for the Department of Energy, and an additional $10.6 billion that falls outside NDAA jurisdiction.

    During a speech Wednesday in which she explained why she voted against Golden's "unconscionable" amendment, Rep. Sara Jacobs (D-Cailf.) stressed that "there are simply not military solutions to every problem."

    Rep. Ro Khanna (D-Calif.) also voted against Golden's amendment and explained his opposition in remarks delivered from the House floor.

    "If you're supporting this amendment, you're basically paving the way to a trillion-dollar defense [bill]," said Khanna. "Is that what we want in this country?"

    "I just want to be clear," he added. "There is no country in the world that is putting over half its discretionary budget into defense and I would rather for us to be the preeminent economy of the 21st century by investing in the health of our people, in the education of our people, in the industries of the future."

    Public Citizen, meanwhile, noted that the military spending increase approved by the House panel costs 10 times more than preserving the free school lunch program that Congress is allowing to expire "because it's 'too expensive.'"

    Public health experts from the progressive advocacy group have also spent more than a year urging the U.S. to ramp up vaccine manufacturing and inoculate the world against the coronavirus with an investment of just $25 billion, or roughly 3% of the nation's annual military budget.

    Last week, Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.)—co-chairs of the Defense Spending Reduction Caucus—introduced the People Over Pentagon Act of 2022, which proposes cutting Pentagon spending for the next fiscal year by $100 billion and reallocating those funds toward threats facing the nation that "are not military in nature," such as the Covid-19 pandemic, the climate emergency, and worsening inequality.

    Although a majority of U.S. voters are opposed to military spending in excess of $800 billion, earlier efforts to slash the Pentagon's budget have failed to gain enough support to pass the House or Senate thanks in part to lawmakers who receive significant amounts of campaign cash from the weapons industry, which benefits from constantly ballooning expenditures.

    Roughly 55% of all Pentagon spending went to private sector military contractors from FY 2002 to FY 2021, according to Stephen Semler of the Security Policy Reform Institute. "If this privatization of funds rate over the last 20 years holds," Semler wrote in December, arms dealers will gobble up an estimated $407 billion in public money in FY 2022.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Kenny Stancil.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/22/unconscionable-house-committee-adds-37-billion-to-bidens-813-billion-military-budget/feed/ 0 309155
    Free School Meal Waivers Set to Expire as Senate Pushes $857 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/21/free-school-meal-waivers-set-to-expire-as-senate-pushes-857-billion-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/21/free-school-meal-waivers-set-to-expire-as-senate-pushes-857-billion-military-budget/#respond Tue, 21 Jun 2022 13:13:39 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/337750

    Federal free school meal waivers that would cost just $11 billion to extend for another year are set to lapse at the end of the month due to GOP obstruction as the Senate simultaneously advances—on a bipartisan basis—an $857 billion military budget, a $45 billion increase over President Joe Biden's latest request.

    "Universal school lunches have been a lifeline for families, especially as corporations price-gouge at the grocery store."

    Anti-hunger activists have been warning for months that allowing the nutrition waivers to expire on June 30 would be disastrous for millions of children across the U.S., particularly during the summer months when vulnerable kids' access to meals becomes even more tenuous.

    "Universal school lunches have been a lifeline for families, especially as corporations price-gouge at the grocery store," Rep. Katie Porter (D-Calif.) said Monday. "I'm leading the charge in Congress to extend this vital program."

    But while Porter and some of her colleagues demand last-minute action from congressional leaders, there appears to be little momentum on Capitol Hill to extend the waivers, which were first put in place in the early stages of the coronavirus crisis.

    Throughout the pandemic and the resulting economic tumult, the waivers have empowered the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) to lift onerous regulatory obstacles to free and universal school meals such as income-based eligibility requirements, giving public schools across the country the flexibility and funding needed to provide food to tens of millions of students.

    According to a recent USDA report, 90% of school nutrition agencies across the country have made use of the waiver program to provide free meals to students.

    Yet "instead of clearing an extremely low bar and extending the food program another year," progressive commentator and activist Jordan Uhl wrote over the weekend, "Congress is poised to let it expire at the end of this month—June 30—after extending it multiple times."

    "Top Republicans in the Senate objected to its extension this time around, using hollow concerns about the program's cost as an excuse," Uhl noted. "Yet, on Thursday, the Senate Armed Services Committee approved an additional $45 billion to be tacked onto President Joe Biden's military budget request—around $813 billion—made earlier this year. This creates a new national 'defense' topline in the Senate of $857 billion. The vote in the Democrat-controlled committee was 23-3."

    Related Content

    In March, Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-Ky.) reportedly blocked efforts to include an extension of the school meal waivers in an omnibus spending bill, criticizing the cost of the anti-hunger program.

    That same month, McConnell condemned as inadequate Biden's request for a record $813 billion in military spending for Fiscal Year 2023—even though it would represent a $31 billion increase over current levels.

    "This prioritization of the military, war, destruction, and mass death over helping feed our friends and neighbors—in this instance, we're talking about children—ultimately reflects both an indifference toward working families in the United States and their material needs not being met as well as an unwavering loyalty to the military-industrial complex and its profiteering," Uhl wrote Sunday. "There is always money backed by bipartisan support to fund militaristic endeavors, but when social safety net programs are up for debate, it's suddenly time to worry about the deficit."

    In a letter to McConnell and Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-N.Y.) last week, a group of Democratic senators and Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.) warned that failure to salvage the waivers could intensify the nation's child hunger crisis, a longstanding problem that has gotten even worse in the months since Sen. Joe Manchin (D-W.Va.) tanked a proposed extension of the boosted child tax credit.

    "The pandemic has highlighted the importance of the child nutrition programs and the role they play in keeping hunger at bay for millions of children across the country," the lawmakers wrote. "As schools close for summer across the country, families will soon lose access to free school meals."

    The national No Kid Hungry campaign warned in a report published last week that expiration of the waivers would mean meal "site closures, more red tape, and strong restrictions about where and when kids can eat."

    "This means kids could miss out on as many as 95 million meals this summer," the campaign said.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/21/free-school-meal-waivers-set-to-expire-as-senate-pushes-857-billion-military-budget/feed/ 0 308733
    ‘Revolting’: Senate Panel Adds Another $45 Billion to Biden’s Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/17/revolting-senate-panel-adds-another-45-billion-to-bidens-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/17/revolting-senate-panel-adds-another-45-billion-to-bidens-military-budget/#respond Fri, 17 Jun 2022 13:22:57 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/337677

    Progressives responded with disgust after the Senate Armed Services Committee voted Thursday to tack an additional $45 billion on top of President Joe Biden's already massive military spending request, bringing the total proposed budget for the coming fiscal year to a staggering $857.6 billion.

    "It's about funneling money into the military-industrial complex."

    The Biden administration's March request for $813 billion in military spending for Fiscal Year 2023 represented a $31 billion increase over the current level of $782 billion, which is already unprecedented.

    During its closed-door markup of the National Defense Authorization Act this week, the Senate Armed Services Committee approved a bill with a topline budget of $847 billion—$817 billion of which is earmarked for the Pentagon. Roughly $10 billion of national military spending falls outside the Senate panel's jurisdiction. The House is expected to make its own push to further boost military spending for the next fiscal year.

    William Hartung, a senior research fellow at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft, called the Senate panel's decision "misguided."

    "The administration's proposal is already higher than spending at the peaks of the Korean and Vietnam Wars and over $100 billion more than at the height of the Cold War," Hartung said in a statement. "Throwing more money at the Pentagon will not make us safer—it will just divert funds from addressing other urgent challenges like pandemics and climate change that put millions of Americans at risk."

    Monica Montgomery, a research analyst at the Council for a Livable World, pointed out that the Senate committee's proposed $45 billion increase in military spending is equivalent to Biden's entire budget request for climate programs, demonstrating how "Congress will value militarism and defense contractors over a livable future."

    "If Congress truly wants to keep people safe, they must start by rejecting this increase and investing taxpayer dollars in human wellbeing, instead," Tori Bateman, policy advocacy coordinator at the American Friends Service Committee, said in a statement.

    Earlier this week, Reps. Barbara Lee (D-Calif.) and Mark Pocan (D-Wis.)—co-chairs of the Defense Spending Reduction Caucus—introduced the People Over Pentagon Act of 2022, which proposes cutting Pentagon spending for the next fiscal year by $100 billion and reallocating those funds toward threats facing the nation that "are not military in nature," such as the Covid-19 pandemic, the climate emergency, and worsening inequality.

    Related Content

    Although a majority of U.S. voters are opposed to military spending in excess of $800 billion, earlier efforts to slash the Pentagon's budget have failed to gain enough support to pass the House or Senate thanks in part to lawmakers who receive significant amounts of campaign cash from the weapons industry, which benefits from constantly ballooning expenditures.

    Roughly 55% of all Pentagon spending went to private sector military contractors from FY 2002 to FY 2021, according to Stephen Semler of the Security Policy Reform Institute. "If this privatization of funds rate over the last 20 years holds," Semler wrote in December, arms dealers will gobble up an estimated $407 billion in public money in FY 2022.

    In the words of Win Without War president Stephen Miles, "The Pentagon's ever-growing budget is quite simply a theft from American people enriching some of the wealthiest corporations in this country."

    Julia Gledhill, an analyst at the Project on Government Oversight's Center for Defense Information, concurred.

    "Increasing the Pentagon budget beyond President Biden's request isn't just irresponsible—it's a slap in the face to American taxpayers," said Gledhill. "Year after year the Department of Defense demonstrates its lack of fiscal discipline, failing financial audits and sinking money into weapon programs that do little more than enrich defense contractors."

    "This $45 billion increase isn't about national security or the American people," she added. "It's about funneling money into the military-industrial complex."

    Sen. Jack Reed (D-R.I.) chair of the Senate Armed Services Committee, told reporters Thursday that inflation was "the first consideration" in increasing the topline. He also cited the need to support Ukraine, replenish weapons sent to aid the country's fight against Russia, and fund military priorities not included in Biden's Pentagon request, Politico reported.

    The committee's ranking Republican Sen. Jim Inhofe of Oklahoma hailed the proposed spending hike as "everything I hoped for."

    Experts, meanwhile, have documented how military spending has never moved in tandem with inflation. They have also warned that the nearly $60 billion worth of weaponry that Ukraine has already received from the U.S. is more likely to intensify the war than to advance peace, with arms manufacturers among the only beneficiaries of such prolonged suffering.

    The Senate Armed Services Committee's move to increase U.S. military spending comes despite the Biden administration's withdrawal from Afghanistan following 20 years of war.

    Robert Weissman, president of Public Citizen—a progressive advocacy group that is pushing the U.S. to ramp up vaccine manufacturing and inoculate the world against Covid-19 with an investment of just $25 billion, or roughly 3% of the nation's annual military budget—said that "the Senate Armed Services Committee's choice to defy both the president and public opinion and flood the Pentagon with more money is outrageous."

    "Time and again, Congress funnels billions in additional funds to costly weapons programs, war, and defense contractors, while claiming that human needs would 'cost too much,'" said Weissman. "Most Americans oppose efforts to rocket-launch military spending towards a trillion dollars per year. Lawmakers should reject this and champion human-centered spending instead."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Kenny Stancil.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/17/revolting-senate-panel-adds-another-45-billion-to-bidens-military-budget/feed/ 0 307990
    The Largest Pentagon Budget Cut in History Is a Great Idea https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/15/the-largest-pentagon-budget-cut-in-history-is-a-great-idea/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/15/the-largest-pentagon-budget-cut-in-history-is-a-great-idea/#respond Wed, 15 Jun 2022 10:20:28 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/337605


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Connor Echols.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/15/the-largest-pentagon-budget-cut-in-history-is-a-great-idea/feed/ 0 307157
    Poll Shows Majority of US Voters Opposed to Record-Level Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/07/poll-shows-majority-of-us-voters-opposed-to-record-level-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/07/poll-shows-majority-of-us-voters-opposed-to-record-level-pentagon-budget/#respond Tue, 07 Jun 2022 19:15:58 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/337432

    As Republicans push to boost the Pentagon budget beyond the $31 billion increase sought by the Biden administration for the next fiscal year, survey results published Tuesday suggest that any additional military spending wouldn't be popular among voters.

    "Congress should heed popular, public opinion and reject proposals for even more Pentagon spending than President Biden has requested."

    Polling by Data for Progress and the consumer advocacy group Public Citizen found 55% of all respondents are "somewhat" or "very concerned" about the $813 billion in Pentagon funding requested by the Biden administration for FY 2023, up from $782 billion this year. 

    However, only 32% of those surveyed—including 39% of Democrats, 38% of Independents, and 20% of Republicans—said the U.S. spends too much on its military.

    Sixty-three percent of survey respondents said the military's budget should not exceed $813 billion. Among Democrats, that figure rose to 80%, while two-thirds of Independents and 42% of Republicans agreed.

    "There is absolutely no excuse for writing the Pentagon a blank check it didn't even ask for," Public Citizen president Robert Weissman said in a statement. "Congress should heed popular, public opinion and reject proposals for even more Pentagon spending than President [Joe] Biden has requested."

    Politico reported this week that some congressional Republicans, citing inflation, are seeking an additional 5% increase in the Pentagon topline budget.

    According to Weissman:

    There are very strong policy arguments to cut military spending significantly. Not only does the United States vastly outspend other nations, it doesn't effectively manage what it does spend... Pentagon spending is replete with waste and fraud both small (a spare parts maker with a 3,800% profit level) and large (the defective and dysfunctional F-35 program that will cost more than $1.7 trillion over its projected 50-year lifespan, according to the Project on Government Oversight). And money allocated to the Pentagon is money that could instead be spent on priority domestic and human needs, and to ensure true national security.

    "If the goal is to spend money to protect the public, policymakers would be much better off investing in additional Covid-19 relief, expanding healthcare coverage, or investing in climate resiliency than giving billions more to an agency that already gets three-quarters-of-a-trillion dollars annually and still can't pass an audit," he added.

    Related Content

    In April, Common Dreams reported that global military expenditures topped $2 trillion for the first time, with the U.S. spending more on its war-making capacity than the next nine nations combined, according to the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Brett Wilkins.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/06/07/poll-shows-majority-of-us-voters-opposed-to-record-level-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 304893
    Pacific services receive $196m boost in NZ Budget – new RNZ radio boost https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/19/pacific-services-receive-196m-boost-in-nz-budget-new-rnz-radio-boost/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/19/pacific-services-receive-196m-boost-in-nz-budget-new-rnz-radio-boost/#respond Thu, 19 May 2022 23:01:01 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=74387 RNZ Pacific

    A total of NZ$196 million has been set aside for Pacific services in Aotearoa New Zealand in this year’s Budget.

    A big chunk of that — $76 million will go on Pacific health services.

    Finance Minister Grant Robertson said the cash injection would be used to support Pacific health providers, to improve infrastructure, fund a targeted diabetes prevention and management programme and prepare for system reform.

    Operating funds to the tune of $47 million have also been announced for Pacific education and employment initiatives.

    The funds would be used to support Pacific science, technology, engineering, arts and maths opportunities, Robertson said.

    An initial $49 million has been set aside for building 300 houses for Pacific people in eastern Porirua over the next decade.

    The government’s pledge to deliver an historical account of the Dawn Raids — a crackdown on mostly Pacific migrants to New Zealand in the 1970s — receives $13.7m in funding.

    The Minister for Pacific Peoples Aupito William Sio said the priorities in this year’s Budget were in line with its Pacific Wellbeing Strategy.

    “This strategy is aimed at lifting Pacific wellbeing and aspirations in health, housing, education, business, employment, incomes, leadership, Pacific arts, sports, music and STEAM career pathways,” he said.

    Minister for Pacific Peoples Aupito William Sio
    Minister for Pacific Peoples Aupito William Sio … “This strategy is aimed at lifting Pacific wellbeing and aspirations in health, housing, education, business, employment, incomes, leadership, Pacific arts, sports, music and STEAM career pathways.” Image: Samuel Rillstone/RNZ

    Dawn Raids account, home build project included in Pacific package
    “This government is committed to delivering on its Dawn Raids apology package in this Budget as well,” Aupito said.

    “The package will give greater public understanding of what Dawn Raids means to our nation and to enable the Teu le Va — to help restore harmonious relationships of mana and dignity, and empower our young people especially to be resilient, confident and vibrant.”

    Included in the Budget for New Zealand’s Pacific community:

    • A package to build up to 300 homes over the next 10 years for Pacific families in Eastern Porirua, with initial funding of $49m in the forecast period.
    • $13.7 million to implement the government’s commitment to deliver a Dawn Raids historical account.
    • $49.9 million for the Pacific Provider Development Fund, to support Pacific providers to adapt their models of care into the new health system.
    • $20 million to implement a diabetes prevention and treatment programme for targeted Pacific communities in South Auckland.
    • $8 million boost to continue the delivery of Tupu Aotearoa, which enables the delivery of personalised Pacific employment and training services.
    • $15.5 million investment into Pacific economic development, which aims to meet community demand for services to support “shovel-ready” Pacific businesses and social enterprises across New Zealand.
    • $1.6 million to maintain the Pacific Work Connect Programme which supports the continuation of a Pacific migrant support service.
    • $18.3 million boost to the Toloa Science, Technology, Education, Arts and Mathematics programme. This initiative provides opportunities across Pacific peoples journeys through education and employment.
    • $2 million to maintain and grow the Tulī Takes Flight and Pacific Education Foundation Scholarships, to Pacific education scholarships to address education system inequities.
    • $13 million to support the growth of the Pacific bilingual and immersion schooling workforce and the retention of the current workforce.
    • Up to $5 million of reprioritised funding over four years to fund further Professional Learning and Development (PLD) focussed on Tapasā: cultural competencies for teachers of Pacific learners.

    New transmitter for RNZ Pacific
    The government has also announced $4.4 million for RNZ Pacific to buy a new transmitter to broadcast news across the Pacific.

    Described as “critical infrastructure”, the transmitter is among plans for a new public media entity which is set to start operating next year.

    Broadcasting Minister Kris Faafoi said the funding of the media entity would ensure New Zealanders could continue to access quality local content and trusted news.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/19/pacific-services-receive-196m-boost-in-nz-budget-new-rnz-radio-boost/feed/ 0 300313
    NZ Budget 2022: Record $11.1 billion post-covid boost for health system https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/19/nz-budget-2022-record-11-1-billion-post-covid-boost-for-health-system/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/19/nz-budget-2022-record-11-1-billion-post-covid-boost-for-health-system/#respond Thu, 19 May 2022 05:05:02 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=74362 By Craig McCulloch, RNZ News deputy political editor

    More than two million New Zealanders will get a one-off $350 sweetener as part of the Budget’s centrepiece $1 billion cost-of-living relief package.

    The temporary short-term support is counterbalanced by a record $11.1 billion for the health system as the government scraps district health boards (DHBs) and replaces them with a central agency.

    “Our economy has come through the covid-19 shock better than almost anywhere else in the world,” Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern said in a statement. She is in covid isolation.

    “But as the pandemic subsides, other challenges both long-term and more immediate, have come to the fore. This Budget responds to those challenges.”

    Ongoing uncertainty over inflation, covid-19 and the Russian invasion of Ukraine continue to cast a pall over the economy until at least the end of the year.

    A large $19 billion deficit is expected this year, returning to surplus in 2025.

    Treasury is forecasting house prices to ease and unemployment to drop as low as 3 percent.

    Cost-of-living sweetener
    New Zealanders aged 18 and over will be eligible for the $350 payment unless they earn more than $70,000 a year or already receive the Winter Energy Payment.

    The sum will be paid in three instalments over August, September and October, working out at roughly $27 a week.

    The temporary payment is estimated to cost $814 million — funded out of the remaining money in the covid-19 war-chest which is now being wound up.

    NZ Finance Minister Grant Robertson delivers Budget 2022. Video: RNZ News

    The support comes with a two-month extension to the fuel tax reduction and half-price public transport given the current high fuel prices.

    New Zealanders who have a community services card will continue to get half-price public transport permanently from mid-September.

    “While we know the current storm will pass, it’s important we do what we can to take the hard edges off it now,” Ardern said.

    The government will also rush through legislation under urgency over the next few days to crack down on supermarkets in an effort to reduce grocery bills.

    The legislation will ban supermarkets from using restrictive covenants to prevent competitors from accessing land to open new stores.

    Ministers flagged further announcements in response to the Commerce Commission’s recent report in the sector “in the coming days”.

    Health service
    The Budget contains “the largest investment ever in [the] health system” — $11.1 billion — as the government presses ahead with its plan to replace DHBs with a centralised health service.

    An initial $1.8b annual investment this year will help clear DHBs’ debt, giving the replacement Health New Zealand service and Māori Health Authority a “clean start”.

    Health Minister Andrew Little said the 20 DHBs had collectively run annual deficits in 12 of the 13 years since 2008.

    “As Health NZ takes over the books from the 20 DHBs on 1 July, a funding boost is being provided so the national system can start with a clean slate.”

    The Māori Health Authority will get $168m over four years to directly commission hauora Māori services.

    New Zealand’s drug-buyer Pharmac will also get an extra $191m over the next two years – in what Little says is the medicine budget’s “biggest-ever increase”.

    It brings total funding to $1.2 billion which is 43 percent higher than when Labour was elected in 2017.

    “Pharmac has assured me it will use this funding to secure as many medicines on its list as it can, with a focus on better cancer treatments, to ensure as many New Zealanders as possible benefit from this biggest-ever increase to its medicines funding,” Little said.

    More than $166 million has been put aside over four years for ambulance services, adding more than 60 vehicles to the road fleet and about 250 more paramedics and frontline staff. Another $90.7 million will go towards air ambulance services to replace ageing aircraft with modern helicopters.

    The Budget increases dental grants for low-income families from $300 to $1000 in line with Labour’s 2020 campaign promise.

    A new Ministry for Disabled People is also being established at a cost of $100 million.

    Housing support
    While the housing market is showing signs of slowing, the Budget includes more support for first home buyers with funding available for about 7000 more grants.

    House price caps across regions have been increased to line up with lower quartile market values for new and existing properties.

    It means some significant shifts — both Wellington’s cap and Queenstown’s jump from $650,000 to $925,000, and Tauranga’s jumps from $600,000 to $875,000.

    The income caps remain the same but will be reviewed every six months along with the new house price caps.

    A new $350 million housing fund has also been set up where not-for-profit developers can apply for grants to build affordable rental accommodation.

    Education equity
    Replacing school deciles is the single biggest area of new spending for education.

    The Budget provides more than $80 million a year for the equity index which replaces deciles as the measure of disadvantage in schools.

    Most of the money, $75 million a year, will go directly to schools, adding to the $150 million they currently receive through the decile-based system.

    The budget increases school operations grants and tertiary and early childhood education subsidies by 2.75 percent.

    There is also $266 million over four years to give early education teachers pay parity with school teachers.

    In tertiary education, the Budget provides $56 million a year to pay for an expected increase in enrolments next year and in 2024.

    There is also $40 million for modernising polytechnic facilities.

    Māori health, wellbeing
    More than half a billion dollars is being pumped into the Māori Health sector with $579.9 million going towards Māori health and wellbeing.

    The Māori Health Authority, Te Mana Hauora, is set to be launched July 1 and will receive $188.1 million over four years for direct commissioning of services.

    Some $20.1 million will go to support iwi-Māori partnership boards, and $30 million will be invested into Maori providers and health workers to provide support and sustain capital infrastructure.

    Lack of workforce capability has been identified as a key factor in being able to bolster Te Mana Hauora — and $39 million will be used for Māori workforce training and development to support them within the new health system.

    The $579.9 million invested in Māori health and wellbeing is on top of the $11.1 billion health allocation.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/19/nz-budget-2022-record-11-1-billion-post-covid-boost-for-health-system/feed/ 0 300010
    The US War Budget Is Failing Young People https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/18/the-us-war-budget-is-failing-young-people/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/18/the-us-war-budget-is-failing-young-people/#respond Wed, 18 May 2022 11:16:51 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/336970

    "America is at its best when we invest in the backbone of our Nation: the hardworking people in every community who make our Nation run," states President Biden's budget request. And yet  the budget, released at the end of March, includes $813 billion dollars on weapons and war. While the country stares down a pandemic, massive educational debt, a stumbling economy, and urgently needed environmental reform, prioritizing fear-based military spending only speaks to the values of special interest groups—not everyday Americans, and especially not young people.

    Redefining our national budget priorities is not only possible, it is an imperative step towards the larger reform needed to protect the future of Gen Z and the world.

    Without investing in student loan forgiveness, climate change, and Social Security, it is hard to imagine a world in which Gen Zers like me will prosper.

    College debt is debilitating

    Student loan borrowing is severely limiting my generation, leaving us unable to buy our first homes and delaying major life decisions while we try to pay down our debt. While many Baby Boomers and Generation Xers could graduate debt free by working summer jobs, students at public four-year universities today have seen a 213% increase in tuition expenses. Education costs have grown eight times faster than wages, and student loans are now the largest portion of non-housing debt in the U.S. Partially or entirely forgiving student loan debt would have massive impacts on the daily lives of an entire generation, with resulting economic and societal benefits.

    President Biden promised to address student loans on the campaign trail, but he has yet to make good on his promise. Forgiving student debt has been branded as financially impossible, but cutting the Pentagon budget by just 10% for six years— to its 2016 spending level—could provide almost 12 million college students with 4 year scholarships, or forgive student loans for all borrowers making $50,000 or less. We have the money to address the economic crisis Gen Z is facing, it's just being used to fund faulty weapons programs and endless war. 

    Younger generations will suffer the most from climate change

    If we hope to protect future generations from natural disasters, we need to reexamine how we think of security and prioritize world-wide threats such as the climate crisis. Climate change is our most urgent security threat, and we cannot leave it to young people that will live to answer for the inaction of previous generations. 

    Redirecting military funds toward the environmental crisis is more than appropriate given that the United States Department of Defense (DOD) is the world's largest oil consumer, meaning that it is one of the world's top greenhouse gas emitters. In fact, the DOD generates more hazardous waste than the five largest U.S. chemical companies combined. Funding a military structure that contributes heavily to pollution with only token efforts at green energy is beyond irresponsible.

    Cutting the Pentagon budget by 10% could fund almost 430,000 clean energy jobs or provide 187 million households with wind power for the year. Heading into summer, we are already experiencing record breaking heat waves, with 61% of the country experiencing a drought as of May 10, 2022. Preventing and mitigating climate change has never been more urgent. It is time to use the federal budget to protect our future and mitigate climate change, rather than exacerbating it.

    Social Security will run dry before Gen Z has a chance to use it

    Young people, despite the hardship they face finding jobs in a struggling economy, make up a growing portion of the workforce, and pay into government programs like social security. Unless major institutional reform occurs, the Social Security Trust Fund is estimated to be exhausted by 2037. In 2037, the oldest of Gen Z will only be 42, and still decades from being eligible to withdraw from a program they have helped fund. 

    The systematic changes required to fund Social Security are, admittedly, complex. Many politicians have introduced ideas that could extend the life of Social Security, but no substantial changes have been made to the system since 1983, when the retirement age was raised from 65 to 67. Improving this program cannot be delayed any longer. This is an increasingly urgent problem for young people that are paying into a system that might not be around to keep its promises.

    Congress needs to prioritize our future 

    President Biden's budget does reflect increased investment in education and environmental needs compared to last year. However, these steps are not enough to undo decades of inaction and an ever-increasing military budget. Gen Z is facing many challenges, and there is no single solution that can address them all. But there is one clear starting point: shifting our priorities away from massive military spending. The change we desperately need requires facing the deep pockets of the defense industry and its special interests. More than ever, we need politicians that are willing to stand up to the war machine and prioritize the needs of their youngest constituents. 

    If we cannot address these issues until Gen Z makes up the majority of office holders, it will be too late. Redefining our national budget priorities is not only possible, it is an imperative step towards the larger reform needed to protect the future of Gen Z and the world.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jena Renae.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/18/the-us-war-budget-is-failing-young-people/feed/ 0 299756
    Sanders to Hold Budget Committee Hearing on Medicare for All https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/10/sanders-to-hold-budget-committee-hearing-on-medicare-for-all/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/10/sanders-to-hold-budget-committee-hearing-on-medicare-for-all/#respond Tue, 10 May 2022 13:45:31 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/336754

    Senate Budget Committee Chair Bernie Sanders announced Monday that there will be a hearing on Medicare for All this Thursday.

    "We spend twice as much per capita on healthcare as any other nation but with worse health outcomes for our people," Sanders (I-Vt.) tweeted Monday. "Does that make sense to anyone? It's time for Medicare for All."

    The hearing, which Sanders first announced in March, is called "Medicare for All: Protecting Health, Saving Lives, Saving Money," and is scheduled to feature testimony from witnesses including Assistant Professor of Medicine at Harvard Medical School Adam Gaffney, National Nurses United executive director Bonnie Castillo, and Congressional Budget Office (CBO) director Phillip Swage.

    "The need for fundamental healthcare reform has never been so urgent," said Gaffney—a critical care physician and past president of Physicians for a National Health Program—on Monday.

    An index released in March by Gallup and West Health showed that 44% of the U.S. adult population, or roughly 112 million Americans, had difficulties paying for healthcare or prescribed medicines over the last three months.

    A study released months earlier also by West Health and Gallup found that Covid-19 has worsened fears about payments for those needs, with nearly six in 10 U.S. adults saying that they are more worried about the cost of healthcare.

    Forty-eight percent of adults also said the pandemic worsened their view of the U.S. healthcare system. Sixty percent said that because of Covid-19, they were more concerned that some Americans have unequal access to quality healthcare services.

    Sanders, a longtime proponent of a single-payer healthcare system, has frequently pointed to the CBO's estimate that Medicare for All could deliver Americans $650 billion in annual savings while providing better care and outcomes than the current for-profit system.

    Thursday's Senate Budge Committee hearing will mark the second congressional hearing on Medicare for All since the pandemic began in 2020.

    The first was held by the House Oversight Committee in March and examined Reps. Pramila Jayapal (D-Wash.) and Debbie Dingell's (D-Mich.) Medicare for All Act of 2021.

    That hearing was co-led by Rep. Cori Bush, who said at the time that "Congress must implement a system that prioritizes people over profits, humanity over greed, and compassion over exploitation."

    "We are going to make healthcare a human right in this country," she said.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Andrea Germanos.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/05/10/sanders-to-hold-budget-committee-hearing-on-medicare-for-all/feed/ 0 297606
    The Global Suicide Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/28/the-global-suicide-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/28/the-global-suicide-budget/#respond Thu, 28 Apr 2022 10:08:41 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/336475

    "Under the cloud of threatening war, it is humanity hanging from a cross of iron."

    I truly wish these words of Ike, uttered seven decades ago, were no longer quite so relevant. Perhaps what he should have called it was a "cross of irony."

    The more we invest in keeping ourselves safe from the enemy, the more "the enemy" will have to invest to keep itself safe from us.  

    In 2021, the human race, in order to keep itself safe, invested $2.1 trillion in the ability to make war—to kill one another, even (if necessary) to end life altogether. It's the planet's largest collective military budget ever, but—oh, the irony—the budget will keep on growing . . . as long as the budget keeps on growing. The more we invest in keeping ourselves safe from the enemy, the more "the enemy" will have to invest to keep itself safe from us.  

    Gun culture's sidekick is fear culture. The two are inseparable. Alas, in the public domain, fear culture morphs into what theologian Walter Wink has called the myth of redemptive violence. It sounds like this:

    "From Ia Drang to Khe Sanh, from Hue to Saigon and countless villages in between, they pushed through jungles and rice paddies, heat and monsoon, fighting heroically to protect the ideas we hold dear as Americans. Through more than a decade of combat, over air, land, and sea, these proud Americans upheld the highest traditions of our Armed Forces."

    This was President Obama, in 2012, commemorating the fiftieth anniversary of the Vietnam War, but leaving out a few details: the fact, for instance, that the U.S. dropped 6 million tons of bombs and other ordnance on Vietnam, Laos and Cambodia between 1964  and 1973, along with some 19 million gallons of toxic chemicals, including Agent Orange; the fact that multi-thousands of vets (highest estimate, 150,000, triple the number of American combat dead) committed suicide after they were finished upholding the highest traditions of the Armed Forces; the fact that as many as three million Vietnamese, including two million civilians, were killed in the war, and hundreds of thousands more were injured and permanently displaced; the fact that the term "ecocide" was coined to describe what we did to the Vietnamese countryside.

    Somehow all this never quite hit home in the U.S. of A.—never quite landed in the national conscience and caused a change in the country's relationship to the world. From the point of view of American leadership, the shattered country of Vietnam became an inconvenience. We lost. The war was perceived as an utter failure and the use of American military muscle plunged in the national polls. "Vietnam syndrome" gripped the country, forcing it to wage proxy wars for the next 17 years. Finally, George H.W Bush launched Gulf War I, which was a huge success from the American point of view. Yellow ribbons were everywhere! As many as 100,000 Iraqis died, compared to 144 Americans.

    But the success was bigger than just winning the war at hand. In its wake, Bush 1 proclaimed: "By God, we've kicked the Vietnam syndrome once and for all."

    America was now fully free to use its military again! This eventually opened the way for Bush 2's wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, and for the ever-expanding U.S. military budget, which amounts to nearly50 percent of that jaw-dropping global total.

    And several thousand nuclear weapons sit ready to go, whenever one or several global leaders decide the time has come for humanity to commit suicide—in the name of keeping itself safe, or at least protecting various interests.

    There's really only one question here, which is: How do we change? Virtually every stable human being on Planet Earth is in favor of never waging nuclear war, I would imagine, yet global cluelessness rules, or sort of rules. I fear we're trapped in what might be called a metaphorical mousetrap. We live counter to our deepest values in order to, as Obama put it, "upheld our highest traditions." Or something like that.

    But perhaps even something as overwhelming as war can be dismantled one personal connection at a time. So, returning briefly to Vietnam, I consider a miniscule speck of a moment in the life of Paul Meadlo, one of the participants in the My Lai massacre on March 16, 1968. Seymour Hersh, who as a young freelance journalist broke the story to the American public, wrote about it again many years later in the New Yorker. He described how the Americans had rounded up the villagers and held them at gunpoint in larger circles. At one point, Lt. William Calley called out:

    "'Get with it. I want them dead.' From about ten or fifteen feet away, Meadlo said, Calley 'started shooting them. Then he told me to start shooting them. . . . . I started to shoot them, but the other guys wouldn't do it. So we'—Meadlo and Calley—'went ahead and killed them."

    Hersh adds: "There was official testimony showing that Meadlo had in fact been extremely distressed by Calley's order. After being told by Calley to 'take care of his group,' one Charlie Company soldier recounted, Meadlo and a fellow-soldier 'were actually playing with the kids, telling the people where to sit down and giving the kids candy.' When Calley returned and said that he wanted them dead, the soldier said, 'Meadlo just looked at him like he couldn't believe it. He says, 'Waste them?'" When Calley said yes, another soldier testified, Meadlo and Calley 'opened up and started firing.' But then Meadlo 'started to cry.'"

    This to me addresses the global military budget, and the cross of irony, with terrifying clarity. The bullets fly in all directions. Sometimes they hit the soul.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Robert C. Koehler.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/28/the-global-suicide-budget/feed/ 0 294364
    North American Wildfires Could Use Up ‘Sizable Amount’ of Global Carbon Budget: Study https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/27/north-american-wildfires-could-use-up-sizable-amount-of-global-carbon-budget-study/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/27/north-american-wildfires-could-use-up-sizable-amount-of-global-carbon-budget-study/#respond Wed, 27 Apr 2022 20:54:25 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/336473

    A first-of-its-kind study revealed Wednesday that wildfires in U.S. and Canadian boreal forests could hinder efforts to meet global climate goals by using up a "sizable amount" of the world's carbon budget through 2050.

    "Wildfires in boreal forests can be especially harmful... since they store about two-thirds of the world's forest carbon."

    The analysis, published in the peer-reviewed journal Science Advances, was led by Carly Phillips, a fellow with the Western States Climate Team at the Union of Concerned Scientists (UCS).

    "Wildfires in boreal forests can be especially harmful in terms of the amount of emissions they release into the atmosphere since they store about two-thirds of the world's forest carbon, most of which is contained in the soil and has accumulated over hundreds or even thousands of years," Phillips said in a statement.

    "If not properly contained, heat-trapping emissions from wildfires in boreal forests could dramatically increase, jeopardizing nations' ability to limit warming in line with the Paris agreement," she warned, referencing the 2015 deal that aims to keep temperature rise this century below 2°C, and preferably no higher than 1.5°C.

    As UCS summarized, "The study found that by midcentury, burned area in Alaskan and Canadian boreal forests is projected to increase as much as 169% and 150%, respectively, releasing nearly 12 gigatons of net carbon emissions—equivalent to the annual emissions of 2.6 billion cars—which represents about 3% of the remaining global carbon budget."

    "These estimates are conservative," the group noted, "as the study did not assess the potential for boreal forest wildfires to accelerate permafrost thaw and other ecosystem processes that could further increase net carbon emissions."

    The paper—co-authored by researchers from Hamilton College, Harvard University, Tufts University, University of California, and Woodwell Climate Research Center—follows the latest Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) report, which underscored the necessity of nations worldwide ramping up efforts to swiftly reduce planet-heating emissions.

    Related Content

    The IPCC report coincided with a wave of demonstrations by scientists and other advocates of bold climate policy worldwide. While many of the actions focused on transitioning off of fossil fuels, the new paper highlights that governments also need to make other moves to address the crisis.

    "Governments rightly prioritize rapid suppression of wildfires that occur near heavily populated areas and crucial infrastructure, but allow other areas that hold large amounts of carbon to burn—a practice hazardous to the health and safety of communities in Alaska, Canada, and beyond," explained co-author Peter Frumhoff, a research scientist at Harvard's Center for the Environment.

    "Expanding fire management to keep wildfires near historical levels across boreal North America would provide multiple benefits and leave us far better positioned to meet the goals of the Paris agreement," he said.

    "Reducing boreal forest fires to near-historical levels and keeping carbon in the ground will require additional investments."

    Co-author Brendan Rogers, an associate scientist at Woodwell Climate Research Center, emphasized that "reducing boreal forest fires to near-historical levels and keeping carbon in the ground will require additional investments."

    "These funds are comparatively low and pale in comparison to the costs countries will face to cope with the growing health consequences exacerbated by worsening air quality and the more frequent and intense climate impacts that are expected if emissions continue to rise unabated," she added. "They can also ensure wildlife, tourism, jobs, and many other facets of our society can persevere in a warming world."

    In Alaska, the research team found that the average cost of avoiding the emission of one metric ton of carbon dioxide was $12.63. They also found that keeping emissions from Alaskan wildfires at historical levels would require an investment of $7.1 billion to $50 billion over the next 30 years—including $696 million annually through the end of this decade.

    "This would entail a sizeable increase in fire management budgets for Alaska, where state and federal fire management expenditures jointly average about $133 million/year, a small percentage of which go toward direct response costs," the paper says. "Estimates of these annual average response costs vary from federal costs of $27 million to total costs of $85 million."

    "However, it is also small relative to overall U.S. federal expenditures in wildfire suppression, which totaled over $3.1 billion in 2018," the analysis adds. "Within the United States, Alaska receives a disproportionately small amount (less than 4% on average) of federal resources for fire management despite accounting for roughly 20% of the U.S. land area and half of the average annual U.S. fire emissions."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jessica Corbett.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/27/north-american-wildfires-could-use-up-sizable-amount-of-global-carbon-budget-study/feed/ 0 294171
    Lawmakers Urge NLRB Budget Boost Amid ‘Dramatic Increase’ in Unionization https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/27/lawmakers-urge-nlrb-budget-boost-amid-dramatic-increase-in-unionization/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/27/lawmakers-urge-nlrb-budget-boost-amid-dramatic-increase-in-unionization/#respond Wed, 27 Apr 2022 15:32:14 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/336459

    Citing a "dramatic increase in labor activity" that's straining staff at the National Labor Relations Board, nearly 150 U.S. lawmakers on Wednesday urged congressional leaders to boost the agency's budget, which in real dollars has fallen by nearly a quarter over the past decade.

    "Just in the first half of FY2022, union election petitions were up 57% and unfair labor practice charges were up 14% compared to this time in 2021."

    In a letter led by Rep. Donald Norcross (D-N.J.), 145 House Democrats and four Republicans ask Reps. Rosa DeLauro (D-Conn.) and Tom Cole (R-Okla.), respectively the chair and ranking member of the House Appropriations Committee, to increase the NLRB's budget by at least $94 million for the next fiscal year.

    Norcross told HuffPost that the NLRB—which enforces federal laws involving collective bargaining and unfair labor practices—was being "starved to death over the course of the last decade" at the expense of workers' organizing efforts.

    "It's been going on way too long," said Norcross, who is a member of the International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers. "This year we must change it."

    The letter notes that since 2010, the agency's budget has decreased 25% in real dollars adjusted for inflation, and argues that an "increase in funding would provide long-overdue resources to allow the NLRB to accomplish its statutory mission."

    "Despite the NLRB's vital mission, the board has received the same appropriation of $274 million for nine consecutive fiscal years," the signers state. "Additionally, overall staffing levels have dropped by 39% over the past two decades and field staffing has been cut in half."

    "These cuts come while there has been a dramatic increase in labor activity which has caused a higher caseload for NLRB staff," the lawmakers continue. "Just in the first half of FY2022, union election petitions were up 57% and unfair labor practice charges were up 14% compared to this time in 2021."

    "Additionally, with 60 million nonunion workers saying they would join a union if given the chance (including nearly 75% of young workers age 18-24), we only expect union election petitions to further increase," the letter adds. "With this skyrocketing workload, the NLRB is now responsible for far more workers than a decade ago yet has been denied the funding to meet these statutory requirements."

    NLRB General Counsel Jennifer Abruzzo called the situation "unsustainable" in a March interview with HuffPost.

    "There's [only] so much bandwidth we have," she warned. "We have trouble just making sure that hearings are done in short order, that decisions are being issued in short order, that we're investigating cases as quickly as we possibly can."

    Recent high-profile NLRB cases include several lawsuits targeting alleged Starbucks labor law violations amid a nationwide unionization drive by workers at the coffee giant, and a suit accusing online retail titan Amazon of "flagrant unfair labor practices" against workers who successfully unionized a Staten Island warehouse earlier this month.

    A similar letter calling for an NLRB budget increase is circulating in the U.S. Senate, HuffPost reports.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Brett Wilkins.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/27/lawmakers-urge-nlrb-budget-boost-amid-dramatic-increase-in-unionization/feed/ 0 294110
    Any poll delay ‘unconstitutional’, warns former PNG elections chief https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/26/any-poll-delay-unconstitutional-warns-former-png-elections-chief/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/26/any-poll-delay-unconstitutional-warns-former-png-elections-chief/#respond Tue, 26 Apr 2022 11:35:29 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=73312 By Miriam Zarriga in Port Moresby

    Any deferral of Papua New Guinea’s national general election 2022 will be unconstitutional, warns former Electoral Commissioner Patilias Gamato.

    He said statutory timelines gazetted in the National Gazette for the national elections could not be breached to accommodate a deferral.

    “It is important that the 2022 NGE is not deferred. Any idea about deferral will be unconstitutional,” Gamato said in a statement.

    “The Head of State must not be misled and asked to [make] unnecessary changes [to] dates for the activities within the electoral cycle.

    “Should the Electoral Commission delay the issue of writ by two weeks, where will those two weeks come from?”

    “All processes are allocated times by law especially nomination, polling, campaign period, polling and counting.

    “The campaign period is eight weeks minimum and 12 weeks maximum including nomination period by law.

    Campaign period
    “Campaign period cannot be reduced if they want to borrow from the campaign period.

    “If they allowed for a buffer at the end of the process [it] is okay but they cannot go past the fifth anniversary of the 10th Parliament (5 years term).”

    Gamato said that when the Electoral Commissioner advised the Head of State to approve the dates for the next election event, it was final and they must go by those dates.

    He said the Head of State cannot be misled and asked to change the dates of the elections every now and then.

    “The national government and the EC had five years to prepare for the elections,” Gamato said.

    “We need to manage the electoral budget well and spend according to the phases of electoral activities, with the view to controlling the budget.

    “It is a requirement that polling schedules and the roll must be approved by the EC and gazetted in the National Gazette.

    Programme strictly adhered to
    “It must be strictly adhered to the planned electoral activities such as nominations, polling and counting so that voters are not confused.”

    He said the two weeks could not come from the campaign period.

    “By law, the campaign period must be held a minimum of 8 weeks and a maximum of 11 weeks including the one week of nomination which brings to 12 weeks, you cannot change that allocated time,” he said.

    “The term of the 10th National Parliament ends when the writs for the next election event are returned on or before the fifth anniversary of term.

    “No government can conveniently try to extend the election to remain in office or in power after their term expires on the 5th anniversary of their term.’’

    “The end of the fifth anniversary is the date the 10th Parliament [that] got sworn in 2017,” he said.

    “Observing the statutory timelines are critical, especially when managing a major election event such as this.

    “Funding in my view is sufficiently allocated by the national government.

    “The EC just [has] to manage and work within the budget.”

    The Papua New Guinea general election 2022 runs from Saturday, June 11, to Friday, June 24.

    Miriam Zarriga is a PNG Post-Courier reporter. Republished with permission.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/26/any-poll-delay-unconstitutional-warns-former-png-elections-chief/feed/ 0 293647
    Liberal budget funds apologists for Israeli crimes https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/24/liberal-budget-funds-apologists-for-israeli-crimes/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/24/liberal-budget-funds-apologists-for-israeli-crimes/#respond Sun, 24 Apr 2022 03:59:23 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=129074 As more and more Canadians, including university students across the country, oppose Israel’s apartheid policies. the Liberals devoted millions of dollars in the recent federal budget to strengthen anti-Palestinian forces. They put up $5.6 million over five years for Canada’s Special Envoy on Preserving Holocaust Remembrance and Combatting Antisemitism. The position was created a year […]

    The post Liberal budget funds apologists for Israeli crimes first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
    As more and more Canadians, including university students across the country, oppose Israel’s apartheid policies. the Liberals devoted millions of dollars in the recent federal budget to strengthen anti-Palestinian forces.

    They put up $5.6 million over five years for Canada’s Special Envoy on Preserving Holocaust Remembrance and Combatting Antisemitism. The position was created a year and a half ago for one of Canada’s chief apartheid apologists, Irwin Cotler. A staunch proponent of Israeli colonialism, Cotler has a home in Israel and his daughter was recently a member of the Knesset. In response to a recent speech Cotler delivered at the University of Toronto’s Temerty Faculty of Medicine, 45 faculty members sent the Dean a letter saying the event “reinforced anti-Palestinian racism in a way that is consistent with a broader pattern of silencing and erasure of Palestinian voices.”

    Cotler has been bemoaning the “new anti-Semitism” of those who support Palestinian rights for decades. After Canada’s largest ever Palestinian solidarity demonstrations — largely by racialized Canadians — in May 2021 Cotler led an antisemitism summit and began decrying the worst antisemitism in Canada since World War II. (As Cotler knows, it wasn’t until the 1950s that it became illegal to block Jews and other groups from purchasing property in some neighborhoods. Some social clubs also restricted Jewish membership into the 1960s.)

    Mimicking Canada, the Israeli government recently created its own Special Envoy for Combating Antisemitism and Delegitimization. In appointing Noa Tishby to the position Foreign Affairs Minister Yair Lapid talked about those accusing Israel of “apartheid”, making it clear the aim of the position is to combat groups like Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch that have detailed Israeli apartheid. Cotler immediately applauded the Israeli government’s move to set up an envoy and announced he was planning to work with Tishby.

    The Liberals budget also funneled $20 million into a new Montréal Holocaust Museum, which is scheduled to move to the centre of the city in 2025. That institution lists Federation Combined Jewish Appeal (CJA) of Montréal as its “Beneficiary” and its largest donor was the Azrieli Foundation. The Azrieli Foundation has financed projects that benefit the Israeli military and the Azrielis made a controversial donation to Im Tirtzu, which was deemed a “fascist” group by an Israeli court. CJA has promoted Canadians joining the IDF. Its website also proclaims that its Community Recovery & Resilience Campaign co-chair Mitch Garber’s “eldest son Dylan just completed his service as a lone soldier serving in an elite Cyber Defense intelligence Unit of the IDF in Israel.”

    The museum has co-sponsored initiatives with CJA, B’nai BrithCentre for Israel and Jewish Affairs and other anti-Palestinian lobby groups. A former museum fundraiser, Mikhael Goldshtein, boasts that he fought in the IDF for eight years.

    In 2020 it released a statement titled “The Montreal Holocaust Museum regretfully notes the Montreal Mayor’s refusal to support the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance’s (IHRA) definition of antisemitism.” The IHRA definition seeks to label criticisms of Israeli policy as antisemitic. Seven of the definition’s 11 illustrative examples refer to Israel.

    In addition to the Montreal Holocaust Museum’s overt anti-Palestinian alignment, Hitler’s destruction of European Jewry has long been weaponized against Palestinians. In his 2000 book The Holocaust Industry: Reflections on the Exploitation of Jewish Suffering, Norman Finkelstein, whose grandparents perished in Nazi death camps, argues that the American Jewish establishment exploited the memory of the Nazi Holocaust for economic and political gain and to further the interests of Israel. Since the book was written, Israel lobbyists’ reliance on antisemitism/Nazi Holocaust claims to undermine Palestine solidarity has grown substantially.

    If the Montréal Holocaust Museum refuses to distance itself — by declaring its support for Palestinian rights — from those using the Nazis’ extermination of European Jewry to justify subjugating Palestinians it should be opposed. Canada’s Special Envoy on Preserving Holocaust Remembrance and Combatting Antisemitism should be categorically rejected. Cotler is a liberal imperialist who has spent his life working to subjugate Palestinians.

    With their recent budget the Liberals have reaffirmed their anti-Palestinian policy. People who support human rights for all and oppose Israel’s apartheid policies take note.

    The post Liberal budget funds apologists for Israeli crimes first appeared on Dissident Voice.


    This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Yves Engler.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/24/liberal-budget-funds-apologists-for-israeli-crimes/feed/ 0 293175
    PNG police chief demands covid-19 emergency funding reports from UN https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/11/png-police-chief-demands-covid-19-emergency-funding-reports-from-un/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/11/png-police-chief-demands-covid-19-emergency-funding-reports-from-un/#respond Mon, 11 Apr 2022 07:16:42 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=72664 PNG Post-Courier

    Papua New Guinea’s Police Commissioner David Manning — who is also head of the country’s Covid-19 National Control Centre — has placed United Nations agencies on notice that they must reveal how they have spent virus emergency funding over the past two years.

    Manning said Prime Minister James Marap and other Members of Parliament, and independent organisations such as Transparency International, have all called for the release of information on how covid-19 funds have been spent and they have been ignored.

    “Unfortunately, these United Nations bodies have refused to provide financial information to the government and people of Papua New Guinea,” he said.

    This matter has now come to a head with the Controller writing to the World Bank Acting Country Director in Papua New Guinea, Paul Vallely, on March 29, advising that he would no longer endorse any further increase in allocation of funds, or disbursements, under the PNG Covid-19 Emergency Response Project.

    “I have repeatedly requested both directly and through auditors, acquittals of previously disbursed funds under this and other similar projects,” the Controller said in his letter to the World Bank on the loan money.

    “The recipients of these funds have refused to provide any reasonable account for these monies.

    “There is over US$1.3 billion (K4.5 billion) identified on the self-reporting donor tracker as being committed for managing the covid-19 pandemic in PNG.

    ‘How are UN agency funds used?’
    “What our people need to know, and the global community needs to know, is how are these UN agencies using the funds allocated to them.”

    Manning advised that the project is to receive no further funds until he is satisfied that previous disbursements have been acquitted.

    “Enough is enough, I have called for the past year for this expenditure to be acquitted and they have refused, so now I am demanding compliance with transparency requirements in PNG,” he said.

    “With the country going through the height of the pandemic, these agencies were provided with some leniency, but we have heard enough excuses and misleading information.

    A substantial part of the funds being spent by these UN organisations had also become a part of national sovereign debt that must be repaid by future generations of the Papua New Guinean people, he said.

    “But the terrible irony is that we do not even know what they spent this money on, particularly in areas such as communications and awareness in which they have failed.

    “Details that have been revealed on the Covid-19 Donor Tracking Dashboard shows that UNDP, as one example, has facilitated the following funding of their own activities in PNG to an amount of K9 million (US$2.6 million).

    “This is one just source of funding that is shrouded in secrecy and there are several others for which we have demanded information but is being ignored by this global body.”

    Outraged by wording
    Manning said he was outraged by the almost identical wording from UNICEF, WHO and UNDP in response to his requirement for an independent auditor to access their records, in which these agencies essentially said they would ignore the request.

    In documents seen by the Post-Courier, UNDP Resident Representative Dirk Wagener and UNICEF PNG Representative Claudes Kamenga wrote to Manning with the same “contemptuous and arrogant” language stating that: “We would like to inform you that UNICEF, as a United Nations Agency, is submitted to the ‘Single Audit principle’ that gives the exclusivity of external audit and investigation to the United Nations Board of Auditors (UNBoA) founded in 1946 through the UN resolution 74 (I) of 7 December 1946.”

    Manning said what UNICEF and UNDP were saying to PNG is that they would spend funds that were intended for the people, and they would not tell how they used this money.

    “In other words, if these agencies have wasted money that was intended for our people, they claim they can keep it a secret,” Manning said.

    “This is exactly what we have seen with the way UNICEF uses public funding for communications and awareness and delivers limited results.

    “This is a matter that must be addressed at the highest level of the United Nations, because if this lack of transparency is happening in PNG, you have to ask how many other smaller developing countries are being treated with such contempt.”

    The Controller said he would ensure the PNG public and international support partners were kept aware of developments in the matter and if acquittals were forthcoming.

    Republished with permission from the PNG Post-Courier.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/11/png-police-chief-demands-covid-19-emergency-funding-reports-from-un/feed/ 0 289579
    Climate Groups Say Canadian Government ‘Bowed to Big Oil’ With New Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/08/climate-groups-say-canadian-government-bowed-to-big-oil-with-new-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/08/climate-groups-say-canadian-government-bowed-to-big-oil-with-new-budget/#respond Fri, 08 Apr 2022 19:54:19 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/336036

    Climate campaigners are charging that the federal budget unveiled Thursday by Canada's Liberal government fails to deliver on Prime Minister Justin Trudeau's three-year-old promise to bring about a "just transition" from fossil fuels and instead caters to polluters.

    "This federal budget is stuck in the mindset of more highways and fossil fuel subsidies."

    New Democratic Party (NDP) Leader Jagmeet Singh pledged his caucus will support the 2022 budget, presented by Finance Minister and Deputy Prime Minister Chrystia Freeland just days after the latest alarming report from the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC).

    Meanwhile, activists pointed to the report as evidence that Canada's new budget falls dangerously short of the actions needed by rich governments to avert the most catastrophic impacts of the climate emergency.

    "Earlier this week, the world's best scientists put out another IPCC report making it clear that we need to get off of fossil fuels to tackle the climate crisis," 350.org's Katie Perfitt said Thursday. "But, today, Justin Trudeau, backed by the NDP, tabled a budget giving billions of dollars to expensive, ineffective carbon capture technology that does little more than ensure Big Oil will continue to expand fossil fuel production."

    "This after he presented a climate plan that would increase tar sands production and gave the green light to the massive Bay du Nord offshore oil project," she noted.

    "If this government was serious about climate change, we wouldn't still be waiting for the Just Transition Act that Justin Trudeau promised three years and two elections ago," Perfitt added. "This budget would include billions of dollars funding that transition but instead, we're getting more handouts to Big Oil and more promises to do more on climate change at some other time."

    Specifically—as Atiya Jaffar, 350 Canada's digital campaigns manager, wrote in a blog post—under the new budget, "fossil fuel companies investing in carbon capture, utilization, and storage (CCUS) would receive over $2.6 billion over the next five years and $1.5 billion annually until 2030."

    "This is irresponsible and the opposite of what we need during a climate emergency," Jaffar warned, arguing that "these funds should go towards introducing a bold, ambitious Just Transition Act that retrains fossil fuel workers, creates millions of green jobs, and accelerates community-led climate solutions."

    Related Content

    Other campaigners who have been organizing against the CCUS plan were similarly critical following Thursday's announcement.

    "Minister Freeland has bowed to Big Oil lobbyists and implemented their carbon capture tax subsidy," declared Julia Levin, senior Climate and Energy Program manager at Environmental Defense. "Carbon capture is not a climate solution—it's a greenwashing strategy used to justify more fossil fuel production and get more taxpayer money into the pockets of executives and shareholders."

    "By relying on future unproven techno-fixes to cut emissions, the government is gambling with our lives," Levin added. "Instead of creating yet another fossil fuel subsidy, the government should have invested in proven climate solutions, including renewable energy, efficient affordable housing, and electrification of transportation."

    Others also highlighted the need for more transportation funding while noting that the budget recognizes the government's recent $750 million commitment to the Keep Transit Moving coalition.

    "It's clear that public transit systems in Canada need long-term support. While the $750 million is welcome and needed, it covers less than two months' worth of what our struggling public transit systems need this year alone," said John Di Nino, president of Amalgamated Transit Union (ATU) Canada.

    Dylan Penner, climate and social justice campaigner with the Council of Canadians, emphasized that "Trudeau has been promising a just transition for three years" without following through.

    "It's time to deliver," Penner said. "Public transit is a core part of the solution to the climate crisis and can drive much of the systemic transformation that's needed. We need sustained funding and expansion for green municipal public transit and intercity public bus service, but instead, this federal budget is stuck in the mindset of more highways and fossil fuel subsidies."

    Canada's 2022 budget features some investments in zero-emission vehicles, renewable electricity, and initiatives to protect oceans and freshwater.

    Environmental Defense executive director Tim Gray said that it "contained some hopeful measures, but above all, the federal government should be prioritizing the needs of people over oil and gas corporations. Yet this budget continues Canada's pattern of giving huge windfalls to industrial polluters with limited investment in creating the cleaner future we need and the prosperity that could flow from it."

    "The world is facing mounting ecological and humanitarian crises," said Gray. "The time is now for bold, ambitious action to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, protect our health from chemical pollution in our water and communities, and get rid of single-use plastics."


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jessica Corbett.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/08/climate-groups-say-canadian-government-bowed-to-big-oil-with-new-budget/feed/ 0 289340
    Arms firms spent €6m lobbying Germany ahead of defence budget hike https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/06/arms-firms-spent-e6m-lobbying-germany-ahead-of-defence-budget-hike/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/06/arms-firms-spent-e6m-lobbying-germany-ahead-of-defence-budget-hike/#respond Wed, 06 Apr 2022 14:55:32 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/ukraine-war-russia-germany-defence-military-lobbying/ The news raises questions over industry’s access to power, with influential politicians known to work with high-level arms firms representatives


    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by Josephine Valeske.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/06/arms-firms-spent-e6m-lobbying-germany-ahead-of-defence-budget-hike/feed/ 0 288423
    Arms firms spent €6m lobbying Germany ahead of defence budget hike https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/06/arms-firms-spent-e6m-lobbying-germany-ahead-of-defence-budget-hike-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/06/arms-firms-spent-e6m-lobbying-germany-ahead-of-defence-budget-hike-2/#respond Wed, 06 Apr 2022 14:55:32 +0000 https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/oureconomy/ukraine-war-russia-germany-defence-military-lobbying/ The news raises questions over industry’s access to power, with influential politicians known to work with high-level arms firms representatives


    This content originally appeared on openDemocracy RSS and was authored by Josephine Valeske.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/06/arms-firms-spent-e6m-lobbying-germany-ahead-of-defence-budget-hike-2/feed/ 0 288466
    Will the Wasteful Pentagon Budget Ever Shrink? https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/05/will-the-wasteful-pentagon-budget-ever-shrink/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/05/will-the-wasteful-pentagon-budget-ever-shrink/#respond Tue, 05 Apr 2022 15:43:20 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/335918

    I have a question for you: What would it take in today's world for America's military spending to go down? Here's one admittedly farfetched scenario: Vladimir Putin loses his grip on power and Russia retrenches militarily while reaching out to normalize relations with the West. At the same time, China prudently decides to spend less on its military, pursuing economic power while abandoning any pretense to a militarized superpower status. Assuming such an unlikely scenario, with a "new cold war" nipped in the bud and the U.S. as the world's unchallenged global hegemon, Pentagon spending would surely shrink, right?

    Blowing the whistle on wasteful and underperforming weaponry hasn't been enough. Witnessing murderous and disastrous wars hasn't been enough. To my mind, at this point, only a full-scale collapse of the U.S. economy might truly shrink that budget and that would be a Pyrrhic victory for the American people.

    Well, I wouldn't count on it. Based on developments after the Soviet Union's collapse three decades ago, here's what I suspect would be far more likely to happen. The U.S. military, aided by various strap-hanging think tanks, intelligence agencies, and weapons manufacturers, would simply shift into overdrive.  As its spokespeople would explain to anyone who'd listen (especially in Congress), the disappearance of the Russian and Chinese threats would carry its own awesome dangers, leaving this country prospectively even less safe than before. 

    You'd hear things like: we've suddenly been plunged into a more complex multipolar world, significantly more chaotic now that our "near-peer" rivals are no longer challenging us, with even more asymmetrical threats to U.S. military dominance. The key word, of course, would be "more" — linked, as I'm sure you've guessed, to omnipresent Pentagon demands for yet more military spending.  When it comes to weapons, budgets, and war, the military-industrial complex's philosophy is captured by an arch comment of the legendary actress Mae West: "Too much of a good thing can be wonderful."

    Even without Russia and China as serious threats to American hegemony, you'd hear again about an "unbalanced" Kim Jong-un in North Korea and his deeply alarming ballistic missiles; you'd hear about Iran and its alleged urge to build nuclear weapons; and, if those two countries proved too little, perhaps the war on terror would be resuscitated.  (Indeed, during the ongoing wall-to-wall coverage of Russia's invasion of Ukraine, North Korea did test a ballistic missile, an event a distracted media greeted with a collective shrug.)  My point is this: when you define the entire globe as your sphere of influence, as the U.S. government does, there will always be threats somewhere. It matters little, in budgetary terms, whether it's terror, most often linked to radical Islam, or the struggle over resources linked to climate change, which the Pentagon has long recognized as a danger, even if it still burns carbon as if there were no tomorrow. And don't discount a whole new set of dangers in space and cyberspace, the latest realms of combat.

    Of course, this country is always allegedly falling behind in some vital realm of weapons research.  Right now, it's hypersonic missiles, just as in the early days of the Cold War bomber and missile "gaps" were falsely said to be endangering our security.  Again, when national security is defined as full-spectrum dominance and America must reign supreme in all areas, you can always come up with realms where we're allegedly lagging and where there's a critical need for billions more of your taxpayer dollars.  Consider the ongoing "modernization" of our nuclear arsenal, at a projected cost approaching $2 trillion over the coming decades. As a jobs program, as well as an advertisement of naked power, it may yet rival the Egyptian pyramids. (Of course, the pyramids became wonders of the world rather than threatening to end it.)

    No Peace Dividends for You

    While a young captain in the Air Force, I lived through the fall of the Berlin Wall, the collapse of the Soviet Union, and a romping, stomping performance by our military in the first Gulf War against Iraq in 1991.  It felt great!  I was teaching history at the Air Force Academy when President George H.W. Bush talked of a "new world order."  On a planet with no Soviet Union and no Cold War, we even briefly heard talk of "peace dividends" to come that echoed the historical response of Americans after prevailing in past wars. In the aftermath of the Civil War, as well as World Wars I and II, rapid demobilization and a dramatic downsizing of the military establishment had occurred.

    And indeed, there was initially at least some modest shrinkage of our military after the Soviet collapse, though nothing like what most experts had expected.  Personnel cuts came first.  As a young officer, I well remember the Voluntary Separation Incentive Payments (VSIP) and the Selective Early Retirement Board (SERB).  VSIP offered money to entice officers like me to get out early, while SERB represented involuntary retirement for those judged to have overstayed their welcome.  Then there was the dreaded RIF, or Reduction in Force, program, which involved involuntary separation without benefits.  

    Yet even as personnel were pruned from our military, the ambitions of the national security state only grew.  As I wrote long ago, the U.S. didn't just "contain" the Soviet empire during the Cold War; that empire also contained us.  With its main enemy in tatters and facing virtually no restraint to its global ambitions, the military-industrial complex promptly began to search for new realms to dominate and new enemies to contain and defeat.  Expansion, not shrinkage, soon became the byword, whether in Asia, Africa, or Europe, where, despite promises made to the last of the Soviet Union's leaders, NATO's growth took the lead.

    So, let's jump to 1998, just before the initial round of NATO expansion occurred.  I'm a major in the Air Force now, on my second tour of teaching history to cadets and I'm attending a seminar on coalition warfare.  Its concluding panel focused on the future of NATO and featured four generals who had served at the highest levels of that alliance.  I was feverishly taking notes as one of them argued forcefully for NATO's expansion despite Russian concerns. "Russia has nothing to fear," he assured us and, far more important, could no longer prevent it.  "If the Soviet Union was an anemic tiger, Russia is more like a circus tiger that may growl but won't bite," he concluded.  Tell that to the people of Ukraine in 2022.

    Retired Army General Andrew Goodpaster had a different view.  He suggested that the U.S. could have fostered a peaceful "overarching relationship" with Russia after 1991 but chose antagonism and expansion instead.  For him, NATO's growth was only likely to antagonize a post-Soviet Russia further.  Air Force General John Shaud largely agreed, suggesting that the U.S. should work to ensure that Russia didn't become yet more isolated thanks to such a program of expansion.

    In the end, three of those four retired generals urged varying degrees of caution. In an addendum to my notes, I scribbled this: "NATO expansion, from the perspective of many in the West, gathers the flock and unites them against an impending storm. From the Russian perspective, NATO expansion, beyond a certain point, is intolerable; it is the storm." If three of four former senior NATO commanders and a young Air Force major could see that clearly almost 25 years ago, surely senior government officials of the day could, too.

    Unfortunately, it turned out that they simply didn't care.  For the military-industrial complex, as journalist Andrew Cockburn noted in 2015, such expansion was simply too lucrative to pass up.  It meant more money, profits, and jobs, as Eastern European militaries retooled with weaponry from the West, much of it made in the USA.  It didn't matter that Russia was prostrate and posed no threat; it didn't matter that NATO's main reason for being had disappeared. What mattered was more: more countries in NATO, meaning more weapons sold, more money made, more influence peddled.  Who cared if expansion pissed off the Russians?  What was a toothless "circus tiger" going to do about it anyway, gum us to death?

    If there ever was a time for peace dividends and military demobilization, the 1990s were it. This country even had a Democratic president, Bill Clinton, who was focused far more on domestic concerns than foreign policy.  And there's the rub.  He simply had no desire to challenge the military-industrial complex. Few presidents do.

    Early in his first term, he'd already lost big-time in arguing for gays to serve openly in the ranks, leading to his ignominious surrender and the institutionalization of "don't ask, don't tell" as military policy.  As that complex then frog-marched Clinton through what remained of the twentieth century, hardheaded hawks like Dick Cheney, Donald Rumsfeld, and Paul Wolfowitz were already hatching their plans for America's triumphant return to a policy of complete unipolar dominance empowered by a kick-ass military.  Their time came with George W. Bush's less than legitimate election in 2000, accelerated by the September 11th tragedy the following year.

    America's New Normal Is War

    Ever since 9/11, endless conflict has been this country's new normal.  If you're an American 21 years of age or younger, you've never known a time when your country hasn't been at war, even if, thanks to the end of the draft in the previous century, you stand no chance of being called to arms yourself.  You've never known a time of "normal" defense budgets.  You have no conception of what military demobilization, no less peacetime might actually be like. Your normal is only reflected in the Biden administration's staggering $813 billion Pentagon budget proposal for the next fiscal year.  Naturally, many congressional Republicans are already clamoring for even higher military spending.  Remember that Mae West quip?  What a "wonderful" world!

    And you're supposed to take pride in this.  As President Biden recently told soldiers from the 82nd Airborne Division now stationed in Poland, this country has the "finest fighting force in the history of the world."  Even with the mountains of cash we give to that military, the nation still "owes you big," he assured them.

    Well, I'm gobsmacked.  During my 20-year career in the military, I never thought my nation owed me a thing, let alone owed me big.  Now that I think of it, however, I can say that this nation owed me (and today's troops as well) one very big thing: not to waste my life; not to send me to fight undeclared, arguably unconstitutional, wars; not to treat me like a foreign legionnaire or an imperial errand-boy.  That's what we, the people, really owe "our" troops.  It should be our duty to treat their service, and potentially their deaths, with the utmost care, meaning that our leaders should wage war only as a last, not a first, resort and only in defense of our most cherished ideals.

    This was anything but the case of the interminable Afghan and Iraq wars, reckless conflicts of choice that burned through trillions of dollars, with tens of thousands of U.S. troops killed and wounded, and millions of foreigners either dead or transformed into refugees, all for what turned out to be absolutely nothing.  Small wonder today that a growing number of Americans want to see less military spending, not more.  Citizen.org, representing 86 national and state organizations, has called on President Biden to decrease military spending.  Joining that call was POGO, the Project on Government Oversight, as well as William Hartung at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft.  And they couldn't be more on target, though they're certain to be ignored in Washington.

    Consider the recent disastrous end to the Afghan War.  Viewing that conflict in the aggregate, what you see is widespread corruption and untold waste, all facilitated by generals who lied openly and consistently to the rest of us about "progress," even as they spoke frankly in private about a lost war, a reality the Afghan War Papers all too tellingly revealed.  That harsh story of abysmal failure, however, highlights something far worse: a devastating record of lying on a massive scale within the highest ranks of the military and government.  And are those liars and deceivers being called to account?  Perish the thought!  Instead, they've generally been rewarded with yet more money, promotions, and praise.

    So, what would it take for the Pentagon budget to shrink? Blowing the whistle on wasteful and underperforming weaponry hasn't been enough. Witnessing murderous and disastrous wars hasn't been enough. To my mind, at this point, only a full-scale collapse of the U.S. economy might truly shrink that budget and that would be a Pyrrhic victory for the American people.

    In closing, let me return to President Biden's remark that the nation owes our troops big. There's an element of truth there, perhaps, if you're referring to the soldiers, Marines, sailors, and airmen, many of whom have served selflessly within its ranks. It sure as hell isn't true, though, of the self-serving strivers and liars at or near the top, or the weapons-making corporations who profited off it all, or the politicians in Washington who kept crying out for more.  They owe the rest of us and America big.

    My fellow Americans, we have now reached the point in our collective history where we face three certainties: death, taxes, and ever-soaring spending on weaponry and war. In that sense, we have become George Orwell's Oceania, where war is peace, surveillance is privacy, and censorship is free speech.

    Such is the fate of a people who make war and empire their way of life.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by William Astore.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/05/will-the-wasteful-pentagon-budget-ever-shrink/feed/ 0 288105
    Save the Planet, Behead the Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/04/save-the-planet-behead-the-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/04/save-the-planet-behead-the-military-budget/#respond Mon, 04 Apr 2022 08:45:29 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=238710 What the hell is going on? Is our military insanity totally the work of the so-called military-industrial complex? Do Lockheed Martin, Boeing, Raytheon, General Dynamics, Northrop Grumman, et al., rule the country via their lobbying muscle (which, ironically, is financed by the military budget for which they lobby)? More

    The post Save the Planet, Behead the Military Budget appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Robert Koehler.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/04/save-the-planet-behead-the-military-budget/feed/ 0 287665
    First female premier of a Solomons province pleads for NZ covid funds https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/04/first-female-premier-of-a-solomons-province-pleads-for-nz-covid-funds/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/04/first-female-premier-of-a-solomons-province-pleads-for-nz-covid-funds/#respond Mon, 04 Apr 2022 00:39:45 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=72390 RNZ Pacific

    The first female premier of a Solomon Islands province is appealing to New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern to help her country manage covid-19 in the community.

    People travelling between Honiara and Isabel Province were being tested for the virus at four testing centres, and if they test positive they were isolated at a makeshift centre.

    The Isabel Premier, Rhoda Sikilabu, said she was desperate for funding to make improvements to the isolation centres because “they’re filling up and are run down”.

    “I really, really need support. We have no place to … isolate these people,” Sikilabu said.

    She wants New Zealand to provide funding for improvements for the centres.

    “I, as a woman and a mother, I have so many worries and concerns for families offloading with babies, children,” she said.

    “I really, really need support in covid. Please I would like to appeal to the Prime Minister.”

    Focus on environmental and women’s issues
    Sikilabu plans to focus on environmental and women’s issues, and is hopeful of bringing changes to her region as well as transform old mindsets.

    She wants women to have authority to speak about their land and property in regards to resources.

    “Reforestation is one of the priorities that I will tackle and maybe I can impact more on how women can address or say more on their property, their land ownership,” she said.

    ”The environment is very, very important to women just now.”

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/04/first-female-premier-of-a-solomons-province-pleads-for-nz-covid-funds/feed/ 0 287615
    Yap doctors, nurses resign en masse – governor declares emergency https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/03/yap-doctors-nurses-resign-en-masse-governor-declares-emergency/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/03/yap-doctors-nurses-resign-en-masse-governor-declares-emergency/#respond Sun, 03 Apr 2022 12:44:29 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=72380 By Joyce McClure of Pacific Island Times

    Yap State Governor Jesse Salalu has declared a state of emergency over a mass resignation of 40 doctors and nurses at Yap State Hospital after authorities declined to consider their grievances.

    “Due to the sudden departure of staff, the Department of Health Services is now in need of finding and recruiting qualified nurses and doctors to fill vacancies, so as to minimise disruptions to its operations and services,” stated the emergency declaration.

    “There is no sufficient pool of qualified nurses and doctors available on island for immediate recruitment to help prevent or minimise disruptions to the operation and services of the hospital,” Governor Salalu said in his emergency declaration on March 31.

    The emergency status authorises the Department of Health Services to work with Waab Community Health Center to allow the sharing and realignment of human resources to the main hospital.

    DHS will also look into the possibility of rehiring local retired medical professionals on a temporary basis.

    Led by Dr James Yaingeluo, the doctors and nurses handed in their resignations on March 29 after Salalu declined to hear their grievances.

    When Salalu failed to appear at a meeting requested by the medical staff, a representative from the Office of the Attorney-General and a cabinet member refused to discuss the matter with them.

    Severe understaffing
    Among the grievances are persistently severe understaffing, low salaries resulting in the inability to attract and keep qualified professionals, working without contracts, and the Yap State Legislature’s refusal to release JEMCO-approved Office of Insular Affairs grant funds for wage increases.

    Many of the unresolved issues that date back to 2019 have been exacerbated during the pandemic.

    Yap is reported to have the lowest pay rates in FSM’s health care sector and has difficulty recruiting qualified doctors and nurses due to the higher compensation offered by other health care institutions in the region.

    This is especially true since the onset of the covid-19 pandemic when health care professionals began receiving significantly higher offers from employers.

    A year ago, then Governor Henry Falan submitted a supplemental budget request to the Yap State Legislature. Included in the request was $108,614 for doctors’ salaries. The money had been approved by JEMCO, granted by OIA and sourced from the Compact Health Sector.

    Dr Mandela A. Bodunrin, the hospital’s then chief-of-staff who has since left, requested the grant to increase doctors’ salaries in order to fill open positions for doctors that were going unfilled.

    DHS was unable to compete in the marketplace for the talent it required at the salary levels it was offering.

    Further review needed
    The legislature has the power to approve all OIA grants prior to their release, but the finance committee stated that further review was needed.

    The doctors then on-staff signed temporary contracts at the pay level authorised in the prior budget year while they awaited the legislature’s approval of Falan’s supplemental budget request.

    Their overtime and on-call remuneration tapped out the DHS’s FY2021 budget early due to the dearth of doctors.

    The temporary contracts expired in February 2021. The money from the grant was “to ensure continuity of the compensation until September 30, 2021,” Falan said. The money would not come from the state’s general fund.

    Understaffing and the inablity to attract qualified professionals became an even larger concern as the pandemic rapidly grew in importance within the medical community and compensation ballooned worldwide.

    During one of the meetings of the state’s emergency task force addressing covid-19, it was revealed that a number of nurses stated that they would quit once the border was opened and the first case was identified, adding another layer of stress to an already overburdened organisation.

    Yap’s border has been closed since April 2020. Repatriation of the state’s citizens who are stranded off-island has been in fits and starts, challenging the small medical team to manage quarantine and testing protocols while tending to the daily needs of the hospital’s patients.

    Repatriation flight postponed
    The most recent announcement for a repatriation flight arriving from Guam on Wednesday has been postponed.

    A team from the FSM Department of Health was on Yap the week of March 27 assessing the state’s readiness to reopen its borders. Their report is being awaited but the lack of medical personnel will now undoubtedly influence that decision.

    According to the Yap State Constitution, employees “have the right to form associations for the purpose of presenting their views to the government” and to be “free from restraint or reprisal in exercising this right.

    The government shall give reasonable opportunity to representatives of such associations to present their views.”

    However, it also states that “employees, whether or not exempted by the public service system, shall not strike or cause work stoppage for the purpose of collective bargaining or presenting their views.”

    Further, “the regulations shall prescribe a system for hearing the views of employees on their working conditions, status, pay and related matters and for hearing and adjudicating grievances of any employee or group of employees.

    “These regulations shall ensure that employees are free from coercion, discrimination, and reprisals and that they may have representatives of their choice.”

    Dominic Taruwemai, the acting DHS director, has not accepted the doctors’ and nurses’ resignations as of this writing.

    Joyce McClure is an American journalist who lived on Yap for five years and is now based in Guam. She is a contributor to the Pacific Island Times. This article is republished with permission.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/03/yap-doctors-nurses-resign-en-masse-governor-declares-emergency/feed/ 0 287559
    We Need Massive Civic Action to Take On Indefensible US Budget Violations https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/01/we-need-massive-civic-action-to-take-on-indefensible-us-budget-violations/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/01/we-need-massive-civic-action-to-take-on-indefensible-us-budget-violations/#respond Fri, 01 Apr 2022 16:37:27 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/335837
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Ralph Nader.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/04/01/we-need-massive-civic-action-to-take-on-indefensible-us-budget-violations/feed/ 0 287289
    Save the Planet! Behead the Pentagon Budget! https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/31/save-the-planet-behead-the-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/31/save-the-planet-behead-the-pentagon-budget/#respond Thu, 31 Mar 2022 14:08:32 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/335801

    Americans “need to imagine their vote has an impact on policy, an illusion the media encourages them to believe in.”

    Ouch!

    Peter Isaacson, writing in Fair Observer, seems to be saying . . . oh my God, democracy is a cliché, a big sham. I stand up, put my hand on my heart, pledge allegiance to the flag. This is America, land of the empowered voter. Then I read about our president’s latest budget proposal, which includes $813 billion for “national defense” — pushing the Pentagon budget’s already record-setting enormity further into outer space — and I feel myself collapse (yet again) into nothingness.

    Why, why, why, as our ecosystem collapses, as millions of refugees flee the horrors of war and poverty, as the pandemic continues, as World War III and the possibility of nuclear Armageddon rears its evil head, as the planet trembles, does ever-expanding, global militarism remain our primary national purpose?

    This question stabs me anew every year, as President Whoever announces his latest proposed military budget, as Congress increases it, as the media shrugs. Every year I hear the voice of George W. Bush, telling the American public — telling me — not to worry: “Just go shopping.”

    Why, why, why, as our ecosystem collapses, as millions of refugees flee the horrors of war and poverty, as the pandemic continues, as World War III and the possibility of nuclear Armageddon rears its evil head, as the planet trembles, does ever-expanding, global militarism remain our primary national purpose?

    So what the hell is going on? Is our military insanity totally the work of the so-called military-industrial complex? Do Lockheed Martin, Boeing, Raytheon, General Dynamics, Northrop Grumman, et al, rule the country via their lobbying muscle (which, ironically, is financed by the military budget for which they lobby)?

    That’s only part of it. The mystery is deeper — and, of course, classified. Consider the legacy of President Eisenhower, who went into office in 1953 speaking against increased militarism, yet was unable to control the nuclear arms race and expanding Cold War while in office (the CIA, for instance, helped overthrow progressive regimes in Iran, Guatemala and the Republic of the Congo); and eight years later, in his farewell address, regretfully sounded the warning about the influence of the military-industrial complex. This warning, however iconic, accomplished nothing. Waging or financing war has been the American way throughout my lifetime.

    As William Hartung writes: “Perhaps the biggest source of overspending on national defense is rooted in the U.S. ‘cover the globe’ military strategy, which attempts to sustain the capability to go anywhere and fight any battle. The United States maintains 750 overseas military bases and conducts counter-terror operations in at least 85 countries.”

    And then, of course, Biden’s proposed budget remains horrifically generous regarding the country’s nuclear weapons, allotting further billions of dollars to the Department of Energy to modernize the nuclear triad of ballistic missile submarines, bombers and land-based missiles. Now! As the world shudders over Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and Putin’s placement of the Russian nuclear arsenal on high alert. Yet this has not ignited a serious interest, at the national level, to rid the world of nukes: to disarm. Are we not trapped in a world of insanely limited thinking?

    Rather: “Russian aggression in Ukraine spurs demands for more military spending,” Reuters tells us with a vague shrug. The world is what it is.

    New York Times columnist Farhad Manjoo begins pulling open the door of awareness. “(S)houldn’t we ask,” he wonders, “whether it remains wise to keep handing the military what is effectively a blank check? Are such lavish resources even good for national defense, or might the Pentagon’s near-bottomless access to funds have encouraged a culture of waste and indulgence that made it easier to blunder into Iraq and contributed to its failures in Afghanistan?”

    And Bernie Sanders, part of the congressional minority that isn’t owned by the military-industrial lobby, put it this way: “This shameful spending makes the U.S. less secure.”

    While he noted that “we do not need a massive increase in the defense budget,” I wish he had said what we do need: a massive decrease in the defense budget, a flip in humanity’s collective consciousness. There are ways to address conflict without going to war, without dehumanizing and giving ourselves permission to kill “the enemy.” Our ecosystem is crashing and burning, for God’s sake! The actual problems humanity faces, from climate change to nuclear disaster to the pandemic, have precisely nothing to do with national borders.

    Knowing this, what could possibly be stupider than declaring those borders sacred and devoting limitless energy (and money) to their so-called defense? Once again, I throw the question wide open: Why? Why? Why? Joe Biden is smart enough to know this. Can you at least explain to the public, Mr. President, what is actually motivating your $813 billion military budget proposal? You don’t want to go to war with Russia. You don’t want World War III. Yet you feel committed to ensuring that such a war remains a possibility for the future.

    What is preventing you from using the power bequeathed to you by a majority of American voters to work on unity, both political and ecological, at the global level? I ask this knowing that such work is enormously complex. Is that the problem? Or is the problem that you have no more impact on national policy than the people who voted for you?


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Robert C. Koehler.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/31/save-the-planet-behead-the-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 286863
    Ukraine War Cannot Justify Biden’s Too-Damn-High Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/29/ukraine-war-cannot-justify-bidens-too-damn-high-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/29/ukraine-war-cannot-justify-bidens-too-damn-high-pentagon-budget/#respond Tue, 29 Mar 2022 20:10:51 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/335746

    The Biden administration’s FY 2023 proposal for national defense, released on Monday, far exceeds what is needed to provide a robust defense of the United States and its allies. At $813 billion, it is substantially more — adjusted for inflation — than spending at the height of the Korean or Vietnam wars, and over $100 billion more than peak spending during the Cold War. The $800 billion-plus figure for national defense includes the Pentagon budget, work on nuclear warheads at the Department of Energy, and smaller defense-related outlays at a number of other federal agencies.

    Even before today’s budget release, 40 Republican lawmakers, led by Rep. Mike Rogers (R-Ala.) and Sen. James Inhofe (R-Olla.) pledged to add money to Biden’s request, as happened last year, when Congress added $30 billion to the Pentagon’s original budget proposal. Although the lawmakers did not state a target number, industry analyst Byron Callan has suggested that they could be aiming for a figure for national defense as high as an astonishing $875 billion.

    Naturally, the administration’s budget rollout focused on the Russian invasion of Ukraine as one of the rationales for increased spending. But the Ukraine crisis should not be used as an excuse to increase the Pentagon’s already enormous budget. The recent emergency supplemental for Ukraine included $6.5 billion in military support, less than one percent of the Pentagon’s total budget.

    And so far, the Biden administration has sent a few thousand additional troops to Europe to reassure allies there, a tiny fraction of the total uniformed force of over 1.3 million troops worldwide, which includes over 470,000 Army personnel.

    Compared to these numbers for the total force, a few thousand more troops sent to Europe should not be a major strain on the budget. There is no current need for a massive U.S. troop increase in Europe that even approaches those Cold War levels, particularly given increases in spending by NATO allies like Germany and the greater ability for Europe to do more in its own defense. Thus, spending to address the Ukraine crisis can be more than readily accommodated under current Pentagon spending levels.

    Moreover, the Pentagon budget is replete with examples of waste and dysfunction that must be addressed before going on a new spending spree. This includes dangerous or unworkable systems like the F-35 combat aircraft and the new intercontinental ballistic missile. As a recent analysis by the Project on Government Oversight has pointed out, the F-35 program is rife with performance and reliability problems, and may never be fully ready for combat. In grudging recognition of all of its problems, the Pentagon will reportedly slow purchases of F-35s in the FY 2023 budget, to 61 from an originally projected total of 84. But it will take more than that to get the program on track, if that is even possible at this late date, over 20 years into its development and production.

    As for the new ICBM, former Secretary of Defense William Perry has described these systems as “some of the most dangerous weapons in the world” because a president would have only a matter of minutes to decide whether to launch them in a crisis, significantly increasing the risks of an accidental nuclear war based on a false alarm. Despite this concern, the administration’s budget calls for an increase in spending on the new ICBM, part of a proposed three-decade long plan to build a new generation of nuclear-armed missiles, bombers, and submarines that could cost up to $2 trillion. Both the F-35 and the new ICBM should be phased out, or ideally eliminated altogether.

    The Pentagon’s FY 2023 budget will be a boon to defense contractors, with a proposed $276 billion for weapons procurement and R&D combined, over $30 billion more than the department’s FY 2022 proposal. Much of that increase will go towards nuclear weapons and missile defense — a total of $68.8 billion for those two functions. The cost of Northrop Grumman’s B-21 bomber will nearly double, from $2.7 billion in FY 2022 to over $5 billion in the FY 2023 request. The General Dynamics Columbia Class ballistic missile submarine will go from $4.5 billion to $6.3 billion and the Northrop Grumman Ground-Based Strategic Deterrent — the new ICBM — from $2.6 billion to $3.6 billion.

    In Fiscal Year 2020, the most recent year for which full statistics are available, the top five arms companies — Lockheed Martin, Boeing, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and Northrop Grumman — split over $150 billion in Pentagon contracts, more than one-third of all funding the Department of Defense provided to private firms in that budget cycle. This year’s request, if adopted, will drive those figures even higher.

    As if the numbers requested for the Pentagon were not enough to create a surge in the bottom lines of major weapons makers, these firms can be counted on to use their considerable lobbying muscle to press for more, working closely with their allies in Congress. Likely areas of focus for congressional action will include increasing the numbers of F-35s purchased by the Air Force, Navy, and Marines and rolling back reported plans to retire ten Littoral Combat Ships, which at over $600 million each have had numerous maintenance and performance problems while lacking a clear mission.

    The Pentagon budget is also padded as a result of the routine contractor practice of grossly overcharging the Pentagon for spare parts and the steep cost overruns on major systems, and there is room to cut tens of billions of dollars from the Pentagon budget without diminishing our security.

    Perhaps the biggest source of overspending on national defense is rooted in the U.S. “cover the globe” military strategy, which attempts to sustain the capability to go anywhere and fight any battle. The United States maintains 750 overseas military bases and conducts counter-terror operations in at least 85 countries. Cutting back on this policy of global reach by reducing the U.S. military presence in the greater Middle East and relying more on allies to provide for their own defense in Europe and East Asia would free up hundreds of billions of dollars in the years to come.

    Resources saved through a more sensible defense strategy should be used to address existential security challenges like climate change and pandemics. It’s time to redefine security to prioritize the greatest risks to America and the world, while maintaining the capability for addressing traditional security challenges.


    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by William Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/29/ukraine-war-cannot-justify-bidens-too-damn-high-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 286167
    What’s in Biden’s $5.8 trillion budget proposal? https://grist.org/politics/whats-in-bidens-5-8-trillion-budget-proposal/ https://grist.org/politics/whats-in-bidens-5-8-trillion-budget-proposal/#respond Tue, 29 Mar 2022 10:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=565274 President Joe Biden proposed a $5.8 trillion budget on Monday that would boost funding for federal environmental agencies, invest in climate research and resiliency, and support environmental justice programs. 

    Though the document is only a draft and will undergo significant changes before being approved by Congress, it represents a sharp shift in priorities from the previous administration. The budget for fiscal year 2023, which begins in July, includes $11.9 billion for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, or EPA, and $17.6 billion for the Department of the Interior, both increases from Trump-era budget cuts that gutted federal environmental enforcement. 

    The increased funding will allow the EPA to upgrade drinking water and wastewater infrastructure, particularly in underserved communities; improve air quality; clean up hazardous waste; and study the health and environmental effects of per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances, or PFAS, also known as “forever chemicals.” It would also support on-the-ground efforts to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and increase climate resiliency by providing $100 million in grants to states and tribes.

    Biden’s budget was praised by EPA Administrator Michael Regan as well as members of the Environmental Protection Network, a coalition of former EPA staffers and appointees.

    ​​“Congress needs to respond to the President’s [fiscal year] 2023 EPA Budget request by providing robust support to rebuild our nation’s environmental protection infrastructure,” David Coursen, a former EPA attorney, said in a press release. “A fully funded EPA will be better poised to address the existential threat of the climate crisis and advance environmental justice for vulnerable fenceline communities, communities of color, and low-income and Indigenous communities who have long been overburdened by air and water pollution.”

    The budget also proposes $48.2 billion for the U.S. Department of Energy as the Biden administration seeks to prioritize domestic clean energy production, including $200 million to support solar panel manufacturing and $5 billion in loan projects to “avoid, reduce, or sequester greenhouse gas emissions.” It’s unclear how much of this would support carbon capture and storage projects such as carbon dioxide pipelines, a controversial strategy that environmental groups have said hinders the transition to renewable energy. 

    Many of the proposed investments are in energy efficiency and electrification, with funding to help weatherize and retrofit low-income homes; connect tribal households to the electricity grid; and purchase electric vehicles for the federal fleet, including the United States Postal Service, which has faced criticism for a recent decision to replace most of its vehicles with gas-powered trucks. 

    A solar farm spreads out next to a highway and river in this drone footage.
    Biden’s 2023 budget includes investments in domestic solar panel manufacturing. Paul Hennessy/SOPA Images/LightRocket via Getty Images

    There’s also funding for climate research, including over $900 million for the National Science Foundation to track how climate change is affecting communities in the U.S. Part of the Department of Energy’s budget would include $9 billion for clean energy research, while the U.S. Department of Agriculture would receive $6 million for its climate hubs, which study how farmers can adapt to climate change and reduce their carbon emissions. 

    The National Park Service, which faced steep budget cuts under the Trump administration and has lost more than 3,000 staff members in the last decade even as visitor numbers have soared, would see a more than 10 percent boost in funding under the new budget. That includes $31 million for the President’s long-touted Civilian Climate Corps, a program that would put people to work making national park infrastructure more resilient to climate change.

    “We know that while our parks are hit hard by climate, they can also be part of the solution, but resources and staff are necessary to make real change,” Theresa Pierno, President and CEO of the nonprofit National Parks Conservation Association, said in a press release

    More than $9 billion would go to job creation and economic revitalization programs in communities affected by the transition from fossil fuels to renewables. And the budget doubles down on Biden’s promises to support environmental justice, with nearly $4.5 billion going to EJ programs as part of Biden’s Justice40 initiative, which dedicates 40 percent of federal climate and clean energy spending to underserved communities.

    Despite its emphasis on domestic clean energy production and “green” jobs, the proposed budget also includes hundreds of billions in defense spending, a major contributor to climate change. In a statement announcing the budget, Biden called for “one of the largest investments in our national security in history,” particularly in the wake of Russia’s invasion of Ukraine

    But the U.S. military, which is not obligated to report its emissions under the Paris Agreement, already uses a significant amount of fuel to power its aircraft and ships. As a result, it emits more greenhouse gasses than many entire countries — a major obstacle to achieving net-zero emissions, as the U.S. has pledged to do by 2050.

    Even with these increases in spending, Biden said the budget would halve the deficit from the last year of the Trump administration, thanks in part to new taxes on the wealthiest Americans.

    This story was originally published by Grist with the headline What’s in Biden’s $5.8 trillion budget proposal? on Mar 29, 2022.


    This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Diana Kruzman.

    ]]>
    https://grist.org/politics/whats-in-bidens-5-8-trillion-budget-proposal/feed/ 0 286028
    ‘We Do Not Need a Massive Increase’: Sanders Criticizes Biden’s $813 Billion Military Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/28/we-do-not-need-a-massive-increase-sanders-criticizes-bidens-813-billion-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/28/we-do-not-need-a-massive-increase-sanders-criticizes-bidens-813-billion-military-budget/#respond Mon, 28 Mar 2022 16:12:24 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/335698
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/28/we-do-not-need-a-massive-increase-sanders-criticizes-bidens-813-billion-military-budget/feed/ 0 285815
    Start of a New Cold War? U.S. Hawks "Want to Jack up the Military Budget, Use Ukraine as an Excuse” https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/25/start-of-a-new-cold-war-u-s-hawks-want-to-jack-up-the-military-budget-use-ukraine-as-an-excuse/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/25/start-of-a-new-cold-war-u-s-hawks-want-to-jack-up-the-military-budget-use-ukraine-as-an-excuse/#respond Fri, 25 Mar 2022 13:55:47 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d6cd4d6823b9b5f253eb82032e96b0b1
    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/25/start-of-a-new-cold-war-u-s-hawks-want-to-jack-up-the-military-budget-use-ukraine-as-an-excuse/feed/ 0 285073
    Start of a New Cold War? U.S. Hawks “Want to Jack up the Military Budget and Use Ukraine as an Excuse” https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/25/start-of-a-new-cold-war-u-s-hawks-want-to-jack-up-the-military-budget-and-use-ukraine-as-an-excuse/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/25/start-of-a-new-cold-war-u-s-hawks-want-to-jack-up-the-military-budget-and-use-ukraine-as-an-excuse/#respond Fri, 25 Mar 2022 12:30:59 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5aa83ecae700fef538bb637078f61a10 Seg2 military exercise norway

    With NATO countries recommitting themselves to the alliance and passing sweeping sanctions against Russia as punishment for Vladimir Putin’s invasion of Ukraine, is this the dawn of a new Cold War? We speak with foreign policy expert William Hartung, a senior research fellow at the Quincy Institute, who warns that hawks in Washington are pushing for a massive increase in the U.S. military budget, which is already a record-high $800 billion a year. “There’s a danger that not only will this be a war in Ukraine, but the U.S. will use it as an excuse for a more aggressive policy around the world, arguing that it’s to counter Russia or China or Iran, or whoever the enemy of the moment is.” Hartung also speaks about the Saudi-led war in Yemen, where U.S. support has allowed the conflict to rage for years, killing about 400,000 people. Unlike in Ukraine, where the U.S. has more limited leverage, the Biden administration could “end that killing tomorrow,” Hartung says.


    This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/25/start-of-a-new-cold-war-u-s-hawks-want-to-jack-up-the-military-budget-and-use-ukraine-as-an-excuse/feed/ 0 285092
    The US Military Budget is More Lopsided Than Ever https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/18/the-us-military-budget-is-more-lopsided-than-ever/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/18/the-us-military-budget-is-more-lopsided-than-ever/#respond Fri, 18 Mar 2022 08:50:28 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=237442 Congress recently announced a bipartisan budget deal to fund the federal government through 2022. It’s a lopsided budget if there ever was one. Even after America’s longest war in Afghanistan ended last year, military spending isn’t going down. In fact, it’s skyrocketing upwards — from $740 billion in the last budget set under Trump to More

    The post The US Military Budget is More Lopsided Than Ever appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by Lindsay Koshgarian.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/18/the-us-military-budget-is-more-lopsided-than-ever/feed/ 0 282983
    US Military Budget Is More Outrageous Than Ever https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/17/us-military-budget-is-more-outrageous-than-ever/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/17/us-military-budget-is-more-outrageous-than-ever/#respond Thu, 17 Mar 2022 16:47:28 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/node/335438
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Lindsay Koshgarian.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/17/us-military-budget-is-more-outrageous-than-ever/feed/ 0 282782
    Omnibus FY2022 Budget Fails Wildlife and Wildlands https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/09/omnibus-fy2022-budget-fails-wildlife-and-wildlands/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/09/omnibus-fy2022-budget-fails-wildlife-and-wildlands/#respond Wed, 09 Mar 2022 08:01:15 +0000 https://www.counterpunch.org/?p=236642 WASHINGTON, DC Congress today released the long-delayed final appropriations bill for fiscal year 2022, the spending period that started on October 1, 2021 and ends on September 30, 2022. Despite unified Democrat control of the House, Senate, and White House, the bill falls far short of funding much-needed environmental protections, and contains a rider that More

    The post Omnibus FY2022 Budget Fails Wildlife and Wildlands appeared first on CounterPunch.org.


    This content originally appeared on CounterPunch.org and was authored by CounterPunch News Service.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/09/omnibus-fy2022-budget-fails-wildlife-and-wildlands/feed/ 0 280523
    New Analysis Says US Doesn’t Need ‘Bigger Military Budget to Deter Putin’ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/03/new-analysis-says-us-doesnt-need-bigger-military-budget-to-deter-putin/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/03/new-analysis-says-us-doesnt-need-bigger-military-budget-to-deter-putin/#respond Thu, 03 Mar 2022 17:59:56 +0000 /node/335054
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/03/new-analysis-says-us-doesnt-need-bigger-military-budget-to-deter-putin/feed/ 0 278794
    New Analysis Says US Doesn’t Need ‘Bigger Military Budget to Deter Putin’ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/03/new-analysis-says-us-doesnt-need-bigger-military-budget-to-deter-putin-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/03/new-analysis-says-us-doesnt-need-bigger-military-budget-to-deter-putin-2/#respond Thu, 03 Mar 2022 17:59:56 +0000 /node/335054
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by Jake Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/03/03/new-analysis-says-us-doesnt-need-bigger-military-budget-to-deter-putin-2/feed/ 0 278795
    Don’t Let War Hawks Use Russian Invasion to Increase Pentagon Budget https://www.radiofree.org/2022/02/25/dont-let-war-hawks-use-russian-invasion-to-increase-pentagon-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2022/02/25/dont-let-war-hawks-use-russian-invasion-to-increase-pentagon-budget/#respond Fri, 25 Feb 2022 18:25:27 +0000 /node/334885
    This content originally appeared on Common Dreams - Breaking News & Views for the Progressive Community and was authored by William Hartung.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2022/02/25/dont-let-war-hawks-use-russian-invasion-to-increase-pentagon-budget/feed/ 0 277076
    ACTION ALERT: CNN Asks Sinema No Questions About Conflicts https://www.radiofree.org/2021/12/09/action-alert-cnn-asks-sinema-no-questions-about-conflicts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/12/09/action-alert-cnn-asks-sinema-no-questions-about-conflicts/#respond Thu, 09 Dec 2021 22:05:00 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9025248 Please urge CNN to ask tough questions even—or especially—of officials like Kyrsten Sinema who don't grant many interviews.

    The post ACTION ALERT: CNN Asks Sinema No Questions About Conflicts appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    CNN: 'I'm very direct': Sinema responds to criticism she's an enigma

    CNN‘s exclusive interview (12/2/21) with Sen. Kyrsten Sinema asked her no questions about her conflicts of interest.

    Sen. Kyrsten Sinema (D.–Arizona) is notorious for being inaccessible to the press—and to constituents—while threatening to tank the Democratic Party’s key social spending bill. As Mother Jones (10/7/21) reported, Sinema has not held a single town hall since her election, doesn’t hold press conferences, and refuses to speak to reporters and constituents alike when approached. So when CNN‘s Lauren Fox (12/2/21) landed a sit-down interview with Sinema, it presented a rare opportunity to do what journalists are supposed to do: hold power to account.

    Instead, Fox’s questions primarily ranged from the inane (“Is it hard for you to tell the president, no, I can’t do that?”) to the flattering, casting Sinema as a straight-shooter stuck with bad party leaders:

    One of the ways that you negotiate in talking with your colleagues is that you’re pretty forthcoming about where you stand on something. We talked about the corporate tax rate. Why do you think it is that your leadership sometimes overpromises? Do you think that’s a problem for voters and for the Democratic Party?

    You wouldn’t understand from Fox’s question that Sinema’s refusal to support the tax increases on corporations (and the rich) that would help fund the Biden-backed budget bill known as Build Back Better—a notable reversal from her opposition to the Trump tax cuts as a House rep in 2017—is strikingly unpopular, in both Arizona and the country as a whole. A better question would be whether Sinema’s position is a problem for voters.

    ‘Taking your comment seriously’

    CNN: 'I'm Serving the Exact Way' I Vowed to During Campaign

    CNN‘s Lauren Fox (12/2/21) to Kyrsten Sinema: “You’re pretty forthcoming about where you stand on something.”

    The only other question Fox asked that related to Sinema’s position on taxes—one of the biggest sticking points for the bill—likewise gave Sinema a total pass:

    I know one of the things that you made clear very early in the negotiation with the president and your majority leader was that you were not going to support raising the corporate tax rate a single point. Did you feel like at any point they weren’t taking your comment seriously, given the fact that they were promising for a long time that this was going to be part of the bill?

    Fox did ask two more substantive questions about Build Back Better; first whether Sinema would vote yes when it comes to the Senate floor, and then, after an evasive non-answer, what changes Sinema would make to the bill. When Sinema directly rebuffed her (“I don’t negotiate in the press”), Fox simply let it drop.

    Likewise, when Fox asked, “Would you be willing to vote with Democrats to hold up the president’s mandates?” Sinema responded, “I’m not going to tell you those things.” Fox asked no follow-up, at least in the portions of the interview that CNN ran.

    Fox was tougher on Sinema’s outraged constituents than she was on Sinema herself. Two months ago, immigrant youth activists from Arizona who had been stonewalled for months by Sinema followed her into a bathroom on their campus after she refused to engage them in the hallway, to express their concerns about her position on Build Back Better. Whatever you think about the protesters’ tactics, the incident highlights how inaccessible Sinema is to those she represents, when her frequent exclusive big-money events with corporate lobbyists and wealthy PAC donors have been raising eyebrows in the press.

    Instead of making an effort to hold Sinema’s feet to the fire over this bigger-picture issue of whose interests the elected official represents, Fox only highlighted the behavior of the protesters: “I’m really curious what you think that means about the state of US politics right now, given the fact that they crossed a boundary by following you into the restroom?”

    Questions unasked

    MoJo: Big GOP Donors Poured Money Into Kyrsten Sinema’s Campaign in September

    The words “donors” or “contributions” never come up in CNN‘s interview with Sinema, despite the flood of money coming to her from lobbies that benefit from her obstructionist stance (Mother Jones, 10/16/21).

    In fact, Fox asked zero questions about Sinema’s motives and conflicts, for which other journalists had provided plenty of fodder. No questions, for instance, about the fundraisers she held with opponents of Build Back Better during crucial moments of negotiation on the bill (New York Times, 9/27/21).

    Or about how shockingly little of her third-quarter fundraising haul came from her constituents. While pharma and finance bigwigs and PACs lined up to write big checks, only 10% of her individual contributions came from Arizona (Politico, 10/15/21).

    Or about reports in Mother Jones (10/16/21) and the New York Times (11/21/21) that Sinema’s opposition to Build Back Better has made her (and fellow bill blocker Joe Manchin) particularly popular among Republican megadonors, who are maxing out their individual contributions to her.

    Or about how Sinema and Manchin have received more lobbyist contributions this year than any other senator in their cohort—the group that’s not up for re-election until 2024—and both are taking in three times the lobbying money of the average senator (Data for Progress, 10/27/21).

    No doubt such questions would have irked Sinema, and perhaps even threatened CNN‘s access to her in the future. But if access is only used to polish the image of the powerful, that’s propaganda, not journalism.


    ACTION ALERT: Please urge CNN to ask tough questions even—or especially—of officials who don’t grant many interviews.

    CONTACT: Messages to CNN can be sent here (or via Twitter @CNN).

    Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective. Feel free to leave a copy of your message in the comments thread of this post.


    Research assistance: Dorothy Poucher

     

     

    The post ACTION ALERT: CNN Asks Sinema No Questions About Conflicts appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Julie Hollar.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/12/09/action-alert-cnn-asks-sinema-no-questions-about-conflicts/feed/ 0 256310
    Does Biden’s Lower Approval Rating Mean Democrats Should ‘Move to the Center’? https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/24/does-bidens-lower-approval-rating-mean-democrats-should-move-to-the-center/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/24/does-bidens-lower-approval-rating-mean-democrats-should-move-to-the-center/#respond Wed, 24 Nov 2021 14:17:34 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9025010 There are many possible explanations for Biden’s low approval ratings. Pushing for his Build Back Better legislation is not one of them.

    The post Does Biden’s Lower Approval Rating Mean Democrats Should ‘Move to the Center’? appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    NYT: Democrats Deny Political Reality at Their Own Peril

    New York Times (11/4/21): “Significant parts of the electorate are feeling leery of a sharp leftward push in the party.”

    Recent polls show that President Joe Biden’s approval rating has declined significantly since he took office.

    A decline is not unexpected, of course, given the historical phenomenon known as a honeymoon period. But many in the media have interpreted this decline as a negative assessment specifically of Biden’s too-progressive agenda (FAIR.org, 11/5/21).

    Numerous articles and editorials have thus argued that Biden should return to the “center” (see here, here and here), a rather vague political location these days, but one that would require him to significantly downsize many proposals in his Build Back Better legislation.

    A prime example is a recent New York Times editorial (11/4/21) with the headline, “Democrats Deny Political Reality at Their Own Peril.”

    The alleged reality: That “significant parts of the electorate are feeling leery of a sharp leftward push in the party,” and that “the concerns of more centrist Americans about a rush to spend taxpayer money, a rush to grow the government, should not be dismissed.”

    The solution?

    What is badly needed is an honest conversation in the Democratic Party about how to return to the moderate policies and values that fueled the blue-wave victories in 2018 and won Joe Biden the presidency in 2020.

    Bait and switch

    In all of these articles and editorials, the authors focus on Biden’s declining approval rating as “bait”—what we should be concerned about—and then switch to talking about the president’s legislative agenda. But there is no necessary connection between the two. People could disapprove of the president’s performance in office for many reasons not related at all to the proposed legislation.

    If Biden’s approval rating has declined because of the size of his proposed legislation, then we should expect either that public approval of his proposals has been low, or that approval has declined. But neither is the case.

    FAIR: Cherry-Picking Polls to Hide Public Support for Biden’s Spending Plan

    FAIR.org (10/15/21): “The margins in favor of the reconciliation package vary from a low of 12 points in the WP/ABC poll, to 24 points in the Pew poll.”

    In an earlier post (FAIR.org, 10/16/21), I cited several polls showing double-digit margins of support for Biden’s initial plan costing $3.5 trillion. Polls since then confirm majority public support for that package, as well as the compromised package of just under $2 trillion recently passed by the House.

    If the size of the legislation was a problem for the public, then we would expect to find higher support for the new compromised version than for the original bill. But the polls do not reflect such a difference.

    The ABC/Washington Post poll (11/7–10/21) and the Quinnipiac poll (11/11–15/21) found almost identical results for the $2 trillion bill—58% to 37% and 58% to 38%, respectively.

    And these figures were quite close to what Quinnipiac (10/1–4/21) and ABC/Washington Post (8/29/21–9/1/21) reported earlier about the $3.5 trillion package: 57% to 40% and 53% to 41%, respectively.

    ‘Too big for voters to comprehend’

    WaPo: Democrats’ problem is not focusing on issues most vital to independents, 2 prominent pollsters say

    Biden’s “gotta lead from the middle out,” says pollster Joel Benenson (Washington Post, 10/23/21), whose clients include Google, Comcast, Viacom, Microsoft and Bank of America.

    It would appear that many of the cited articles reflect the long-held opinions of the authors, who hold on to those views regardless of what the polls might show.

    Perhaps they are persuaded by the prevailing view, as reflected in a recent Gallup poll, that most people want less, rather than more, government spending. These pundits don’t seem to accept the notion, as noted in an earlier post (FAIR.org, 10/24/21), that while most Americans may express conservative beliefs, in fact large majorities generally support activist government.

    That disjuncture is reflected in an article by the Washington Post’s Paul Kane (10/23/21), who apparently could not believe that Americans might support such a costly bill. He refers to an argument by two pollsters—one a Republican, the other a Democrat—who acknowledge that “individual pieces of this massive agenda are popular,” but then assert that “the package is either too big for voters to comprehend, or the price is so high that it sounds scary.”

    That sounds like a classic case of denial. There is no polling evidence for such an assertion. In fact, polling suggests the opposite.

    There are many possible explanations for Biden’s low approval ratings. Pushing for his Build Back Better legislation is not one of them.

    The post Does Biden’s Lower Approval Rating Mean Democrats Should ‘Move to the Center’? appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by David W. Moore.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/24/does-bidens-lower-approval-rating-mean-democrats-should-move-to-the-center/feed/ 0 252075
    Breaking News: AOC’s District Has Opinions https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/23/breaking-news-aocs-district-has-opinions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/23/breaking-news-aocs-district-has-opinions/#respond Tue, 23 Nov 2021 21:00:17 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9025003 Ocasio-Cortez is an obvious target for both establishment papers like the New York Times and conservative outlets like the New York Post.

    The post Breaking News: AOC’s District Has Opinions appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    NYT: Ocasio-Cortez Isn’t Wavering. Are New Yorkers on Her Side?

    New York Times (11/12/21): “Where Ms. Ocasio-Cortez was once seen by many political observers as at the vanguard of the party’s new direction, she may now be more emblematic of its divides.”

    The residents of New York Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez’s district, like all New Yorkers, love to argue. No one can agree which Colombian bakery has the best empanadas. Given that the district is in both the Bronx and Queens, it is home to both Mets and Yankees fans.The state’s 14th congressional district is well-known for its diversity. It’s the type of place where you might find a Bangladeshi woman in full body covering selling Korans next to a sex worker. Everyone has their differences, but for the most part people get along.

    So it’s not surprising that if you walked around Roosevelt or Tremont Avenues and asked 10 people for their thoughts on a particular political subject, you’d probably receive about 13 different answers. Alas, the New York Times (11/12/21) turned this into a shocking expose: It turns out some people in the district were unhappy with Ocasio-Cortez’s “no” vote on the federal infrastructure bill.

    The Times noted that the federal infrastructure bill would bring billions for the state, but that “Ocasio-Cortez and five fellow progressives voted against it; they argued that the bill was too modest”—before adding the actual reason that these lawmakers voted against it, that they “sought to use their votes to pressure wavering moderates to support a bigger climate and social safety net bill that is pending.”

    The six progressives were sticking to what the plan had been all along, which was that the infrastructure bill would be passed after the social spending bill, to get conservative Democrats an incentive to vote for the latter; without that incentive, the fate of the social spending bill is now very much in doubt.

    ‘Sharp disagreements’

    The Times piece—which was co-authored by Kate Glueck, the paper’s chief metro political reporter, with Nicholas Fandos—explores the reaction of the district to this break with the rest of the Democratic Party. The piece says, “There are sharp disagreements unfolding over how far left the party should go,” based on “interviews with more than three dozen constituents, elected officials and party leaders.”

    NYT: New York’s Superstar Progressive Isn’t A.O.C.

    Bret Stephens (New York Times, 9/21/21) still trying to make “fetch” happen.

    Given her stature as a progressive leader, it is fair game to get responses from AOC’s district to a controversial vote. Yet we’re not used to seeing other elected leaders receiving this kind of coverage. First-year New York Rep. Ritchie Torres has a district that borders AOC’s, and has been heavily touted by media as a better model of “progressive” up-and-comer (FAIR.org, 1/26/21). Yet we don’t see a lot of in-depth coverage of how the poorest district in the country feels about his prioritization of US aid to Israel, when that money could be spent at home; instead, he’s treated to a puff piece from conservative Times columnist Bret Stephens (9/21/21).

    The most telling part of the November 12 article is when it quotes Tony Avella speaking negatively of AOC, calling her a “lightning rod.” The Times describes Avella as a “moderate Democrat who appears to have lost a City Council district in Queens that includes a more moderate part of Ms. Ocasio-Cortez’s congressional district.”

    So many words, and yet it leaves out so much. Avella isn’t a nobody. He is a former Democratic state senator who joined the Independent Democratic Conference (IDC), a renegade group of conservative Democrats who caucused with Republicans, thereby handing the New York Senate majority to the GOP. He lost his re-election primary, along with most of the other IDC senators, in 2018, in the same wave of progressive electoral energy that swept AOC to victory in her primary (Intercept, 9/13/18); in Queens, the anti-IDC campaigns often included volunteers who also worked for AOC. This is a key piece of context that helps explain Avella’s antipathy toward AOC’s success and her leftward stances, and the Times leaves it out.

    But the other quotes don’t seem random, either. Another quote taking a swipe at AOC comes from Thomas Grech, the CEO of the Queens Chamber of Commerce, a business association whose natural inclination is to remain at the business-friendly center. Further, Grech made several contributions to the mayoral campaign of Eric Adams, the mayor-elect who has vowed to wage political combat against AOC and her allies (New York Post, 7/27/21).

    The Times also quoted a negative comment from Jennifer Shannon, who is identified as a local activist, but the Times doesn’t say what kind of activist. Well, she helped organize a protest against a new homeless shelter (Queens Chronicle, 12/6/18), and appears to be an active member of a Facebook group for a civic association that backed at least one Republican candidate in a local election. That’s a bit of context the Times should share when it comes to a story like this.

    To understand the degree to which these voices are outliers and not the norm, remember: AOC won re-election in the general election with 72% of the vote.

    The piece does offer a favorable quote from Assemblymember Zohran Kwame Mamdani, who the paper calls “a democratic socialist who represents one of the most left-leaning neighborhoods.” But even that makes Mamdani sound like an outlier of support. AOC’s district also includes part of the City Council district that recently elected Tiffany Cabán, who was also backed by the Democratic Socialists of America. The congressional district is also home to state Sen. Jessica Ramos, a progressive although not a socialist, who was an anti-IDC challenger swept in during the same wave that brought in AOC in 2018. AOC is probably the most familiar expression of progressive electoral success in western Queens, but she is hardly alone.

    ‘Self-proclaimed woman of the people’

    This type of article, which frames the district revolting against the congressmember with quotes that are questionably presented as a random sampling, isn’t new.

    The New York Post (8/20/19) wrote a long piece on Ocasio-Cortez’s insufficient office phone system; communications problems at one’s district office aren’t nothing, but hardly an outlier in the world of automated phone systems. The Post (3/30/19) also claimed AOC’s “constituents turn against her,” a fiery headline for a story based on quotes from exactly two people. One of those people is Anthony Vitaliano, whom the Post refers to as an ex-cop, who was later not reappointed to his community board post after allegations surfaced that he had discriminated against a board staffer (The City, 8/10/20). This is one of the best people the Post could find to sully AOC’s performance, apparently.

    NY Post: AOC’s Bronx, Queens district offices open for in-person services just twice a week

    New York Post (11/15/21): “The self-described socialist has taken heat for not paying enough attention to her constituents as she burnishes her national reputation as a leftist darling.”

    The Post (11/15/21) also lifted one of the takeaways from the Times piece, that her district office is physically open only twice a week, saying “this self-proclaimed woman of the people thinks they are best served from afar,” adding that on the “other three weekdays, AOC’s district office appointments are held virtually.”

    Not until the 14th paragraph does the Post mention the obvious reason for the closures: The country is still in the midst of a pandemic, killing on average more than a thousand people a day across the US in early November (a statistic not mentioned by the tabloid). Whether one likes it or not, many businesses, nonprofits, unions and institutions of higher learning are still operating remotely at least part of the time. Turning this into a news story suggests that Post reporters are forced to scrape the bottom of the barrel; one pictures an AOC-obsessed editor barking for literally anything to hit the congressmember with. (It doesn’t hurt that this particular story ties into the Murdoch empire’s opposition to anti-Covid public health measures—for the public, of course, not for the conglomerate’s own staffers.)

    And one can’t really blame this desperation on the Post’s conservative politics. The Times piece on the reaction to AOC’s infrastructure vote quoted state Sen. John Liu taking a dig at the congresswoman’s presence in the district, referring to “her visibility in the district—ubiquitous online, less so in person.” This follows previous AP coverage (6/11/20) which quoted a pro-business advocate on “this perception of her being this Hollywood glam girl,” which the AP said was part of “accusations that she’s lost touch with her district.” The AP’s alarm bell turned out to be nothing: AOC sailed to victory in her primary later that month (CNN, 6/24/20), with 75% of the vote.

    Ask yourself, how often do you actually see your congressional representative just hanging around your neighborhood? I am a resident of AOC’s district, and while I can’t tell you how many actual hours per week she spends on the streets of the district, I can say that I’ve laid eyes on her at my local farmers market, my nearest park, a meeting on public education, a Hanukkah party for the community and a rally for LaGuardia airport workers. According to her social media, we also just missed each other at the same Tibetan momo joint (Twitter, 9/30/19). And that’s just one corner of the district. To suggest that she’s somehow not around is just not based on reality.

    And, of course, none of these swipes at AOC’s physical presence take into account that she has had to face death threats in the district (Daily News, 4/26/21). This is all happening as Republican Rep. Paul Gosar shared a video cartoon depicting him murdering her (Newsweek, 11/15/21), and then reshared it after he was censured by his colleagues (CBS, 11/18/21).

    The anti-spending socialist

    Fox News: AOC’s ‘no’ vote on infrastructure bill is slammed in New York: report

    Fox News (11/7/21) told its audience that “voters in New York City didn’t hold back their criticism of far-left US Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez this weekend”—citing a New York Post report (11/6/21).

    Negative coverage of AOC has a tendency to drift into surrealism. Take Fox News’ response (11/7/21) to her infrastructure vote: The conservative network took the opportunity to quote Republican Rep. Nicole Malliotakis, who voted with the Biden administration because the bill will pour money into the city, to blast AOC for her no vote. So here you get an anti-spending news organization quote a lawmaker from the anti-spending party blasting a socialist for voting against spending.

    It’s not hard to understand why AOC gets this type of attention. Given that she is the de facto leader of the Squad, an alliance of democratic socialist congressmembers, she is the obvious target for both establishment centrist papers like the Times and conservative outlets like the New York Post. Her ability to capture the limelight, like being on the cover of Vanity Fair (12/20), makes it easy to suggest she isn’t the working-class defender she says she is. But again and again, these attacks fall flat under scrutiny.

    The post Breaking News: AOC’s District Has Opinions appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Ari Paul.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/23/breaking-news-aocs-district-has-opinions/feed/ 0 251880
    ‘There’s Still an Awful Lot of Good in This Package, but You Wouldn’t Know It From Headlines’ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/02/theres-still-an-awful-lot-of-good-in-this-package-but-you-wouldnt-know-it-from-headlines/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/02/theres-still-an-awful-lot-of-good-in-this-package-but-you-wouldnt-know-it-from-headlines/#respond Tue, 02 Nov 2021 17:55:34 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9024710 "These numbers, these programs, these policies, as far as we’ve gotten, all come...from decades of social movements."

    The post ‘There’s Still an Awful Lot of Good in This Package, but You Wouldn’t Know It From Headlines’ appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Janine Jackson interviewed IPS’s Karen Dolan about Build Back Better for the October 29, 2021, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

          CounterSpin211029Dolan.mp3

     

    WaPo: Build Back Better Is Getting Worse and Worse

    Washington Post (10/26/21)

    Janine Jackson: Things are up in the air as we record on October 28. But it seems that paid family and medical leave, among other things, has been cut from the Build Back Better legislative package, which today’s New York Times describes as “considerably more modest than initially envisioned.” A recent Washington Post editorial, “Build Back Better Is Getting Worse and Worse,” said that Democrats are “at risk of producing legislation that is so compromised and slapdash that it would amount to a tragic missed opportunity.”

    Poignant words, that would land differently had not the Post and the rest of the elite press corps delivered months of coverage on the safety net, climate and infrastructure package that so overwhelmingly focused on its costs over its contents that proponents, including Sen. Bernie Sanders, were driven to produce a webinar called “What’s in the Damn Bill?

    Joining us now to talk about Build Back Better and the struggles around it is Karen Dolan. She’s a fellow at the Institute for Policy Studies, where she directs the Criminalization of Race and Poverty project. She joins us now by phone. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Karen Dolan.

    Karen Dolan: Thank you, Janine. Wonderful to be here.

    JJ: I admit my heart sank to see the Times this morning: “Biden Announces $1.85 Trillion Framework for Climate and Safety Net Plan.” Both because it represents such a material reduction in what was looking like a plan to begin to confront this country’s climate and human health crises, not to mention to respond to the public will to do that. But then also because it seems like media are going to continue to reduce this plan about people to a price tag.

    What are your broad thoughts today about how the White House and lawmakers have so far handled what is, once folks know about it, a very popular plan?

    KD: I agree with you, Janine, that the media has not done its job, and by not doing its job has done a great disservice to the American people. So you look at the latest polls, where about 35% of people feel that there’s anything in the bill that will help them, when in reality, even this pared-down bill will help nearly everyone who isn’t a millionaire and billionaire. And millionaires and billionaires aren’t going to be hurt very much.

    Additionally, the investments in this bill are more than paid for. In fact, they go to pay down the deficit, because two senators have pared down the ways in which the dollars could be spent to help the rest of us.

    So there’s actually still an awful lot of good in this package, but you wouldn’t know it from headlines like you announced today from the New York Times or the Washington Post. Or, as you rightly said, over the summer, I think that the Progressive Caucus, Bernie Sanders, some of the lawmakers, even Joe Biden, have tried to make clear the ways in which the proposals in the bill will help most of us, and especially poor and low-income children and people of color, who are most adversely affected by the pandemic. But, as you say, the concentration has been on the price tag, when in reality the price tag is zero.

    JJ: I know you’ve been particularly interested in the fate of the child tax credit. And that Washington Post editorial lamented that Democrats might expand the child tax credit for perhaps only a single year. But in doing that, they said, “A long-term expansion should take precedence over a federal pre-kindergarten program or expanded housing aid.”

    We all know that choices have to be made, but I find that media sometimes just throw around this tough talk about what we have to jettison, and what’s in competition with what. And you’ve just indicated that in terms of cost, particularly when we’re talking about family-supporting measures, that invidiousness is just off base.

    Karen Dolan

    Karen Dolan: “These numbers, these programs, these policies, as far as we’ve gotten, all come…from decades of social movements.”

    KD: Yes, I think it is. I think it’s very harmful. I think, also, the reality around the child tax credits: That is indeed a tax cut for middle-class families. But it also reaches 27 million children who were not receiving any of the tax credit, or just partial tax credits. And that is what we call full refundability. And that has been made permanent. So that is a permanent benefit for the very poorest and low-income children among us, and that’s huge. That will have lifelong effects for them.

    And because of Joe Manchin, the extensions were only able to go for a year without work requirements or means-testing, in a way that would have been extremely harmful. So what we’ve got is one year of an extension of the expansion of the child tax credit, for everyone up through $150,000 a household. But the full refundability is permanent. So those are really very important.

    And this bill is not what we had hoped. I think progressive movements would say we needed more like $10 trillion, which we could have paid for. Because, remember, the revenue raises are permanent. And we easily could have paid for the $3.5 trillion. And we more than pay for this pared down $1.75 or $1.95. We have to look at it as a foot in the door, as a down payment, but one that is critical, one that will improve the lives, especially, of poor and low-income children. And that can’t be ignored.

    JJ: Let’s take a brief detour, because Joe Manchin did bring up this idea of work requirements. And I just wonder if we’re ever going to retire that narrative. Can you speak briefly to that whole storyline?

    KD: Yes, well, I think even this agreement, even as pared down as it is, has retired that, temporarily.

    JJ: Good.

    KD: So we lived to fight another day. And that’s why we only have one year of the extension of the full child tax credit expansion that we had under the American Rescue Plan. So that is without work requirements.

    It’s completely baseless. There’s no evidence, and never has been, that imposing a work requirement on receiving these benefits for the poorest children makes any difference in terms of workforce participation. So that is, many of the arguments, if not all—I would submit all—that have been posed by Manchin, obstructionist arguments, have no basis in reality. And he cannot produce credible research that points that he’s correct, whereas there is much evidence that he is incorrect.

    So that’s really, I think, where if the media insists on focusing on infighting among the Democratic Party, which I also don’t think is helpful nor truthful; it’s really all of the Democrats against Joe Manchin and Kyrsten Sinema. Also, not one Republican is for helping the American people. That’s also a message that gets lost. So talking about moderates versus progressives is not only unhelpful, it’s untrue.

    And there’s nothing moderate about Joe Manchin’s position, nor Kirsten Sinema’s position. They’re both extreme outliers when you look at the popularity of the proposals, from the billionaire’s tax to paid family leave. You have upwards of 75%, 80% in some cases, popularity among the voting public for these things. And some of them are bipartisan. So there’s nothing moderate about the opposition: It’s extreme. It’s fringe. And it’s two people. And the entire Republican Party, which also is never mentioned.

    JJ: Exactly. Well, extending that kind of distortion is when we hear media describe progressives who are holding the line and continuing to fight for measures that the public overwhelmingly supports, those people being described as “holding the bill hostage.”

    KD: That’s right. They are not the people who are obstructing it. And keep in mind the Congressional Progressive Caucus is about half of the Democratic Caucus, so about a hundred members of the Congressional Progressive Caucus. And they’re simply holding a principled position. There was a tacit agreement that both the physical infrastructure bill, the roads and bridges, and the so-called human infrastructure bill—the child care, the safety net, the hearing for our seniors, the home care for our seniors and disabled people—that these would all advance together. And they’re simply trying to make sure that there’s the best deal possible for the American people.

    JJ: Finally, the process unfolding before our eyes might seem to some to reflect a kind of brokenness of the connection promised by a democratic society, that the will of the people would be reflected in public policy. Here we see elected representatives cutting away at this, for what are being described as “political” reasons. And it makes it seem like a kind of funhouse mirror idea of how democracy should work.

    And I know that you think about the relationship of policymaking to social movements. It just seems critical to hold in mind right now that, as important as electoral politics are, and how we cannot cede that ground, they’re not the only arena for action. We don’t want people to say, oh, look how they’re not doing what we elected them to do, therefore I step out of the whole process. We have to see that la lucha continua, whatever happens this week.

    KD: Yes, I think that’s right. And I think it’s also when people really look at the bill and see how the Congressional Progressive Caucus, or the entire Democratic Caucus except for two members, isn’t holding the line simply for political reasons and their own political ambitions. These numbers, these programs, these policies, as far as we’ve gotten, all come from social movements. It’s from decades of social movements. We’re not getting everything that we’ve fought for. But we’re getting more than we’ve gotten in decades. And things like, although the reports are paid leave has been stripped out of the bill, the legislation hasn’t been written.

    JJ: Mmhm.

    KD: We still have power. People can still call their members of Congress. They can still tell their stories online. They can still do social media.

    It is we who push our elected representatives. It is social movements. It is getting out on the street. It is picking up the phone. That’s why we’ve gotten where we’ve gotten. And what is in this bill is the result of social movements, and it’s terrific.

    It is not everything it could have been or should have been. And we must build on it. But we can’t walk away from what we have just spent decades of blood, sweat and tears to get to this point.

    JJ: We’ve been speaking with Karen Dolan, director of the Criminalization of Race and Poverty Project at the Institute for Policy Studies. Thank you so much, Karen Dolan, for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    KD: Thank you, Janine. It’s been my pleasure.

     

    The post ‘There’s Still an Awful Lot of Good in This Package, but You Wouldn’t Know It From Headlines’ appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/11/02/theres-still-an-awful-lot-of-good-in-this-package-but-you-wouldnt-know-it-from-headlines/feed/ 0 246321
    Karen Dolan on Build Back Better, Tim Karr on Changing Facebook https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/29/karen-dolan-on-build-back-better-tim-karr-on-changing-facebook/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/29/karen-dolan-on-build-back-better-tim-karr-on-changing-facebook/#respond Fri, 29 Oct 2021 16:26:27 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9024601   This week on CounterSpin: An early October survey showed that while 60% of those polled knew that the Build Back Better legislative package was “$3.5 trillion,” only 10% had any sense of what was in it. That is many things, but preeminently a failure of news media—the demonstrably harmful effect of months of reporting […]

    The post Karen Dolan on Build Back Better, Tim Karr on Changing Facebook appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Joe Biden promoting the Build Back Better plan

    (cc photo: Adam Schultz / Biden for President)

    This week on CounterSpin: An early October survey showed that while 60% of those polled knew that the Build Back Better legislative package was “$3.5 trillion,” only 10% had any sense of what was in it. That is many things, but preeminently a failure of news media—the demonstrably harmful effect of months of reporting that never failed to note the presumed “costs” of a plan to address devastating national crises of healthcare, climate and infrastructure, but that only rarely troubled itself to explain in any detail what those plans would mean. Despite that, polls still show majorities of Americans supporting the plan. We talk about seeing and pushing through anti-democratic disinformation with Karen Dolan, director of the Criminalization of Race and Poverty project at the Institute for Policy Studies.

          CounterSpin211029Dolan.mp3

     

    NYT: Face It, Facebook Won’t Change Unless Advertisers Demand It

    New York Times (10/26/21)

    Also on the show: A New York Times column (by an editorial board member) begins: “Facebook has endured one of the most punishing stretches of corporate coverage in recent memory, exposing its immense power and blithe disregard for its deleterious impacts. But none of it really matters.” Headlined, “Face It, Facebook Won’t Change Unless Advertisers Demand It,” the piece is ostensibly meant as a sober assessment of the difficulty of exacting change from a company while it’s making money. But given the role of journalism in telling folks what is possible, the Times espousing the notion that Congress, Facebook whistleblower Frances Haugen and the press are all “but bumps in the road” reads less as a dry-eyed evaluation than a call to throw up our hands in the face of an unwinnable contest. Our guest understands media structure, yet still advocates for policy change. We hear from Tim Karr, senior director of strategy and communications at the group Free Press.

          CounterSpin211029Karr.mp3

     

    The post Karen Dolan on Build Back Better, Tim Karr on Changing Facebook appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by CounterSpin.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/29/karen-dolan-on-build-back-better-tim-karr-on-changing-facebook/feed/ 0 245502
    Journalists Misread Delayed Poll as Sticker Shock on Biden Bill https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/24/journalists-misread-delayed-poll-as-sticker-shock-on-biden-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/24/journalists-misread-delayed-poll-as-sticker-shock-on-biden-bill/#respond Sun, 24 Oct 2021 19:45:55 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9024477 Many in the media misinterpreted a Gallup poll’s meaning, in part because they didn’t recognize a peculiar characteristic of public opinion.

    The post Journalists Misread Delayed Poll as Sticker Shock on Biden Bill appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    Gallup: Americans Revert to Favoring Reduced Government Role

    Gallup (10/14/21) noted that “the reversal in opinions on government activity…may simply reflect a return to normal attitudes.”

    Last week, a Gallup poll reported that Americans had reverted to a long-time pattern of preferring fewer, rather than more, government efforts to deal with the nation’s problems. Many in the media misinterpreted the poll to mean the public has soured on President Joe Biden’s Build Back Better bill—in part because of the timing of the poll, and in part because they didn’t recognize a peculiar characteristic of public opinion.

    The Gallup poll reported that a majority of Americans, 52%, now feel that “the government is doing too many things that should be left to individuals and businesses,” while only 43% “want the government to do more to solve the country’s problems.”

    These figures are almost the reverse of last year’s numbers, when Gallup found 54% of Americans wanting government to do more, while 41% felt it was doing too much.

    This year’s poll was conducted September 1–17, during the very same period that a Fox News poll (9/12–15/21) and a Pew poll (9/13–19/21) found large margins of support (by 17 and 24 points, respectively) for the Democrats’ $3.5 trillion reconciliation package.

    On the surface, the Fox and Pew polls, as well as other polls about the same time, seem to undermine Gallup’s findings. Results of the Gallup poll, however, were not released until a month later (10/14/21), giving the false impression that it was a more recent development in public opinion.

    Swift media reaction

    WaPo: A new problem for Democrats: Americans suddenly want smaller government after all

    Catherine Rampell (Washington Post, 10/14/21) cited a CBS poll finding that “one of the few things Americans say they have heard about the bill is its huge size”—then ignored the fact that that poll found 54% in favor of that “huge” bill.

    Reaction in the media was swift. No fewer than four journalists from the Washington Post alone—Catherine Rampell (10/14/21), Philip Bump (10/15/21), Dan Balz (10/16/21) and Henry Olsen (10/18/21)—cited the poll as evidence that Biden’s Build Back Better legislation was now in trouble.

    Rampell wrote, for example: “Inconvenient but true: Americans want government to do less. Not more. Democrats cannot afford to just hand-wave this problem away.”

    And Bump argued that:

    those advocating for Biden to leverage his mandate to go big on spending need to recognize that the mandate has eroded, and that the large group of independents is skeptical of Biden and the broad strokes of his policy agenda, even if they endorse the specifics.

    The New York Times editorial board (10/16/21) lamented the poll result as evidence that support for the reconciliation package had declined:

    But it ought not to be dictated by the results of the latest public policy poll. Democrats must consider public opinion, of course, but they were ultimately elected to enact laws they regard as necessary. They must act in the public interest, not in the interest of public opinion.

    CNN‘s Chris Cillizza (10/14/21) announced bluntly that this was “bad news for Joe Biden.”

    Several conservative and right-wing media picked up on the CNN story, one site upping the ante with the headline that the Gallup poll was “VERY Bad News for Democrats.”

    Ideologically conservative, operationally liberal

    Political Beliefs of Americans, by Free and Cantril

    Political observers have been noting for half a century that while “most Americans agreed with broad statements of conservative principles… large majorities of Americans generally supported activist government.”

    The phenomenon revealed by these apparently conflicting polls—that Americans say in general they want less government spending, but actually support a wide range of increased government policies—was first noted more than a half century ago. As political scientist Alan Abramowitz (HuffPost, 12/2/10) described in 2010:

    More than 40 [now 50] years ago, two pioneers in the study of American public opinion, Lloyd Free and Hadley Cantril, observed that Americans tend to be ideological conservatives but operational liberals. In their groundbreaking 1967 book, The Political Beliefs of Americans, Free and Cantril found that even in the heyday of modern liberalism, the 1960s, most Americans agreed with broad statements of conservative principles.

    At the same time, however, when it came to specific programs addressing societal needs and problems, programs such as Medicare and federal aid to education, Free and Cantril found that large majorities of Americans generally supported activist government.

    Just two years ago, Pew (4/11/19) found a similar pattern. One question showed that Americans were evenly divided between support for small government with fewer services (47%), on the one hand, and bigger government, more services (47%) on the other.

    Another question asked respondents to indicate for a list of 13 different policy areas if they wanted to increase, decrease or keep spending the same. For all 13 items, more Americans supported an increase over a decrease. For ten of the items, the margin of support for an increase over a decrease ranged from 30 to 60 percentage points. Pew’s conclusion was an understatement: “Little Support for Reductions in Federal Spending.”

    And now, the Gallup poll, contrasting with the many other polls cited here, once again produces the pattern found by Free and Cantril.

    Timing the shift

    The problem for journalists in interpreting the Gallup poll was not only its delayed release. It was also the comparison with the 2020 poll. As Gallup noted:

    Last year marked only the second time in Gallup’s 29-year trend that at least half of Americans endorsed an active role for the government on this item. The other pro-government response came in the weeks after the 9/11 terror attacks, amid heightened concern about terrorism and a surge in trust in government.

    So, there was a “shift” between 2020 and 2021, but it’s not at all clear when that shift actually occurred. The journalists noted earlier in this article who cited the poll mostly attributed the shift to the public recently becoming aware of the $3.5 trillion reconciliation package. But that’s a leap.

    Gallup suggested that the unusual finding in 2020 was “likely a response to the coronavirus pandemic, and in particular to then-President Donald Trump’s approach to handling it.” The shift in opinion back to the norm, though, could well have occurred once Trump was out of office. Or anytime between September 2020 and September 2021.

    We can’t assume it was a recent shift, or that it had anything to do with Biden’s agenda.

    The recent spate of polls reaffirm an important lesson for those who follow public opinion: What Americans say they want in principle may not be what they’ll actually support in practice.

    The post Journalists Misread Delayed Poll as Sticker Shock on Biden Bill appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by David W. Moore.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/24/journalists-misread-delayed-poll-as-sticker-shock-on-biden-bill/feed/ 0 244082
    TV Reports on Manchin and Sinema Leave Out Their Financial Conflicts https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/22/tv-reports-on-manchin-and-sinema-leave-out-their-financial-conflicts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/22/tv-reports-on-manchin-and-sinema-leave-out-their-financial-conflicts/#respond Fri, 22 Oct 2021 19:24:33 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9024465 The financial conflicts that reinforce Sinema and Manchin's reluctance to vote for the reconciliation bill were almost completely ignored.

    The post TV Reports on Manchin and Sinema Leave Out Their Financial Conflicts appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    As the October 31 deadline to vote on the bipartisan infrastructure bill approaches, the media have made a project of examining senators Joe Manchin and Kyrsten Sinema’s opposition to the $3.5 trillion reconciliation bill, also known as the Build Back Better Act (FAIR.org, 10/6/01). Despite countless hours of coverage and conjecture about what might or might not get Manchin and Sinema to vote for the bill, the financial conflicts of interest that reinforce their reluctance to vote for the bill have been almost completely ignored. In a review of 21 relevant news programs, airing on October 3–4 on ABC, CBS, NBC, CNN and MSNBC, financial conflicts were discussed for only 45 seconds.

    In fact, some in the media have attempted to help insulate Manchin and Sinema against such observations. On ABC‘s Good Morning America (10/3/21), former Sen. Heidi Heitkamp said that “impugning motivation is harmful, and I’ve seen way too much of that as it relates to both Kyrsten Sinema and Joe Manchin, and I think that needs to ratchet down.”

    Katty Kay and Jake Sherman on MSNBC

    MSNBC‘s Katty Kay (Way Too Early, 10/4/21) to Jake Sherman: “If you had to pick a number between $1.5 trillion and $3.5 trillion, what would that number be?”

    The television news media have instead chosen to engage in repetitious conjecture about what price between $1.5–$3.5 trillion might be acceptable to which parties. (One should note, as journalists rarely did, that $3.5 trillion is the cost of both spending and tax cuts over 10 years—and represents approximately 1.25% of projected US GDP over that period.)

    Katty Kay of MSNBC’s Way Too Early (10/4/21) asked Punchbowl News‘ Jake Sherman, “If you had to pick a number between $1.5 trillion and $3.5 trillion, what would that number be?” Sherman replied:

    Two, that seems like a safe bet, maybe a touch above two. I don’t think they could go below two. I think just mentally that would be difficult for a lot of progressives.

    In interviews with progressives, anchors have taken to reminding them that their compromise is imminent. “Our correspondent says you’re going to have to settle for about $2 trillion. Is that an acceptable ceiling for you?” asked CBS‘s Margaret Brennan (Face the Nation, 10/3/21) of Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D.-N.Y.) Even more forcefully, NBC‘s Chuck Todd (Meet the Press, 10/3/21) asked Sen. Bernie Sanders  (I.-Vermont) if he has “accepted the fact that it’s not going to be $3.5 trillion.”

    Sinema’s donors

    SNL: Sinema and Biden

    Saturday Night Live sketch (10/2/21) featuring Cecily Strong as Sen. Kyrsten Sinema and James Austin Johnson as President Joe Biden.

    However, this bottomless appetite for numerical speculation was occasionally paused for dubious discussions about motives.  A Saturday Night Live sketch (10/2/21) about the reconciliation bill was repeated many times on the networks. The actor portraying Sinema in the sketch expressed that her opposition to the bill was because she was interested in chaos. This is not far from mainstream media’s actual diagnosis.

    On MSNBC, Time‘s Charlotte Alter (10/3/21) said that “it doesn’t even really seem to be about appeasing donors ahead of a reelection campaign, because she doesn’t have to run…for reelection for years.” Alter also proposed that Sinema’s obstinance may be a branding exercise to model herself more in the party-bucking image of the late Sen. John McCain (R.-Arizona), whose nickname was “the maverick.” But that hypothesis is not so compelling when one discusses her finances.

    On September 9, the Biden administration announced that the reconciliation bill would include a plan to lower drug prices by allowing Medicare to bargain with drug companies. Also on September 9, a nonprofit called Center Forward started running pro-Sinema TV, radio and digital ads; the group is funded by PhRMA, the powerful drug industry trade group that opposes the drug pricing provisions. Ten days later, Politico (9/19/21) reported that Sinema opposes the plan to lower drug prices—even though she ran in 2018 on bringing down the cost of medicine.

    Her commitment to pharmaceuticals can also be observed in the “personalized medicine” caucus she started. Personalized medicine is a medical model in which every aspect of care is custom. This can be absurdly expensive, which is why many pharmaceutical companies have invested in it. In February 2020, Sinema’s website (2/4/20) announced she had “launched the bipartisan, bicameral Personalized Medicine Caucus.” Pharmaceutical employees subsequently donated $35,000 to her campaign committee.

    NYT: Sinema, a holdout on the social spending bill, returns to Arizona for a doctor’s visit and a scheduled fund-raiser.

    The New York Times (10/1/21) noted that Sinema’s “fundraising arm held a Capitol Hill event with five business lobbying groups, many of which fiercely oppose the bill she is supposed to be negotiating.”

    Of course, her financial conflicts extend beyond pharmaceuticals. Sinema held a fundraiser on September 28 with five business lobbying groups, “many of which fiercely oppose the bill,” the New York Times (10/1/21) reported. This included lobbyists for construction interests and PACs for the supermarket industry. Members of these groups were invited to write checks between $1,000 and $5,800 to Sinema for Arizona. Despite its relevance, there were no reports of that fundraiser in any TV news episode reviewed.

    Briefly mentioned, however, was her October 2 PAC retreat for donors at a resort and spa in Phoenix, Arizona. Democratic strategist David Axelrod highlighted this in a tweet (10/2/21):

    Kind of takes some brass to blow out of DC for fundraisers back home in the middle of this and lecture everyone by press release on “trust.”

    Axelrod’s tweet was referenced on MSNBC’s American Voices With Alicia Menendez (10/3/21). Flashing the chiding tweet was the closest most shows came to discussing the relationship between Sinema’s donors and Sinema’s positions.

    This is typical of corporate media, because it is generally taboo to discuss details that naturally lead audiences to view certain politicians as corrupt or susceptible to the influence of money. Which is why the above accounts of her donors are untenable as news fodder.

    Manchin’s conflicts

    CNN: Kayakers Ambush Sen. Manchin's Boat

    CNN (10/3/21) seemed to have more willingness to show Joe Manchin on a big boat than hobnobbing with Big Oil.

    Likewise for Sen. Joe Manchin. The optics of constituents kayaking up to his houseboat seeking his submission is irresistible: Manchin, a powerful person enjoying the luxury of his wealth, stood on the back of his boat and essentially told constituents down below that they were asking for too much money. The clip was played and mocked on three of the 21 episodes. It was even used by CNN’s Newsroom With Jim Acosta (10/3/21) to kick off the discussion about the reconciliation bill. Acosta compared the scene to something from “Curb Your Enthusiasm or Veep.”

    For corporate media, this is  acceptable, because making someone appear buffoonish or out of touch is a thing apart from suggesting corruption. But those constituents in kayaks probably have a very good idea of why Manchin isn’t playing ball.

    Part of the Build Back Better Act addresses climate change. This includes things like tax credits for electric vehicles, and financial rewards and penalties for utility companies that meet or fall short on clean energy benchmarks. Manchin is heavily invested in companies that oppose these measures. Enersystems, a coal brokerage he founded that’s now run by his son, has earned him close to $5 million since he entered the Senate (FAIR.org, 7/27/21).

    Enersystems is responsible for waste coal services at the Grant Town Power plant, the only plant in West Virginia that burns waste coal fuel. Waste coal contains more mercury than regular coal, and puts out about half as much energy.

    Media could have highlighted Manchin’s remarks at The Road to Net Zero (6/8–10/21), a conference put on by the Edison Electric Institute, a utility industry lobbying group. The senator was interviewed there by the CEO of American Electric Power, a multi-state utility company that has criticized the reconciliation bill and previously donated $70,000 to Manchin. Manchin questioned the administration’s supposed rush to get off fossil fuels, saying, “I am concerned the timetable they are setting is a very aggressive timetable.”

    Unfortunately, this didn’t just show an out-of-touch politician in a big boat; it suggested how he was able to afford that boat, and how that impacts US policy, and thus earned no television coverage.

    Politicians part of the act

    MSNBC: Progressives Ascendant After Forcing Delay in Bipartisan Infrastructure Bill

    MSNBC‘s Ayman Mohyeldin (10/3/21) and Rep. Mondaire Jones shared a rare corporate media moment of linking conservative policy to special interest donations.

    Unfortunately, politicians share the media’s deference. In every interview with a politician but one, the lawmaker echoed the unsubstantiated narrative that everyone involved is acting in good faith. There is an obvious dissonance between this narrative and the fact of Sinema and Manchin’s fundraising.

    The lone exception in the period studied was Rep. Mondaire Jones (D.-N.Y.) speaking with MSNBC‘s Ayman Mohyeldin (10/3/21):

    Mondaire Jones: How much money are people getting from various industries? I’m proud not to take corporate money, and many of my colleagues don’t. And generally speaking, I come from a generation of folks who are just much more willing to do what’s right for the American people, rather than compromise our values for the sake of compromise, I would submit. I think Kyrsten Sinema can raise money without doing the kind of activities she’s been doing—fleeing Washington, for example, to have a PAC retreat in the midst of negotiations.

    Ayman Mohyeldin: Yeah, I was just going to say the same exact thing. New York Times reporting that she was back in Arizona this weekend to attend  fundraisers…. You got to wonder who her big interest, special interest donors are, and whether or not they have a stake in the outcome of these two bills.

    In the 21 programs reviewed, this was the single explicit exchange where fundraising was mentioned in conjunction with political positioning.

    Blame falls leftward

    Face the Nation AOC Brennan

    CBS‘s Margaret Brennan (Face the Nation, 10/3/21) to Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez: “Moderates…would say you’re not playing for the team when you hold one bill hostage.”

    While these shows neglected the question of donor influence, another narrative took its place. CNN‘s Pamela Brown (10/3/21) asked, “Are progressives willing to own it if President Biden’s agenda fails because they continue to hold the line here?” “These moderates in the House as well…would say you’re not playing for the team when you hold one bill hostage,” said Face the Nation‘s Brennan (10/3/21) to Ocasio-Cortez.

    This framing makes it appear as though the progressives are primarily responsible for holding up Biden’s agenda. In fact the opposite is true. The bipartisan infrastructure bill, which contains money for roads, bridges and other basic infrastructure, is broadly supported by the public. But the reconciliation bill contains much of the meat of Biden’s agenda, including Medicare expansion, universal pre-K and free community college.

    The reconciliation bill is supported by every Senate Democrat, with the exception of Manchin and Sinema. In an effort to prevent elements like the drug pricing provisions or clean energy incentives from being eliminated or reduced, House progressives have insisted on waiting to vote on the bipartisan infrastructure bill until after the reconciliation bill passes. What is crucial to understand is that the more than 90 members of the progressive caucus back both bills, while the only Democratic opposition to Biden’s two-part agenda consists of two senators and a small handful of representatives.

    Still, some journalists insist that it’s the progressives who are hurting the Democratic Party. In an exchange between Sanders and ABC‘s Jonathan Karl (This Week, 10/3/21), Karl suggested that progressive holdouts could cost the Democrats governorships:

    Terry McAuliffe, who, of course, is on the ballot running in Virginia, is saying that $3.5 trillion is simply too big. It’s going to hurt Democrats, and he thinks it might even hurt him in his own race in Virginia.

    Confusing viewers

    Much of the media have decided to take conservative opposition as a given, and treated progressive steadfastness as pointless delay. This is a manufactured narrative that could just as easily have been inverted.

    The millions of viewers who watch these shows are routinely deprived of the answers that these news shows purport to dispense. To air wall-to-wall coverage of Manchin and Sinema but conceal their donor relationships is to confuse and misinform audiences.

    The single greatest indicator of a politician’s vote is not branding, or the desires of constituents, but money. Reporting that doesn’t reflect this is doing a disservice.

    The post TV Reports on Manchin and Sinema Leave Out Their Financial Conflicts appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Spencer Snyder.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/22/tv-reports-on-manchin-and-sinema-leave-out-their-financial-conflicts/feed/ 0 243813
    Cherry-Picking Polls to Hide Public Support for Biden’s Spending Plan https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/15/cherry-picking-polls-to-hide-public-support-for-bidens-spending-plan/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/15/cherry-picking-polls-to-hide-public-support-for-bidens-spending-plan/#respond Fri, 15 Oct 2021 18:40:57 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9024337   Washington Post columnist Henry Olsen (9/30/21) lauded Sen. Joe Manchin’s opposition to the $3.5 trillion reconciliation package being considered by Congress, because Manchin “correctly reads public opinion.” That opinion, Olsen asserted, does not support the “radical change” that the reconciliation package, known as the Build Back Better bill, entails. His assertion is contradicted by […]

    The post Cherry-Picking Polls to Hide Public Support for Biden’s Spending Plan appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    WaPo: Joe Manchin delivers a dagger to the heart of the progressive cause

    Washington Post columnist Henry Olsen (9/30/21) says that Sen. Joe Manchin “correctly reads public opinion.” That’s more than you can say for Henry Olsen.

    Washington Post columnist Henry Olsen (9/30/21) lauded Sen. Joe Manchin’s opposition to the $3.5 trillion reconciliation package being considered by Congress, because Manchin “correctly reads public opinion.”

    That opinion, Olsen asserted, does not support the “radical change” that the reconciliation package, known as the Build Back Better bill, entails.

    His assertion is contradicted by his own newspaper’s poll, conducted with ABC News (8/29/21–9/1/21), which reported that Americans support the reconciliation package 53% to 41%.

    That finding was similar to several other polls, as shown below. (To see results of the Pew poll, go here; for the other polls, go to PollingReport.com.)

     

    Pollster

    (Date)

    Question Wording Favor

    %

    Oppose

    %

    Unsure

    %

     

    Pew

    (9/13–19/21)

    A proposed reconciliation package contains about $3.5 trillion in funding over the next ten years for universal pre-K education, expanding Medicare, reducing carbon emissions, and other projects. From what you’ve seen and heard, do you favor or oppose this package?  

    49

     

     

    25

     

     

    26

     

     

    Fox News (9/12–15/21)

     

    Do you favor or oppose the bill being considered by the US House that would allocate an additional three and a half trillion dollars toward infrastructure, including spending to address climate change, healthcare and childcare?  

    56

     

     

    39

     

     

    5

     

     

    WP/ABC

    (8/29/21–9/1/21)

    From what you’ve heard or read about it, do you support or oppose the federal government spending three and a half trillion dollars on new or expanded social programs, educational assistance, and programs to address climate change?  

    53

     

     

    41

     

     

    6

     

     

    Suffolk University/ USA Today

    (8/19–23/21)

    As you may know, Congress is considering a $3.5 trillion bill intended to fund prekindergarten, community college tuition, expanded Medicare benefits, clean energy and other “soft” infrastructure. Do you support or oppose this bill?  

    52

     

     

    39

     

     

    9

     

     

    The margins in favor of the reconciliation package vary from a low of 12 points in the WP/ABC poll, to 24 points in the Pew poll. (Pew finds a larger “unsure” percentage, because, unlike other polls, it does not press that group to make a decision.)

    Overall, the picture is uniformly favorable toward the bill. Wrote Gallup’s Frank Newport (8/13/21) in a review of public opinion: “Existing survey evidence shows majority support for the new bill, and this level of support appears to be fairly robust across samples and ways of asking about it.”

    Majority support is also shown when the public is asked about individual provisions of the plan.

    Evading the question

    Washington Post: Biden 306, Trump 232

    Contrary to Henry Olsen, 2020 was not a “50/50 election.” (Graphic: Washington Post)

    But Olsen cited none of those polls.

    Instead, he argued that the 2020 election results were so close, they didn’t give Biden a mandate for the type of change he is seeking. “A 50/50 election never augurs radical change.”

    Aside from the fact that Biden won the popular vote by 7 million votes, or more than 4 percentage points, that’s a weak argument. Election results hardly produce clear indications of what policies the public prefers. The advantage of polls is that they ask people directly what they want. And, as shown above, the polls have shown widespread support for the $3.5 trillion bill.

    Olsen also contended that Biden’s approval rating had been declining recently. “This erosion,” he wrote, “began just as public discussion of the reconciliation bill started to grow,” implying that the rating decline occurred because people don’t like the reconciliation bill.

    However, the opposite conclusion can be drawn. CNN’s Harry Enten speculates that Biden’s falling ratings are caused by inaction on the reconciliation bill, not the provisions of the bill, which apparently most Americans like.

    Rather than speculate on what Americans might like based on presidential approval ratings, however, one can refer to polls that ask people directly about the policies themselves.

    Red herring argument

    Henry Olsen

    Henry Olsen

    The only poll Olsen turns to that asked the public directly about the BBB package was an Echelon Insights poll, conducted August 13–18. And that poll also showed substantial public support for the reconciliation package. When asked, “Based on what you have heard, do you support or oppose the $3.5 trillion budget resolution currently being debated in Congress?” 45% said they were in favor, 29% opposed and 26% unsure.

    The margin in favor of the resolution was 16 percentage points (45%–29%), smaller than the margin found by Pew (24 points), but comparable to the margin found by Fox (17 points), and higher than the margins found by WP/ABC (12 points) and Suffolk University/USA Today (13 points).

    But Olsen did not cite the results of this question.

    Instead, he referred to the next question in that poll, which asks if the budget plan is “spending too much money, too little, or just the right amount?”

    The results there show that 40% overall say the amount was “too much.” Olsen didn’t even report that figure. He singled out the response of independents, which showed 49% saying too much.

    But what can one make of that result? According to the poll question Olsen cited, 38% of Americans overall don’t think the amount is too much, and another 22% are unsure.

    The fact remains, according to the previous question in the same poll, respondents favored the plan by 16 percentage points.

    Olsen didn’t share that information with his readers. Instead, he presented a red herring argument about how many independents think the plan costs too much—all the while ignoring all the other polls showing support for the plan.


    ACTION ALERT: You can send a message to the Washington Post at letters@washpost.com, or via Twitter @washingtonpost. Please remember that respectful communication is the most effective.

     

    The post Cherry-Picking Polls to Hide Public Support for Biden’s Spending Plan appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/15/cherry-picking-polls-to-hide-public-support-for-bidens-spending-plan/feed/ 0 241973
    Media Praise ‘Mavericks’ for Blocking Aid to American People https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/06/media-praise-mavericks-for-blocking-aid-to-american-people/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/06/media-praise-mavericks-for-blocking-aid-to-american-people/#respond Wed, 06 Oct 2021 20:58:07 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9024212 Corporate media disparaged attempts by left-leaning Democrats to stay the course on two bills as divisive behavior by fringe actors.

    The post Media Praise ‘Mavericks’ for Blocking Aid to American People appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    President Joe Biden’s agenda, once seemingly on life support after a small coterie of right-wing Democrats announced they’d oppose pairing a social spending bill with infrastructure legislation, has a new lease on life—thanks to progressive Democrats who held the line.

    But you wouldn’t know that from corporate media, which disparaged attempts by left-leaning Democrats in Congress to stay the course on the two bills as the divisive behavior of fringe actors. “Take the win,” a frustrated and bemused Chris Cuomo (CNN, 9/30/21) told progressives.

    Meanwhile, the obstructionists, who number less than a dozen in the House and Senate, are treated as the lawmakers with their ear to the ground, bold truth tellers who know what the American people really want. Corporate media values—bipartisanship, the “maverick” title, “moderation,” militarism and more—are regularly deployed to maintain the status quo. That they’re only regularly used to describe the actions of center-right and right-wing politicians shouldn’t be surprising.

    Quirky critic of ‘woke politics’

    An Axios story (10/1/21) on Arizona Sen. Kyrsten Sinema began with “free advice for anyone trying to bully the wine-drinking triathlete into supporting President Biden’s $3.5 trillion budget bill: She doesn’t play by Washington’s rules—and she’s prepared to walk away.”

    Chief among the impedimentary lawmakers receiving a spitshine on their image is Arizona Sen. Kyrsten Sinema. Perhaps the biggest roadblock to a deal, Sinema is portrayed in corporate media as a quirky, party-bucking, principled politician—rather than the reflexive obstructionist she’s proven to be in negotiations (Vanity Fair, 9/30/21).

    That lack of purpose in talks with party leaders is paired with her cozying up to big corporate donors. As Sinema has stifled the social spending legislation, she’s reaped the benefits, taking in hundreds of thousands from the financial, insurance and real estate sectors, according to Open Secrets. She held a fundraiser on September 27 (New York Times, 9/27/21) with industry lobbyists opposed to the tax burden they fear would be a byproduct of the bill, and another high-dollar affair on October 2 with her PAC’s major donors (New York Times, 10/1/21).

    When it comes to reworking Sinema’s image, Axios (10/1/21) has been one of the worst offenders, setting up the senator to readers as someone you might think has left-leaning politics, but doesn’t:

    Progressives could be forgiven for presuming that Sinema, 45, the first openly bisexual member of Congress, who’s easy to spot in her trademark sleeveless dresses, wry wigs and acrylic glasses, would share their woke politics.

    They’ve been befuddled, and increasingly enraged, when she behaves more like the late Republican Sen. John McCain, another Arizonan who didn’t mind challenging party orthodoxies.

    AZCentral: Here's what Democrats need to understand about Sen. Kyrsten Sinema

    According to the Arizona Republic‘s Laurie Roberts (9/30/21), “Sinema’s brand is all about being a party unto her own.”

    Gannett’s Arizona Republic (online as AZCentral), a conservative paper in Sinema’s home state, has argued in favor of the embattled senator even as her refusal to negotiate in real terms about what she wants frustrates Democratic colleagues. In an opinion piece aiming to recast Sinema’s aimless intransigence as evidence of her independence, columnist Laurie Roberts (9/30/21) claimed that by killing Biden’s agenda, Sinema was acting to save it:

    She has charted a middle course, in search of solutions that have bipartisan support. Sort of like a certain president who now is pressing for the entire wish list of progressive proposals.

    And Bill Maher, the increasingly right-leaning host of HBO’s Real Time (10/1/21), threw his support behind Sinema as well as West Virginia Sen. Joe Manchin, sneering that the two senators “might have their thumb more on the pulse on the average Democrat in the country” than the 95-member Congressional Progressive Caucus does.

    A popular agenda

    Yet the average Democrat—and the average American—supports the full Biden agenda over just passing the infrastructure bill (USA Today, 8/25/21; Daily Beast, 9/16/21). The social spending legislation enjoys majority support of Americans, and doesn’t gain in popularity when it’s pared down (HuffPost, 8/18/21), as centrists have suggested.

    The infrastructure bill is popular, too; the $1 trillion spending on roads, broadband and other essential infrastructure has strong support. But spending on expanding existing, popular programs that saw their stock rise during the uncertainty of the pandemic offers the public a different vision of the United States than has been given over the past five decades. The social spending bill is “poised to be the most far-reaching federal investment since FDR’s New Deal or LBJ’s Great Society,” as the Associated Press (9/15/21) put it.

    Polling in Sinema’s Arizona shows that voters there have soured on the senator. She’s seen her popularity nosedive with independents and Democrats. A slight bump with Republicans won’t be enough to save her when she’s up for re-election if the numbers hold; GOP voters vote GOP.

    Sinema’s policy decisions, including her blocking of Biden’s agenda, are not the priorities of her base. Around 30% of Arizona Democrats view her unfavorably, with 56% supporting her. Nearly 80% of Arizona Democrats have a favorable view of fellow Democratic Sen. Mark Kelly (The Hill, 9/30/21).

    Unreasonable lefties

    Time: Joe Biden's Agenda Uncertain After Progressives Force Delay on Infrastructure Vote

    Time‘s headline (10/1/21) put the blame on progressives for blocking Joe Biden’s agenda–though the article acknowledges that the social spending bill “forms the core of Biden’s domestic policy agenda.”

    Nevertheless, the framing of the conflict between progressives and the president on the one side and a small group of center-right Democrats on the other consistently plays the former against one another, making the left-leaning caucus members appear unreasonable. Time (10/1/21) deployed just this tactic, characterizing progressives as hostage-taking zealots whose actions could “sink the bipartisan infrastructure bill.” Biden’s agenda was described as “uncertain” due to progressive resistance in the piece’s headline (“Joe Biden’s Agenda Uncertain After Progressives Force Delay on Infrastructure Vote”) and opening paragraphs; it’s only in the ninth paragraph, well down the page, that Time admitted that “the progressive position is in line with Biden’s agenda.”

    By contrast, the New York Times‘ Jonathan Martin and Jonathan Weisman (10/4/21) described the small cohort of moderates threatening to hold up the bill in glowing terms, in an article ominously headlined, “Biden Throws In With Left, Leaving His Agenda in Doubt.” As Rep. Ilhan Omar communications director Jeremy Slevin noted, Martin and Weisman describe the nine right-wing Democrats threatening to torpedo the agenda in the House as “well-liked” members, who express their “hope” that the president can “bridge” the divide.

    On the other hand, Omar and the other progressives working to support the Biden agenda are presented as stopping the infrastructure bill from going through—in one two-sentence paragraph, Martin and Weisman use “blockade” twice and “blockaders” once to describe the left-leaning members.

    Cost, not benefits

    The spending bill’s price tag—$3.5 trillion—is frequently used in corporate media coverage as a catch-all for the omnibus bill. The New York Times has used the topline number in headlines repeatedly (8/23/21, 8/24/21, 9/9/21, 9/11/21, 9/18/21, to cite a smattering of examples), focusing perception of the bill primarily on its cost rather than its benefits.

    It’s a clever rhetorical trick that obfuscates the purposes of social spending, and it’s notably not the approach corporate media take to military spending, which, if maintained at current levels, would amount to nearly $8 trillion over the same time period. And it’s not used for the infrastructure bill, which is instead primarily referred to as bipartisan, as though its concessions to Republicans (Washington Post, 6/3/21)—notably ruling out raising corporate taxes, after cutting the bill’s $2.2 trillion price tag in half—are a virtue.

    Times reporter Weisman courted controversy at the end of September for his Twitter editorializing of the back and forth between the two sides, declaring it was time to take center-right Democratic Sen. Joe Manchin “at his word” and give up on moving the $3.5 trillion bill forward.

    “The expansive social policy and climate bill once envisioned isn’t going to happen,” Weisman said. “Here’s what could. Look at extending temporary provisions in the American Rescue Plan with some climate to assuage progressives.”


    The point of “climate,” of course, is not to “assuage progressives”—but to keep humanity from destroying the climate.


     

    The post Media Praise ‘Mavericks’ for Blocking Aid to American People appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Eoin Higgins.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/10/06/media-praise-mavericks-for-blocking-aid-to-american-people/feed/ 0 239729
    David Moore on Manchin’s Conflict, Jim Naureckas on Covid and Media https://www.radiofree.org/2021/09/24/david-moore-on-manchins-conflict-jim-naureckas-on-covid-and-media/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/09/24/david-moore-on-manchins-conflict-jim-naureckas-on-covid-and-media/#respond Fri, 24 Sep 2021 15:09:16 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9024018 "We’re going to have a representative of fossil fuel interests crafting the policy that reduces our emissions from fossil fuels."

    The post David Moore on Manchin’s Conflict, Jim Naureckas on Covid and Media appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

          CounterSpin210924Guestname.mp3

     

    Sludge: Manchin Bailed Out Plant That Pays Millions to His Family’s Coal Company

    Sludge (8/6/21)

    This week on CounterSpin: A recent New York Times story about Senate Energy Committee chair Joe Manchin’s conflicts of interest quoted a source saying, “It says something fascinating about our politics that we’re going to have a representative of fossil fuel interests crafting the policy that reduces our emissions from fossil fuels.” A lot of people would say that’s less fascinating than horrific, particularly in the context of a new global survey of people between 16 and 25 that found that more than half of them believe “humanity is doomed”—and that 58% of young people said their governments are betraying them. You can’t talk about why we can’t get to realistic climate policy without talking about that betrayal, and its roots. Which is why we talk about Joe Manchin with David Moore, co-founder of investigative news outlet Sludge.

          CounterSpin210924Moore.mp3

     

    Also on the show: We get an update on media coverage of Covid with FAIR’s editor, Jim Naureckas.

          CounterSpin210924Naureckas.mp3

     

    Plus Janine Jackson takes a quick look at recent media coverage of Rahm Emanuel’s ambassadorial nomination.

          CounterSpin210924Banter.mp3

     

    The post David Moore on Manchin’s Conflict, Jim Naureckas on Covid and Media appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/09/24/david-moore-on-manchins-conflict-jim-naureckas-on-covid-and-media/feed/ 0 236792
    Why Jake Tapper Never Asks How We Pay for War https://www.radiofree.org/2021/09/20/why-jake-tapper-never-asks-how-we-pay-for-war/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/09/20/why-jake-tapper-never-asks-how-we-pay-for-war/#respond Mon, 20 Sep 2021 19:38:24 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9023946 High-profile media brands like Jake Tapper simply do not view the expense of empire maintenance to be subject to critical analysis.

    The post Why Jake Tapper Never Asks How We Pay for War appeared first on FAIR.

    ]]>
     

    CNN: The $40 trillion question Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez couldn’t answer

    Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez’s response to Jake Tapper that her proposals would save far more than they cost was ruled to be not an answer at all by Tapper’s colleague Chris Cillizza (CNN, 9/18/18).

    Jake Tappers’ career is inextricably linked to America’s so-called longest running war. His travels there and book–turned–Hollywood film detailing his exploits are how, more than any other beat, he polished his reputation as a Serious Journalist, and not just another pretty suit behind a desk. He’s reported dozens of stories on the conflict, done book events, tweeted nonstop for years about the war in Afghanistan, and done scores of segments on the conflict, including a two-hour primetime special earlier this month lamenting “what went wrong” in the war for the United States.

    The second-most essential beat to cementing his gravitas has been his Very Serious concern about debts and deficits—i.e. grilling liberals, leftists and progressives for over 20 years about “how they will pay for” broad social welfare programs.

    Suspiciously, these two primary Tapper beats have never crossed paths. Which is strange, because, as a new Brown University study shows, the post-9/11 wars have cost the Pentagon $14 trillion, one-third to one-half of which went to US military contractors. That’s between $4.6 trillion and $7 trillion, just on contractors for the post-9/11 wars. In one year alone—fiscal year 2020—the study finds that Lockheed Martin received $75 billion in contracts from the Pentagon.

    The Afghanistan War was itself a huge expense. A separate study from Brown University finds, “Since invading Afghanistan in 2001, the United States has spent $2.3 trillion on the war, which includes operations in both Afghanistan and Pakistan.”

    So what has Tapper highlighted to show the risks of runaway government spending? Let us examine items that have compelled Tapper to ask, “How will we pay for it?”

    Here he is grilling New York Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez over several of the items, all in one clip:

     

    ITT: There Have Been 21 Debate Questions About Paying For Social Programs, Zero About Paying For War

    Sarah Lazare (In These Times3/2/20) noted that debate moderators “are saying we can afford policies that spread militarism—but not those that protect human life.”

    Tapper has used some of the biggest platforms possible to engage in this line of questioning. As Column contributor Sarah Lazare noted in March 2020, “Night one of the second democratic debate, CNN’s Jake Tapper asked four questions in close succession, grilling candidates on how Medicare for All would be paid for.” In just one example, he said to then-candidate Sen. Elizabeth Warren, “At the last debate, you said you’re, quote, ​‘with Bernie on Medicare for All’”:

    ​Now, Senator Sanders has said that people in the middle class will pay more in taxes to help pay for Medicare for all, though that will be offset by the elimination of insurance premiums and other costs. Are you also, quote, ​”with Bernie” on Medicare for All when it comes to raising taxes on middle-class Americans to pay for it?

    As Lazare noted in the piece, there were zero questions asked to the centrist Democrats on stage how they planned on “paying for” their support for large military budgets and wars.

    Now, let us examine the items Tapper has never asked they would pay for it (costs over 20 years)

    • Annual 700+ billion defense budgets us (~$14 trillion)
    • Iraq War ($2 trillion)
    • Afghanistan War ($2.3 trillion)
    • ISIS war ($14 billion)
    • The CIA ($300 billion)

    An audit of transcripts, tweets and articles authored by Tapper reveals no questions over deficit concerns for these big ticket items.

    The reason for this glaring inconsistency is that high-profile media brands like Tapper simply do not view the expense of empire maintenance to be debatable, contestable or subject to critical analysis. This expense just is—like gravity or the universal constant. These institutions exist, always have existed, and are beyond the realm of politics. Whereas programs that house the homeless, feed the poor, combat climate chaos, provide childcare, educate people, build roads and schools, and provide jobs for the working class are “expensive” “progressive” “wishlists” with “price tags” that need to be constantly justified item by item to the half cent.

    Never mind that, year after year, the Pentagon can’t complete a basic audit and can’t account for $21 trillion in spending. The real drivers of our deficit are dreaded liberal programs. The banal and unremarkable war machine whose bloat and borderline criminal waste is rubber stamped every year by Congress and corporate media alike requires no such interrogation.

    Along with schlocky, mugging Troop Defender, Concerned Deficit Scold is how Tapper rose to prominence at CNN. While at ABC News, Tapper would make presser spectacles out of his Deep Worry over the national debt, grilling Obama press secretary Jay Carney over the Obama Stimulus (a stimulus we now know was way too small), while engaging in facile—and incorrect—comparison to family budgets borrowed directly from Pete Peterson front groups:

     

     

    So where is the deep concern after this high-profile recent study found that we spent $14 trillion on wars since 2001? What about these costs which we will “pass down to our children”? Where is Tapper hauling in war hawks lobbying to stay in Afghanistan, like senators Lindsey Graham and Bob Menendez, demanding they explain “how they will pay for it”? No such spectacle will be forthcoming, because that which props up the unquestionable axioms of US militarism is simply taken for granted, while that which provides for the poor, unhoused and vulnerable is a “wishlist” in need of a rigorous 10-point program detailing a plan for complete fiscal solvency.


    This post originally appeared on Column (9/14/21), a media criticism and political analysis Substack newsletter written by Adam Johnson with contributions from Sarah Lazare.

     

    The post Why Jake Tapper Never Asks How We Pay for War appeared first on FAIR.


    This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Adam Johnson.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/09/20/why-jake-tapper-never-asks-how-we-pay-for-war/feed/ 0 235627
    FAST now says it needs to delay Samoa’s Parliament convening https://www.radiofree.org/2021/07/29/fast-now-says-it-needs-to-delay-samoas-parliament-convening/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/07/29/fast-now-says-it-needs-to-delay-samoas-parliament-convening/#respond Thu, 29 Jul 2021 21:40:42 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=61153 RNZ Pacific

    After previous calls for the Samoan Parliament to convene so a national budget can be passed, the ruling FAST Party now says there is no real need to rush to convene Parliament.

    Prime Minister Fiame Naomi Mata’afa said last Saturday that Parliament would meet “in the first opportunity” this week to pass a budget.

    The Samoa Observer reports Prime Minister Fiame Naomi Mata’afa as saying cabinet needs more time to screen and review the financial arrangements used by the former government of Tuilaepa Sailele Malielegaoi and his Human Rights Protection Party (HRPP).

    The Ministry of Finance was instructed to prepare a budget using an article that allows 25 percent of the previous budget to operate until a full budget is prepared for Parliament to pass.

    The Tuilaepa government had been using this provision since the 2020/2021 budget ended on 30 June which amounts to about 220 million tālā.

    According to Fiame, wiith 25 percent, there is a figure, but there is a lack of supporting details even though the processes seemed to be followed for payments under the Emergency Budget.

    She explained that the Ministry of Finance wanted cabinet to use the budget they have prepared and announced by the caretaker prime minister last month.

    “We still want our own Budget to deliver what the FAST Party has in place in its manifesto,” said Fiamē.

    Fiame said Parliament would likely meet in September.

    Meanwhile, a FAST spokesperson says the legitimacy of the HRPP candidates who were not sworn-in within the required 45 days is still being determined as it has never happened before.

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/07/29/fast-now-says-it-needs-to-delay-samoas-parliament-convening/feed/ 0 222155
    NZ budget 2021: What does $108m mean for Pasifika ‘wellbeing’? https://www.radiofree.org/2021/05/20/nz-budget-2021-what-does-108m-mean-for-pasifika-wellbeing/ https://www.radiofree.org/2021/05/20/nz-budget-2021-what-does-108m-mean-for-pasifika-wellbeing/#respond Thu, 20 May 2021 13:44:59 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=58037 By Sela Jane Hopgood, RNZ Pacific journalist

    In the New Zealand 2021 Budget, a big investment of NZ$108 million has been signalled to support the wellbeing of the Pacific population through the rebuild and recovery from the covid-19 pandemic.

    Pacific Peoples Minister ‘Aupito William Sio said this was a significant investment for Pacific communities who have been hard-hit by the pandemic in the past year.

    “With the Pacific Aotearoa Lalanga Fou Goals as a guide, the Pacific package puts a strong focus on Pacific wellbeing and continues the government’s commitment to ensuring that Pacific peoples are leading this work to achieve confident, thriving, prosperous and resilient communities,” he said.

    “Budget 2021 makes this possible through tailored business, health and education initiatives that bolster the vital holistic work Pacific communities are already doing across the country.”

    The $108 million Pacific package is made up of the following:

    • $99.6 million new operating funding
    • $660,000 new capital funding from the Budget 2021 allowances and the Covid-19 Response and Recovery Fund (CRRF).
    • $7.8 million in operating funding is repurposed from existing funding in Vote Education.
    Pacific Peoples Minister 'Aupito William Sio
    Pacific Peoples Minister ‘Aupito William Sio … initiatives that bolster the vital holistic work Pacific communities. Image: Samuel Rillstone/RNZ

    The package includes:

    • $30.3 million boost to assist the Tupu Aotearoa programme to support approximately 7500 Pacific peoples into employment, training, and education across Aotearoa New Zealand, funded from the CRRF.
    • Investing $6.6 million to support establishing the Pacific Wellbeing Strategy – a cross-government initiative that will develop ways to measure Pacific wellbeing across government work programmes and initiatives.
    • Supporting Pacific businesses through the impacts of covid-19 with $16.2 million for business support services, funded from the CRRF.
    • $20.8 million supporting Pacific bilingual and immersion education in the schooling system, made up of $12.4 million of new operating funding and $644,000 of new capital funding from Budget 2021 allowances, with $7.8 million of repurposed funding from Vote Education.
    • $5 million operating funding and $16,000 capital funding to deliver sustained professional learning and development to embed Tapasā as a tool to address social inclusion in the education sector.
    • $5.1 million for the development of two new Pacific language subjects, gagana Tokelau and vagahau Niue as NCEA Achievement Standards subjects.
    Lynfield College on the Niue stage at Polyfest 2021
    Lynfield College on the Niue stage at Polyfest 2021 … Budget funding for development of two new NCEA Pacific languages, gagana Tokelau and vagahau Niue. Image: Mabel Muller/RNZ

    This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


    This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2021/05/20/nz-budget-2021-what-does-108m-mean-for-pasifika-wellbeing/feed/ 0 202519
    ‘Stay clear’ of PNG’s political crisis, Marape tells public https://www.radiofree.org/2020/11/19/stay-clear-of-pngs-political-crisis-marape-tells-public/ https://www.radiofree.org/2020/11/19/stay-clear-of-pngs-political-crisis-marape-tells-public/#respond Thu, 19 Nov 2020 04:05:49 +0000 https://www.radiofree.org/?p=118622

    By Johnny Blades, RNZ Pacific journalist

    Papua New Guinea’s prime minister has urged the public to not get caught up in the country’s political crisis which has ended up in the courts.

    James Marape’s government appears to have staved off a vote of no confidence by quickly passing the budget on Tuesday and adjourning parliament to April.

    But the move is being challenged in court by the opposition which gained a majority last week following a mass defection of government MPs.

    The opposition leader, Belden Namah, with a majority of MPs behind him, moved a motion to adjourn Parliament to December 1 when a grace period on motions of no-confidence lapses.

    But Parliament Speaker Job Pomat subsequently ruled that the motion had been “wrongly entertained” by his deputy and recalled the House.

    Former prime minister Peter O’Neill, one of the opposition MPs leading the charge to remove Marape, said the Speaker’s ruling was flawed.

    “Flawed in the sense that in every occasion over the past 45 years only the members of Parliament can adjourn Parliament by a resolution and a motion on the floor, when in fact Belden Namah on Friday moved the motion to suspend standing orders.

    57 members ‘gave authority’
    “When you suspend standing orders that means the standing orders do not apply. Fifty-seven members gave him the authority. That is why he moved the motion,” he said.

    In Tuesday’s sitting, Parliament achieved a quorum with less than half of all MPs present, when the government passed its budget, without the usual required debate.

    O’Neill’s legal team has now filed a court application challenging the legality of the sitting, which the opposition was largely unable to attend.

    “So Marape and the Speaker are making a mockery of the parliamentary system, the mandate of our people, the democracy that we have enjoyed for the last 45 years.”

    While this was happening, the embattled prime minister summoned public service departmental heads, including Police Commissioner and Defence Commander, for a special briefing.

    The message he gave them was repeated to the public at large, blaming the current crisis on MPs who he said were prepared to indulge in “cut-throat politics” at a time when PNG is faced by steep challenges caused by covid-19.

    “So let me at this time encourage our citizens, don’t you worry about politics that is taking place. Remain focussed at your job, leave politics to politicians, get on your life. Public servants and members of our disciplinary services are asaked to remain above politics, focus on your job.”

    Marape dismisses O’Neill’s claims
    Marape dismissed O’Neill’s claim that Tuesday’s adjournment was illegal. He said just because the opposition decided to leave the capital and form a camp in remote Vanimo, it did not mean government services must come to a standstill.

    “Mr O’Neill and his friends in the opposite side of the house are reminded that we will play by the rule, play fair and square. And if they’re not satisfied, well the court is the place where we can meet. In the meantime, government business runs, we run a government.”

    Marape had the option of adjourning Parliament to June, within the last 12 months of parliament’s five-year term, when it’s not possible to lodge a no-confidence motion. But by instead opting for April, the prime minister has given the opposition a late chance at tabling such a motion.

    “I would have played nasty and asked the leader of government business to push Parliament into a safer time when there was no vote-of-no-confidence opportunity, for instance after July 30th, 2021,” Marape explained.

    “But we are not stupid running government. We are mindful that Parliament is a place of forum. The reason why we pushed Parliament to April was to ensure the programmes of early 2021 take place – 2021 is an important preparation year for the 2022 national elections.”

    With last week’s political gambit frustrated, O’Neill has kept up the attack on his former close ally’s government.

    “We are hearing today that they are printing cheques in the Treasury, printing cheques in the Finance Department to use to politically bribe members of Parliament. This has never happened before in the history of our country.”

    Similar accusations flying
    Similar accusations are flying in the other direction. The Finance Minister Rainbo Paita revealed that on the eve of his exit from government, Bulolo MP Sam Basil – who was deputy prime minister and National Planning Minister until he led the defection last week – oversaw a large payout from the Supplementary Budget prepared to meet the towering challenges of an economy rocked by the pandemic.

    According to Paita, the funds allegedly went to MPs in Basil’s United Labour Party.

    Meanwhile, one of the defectors, William Duma, the incumbent Minister of Commerce and Industry, is now back showing support for Marape again.

    Last Friday, after leaving government, the MP cited concerns about government handling of the economy, yet the bulk of his United Resources Party remained with the government. Now he is back claiming last week was a mistake made while confused over the opposition’s move.

    Duma has form, having switched sides more than once during the lobbying that preceded the ousting of Peter O’Neill as prime minister last year.

    The Mt Hagen MP’s inveterate flip-flopping means there’s no guarantee he would not change sides again, another sign that the political situation in Port Moresby remains fluid.

    This article is republished by the Pacific Media Centre under a partnership agreement with RNZ.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2020/11/19/stay-clear-of-pngs-political-crisis-marape-tells-public/feed/ 0 118622
    Opposition claims PNG budget vote a ‘mockery’, plans legal challenge https://www.radiofree.org/2020/11/18/opposition-claims-png-budget-vote-a-mockery-plans-legal-challenge/ https://www.radiofree.org/2020/11/18/opposition-claims-png-budget-vote-a-mockery-plans-legal-challenge/#respond Wed, 18 Nov 2020 23:14:40 +0000 https://www.radiofree.org/?p=118429

    Pacific Media Centre Newsdesk

    The Papua New Guinea Parliament has passed the 2021 national budget with more than half of MPs – including the opposition – absent from the chamber, assuming it had been adjourned to December 1.

    The opposition says it is challenging the sitting in the Supreme Court.

    Opposition lawyers could not obtain a stay order from the court in time to stop the Parliament sitting on Tuesday morning, reports The National.

    Speaker Job Pomat, after reviewing the laws governing the calling of meetings of the House on Monday, ruled that a motion passed last Friday to adjourn to next month, was “wrongly entertained”.

    He therefore recalled Parliament on Tuesday, catching the Opposition MPs who left last weekend for a camp in Vanimo, West Sepik, by surprise. They were still in Vanimo.

    Prime Minister James Marape, backed by 50 MPs including himself, welcomed the passing of the 2021 national budget saying the work of governing the nation must continue.

    “It is time to finish the year and pass the budget for a new year. I am still PM leading this government and have been leading for 18 months. It hasn’t been easy,” he said.

    Debts ‘we are trying to clean’
    “There are debts we are trying to clean and get loans that have less interest like the Australians have given.

    “The IMF, ADB, World Bank, Japan are assisting this country. We are trying to clean the debts we have incurred over the last couple of years.”

    The National 181120
    “Crisis in the House” … The National newspaper’s coverage of the budget vote. Image: PMC screenshot

    Lawyer Phillip Tabuchi of Young and Williams lawyers representing the opposition said an application for a stay order had to be withdrawn around midday as Parliament was already sitting by then.

    Justice Derek Hartshorn in the Supreme Court agreed to withdraw the application and had the substantive matter adjourned to the registry.

    Tabuchi said: “The application for injunction to restrain this morning’s (yesterday) sitting had to be withdrawn because the events had overtaken the application. We will reconsider legal avenues and take it from there.”

    Former PM Peter O’Neill described the Parliament sitting as “illegal”.

    “Last Friday, 57 members voted to adjourn Parliament to Dec 1. If the government has the numbers they can pass the budget on December 1,” he said.

    “Unfortunately, they knew that more than half of MPs are out of Port Moresby and not able to attend Parliament.”

    ‘Why the rush?’
    He accused Marape and Pomat of “making a mockery of our parliamentary system, the mandates of our people, the democracy that they have enjoyed for the last 45 years.”

    He said any MP could move a motion for parliament to be adjourned.

    “In fact (last Friday), Belden Namah moved a motion to suspend Standing Orders. When you do that, it means Standing Orders do not apply,” he said.

    “The 57 members gave him (Namah) that authority to suspend standing orders.”

    O’Neill said they were redrafting the application to the court to declare the sitting illegal.

    “Today they (government) were trying to pass a budget which is not printed. It is illegal. Why the rush?”

    The Pacific Media Centre republishes The National articles with permission.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2020/11/18/opposition-claims-png-budget-vote-a-mockery-plans-legal-challenge/feed/ 0 118429
    Graham Davis: Fiji’s great ‘crash through or crash’ budget is counting on a tourism bubble https://www.radiofree.org/2020/07/19/graham-davis-fijis-great-crash-through-or-crash-budget-is-counting-on-a-tourism-bubble/ https://www.radiofree.org/2020/07/19/graham-davis-fijis-great-crash-through-or-crash-budget-is-counting-on-a-tourism-bubble/#respond Sun, 19 Jul 2020 00:21:54 +0000 https://www.radiofree.org/2020/07/19/graham-davis-fijis-great-crash-through-or-crash-budget-is-counting-on-a-tourism-bubble/ With the collapse of the celebrated “Bainimarama Boom” that the Attorney-General trumpeted just a year ago, Aiyaz Sayed-Khaiyum is using foreign loans for a massive stimulus effort to try to dig Fiji out of the covid crisis. Image: Fiji Govt

    COMMENTARY: By Graham Davis in Sydney

    The man with his hands on the tiller of the Fijian economy, Aiyaz Sayed-Khaiyum, has always been a great admirer of Gough Whitlam’s “crash through or crash” approach to leadership and never more so than with the F$3.67 billion budget he announced on Friday night.

    Allowing for a sobering 21.7 percent contraction of the economy, the budget provides for a $2 billion deficit and takes government debt to $8.2 billion, a debt-to-GDP ratio of 83.4 percent compared to the 53 percent the government inherited when it took office in 2006.

    With the collapse of the celebrated “Bainimarama Boom” that the Attorney-General trumpeted just a year ago, he is using foreign loans for a massive stimulus effort to try to dig Fiji out of the covid crisis, including tax cuts and the abolition or reduction of a raft of government charges.

    READ MORE: Fiji announces $3.67bn budget

    Whether the private sector and the rest of the community responds remains to be seen.

    But it amounts to a massive gamble because any overall recovery is specifically predicated on the resuscitation of Fiji’s biggest revenue earner – tourism – through a Pacific Bula Bubble with Australia and New Zealand.

    We know the Attorney-General is betting everything on the Bubble happening this year because the Reserve Bank is predicting a post-covid revival of 14.1 percent economic growth next year specifically on the assumption that visitors will return in numbers before then.

    The unspoken aspect of the debate around the budget is the fate of the national carrier, Fiji Airways, that has been given half a billion dollars worth of government loan guarantees to keep it afloat and is also banking on being back in the air by the end of the year.

    Saving the Fijian economy
    Will there be sufficient bums on aircraft seats and bodies in hotel beds by Christmas to save the Fijian economy and its national airline?

    The country lives in hope but with the covid pandemic raging in the two most populous Australian states and the NZ government reluctant to institute its own bubble, the average Fijian wouldn’t want to bet their bure on it.

    An estimated 115,000 people have already lost their jobs in the private sector but foreign loans are so far keeping the country’s 27,000 civil servants at work, with pay cuts at the top of government but no job losses in the public sector.

    Civil servants are now the backbone of the general economy, with everyone else relying on them to “spend, spend, spend”, though with money that Fiji doesn’t have and loans that will have to be repaid.

    Crash through or crash it is.

    Graham Davis spent six years as the Fijian government’s principal communications adviser from 2012 to 2018. He also worked on Fiji’s global climate and oceans campaign, including its presidency of COP23.

    Print Friendly, PDF & Email
    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2020/07/19/graham-davis-fijis-great-crash-through-or-crash-budget-is-counting-on-a-tourism-bubble/feed/ 0 75306
    ‘It’s Not Doing a Service to Anyone but Defense Contractors’ – CounterSpin interview with Mandy Smithberger on the military budget https://www.radiofree.org/2020/03/13/its-not-doing-a-service-to-anyone-but-defense-contractors-counterspin-interview-with-mandy-smithberger-on-the-military-budget/ https://www.radiofree.org/2020/03/13/its-not-doing-a-service-to-anyone-but-defense-contractors-counterspin-interview-with-mandy-smithberger-on-the-military-budget/#respond Fri, 13 Mar 2020 20:22:31 +0000 https://www.radiofree.org/2020/03/13/its-not-doing-a-service-to-anyone-but-defense-contractors-counterspin-interview-with-mandy-smithberger-on-the-military-budget/ Janine Jackson interviewed the Center for Defense Information’s Mandy Smithberger about the military budget for the March 6, 2020, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

    MP3 Link

    In These Times (3/2/20)

    Janine Jackson:  Over the course of ten debates, Sarah Lazare reports for In These Times, Democratic presidential candidates were asked 21 questions about how they would pay for proposed agenda items like Medicare for All, climate mitigation and free college—and zero questions about how they would pay for war.

    What is it that drives corporate media to credit as merely reasonable demands for a thorough accounting of the relative pennies spent on, for instance, food stamps for low-income families, while literal billions are blithely signed over to the Pentagon with hardly a blink? And any who challenge that spending are vilified as unconcerned about “national security,” or simply left out of the conversation.  We even hear talk of underfunding of what we know to be the planet’s largest war-making power by far.

    It’s hard to have an informed debate when the information you’d need to have it is studiously hidden from view. Mandy Smithberger is the director of the Center for Defense Information at the Project on Government Oversight. She joins us now by phone from Washington, DC. Welcome to CounterSpin, Mandy Smithberger.

    MS: Thank you so much for having me.

    JJ: Untethered, I guess, is the word that comes to mind for Pentagon spending. It’s not just the mind-boggling amount of money; it’s the opacity about what happens to it. But let’s start with the mind-boggling money, which your recent article breaks down. Keeping in mind, as you do, that the costs—the financial costs—of war are much more than even what we see in the Pentagon budget. But get us laypeople situated, if you would, in these big numbers. What are we talking about?

    MS: Yeah, it is a really mind-boggling number. Even when you look at what we consider to be the traditional Pentagon budget, I think it’s hard for any of us to picture what $740 billion looks like. And within that account, only $69 billion of that is for “war spending,” even though, as you dig into those numbers, you find out that, oh, a lot of this is for enduring requirements, or for sustaining weapons systems. And it’s been used by the Department of Defense as a mechanism for continuing to increase their budget, on already pretty high caps on their spending.

    And then the numbers grow even larger when you look at how much we spend on nuclear weapons, so that’s another $27.6 billion. There’s the cost of intelligence, that’s $85 billion. Obviously, when people come home from war, we need to pay for the care of our veterans, so that’s another $239 billion.  And you look at what we pay for Homeland Security, the interest on the debt for all of the spending, and it all comes to $1.2 trillion.

    JJ: Trillion. That’s amazing. And, for purposes of scale, like when you stand a person next to a whale: in 2008, the UN said that $30 billion a year could end hunger on the planet.

    I think also, when we think about Pentagon money, besides just the scale of it, a lot of what comes to mind is waste. A lot of us remember that $600-some toilet seat, and cost overruns. And that does sort of lead into accountability, but I wonder if I could just ask you, that waste is still very much a thing, too?

    MS: Oh, absolutely. Yeah, now we have the $10,000 toilet seats; they’ve kept up with inflation. We’re still seeing that kind of waste. We have weapons systems like the F-35 that are going to cost us $1.5 trillion over the lifetime of that program. We’ve had a number of IT systems that have cost billions of dollars, with really nothing to show for it. And it’s a bipartisan problem, with people on both sides of the aisle just wanting to throw more money at these problems, and not really hold anyone accountable.

    I think what’s most troubling to me about that is that it doesn’t help our men and women in uniform if they have weapons systems that aren’t safe, that aren’t going to be effective. So not having accountability in this space has led to horrific disasters, and it’s really not doing a service to anyone but defense contractors to give them free rein over our taxpayer dollars.

    POGO: Creating a National Insecurity State

    Project on Government Oversight (2/2/20)

    JJ: And one of the things that you spell out very clearly in the work that you’ve done on this, including for TomDispatch.com, is that there’s this incentive to build new things, even when older things might work better, because it’s such a pork barrel thing. You want to build a new shiny machine, even if that’s not the one that is necessarily going to protect servicepeople, or function in a way that we need.

    So let’s talk about what is behind that lack of accountability. It’s absolutely bipartisan. I think of it as almost like Murder on the Orient Express—you know, “everybody did it”—so it can be hard to trace it back to one smoke-filled room. I think it was Bill Hartung who introduced me to the idea of spreading weapons-building among various states, and then you’ve got buy-in from lots of congressmembers, right?

    MS: Absolutely, yeah, we refer to that. Chuck Spinney came up with the idea of politically engineering a program so it would be too big to fail. So you see that problem through spreading out of jobs, through campaign contributions. Something else that we are particularly concerned about is the revolving door that occurs between Pentagon officials and defense contractors and congressional staff. We did an investigation and we found that, for the top 20 contractors, 90% of the former officials that they were hiring, it wasn’t for their expertise, it was for influence-peddling. So they were trying to use, not what they know, but who they know, to increase their company’s profits.

    JJ: I want to talk about that revolving door some more, particularly as it involves media. But I did want to pick up on one thing that I found really interesting, because I’d heard this story of, OK, you want to build a plane, you have the engine made in one state and you have, you know, the body made in another state, and then you have that support, because it’s jobs in these various states. But one of the things that you reveal is that that’s not even appeasing the public; the public are not even in favor of that kind of political engineering, right?

    MS: Absolutely. So there’s been recent polling showing that the public really wants our money to be spent for what we need for our national security, but not for this kind of crony capitalism of spreading out these contracts, so that there isn’t any kind of accountability. So I think it’s one of the many areas where you have a corrupt Washington way of thinking that’s not really reflecting what the public wants our democracy to reflect.

    JJ: Yeah, and it’s sort of written off, as well, “they’re appeasing their constituents.” But it turns out they aren’t even doing that.

    Mandy Smithberger

    Mandy Smithberger: “The pundits that are put on television have connections to defense contractors, and they see their stocks going up as there’s talk about ‘will America go to war again?’”

    Speaking of that revolving door, I’m sure you remember, and listeners may remember, back in 2008, David Barstow at the New York Times broke a story about how the Pentagon was sending this coterie of retired generals out to act as “message force multipliers” in support of the Iraq War. And they got special briefings with the Pentagon, they got talking points, and then they would go on national TV and deliver information, even information that they themselves suspected was false or was exaggerated. I mean, that revolving door, it’s not just the cronyism between defense contractors and defense policymakers; it affects the public’s ability to know, as well.

    MS: Absolutely. It’s horrific propaganda, when you don’t have transparency about those kinds of connections. And we’ve had debates about the strike in Iran, debates about Syria; over and over, the pundits that are put on television have connections to defense contractors, and they see their stocks going up as there’s talk about “will America go to war again?”

    JJ: You note that every time the Pentagon budget comes up, first of all, it is a bipartisan thing. People just, Oh, it’s a billion here, a billion there, it’s almost a one-day story, you know? It happens and it goes through. But there are complaints; and it seems that every time there’s a budget, the Pentagon says there’s going to be “reforms,” they’re going to do some things differently. But there’s a reason to question what they put forward as reforms, and then I’d also like to ask you, what would real reform look like?

    MS: So unfortunately, a lot of the reforms that we’re seeing be put forward would actually reduce oversight and accountability. That tends to be the convenient place to make cuts:  “We don’t need so many auditors and people testing these systems to see if they work. I mean, that’s overhead.”

    JJ: Right.

    MS: But really, those are key accountability tools. So a lot of the real reform that you’d want to see is, how do you increase competition? It all starts with cutting the budget; there’s not going to be real accountability and better management unless the Pentagon understands that they don’t have limitless resources, and that they have to be good stewards of what they receive. And we need to clean up our ethics laws so that we don’t have this revolving door, we need to have regular contract audits, and more transparency over what’s happening at the Department of Defense generally. My colleague, Jason Paladino, did an investigation, just showing all the ways that this administration, like every one before it, has increased secrecy, and that’s really to the public detriment.

    JJ: And I guess a role for journalists, investigative journalists, as well.

    MS: Absolutely.

    JJ: We’ve been speaking with Mandy Smithberger. She is director of the Center for Defense Information at the Project on Government Oversight. Work, including her recent article, “Creating a National Insecurity State: Spending more, Seeing Less,” can be found, as well as on POGO.org, on TomDispatch.com and TheNation.com. Mandy Smithberger, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

    MS: Thank you so much for having me.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2020/03/13/its-not-doing-a-service-to-anyone-but-defense-contractors-counterspin-interview-with-mandy-smithberger-on-the-military-budget/feed/ 0 37549
    Only Sanders Can Challenge Trump’s Predatory Budget Plan https://www.radiofree.org/2020/02/13/only-sanders-can-challenge-trumps-predatory-budget-plan/ https://www.radiofree.org/2020/02/13/only-sanders-can-challenge-trumps-predatory-budget-plan/#respond Thu, 13 Feb 2020 21:21:17 +0000 https://www.radiofree.org/2020/02/13/only-sanders-can-challenge-trumps-predatory-budget-plan/

    Amid the Democratic presidential primaries and the impeachment fallout, the Trump administration released its budget proposal for 2021 Monday. Though most of it has no chance of becoming a reality, it does provide a terrifying preview of what we can expect from Trump if he wins another four years in office this November. The latest Trump budget is nothing less than a declaration of war on the poor and working-class people of America — many of whom voted for the president four years ago under the mistaken belief that he would help reverse the steady erosion of their communities after decades of neoliberal economic policies.

    Over the past three years, Trump has done virtually nothing to help the so-called “forgotten men and women” of America. His latest $4.8 trillion budget would inflict tremendous pain on working families, with deep cuts on everything from student loan assistance, affordable housing, education, food stamps, Medicare, Medicaid and even Social Security. Conversely, the budget calls for further increases in the bloated and wasteful military budget (plus border enforcement), and it would extend the Republican tax cuts that have so far saved corporate America and the 1% billions of dollars (thus adding trillions to the federal debt despite cuts in social spending).

    The billionaire president’s budget is a class war manifesto targeting the most vulnerable Americans while providing his fellow billionaires and millionaires more tax breaks and the military industrial complex more lavish defense contracts. It is hard to exaggerate just how extreme Trump’s budget really is and how blatantly it targets the poorest families in America. The fact that working people are the most likely to be recruited into fighting the forever wars started by Washington elites who consider the poor fodder for their wars and would never send their own children (or fight themselves) simply shows how much contempt Trump and his fellow Republicans have for the majority of Americans.

    In a “sane and functioning American republic,” Esquire’s Charles Pierce rightly observed, this budget would be “political suicide.” But clearly we don’t live in a “sane and functioning” republic, and the fact that Trump thinks he can release such an extreme budget during an election year shows that he is supremely confident in his political powers. With the Democrats currently battling each other for the presidential nomination, and with the anointed front-runner collapsing before our eyes, Trump seems to believe that his reelection is all but guaranteed. He may be right, of course. As John Cassidy remarked in The New Yorker, “If the Democrats can’t take advantage of this election-year horror script, they really are in trouble.”

    Trump’s budget should be a gift to Democrats, but if they end up nominating someone like the ex-Republican billionaire Mike Bloomberg or the McKinsey neoliberal Pete Buttigieg as their candidate, going after Trump for waging a class war on working people will become very difficult. The obvious candidate who can authentically challenge Trump and call out his class war on working families is, of course, Sen. Bernie Sanders, who has replaced Joe Biden as the Democratic frontrunner. Sanders gave us a preview of how he would go after Trump in a statement responding to the president’s absurd budget on Monday.

    “The Trump Budget for 2021 is a budget of, by, and for the 1 percent,” declared Sanders, calling the president a liar for saying that he would never cut programs like Medicare and Social Security, which are now on the cutting block. “The Trump Budget does not see a problem in this country it cannot somehow make worse. Unless, of course, the problem is that the wealthiest families and largest corporations in this country haven’t gotten enough tax cuts, or that the military-industrial complex isn’t raking in profits that are obscene enough.”

    Condemning the Trump budget as an “immoral document,” the senator called it “proof that this president did not care about the ‘forgotten men and women’ he said he would help — it appears he is too busy enriching his billionaire friends.”

    By contrast to Sanders’ no-holds-barred approach and powerful denunciation of neoliberal orthodoxy, his fellow Democratic contender Pete Buttigieg has recently embraced the discredited politics of austerity, suggesting that Democrats should become the new party of “fiscal responsibility” in light of the massive Republican deficits. Buttigieg’s “sudden pivot to deficit-hawk politics,” remarks Alexander Sammon in The American Prospect, “is deeply misguided and evinces a profound misunderstanding of recent political and economic history.” To nominate someone like Buttigieg — who is the youngest candidate in the race, but one of the most backward-looking — would be to let Trump off the hook. Mayor Pete, like Biden and Bloomberg, would be the perfect foil for Trump, who employs a kind cultural class politics that exploits lower-class resentment against the “winners” of globalization, i.e., the professional class (represented by candidates like Buttigieg and Bloomberg).

    Discrediting and defanging Trump’s politics of cultural resentment will require a candidate like Sanders, who offers a genuine economic critique and political alternative to both Trump’s brand of reactionary neoliberalism and the “progressive neoliberalism” of his current opponents. The Democratic Party has a rare opportunity to nominate a transformative candidate who could usher in a new post-neoliberal era. To blow it on someone like Bloomberg would be a colossal mistake — one the party might never recover from.

    Conor Lynch

    Conor Lynch is a freelance writer and journalist living in New York. His work has appeared in The Week, Salon, The New Republic, and other publications. You can follow him on Twitter…


    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2020/02/13/only-sanders-can-challenge-trumps-predatory-budget-plan/feed/ 0 25069
    Budget Deficit to Break $1 Trillion Despite Strong Economy https://www.radiofree.org/2020/01/28/budget-deficit-to-break-1-trillion-despite-strong-economy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2020/01/28/budget-deficit-to-break-1-trillion-despite-strong-economy/#respond Tue, 28 Jan 2020 20:27:59 +0000 https://www.radiofree.org/2020/01/28/budget-deficit-to-break-1-trillion-despite-strong-economy/

    WASHINGTON — An annual congressional report says the U.S. budget deficit is likely to burst through the symbolic $1 trillion barrier this year despite a healthy economy.

    Tuesday’s Congressional Budget Office report follows a burst of new spending last year and the repeal in December of several taxes used to help finance the Affordable Care Act. Those have combined to deepen the government’s deficit spiral well on into the future, with trillion-dollar deficits likely for as far as the eye can see.

    The annual CBO update of the government’s economic and fiscal health estimates a $1 trillion deficit for the ongoing fiscal year, which would bring the red ink above $1 trillion for the first time since 2012, when former President Barack Obama capped four consecutive years of $1 trillion-plus budget deficits. The government, slated to spend $4.6 trillion this year, would have to borrow 22 cents of every dollar it spends.

    Most economists say the most relevant way to look at the deficit is to measure it against the size of the economy, with deficits at 3 percent or so of gross domestic product seen as sustainable. The latest report shows deficits averaging 4.8 percent of GDP over the course of the coming decade.

    “As a result of those deficits, federal debt would rise each year, reaching a percentage of the nation’s output that is unprecedented in U.S. history,” the CBO report says.

    Obama’s deficits came as the U.S. economy recovered from the deep recession of 2007-2009. The return of trillion-dollar deficit now comes as the economy is humming on all cylinders, with the CBO predicting that the jobless rate nationwide will average below 4 percent through at least 2022. The growth rate is predicted to average 2.2 percent this year.

    “The economy’s performance makes the large and growing deficit all the more noteworthy,” said CBO Director Phillip Swagel. “Changes in fiscal policy must be made to address the budget situation, because our debt is growing on an unsustainable path.”

    The government reported a $984 billion deficit for the 2019 budget year. Cumulative deficits over the coming decade are expected to total $13 trillion — a total that would have gone higher save for CBO’s belief that yields on Treasury notes will remain unusually low as the government refinances its $23 trillion debt.

    The recent surge in the deficit has followed passage of the 2017 Trump tax bill, which has failed to pay for itself with additional economic growth and revenues as promised by administration figures like Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin. The surge in deficits also follows a final rewrite last summer of a failed 2011 budget deal to increase spending of both defense and domestic programs.

    Divided government isn’t helping the deficit picture as the Democratic-controlled House led the way in repealing $377 billion worth of “Obamacare” tax hikes, including a so-called Cadillac tax on high-cost health plans. House Speaker Nancy Pelosi, D-Calif., was also a driving force in last summer’s budget accord, which is scored at adding $1.7 trillion to the deficit over the coming decade.

    CBO holds a traditional view of economists that debt that’s too high has a “crowding out” effect on private sector investment in the economy and can lead to higher interest rates and maybe even a European-style debt crisis. But interest rates have remained low despite CBO’s alarms and more liberal economists hold a much more dovish view of the effects of higher deficits on the economy.

    The CBO report landed amid an intensifying presidential campaign in which concerns about the deficit are not really an issue. President Donald Trump has promised to leave Social Security pensions and Medicare benefits off the table as his administration seeks ways to blunt the political impact of the eye-popping deficit figures.

    The administration’s budget is being released next month but is likely to be largely ignored, especially as election-year politics take over.

    ]]>
    https://www.radiofree.org/2020/01/28/budget-deficit-to-break-1-trillion-despite-strong-economy/feed/ 0 17600